Professional Documents
Culture Documents
(Oxford Library of Psychology) Susan D. Clayton-The Oxford Handbook of Environmental and Conservation Psychology-Oxford University Press (2012) PDF
(Oxford Library of Psychology) Susan D. Clayton-The Oxford Handbook of Environmental and Conservation Psychology-Oxford University Press (2012) PDF
Peter E. Nathan
AREA EDITORS:
Clinical Psychology
David H. Barlow
Cognitive Neuroscience
Kevin N. Ochsner and Stephen M. Kosslyn
Cognitive Psychology
Daniel Reisberg
Counseling Psychology
Elizabeth M. Altmaier and Jo-Ida C. Hansen
Developmental Psychology
Philip David Zelazo
Health Psychology
Howard S. Friedman
History of Psychology
Page 1 of 2
Page 2 of 2
[UNTITLED]
(p. iv)
Oxford University Press is a department of the University of Oxford. It furthers the
Universitys objective
of excellence in research, scholarship, and education by publishing worldwide.
OxfordNew York
AucklandCape TownDar es SalaamHong KongKarachi
Kuala LumpurMadridMelbourneMexico CityNairobi
New DelhiShanghaiTaipeiToronto
With offices in
ArgentinaAustriaBrazilChileCzech RepublicFranceGreece
GuatemalaHungaryItalyJapanPolandPortugalSingapore
South KoreaSwitzerlandThailandTurkeyUkraineVietnam
Oxford is a registered trademark of Oxford University Press in the UK and certain
other countries.
Published in the United States of America by
Oxford University Press
198 Madison Avenue, New York, NY 10016
Oxford University Press 2012
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system,
or transmitted, in any form or by any means,without the prior permission in writing
of Oxford
UniversityPress, or as expressly permitted by law, by license, or under terms
agreed with the
appropriatereproduction rights organization. Inquiries concerning reproduction
outside the scope
of the above shouldbe sent to the Rights Department, Oxford University Press, at
the address above.
You must not circulate this work in any other form
Page 1 of 2
[UNTITLED]
and you must impose this same condition on any acquirer.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
The Oxford handbook of environmental and conservation psychology / edited by
Susan Clayton.
p. cm.(Oxford library of psychology)
ISBN 9780199733026
1. Nature Psychological aspects. 2. Environmental psychology. 3. Human
ecology Psychological
aspects. I. Clayton, Susan D., 1960BF353.5.N37O94 2012
333.7019dc23
2012020048
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Page 2 of 2
[UNTITLED]
(p. v) This volume is dedicated to Gabriel Moser, who died in April 2011 shortly after
completing work on his chapter for the handbook. Moser was an important figure in
environmental psychology, particularly in Europe, where he was the first professor of
environmental psychology in France. He had a direct influence in training and supporting
young researchers and new groups in environmental psychology in many countries. In
addition, he strengthened the institutional framework for environmental psychology,
particularly through his efforts on behalf of the International Association for PeopleEnvironment Studies, of which he was president from 2004 to 2008. His many books and
papers, which emphasized the urban environment, will have a lasting impact on the field and
his warmth and generosity will be remembered by the many colleagues who also consider
themselves his friends. (p. vi)
Page 1 of 1
Page 1 of 3
Page 2 of 3
Page 1 of 1
Contributors
Contributors
Susana Alves
Faculty of Engineering & ArchitectureDepartment of Architecture
Okan niversitesi
Tuzla KampsAkfrat-Tuzla/Istanbul, Turkey
Clare L. Barratt
Department of Psychology
Texas A&M University
College Station, TX
Page 1 of 14
Contributors
Brittany Bloodhart
Department of Psychology
The Pennsylvania State University
University Park, PA
Marino Bonaiuto
CIRPA (Centro Interuniversitario di Ricerca in Psicologia Ambientale)
Dipartimento di Psicologia dei Processi di Sviluppo e Socializzazione
Sapienza Universit di Roma
Rome, Italy
Mirilia Bonnes
Department of Social and Developmental Psychology
Sapienza University of Rome
Centre for Inter-University Research in Environmental Psychology
Rome, Italy
Barbara B. Brown
Department of Psychology
University of Utah
Salt Lake City, UT
Page 2 of 14
Contributors
Giuseppe Carrus
Department of Cultural and Educational Studies, University of Roma Tre
Centre for Inter-University Research in Environmental Psychology
Rome, Italy
Louise Chawla
College of Architecture and Planning
University of Colorado
Boulder, CO
Charlotte Clark
Centre for Psychiatry
Wolfson Institute of Preventive Medicine
Barts and the London School of Medicine and Dentistry
London, UK
Susan D. Clayton
Department of Psychology
The College of Wooster
Wooster, OH
Page 3 of 14
Contributors
Vctor Corral-Verdugo
Division de Ciencias Sociales
University of Sonora at Hermosillo
Los Portales Hermosillo, Mexico
Rosanna Crombie
Centre for Psychiatry
Wolfson Institute of Preventive Medicine
Barts and the London School of Medicine and Dentistry
London, UK
Judith I. M. de Groot
School of Design, Engineering & Computing
Bournemouth University
Dorset, UK
Victoria Derr
College of Architecture and Planning
University of Colorado
Boulder, CO
Page 4 of 14
Contributors
Blanca S. Fraijo-Sing
Division de Ciencias Sociales
University of Sonora at Hermosillo
Los Portales Hermosillo, Mexico
Martha Fras-Armenta
Division de Ciencias Sociales
University of Sonora at Hermosillo
Los Portales Hermosillo, Mexico
Robert Gifford
Department of Psychology
University of Victoria
Victoria, Canada
Page 5 of 14
Contributors
Ferdinando Fornara
Department of Psychology
University of Cagliari
CIRPA (Centre for Inter-University Research on Environmental Psychology)
Cagliari, Italy
Harry Heft
Department of Psychology
Denison University
Granville, OH
Florian G. Kaiser
Department of Social Psychology
Otto-von-Guericke University
Magdeburg, Germany
Elisabeth Kals
Professor of Social and Organizational Psychology
The Catholic University Eichsttt-Ingolstadt
Eichsttt, Germany
Page 6 of 14
Contributors
Kalevi M. Korpela
School of Social Sciences and Humanities
University of Tampere
Tampere, Finland
Michael K. Lindell
Hazard Reduction & Recovery Center
Texas A&M University
College Station, TX
Ezra M. Markowitz
Environmental Studies Program
Department of Psychology
University of Oregon
Eugene, OR
Melinda S. Merrick
Department of Geography and Environmental Studies
Northeastern Illinois University
Chicago, IL
Page 7 of 14
Contributors
Taciano L. Milfont
Centre for Applied Cross-Cultural Research
School of Psychology
Victoria University of Wellington
Wellington, New Zealand
Gabriel Moser
Institute of Psychology
University of Paris Descartes
LPS, University of Aix-en-Provence
Paris, France
Markus M. Mller
The Catholic University Eichsttt-Ingolstadt
Eichsttt, Germany
Page 8 of 14
Contributors
Blair E. Nancarrow
The Fenner School of Environment and Society
The Australian National University
Ellery Crescent, Acton, Australia
Susan Opotow
John Jay College and The Graduate Center
City University of New York
New York, NY
Kimberly A. Rollings
Department of Design and Environmental Analysis
Cornell University
Ithaca, NY
Keith C. Russell
Department of Physical Education, Health and Recreation
Western Washington University
Bellingham, WA
Page 9 of 14
Contributors
Charles D. Samuelson
Department of Psychology
Texas A&M University
College Station, TX
Carol D. Saunders
Department of Environmental Studies
Antioch University New England
Keene, NH
Massimiliano Scopelliti
LUMSA University
Centre for Inter-University Research in Environmental Psychology
Rome, Italy
Page 10 of 14
Contributors
P. Wesley Schultz
Department of Psychology
California State University, San Marcos
San Marcos, CA
Henk Staats
Instituut Psychologie, Sociale en Organisatiepsychologie
Leiden University
Leiden, The Netherlands
Stephen A. Stansfeld
Centre for Psychiatry
Wolfson Institute of Preventive Medicine
Barts and the London School of Medicine and Dentistry
London, UK
Linda Steg
Faculty of Behavioural and Social Sciences
University of Groningen
Groningen, The Netherlands
Page 11 of 14
Contributors
Peter Suedfeld
Department of Psychology
University of British Columbia
Vancouver, BC, Canada
Reuven Sussman
Department of Psychology
University of Victoria
Victoria, Canada
Janet K. Swim
Department of Psychology
The Pennsylvania State University
University Park, PA
Geoffrey J. Syme
Centre for Planning
Edith Cowan University
Perth, Australia
Page 12 of 14
Contributors
Csar O. Tapia-Fonllem
Division de Ciencias Sociales
University of Sonora at Hermosillo
Los Portales Hermosillo, Mexico
Jennifer A. Veitch
NRC Construction
Ottawa, Ontario, Canada
Joanne Vining
Department of Natural Resources and Environmental Sciences
University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign
Champaign, IL
Rotraut Walden
Institute for Psychology
University in Koblenz
Koblenz, Germany
Page 13 of 14
Contributors
Nancy M. Wells
Department of Design and Environmental Analysis
Cornell University
Ithaca, NY
Richard E. Wener
Department of Humanities and Social Sciences
Polytechnic Institute of New York University
New York, NY
Carol M. Werner
Department of Psychology
University of Utah
Salt Lake City, UT (p. xvi)
Page 14 of 14
Introduction
It is probably fair to say that in the mind of the general public, psychologists focus more on what happens inside a
persons headthe mental and neurological processes that constitute experience and determine behaviorthan
on what is happening in the surrounding environment. But from the fields earliest origins, psychologists have
recognized, and emphasized, the ways in which people are affected by their environments. Many studies have
documented ways in which the social environment is influential, through parental socialization, conformity to social
norms, and so on; it is a fundamental tenet of social psychology that we should consider external causes of
behavior before making attributions to internal dispositions. Equally important is the physical environment. In
addition to providing the materials that either promote or compromise well-being, it shapes behavior through
reinforcement contingencies as well as through affordancesalthough as Gifford (1976) has noted, people are
often unconscious of environmental impacts and changes. Because the built environment is amenable to change
and to intentional design, its effects have been well studied by psychologists as well as by researchers from other
fields. Although the natural environment has received less attention, it was still recognized as important by early to
mid-20th-century psychologists (e.g., Adler, 1956).
The environmental challenges that have become salient as we begin the 21st century provide a pressing reminder
of the ways in which human well-being is bound up with environmental health. These challenges also illustrate the
reverse relationship: the impact of human perceptions, attitudes, and especially behavior on environmental wellbeing. This handbook addresses the expanding body of research on these relationships and presents a snapshot
of current work on environmental and conservation psychology. Such a snapshot captures a moment in time for an
evolving and increasingly important area of research. To understand what this handbook will and will not do, this
introductory chapter will situate the field within its temporal context, describing some of the history behind this area
as well as its goals.
Environmental Psychology
Environmental psychology began to emerge as a self-identified subdiscipline in the 1950s. Certainly (p. 2) the
Page 1 of 8
Page 2 of 8
Conservation Psychology
These themes are particularly relevant in conservation psychology, which emerged in the late 1990s and early
21st century. At this time, interest in the natural environment was blossoming, with a growing number of academic
programs devoted to environmental studies and an increased awareness of looming environmental problems. A
small group of psychologists set about quite deliberately to address a few lacunae: the near-absence of
psychology from discussions about environmental issues, both within the academy and in the public sphere, and
the limited focus on the natural world in mainstream psychological research. There was also a desire to refocus
efforts to use the insights and tools of psychology toward understanding and promoting human care for nature.
Several names were considered: Green psychology? Ecopsychology? Psychology of sustainability? Conservation
psychology was selected as the name for this new effort, in part because it paralleled the history and goals of the
existing field of conservation biology. The term conservation does not, in this case, take a position on the
historical debate between conserving resources for human use versus protecting nature for its own sake. Rather, it
reflects the conservation movement of the late 20th century and particularly the movements political focus on
responding to environmental challenges, such as pollution, loss of biodiversity, and (more recently) global climate
change.
Conservation psychology deliberately enlists contributions from the many subdisciplines within psychology toward
understanding and promoting healthy and sustainable relationships with nature. The tools it brings to bear are the
conceptual and methodological techniques of empirical research in psychology. Like conservation biology,
conservation psychology is distinguished by a clear set of goals and values: it values human and ecosystem
health, and aspires to enhance the healthy relationship between humans and the rest of nature. Conservation
psychology is not just an applied field, and is not just about understanding determinants of pro-environmental
behavior. It is about theory and research aimed at understanding the interdependence between human and natural
well-being, and its goal is to make linkages between basic academic research and practical environmental issues.
Beginning in 2000, a series of workshops hosted by the Chicago Zoological Society and a conference funded by
the Rice Foundation brought together groups of researchers to discuss the parameters of the field and the best
way to move forward. An early outcome was a special issue (2003) of the journal Human Ecology Review, edited
by Carol Saunders and Gene Myers, that focused on conservation psychologydescribing it, defining it, and
suggesting some important directions. The definition in this issue described conservation psychology as the
scientific study of the reciprocal relationships between humans and the rest of nature, with a particular focus on
how to encourage conservation of the natural world (Saunders, 2003, p. 138).
(p. 4) Theoretical perspectives emphasized in the special issue focused on behavior change; emotional
connections to natural entities (especially animals and places); and communication about environmental issues. A
Page 3 of 8
Expanding Interest
Response to the challenge from both within and outside the discipline of psychology has been accelerating.
Several recently established journals reflect this interest. For example, Ecopsychology, whose goal is to make
connections between environmental and psychological well-being by publishing papers on such topics as
therapeutic aspects of human-nature relationships and concern about environmental issues, first appeared in
2009; PsyEcology, a bilingual journal on topics in environmental psychology, was first published in 2010; and the
Journal of Fostering Sustainable Behavior, whose goal is to provide practical research of use to those designing
environmental programs, launched its first call for papers in fall 2010. Somewhat further afield, Environmental
Communication, which began in 2007, includes work from the field of psychology, as does Conservation Letters,
which appeared in 2008 and explicitly encompasses conservation work from the biological and social sciences.
New books continue to appear, including Gardner and Sterns (2002) Environmental Problems and Human
Behavior, Schmuck and Schultzs (2002) Psychology of Sustainable Development, Ray Nickersons (2003)
Psychology and Environmental Change, and Koger and Winters (2010) The Psychology of Environmental
Problems. Clayton and Myerss (2009) Conservation Psychology was the first text to use this term. A listserv and
website for conservation psychology have been constructed, and Division 34 of the American Psychological
Association recently voted to change its name from the Society for Population and Environmental Psychology to the
Society for Environmental, Population, and Conservation Psychology. A number of other organizations around the
world promote and support research on the relationships between humans and the natural world, including Division
4 of the International Association for Applied Psychology, the International Association for People-Environment
Studies, and the Australian Psychological Society.
In addition to academic literature and organizations, psychologists have been working to integrate environmental
topics into the curriculum (Koger & Scott, 2007) and to make the results of psychological research more available
to conservation practitioners. Recent examples of this include a task force of the American Psychological
Association that was (p. 5) convened to examine psychology and global climate change (APA, 2009), and
several publications from the World Wildlife FundUK, one of which examines the relevance of identity factors in
promoting conservation (Crompton & Kasser, 2009) and another emphasizing the significance of cultural values
Page 4 of 8
Toward an Integration
The relationship between environmental and conservation psychology has been somewhat ill-defined and has led
to spirited debates. Some have argued that all the topics within conservation psychology are already present in
environmental psychology; others disagree. There are clearly different points of emphasis and different
subcultures of people involved, but there are also exciting synergies. As Schultz and Kaiser state in this volume,
research on pro-environmental behavior, with its emphasis on changing the person, did not fit easily within
environmental psychology, with its emphasis on specific physical contexts. The field of environmental psychology,
as a whole, does not have the emphasis on protecting the environment that conservation psychology represents.
However, as many of the chapters in this handbook illustrate, themes relevant to conservation psychology can be
discerned in most of the core topics of environmental psychology. The goal of the present volume is to present an
integration of the established subdiscipline of environmental psychology, and the new field of conservation
psychology. Such an integration should acknowledge both the rich history of environmental psychology and the
urgency and vision of the conservation agenda; it also helps to overcome the impulse to divide one from the other
by making forced and artificial distinctions between theory and application, physical and social, or built
and natural environments. Both environmental and conservation psychologies encompass theory and
application, physical and social environments, natural and more engineered settings. Some, but not all,
environmental psychology is conservation psychology. Some, but not all, conservation psychology is
environmental psychology. In the end, they may represent inextricably intermingled bodies of work, distinguishable
if at all by the purpose and professional identities of the researchers and practitioners.
The aims of this volume are both similar to and different from the two earlier handbooks of environmental
psychology. Like the first (Stokols & Altman, 1987), this handbook strives to include many of the foundational areas
within environmental psychology, but in a way that promotes their applicability to current environmental issues. A
number of the topics from the original handbook are revisited, because they are so central to the field and continue
to generate so much new research. But we have not attempted to replicate the ambitious scope of that set of
volumes. Like the second handbook (Bechtel & Churchman, 2002), the present one emphasizes applied problems,
but with an even greater focus on the natural environment.
The chapters are organized so that they proceed from the more abstract and conceptual to the more applied.
Environmental and conservation psychology are not purely applied fields but rather include much basic theory and
research on how people think about and respond to their environments. Within sections, we also proceed from the
more manufactured to more natural environments. Thus, the first section encompasses research and theory on
human perceptions, attitudes, values, and emotions. We also look at the role of environments, particularly natural
environments, in childrens development and in the development of a sense of self and identity. Acknowledging
that the physical cannot be fully separated from the social environment, we include an examination of cultural
differences in attitudes and perceptions.
The next section examines some specific environments that have prompted extensive research. We start with built
environments, such as residential and work environments; move through environments that are explicitly focused
on effecting change in their occupants, such as schools, health care settings, and correctional environments; and
end with natural and extreme environments. The focus of these chapters is on understanding these environments,
in ways that may contribute to our understanding of human psychology as well as enhancing our ability to design
interventions that make the environments more healthy or effective.
The third section emphasizes the ways in which people are affected by their environments. Much of this research
has focused on negative influences: environmental stressors, such as noise, and natural (p. 6) disasters, and the
characteristics of environmental conflicts. But environments also have great potential, in a way we are just
beginning to recognize, for positive effects. We include research on therapeutic effects, restorative effects, and
the role of nature in promoting health, peak experiences, and positive social interactions.
Page 5 of 8
Acknowledgments
We thank the Ittleson Foundation for its contributions to advancing the field of conservation psychology, as well as
its support for this handbook and for the integration of conservation with environmental psychology.
References
American Psychological Association Task Force on the Interface Between Psychology and Global Climate Change
(2009). Psychology and global climate change: Addressing a multi-faceted phenomenon and set of challenges.
Washington, DC: Author. Retrieved from www.apa.org/science/about/publications/executivesummary.pdf.
Ansbacher, H., & Ansbacher, R. (Eds.). (1956). The individual psychology of Alfred Adler. New York: Basic Books.
Bechtel, R., & Churchman, A. (Eds.). (2002). Handbook of environmental psychology. New York: Wiley.
Bonnes, M., & Bonaiuto, M. (2002). Environmental psychology: From spatial-physical environment to sustainable
development. In R. Bechtel & A. Churchman (Eds.), Handbook of environmental psychology (pp. 2855). New York:
Wiley.
Clayton, S., & Brook, A. (2005). Can psychology help save the world? A model for conservation psychology.
Analyses of Social Issues and Public Policy, 5(1), 87102.
Clayton, S., & Myers, G. (2009). Conservation psychology: Understanding and promoting human care for nature.
West Sussex, UK: Wiley-Blackwell.
Craik, K. (1970). Environmental psychology. In K. Craik, R. Kleinmuntz, R. Rosnow, R. Rosenthal, J. Cheyne, & R.
Walters (Eds.), New directions in psychology (Vol. 4, pp. 1122). New York: Holt, Rinehart, & Winston.
Crompton, T. (2010). Common cause: The case for working with our cultural values. Surrey, UK: WWF-UK.
Crompton, T., & Kasser, T. (2009). Meeting environmental challenges: The role of human identity. Surrey, UK:
WWF-UK.
Fraser, J., & Sickler, J. (2008). Conservation psychology: Who cares about the biodiversity crisis? State of the Wild
20082009. Washington, DC: Island Press.
Gardner, G., & Stern, P. (2002). Environmental problems and human behavior (2nd ed.). Boston, MA: Pearson
Custom Publishing.
Page 6 of 8
Carol D. Saunders
Carol D. Saunders Department of Environmental Studies Antioch University New England Keene, NH
Page 7 of 8
Introduction
The value of theories and concepts reside in their possibilities for ordering our thinking, and in doing so, for
directing further inquiry. This value can be undercut, however, when the same label is used to refer to different
theoretical approaches, and when concepts rooted within a particular theoretical perspective are detached from
that perspective and employed in an eclectic manner. As a case in point, consider ecological psychology.
The designation ecological psychology was adopted by three psychologists over the second half of the 20th
century to describe their distinct, independent theoretical approaches and associated research programs: the
perceptual psychologist James J. Gibson (19031979), the child/social psychologist Roger G. Barker (19031990),
and the developmental psychologist Urie Bronfenbrenner (19172005). Even a cursory examination of their
writings shows minimal overlap in the psychological issues they each explored, and few instances where they
even cite one anothers work. That all three approaches at one time or another adopted the label ecological
psychology has no doubt been a source of confusion to many, while diminishing the distinctive character and
value of each.
As it turns out, this problem of multiple referents for ecological psychology resolved on its own accord over time
due to changes within these frameworks. At present, Gibsonians alone have retained the term ecological
psychology, whereas Barker eventually came to call his approach eco-behavioral science, and Bronfenbrenner
later employed the bio-ecological model to describe his program of research. But only those closely following the
developments within each approach are likely to be aware (p. 12) of these changes. The initial adoption of
ecological psychology by all three is apt to be a lingering source of misunderstanding.
Page 1 of 33
Ecological Science
Primary Attributes
Ecology is a subdomain of biology that is concerned with dynamic, interdependent processes constituting natural
systems that are comprised of living and nonliving things. Such systems are referred to as ecosystems. They are
dynamic in the sense that ecosystem processes are continually in flux even as they function to maintain the
Page 2 of 33
Historical Considerations
This way of thinking grew out of extensive studies of natural history in the 18th and 19th centuries, the most
famous of which to modern readers is the voyage of the Beagle (Darwin, 1839). The culmination of this line of
Page 3 of 33
Worldviews in Psychology
In the first Handbook of Environmental Psychology (Stokols & Altman, 1987), Altman and Rogoff presented a
masterful elucidation of the principal metatheories or worldviews that have influenced 20th-century psychology,
and environmental psychology in particular. They based their analysis on the seminal work World Hypotheses
(1942), by the philosopher Stephen Peppera book that for decades had been passed around quietly in some
corners of psychology. Taking a long historical view, Pepper proposed that each philosopher and scientist brings
to his or her work a broad conceptual framework (world hypothesis) that serves as an organizing structure for
making sense of their subject matter. World hypotheses are typically tacit, always operate at a very high level of
abstraction, and have their origins in the cultural and pedagogical climate within which individuals develop
intellectually.2
Altman and Rogoff (1987) identified four worldviews or metatheories (I will use these terms synonymously here)
modeled on Peppers (1942) scheme and within which psychologists have been working since the beginning of the
20th century. They designated the four metatheories as the trait, the interactional, the organismic, and the
transactional worldviews. (Pepper used a slightly different nomenclature.) The first three of these metatheories,
trait, interactional, and organismic, have been much more in evidence within psychology than has
transactionalism, which subsumes ecosystem thinking. Below I describe these three metatheories briefly, while
giving transactionalismour primary concern herecomparatively greater attention. For a more detailed
discussion, see Altman and Rogoff (1987).
1. The trait metatheory adopts as its unit of analysis the individual as a semi-isolated, bounded, self-contained
entity. Examples of the expression of a trait metatheory in psychology are attempts to explain behavior with
reference primarily to intra-psychic variablesthat is, qualities or dispositional properties within the person
Page 4 of 33
Page 5 of 33
Page 6 of 33
Page 7 of 33
Page 8 of 33
Page 9 of 33
Page 10 of 33
Page 11 of 33
Lewins Transactionalism
B = f(P,E) expresses Lewins view that psychological functioning (behavior) is to be explained with reference to
the psychological field at a given time (P,E), with person and environment jointly constituting the field of action.
The psychological field is not a product of two independent factors (P and E), but together they give rise to the
psychological field. Lewin (1946) was completely clear on this point:
In this formula for behavior, the state of the person (P) and that of his environment (E) are not independent
of each other. How a child sees a given physical setting (for instance, whether the frozen pond looks
dangerous to him or not) depends upon the developmental state and the character of that child and upon
his ideology. In this equation the person (P) and his environment (E) have to be viewed as variables
which are mutually dependent upon each other. In other words, to understand or to predict behavior, the
person and his environment have to be considered as one constellation of interdependent factors. (pp.
239240)
Lewin referred to this constellation of interdependent factors as a field in the scientific sense of a totality of
coexisting facts which are conceived of as mutually interdependent (p. 240). In short, Lewin was operating within
a transactional metatheory.
To make this perspective clearer, it will be useful to distinguish between interacting factors and interdependent
(constitutive) factors. The interaction of two (or more) independent variables indicates that some outcome measure
is not attributable to one or the other variable operating independently, but to their joint influence. However,
because these variables are independent of each other, either alone can also in principle produce an effect (main
effect) on an outcome measure. In the case of constitutive factors, the phenomenon (i.e., the effect) in question
exists only through the joint action of two (or more) variables. The presence of either one alone cannot produce or
generate the resultant in question. To borrow an example from Keller (2010), the sound of a drum is constituted by
a drummer and a drum. Considered independently, neither can produce any effect. The effect (the sound) occurs
at the intersection of these two events.
Let us examine what this claim means with reference to an example in a Lewinian vein. A plate of food (E) in the
vicinity of a hungry person (P) has the psychological character of a desirable object: it possesses a positive
valence in the psychological field. Conversely, that same object in the vicinity of someone who is ill may well have
an aversive quality (a negative valence). However, the plate of food considered independently of any person has
no psychological value, being describable solely in nonpsychological terms, such as its chemical composition. But
this does not mean that value is subjectively imposed on the object. A block of wood could not have a positive
valence for eating no matter how hard the person tried to construe it in that way. The character of the object
counts just as much as the current state of the individual. The plate of food as a desirable or undesirablethat is,
as a meaningful objectis a relational property.
The seemingly mundane character of this example belies its significance for psychology, for it speaks to the very
nature of psychological phenomena. Conceptualizing the person-environment field as a constellation of
interdependent factors, as Lewin did, opens the door to considering meaning or value as properties of the
psychological field, rather than an intra-subjective quality. What Lewin claimed, as James did before him, is that the
domain of psychological phenomena is to be found in a field of mutually interdependent factors. This is not to
Page 12 of 33
Page 13 of 33
Page 14 of 33
Affordances
The Gibsonian concept that is most familiar to the current generation of environmental psychologists is affordance.
Even though this concept appears explicitly only in Gibsons (1979) later writings, it is a good place to begin an
examination of ecological psychology because it reveals the distinctive character of the ecological approach,
while at the same time conveying its wider connections to a transactional style of thinking.
An affordance is a psychological property of the environment. That is to say, an affordance is a property of the
environment taken with reference to the functional possibilities of an individual. For example, a horizontal surface
that is approximately knee-height to an individual and whose material structure can support that individuals weight
affords sitting-on for that individual. Indeed, the surface is perceived as a place to sit. That same surface, however,
may not be perceived as affording sitting-on for another individual whose leg length and weight are quite different.
Affordances, in short, are perceived properties of the environment from the standpoint of an individual. They are
specified by properties of environmental features considered in relation to the action possibilities of an individual. In
other words, affordances are relational properties, referring simultaneously to the environment and the individual.
Individuals most immediately (nonreflectively) perceive the environment in terms of its affordances (Gibson, 1979;
Heft, 1993, 2003). One may adopt an analytical stance with respect to the environment, focusing on particular
abstract properties, such as the geometric shape of objects, but from an ecological perspective, the environment
is experienced most immediately with respect to its functionally (psychologically) meaningful properties.
Viewed from the perspective of an interactionist metatheory, affordances would seem to be conceptually
incoherent. Recall that for interactionism, there exist two autonomous domains of reality: the physical environment
(objective reality), on the one hand, and the psychological (subjective experience), on the other. And yet
affordances are posited to be psychological properties of the environment. How can a property of the physical
environment be psychologicaleven meaningful? The concept of affordance, however, is incommensurate with
interactionist thinking. Instead, affordance, and the ecological psychology framework out of which the concept
grows, abandons a dualistic mode of thought rooted in interactionism in favor of the kind of relational thinking that
characterizes the transactional framework.
Gibson was not the first person to call attention to such properties. In their own ways, and using different
terminology, James, Lewin, Merleau-Ponty, and Heidegger did as well (Heft, 2001; Johnson, 2007). What Gibson
uniquely accomplished, however, was to give the insight scientific, empirical footing by grounding it in an account
of environmental perception and ecological optics. This achievement can be illustrated with reference to W. H.
Warrens (1984) investigations of perceiving a step affordance. Warren tested a sample of individuals who were
either short or tall relative to the average height of his population. Each individual was asked to judge whether he
or she could walk up several sets of stairs that varied across trials in riser height, that is, the vertical distance
between the horizontal surfaces. Not surprisingly, short and tall individuals judgments varied systematically,
averaged over trials, with the riser height that was judged to be climbable on 50% of the trials differing between the
two groups. More critically, when judgments of both groups were evaluated in relation to individuals ratio of leg
length to riser height (pi = leg length/riser height), rather than an absolute height measure (leg length alone), the pi
value was constant across both groups. In other words, the riser height judged to be climbable 50% of the time was
constant across all participants when the stair height was scaled in relative rather than absolute terms. This finding
Page 15 of 33
Page 16 of 33
Page 17 of 33
Page 18 of 33
Page 19 of 33
Page 20 of 33
Behavior Settings
The second research program is more familiar to environmental psychologists, and it is also the research on which
Barker invested most of his efforts. I refer here to his work on behavior settings. The concept of the behavior
setting is best appreciated by reviewing how Barker was led to the discovery of this eco-behavioral structure. One
of the early goals of the field research station investigations was to determine whether individuals actions could be
systematically and functionally linked to environmental occurrences. Barker initially hypothesized that the behavior
episodes of the children would follow in a stimulus-response fashion from the antecedent actions of other
individualsthat is, from proximate social inputs. However, this did not prove to be widely the case. Although a
sizeable proportion of behaviors did seem to follow immediately from social inputs, much of the time they did not.
To Barkers surprise, actions of other individuals that were directed toward the child were only a weak to moderate
predictor of that individual childs behavior. As the data on the behavior stream also indicated, in most cases the
actions of individual children appeared to be initiated spontaneously rather than being instigated by others (Barker
& Wright, 1955, p. 298). If one was looking for some systematic and highly predictive relationship between the
environment and behavior, that goal seemed at first blush to be unattainable.
However, Barker took note of something else in the data they had collected from observations of individual
children. As each child moved from one locale or setting to another over the course of the day, for example, from
the classroom to the playground to the home, behaviors changed appreciably. In noting these patterns of behavior
with respect to each individual child, he also began to recognize another pattern that on reflection took on greater
significance than it is usually accorded. While the individual childs behavior varied across settings, there was a
great deal of commonality among the actions of different children in the same setting. Indeed, the actions of
different children in the same setting had greater similarity than the actions of an individual child across different
settings. Said differently, the variability in behavior of different children in the same setting at a particular time was
smaller than the variability in behavior of the same child across his or her entire day.
This finding runs counter to two prevailing assumptions in psychology: first, that the actions of a particular
individual can be readily predicted with reference to internal, or dispositional attributes, such as personality,
temperament, or motivation; second, that behavior is best predicted by proximate inputs, often in light of their
immediate consequences. Barkers data pointed to an entirely different set of factors operating that were neither
dispositional nor proximate: the dynamics of the overarching setting as such.
We found, in short, that we could predict some aspects of childrens behavior more adequately from
knowledge of the behavior characteristics of [the settings they] inhabited than from knowledge of the
Page 21 of 33
Page 22 of 33
Eco-Behavioral Science
As we have seen, Barker started off attempting to gain insight into the daily lives of individual children. But his
research led him to the discovery of higher order, extra-individual dynamic structures: behavior settings. It turned
out that knowing which behavior setting children participated in was an exceptionally valuable predictor of
behavior, and learning about the properties of individual behavior settings (e.g., level of staffing) provided
additional insight into individuals likely experiences in those settings. However, in the process, Barkers initial
psychological aim of predicting individual behavior needed to be recast. Barker learned quite early in his research
that he was unable to account for individual behavior at that level of specificity. Behavior setting analysis informs
about the likely range of actions and experiences of individuals without specifying what will occur in any single
case and at any particular moment. The range of possibilities (i.e., degrees of freedom) can vary across types of
settings, from those with diverse possibilities, such as a playground, to those with quite narrow ones, such as a
church service. Within those ranges, prediction is at best probabilistic owing to individual agency.
It is for this reason that Barker recognized that what his work led to was not a psychology qua individualsat least
not of the sort that psychology tends to envisionbut a science of the contexts that are constituted by individuals
and that simultaneously constrain individual activities in daily life. In short, Barkers framework transformed as a
matter of course from ecological psychology to eco-behavioral science. This refashioned framework is in accord
with the view of environments that we have seen to be characteristic of the ecological sciences overall:
environments are composed of nested dynamic structures across different levels of organization.
Eco-behavioral science is concerned with the functional character of higher order, extra-individual dynamic
entities, and on these grounds, their operations are unlikely to be reducible to the actions of individuals. Barker was
led to the conclusion that eco-behavioral science will require concepts specific to phenomena operating at this
level of complexity. For this reason, the science of psychology and eco-behavioral science, while complementary,
are not equivalent.
But it is worth asking, is being able to identify the constraints within which an individual operates at any particular
time, but not the specific actions of that individual at that time, a limitation of Barkers approach? Or is it what
psychological analysis ultimately affords? While we loosely talk as if research predicts particular outcomes,
between subject variation is ever present, even if measures of central tendency sometimes lead us to forget
that. Individuals enter any settingthose of laboratories and those of daily lifeas agents with a developmental
history that intersects with the extra-individual dynamics and other moment-to-moment contingencies of that
Page 23 of 33
Page 24 of 33
Page 25 of 33
Future Directions
In keeping with the expected format for the volume, this chapter will conclude with a consideration of future
directions for ecological psychology, particularly as they relate to environmental psychology. Most of the following
brief comments build on the more extensive foregoing discussion.
1. The interactionist approaches that have informed environmental and conservation psychology to date have
been useful, most especially when operating at the level of aggregate data. However, at the same time they have
limited the scope of inquiry by directing researchers to conceptualize the environment in nonpsychological terms
(e.g., physical properties), while locating the psychological domain in an intra-psychic realm (i.e., the environment
in the head). An approach grounded in a transactional metatheory points instead to relational properties in the
individual-environment system that by their very nature are psychological in character and meaningful. The value
of such an approach has been demonstrated not only within ecological approaches, with the elucidation of novel
concepts such as affordances and behavior settings; it has also been revealed by research on perceived control,
privacy, and social capital, each of which is properly viewed as a phenomenon that resides within an individual(s)environment system. Additional gains from applying transactional thinking to environmental and conservation
psychology await.
2. There exist many ways to evaluate the material resources of environments, but relatively few for assessing the
psychological resources of environment for individuals, excepting some initial inventories developed decades ago
for home environments (e.g., Bradley et al., 1979; Heft, 1979b, 1985; Wachs, 1979). How should one proceed in
making an assessment of the psychological resources within environments taken at a broader scale, such as
neighborhoods, communities, and other public areas? Several steps are required here: (1) particular possibilities
need to be proposed for what may serve as an eco-psychological resource (e.g., a particular type of affordance);
(2) a means of assessing the availability of these resources in some locale needs to be developed; and crucially,
(3) linkages between availability of these resources and positive outcomes must be established.
We have yet to develop a battery of sound measures of environmental quality in a psychological vein. The
concepts of affordances and behavior settings offer a good starting point, however. There is already some
indication in the developmental literature of the positive value of home environments rich in particular types of
affordances, such as objects that are responsive to childrens actions (Heft, 1983). A recent volume edited by
Evans and Wachs (2010) also provides some new insights into childrens environments. Schools marked by
understaffed behavior settings (Barker & Gump, 1964), are associated with positive developmental outcomes, as
we have seen. Initial efforts applied to outdoor environments with respect to affordances have been made (Heft,
1988b; Kytta, 2004), but much more work is needed. Yet to be explored is the relationship between available
behavior settings and community life, with the exception of Barker & Schoggen (1973). Environmental
psychologists should be in a position both to evaluate the relative quality of existing environments and to anticipate
the impact of design choices from a psychological standpoint for various user populations.
Page 26 of 33
References
Adolph, K. E. (1997). Learning in the development of infant locomotion. Monographs of the Society for Research in
Child Development, 62, 1140.
Altman, I. (1976). The environment and social behavior. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole.
Altman, I., & Rogoff, B. (1987). World views in psychology: Trait, interactional, organismic, and transactional
perspective. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.), Handbook of environmental psychology (Vol. 1, pp. 740). New York:
John Wiley.
Baird, L. L. (1963). Big school, small school: A critical examination of the hypothesis. Journal of Education
Page 27 of 33
Page 28 of 33
Page 29 of 33
Page 30 of 33
Page 31 of 33
Page 32 of 33
Notes:
(1.) Although there is good reason to believe that Darwin himself did not hold this view (Richards, 2004).
(2.) Readers may be more familiar with Kuhns later notion of paradigms than with Peppers world hypotheses. They
are broadly similar, although Kuhn placed far more attention on the practices of scientific communities in his
analysis and how scientific paradigms sustain particular approaches to a domain of inquiry.
(3.) The very concept of a gene is hotly contested in the developmental biology literature, and many of these
critiques operate in the spirit of the transactional worldview being examined here (Moss, 2003; Oyama, 1985).
(4.) Meta-analyses showing a positive relationship between preference for photographs of buildings and for actual
buildings (cited in Stamps, 1994) amass such a diverse set of studies that employ a wide variety of procedures
and viewing conditions that, in my assessment, it is impossible to state with any precision what relationships are
operating or judge the comparability of the studies.
Harry Heft
Harry Heft Department of Psychology Denison University Granville, OH
Page 33 of 33
Introduction
This chapter focuses on the relationship between wayfinding and spatial cognition as a topic of investigation in
environmental psychology and reviews the research on wayfinding as a specific application of spatial cognition.
The relationship of wayfinding to spatial cognition is of long-standing interest in environmental psychology, perhaps
emanating from the work of Lynch in his seminal book, The Image of the City (1960), and in psychology more
generally in the work of Tolman (1948/1973).
Environmental psychology as a discipline has a multidisciplinary flavor; this is also true of the study of wayfinding.
That interdisciplinarity leads to challenges, not the least of which is how to define wayfinding and spatial cognition.
Of necessity in a document just a chapter in length, the literature on a given topic, for example, visuospatial
working memory, centers on researchers who invoke this cognitive concept in the service of understanding
wayfinding, rather than vice versa.
The chapter will begin with definitions and then consider topics that have captured the interest of environmental
psychologists: the cognitive map, neurophysiological underpinnings, verisimilitude of wayfinding tasks,
development of wayfinding expertise and performance (including the elderly and those with cognitive and visual
impairments), gender differences, and wayfinding aids.1 Throughout, efforts are made to include the role of
technology, especially the use of virtual platforms. Also, as is true of many areas in environmental psychology, the
topics of wayfinding and spatial cognition provide an intersection (p. 42) of conceptual and applied research,
which the chapter highlights.
Page 1 of 29
Page 2 of 29
Page 3 of 29
Page 4 of 29
Page 5 of 29
Page 6 of 29
Developmental Theories
When we turn to developmental theory (and later to developmental behavior), the emphasis in the literature is
primarily theoretical; there is little focus on how this knowledge can be used to enhance wayfinding. In general
terms, most researchers view the ontogenetic development of spatial cognition as advancing from an egocentric
perspective (organized around the self) to an allocentric perspective (independent of the self). Further, this
development is often described as one that relies first on landmarks, moves to an ability to use route structure, and
reaches its highest form of knowledge when a configurational or survey understanding is available.
Although researchers may point to the work of Piaget to begin their discussion of the developmental progression of
spatial understanding that supports wayfinding, many spend more time with the work of Siegel and White (1975).
One reason environmental researchers may spend less time with Piaget (Piaget & Inhelder, 1948/1956) is that his
discussion of the development of spatial cognition was less well articulated than was his discussion of the
traditional periods (i.e., sensorimotor, preoperational, concrete operations, formal operations). The developmental
sequence of spatial cognition is hypothesized to move from topological, through perspective, and finally Euclidean
relationships. The infant is fundamentally an actor and experiences space through movement. Although proposing
it (p. 48) as a stage theory, Piaget and Inhelder argued that the perspective and Euclidean understandings were
maturing at the same time, with a later resolution of Euclidean understanding.
In addition to the developmental sequence, Piagets research paradigm, particularly the three-mountains problem,
has made an impact on environmental psychologists. In the three-mountains problem, which involves a small-scale
model of three mountains mounted on a board, the researcher investigates what the child sees from his/her
Page 7 of 29
Page 8 of 29
Developmental Behaviors
The work on developmental behavior continues the emphasis on theory, as opposed to application. What most
people would consider bona fide wayfindingthat is, finding your way in macroenvironmentsis not typically
represented in the research on infants or children younger than school age. That research tests ontogenetic
theories of spatial cognition, focusing on such issues as when children understand that a map or model can stand
for some place in the real world (e.g., Blades & Cooke, 1994; Scholnick, Fein, & Campbell, 1990). The term
wayfinding is used very loosely to describe the tasks in many of these studies on young children, for example,
when kindergarteners arranged the furniture of their classroom using a scale model (Siegel & Schadler, 1977), or
when Blaut and Stea (1974) investigated toy activity to make a street corner during unstructured play.
Moving to school-age children, a sizable number of studies have investigated the developmental ability to judge
distances and to read maps. Still, the size of the environment in question is pretty small, including the school
playground (Blades & Spencer, 1987, 1990), or rooms of various sorts, including those that are collapsible
(Acredolo, 1977; Bluestein & Acredolo, 1979; Hazen, Lockman, & Pick, 1978) or subdivided into smaller spaces
with barriers of different permeability, either opaque or transparent (Kosslyn, Pick, & Fariello, 1974). The focus
ranges from childrens memory to the role of distinctive cues in the environment and environmental familiarity
(Acredolo, Pick, & Olsen, 1975). What stands out from the Acredolo et al. research is not only the developmental
timeline (by the time children are eight they are able to make metric judgments as to whether the environment is
distinctive), but also the importance of landmark distinctiveness. Such distinctiveness helps younger children who
have not given up their reliance on topological relationships.
The environments that have been employed for research are often familiar to the participants, including areas
around their homes, schools, and neighborhoods (Conning & Byrne, 1984; Doherty, Gale, Pellegrino, & Golledge,
1989), and spaces such as libraries or gymnasiums within buildings (Acredolo et al., 1975; Biel, 1982; Cohen,
Weatherford, Lomenick, & Koeller, 1979; Cousins, Siegel, & Maxwell, 1983; Herman, Kolker, & Shaw, 1982; Kahl,
Herman, & Klein, 1984).
When the scale of the research moves beyond rooms or relatively small-scale environments such as playgrounds,
the research is more likely to fit our operational definition of bona fide wayfinding, especially in a group of studies
where participants carried out an actual wayfinding task (Cornell & Hay, 1984; Cornell, Heth, & Broda, 1989;
Cornell, Heth, & Rowat, 1992; Cousins et al., 1983). Other studies have presented the large-scale environment
through simulation, including slides (Allen, 1981; Allen, Kirasic, Siegel, & Herman, 1979; Doherty et al., 1989;
Doherty & Pellegrino, 1985; Siegel, Allen, & Kirasic, 1979).
The Cornell and Hay (1984) study incorporated a good range of macroscale testing conditions and addressed a
variety of theoretical issues, but with little emphasis on application. The testing conditions included walking the
designated route across a university campus, seeing slides of that route, or viewing a video of that route; it
contrasted second graders with children in kindergarten. Across conditions, older children performed better.
Importantly from the standpoint of assessing the issue of simulation, children who went on the guided walk had
fewer errors than those in the video-viewing condition. Moreover, half the participants were also tested along the
reverse route, and those in the walking condition made fewer errors than did those in either of the simulation
(slides, video) conditions. Here is another instance in which simulation does not produce the same results as
walking along the actual route. The benefits of walking a route are reminiscent of an early study by Terence Lee in
which he discussed how sociospatial schemata are formed (Lee, 1957). The school adjustment of rural children
who rode the bus to school was contrasted with those who walked. And although adjustment decreased with time
spent in travel, the walkers had significantly higher adjustment than did the bus users for the same length of time.
Lee argued that the walkers had the opportunity to integrate the schemata of home and school (p. 50) in a way
not available to the bus riders due to the circuitous route taken by the bus.
In summary, throughout these two sections (developmental theories and behaviors), the primary emphasis is to
advance theory; secondary concern is given to applying theory to improve wayfinding. When we turn our attention
to those with cognitive and visual impairments, there is more emphasis on application in the research.
Page 9 of 29
Cognitive Impairments
Extending wayfinding research along the developmental spectrum to populations with cognitive and/or visual
challenges is of interest to environmental psychologists for practical as well as theoretical reasons. Regularly we
hear of elderly who wander away from a home base and do not return safely. Understanding the wayfinding
competence of these elderly may help them and translate into universally applicable design principles. Older adults
with Alzheimers disease and even those without cognitive impairment may struggle to understand wayfinding
signage, a reason for researchers to contribute solutions to this problem. The addition of text to wayfinding signs
(e.g., for stairwell, airport, bus station, restaurant) with icons (e.g., symbols, pictures) generally improves
wayfinding even for older adults who were healthy (Scialfa et al., 2008).
The number of diagnosed cases of Alzheimers disease continues to increase, with 1 in 85 people worldwide
expected to have the disease by 2050. In North America, that prediction is for 8.8 million by 2050, with 3.1 million
cases in 2010, according to the msnbc.msn.com website in June 2010. Alzheimers dementia is often characterized
by a decline in spatial orientation (Passini, Pigot, Rainville, & Ttreault, 2000), and for that reason has received
considerable attention from wayfinding researchers (e.g., Weisman, Cohen, Ray, & Day, 1991). One suggestion is
that Alzheimers disease affects the hippocampal place neurons, rendering maintenance of cognitive maps more
difficult (Parnetti & Calabresi, 2006, p. S77). In addition to the loss of tissue in the right posterior area of the
hippocampus, others point to an involvement of parietal areas as well (delpolyi, Rankin, Mucke, Miller, & GornoTempini, 2007).
In research by Passini et al. (2000) on individuals with advanced Alzheimers disease (AD), wayfinding was
hindered by a monotonous architectural environment and lack of reference points to aid orientation. Where it was
possible for patients to see ahead (visual access), wayfinding was improved. Signage reinforces goal-directedness
and is important to reduce the wayfinding deficits created through memory impairment. Elevators were particularly
challenging, causing significant confusion. The study also pointed to the role of decoration, in particular to floor
patterns, as presenting a possible source of disorientation for patients. The authors suggested that the use of
pictograms for AD patients might be worth investigation; they also pointed out that the names given to rooms need
to relate to the function the rooms serve.
Research by Kirasic (1985), among others, pointed to difficulty the elderly may have finding their way in unfamiliar
environments. But Ohta and Kirasic (1983) as well as others (e.g., Lavoie & Demick, 1995) also demonstrated that
laboratory studies of the spatial cognition of the elderly may underestimate their performance in real-world settings.
Research conducted in a suburban mall showed that information presented in a number of different forms could be
helpful, including as a map/model, as a videotape, or as a verbal description (Kirasic & Mathes, 1990).
In research employing virtual reality mazes and MRI scans (Head & Isom, 2010), the hippocampus was implicated
in wayfinding whereas the caudate nucleus was associated with route learning. Older people (mean age in the low
70s) in this study acquired less knowledge about the environment, traveled a greater distance to locate specific
targets, had poorer recall for landmarks in the virtual environment, and were less good at assimilating the route
than were younger participants (college students). Further, research by Cushman, Stein, and Duffy (2008)
comparing young (YNC) and older normals (ONC), participants with mild cognitive impairment (MCI), and those with
early AD (EAD) was important in showing the viability of virtual environment analysis of wayfinding abilities. These
authors persuasively argued how difficult it is to do valid real-life wayfinding evaluation in impaired individuals (and
normals, for that matter) and highlighted the viability of research with virtual environments. They tested the
connection between visual scenes and locations using eight subtests for both real and virtual conditions. The
focus (real and virtual) was a lobby of a hospital following a path of about 1,000 feet, which lasted about four
minutes (with all participants pushed in a wheelchair). YNC had the best performance, followed by ONC, MCI, and
finally EAD; those in the virtual condition had (p. 51) lower scores across groups, but virtual reality equally
affected all groups, and real-world and virtual scores correlated at r = .73. The learning of navigational landmarks
is equivalent in real-world and virtual environments, suggesting that cognitive mechanisms are similarly engaged
under both conditions (Cushman et al., 2008, p. 892).
Passini, Rainville, Marchand, and Joanette (1995, 1998) suggested that people who suffer from Alzheimers disease
Page 10 of 29
Visual Impairments
In addition to those with cognitive impairments, people with visual impairments provide a population of interest for
environmental psychologists from a practical as well as a theoretical perspective. Theoretically, environmental
psychologists who take a cognitive perspective have been interested in the extent to which individuals with visual
impairments form cognitive maps. An extension of this interest is the role of wayfinding assistance (i.e., aids) for the
visually impaired.
Research suggests those who are blind or have severe visual impairments nevertheless have spatial
representations of the environment (Fletcher, 1980; Juurmaa, 1973; Kennedy, Gabias, & Heller, 1992; Klatzky,
Golledge, Loomis, Cicinelli, & Pellegrino, 1995; Landau, Spelke, & Gleitman, 1984; Passini, Proulx, & Rainville, 1990;
Strelow, 1985). In research with 30 participants including those who were blind, visually impaired, or not impaired,
repeated experience over a 1.2-mile route led to equivalent wayfinding performance. The authors suggested that it
is not lack of spatial ability but rather deficiency of sight that may explain initial differences in performance
(Golledge et al., 2000). To facilitate wayfinding, it seems likely that those with severe visual impairments make more
use of a self-referent system (awareness of where their bodies are in space) than do sighted individuals (Dodds,
Howarth, & Carter, 1982; Haber, Haber, Penningroth, Novak, & Radgowski, 1993).
In a low-tech approach, wayfinding difficulties have been identified through the use of goggles to simulate a
variety of visual impairments (e.g., glaucoma, diabetic retinopathy, cataracts, and macular degeneration).
Participants had difficulty with such decorative elements as floor patterns with changes and tiles that are shiny or
look wet. Lighting changes can mislead those with vision impairments to misjudge the size of corridors and
doorways. Wayfinding signage itself caused difficulty due to variability in size, illumination, and location
(Koneczny, Rousek, & Hallbeck, 2009).
Research by Espinosa, Ungar, Ochata, Blades, and Spencer (1998) suggested some advantages in giving people
who are blind or visually impaired the use of tactile maps in learning the spatial representation of a new
environment rather than relying solely on direct experience sans wayfinding aids. The authors suggested the use
of both direct experience and tactile maps by orientation and mobility instructors who work with visually impaired
individuals. Espinosa et al.s research gave more importance to tactile maps than has generally been reported in
the literature. In summary, research on those with cognitive and visual impairments has been a successful merger
of theory and application in wayfinding and spatial cognition.
Gender Differences
The research on gender differences in wayfinding and spatial cognition has often been situated within the context
of performance deficit. Typically, little emphasis has been given to the practical implication of any behavioral
differences between men and women that may exist.
Gender differences in spatial cognition and wayfinding have been reported in much of the environmental
psychology literature and in some cases have been a focus of such research. Reported gender differences can be
organized into three general areas: (1) mental rotation, (2) spatial anxiety and confidence, (3) behavioral
dependent measures (accuracy; distance; use of cardinal directions and landmarks).
Mental Rotation
Page 11 of 29
Wayfinding Measures
Dependent measures of wayfinding take a variety of forms, from navigating through an environment (e.g., Cornell
et al., 1989; Cornell et al., 1992; Lawton et al., 1996; Lvdn et al., 2007; Matthews, 1987; Webley, 1981), drawing
sketch maps (Doherty et al., 1989; Matthews, 1987), listing elements of a campus (Holding, 1992), giving distance
estimates (e.g., Kirasic, Allen, & Siegel, 1984), and pointing to origins or destinations (e.g., Anooshian & Young,
1981). In addition to such variables as accuracy (as in the pointing task or distance estimation), time can be
assessed as well as whether the target destination is actually reached. One difference that is not infrequently
reported is that women make more pointing errors than do men (e.g., Holding, 1992; Holding & Holding, 1989;
Lawton, 1996).
Although women are often less accurate than are men at pointing from a destination back to an origin, this deficit is
not necessarily related to their ability to find their way back to the origin or to their performance on some spatial
relational learning tasks (e.g., Lavenex & Lavenex, 2010). An instructional study is one by Lawton et al. (1996) in
which women did as well as men in the actual navigation portion of a task, finding their way through connecting
hallways in a campus building, as measured by time to complete the return trip, elements of the verbal protocols, or
the specific wayfinding pattern chosen. The large difference in pointing accuracy, where the errors for women
Page 12 of 29
Page 13 of 29
Space Syntax
Space syntax analysis is a technique that enables researchers to evaluate the connectivity of spaces; that is, how
spaces are connected to one another. With regard to wayfinding, this technique has been used to better
understand the functional spatial configuration of a building (e.g., Haq, 2003; Haq & Zimring, 2003; Tzeng &
Huang, 2009), or a larger space such as a neighborhood (Nenci & Troffa, 2006), and the complexity of such
spaces may predict performance on wayfinding tasks, such as pointing to targets that are not visible and drawing a
sketch map of the space. Space syntax may offer one way of expressing how cognitive maps are connected
(literally) to wayfinding behavior and is one way to approach configurational analysis (Haq, 2003). In terms of
applicability, space syntax analysis may be a good way of testing for possible wayfinding difficulties in buildings
and projects, and the role of local and relational qualities for new users potentially helps fine-tune these methods
(Haq & Zimring, 2003, p. 159). Interested readers are directed to the January 2003 issue of Environment and
Behavior, which focuses on space syntax, and to the seminal work of Hillier and Hanson (1984).
GIS
Not surprisingly given his training as a geographer, Golledge was enthusiastic in describing the role of geographic
information systems (GIS) in environmental psychology and laid out that case in a chapter for the Handbook of
Environmental Psychology (Bechtel & Churchman, 2002). GIS is a set of computer procedures for geocoding,
storing, decoding, analyzing, and visually representing spatial information (Golledge, 2002, p. 244). Golledge
(2002) presented GIS as two-faced, like Janus: one side applied and the other theoretical. When he wrote the
chapter, Golledge saw unrealized potential, especially in linking qualitative and quantitative analysis, in the use of
GIS by environmental psychologists. Ten years after he wrote this, some headway has been made in more
widespread use of GIS for wayfinding research, although the virgin territory of environmental psychology to
engage GIS described by Golledge (2002, p. 252) essentially remains. Using the Scopus database, entering the
terms wayfinding and GIS yielded 16 entries on July 12, 2010, of which 13 were published after 2000. Similarly,
that same day GIS and cognitive map yielded 18 entries, 9 of which were published after 2000.
But there is some progress. For example, a role of GIS in the recovery of lost persons has been proposed (Heth &
Cornell, 2007), and Borst et al. (2009) used GIS to investigate the characteristics of streets that encourage (e.g.,
front gardens) or discourage (e.g., litter, slopes, stairs) walking by elderly individuals when they go shopping, to a
health care facility, or to visit a friend or relative. Mandel (2010) reports that GIS can be used to map the most
popular routes used by library patrons within the library, and a combination of GIS (for planned route behavior) and
person-based GPS (for actual route behavior) was used to assess the degree to which where we say we plan to go
Page 14 of 29
Page 15 of 29
Page 16 of 29
Conclusion
Research in environmental psychology linking wayfinding and spatial cognition is growing, spurred by advances in
technology that permit great flexibility with increasing affordability. Theoretically we see less commitment to a strict
developmental progression of landmark to route to survey/configurational knowledge. Gender differences continue
to be examined, and the often-reported difference between men and women on the mental rotations test continues.
At the same time, there is increasing evidence that men and women may use different strategies for successful
wayfinding. This knowledge may eventually be incorporated into different options for men and women in the kind of
wayfinding information they select from wayfinding technology (e.g., GPS devices). Environmental psychology has
been affected by the dominance of neuroscience in psychology, as wayfinding researchers attempt to pinpoint the
brain areas (most likely the hippocampus and parahippocampus) underlying place learning. Finally, moving beyond
the contribution of you-are-here maps and the location of signage, research linking spatial cognition and
wayfinding is being applied to first responders, such as firefighters, as well as increasingly to populations with
cognitive and/or visual impairment.
Future Directions
Based on this review of the literature, it is likely researchers interested in wayfinding and spatial cognition will
continue to examine the degree of correspondence between iconic simulations, in particular virtual reality, and
wayfinding in real environments. Virtual reality has many advantages, such as its flexibility and its application to
populations with cognitive challenges, but the field must continue to examine the areas of both divergence and
convergence in verisimilitude before relying too heavily on this technology. Similarly, psychology, including
environmental psychology, is experiencing unprecedented interest in neuroscience and brain mechanisms, and
this interest brings with it a host of associated sophisticated technologies, such as fMRI and PET scans. As the field
pursues neuroscience to better understand the relationship between wayfinding and spatial cognition, what is the
role of research that relies on less sophisticated technologies? Many researchers continue to view womens
wayfinding performance (e.g., pointing) and spatial cognition (e.g., mental rotation) as deficient and mens as
superior. Rather than this limited perspective, more research is needed on the differential use of navigational
strategies by men and women. Practical application as well as theory evaluation can be fostered by better
understanding what conditions maximize wayfinding performance for each gender. Finally, for research on
wayfinding and spatial cognition to influence policy, practical applications need to be highlighted.
References
Acredolo, L. P. (1977). Developmental changes in the ability to coordinate perspectives of a large-scale space.
Developmental Psychology, 13, 18. doi:10.1037/00121649.13.1.1
Acredolo, L. P., Pick, H. L., Jr., & Olsen, M. G. (1975). Environmental differentiation and familiarity as determinants of
childrens memory for spatial location. Developmental Psychology, 11, 495501. doi:10.1037/h0076667
Allen, G. L. (1981). A developmental perspective on the effects of subdividing macrospatial experience. Journal
of Experimental Psychology: Human Learning and Memory, 7, 120132. doi:10.1037/02787393.7.2.120
Allen, G. L., & Haun, D. B. M. (2004). Proximity and precision in spatial memory. In G. L. Allen (Ed.), Human spatial
memory: Remembering where (pp. 4163). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Allen, G. L., Kirasic, K. C., Siegel, A. W., & Herman, J. F. (1979). Developmental issues in cognitive mapping: The
selection and utilization of environmental landmarks. Child Development, 50, 10621070. doi:10.2307/1129332
Anooshian, L. J., & Young, D. (1981). Developmental changes in cognitive maps of a familiar neighborhood. Child
Development, 52, 341348. doi:10.2307/1129248
Page 17 of 29
Page 18 of 29
Page 19 of 29
Page 20 of 29
Page 21 of 29
Page 22 of 29
Page 23 of 29
Page 24 of 29
Page 25 of 29
Page 26 of 29
Page 27 of 29
Page 28 of 29
Notes:
(1.) In organizing the topics for this chapter and reviewing the literature prior to 2000, I have been guided by my
2001 book, Mind and Maze: Spatial Cognition and Environmental Behavior.
Ann Sloan Devlin
Ann Sloan Devlin Department of Psychology Connecticut College New London, CT
Page 29 of 29
Environmental Attitudes
Introduction
An attitude is a latent construct mentally attached to a concrete or abstract object (otherwise known as an
attitude objecta person, place, entity, or idea). Traditionally, attitudes have three components: cognitive
(thoughts about the object, usually including an evaluation), affective (feelings about the object), and conative
(behavioral intentions and actions regarding the object) (Breckler, 1984).
Attitudes can be confused with other constructs, such as values, beliefs (sometimes considered the cognitive
component of attitudes), opinions, personality dispositions, and personal norms. Although all these concepts relate
to the three attitude components to some extent, they also differ in subtle but important ways. For example, beliefs
list toward the cognitive; values are broader than attitudes and more culturally bound. Opinions, historically in
competition with attitudes, are more cognitive (Shrigley, Koballa, & Simpson, 1988, p. 659). Personality traits differ
from attitudes in that, like values, they are not focused on a particular object, are not necessarily evaluative, and
are not easily changeable (Ajzen, 2005). Another construct that has recently gained favor in environmental
psychology research is personal norm, originally proposed by Schwartz (1977). Unlike attitudes, proenvironmental personal norms are internalized social norms that directly influence behavior through feelings of
guilt (Bamberg, Hunecke, & Blbaum, 2007; Bamberg & Mser, 2007).This chapter focuses on environmental
attitudes, which are defined as concern for the environment or caring about environmental issues (sometimes (p.
66) referred to as pro-environmental attitudes). Five topics will be examined: the importance of studying
environmental attitudes, the structure and measurement of environmental attitudes, variables that affect concern
for the environment, methods for encouraging environmental attitudes, and factors that inhibit or promote attitudes
Page 1 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
influencing behavior.
Page 2 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
to-date measures. Thus, several environmental attitudes measurement instruments that may be useful for
researchers are described next, in the order in which they were developed.
(p. 67) The 1970s saw the earliest development of environmental attitudes scales. The Maloney-Ward Ecology
Inventory (Maloney & Ward, 1973; Maloney, Ward, & Braucht, 1975) was based on the traditional definition of
attitudes and contained subscales measuring knowledge (cognitive component), affect, and verbal/actual
commitment (conative component). Later, the Weigel Environmental Concern Scale was developed (Weigel &
Weigel, 1978), which was shorter but contained no subscales. The most frequently used environmental
questionnaire was created in the same year by Dunlap and Van Liere (1978). The New Environmental Paradigm
measured the degree to which respondents believe that Earth is sacred and deserves protection for its own sake.
The revised version, the New Ecological Paradigm Scale (Dunlap, Van Liere, Mertig, & Emmet Jones, 2000),
contains 16 items and has been factor analyzed, revealing several possible dimensions (Bechtel, Corral Verdugo,
& de Queiroz Pinheiro, 1999; Noe & Snow, 1990).
In the early 1990s, two German scales were developed to measure environmental concern and environmental
pessimism, respectively (Schahn & Holzer, 1990; Sohr, 1994). A third scale, also developed around that time, was
created to measure environmental worry about exposure to organic solvents (Bowler & Schwarzer, 1991). Worry
was conceptualized as different from pessimism in that pessimism is fatalistic, whereas worry may motivate
appropriate action. Yet another instrument, the Environmentalism Scale, was based on the work of previously
developed values questionnaires (Banerjee & McKeage, 1994). It comprises subscales that measure substantive
environmentalism (attitudes about the severity of environmental problems), external environmentalism (attitudes
about environmental issues outside the self, such as those about legislation), and internal environmentalism
(attitudes about ones own connection to nature and personally relevant issues).
In the late 1990s, three scales were created to examine pro-environmental behavior, and one was developed to
measure specific environmental attitudes. The Motivation Toward the Environment Scale was designed to measure
motivation to engage in environmentally responsible behavior (Pelletier, Tuson, Green-Demers, Noels, & Beaton,
1998) and was supported by at least one study (Villacorta, Koestner, & Lekes, 2003). The same research group
later developed a scale measuring amotivation to engage in pro-environmental behavior (Pelletier, Dion, Tuson, &
Green-Demers, 1999). Another measure, the Survey of Environmental Issue Attitudes, was designed to measure
attitudes toward particular environmental issues and to measure attitudes regarding various specific environmental
issues (Schindler, 1999; Kinnear & Taylor, 1973; Larsen, 1994). Self-report measures have also been developed to
assess environmental attitudes in children (Larson, Green, & Castlebury, 2010; Musser & Diamond, 1999).
A Different Structure?
In proposing their environmental attitude structure, Milfont and Duckitt (2004) conducted a thorough analysis of
existing attitude measures. They combined eight measures of environmental attitudes into a 99-item questionnaire
that was administered to 455 participants. After several rounds of factor analysis, they identified 10 attitude
components that could be further divided into two overarching factors: preservation (including pro-environmental
behavior) and utilization (including economic liberalism and the idea that the environment needs to be preserved
for human consumption).
This structure was also found in a four-nation study (Bogner & Wiseman, 2002). Recently, model was further
expanded and called the Environmental Attitudes Inventory was created (Milfont & Duckitt, 2010). This newer
inventory draws questions from additional environmental attitudes measures and parses preservation and
utilization into 12 subfactors. After testing and refining the scale with samples from multiple countries, the 200-item
scale was reduced to 120 items. Although lengthy, the Environmental Attitudes Inventory is comprehensive and
appears to have strong theoretical and empirical support.
Page 3 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
that beginning in the 1970s, environmental concern and willingness to give up goods to alleviate environmental
problems was declining (Gigliotti, 1992; Thompson & Gasteiger, 1985). In contrast, a study comparing American
adults in 1984 and 1988 found that concern was higher in 1988 (Arcury & Christianson, 1990), and in 1993, a
survey found that college students had strong concern for the environment (but an unwillingness to change their
lifestyles to address their concern; Krause, 1993). Between 1976 and 2005 (with the exception of the early 1990s),
American high school students concern (p. 68) for the environment, especially their sense of personal
responsibility, appeared to decline while their value of materialism slightly increased (Wray-Lake, Flanagan, &
Osgood, 2010). However, a 47-nation survey showed that adult environmental concern was higher in 2007 than in
2002 (Pew Research Center, 2007). Fluctuations in levels of pro-environmental attitudes (cognitive, affective, and
behavioral intentions) probably are related to individual determinants (such as knowledge, values, experience, or
lifestyle) and social determinants (such as business or government action; Lorenzoni, Nicholson-Cole, &
Whitmarsh, 2007)
In recent years, human-caused (anthropogenic) climate change has been flagged by environmental scientists as
possibly the single most important global environmental issue. This message has been met by a general increase in
public awareness of the problem since the late 1980s (e.g., Leiserowitz, 2005), but a small chorus of global
warming deniers remains vocal. One survey reported that 84% of US scientists agreed that anthropogenic global
warming is occurring, but only 49% of the public held this belief (Pew Research Center, 2009). Concern exists that
although awareness of anthropogenic global warming is increasing, denial of the problem may also be increasing
resulting in a strong polarization of opinions.
Age
Most research supports the conclusion that younger people have higher levels of environmental concern than
older people (Arcury & Christianson, 1993; Honnold, 19841985; Klineberg, McKeever, & Rothenbach, 1998;
Zhang, 1994). This holds among teenagers as wellyounger teens appear to be more concerned about
environmental issues than older teens (Szagun & Mesenholl, 1993). However, older individuals may also have
greater variability in their levels of concern than younger individuals (Wright, Caserta, & Lund, 2003). The
difference in level of concern between young and old is explained by an age effect only for young adults
(Honnold, 19841985). That is, the effect of getting older reduced the level of environmental concern over time for
young adults, but an era effect explained the reduction in environmental concern for the rest of the study
population. Older adults experienced a reduction in pro-environmental attitudes because previous eras were more
liberal minded in general than the current one.
Gender
With the exception of a few studies (e.g., Mukherjee, 1993), women tend to show higher levels of environmental
concern than men (Blocker & Eckberg, 1997; Gutteling & Wiegman, 1993; Tikka, Kuitunen, & Tynys, 2000; Zhang,
1994). However, women also seem to exhibit lower levels of pro-environmental behavior and environmental
knowledge than men (Arcury & Christianson, 1993; Gambro & Switzky, 1999; Gifford, Hay, & Boros, 19821983).
That women have less environmental knowledge but more environmental concern is supported by several studies
(Arcury, Scollay, & Johnson, 1987; Gifford et al., 19821983; Grieve & Van Staden, 1985; Schahn & Holzer, 1990;
Stern, Dietz, & Kalof, 1993), and is consistent with the notion that environmental knowledge is not necessarily
associated with concern. Lower levels of knowledge among women may be related to a lack of encouragement to
study science, and higher levels of concern may be related a higher level of altruism and concern for health and
safety (Davidson & Freudenburg, 1996; Dietz, Kalof, & Stern, 2002). However, research on gender and
environmental attitudes is now somewhat dated and should be revisited.
Socioeconomic Status
Individuals engage in political action if they possess the time, resources, and passion to do so. Thus,
environmentalists are generally reported to be middle- or upper-middle-class citizens (Balderjahn, 1988; Howard,
Delgado, Miller, & Gubbins, 1993; Ray, 1981, March). In Africa, a higher income also correlates with a greater
knowledge of environmental issues (Chanda, 1999). However, sometimes a passion to engage in environmental
action is enough on its own. One large study reported that low-income earners may display greater levels of
Page 4 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
environmental concern than high-income earners (Uyeki & Holland, 2000).
International Differences
Countries often differ in their average level of environmental concern. For example, in a four-nation study
evaluating environmental knowledge and self-reported belief in the protectiveness of environmental actions,
people from Japan had the highest environmental knowledge score, but believed their actions were least protective
(Eisler, Eisler, & Yoshida, 2003). The same study found that Americans had the least environmental knowledge, and
that Germans had the lowest felt connection to (p. 69) the sea. Germans and Swedes believed their behaviors
were more highly protective of the environment (relative to the other two countries).
Wealthier countries are frequently reported to be more concerned about the environment (Franzen, 2003;
Inglehart, 1995), but occasionally individuals from less developed countries display equal or greater concern
(Furman, 1998; Sarigll, 2009), and environmental issues may be mentioned more often in developing than in
industrialized countries (Dunlap, Gallup, & Gallup, 1993). These seemingly conflicting findings may be partly
explained by differences in societal-level concern and individual concern. Higher GDP (gross domestic product),
for instance, is associated with greater concern at the national level, but not at the individual level (Kemmelmeier,
Krl, & Young, 2002).
Within the United States, racial groups may hold, on average, different environmental attitudes. Early studies
suggested that African Americans held lower levels of environmental concern than Euro-Americans, but these
measures were culturally biased and less relevant to African Americans than others (Arp, 1996). More recent
studies suggest that African Americans have similar (Parker & McDonough, 1999) or greater environmental
concern than Euro-Americans (Mohai & Bryant, 1998; Uyeki & Holland, 2000). New immigrants may also be more
concerned about the environment than their more acculturated counterparts (Hunter, 2000; Schultz, 2000a).
Environmental concern appears to be high around the world. In the 1990s, surveys found that Chinese teens rated
pollution as their biggest concern (Dodds & Lin, 1992), Spanish citizens rated environmentalism as a central
element of their belief system (Herrera, 1992), and urban Indians rated local air pollution as a major problem
(Dietz, Stern, & Guagnano, 1998). Children surveyed in Portugal, Brazil, and the United States to have
approximately equal levels of environmental concern (Howe, Kahn, & Friedman, 1996; Kahn & Loureno, 2002),
and a recent report from the European Commission (2009) states that members of European countries rank climate
change as the second-worst problem facing the world.
The structure and level of environmental attitudes differ internationally. For example, US citizens are more likely
than Mexicans or Brazilians to perceive environmental issues as humans competing against nature (Bechtel et al.,
1999; Corral-Verdugo & Armendriz, 2000). The similarities in structure of attitudes toward nature and the
environment have also been compared across nations. The structure of American and European environmental
attitudes is rather similar, but distinct from that of the Japanese (Zheng & Yoshino, 2003).
Environmental concern priorities may also differ between rich and poor countries. Residents of wealthy countries
may be more concerned about global environmental issues, and residents of less wealthy nations may be more
concerned about local environmental issues (Brechin, 1999). Perhaps this is because pressing environmental
problems are less apparent in richer countries.
Urban-Rural Residence
Some differences exist in the level of environmental concern for urban and rural dwellers, but again the evidence
is mixed. Farmers and other rural residents, with their need to use environmental resources directly, tend to be
more anthropocentric (believe that nature should be preserved as a resource for consumption) than city residents
who tend to be more ecocentric (believe that nature should be preserved for its own sake) (Bjerke & Kaltenborn,
1999; Rauwald & Moore, 2002). A German study revealed that urbanites showed greater verbal commitment to act
on environmental issues than rural inhabitants, but the groups did not differ in any other measure of environmental
concern (Bogner & Wiseman, 1997). A Canadian study showed that both urban and rural residents had high levels
of environmental concern (Lutz, Simpson-Housley, & de Man, 1999).
Page 5 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
Religion and Politics
A debate exists about the role of Judeo-Christian religion in reducing environmental concern. Fundamentalist
Christians, for example, appear to have generally lower levels of environmental concern than other groups
(Eckberg & Blocker, 1989; Greeley, 1993; Newhouse, 1986; Schultz, 2000b), and this may be related to a
message of mastery over the environment espoused in some passages of the Bible (Eckberg & Blocker, 1996;
Hand & Van Liere, 1984). That is, some groups interpret the Bible as saying that the earth and its resources were
given to humans to use as desired. However, other groups interpret this message differentlythat humans are
charged with taking care of the earth and preserving it, that is, acting as stewards. This may be why one study
found no significant association between biblical literalism or Bible salience and environmental concern (Wolkomir,
Futreal, Woodrum, & Hoban, 1997). Religiosity is also associated with (p. 70) engagement in social and political
issues. Thus, in some cases religion can empower people (especially minorities) to take action on social issues
such as the environment (Arp, 1997).
Conservative politics, traditionally associated with religious values, also predicts lower levels of environmental
concern (Eiser, Hannover, Mann, & Morin, 1990; Schultz, 1994). Belief in anthropogenic global warming in the
United States may be increasingly becoming a partisan issue (rather than an issue of scientific integrity);
Democrats more often accept that humans influence climate change than do Republicans (Akerlof & Maibach,
2011; Dunlap & McCright, 2008).
Page 6 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
(Verplanken, 1989). In the wake of a major earthquake and tsunami in 2011, Japan also experienced a Chernobylsized nuclear accident, and it will be interesting to learn whether residents of that country are also follow this
pattern of reaction.
Environmental Education
Increased levels of environmental concern can be facilitated through formal teaching situations. However, teaching
programs that include environmental education components are not always effective (Eagles & Demare, 1999) and
sometimes even have reverse effects (Bull, 1993). A meta-analysis that reviewed 34 such programs found that
Page 7 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
only 14 had positive effects (Leeming, Dwyer, Porter, & Cobern, 1993). Given a bias for publishing significant (as
opposed to null) results, many more studies showing programs to be unsuccessful may be sitting in researchers
file drawers.
Sometimes environmental education programs (in a university or elementary school) succeed in increasing
knowledge, but not concern (Keen, 1991; Yount & Horton, 1992). This may occur because direct nature
experiences are more likely than indirect experiences to result in increased concern (Duerden & Witt, 2010). For
example, high school students who participated in a six-day wilderness experience subsequently displayed
increased environmental concern (Gillett, Thomas, Skok, & McLaughlin, 1991), and children (ages 9 to 14) in a
summer-camp environmental education program had higher levels of environmental concern than they started
with, particularly if they were first-time campers or stayed at camp for a longer duration (Shepard & Speelman,
1985).
Some environmental education methods appear to be more effective than others. For instance, using a simulation
of local energy use and conservation, presenting the problem as a story (pre-teens), or incorporating games
(children) may improve attitudes toward the problem and increase corresponding action (Dresner, 1989; Hewitt,
1997; Monroe, 1992). A technique known as Issue Investigation and Action Training (IIAT) also appears to hold
some promise. By focusing on specific environmental issues and guiding students to develop creative solutions for
them, IIAT students gain enhanced knowledge about the issues, skills to solve environmental problems, and a belief
that they can solve them. Engagement in active problem solving (p. 72) leads to subsequent engagement in proenvironmental behavior. This program has been successfully employed with middle- and high-school-age children
(Jordan, Hungerford, & Tomera, 1986; Ramsey & Hungerford, 1989; Ramsey, 1993).
Several suggestions for successful environmental education programs have been offered (Boerschig & de Young,
1993; Newhouse, 1990; Pooley & OConnor, 2000). These can be summarized as follows: (1) gear the program to
the students current level of knowledge, attitudes, and moral development; (2) explain both sides of every issue;
(3) encourage contact with nature or the outdoors; (4) promote a sense of personal responsibility; (5) engender
feelings of control over the issue; (6) know potential action strategies and employ action skills; (7) learn about the
issue before teaching it; (8) develop social norms that favor environmental conservation and protection; (9)
enhance environmental sensitivity; and (10) involve emotional components in the program.
Page 8 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
Martnez, 2003; Steg, Dreijerink, & Abrahamse, 2005; Stern, 2000). A Swedish study validated the VBN as an
appropriate model for explaining action, but also elaborated it by demonstrating that self-transcendence (versus
self-enhancement) values may precede more specific pro-environmental values, which only then activate beliefs
(Nordlund & Garvill, 2002).
Cognitive dissonance theory may also explain how environmental attitudes predict corresponding behavior
(Thgersen, 2004). It proposes that people are motivated to maintain attitude-behavior consistency. Therefore, in
situations in which individuals hold a specific pro-environmental attitude, but behave in a manner inconsistent with
that attitude, they will change either their attitude or their behavior.
Bringing attention to a persons attitude-behavior inconsistency (i.e., hypocrisy) is an effective means of reducing
shower times (Dickerson, Thibodeau, Aronson, & Miller, 1992) and increasing energy conservation (Kantola, Syme,
& Campbell, 1984); however, the effect of hypocrisy was seen only in the first week of the two-week energy
conservation study. In the second week, evoking hypocrisy did not have an effect beyond that of providing
energy-saving tips and/or feedback on consumption. Of course, dissonance may work in a negative way, too: if
one holds anti-environmental attitudes, one may achieve consistency by refusing to engage in pro-environmental
actions.
Page 9 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
Meta-analyses (studies that empirically combine the results of multiple studies) have identified a number of
important factors for the mediation or moderation of an environmental attitude-behavior correspondence. People
are more likely to engage in pro-environmental behavior if they (1) know about the issues, (2) know about action
strategies, (3) have an internal locus of control, (4) state a verbal commitment to act, (5) are concerned about the
issues, and (6) feel responsible to act on them (Bamberg & Mser, 2007; Cottrell, 2003; Hines, Hungerford, &
Tomera (1986)).
Several aspects of the environmental issue itself may also make acting on it more likely. If, for example, the
problem appears to be personally threatening (as in the case of global warming in Southern California), individuals
are more likely to behave pro-environmentally (Baldassare & Katz, 1992). Behavior is also more likely if the action
that is required is publicly observable rather than private (Liu & Sibley, 2004).
Conclusion
Environmental attitudes have been extensively studied. Their structure and definition have been carefully specified
and many instruments exist to measure and quantify them in a variety of populations and contexts. Internationally,
environmental knowledge is growing and concern is strong. Numerous demographic, dispositional, political,
religious, and experiential factors increase or decrease environmental concern. Unfortunately, strong concern
does not always result in pro-environmental behavior. Although a clear link exists between attitudes and behavior
(mediated by intentions and other variables), additional factors also importantly influence behavior and must be
considered. Several of these may help make the attitude-behavior link stronger and others may act as
psychological barriers. Some can either increase or decrease environmental concern (e.g., social norms).
Increasing attention to appropriate media campaigns and well-designed pro-environmental messages can
strengthen environmental attitudes and thus make appropriate behavior more likely. Given the current level of
interest in environmental attitudes research, the future looks bright for discoveries of factors that will further
increase the frequency of pro-environmental behaviors arising from environmental attitudes.
Future Directions
Implicit attitude measurement is one fruitful potential avenue for future environmental attitude research. Implicit
attitudes are activated automatically without conscious awareness and apparently have some ability to direct
behavior (Dijksterhuis & Aarts, 2010). In other research areas, such as on stereotypes, implicit attitudes often differ
in content from explicit (self-reported) attitudes and can independently influence behavior (Greenwald, Smith,
Sriram, Bar-Anan, & Nosek, 2009). Implicit attitudes toward genetically modified foods in Great Britain have also
been found to differ from self-reported explicit attitudes (Spence & Townsend, 2006), and an implicit association
task has been used to demonstrate that connectedness to nature may be positively associated with biospheric
concern and negatively associated with egoistic concern (Schultz, Shriver, Tabanico, & Khazian, 2004). This area
of environmental attitudes research deserves further investigation.
References
Page 10 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
Ajzen, I. (1991). The theory of planned behavior. Organizational Behavior and Human Decision Processes, 50,
179211. doi:10.1016/07495978(91)90020-T
Ajzen, I. (2005). Attitudes, personality, and behavior (2nd ed.). Maidenhead, Berkshire, UK; New York: Open
University Press.
Akerlof, K., & Maibach, E. W. (2011). A rose by any other name?: What members of the general public prefer to
call climate change. Climatic Change Letters, 106, 699710.
Antilla, L. (2005). Climate of scepticism: US newspaper coverage of the science of climate change. Global
Environmental Change Part A, 15, 338352. doi:10.1016/j.gloenvcha.2005. 08.003
Arcury, T. A., & Christianson, E. H. (1990). Environmental worldview in response to environmental problems:
Kentucky 1984 and 1988 compared. Environment and Behavior, 22, 387407. doi:10.1177/0013916590223004
Arcury, T. A., & Christianson, E. H. (1993). Rural-urban differences in environmental knowledge and actions.
Journal of Environmental Education, 25, 1925.
Arcury, T. A., Scollay, S. J., & Johnson, T. P. (1987). Sex differences in environmental concern and knowledge: The
case of acid rain. Sex Roles, 16, 463472. doi:10.1007/BF00292481
Arp, W. (1996). Black environmentalism in the local community context. Environment and Behavior, 28, 267282.
doi:10.1177/0013916596283001
Arp, W. (1997). Religiosity: A source of black environmentalism and empowerment? Journal of Black Studies, 28,
255267.
Axelrod, L. J., & Lehman, D. R. (1993). Responding to environmental concerns: What factors guide individual
action? Journal of Environmental Psychology, 13, 149159. doi:10.1016/S02724944(05)801471
Baldassare, M., & Katz, C. (1992). The personal threat of environmental problems as predictor of environmental
practices. Environment and Behavior, 24, 602616. doi:10.1177/0013916592245002
Balderjahn, I. (1988). Personality variables and environmental attitudes as predictors of ecologically responsible
consumption patterns. Journal of Business Research, 17, 5156. doi:10.1016/01482963(88)900227
Bamberg, S. (2003). How does environmental concern influence specific environmentally related behaviors? A new
answer to an old question. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 23, 2132. doi:10.1016/S02724944(02)000786
Bamberg, S., Hunecke, M., & Blbaum, A. (2007). Social context, personal norms, and the use of public
transportation: Two field studies. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 27, 190203.
doi:10.1016/j.jenvp.2007.04.001
Bamberg, S., & Mser, G. (2007). Twenty years after Hines, Hungerford, and Tomera: A new meta-analysis of
psycho-social determinants of pro-environmental behavior. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 27, 1425.
doi:10.1016/j.jenvp.2006.12.002
Banerjee, B., & McKeage, K. (1994). How green is my value: Exploring the relationship between environmentalism
and materialism. Advances in Consumer Research, 21, 147152.
(p. 75) Bang, H., Ellinger, A. E., Hadjimarcou, J., & Traichal, P. A. (2000). Consumer concern, knowledge, belief,
and attitude toward renewable energy: An application of the reasoned action theory. Psychology & Marketing, 17,
449468. doi:10.1002/(SICI)15206793(200006)17:6<449::AID-MAR2>3.0.CO;28
Barr, S. (2007). Factors influencing environmental attitudes and behaviors: A U.K. case study of household waste
management. Environment and Behavior, 39, 435473. doi:10.1177/0013916505283421
Bassett, G. W., Jr., Jenkins-Smith, H., & Silva, C. (1996). On-site storage of high-level nuclear waste: Attitudes and
perceptions of local residents. Risk Analysis, 16, 309319. doi:10.1111/j.15396924.1996.tb01465.x
Page 11 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
Bechtel, R. B., Corral Verdugo, V., & de Queiroz Pinheiro, J. (1999). Environmental belief systems: United States,
Brazil, and Mexico. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology, 30, 122128. doi:10.1177/0022022199030001008
Berger, I. E. (1997). The demographics of recycling and the structure of environmental behavior. Environment and
Behavior, 29, 515531. doi:10.1177/001391659702900404
Bjerke, T., & Kaltenborn, B. P. (1999). The relationship of ecocentric and anthropocentric motives to attitudes
toward large carnivores. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 19, 415421. doi:10.1006/jevp.1999.0135
Blocker, T. J., & Eckberg, D. L. (1997). Gender and environmentalism: Results from the 1993 general social survey.
Social Science Quarterly, 78, 841858.
Boerschig, S., & de Young, R. (1993). Evaluation of selected recycling curricula: Educating the green citizen.
Journal of Environmental Education, 24, 1722.
Bogner, F. X. (1998). The influence of short-term outdoor ecology education on long-term variables of
environmental perspective. Journal of Environmental Education, 29, 1729. doi:10.1080/00958969809599124
Bogner, F. X., & Wiseman, M. (1997). Environmental perception of rural and urban pupils. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 17, 111122. doi:10.1006/jevp.1997.0046
Bogner, F. X., & Wiseman, M. (2002). Environmental perception of French and some Western European secondary
school students. European Journal of Psychology of Education, 17, 318. doi:10.1007/BF03173201
Bord, R. J., Fisher, A., & OConnor, R. E. (1998). Public perceptions of global warming: United states and
international perspectives. Climate Research, 11, 7584.
Borden, R. J., & Schettino, A. P. (1979). Determinants of environmentally responsible behavior. Journal of
Environmental Education, 10, 3539.
Bowler, P. A., Kaiser, F. G., & Hartig, T. (1999). A role for ecological restoration work in university environmental
education. Journal of Environmental Education, 30, 1926. doi:10.1080/00958969909601880
Bowler, R. M., & Schwarzer, R. (1991). Environmental anxiety: Assessing emotional distress and concerns after
toxin exposure. Anxiety Research, 4, 167180.
Boykoff, M. T., & Boykoff, J. M. (2007). Climate change and journalistic norms: A case-study of US mass-media
coverage. Geoforum, 38, 11901204. doi:10.1016/j.geoforum. 2007.01.008
Brechin, S. R. (1999). Objective problems, subjective values, and global environmentalism: Evaluating the
postmaterialist argument and challenging a new explanation. Social Science Quarterly, 80, 793809.
Breckler, S. J. (1984). Empirical validation of affect, behavior, and cognition as distinct components of attitude.
Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 47, 11911205. doi:10.1037/00223514.47.6.1191
Bull, J. N. (1993). The effect of participation in an environmental action program on empowerment, interest and
problem-solving skills of inner city students. Dissertation Abstracts International, 53(10-B), 5481.
Chanda, R. (1999). Correlates and dimensions of environmental quality concern among residents of an African
subtropical city: Gaborone, Botswana. Journal of Environmental Education, 30, 3139.
doi:10.1080/00958969909601868
Chao, Y., & Lam, S. (2011). Measuring responsible environmental behavior: Self-reported and other-reported
measures and their differences in testing a behavioral model. Environment and Behavior, 43, 5371.
doi:10.1177/0013916509350849
Corral-Verdugo, V., & Armendriz, L. I. (2000). The new environmental paradigm in a Mexican community.
Journal of Environmental Education, 31, 2531. doi:10.1080/0095896 0009598642
Cottrell, S. P. (2003). Influence of sociodemographics and environmental attitudes on general responsible
Page 12 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
environmental behavior among recreational boaters. Environment and Behavior, 35, 347375.
doi:10.1177/0013916503035003003
Daneshvary, N., Daneshvary, R., & Schwer, R. K. (1998). Solid-waste recycling behavior and support for curbside
textile recycling. Environment and Behavior, 30, 144161. doi:10.1177/0013916598302002
Davidson, D. J., & Freudenburg, W. R. (1996). Gender and environmental risk concerns: A review and analysis of
available research. Environment and Behavior, 28, 302339. doi:10.1177/0013916596283003
di Nenna, P. M., Paolillo, V., & Giuliani, M. (1987). Le convinzioni ambientaliste dei cacciatori italiani: Indagine
conoscitiva per mezzo dell I.C.A. test. Movimento, 3, 104110.
Dickerson, C. A., Thibodeau, R., Aronson, E., & Miller, D. (1992). Using cognitive dissonance to encourage water
conservation. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 22, 841854. doi:10.1111/j.15591816.1992.tb00928.x
Diekmann, A., & Preisendrfer, P. (1992). Persnliches umweltverhalten: Diskrepanzen zwischen anspruch und
wirklichkeit. Klner Zeitschrift Fr Soziologie Und Sozialpsychologie, 44, 226251.
Dietz, T., Kalof, L., & Stern, P. C. (2002). Gender, values, and environmentalism. Social Science Quarterly, 83, 353
364. doi:10.1111/15406237.00088
Dietz, T., Stern, P. C., & Guagnano, G. A. (1998). Social structural and social psychological bases of environmental
concern. Environment and Behavior, 30, 450471. doi:10.1177/001391659803000402
Dijksterhuis, A., & Aarts, H. (2010). Goals, attention, and (un)consciousness. Annual Review of Psychology, 61,
467490. doi:10.1146/annurev.psych.093008.100445
Dispoto, R. G. (1977). Interrelationships among measures of environmental activity, emotionality, and knowledge.
Educational and Psychological Measurement, 37, 451459. doi:10.1177/001316447703700220
Dodds, J., & Lin, C. (1992). Chinese teenagers concerns about the future: A cross-national comparison.
Adolescence, 27, 481486.
Dresner, M. (1989). Changing energy end-use patterns as a means of reducing global-warming trends. Journal of
Environmental Education, 21, 4146.
(p. 76) Drori, I., & Yuchtman-Yaar, E. (2002). Environmental vulnerability in public perceptions and attitudes: The
case of Israels urban centers. Social Science Quarterly, 83, 5363. doi:10.1111/15406237.00070
Duerden, M. D., & Witt, P. A. (2010). The impact of direct and indirect experiences on the development of
environmental knowledge, attitudes, and behavior. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30, 379392.
doi:10.1016/j.jenvp.2010.03.007
Dunlap, R. E., Gallup, G. H., & Gallup, A. M. (1993). Of global concern: Results of the health and planet survey.
Environment, 35, 3340.
Dunlap, R. E., & McCright, A. M. (2008). A widening gap: Republican and Democratic views on climate change.
Environment: Science and Policy for Sustainable Development, 50, 2635. doi:10.3200/ENVT.50.5.2635
Dunlap, R. E., & Van Liere, K. D. (1978). The new environmental paradigm: A proposed measuring instrument
and preliminary results. Journal of Environmental Education, 9, 1019.
Dunlap, R. E., Van Liere, K. D., Mertig, A. G., & Emmet Jones, R. (2000). Measuring endorsement of the new
ecological paradigm: A revised NEP scale. Journal of Social Issues, 56, 425442. doi:10.1111/00224537.00176
Eagles, P. F., & Demare, R. (1999). Factors influencing childrens environmental attitudes. Journal of Environmental
Education, 30, 3337. doi:10.1080/00958969909601882
Eckberg, D. L., & Blocker, T. J. (1989). Varieties of religious involvement and environmental concerns: Testing the
Lynn White thesis. Journal for the Scientific Study of Religion, 28, 509517. doi:10.2307/1386580
Page 13 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
Eckberg, D. L., & Blocker, T. J. (1996). Christianity, environmentalism, and the theoretical problem of
fundamentalism. Journal for the Scientific Study of Religion, 35, 343355. doi:10.2307/1386410
Eiser, J. R., Hannover, B., Mann, L., & Morin, M. (1990). Nuclear attitudes after Chernobyl: A cross-national study.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 10, 101110. doi:10.1016/S02724944(05)800271
Eisler, A. D., Eisler, H., & Yoshida, M. (2003). Perception of human ecology: Cross-cultural and gender
comparisons. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 23, 89101. doi:10.1016/S02724944(02)00083-X
Elliott, S. J., Taylor, S. M., Walter, S., & Stieb, D. (1993). Modeling psychosocial effects of exposure to solid waste
facilities. Social Science & Medicine, 37, 791804. doi:10.1016/02779536(93)90373-C
European Commission. (2009). Europeans attitudes towards climate change. Retrieved March 20, 2011, from
http://ec.europa.eu/public_opinion/archives/ebs/ebs_322_En.pdf.
Feinberg, M., & Willer, R. (2011). Apocalypse soon? Dire messages reduce belief in global warming by
contradicting just-world beliefs. Psychological Science, 22, 3438. doi:10.1177/0956797610391911
Franzen, A. (2003). Environmental attitudes in international comparison: An analysis of the ISSP surveys 1993 and
2000. Social Science Quarterly, 84, 297308. doi:10.1111/15406237.8402005
Furman, A. (1998). A note on environmental concern in a developing country: Results from an Istanbul survey.
Environment and Behavior, 30, 520534. doi:10.1177/00139165980 3000406
Gambro, J. S., & Switzky, H. N. (1999). Variables associated with American high school students knowledge of
environmental issues related to energy and pollution. Journal of Environmental Education, 30, 1522.
doi:10.1080/0095 8969909601866
Garca-Mira, R., Deus, E. R., Rodrguez, M. d. M. D., & Martnez, J. R. (2003). Predicting environmental attitudes and
behavior. In M. V. Giuliani (Ed.), People, places, and sustainability (pp. 302311). Ashland, OH: Hogrefe & Huber
Publishers.
Gifford, R. (2007). Environmental psychology: Principles and practice (4th ed.). Colville, WA: Optimal books.
Gifford, R. (2011). The dragons of inaction: Psychological barriers that limit climate change mitigation and
adaptation. American Psychologist, 66, 290302.
Gifford, R., & Comeau, L. (2011). Message framing influences perceived climate change competence, engagement,
and behavioral intentions.Global Environmental Change, 21, 13011307.
Gifford, R., Hay, R., & Boros, K. (19821983). Individual differences in environmental attitudes. Journal of
Environmental Education, 14, 1923.
Gigliotti, L. M. (1992). Environmental attitudes: 20 years of change? Journal of Environmental Education, 24, 1526.
Gill, J. D., Crosby, L. A., & Taylor, J. R. (1986). Ecological concern, attitudes, and social norms in voting behavior.
Public Opinion Quarterly, 50, 537554. doi:10.1086/269002
Gillett, D. P., Thomas, G. P., Skok, R. L., & McLaughlin, T. F. (1991). The effects of wilderness camping and hiking on
the self-concept and the environmental attitudes and knowledge of twelfth graders. Journal of Environmental
Education, 22, 3344.
Gillilan, S., Werner, C. M., Olson, L., & Adams, D. (1996). Teaching the concept of precycling: A campaign and
evaluation. Journal of Environmental Education, 28, 1118. doi:10.1080/00958964.1996.9942810
Gken, F., Adaman, F., & Zenginobuz, E. . (2002). On environmental concern, willingness to pay, and
postmaterialist values: Evidence from Istanbul. Environment and Behavior, 34, 616633.
doi:10.1177/0013916502034005003
Greeley, A. (1993). Religion and attitudes toward the environment. Journal for the Scientific Study of Religion, 32,
Page 14 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
1928. doi:10.2307/1386911
Green-Demers, I., Pelletier, L. G., & Mnard, S. (1997). The impact of behavioral difficulty on the saliency of the
association between self-determined motivation and environmental behaviors. Canadian Journal of Behavioral
Science/Revue Canadienne Des Sciences Du Comportement, 29, 157166. doi:10.1037/0008400X.29.3.157
Greenwald, A. G., Smith, C. T., Sriram, N., Bar-Anan, Y., & Nosek, B. A. (2009). Implicit race attitudes predicted vote
in the 2008 U.S. presidential election. Analyses of Social Issues and Public Policy (ASAP), 9, 241253.
doi:10.1111/j.15302415.2009.01195.x
Grendstad, G., & Wollebaek, D. (1998). Greener still? An empirical examination of Eckersleys ecocentric
approach. Environment and Behavior, 30, 653675. doi:10.1177/001391659803000504
Grieve, K. W., & Van Staden, F. J. (1985). Environmental concern in South Africa: An attitudinal study. South African
Journal of Psychology, 15, 135136.
Gutteling, J. M., & Wiegman, O. (1993). Gender-specific reactions to environmental hazards in the Netherlands. Sex
Roles, 28, 433447. doi:10.1007/BF00289606
(p. 77) Hand, C. M., & Van Liere, K. D. (1984). Religion, mastery-over-nature, and environmental concern. Social
Forces, 63, 555570.
Hausbeck, K. W., Milbrath, L. W., & Enright, S. M. (1992). Environmental knowledge, awareness, and concern
among 11th-grade students: New York state. Journal of Environmental Education, 24, 2734.
Heath, Y., & Gifford, R. (2002). Extending the theory of planned behavior: Predicting the use of public
transportation. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 32, 21542185. doi:10.1111/j.15591816.2002.tb02068.x
Heath, Y., & Gifford, R. (2006). Free-market ideology and environmental degradation: The case of belief in global
climate change. Environment and Behavior, 38, 4871. doi:10.1177/0013916505277998
Heberlein, T. A. (1989). Attitudes and environmental management. Journal of Social Issues, 45, 3757.
Heberlein, T. A., & Black, J. S. (1981). Cognitive consistency and environmental action. Environment and Behavior,
13, 717734. doi:10.1177/0013916581136005
Herrera, M. (1992). Environmentalism and political participation: Toward a new system of social beliefs and values?
Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 22, 657676. doi:10.1111/j.15591816.1992.tb00996.x
Hewitt, P. (1997). Games in instruction leading to environmentally responsible behavior. Journal of Environmental
Education, 28, 3537.
Hine, D. W., & Gifford, R. (1991). Fear appeals, individual differences, and environmental concern. Journal of
Environmental Education, 23, 3641.
Hines, J. M., Hungerford, H. R., & Tomera, A. N. (1986). Analysis and synthesis of research on responsible
environmental behavior: A meta-analysis. Journal of Environmental Education, 18, 18.
Holbert, R. L., Kwak, N., & Shah, D. V. (2003). Environmental concern, patterns of television viewing, and proenvironmental behaviors: Integrating models of media consumption and effects. Journal of Broadcasting &
Electronic Media, 47, 177196. doi:10.1207/s15506878jobem4702_2
Hirsh, J. (2010). Personality and environmental concern. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30, 245248.
Homburg, A., & Stolberg, A. (2006). Explaining pro-environmental behavior with a cognitive theory of stress.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 26, 114. doi:10.1016/j.jenvp. 2006.03.003
Honnold, J. A. (19841985). Age and environmental concern: Some specification of effects. Journal of
Environmental Education, 16, 49.
Howard, G. S., Delgado, E., Miller, D., & Gubbins, S. (1993). Transforming values into actions: Ecological
Page 15 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
preservation through energy conservation. Counseling Psychologist, 21, 582596.
doi:10.1177/0011000093214004
Howe, D. C., Kahn, P. H., Jr., & Friedman, B. (1996). Along the Rio Negro: Brazilian childrens environmental views
and values. Developmental Psychology, 32, 979987. doi:10.1037/00121649.32.6.979
Hsu, S., & Roth, R. E. (1996). An assessment of environmental knowledge and attitudes held by community leaders
in the Hualien area of Taiwan. Journal of Environmental Education, 28, 2431.
Hunter, L. M. (2000). A comparison of the environmental attitudes, concern, and behaviors of native-born and
foreign-born U.S. residents. Population and Environment: A Journal of Interdisciplinary Studies, 21, 565580.
doi:10.1007/BF02436772
Inglehart, R. (1995). Public support for environmental protection: Objective problems and subjective values in 43
societies. Political Science and Politics, 28, 5772.
Iversen, H., & Rundmo, T. . (2001). Environmental concern and environmental behavior among the Norwegian
public. Journal of Risk Research, 5, 265279. doi:10.1080/13669870110115434
Joireman, J., Truelove, H. B., & Duell, B. (2010). Effect of outdoor temperature, heat primes and anchoring on belief
in global warming. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30, 358367. doi:10.1016/j.jenvp.2010.03.004
Jordan, J. R., Hungerford, H. R., & Tomera, A. N. (1986). Effects of two residential environmental workshops on high
school students. Journal of Environmental Education, 18, 1522.
Jurin, R. R., & Fortner, R. W. (2002). Symbolic beliefs as barriers to responsible environmental behavior.
Environmental Education Research, 8, 373394. doi: 10.1080/1350462022000026791
Kahn, P. H., Jr., & Loureno, O. (2002). Water, air, fire, and earth: A developmental study in Portugal of
environmental moral reasoning. Environment and Behavior, 34, 405430. doi:10.1177/00116502034004001
Kaiser, F. G. (1998). A general measure of ecological behavior. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 28, 395422.
doi:10.1111/j.15591816.1998.tb01712.x
Kaiser, F. G., Ranney, M., Hartig, T., & Bowler, P. A. (1999). Ecological behavior, environmental attitude, and
feelings of responsibility for the environment. European Psychologist, 4, 5974. doi:10.1027//10169040.4.2.59
Kaiser, F. G., & Shimoda, T. A. (1999). Responsibility as a predictor of ecological behavior. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 19, 243253. doi:10.1006/jevp.1998.9123
Kantola, S. J., Syme, G. J., & Campbell, N. A. (1984). Cognitive dissonance and energy conservation. Journal of
Applied Psychology, 69, 416421. doi:10.1037/00219010.69.3.416
Keen, M. (1991). The effect of the Sunship Earth program on knowledge and attitude development. Journal of
Environmental Education, 22, 2832.
Kemmelmeier, M., Krl, G., & Young, H. K. (2002). Values, economics, and proenvironmental attitudes in 22
societies. Cross-Cultural Research: The Journal of Comparative Social Science, 36, 256285.
doi:10.1177/10697102036003004
Kilbourne, W. E., Beckmann, S. C., & Thelen, E. (2002). The role of the dominant social paradigm in environmental
attitudes: A multinational examination. Journal of Business Research, 55, 193204. doi:10.1016/S0148
2963(00)001417
Kinnear, T. C., & Taylor, J. R. (1973). The effect of ecological concern on brand perceptions. Journal of Marketing
Research, 10, 191197. doi:10.2307/3149825
Klineberg, S. L., McKeever, M., & Rothenbach, B. (1998). Demographic predictors of environmental concern: It
does make a difference how its measured. Social Science Quarterly, 79, 734753.
Page 16 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
Krause, D. (1993). Environmental consciousness: An empirical study. Environment and Behavior, 25, 126142.
doi:10.1177/0013916593251007
Kuhlemeier, H., van den Bergh, H., & Lagerweij, N. (1999). Environmental knowledge, attitudes, and behavior in
Dutch secondary education. Journal of Environmental Education, 30, 414. doi:10.1080/00958969909601864
(p. 78) Larsen, K. S. (1994). Attitudes toward the transportation of nuclear waste: The development of a Likerttype scale. Journal of Social Psychology, 134, 2734.
Larson, L. R., Green, G. T., & Castleberry, S. B. (2010). Construction and validation of an instrument to measure
environmental orientations in a diverse group of children Environment and Behavior, 43, 7289.
doi:10.1177/0013916509345212
Laudenslager, M. S., Holt, D. T., & Lofgren, S. T. (2004). Understanding air force members intentions to participate
in pro-environmental behaviors: An application of the theory of planned behavior. Perceptual and Motor Skills, 98,
11621170. doi:10.2466/PMS.98.4.11621170
Leeming, F. C., Dwyer, W. O., Porter, B. E., & Cobern, M. K. (1993). Outcome research in environmental education:
A critical review. Journal of Environmental Education, 24, 821.
Leiserowitz, A. A. (2005). American risk perceptions: Is climate change dangerous? Risk Analysis, 25, 14331442.
doi:10.1111/j.15406261.2005.00690.x
Lima, M. L., & Castro, P. (2005). Cultural theory meets the community: Worldviews and local issues. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 25, 2335. doi:10.1016/j.jenvp. 2004.11.004
Liu, J. H., & Sibley, C. G. (2004). Attitudes and behavior in social space: Public good interventions based on shared
representations and environmental influences. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 24, 373384.
doi:10.1016/j.jenvp.2003.12.003
Lorenzoni, I., Nicholson-Cole, S., & Whitmarsh, L. (2007). Barriers perceived to engaging with climate change
among the UK public and their policy implications. Global Environmental Change, 17, 445459.
doi:10.1016/j.gloenvcha.2007. 01.004
Lutz, A. R., Simpson-Housley, P., & de Man, A. F. (1999). Wilderness: Rural and urban attitudes and perceptions.
Environment and Behavior, 31, 259266. doi:10.1177/0013 9169921972092
Lynne, G. D., & Rola, L. R. (1988). Improving attitude-behavior prediction models with economic variables: Farmer
actions toward soil conservation. Journal of Social Psychology, 128, 1928.
Lyons, E., & Breakwell, G. M. (1994). Factors predicting environmental concern and indifference in 13- to 16-yearolds. Environment and Behavior, 26, 223238. doi:10.1177/001391659402600205
MacGregor, D. (1991). Worry over technological activities and life concerns. Risk Analysis, 11, 315324.
doi:10.1111/j.15396924.1991.tb00607.x
Maloney, M. P., & Ward, M. P. (1973). Ecology: Lets hear from the people: An objective scale for the measurement
of ecological attitudes and knowledge. American Psychologist, 28, 583586. doi:10.1037/h0034936
Maloney, M. P., Ward, M. P., & Braucht, G. N. (1975). A revised scale for the measurement of ecological attitudes
and knowledge. American Psychologist, 30, 787790. doi:10.1037/h0084394
Manzo, L. C., & Weinstein, N. D. (1987). Behavioral commitment to environmental protection: A study of active and
nonactive members of the Sierra Club. Environment and Behavior, 19, 673694. doi:10.1177/0013916587196002
McAllister, I., & Studlar, D. T. (1999). Green versus brown: Explaining environmental commitment in Australia.
Social Science Quarterly, 80, 775792.
Midden, C. J., & Verplanken, B. (1990). The stability of nuclear attitudes after Chernobyl. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 10, 111119. doi:10.1016/S02724944(05)801227
Page 17 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
Milfont, T. L. (2008). The effects of social desirability on self-reported environmental attitudes and ecological
behavior. The Environmentalist, 29, 263269. doi:10.1007/s1066900891922
Milfont, T. L., & Duckitt, J. (2004). The structure of environmental attitudes: A first- and second-order confirmatory
factor analysis. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 24, 289303. doi:10.1016/j.jenvp.2004.09.001
Milfont, T. L., & Duckitt, J. (2010). The environmental attitudes inventory: A valid and reliable measure to assess the
structure of environmental attitudes. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30, 8094.
doi:10.1016/j.jenvp.2009.09.001
Milfont, T. L., Duckitt, J., & Wagner, C. (2010). A cross-cultural test of the value-attitude-behavior hierarchy. Journal
of Applied Social Psychology, 40, 27912813.
Milfont, T. L., & Gouveia, V. V. (2006). Time perspective and values: An exploratory study of their relations to
environmental attitudes. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 26, 7282. doi:10.1016/j.jenvp.2006.03.001
Mobley, C., Vagias, W. M., & DeWard, S. L. (2010). Exploring additional determinants of environmentally
responsible behavior: The influence of environmental literature and environmental attitudes. Environment and
Behavior, 42, 420447. doi:10.1177/0013916508325002
Mohai, P., & Bryant, B. (1998). Is there a race effect on concern for environmental quality? Public Opinion
Quarterly, 62, 475505. doi:10.1086/297858
Monroe, M. C. (1992). The effect of interesting environmental stories on knowledge and action-taking attitudes.
Dissertation Abstracts International, 52(11-A), 3867.
Moser, S. C. (2010). Communicating climate change: History, challenges, process and future directions. Wiley
Interdisciplinary Reviews: Climate Change, 1, 3153. doi:10.1002/wcc.11
Mukherjee, B. N. (1993). Public response to air pollution in Calcutta proper. Journal of Environmental Psychology,
13, 207230. doi:10.1016/S02724944(05)801744
Musser, L. M., & Diamond, K. E. (1999). The childrens attitudes toward the environment scale for preschool
children. Journal of Environmental Education, 30, 2330. doi:10.1080/00958969909601867
Nemiroff, L. S., & McKenzie-Mohr, D. (1992). Determinants and distinguishing variables of pro-disarmament
behavior and responsible environmental behavior. Journal of Social Behavior & Personality, 7, 124.
Newhouse, C. H. (1986). An investigation of the relationship between environmental behaviors and personality
factors in church members and environmentalists. Dissertation Abstracts International, 46(12-A, Pt 1), 3884.
Newhouse, N. (1990). Implications of attitude and behavior research for environmental conservation. Journal of
Environmental Education, 22, 2632.
Nilsson, A., von Borgstede, C., & Biel, A. (2004). Willingness to accept climate change strategies: The effect of
values and norms. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 24, 267277. doi:10.1016/j.jenvp.2004.06.002
Noe, F. P., & Snow, R. (1990). The new environmental paradigm and further scale analysis. Journal of
Environmental Education, 21, 2026.
(p. 79) Nordlund, A. M., & Garvill, J. (2002). Value structures behind proenvironmental behavior. Environment and
Behavior, 34, 740756. doi:10.1177/001391602237244
OConnor, R. E., Bord, R. J., Yarnal, B., & Wiefek, N. (2002). Who wants to reduce greenhouse gas emissions?
Social Science Quarterly, 83, 117. doi:10.1111/15406237. 00067
ORiordan, T. (1976). Attitudes, behavior, and environmental policy issues. In I. Altman & J. F. Wohlwill (Eds.),
Human behavior and environment: Advances in theory and research (1st ed., pp. 126). New York: Plenum Press.
Osbaldiston, R., & Sheldon, K. M. (2003). Promoting internalized motivation for environmentally responsible
Page 18 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
behavior: A prospective study of environmental goals. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 23, 349357.
doi:10.1016/S02724944(03)000355
Ostman, R. E., & Parker, J. L. (1987). Impact of education, age, newspapers, and television on environmental
knowledge, concerns, and behaviors. Journal of Environmental Education, 19, 39.
Painter, J., Semenik, R., & Belk, R. (1983). Is there a generalized energy conservation ethic? A comparison of the
determinants of gasoline and home heating energy conservation. Journal of Economic Psychology, 3, 317331.
doi:10.1016/01674870(83)900090
Palmer, J. A. (1993). Development of concern for the environment and formative experiences of educators. Journal
of Environmental Education, 24, 2630.
Parker, J. D., & McDonough, M. H. (1999). Environmentalism of African Americans: An analysis of the subculture
and barriers theories. Environment and Behavior, 31, 155177. doi:10.1177/00139169921972047
Pelletier, L. G., Dion, S., Tuson, K., & Green-Demers, I. (1999). Why do people fail to adopt environmental protective
behaviors? Toward a taxonomy of environmental amotivation. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 29, 2481
2504. doi:10.1111/j.15591816.1999.tb00122.x
Pelletier, L. G., Tuson, K. M., Green-Demers, I., Noels, K., & Beaton, A. M. (1998). Why are you doing things for the
environment? The motivation toward the environment scale (MTES). Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 28, 437
468. doi:10.1111/j.15591816.1998.tb01714.x
Pew Research Center. (2007). Rising environmental concern in 47-nation survey. Retrieved March 26, 2011, from
http://pewglobal.org/files/pdf/256.pdf.
Pew Research Center. (2009). Public praises science; scientists fault public, media. Retrieved March 20, 2011,
from http://people-press.org/report/528.
Pooley, J. A., & OConnor, M. (2000). Environmental education and attitudes: Emotions and beliefs are what is
needed. Environment and Behavior, 32, 711723. doi:10.1177/00139160021972757
Poortinga, W., Steg, L., & Vlek, C. (2004). Values, environmental concern, and environmental behavior: A study
into household energy use. Environment and Behavior, 36, 7093. doi:10.1177/0013916503251466
Ramsey, J. M. (1993). The effects of issue investigation and action training on eighth-grade students environmental
behavior. Journal of Environmental Education, 24, 3136.
Ramsey, J. M., & Hungerford, H. (1989). The effects of issue investigation and action training on environmental
behavior in seventh-grade students. Journal of Environmental Education, 20, 2934.
Rauwald, K. S., & Moore, C. F. (2002). Environmental attitudes as predictors of policy support across three
countries. Environment and Behavior, 34, 709739. doi:10.1177/001391 602237243
Ray, J. J. (1981, March). Are environmental activists middle class? Tableaus, 152, 67.
Reid, I., & Sadi, I. (1997). Jordanian and British primary schoolchildrens attitudes towards the environment.
Educational Studies, 23, 473480. doi:10.1080/0305569970230311
Sarigll, E. (2009). A cross-country exploration of environmental attitudes. Environment and Behavior, 41, 365
386. doi:10.1177/0013916507313920
Schahn, J., & Holzer, E. (1990). Konstruktion, validierung und anwendung von skalen zur erfassung des
individuellen umweltbewubtsein. Zeitschrift Fr Differentielle Und Diagnostische Psychologie, 11, 185204.
Schindler, F. H. (1999). Development of the survey of environmental issue attitudes. Journal of Environmental
Education, 31, 1216.
Schuett, M. A., & Ostergren, D. (2003). Environmental concern and involvement of individuals in selected voluntary
Page 19 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
associations. Journal of Environmental Education, 34, 3038. doi:10.1080/00958960309603485
Schultz, P. W. (1994). Authoritarianism and attitudes toward the environment. Environment and Behavior, 26, 25
37. doi:10.1177/0013916594261002
Schultz, P. W. (1996). Effort as a moderator of the attitude-behavior relationship: General environmental concern
and recycling. Social Psychology Quarterly, 59, 375383. doi: 10.2307/2787078
Schultz, P. W. (2000a). Acculturation and ecological worldview among Latino Americans. Journal of Environmental
Education, 31, 2227. doi:10.1080/00958960009598635
Schultz, P. W. (2000b). A multinational perspective on the relation between Judeo-Christian religious beliefs and
attitudes of environmental concern. Environment and Behavior, 32, 576591. doi:10.1177/00139160021972676
Schultz, P. W., Shriver, C., Tabanico, J. J., & Khazian, A. M. (2004). Implicit connections with nature. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 24, 3142. doi:10.1016/S0272 4944(03)000227
Schwartz, S. H. (1977). Normative influences on altruism. Advances in Experimental Social Psychology, 10, 221
279. doi:10.1016/S00652601(08)603585
Scott, D., & Willits, F. K. (1994). Environmental attitudes and behavior: A Pennsylvania survey. Environment and
Behavior, 26, 239260. doi:10.1177/001391659402600206
Sguin, C., Pelletier, L. G., & Hunsley, J. (1998). Toward a model of environmental activism. Environment and
Behavior, 30, 628652. doi:10.1177/001391659803000503
Shanahan, J., Morgan, M., & Stenbjerre, M. (1997). Green or brown? Television and the cultivation of environmental
concern. Journal of Broadcasting & Electronic Media, 41, 305323.
Shepard, C. L., & Speelman, L. R. (1985). Affecting environmental attitudes through outdoor education. Journal of
Environmental Education, 17, 2023.
Shrigley, R. L., Koballa, T. R., & Simpson, R. D. (1988). Defining attitude for science educators. Journal of Research
in Science Teaching, 25, 659678. doi:10.1002/tea.3660250805
Sivek, D. J., & Hungerford, H. (1989). Predictors of responsible behavior in members of three Wisconsin
conservation organizations. Journal of Environmental Education, 21, 3540.
(p. 80) Sohr, S. (1994). Ist es schon, fnf nach zwlf?Entwicklung einer skala zu kologischer
hoffnungslosigkeit. Praxis Der Kinderpsychologie Und Kinderpsychiatrie, 43, 203208.
Spence, A., & Townsend, E. (2006). Examining consumer behavior toward genetically modified (GM) food in Britain.
Risk Analysis, 26, 657670. doi:10.1111/j.15396924.2006. 00777.x
Steg, L., Dreijerink, L., & Abrahamse, W. (2005). Factors influencing the acceptability of energy policies: A test of
VBN theory. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 25, 415425. doi:10.1016/j.jenvp.2005.08.003
Steg, L., & Vlek, C. (2009). Encouraging pro-environmental behavior: An integrative review and research agenda.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 29, 309317. doi:10.1016/j.jenvp.2008.10.004
Stern, P. C. (2000). Toward a coherent theory of environmentally significant behavior. Journal of Social Issues, 56,
407424. doi:10.1111/00224537.00175
Stern, P. C., Dietz, T., & Kalof, L. (1993). Value orientations, gender, and environmental concern. Environment and
Behavior, 25, 322348. doi:10.1177/0013916593255002
Sussman, R., & Gifford, R. (2011). Be the change you want to see: modeling food composting in public places.
Environment & Behavior. doi: 10.1177/0013916511431274
Syme, G. J., Beven, C. E., & Sumner, N. R. (1993). Motivation for reported involvement in local wetland
preservation: The roles of knowledge, disposition, problem assessment, and arousal. Environment and Behavior,
Page 20 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
25, 586606. doi:10. 1177/0013916593254003
Syme, G. J., & Nancarrow, B. E. (1992). Predicting public involvement in urban water management and planning.
Environment and Behavior, 24, 738758. doi:10.1177/0013916592246003
Szagun, G., & Mesenholl, E. (1993). Environmental ethics: An empirical study of West German adolescents. Journal
of Environmental Education, 25, 3744.
Tanner, C., & Kast, S. W. (2003). Promoting sustainable consumption: Determinants of green purchases by Swiss
consumers. Psychology & Marketing, 20, 883902. doi:10.1002/mar.10101
Tarrant, M. A., & Cordell, H. K. (1997). The effect of respondent characteristics on general environmental attitudebehavior correspondence. Environment and Behavior, 29, 618637. doi:10.1177/0013916597295002
Teisl, M. F., & OBrien, K. (2003). Who cares and who acts? Outdoor recreationists exhibit different levels of
environmental concern and behavior. Environment and Behavior, 35, 506522.
doi:10.1177/0013916503035004004
Thgersen, J. (2004). A cognitive dissonance interpretation of consistencies and inconsistencies in
environmentally responsible behavior. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 24, 93103. doi:10.1016/S0272
4944(03) 000392
Thompson, J. C., & Gasteiger, E. L. (1985). Environmental attitude survey of university students: 1971 vs. 1981.
Journal of Environmental Education, 17, 1322.
Tikka, P., Kuitunen, M. T., & Tynys, S. M. (2000). Effects of educational background on students attitudes, activity
levels, and knowledge concerning the environment. Journal of Environmental Education, 31, 1219.
doi:10.1080/00958960009598640
Uyeki, E. S., & Holland, L. J. (2000). Diffusion of pro-environment attitudes? American Behavioral Scientist, 43,
646662. doi:10.1177/00027640021955478
Verplanken, B. (1989). Beliefs, attitudes, and intentions toward nuclear energy before and after Chernobyl in a
longitudinal within-subjects design. Environment and Behavior, 21, 371392. doi:10.1177/0013916589214001
Villacorta, M., Koestner, R., & Lekes, N. (2003). Further validation of the motivation toward the environment scale.
Environment and Behavior, 35, 486505. doi:10.1177/0013916503035 004003
Vogel, S. (1996). Farmers environmental attitudes and behavior: A case study for Austria. Environment and
Behavior, 28, 591613. doi:10.1177/001391659602800502
Weigel, R. H., & Newman, L. S. (1976). Increasing attitude-behavior correspondence by broadening the scope of
the behavioral measure. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 33, 793802. doi:10.1037/0022
3514.33.6.793
Weigel, R. H., & Weigel, J. (1978). Environmental concern: The development of a measure. Environment and
Behavior, 10, 315. doi:10.1177/0013916578101001
Whitmarsh, L. (2009). Behavioral responses to climate change: Asymmetry of intentions and impacts. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 29, 1323. doi:10.1016/j.jenvp.2008.05.003
Wolkomir, M., Futreal, M., Woodrum, E., & Hoban, T. (1997). Substantive religious belief and environmentalism.
Social Science Quarterly, 78, 96108.
Wray-Lake, L., Flanagan, C. A., & Osgood, D. W. (2010). Examining trends in adolescent environmental attitudes,
beliefs, and behaviors across three decades. Environment and Behavior, 42, 6185.
doi:10.1177/0013916509335163
Wright, S. D., Caserta, M., & Lund, D. A. (2003). Older adults attitudes, concerns, and support for environmental
issues in the new west. International Journal of Aging & Human Development, 57, 151179. doi:10.2190/Y73Y-
Page 21 of 22
Environmental Attitudes
0RK9-RP0J-E7HH
Yount, J. R., & Horton, P. B. (1992). Factors influencing environmental attitude: The relationship between
environmental attitude defensibility and cognitive reasoning level. Journal of Research in Science Teaching, 29,
10591078. doi:10.1002/tea.3660291005
Zhang, J. (1994). Environmental hazards in the Chinese publics eyes. Risk Analysis, 14, 163167.
doi:10.1111/j.15396924. 1994.tb00041.x
Zheng, Y., & Yoshino, R. (2003). Diversity patterns of attitudes toward nature and environment in Japan, USA, and
European nations. Behaviormetrika, 30, 2137. doi:10.2333/bhmk.30.21
Robert Gifford
Robert Gifford Department of Psychology University of Victoria Victoria, Canada
Reuven Sussman
Reuven Sussman Department of Psychology University of Victoria Victoria, Canada
Page 22 of 22
Environmental Values
Introduction
Many pro-environmental actions involve a conflict between individual interests in the short term and collective
interests in the long term: individuals need to restrain egoistic tendencies to benefit the environment (e.g.,
Nordlund & Garvill, 2003; Samuelson, 1990; Steg, Dreijerink, & Abrahamse, 2005). For example, traveling by car is
generally believed to be more comfortable than using public transport, and organic products are often more
expensive than regular produce, while environmental quality would improve if individuals reduced car use and
bought organic products. Yet, many people do act pro-environmentally, even though this may be associated with
higher individual costs in the short term. For example, in many countries recycling levels are high, and many
people have insulated their homes. Besides the fact that people may benefit from environmental protection, at least
indirectly and in the long term, one important reason for this may be that individuals value the environment and
want to protect environmental quality. In other cases, people may refrain from pro-environmental actions because
they value their comfort higher than the environment: for example, many people prefer to drive rather than to
travel by public transport. Indeed, human values are believed to play an important role in pro-environmental
actions (Dunlap, Grieneeks, & Rokeach, 1983; Naess, 1989). Some values may inhibit pro-environmental actions,
while other values promote such actions.
(p. 82) In this chapter, we first provide a definition of values, and explain why it is important to study relationships
between values, beliefs, attitudes, norms, and behavior in the environmental domain. Subsequently, we discuss
some prominent theories on values and provide empirical evidence for the significance of values in predicting
Page 1 of 14
Environmental Values
beliefs, norms, and behavior in the environmental domain. We also describe how values affect environmental
behavior, and under which circumstances values are particularly influential. Finally, we discuss conceptual
differences between values and other general antecedents of environmental beliefs, attitudes, norms, and
behaviors, notably ecological worldviews and environmental concern.
Value Theories
Two prominent theories on values that are most widely used in the environmental domain are the theory on social
value orientations (e.g., Messick & McClintock, 1968) and Schwartzs (1992) value theory. We briefly introduce
both theoretical frameworks below. Next we explain the significance of biospheric values and explain why
biospheric values are particularly relevant for understanding environmental beliefs, norms, intentions, and
behavior. Furthermore, we discuss which values are most important to understand environmental action, and
review relevant empirical evidence.
Page 2 of 14
Environmental Values
3. altruistic: preference to maximize the outcomes of others
4. cooperative: preference to maximize joint outcomes
The four value orientations are often combined into two general, overarching social value orientations: proself
values, in which people are concerned particularly with their own interests (ad. 1 and 2) versus prosocial values,
in which individuals are concerned mainly with the interests of others (ad. 3 and 4).
Some studies found that prosocial values were positively related, while proself values were negatively related, to
pro-environmental preferences (Van Vugt, Meertens, & Van Lange, 1995) and intentions (Joireman, Lasane,
Bennett, Richards, & Solaimani, 2001). Furthermore, preferences for traveling by public transport or for carpooling
depended more strongly on the likelihood of congestion for those with strong proself values as compared to those
with strong prosocial values, suggesting that possible negative individual consequences more strongly influenced
preferences for choices in the collective interest of those with strong proself values than those with strong
prosocial values (Van Lange, Van Vugt, Meertens, & De Ruiter, 1998). Also, egoistic environmental consequences
appeared to be more salient to individuals with strong proself values, while social-altruistic environmental
consequences appeared to be more salient to those who strongly endorsed prosocial values (Grling, Fujii,
Grling, & Jakobsson, 2003; Joireman et al., 2001). However, relationships between social value orientations and
environmental beliefs, preferences, and intentions are generally weak, and sometimes even not significant. For
example, social value orientations were not significantly related to preferences for commuting by car versus public
transport (Joireman, Van Lange, & Van Vugt, 2004) and environmental behavior (Joireman et al., 2001). In sum,
empirical evidence of the relevance of social value orientation for pro-environmental beliefs, preferences, and
actions is mixed.
Page 3 of 14
Environmental Values
Studies in the environmental domain generally revealed that environmental beliefs, attitudes, norms, intentions, and
actions are particularly related to the self-enhancement and self-transcendent values: individuals who strongly
endorse (p. 84) self-transcendent values are more likely to have pro-environmental beliefs and norms and to act
pro-environmentally, while the opposite is true for those who strongly endorse self-enhancement values (e.g.,
Collins et al., 2007; Kalof, Dietz, Stern, & Guagnano, 1999; Nordlund & Garvill, 2002, 2003; Schultz, Gouveia,
Cameron, Tankha, Schmuck, & Frank, 2005; Stern, Dietz, & Guagnano, 1998; Stern, Dietz, Kalof, & Guagnano,
1995; Thgersen & lander, 2002; Stern, 2000). Thgersen and lander (2003) also found that environmentalfriendly behaviors are more likely to spread to other areas of ones consumption pattern among those with strong
self-transcendence values, indicating that so-called spillover effects are more likely when self-transcendent values
are strong. A few studies found (weak) relationships between openness to change and conservation values and
pro-environmental beliefs, norms, intentions, and behavior (e.g., Karp, 1996; Kalof et al., 1999; Poortinga, Steg, &
Vlek, 2004; Schultz & Zelezny, 1999; Stern et al., 1998). For example, the more strongly individuals endorsed
openness-to-change values, the more energy they used for transportation purposes (Poortinga et al., 2004). Those
who strongly endorse conservation values were less likely to be concerned about environmental problems
(Schultz & Zelezny, 1999) and to be vegetarians (Kalof et al., 1999), and less willing to sacrifice to benefit the
environment (Stern et al., 1998). In sum, self-enhancement and self-transcendence values seem to be particularly
relevant to understand beliefs, preferences, attitudes, norms, and behavior in the environmental domain.
Biospheric Values
Recently, various environmental psychologists suggested that it is important to examine whether biospheric values
can be distinguished as a separate cluster of self-transcendence values, next to altruistic values (e.g., Stern &
Dietz, 1994; De Groot & Steg, 2008). These scholars proposed that biospheric values may play an important role
in encouraging pro-environmental beliefs, norms, and behaviors. Biospheric values emphasize the intrinsic value
of nature and the environment. The intrinsic value of nature has long been advocated within environmental ethics
(e.g., Leopold, 1949; Naess, 1989; Reid, 1962; Singer, 1975), but the significance of biospheric values was not
studied systematically until recently. Biospheric values reflect a concern with the quality of nature and the
environment for its own sake, without a clear link to the welfare of other human beings. As such, they differ from
altruistic values that reflect a concern with the welfare of other human beings. Both altruistic and biospheric values
reflect self-transcendence or prosocial values. This means that altruistic and biospheric values are expected to
correlate positively, that is, those who endorse altruistic values are also likely to endorse biospheric values, and
vice versa. Also, in many cases both altruistic and biospheric values are likely to promote pro-environmental
beliefs, norms, and actions, because such actions generally benefit the (p. 85) well-being of others and the
biosphere. However, in some situations altruistic and biospheric values may conflict, for example, when one has to
decide to vote for a green or a social party, or to buy fair-trade or organic products.
Recent studies revealed that altruistic and biospheric values can indeed be distinguished empirically (De Groot &
Steg, 2007, 2008, 2010; Grnhj & Thgersen, 2009; Nilsson, von Borgstede, & Biel, 2004; Steg et al., 2005; Steg,
De Groot, Dreijerink, Abrahamse, & Siero, 2011). Altruistic and biospheric values are positively correlated (e.g., De
Groot & Steg, 2007, 2008; Nilsson et al., 2004), which is in line with Schwartzs value theory, as both reflect selftranscendence values. However, not surprisingly, biospheric values are generally more predictive of pro-
Page 4 of 14
Environmental Values
environmental beliefs, norms, and actions than are altruistic values (e.g., De Groot & Steg, 2007, 2008; Nilsson et
al., 2004; Steg et al., 2005). More important, when choices affect altruistic and biospheric values differently, and
thus when altruistic and biospheric values conflict in a particular situation, they predict intentions differently, in the
expected direction. For example, De Groot and Steg (2008) examined relationships between values and likelihood
of donating money to either environmental or humanitarian organizations. Respondents were forced to make a
choice between donating 10 euros to an environmental or a humanitarian organization. Respondents were offered
five choice sets, each comprising one humanitarian and one environmental organization that were similar with
regard to (internationalization) of aid and publicity. A brief description of the mission of each organization was
added. It appeared that people with strong biospheric values were more likely to donate money to environmental
rather than humanitarian organizations, while those with strong altruistic values were more likely to donate money
to humanitarian rather than environmental organizations (De Groot & Steg, 2008).
In sum, recent studies have suggested that it is indeed important to make a distinction between altruistic and
biospheric values. First, even though altruistic and biospheric values are correlated, they can be distinguished
empirically. Second, biospheric values appear to be more predictive of pro-environmental beliefs, intentions, and
behaviors than are altruistic values. Third, when altruistic and biospheric values conflict, strong biospheric values
promote pro-environmental choices, while strong altruistic values make pro-environmental choices less likely.
Based on the above, it has been proposed that three types of values are particularly relevant to understanding
pro-environmental beliefs, norms, intentions, and actions: egoistic values, reflecting a key concern with individual
outcomes, altruistic values, reflecting a concern with the welfare of others, and biospheric values, reflecting a
concern with nature and the environment (see also Stern, Dietz, & Kalof, 1993; Steg et al., 2005; De Groot & Steg,
2007, 2008). Individuals who strongly endorse egoistic values will particularly consider costs and benefits of
environmental actions for them personally, and act pro-environmentally when the perceived benefits of such
actions exceed the perceived costs (and vice versa). For example, a person who strongly endorses egoistic
values is likely to act pro-environmentally if the pro-environmental option also happens to be the cheapest or most
comfortable option. In contrast, individuals who strongly endorse altruistic values will focus on the perceived costs
and benefits of actions for other people. They may, for example, engage in pro-environmental actions, such as
purchasing organic produce, when this benefits the health of their children. Finally, individuals who strongly
endorse biospheric values will mainly base their choices on the perceived costs and benefits of actions for nature
and the environment, and act pro-environmentally when these actions are likely to reduce environmental
problems. Although all three value types provide a distinct basis for pro-environmental actions, and thus all may
promote pro-environmental beliefs and choices, studies generally reveal that individuals who more strongly
endorse altruistic and particularly biospheric values have more positive pro-environmental beliefs and norms, and
are more likely to engage in pro-environmental behavior than those who strongly endorse egoistic values (e.g.,
Honkanen & Verplanken, 2004; De Groot & Steg, 2008, 2010; Karp, 1996; Nilsson et al., 2004; Steg et al., 2005;
Steg et al., 2011; Stern et al., 1998), probably because many pro-environmental behaviors have individual
disadvantages, as explained at the very start of this chapter.
The significance of biospheric values implies that environmental considerations are part of peoples morality and
that both human and nature rights are protected by values (cf. Lindenberg & Steg (in press)). Inglehart (1977)
proposed that the concern about environmental issues in Western societies is due to the emergence of so-called
post-materialistic values in post-industrial societies. The basic idea of Ingleharts (1977) value revolution theory is
that (p. 86) improvements in standards of living and education levels in Western societies resulted in improved
physical and economic security, which makes it more likely that basic materialistic values are fulfilled. Because of
this, individuals can prioritize post-materialistic values that emphasize autonomy and self-expression. Inglehart
(1977) assumed that people will prioritize post-materialistic values only when materialistic values are fulfilled and
survival needs can be taken for granted. This implies that biospheric values will emerge only when basic needs are
fulfilled and that biospheric values are more likely to emerge in Western industrialized societies where affluent
levels are high, while poor people probably cannot afford to support biospheric values since their basic levels of
subsistence are not fulfilled. However, recent studies found support for the distinction between altruistic and
biospheric values in non-Western countries (e.g., Mexico and Indonesia; Helbig, 2010; Hiratsuka, 2010) as well,
even among relatively poor populations (Helbig, 2010). This suggests that the emergence of biospheric values is
not mainly a product of a post-materialist cultural shift, but rather results from multiple sources, such as
observation of or information on environmental degradation (cf. Brenchin and Kempton, 1994), or a stronger
Page 5 of 14
Environmental Values
reliance on environmental systems. This implies that biospheric values may be important and a separate cluster of
values in developing countries and cultures that did not face a post-materialism shift as well.
Hedonic Values
Above we argued that studies generally revealed that values from the self-enhancement versus selftranscendence value dimension are most strongly related to environmental beliefs, preferences, norms, and
actions. Also, we showed that when studying environmental issues, it is important to make a distinction between
altruistic and biospheric values, representing subclusters of self-transcendence values.
It may be useful to distinguish two types of self-enhancement values to understand environmental beliefs, attitudes,
norms, and actions as well. This proposition is based on two lines of research. First, goal framing theory
(Lindenberg & Steg, 2007) proposes that (environmental) behavior is guided by three overarching goals: hedonic
goals to feel better right now, gain goals to improve ones resources, and normative goals to act
appropriately. Goal framing theory suggests that one goal is focal (i.e., one goal is strongest) in a particular
situation and influences preferences and decisions most, while the other goals are in the background and influence
the strength of the focal goal. A priori, hedonic goals are strongest, while normative goals are most in need of
external support. Values determine the likelihood that a particular goal is focal in any situation, as they influence
the extent to which goals are chronically accessible. This implies that normative goals to act appropriately are
more likely to be focal in a particular situation when people strongly endorse altruistic or biospheric values, while
gain goals are more likely to be focal when people strongly endorse egoistic values. In a similar vein, hedonic
goals are more likely to be focal when people strongly endorse hedonic values. So, based on goal framing theory,
we would expect that hedonic values are an important predictor of environmental beliefs, attitudes, norms, and
behavior, as hedonic goals are more likely to be activated among those who strongly endorse hedonic values.
Second, research on the hedonic value of the possession and use of consumption goods (which are typically
associated with environmental impact and are thus examples of environmentally harmful behavior) also suggests
that environmental behavior may be rooted in hedonic values. Indeed, many material products with environmental
impact, such as cars, are purchased and used because of their hedonic value (e.g., Dittmar, 1992; Hirschman &
Holbrook, 1982), and because people derive pleasure from using these products (Steg, Vlek, & Slotegraaf, 2001;
Steg, 2005; Gatersleben, 2007). It is likely that hedonic consumption is rooted in hedonic values, as those with
strong hedonic values are more likely to appreciate hedonic consequences of behavior. So, both goal framing
theory and theories on consumer behavior, in particular the theory on the meaning of material possessions (e.g.,
Dittmar, 1992), suggest that it may be important to distinguish two types of self-enhancement values to understand
environmental beliefs, attitudes, norms, and actions: hedonic and egoistic values.
There is some empirical evidence for the significance of hedonic values in the environmental domain. For example,
Honkanen and Verplanken (2004) found that positive attitudes toward genetically modified (GM) food, and intention
to buy GM food, were more likely among those who strongly endorsed hedonic values, and less likely among those
who strongly endorsed biospheric values. More recently, Steg and colleagues (2012) systematically examined
whether it is worthwhile to include hedonic values in studies in the (p. 87) environmental domain. First, they found
that hedonic values can indeed be clearly distinguished empirically from egoistic values. Not only studies in the
Netherlands, but also in Japan, Indonesia, and Mexico validated the distinction between hedonic, egoistic, altruistic,
and biospheric values (Helbig, 2010; Hiratsuka, 2010), indicating that hedonic and egoistic values form distinct
value clusters. Hedonic and egoistic values were correlated, which is in line with Schwartzs (1992) value
typology, as both reflect self-enhancement values. In many cases, hedonic values appeared to be more strongly
and negatively related to environmental beliefs, preferences, norms, and actions than were egoistic values,
suggesting that particularly hedonic values may inhibit pro-environmental actions (Steg et al., 2012). Furthermore,
Steg et al. (2012) found that the four types of values were systematically and consistently related to valuecongruent preferences. In this study, individuals were asked about their preference for a series of restaurants that
systematically varied in hedonic, egoistic, altruistic, and biospheric aspects. Individuals who strongly endorsed
hedonic values were more likely to base their choice of restaurant on the hedonic attribute varied in the restaurant
descriptions (i.e., whether the food served was tasty), while those who strongly endorsed altruistic values more
strongly based their choice on the working conditions in the restaurant (representing the altruistic attribute
included in the description of the restaurants) and those who endorsed biospheric values particularly considered
Page 6 of 14
Environmental Values
whether organic products were served (i.e., the biospheric attribute). So, preferences were systematically linked to
values; people particularly considered the characteristic of the restaurant that was congruent with their values.
Together, these studies indicate that it is indeed important to include hedonic values in studies on environmental
beliefs, preferences, norms, and actions.
Page 7 of 14
Environmental Values
the, it, a, an) activates central values, which promotes value-congruent actions. More specifically, they
found that people were more likely to donate money to a humanitarian organization (i.e., Amnesty International)
when self-focus was high and when participants strongly endorsed altruistic values. However, a self-focus did not
significantly increase donations to a humanitarian organization when people did not strongly endorse altruistic
values, suggesting that a self-focus particularly promotes value-congruent actions among those who strongly
endorse the relevant values. Together, these results indicate that strong values promote value-congruent actions,
especially when the relevant values are activated and/or when people are self-focused. When altruistic or
biospheric values are linked to or integrated in our self-concept, acting pro-environmentally can make us feel like a
moral person (rather than a selfish person), which is likely to promote pro-environmental actions as people like to
see themselves as morally right (Aronson, 1969; Bolderdijk, Steg, Geller, Lehman, & Postmes, 2012).
Maio and colleagues (Maio & Olson, 1998; Maio, Olson, Allen, & Bernard, 2001) argued that making values
cognitively more accessible is not sufficient to promote value-congruent actions. Rather, values need to be
cognitively supported; that is, individuals should be able to provide reasons for their values. Maio et al. (2001)
argued that value-incongruent actions may result from seeing values as truisms, where people lack cognitive
support for values. In such situations, values are vulnerable to change when they are challenged, because people
have no clear rationale for defending them. In contrast, when values are cognitively supported, they are perceived
to be more rational and activated and people can generate counterarguments when these values are challenged,
thereby counterbalancing situational factors to engage in value-incongruent actions. For example, when the value
helpfulness is cognitively supported and activated, people may help another in need even though this may be
costly to them, while they are less likely to do so when this value is not cognitively supported. In sum, values are
most strongly related to specific beliefs, attitudes, norms, and consequently to behaviors when they are strongly
endorsed, and when they are activated, part of ones self-concept, and cognitively supported.
When values are closely linked to or integrated in ones self concept, they may become an important part of ones
identity, that is, people may mention values to describe themselves (Hitlin, 2003). Indeed, research has shown that
an environmental identity, that is, the extent to which individuals indicate that environmentalism is a central part of
the self, correlates strongly with biospheric values. Moreover, relationships between biospheric values and
environmental behavior are mediated by environmental identity: values were no longer significantly related to
environmental behavior when environmental identity was controlled for (Van der Werff, Steg, & Keizer, 2012),
suggesting that values affect behavior indirectly, via self-identity. When people strongly endorse biospheric
values, it is likely that these values become part of ones self-identity, resulting in a strong environmental (p. 89)
identity, which in turn increases the likelihood of pro-environmental actions.
Page 8 of 14
Environmental Values
environmental problems; worries about environmental problems; general attitudes toward the environment; the
importance of consequences of environmental problems for oneself, others, and the biosphere; and affective
responses to environmental problems (e.g., Axelrod & Lehman, 1993; Baldassare & Katz, 1992; Bamberg, 2003;
Biel & Nilsson, 2005; Fransson & Grling, 1999; Gatersleben, Steg, & Vlek, 2002; Maloney & Ward, 1973; Schultz,
2000, 2001; Schultz et al., 2005; Schultz, Shriver, Tabanico, & Khazian, 2004; Stern et al., 1993; Weigel & Weigel,
1978).
So, values reflect a broader range of motivations and are more encompassing than ecological worldviews and
environmental concern, as values reflect multiple motivations, and not only environmental considerations. Based
on this, one could argue that values should affect ecological worldviews and environmental concern, which in turn
affect behavior-specific beliefs, norms, and environmental actions. In fact, this is exactly what is proposed by the
value-belief-norm theory of environmentalism (Stern, 2000; Stern et al., 1999). Indeed, studies have shown that
values predict NEP and environmental concern (De Groot & Steg, 2008; Schultz et al., 2005; Schultz & Zelezny,
1999; Steg et al., 2005). However, a recent study by Steg et al. (2011) showed that egoistic, altruistic, and
biospheric values predicted a significantly higher proportion of the variance in personal norms toward energy
conservation and in environmental activism, respectively, than did ecological worldviews and environmental
concern. This suggests that values are better predictors of pro-environmental norms and intentions than are
ecological worldviews and environmental concerns, probably because values reflect a wider range of motivations
(rather than only environmental concerns). So, although worldviews and environmental concerns may be rooted in
values, they do not necessarily fully mediate the effects of values on environmental beliefs, norms, and actions,
and values are generally more predictive of pro-environmental beliefs, norms, intentions and behavior than are
ecological worldviews and environmental concern.
Future Directions
In this chapter, we discussed the importance of values in understanding and promoting pro-environmental
behavior. We indicated which values are particularly important in the environmental domain, and how values affect
environmental actions. Also, we described under which circumstances values are particularly predictive of
environmental beliefs, norms, intentions, and behavior, and indicated important conceptual differences between
values and other types of general antecedents of environmental beliefs, attitudes, norms, and behaviors, notably
ecological worldviews and environmental concern. Throughout the chapter, we discussed relevant empirical
evidence on these topics.
Although a rich body of literature is available on values and environmental beliefs, attitudes, norms, and behavior,
there are some important topics to be addressed in future studies. First, studies revealed (p. 90) that particularly
biospheric values strengthen pro-environmental beliefs, attitudes, norms, and action. An important topic for future
research is therefore how biospheric values can best be strengthened and activated to enhance proenvironmental actions. Such studies can build on the important work by Verplanken and Holland (2002) and Maio et
al. (Maio & Olson, 1998; Maio et al., 2001) discussed in this chapter. Second, future studies could examine under
which circumstances values are more likely to affect behavior indirectly, and when direct influences are likely as
well. We suggested that values may be less likely to affect behavior directly when behavior-specific or contextspecific (rather than general) beliefs, attitudes, and norms are controlled for, but this assumption needs to be
tested empirically. A third important topic for future research is to examine how people manage possible conflicts
between values, such as conflicts between hedonic or egoistic values with biospheric values. Which factors affect
the likelihood that one value will be prioritized over other values, and how can we promote that people act upon
their biospheric values when they strongly endorse such values? We hope to be able to provide answers to these
questions in the coming years.
References
Aronson, E. (1969). A theory of cognitive dissonance: A current perspective. In L. Berkowitz (Ed.), Advances in
Experimental Social Psychology (4th ed., pp. 134). New York: Academic Press.
Axelrod, L. J., & Lehman, D. R. (1993). Responding to environmental concern: What factors guide individual action?
Page 9 of 14
Environmental Values
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 13, 149159.
Baldassare, M., & Katz, C. (1992). The personal threat of environmental problems as predictor of environmental
practices. Environment and Behavior, 24, 602616.
Bamberg, S. (2003). How does environmental concern influence specific environmentally related behaviors? A new
answer to an old question. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 23, 2132.
Biel, A., & Nilsson, A. (2005). Religious values and environmental concern: Harmony and detachment. Social
Science Quarterly, 86, 178191.
Bolderdijk, J. W., Steg, L., Geller, E. S., Lehman, P. K., & Postmes, T. (2012). Promoting pro-environmental action: A
self-concept account. Manuscript under review.
Brenchin, S. R., & Kempton, W. (1994). Global environmentalism: A challenge to the materialism thesis? Social
Science Quarterly, 75, 245269.
Collins, C. M., Steg, L., & Koning, M. A. S. (2007). Customers values, beliefs on sustainable corporate performance,
and buying behavior. Psychology & Marketing, 24(6), 555577.
De Groot, J. I. M., & Steg, L. (2007). Value orientations and environmental beliefs in five countries: Validity of an
instrument to measure egoistic, altruistic, and biospheric value orientations. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology,
38, 318332.
De Groot, J., & Steg, L. (2008). Value orientations to explain beliefs related to environmental significant behavior:
How to measure egoistic, altruistic, and biospheric value orientations. Environment and Behavior, 40, 330354.
De Groot, J. I. M., & Steg, L. (2010). Relationships between value orientations, self-determined motivational types
and pro-environmental behavioural intentions. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30, 368378.
De Groot, J. I. M., Steg, L., & Dicke, M. (2008). Transportation trends from a moral perspective: Value orientations,
norms, and reducing car use. In F. N. Gustavsson (Ed.), New transportation research progress. Hauppauge NY:
Nova Science Publishers.
Dittmar, H. (1992). The social psychology of material possessions: To have is to be. Harvester, Wheatsheaf: Hemel
Hempstead, UK.
Dunlap, R. E., Grieneeks, J. K., & Rokeach, M. (1983). Human values and pro-environmental behaviour. In W. D.
Conn (Ed.), Energy and material resources: Attitudes, values, and public policy. Boulder, CO: Westview Press.
Dunlap, R. E., & Van Liere, K. D. (1978). The new environmental paradigm: A proposed measuring instrument
and preliminary results. Journal of Environmental Education, 9, 1019.
Dunlap, R. E., Van Liere, K. D., Mertig, A. G., & Jones, R. E. (2000). Measuring endorsement of the New Ecological
Paradigm: A revised NEP scale. Journal of Social Issues, 56(3), 425442.
Feather, N. T. (1995). Values, valences, and choice: The influence of values on the perceived attractiveness and
choice of alternatives. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 68, 11351151.
Fransson, N., & Grling, T. (1999). Environmental concern: Conceptual definitions, measurement methods, and
research findings. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 19, 369382.
Gardner, G. T., & Stern, P. C. (2002). Environmental problems and human behavior (2nd ed.). Boston: Pearson
Custom Publishing.
Grling, T., Fujii, S., Grling, A., & Jakobsson, C. (2003). Moderating effects of social value orientation on
determinants of proeenvironmental intention. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 23, 19.
Gatersleben, B. (2007). Affective and symbolic aspects of car use: A review. In T. Grling & L. Steg (Eds.), Threats
to the quality of urban life from car traffic: Problems, causes, and solutions (pp. 219234). Amsterdam: Elsevier.
Page 10 of 14
Environmental Values
Gatersleben, B., Steg, L., & Vlek, C. (2002). Measurement and determinants of environmentally significant
consumer behavior. Environment and Behavior, 34(3), 335362.
Grnhj, A. & Thgersen, J. (2009). Like father, like son? Intergenerational transmission of values, attitudes, and
behaviours in the environmental domain. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 29, 414421.
Helbig, A. (2010). Mexico City: Environmental problems caused by values and beliefs? (Unpublished masters
thesis). University of Groningen, Faculty of Behavioural and Social Sciences.
Hiratsuka, J. (2010). Testing the validity of an instrument to measure hedonic, egoistic, altruistic, and biospheric
value orientations. (Unpublished masters thesis). University of Groningen, Faculty of Behavioural and Social
Sciences.
Hirschman, E. C., & Holbrook, M. B. (1982). Hedonic consumption: Emerging concepts, methods, and propositions.
Journal of Marketing, 46(3), 92102.
(p. 91) Hitlin, S. (2003). Values as the core of personal identity: Drawing links between two theories of self. Social
Psychology Quarterly, 66, 118137.
Honkanen, P., & Verplanken, B. (2004). Understanding attitudes towards genetically modified food: The role of
values and attitude strength. Journal of Consumer Policy, 27, 401420.
Inglehart, R. (1977). The silent revolution: Changing values and political styles among Western publics. Princeton,
NJ: Princeton University Press.
Joireman, J. A., Lasane, T. P., Bennett, J., Richards, D., & Solaimani, S. (2001). Integrating social value orientation
and consideration of future consequences within the extended norm activation model of pro-environmental
behavior. British Journal of Social Psychology, 40, 133155.
Joireman, J.A., Van Lange, P.A.M., & Van Vugt, M. (2004). Who cares about the environmental impact of cars?
Those with an eye toward the future. Environment and Behavior, 36, 187206.
Kalof, L., Dietz, T., Stern, P. C., & Guagnano, G.A. (1999). Social psychological and structural influences on
vegetarian beliefs. Rural Sociology, 64, 500511.
Karp, D. G. (1996). Values and their effect on pro-environmental behavior. Environment and Behavior, 28(1), 111
133.
Leopold, A. (1949). A Sand County almanac. New York: Oxford University Press.
Liebrand, W. B. G. (1984). The effect of social motives, communication, and group size on behaviour in an Nperson multi-stage mixed-motive game. European Journal of Social Psychology, 14, 239264.
Lindenberg, S., & Steg, L. (2007). Normative, gain, and hedonic goal-frames guiding environmental behavior.
Journal of Social Issues, 63(1), 117137.
Lindenberg, S., & Steg, L. (in press). Goal-framing theory and norm-guided environmental behavior. In H. Van Trijp
(Ed.), Encouraging Sustainable Behavior. Psychology Press.
Maio, G. R. & Olson, J. M. (1998). Values as truisms: Evidence and implications. Journal of Personality and Social
Psychology, 74, 294311.
Maio, G. R., Olson, J. M., Allen, L., & Bernard, M. (2001). Addressing discrepancies between values and behavior:
The motivating effect of reasons. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 37, 104117.
Maloney, M. P., Ward, M. P. (1973). Ecology: Lets hear from the people. American Psychologist, 28, 583586.
Messick, D. M., & McClintock, C. G. (1968). Motivational basis of choice in experimental games. Journal of
Experimental Social Psychology, 4, 125.
Naess, A. (1989). Ecology, community, and lifestyle. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Page 11 of 14
Environmental Values
Nilsson, A., von Borgstede, C., & Biel, A. (2004). Willingness to accept climate change policy measures: The effect
of values and norms. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 24, 267277.
Nordlund, A. M., & Garvill, J. (2002). Value structures behind pro-environmental behavior. Environment and
Behavior, 34, 740756.
Nordlund, A. M., & Garvill, J. (2003). Effects of values, problem awareness, and personal norm on willingness to
reduce personal car use. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 23, 339347.
Poortinga, W., Steg, L., & Vlek, C. (2004). Values, environmental concern and environmental behavior: A study into
household energy use. Environment and Behavior, 36, 7093.
Reid, L. (1962). The Sociology of Nature. Harmondsworth, UK: Penguin Books.
Rokeach, M. (1973). The nature of human values. New York: Free Press.
Samuelson, C. D. (1990). Energy conservation: A social dilemma approach. Social Behaviour, 5, 207230.
Schultz, P. (2000). Empathizing with nature: The effects of perspective taking on concern for environmental issues.
Journal of Social Issues, 56, 391406.
Schultz, P. W. (2001). The structure of environmental concern for self, other people, and the biosphere. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 21, 327339.
Schultz, P. W., Gouveia, V. V., Cameron, L. D., Tankha, G., Schmuck, P., & Frank, M. (2005). Values and their
relationship to environmental concern and conservation behavior. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology, 36, 457
475.
Schultz, P. W., Shriver, C., Tabanico, J. J., & Khazian, A. M. (2004). Implicit connections with nature. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 24, 3142.
Schultz, P. W., & Zelezny, L. C. (1998). Values and pro-environmental behaviour: A five-country study. Journal of
Cross-Cultural Psychology, 29, 540558.
Schultz, P. W., & Zelezny, L. C. (1999). Values as predictors of environmental attitudes: Evidence for consistency
across 14 countries. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 19, 255265.
Schwartz, S. H. (1992). Universals in the content and structures of values: Theoretical advances and empirical
tests in 20 countries. In M. Zanna (Ed.), Advances in experimental psychology (Vol. 25, pp. 165). Orlando, FL:
Academic Press.
Schwartz, S. H. (1994). Are there universal aspects in the structure and contents of human values? Journal of
Social Issues, 50, 1945.
Schwartz, S. H., & Sagiv, L. (1995). Identifying culture-specifics in the content and structure of values. Journal of
Cross-Cultural Psychology, 26, 92116.
Singer, P. (1973). Animal liberation: A new ethics for our treatment of animals. New York: New York Review/Random
House.
Spini, D. (2003). Measurement equivalence of 10 value types from the Schwartz Value Survey across 21 countries.
Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology, 34, 323.
Steg, L. (2005). Car use: Lust and must. Instrumental, symbolic, and affective motives for car use. Transportation
Research-A, 39(23), 147162.
Steg, L., De Groot, J. I. M., Dreijerink, L., Abrahamse, W., & Siero, F. (2011). General antecedents of personal
norms, policy acceptability, and intentions: The role of values, worldviews, and environmental concern. Society
and Natural Resources, 24(4), 349367.
Steg, L., Dreijerink, L., & Abrahamse, W. (2005). Factors influencing the acceptability of energy policies: Testing
Page 12 of 14
Environmental Values
VBN theory. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 25, 415425.
Steg, L., Perlaviciute, G., Van der Werff, E., & Lurvink, J. (2012). The significance of hedonic values for
environmentally-relevant attitudes, preferences, and actions. Manuscript under review.
Steg, L., Vlek, C., & Slotegraaf, G. (2001). Instrumental-reasoned and symbolic-affective motives for using a motor
car. Transportation Research-F: Psychology and Behaviour, 4(3), 151169.
Stern, P. C. (2000). Toward a coherent theory of environmentally significant behavior. Journal of Social Issues,
56(3), 407424.
Stern, P. C., & Dietz, T. (1994). The value basis of environmental concern. Journal of Social Issues, 50(3), 6584.
(p. 92) Stern, P. C., Dietz, T., Abel, T., Guagnano, G. A., & Kalof, L. (1999). A value-belief-norm theory of support
for social movements: The case of environmentalism. Human Ecology Review, 6, 8197.
Stern, P. C., Dietz, T., & Guagnano, G. A. (1998). A brief inventory of values. Educational and Psychological
Measurement, 58(6), 9841001.
Stern, P. C., Dietz, T., & Kalof, L. (1993). Value orientations, gender, and environmental concern. Environment and
Behavior, 25, 322348.
Stern, P. C., Dietz, T., Kalof, L., & Guagnano, G. A. (1995). Values, beliefs, and pro-environmental action: Attitude
formation toward emergent attitude objects. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 25, 16111636.
Thgersen, J., & lander, F. (2002). Human values and the emergence of a sustainable consumption pattern: A
panel study. Journal of Economic Psychology, 23, 605630.
Thgersen, J., & lander, F. (2003). Spillover of environment-friendly consumer behavior. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 23, 225236.
Van der Werff, E., Steg, L., & Keizer, K. (2012). The value of environmental identity: The relationship between
biospheric values, environmental self-identity, and environmental preferences, intentions and behaviour.
Manuscript under review.
Van Vugt, M., Meertens, R. M., & Van Lange, P. A. M. (1995). Car versus public transportation? The role of social
value orientations in a real-life social dilemma. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 25, 258278.
Van Lange, P. A. M., Van Vugt, M., Meertens, R. M., & De Ruiter, R. A. C. (1998). A social dilemma analysis of
commuting preferences: The role of social values and trust. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 28(9), 796820.
Verplanken, B., & Holland, R. W. (2002). Motivated decision making: Effects of activation and self-centrality of
values on choices and behaviour. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 82, 434447.
Weigel, R. H., & Weigel, J. (1978). Environmental concern: The development of a measure. Environment and
Behavior, 10, 315.
Linda Steg
Linda Steg Faculty of Behavioural and Social Sciences University of Groningen Groningen, The Netherlands
Judith I. M. de Groot
Judith I. M. De Groot School of Design, Engineering & Computing Bournemouth University Dorset, UK
Page 13 of 14
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
Introduction
The concepts of justice, fairness, and equity and all their synonyms are of preeminent importance for
environmental management and environmental psychologists. From their survey of the Lexis-Nexis database of
major newspapers, Clayton and Opotow (2003) noted that for justice issues, the term environmental was
mentioned more than industrial or legal references. It is unfortunate, therefore, that justice issues have not
played a more central role in environmental and conservation psychology, and that the psychological study of
justice has not had more impact on environmental decision-making (Nancarrow & Syme, 2001).
Justice in environmental management is largely to do with the allocation or sharing of the benefits from natural
resources, and the disbenefits associated with access to limited resources or exposure to polluted resources.
While there is a large contribution that can be made by psychology in encouraging conserving behaviors at
household or individual levels (Bamberg & Moser, 2007) and understanding the determinants of support for
environmentally protective policies (Nilsson, von Borgstede, & Biel, 2004), it is evident that even with these
innovations, the potential for conflict around access to natural resources is likely to rise significantly in the 21st
century. Land, fossil fuels, and water will all be subjected to increased competition between users and uses.
Specific allocations for environmental purposes will also need to be made if we are not to lose the crucial
biodiversity upon which human survival depends. These environmental allocations will need to be made in the face
of short-term economic interests. Therefore, the rights of the environment will need to be defined and then
delivered (p. 94) amid widespread public debate. All these issues will demand much greater attention by
Page 1 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
conservation and environmental psychologists than is currently the case. The concern is that much of the
psychologically based literature in justice relates to human services and financial and organizational issues.
When justice is not seen to be done, the potential for conflict regionally and between nations is exacerbated
(Brooks & Trottier, 2010). Access to water in many cases reflects the relative power of nations. If there is ongoing
injustice, conflicts can emerge. Uitto and Wolf (2002) in their introduction to a special issue on this topic, while
acknowledging the association between water and conflict, pointed out that the nuances of the negotiations in the
settlement of some of these disputes are intriguing. Often what begin as water conflicts end up with communitybased solutions that last. In other cases, despite their importance, power differentials leave water matters off the
bargaining table but concessions (p. 95) are made in other economically important areas. In either peace or
conflict, therefore, water allocation issues have much relevance to the development of social justice theory and
practice. Applying justice concepts to water is difficult, but the lessons learned will apply to all natural resources.
One of the important contributions that can be made by psychology is to move the argumentation away from
allocating volumes of water, which is the common frame of reference, toward allocating benefits from water. These
benefits can incorporate all of the rings of the Sphere of Needs, including environmental and economic
components. We contend that the most important outcome of water resources management for people is the
subjective overall benefit that they derive from it (Syme & Nancarrow, 2008). That is, it is the human aspirations
associated with the social benefits, perceived environmental goals, and required economic outcomes that are the
Page 2 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
key elements of sustainable water resources management. We contend that while some of these benefits can be
measured in dollar terms, some cannot (Ackerman & Heinzerling, 2004). Many of these noneconomic dimensions,
such as culture or spirituality, are firmly in the social category. While Western nations have measured the national
welfare from water and other natural resources, Bhutan prefers to view its national welfare in terms of happiness
(Zurick, 2006). This is a rich concept and is compatible with that of measuring benefits. The important advantage of
using the benefits concept is that once benefits have been established, water quality and quantity criteria for
attaining them can then be defined and delivered. For example, water quality underpins almost all of the benefits
associated with the Sphere of Needs. Water quantity underpins recreational amenity benefits, and so on.
Nevertheless, for most nations, both economic and social benefits are important and both need to be included in
any evaluative analysis with environmental benefits in the same metric if our water management is to be
understood. How basic psychological measurement can be successfully used to achieve this is described for the
case of Lake Mulwala in southern Australia (Syme & Nancarrow, 2008; McIntyre et al., 2006), where there was
considerable conflict between water agencies and the local community over the development of a water
management plan.
This benefits approach must be underpinned by social justice theory. The need for such theory to help create
robust decision-making is becoming ever more evident in the light of the uncertainties created by climate change
that has already markedly altered the pattern of precipitation in many regions of the world, thus creating ever more
difficult water allocation challenges. Further, one of the most concerning aspects of climate change in many areas
is the uncertainty of future rainfall and its effects on the productive capacity of different regions. If water sharing
arrangements demand to be changed, justice issues will be paramount in the ability of communities to cope and
adapt to potentially altered resource availability. While many of these issues are shared with other natural
resources, water is a preeminent connector of individuals, communities, and regions. How water is managed in one
situation always has multiplier effects on others. For this reason water and its management have often formed the
basis of enduring institutional and political structures (Guillet, 2006) and often ongoing tensions between and within
nations.
Justice in relation to water management needs to be understood and negotiated between groups of humans and
between humans and the environment. Justice problems can occur at all scales. Micro-issues include managing
water fairly between groups upstream and downstream in a small watershed. Meso-level issues include water
sharing between regions or basins. Macro-issues include those associated with international competition for water.
But the issue of scale when considering justice is not simply the geographic area associated with the water
resource; it has temporal, political, institutional, sociological, and psychological dimensions that are not necessarily
commensurate. The psychological dimension, whether at individual, group, or community level, underpins each of
these dimensions of justice.
Finally, the benefits concept has two levels of consideration: those benefits from water that emanate directly from
outcomes at a local or national level, and those associated with the trading of virtual water1 between nations.
Can the sharing of water benefits between water-rich and water-poor countries at a local level be simultaneously
considered from a moral or justice perspective with the idea of virtual water? That is, can justice be achieved by
providing virtual water to alleviate imbalances between rich and poor countries?
Water management has often been labeled a wicked problem (Head, 2008), in that a solution to one problem is
often a precursor to the advent of another problem, and each should be solved within an adaptive justice
framework. This framework needs to incorporate environments and (p. 96) ecosystems as well as people if
sustainable management is to be reached and then maintained. Because justice is at its root a subjective judgment,
psychology needs to be a basic component in the development of how we can better share water for the overall
public interest.
Following is a brief review of the basic concepts of the social psychology of justice as they apply to water-resource
and environmental management.
Page 3 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
apply knowledge to the ways in which justice actually expresses itself in human decision-making and behavior
associated with environmental management and resource allocation. The key concepts of social psychological
theory and the understanding of lay ethics can provide a basis for sharing natural resources among humans, and
between humans and the environment. However, while these concepts have been very useful, they have often
been found to be rather simplistic by the community in real-world environmental allocation problems. There has
been a long history of theories of justice as they relate to natural resource allocation from virtue theory to various
forms of utility theory and the procedural justice theories of people such as Rawls (1971). This theoretical
development continues today (e.g., Sen, 2010). The ongoing interaction between this literature and psychology is
fragmented.
The difficulty for psychologists is that often, philosophical principles concerning the assessment of allocation are
conditional statements that do not lend themselves readily to traditional psychometric measurement. Nevertheless,
in studies of lay philosophical approaches, the elicitation of such principles using the language of those affected by
the allocation issues can provide effective evaluation of alternative sharing options at community levels, and also
at a more global level.
Equity
The social psychological literature began with research based on three primary concepts: equity, procedural
justice, and distributive justice. Equity seems to have the largest literature and generally follows the formulation of
Rasinski (1987) as having two components: proportionality and equality. Thus in environmental terms,
proportionality can be reflected, for example, in the effort and investment made by irrigators to utilize their land and
allocated water resources. Simply put, those who have invested in an extensive irrigation system and have a
record of high agricultural production because of carefully planned husbandry deserve more water in times of
shortage than those who have simply flooded their crops and hoped for the best. Alternatively, equality suggests
that each entity (both human and environmental) should have equal opportunity to access an adequate amount of
water for basic purposes. These components are used in both individual and community decision-making with
different emphases for differing problems.
The equality component of equity is often referred to as a social allocation in water resources management. The
exact amount of water that should be allocated to everyone is often determined on a needs basis. Generally, for
example, it is interpreted in terms of the amount of clean water that will be needed to allow basic human
requirements for health and food preparation, and these basic needs are sometimes referred to as aspirational
rights in international documents (e.g., Oda and Toyoma, 2002). In agricultural terms, the same social allocation
concept could be related to an adequate supply of food in some cultures, or basic income in others. The definition
of environmental needs is more difficult, and consequently, environmental rights are equally problematic. For
example, how much land or water should be maintained as pristine or conserved is the basis of enduring public
arguments about environmental needs and rights. These deliberations are even more difficult when the
environment has already been highly modified through urban development, agriculture, or mining.
The proportionality component is reflected in the maintenance of relatively high water use due to the investment,
effort, and productivity involved (Syme, Nancarrow, & McCreddin, 1999). It may be noted that a third concept of
accountability is significant in the interpretation of when and how proportionality is used in peoples equity decision
making (Johansson-Stenman & Konow, 2010). Accountability refers to the joint concepts of proportionality and
responsibility. Responsibility simply refers to the degree of control a person has over the outcome. Thus, if the
person or group can control a positive outcome from water use by extra measures to protect the environment
and/or productivity, they are considered to be accountable, and therefore the effort is proportionally rewarded. On
the other hand, if the improved water management is outside their control through environmental or economic (p.
97) constraints, the principle of equality seems to be invoked.
Procedural Justice
The concept of procedural justice gained prominence with the publication of Lind and Tylers (1988) volume, The
Social Psychology of Procedural Justice. It has most commonly been applied to issues relating to nonenvironmental problems, but it has a great relevance to natural resource issues, where it has been relatively
neglected. Procedural justice research concentrates on the characteristics of a decision-making process that
Page 4 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
make it seem just to people who are vulnerable to the consequences. Procedural justice identifies and measures
generalizable dimensions of interaction between the decision makers and stakeholders such as voice (or
evidence that people had the chance to have a say and were listened to), and in the case of wider public input to
environmental decision-making, the representativeness of those involved in the process. There are also a
number of other dimensions. A review of procedural justice concepts and how they may relate to natural resource
decisions is provided by Lawrence, Daniels, and Stankey (1997). The importance of procedurally just decisionmaking in enhancing the role of science in climate adaptation is described by Paavola (2008), who indicated the
need for community influence on setting the priorities for scientific research to assist in just allocation of costs,
benefits, and risks of climate adaptation strategies.
The major hypothesis of procedural justice is that if it is demonstrated in a decision-making process, then the
outcome is more likely to be accepted by those affected. To some extent, this hypothesis has been supported by
environmentally relevant research, but the relationship may not be a simple one.
Oberholzer-Gee, Bohnet, and Frey (1997) found a strong association between procedurally just processes
(incorporating respect, impartiality, adequate information, consent, and fairness) and acceptance of siting of
nuclear facilities in Sweden. Lauber and Knuth (1999) found in regard to public participation in moose management
that the presence of voice, equal opportunity for people to participate, and the adequate representation of
interested parties did not have a relationship with acceptance of the moose management policy, as hypothesized
by procedural justice theory. Nevertheless, the procedural justice issues that did correlate with overall support for
the decision outcome were the receptivity of the management agency, evidence that the public involvement
program did influence decision makers, the perceived degree of knowledge of the managing agency, and feelings
of improved relationships between the community, stakeholder groups, and the agency.
Syme and Nancarrow (2002) evaluated procedural justice characteristics of a large-scale wastewater public
involvement program. They measured participants perceptions of the ease with which they could participate, the
sufficiency of the information given to them, the degree of opportunity they felt they had to contribute to the
process, the adequacy of the variety of opinions expressed, the perceived responsiveness of the water authority
conducting the program, the likelihood that the water authority would make the best decision (measured during the
process), and whether the best decision was made after the process had been completed. While the relationship
between the acceptance of outcome of the program and perceptions of procedural justice were somewhat
equivocal, there was a measurable relationship between positive perceptions of procedural justice from the
program and commitment to participating with the water authority in the future.
Given that trust in environmental agencies has been shown to relate to acceptance of outcomes (Edelenbos &
Klijn, 2007) and that trust is built up by a sense of community with the agency, this relationship between procedural
justice and commitment is important. As has been observed by several authors, environmental management
decisions dont result in a rational one-off solution as originally proposed by the scientific community. They are
made on an ongoing basis around what is the best current estimate of a solution and consist of values and
emotions as well as logic (Cortner & Shannon, 1993). Thus adaptive learning and reframing of problems are
integral to environmental decision-making and must incorporate community input and preference. To achieve this,
agencies need commitment from the community and trust in their processes (Harstone, Failing, & Gregory, 2007).
Some authors separate procedural justice issues into two components: procedural justice, which describes the
structure and organization of the decision-making process, and interactional justice, which pertains to the way in
which the person has been treated in terms of courtesy and respect (Bies, 2005). Thus the role of improved
relationships through public involvement in encouraging acceptance of outcome in the Lauber and Knuth (1999)
situation seems a good example of the significance of interactional justice. While there is some (p. 98) contention
as to whether an interactional justice categorization is justified, it would seem that it is worthy of investigation in the
environmental justice context. This is possibly because it is the interactive justice issues that are most likely to
arouse the emotional as well as the cognitive dimension of decision-making (Epstein, 1994). This is important, as it
has been demonstrated that in many instances it is the emotive rather than the cognitive part of assessment that
leads to behavior. The emotive component is likely to occur during an individuals interaction with decision makers
on an interpersonal basis. If the interaction is pleasant, a commitment to continuing the interaction is likely.
Alternatively, if the individual is ignored or treated in a way that is seen as disrespectful, negative emotion will arise
and protest against injustice is more likely to occur. Judgments of procedural justice, on the other hand, are more
Page 5 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
likely to be cognitive in nature, as the opportunities for involvement and influence can be seen in the timelines of
planning documentation. While there has been relatively little formal research on the structure and significance of
interactional justice in environmental decision-making, it would seem important in terms of justice and, more
important, injustice perceptions (Miller, 2001). This is particularly the case in the context of perceived past
injustices affecting future participation. There are many examples of an agencys public involvement program
being spurned by the community because of the past rude behavior of individual agency employees.
Finally, procedural justice has a central role in considering the rights and the representation of the environment
in public discussion and decision-making. The question is often posed as to who represents the environments
interests (Bryson, 2008). There is obviously no one group anointed in this regard. Scientists have access to
knowledge, which is an important component of achieving procedural justice and may assist in assessing
environmental needs. For example, scientists can inform us about the thresholds of environmental change that will
threaten ecosystem integrity. However, scientists have no particular mandate in regard to the values underpinning
trade-off decisions that define what is ultimately assigned for environmental conservation. This means we need to
be aware of the nature of the values we are trading off to ensure that we are aware of which values are
represented in the final decision. Without such public awareness, the justice considerations are often tacit and are
not necessarily representative of either the values of the community or the fundamental needs of the environment.
The only way the justice of sharing resources between humans and the environment can be adequately
interpreted is through processes that create overt public discussion by a wide range of interests. How this is
accomplished requires an expanded research and evaluation effort into publicly accountable and procedurally just
decision-making.
Distributive Justice
Distributive justice as a concept is related to the evaluation of whether an outcome is just in terms of the
distribution of a resource between individuals. In this way, equity and distributive justice are closely related
concepts, as the dimensions of equity seem to be significant in making distributive justice decisions. It is clear,
however, that it is not just the two dimensions associated with equity that are used when environmental distribution
evaluations are made by individuals. There are many other approaches that have been applied over the centuries
in the development of our moral philosophies. These can vary from the simplest, that of virtue theory, which claims
that rich people are rich because they are virtuous (therefore, rich people should be allocated more land and
water than poor people), through models of sharing such as Kants moral imperative (e.g., people at the top of a
watershed should ensure that they do not take water in a manner that will negatively affect people at the bottom),
various models associated with rights (e.g., I believe the environment should have the same rights as people), to a
variety of utilitarian philosophies associated with economic means for reallocating water (including rules for
compensating losers) (Wenz, 1988). All have distributive justice outcomes and create clear expectations about
who should get what. Syme and Nancarrow (1996) showed that many of these philosophies were held intuitively by
the Australian public when expressing their opinion of environmental policy. Syme et al. (1999) and subsequent
case studies found that these ethical positions, nominated by stakeholders in environmental decision-making,
could be measured and used to assess the overall distributive justice and fairness of particular actions that
would change access to the natural environment. Many of the philosophies of allocation present in the academic
literature were voiced in simple language by water users. A sample of the attitudinal questions derived from these
lay philosophies are provided in Syme et al. (1999).
Distributive justice has been found to correlate positively with procedural justice in a number of (p. 99) studies,
although, as stated earlier, there have been relatively few of these for environmental decision-making. But because
of this relationship, one formulation of fairness theory was developed, the fairness heuristic (e.g., van den Bos,
Lind, Vermunt, & Wilke, 1997a; Syme & Nancarrow, 1997), which combined the two as an ongoing interactive
system.
Fairness
According to Peterson (1994), Once an impression of fairness has been produced it becomes extremely resistant
to change because it provides a cognitively available summary judgment in lieu of a more complicated analysis
of policy each time they are asked. Reliance on fairness heuristics is likely to occur in situations that are ongoing;
Page 6 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
where there is unlikely to be a clear-cut end point; and when an individuals knowledge is incomplete.
Environmental allocation issues are typical of such situations. In addition, environmental issues are replete with
examples of framing perceptions of fairness differently (e.g., Messick, 1993), according to whether one is
considering the acceptability of decisions in general or disinterested terms, or specifically where the impact is likely
to impact personally or locally. These have been termed universal fairness and situational fairness,
respectively (Syme et al., 1999). Universal fairness judgments are those that examine the wider principles
surrounding an environmental problem. Situational fairness judgments relate to specific examples of the problem.
Alternative parallel concepts are macro-justice (group level) and micro-justice (individual level) (Clayton, 1994). An
example of a macro-justice or universal fairness principle would be, We should protect our ecosystems for the
next generation. A micro-justice or situational fairness principle would be, I should be compensated if my water
allocation is to be taken away for ecosystem benefit. In many ways, these concepts can be seen to be associated
with scale. That is, at the macrolevel, governments are expected to derive policies that apply the principles of
justice and reflect the national interest within a culture, whereas micro-justice may place greater emphasis on
ones individual interests within that overall framework.
Micro-justice (justice perceived at the individual level) or situational fairness (fairness related to specific aspects of
a problem) has often been associated with a justice or fairness bias in that people tend to view fairness judgments
from a self-interested perspective. For example, Lange, Loschel, Vogt, and Zeigler (2010) found that people in
different geographic regions generally favor rules that impose lower costs on their regions and higher costs by
implication on other regions. This is perhaps consistent with literature that suggests that people will rationalize their
own contribution to water conservation, or any other environmental issue, as they see themselves as being
naturally more responsible than other members of the community (Tyler & Blader, 2000). Self-interest, of course,
may not be the only motivation, but it is evident that people construct fairness judgments on the basis of arguments
from their own viewpoint to justify their own positions. For example, an argument may be promoted: Compared
with rich people, I use much less water and energy, so they should take responsibility for achieving a higher
proportion of savings than me. This argumentation is at the basis of much of the relative deprivation literature
(Major, 1994; DAmbrosio & Frick, 2007). Feelings of relative deprivation tend to occur when people identify others
as being comparable in terms of their justification for using a resource. A good example has occurred in Perth,
Western Australia, where vegetable growers use groundwater to grow produce. The government wished to meter
them to ensure usage was not in excess of their allocation. The growers pointed out that householders in nearby
suburbs also using groundwater bores and not being metered (or even given an allocation) were comparable users
as a group. Therefore, relatively they were being treated unjustly. Since there is also a tendency to view others as
less responsible than oneself or ones own group, a fairness bias toward oneself and ones own group is often
observed, and arguments about fairness are constructed accordingly (Tyler & Blader, 2000; Clayton & Opotow,
2003).
Presumably this bias is countered in public policy by the dispassionate macro-justice or universal fairness
principles that are applied by decision makers in their disinterested role as public servants, or (hopefully)
politicians judgments in relation to the overall public good. Bias should also be tempered through well-designed
public involvement programs that ensure that these macro-justice or universal principles are met. Syme et al.
(1999), for example, have collected universal fairness principles in regard to water allocation from a community
and then matched specific (or situational) solutions to them. The universal principles did have some variability
among the community, although there were many similarities, which may be expected in any culture. But by
mapping the range of universal principles to the individual solutions, the inclusiveness of the (p. 100)
components of the water allocation solutions could be demonstrated both to the decision makers and to the wider
community. This acted to allow situational, or group bias but curbed its excessive implementation from a publicinterest viewpoint. Nevertheless, fairness bias needs to be recognized and its contribution to fairness judgments
identified.
It is not surprising from the discussion so far that Wilke (1991), in his review of resource allocation gaming
experiments, identified three factors governing peoples allocation of resources. These are greed, efficiency, and
fairness. Therefore, the contribution of justice or fairness to overall decision-making needs to be interpreted in
association with the self-interest motive and the perception of the efficient use of resources (see also Eek & Bies,
2003).
Page 7 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
Self-interest has been commonly studied as the source of motivation in allocation games and has been
demonstrated as a consistent and powerful motivator of sharing behavior. Sometimes, however, the significance of
the variable has been overemphasized at individual, social, and cultural levels (Miller, 1999). Concentration by
policy makers on the self-interest motive in environmental decision-making has created a unidimensional view of
human character and the devaluing of pro-social motivation in human and environmental affairs (Montada, 1998).
This has, at its extreme, led to national policies that undervalue human concerns for long-term sustainability and
the need for public policy to meet those concerns. The inclusion of wider lay ethics in the design and
encouragement of public discussion needs to be facilitated by government to give a more balanced approach to
allocation decisions from the fairness perspective.
Finally, the concept of efficiency has an economic legacy where it is intended to indicate maximizing overall wealth
from the resources available. But there is a broader way in which to consider efficiency and that is in a moral or
ethical way (Syme et al., 1999). There is a universal ethical principle that states that natural resources should not
be wasted when there are alternatives to use less. This is combined with the accountability component of equity
when considering support for policies of resource allocation between people, and between people and the
environment. Examples of this have been shown in Australia by farmers who advocated taking significant amounts
of water away from irrigators in their community who had not invested in modern water-efficient irrigation
technology when they could afford to. The same approach has been taken where farmers have criticized the
return of water to the environment when specific ecological outcomes cannot be demonstrated for the amount of
water being allocated. That is, scientists are not behaving accountably through their failure to use their knowledge
to achieve efficient environmental outcomes. Often because of the difficulty of producing the knowledge to provide
specific answers to the environmental outcomes, intractable arguments have occurred between conservationists
and irrigators worldwide.
Page 8 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
integrated at conceptual and physical scales that make sense to physical scientists such as hydrologists,
economic sense to economists, and institutional sense to policy makers. This is a vexed question, as hydrologists
tend to work on hydrological basin or watershed levels, and economists frequently at a much wider regional or
national level. Finally, policy makers may wish to use natural resource policies in general to deliver macro-social
goals, such as increasing the role of women in decision-making, or ensuring the rights of future generations are
protected.
Page 9 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
Figure 6.2 Schematic diagram of the management cycle and sources of error or variation that can inhibit
the successful execution of fisheries management.
Thus policy development for water resources in different cultures and beliefs needs to balance micro- and macrojustice judgments with appropriately scaled institutional structures. These institutions need to be capable of
delivering just outcomes. In the case of WSD, just outcomes are to promote equality in terms of opportunity, and
less division in social and economic outcomes for different groups (p. 102) within the community. This example
also indicates that the social psychological justice literature needs to be aware of the wide range of philosophies
that must be considered in addition to the foundation concepts upon which social justice research has so far been
based.
Managing Systems
Given that watershed development represents typical issues for the problems of environmental decision-making
that require the integration of environmental, economic, and social considerations within any justice analysis, there
is clearly a need for justice researchers to engage in multi- and trans-disciplinary research (Newell et al., 2005). In
this approach to research, investigators frame the problems together, and through different methodological insights
combine to achieve this integration. In this process, from the justice perspective, there can be many useful
contributions from philosophers, sociologists, political economists, and those involved with institutional analysis.
Many of these approaches will not necessarily use conventional social and environmental psychological methods.
They will, perhaps, have more usage of national and regional statistics and dynamic systems modeling that are
disaggregated, where appropriate, to more localized analyses. Aggregate social psychological data can be put
into such models whereby environmental modeling can be combined in a management cycle. One example for
fisheries is provided by Fulton, Smith, Smith, and van Putten (2010). It can be seen in Figure 6.2 that there are
resource and human components.
It is likely that justice research would fit neatly into the unexpected behavior and decision uncertainty
segments. Van den Bos and Lind (2002) have suggested, for example, that fairness judgments are made as a part
of managing uncertainty in decision-making. Undoubtedly, the vehement recent protests against a water allocation
plan in a significant agricultural river basin in Australia were not expected and revolve, to a significant extent,
around whether the environmental benefits promised by the plan will actually be delivered, and the unknown extent
to which water will be taken away from farmers. Largely because of a perceived lack of procedural justice, a sense
of fairness was not there to counteract these uncertainties. Carefully constructed justice research in conjunction
with the hydrologists and economists working in the basin could have provided much improved procedural justice
and probably a better distributive outcome for both irrigators and the environment. While this is a major issue for
Australia, the same insights could be offered for many regions of the world.
(p. 103) The need to understand how to manage such dynamic social systems within a global justice context is
becoming ever more pressing with the demands of climate change (Vanderheiden, 2008). Perceptions of justice at
Page 10 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
a psychological level among both decision makers and the community at large become highly significant. Not
understanding issues, such as how we manage sharing of the effects of carbon emissions between rich and poor
nations or how and why countries may be prepared to sign on to global agreements that may create justice
problems within their own nations, has been at the core of national and international politics for some time. The lack
of resolution of these justice or ethical issues may prevent the knowledge that has been gained by scientists and
others being applied as the basis of decision-making. While it may be said by some that this is a political rather
than a psychological issue, the fact remains that outcomes of justice negotiations depend on individual judgments
of key individuals, and in many cases, the behavior of small groups. These are contexts in which psychologists
can offer considerable insight (e.g., Abdel-Monem, Bingham, Marincic, & Tomkins, 2010).
Perhaps the most fundamental issue is that, psychologically, individuals have great difficulty in understanding the
nature of dynamic ecological systems (Green, 1997; White, 2008) and there is some contention as to whether
such insights can be readily taught. This systems thinking research could have significance to the justice
literature. If people find difficulty in understanding dynamic social systems, are they capable of making societywide macro-justice judgments?
But there are three other areas of research that have great relevance and need to be systematically addressed if
the questions in the environmental justice area are to be adequately framed by social justice researchers. These
relate to concepts of environmental responsibility, social inclusion, and the psychology of time. Understanding
these three concepts will be highly influential in determining whether humans, as a species, are capable of
achieving environmental sustainability.
All of these issues are components of identity, which has been shown to be a key determinant of the formulation of
our justice considerations (Clayton & Opotow, 2003). We make judgments on the basis of our individual and
collective identities, which are socially and environmentally embedded. And perhaps more tacitly, but still
powerfully, we are defined by our location in the time dimension.
Page 11 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
issues such as climate change.
However, Fujita, Henderson, Eng, Trope, & Liberman (2006) use construal theory (Trope & Liberman, 2003) to
address the issue of space. They suggest that increasing the reported spatial distance of people or events should
have effects on mental representation of events. These effects are similar to those of increasing remoteness on
other dimensions of psychology, such as temporal or social distance. As construal theory would suggest, Fujita et
al. (2006) found that spatially distant events can be seen also as a dimension of psychological distance. That is,
the farther away an event, the more abstract or generalized the language used to describe that event. It is
tempting to think, therefore, that such language would be analogous to the universal or macro-justice principles
described by both Syme et al. (1999) and Clayton (1996, 1998, 2000). These are general statements describing
the overarching principles that should be reflected in decision-making from an overall public-interest perspective
and may not represent exclusion.
Spatially close events can be expressed in more detailed terms, and because of this more situational options can
be described and expressed because of increased knowledge. It is here that situational justice or fairness
judgments come into play simply because there is more local knowledge and less uncertainty in decision-making.
In practical terms, this may be why people are more likely to engage in localized public involvement programs than
regional ones (Forester, 1981; Guidotti & Abercrombie, 2008). There is more attachment and more feelings of
responsibility as well as more knowledge and possibly more emotion. In justice terms, spatial distance may indicate
the generality suggested by construal theory rather than moral exclusion. Simply put, universal fairness or macrojustice statements may be used for faraway places, while both universal and situational judgments are used by
individuals for nearby locations. This hypothesis has yet to be systematically tested. It also does not necessarily
mean that the universal fairness or macro-justice principles are any less significant than micro-justice or situational
fairness principles, which may incorporate attendant emotions. It must also be taken into account that there is not
necessarily a direct correlation between physical distance and perceived moral responsibility.
Tversky (2003) has pointed out that that peoples representation of space differs from space as conceived by
physicists, geometers and cartographers. Space is constructed according to ones role, experience, and
personal activities (see also Droseltis & Vignoles, 2010; Vanclay, Higgins, & Blackshaw, 2008). Therefore, it is
important not only to establish the feelings of personal attachment to close geographical areas, but also to
explore more distanced areas where people feel morally obliged to act or support, perhaps because of their icon
value.
In a study examining urban storm-water watershed management (Syme, Nancarrow, & Jorgensen, 2002),
householders willingness to act to protect the quality of storm-water runoff into the nearby river was assessed.
Respondents were asked which areas in the metropolitan area they had a feeling of responsibility for. To show this,
they were invited to circle on a map the area that they felt personally responsible for. The map was not confined to
their streets near the river, but also included adjacent urban areas. They were also invited to nominate other
options, up to the entire metropolitan area. There was a large range of responses to this question. Some felt
responsible for the whole of the metropolitan area, while others felt they were responsible for only their dwelling
and the land area upon which it was situated. The results showed there were significant individual differences.
From the viewpoint of this discussion, these feelings of responsibility lead to the prediction of individual proenvironmental intentions. It is admitted that these intentions do not necessarily correlate with justice judgments and
this is a topic with little empirical research specifically in relation to justice and allocation decisions. Nevertheless, it
would seem that the question of perceived responsibility needs to be addressed before questions about the justice
of basic resource allocation issues are asked. That is, sharing or allocation preferences need to be understood in
terms of a specific understanding of peoples levels of responsibility. It is likely that these levels of responsibility (or
accountability) will affect both cognitive and emotive judgments about environmental management and allocation
justice.
Labeling fairness judgments as universal or situational may be ill informed if they do not correspond to the
cognitive and moral representation of space of an individual. For example, opposition to restricting park irrigation in
a particular suburb may be viewed as a situational judgment by a local that his or her favorite recreation area has
been impaired. However, it could also reflect a universal judgment that all people are entitled to green space if the
restrictions were limited to one part of the metropolitan area or to lower socioeconomic suburbs. (p. 105) Thus
the often-quoted self-interest motivation for justice judgments needs to be interpreted within understanding the
Page 12 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
geographical context in which people are actually engaging.
Page 13 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
reward at some uncertain time in the future. It may be said that such discounting is equally likely to occur in policymaking settings as for individuals. Nevertheless, there is room for considerable research on the relationship
between the (p. 106) nature of the discount problem presented to people and how it is framed in temporal terms.
Chapman (2001) found in an experimental situation that varying the length of time being considered for the
discount problem resulted in very long periods (up to 900 years) being discounted less than for shorter time
periods.
Attitudinal studies have also demonstrated that many may not want to apply a discount rate for the future (Dietz,
Dan, & Shwom, 2007; Milfont & Gouveia, 2006). Studies have tended to support this in that future orientation has
been shown to predict support for long-term climate change policies. Nevertheless, there is a need for more
detailed justice research unpacking what is meant by intergenerational equity and how justice concerns are
expressed, and at what level. This research needs to be undertaken at both community and policy-maker levels.
Hyperbolic discounting, as Loewenstein (1996) has noted, is particularly the case in addiction where immediate
visceral rewards are available. Loewenstein pointed out, among other things, that we tend to be less altruistic to
others than we would like to be when visceral factors intensify (p. 275) and people underestimate the impact of
visceral factors on other peoples behaviours (p. 276). Both of these statements are relevant to achieving longterm intergenerational and environmental justice.
Clayton and Opotow (2003) have noted that there are many visceral components associated with justice and
particularly lack of justice issues. These are likely to occur in the context of proximate allocation decisions and
particularly when water resources are to be taken from an individual or group. Visceral responses can occur at two
levels, firstly in terms of the threat to personal and group identity and secondly in terms of the emotion resulting
from lack of courtesy associated with poor interactive justice. Prime examples of this occur when project
proponents or government personnel conduct public meetings and interject when citizens are trying to give their
views, or publicly discount the local knowledge. In these cases there will be, as Loewenstein (1996) suggested, a
tendency to think more of ones immediate needs than those of an undifferentiated future generation or an
environment that might be altered anyway because of climate change. Interaction-based short-term visceral justice
issues may limit tolerance between decision makers and the community as each underestimates the stress placed
on others by unpleasant encounters. This process tends to heighten conflict and reinforces the dominance of
short-term issues.
In summary, there are many factors that might influence the discounting of the future in the heat of a short-term
allocation issue, and this will have the tendency to provide unjust decisions for future generations. This
psychological problem is exacerbated by the multiple time frames of human decision-making and ecological and
biophysical cycles (Wood, 2008), which leads us back to the issues faced in fisheries by Fulton et al. (2010) as
depicted in Figure 6.2.
To alleviate this problem, we need to provide a balance and consistency that allows long-term justice principles to
be activated within short-term decision-making cycles, as several authors have demonstrated that psychological
engagement with the long-term future is considerably less than with the short term. To achieve this, perhaps justice
researchers should be looking at the adaptive environmental management literature in which long-term
environmental goals are set, but feedback loops from monitoring systems are engaged to alter short-term
behaviors when outcomes are unexpected (Allen & Stankey, 2009). This, of course, is not simple to do in complex
organizational systems that often occur for multi-objective planning (Edelenbos & Klijn, 2007). Nevertheless, it is
possible, as in the Syme et al. (1999) study, to relate the justice criteria in specific solutions to more universal or
macro-justice judgments. If such a technique were developed on a longitudinal basis and incorporated within the
adaptive learning framework for environmental management, it could have a powerful effect on improving justice
outcomes, particularly those associated with intergenerational equity and the rights of the environment to exist.
The Past
As already noted, environmental allocation decisions do not occur on a one-off basis. For example, the solution to
one water problem is likely to raise awareness of several others. For this reason, the past has an equally important
role in justice considerations as the future. As van den Bos et al. (1997b) have noted, What is fair depends more
on what comes first than on what comes next(p. 95). This is pertinent to both the individual and wider community
decision-making spheres. This is perhaps why procedural and interactive justice evaluations of ongoing decision-
Page 14 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
making are so vital. If the last interaction with a decision-making agency was perceived to be unjust or
disrespectful, the level of (p. 107) perceived justice and trust is likely to be less generous. Certainly van den Bos
et al. (1998) found that those who had no knowledge of an agency tended to be more attentive to procedural
justice issues than those who had experienced procedurally just processes in the past. Presumably this was
because trust had started to develop among the latter group.
Long-term dysfunctional interactions between agencies and community interest groups have greatly marred
debates of justice and injustice in many water issues in many countries. There is a need, therefore, for research
that evaluates the impact of past interactions and perceived injustices to find ways of creating procedurally just
decision-making processes that explicitly deal with past issues in the context of the new sharing problem. That is,
the allocation issues are presented deliberately in past, present, and future contexts and the justice issues
explored in that light. There has been very little research on this issue in the natural resources area.
Conceptually, it would seem that past experiences in relation to justice are likely to affect future acceptance of
allocative decisions. There are several issues that may be considered. For example, do people discount past
injustices backward in time, and if so, what does it mean? Are there thresholds of injustice that will motivate justiceand fairness-related conflicts in the future? Is there a forgiveness that will pardon earlier injustices by taking the
visceral component of injustice out of decision-making after a period of time? While there has been some research
in the workplace on the effects of past perceived injustices (Lilly, Virick, & Hadani, 2010), these important
questions do not seem to have captured the interests of psychologists researching and evaluating justice in the
wider real-world decision-making context.
The discussion of time and the potential significance of procedural justice have highlighted the dearth of
longitudinal studies of justice in environmental issues. There are many long-running water disputes in the local,
regional, and international contexts, so that the opportunity to develop justice theory and practice while assisting in
attaining fair resolutions of these problems is high.
Page 15 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
of regional or whole of river plans that deal with the major allocation issues. In these cases often the hydrological
scale is forgotten as well as the differential effects of water allocation on hydrologically discrete reaches of a river.
By including spatially based hydrological (p. 108) variability and their environmental sustainability requirements,
environmental justice interests can be more cogently addressed for regional planners and within their processes.
Social Discounting
Rachlin and Jones (Jones & Rachlin, 2006; Rachlin & Jones, 2008) have approached the issue of social discounting
in a slightly different way from others by providing monetary choices for forgoing personal benefit and sharing
between imaginary people who were either very close or relatively far away in terms of their acquaintance. This
research uses a methodology very similar to experimental economics approaches to establishing the discount rate
over time. As with many time/reward trade-off findings, there appears to be a hyperbolic relationship between
perceived social distance and willingness to share. Thus as you get further away from someone in terms of their
psychological perceptions, you are more likely to be discounted in terms of sharing. For example, it can be
reasonably hypothesized that people are less likely to discount the interests of family than would an anonymous
bureaucrat from another city when it comes to willingly sharing resources. This relates to more utilitarian theories of
altruism (e.g., Osinski, 2009; Rachlin & Jones, 2010).
As with the scope of justice work, the mechanisms for this social discounting have yet to be explicated and the
findings have yet to be related directly to the justice literature. Nevertheless, Skitka (2003) suggested through her
accessible identity model that justice reasoning occurs when issues are close to ones identity, whether social or
individual. It is reasonable to hypothesize a relationship between social discounting and justice salience. Further, is
there a relationship between this discounting and the scope of justice and justice perceptions? Do people include
the environment as an entity in social discounting and if so, where and how? Jones & Rachlin (2006) in their
experiment asked people to make choices about allocation on a hypothetical scale from 1 to 100, with 100 being
those people furthest away, in order to demonstrate social discounting. There is no reason that this methodology
could not be expanded to include the local and wider environment by modifying the instructions about closeness.
For example, consider the people and things including the environment that are important to you and rate them
on a degree of closeness from 1 to 100. If necessary, prompts could be given. The same experiments could then
be conducted.
If social distances can be assessed for real actors in water allocation debates, does social discounting occur in the
same way as for imagined people of different closeness? It would also be challenging to include a time dimension
(e.g., intergenerational) in the description of the actors, first to establish the social and temporal interaction
distance, and second to see how these dimensions affect both macro- and micro-justice perceptions.
In summary, justice judgments occur in spatial, temporal, and social contexts. To better integrate with
environmental management systems within which these contexts occur, there is a need for us to take greater pains
to understand how the well-established theories of justice can operate more dynamically within these systems.
Page 16 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
combined with the traditional justice concepts of procedural justice, distributive justice, equity, and fairness to
provide a much better understanding for decision makers on how to arrive at sustainable solutions.
The watershed development example demonstrates that justice research has to be closely entwined with the
scales conventionally adopted by (p. 109) hydrologist and economists. Fultons management cycle provides
clear indications of where social justice research can provide a significant impact on environmental decisionmaking. The role of the fairness concept, in particular, has the potential to make significant contributions in
reducing uncertainty in public decision-making processes. It must be remembered, though, that justice judgments
also have their own psychological contexts when they are applied to micro- and macro-environments, and these
may need to be matched to regional, national, and international matters.
A range of possible determinants of judgments of fairness and justice varying in dimension and scale have been
identified in this section. It must be understood that justice judgments occur in a dynamic and interactive envelope
of time, space, and society. These have yet to be considered as a system in the environmental social justice
literature. For example, the social discounting literature does not include the environment as an entity and deals
specifically with money. The time discounting literature is poorly related to the social discounting literature. Perrings
and Hannon (2001) introduced the concept of spatial discounting, which they see as analogous to time
discounting. Many of these gaps require attention if psychology is to make a holistic contribution to justice
research in real-life decision-making. In this regard many research questions spring to mind. Do people who
discount time hyperbolically or parabolically similarly discount people, and how is that related to issues of
intergenerational equity? Are either forms of discounting related to the temporal construal effect? If the construal
effect relates to environmental issues and the time, space, and society dimensions, how do we keep long-term
justice issues relevant as we struggle with short-term environmental conflicts and sharing arguments? How can we
integrate justice research into adaptive environmental management?
The time discounting literature is also not dynamic when it comes to discounting. If people feel that relevant past
environmental decisions have been unjust either procedurally or in terms of distribution, they may formulate their
current justice priorities quite differently.
Obviously no one study can include all these variables to compare and contrast the determinants of justice and
their interactions cross-sectionally, and for enough variety of environmental allocation decisions. Longitudinal
studies to understand the dynamics of such decisions would be even more difficult to perform.
Nevertheless, studies that attempt to piece together at least some of the strands of psychological investigation in
these areas are essential if we are to gain a more coherent understanding of how justice concerns can be included
to a greater degree in environmental allocation decision-making. This is important, as governments, when faced
with potentially painful reallocation decisions, have a tendency to look to market and economic efficiency
mechanisms to provide a hands-off decision and thus avoid complex justice arguments. In Australia and
elsewhere, the social dimension has been left as third priority. When decision makers in government or industry
consider social issues in relation to policies or development projects, they tend to concentrate on social impact
assessment. Often how social impacts are interpreted for final decisions is not explained. The justice dimension is
coming in a poor fourth, partly because we lack the variety of messages and tools to offer the decision maker, and
partly because we lack coherence in explaining justice issues.
Perhaps one way to gain commitment and interest by decision makers is to use the water benefits framework to
clarify what is being allocated in terms of well-being, what can be potentially achieved with revised management or
allocations, and what are the key water management criteria to achieve maximum beneficial returns. This directly
relates the natural resource to benefits and then a clear understanding of who wins and who loses in any particular
allocation decision. The communitys pro-environmental allocation expectations can then automatically be
considered as supporting the environment as a benefit. By understanding the basis upon which justice decisions
are made and how they are expressed as benefits, major conflict over decisions that ignore the interests of the
environment and its dependent communities can be avoided.
References
Abdel-Monem, T., Bingham, S., Marincic, J., & Tomkins, A. (2010). Deliberation and diversity: Perceptions of small
Page 17 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
group discussions by race and ethnicity. Small Group Research, 41(6), 746776.
Ackerman, F., & Heinzerling, L. (2004). Priceless: On knowing the price of everything and the value of nothing.
New York: New Press.
Ajzen, I., Rosenthal, L. H., & Brown, T. C. (2000). Effects of perceived fairness on willingness to pay. Journal of
Applied Social Psychology, 30, 24392450.
(p. 110) Allen, C., & Stankey, G. H. (Eds.). (2009). Adaptive environmental management: A practitioners guide.
Dordrecht, Netherlands: Springer; Collingwood, Victoria: CSIRO.
Azfar, O. (1999). Rationalizing hyperbolic discounting. Journal of Economic Behavior and Organization, 38, 245
252.
Bamberg, S., & Moser, G. (2007). Twenty years after Hines, Hungerford, and Tamera: A new meta-analysis of
psycho-social determinants of pro-environmental behaviour. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 27, 1425.
Batten, D. F. (2007). Can economists value waters multiple benefits? Water Policy, 9, 345362.
Bies, R. J. (2005). Are procedural justice and interactional justice conceptually distinct? In J. Greenberg and R.
Cropanzo (Eds.), Handbook of organizational justice (pp. 89118). Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
Brooks, D., & Trottier, J. (2010). Confronting water in an Israeli-Palestinian peace agreement. Journal of Hydrology,
382, 103114.
Bryson, K. A. (2008). Negotiating environmental rights. Ethics, Place, and Environment, 11(3), 351366.
Burls, A. (2007). People and green spaces: Promoting public health and mental well-being through ecotherapy.
Journal of Public Health, 6(3), 2439.
Chapman, G. D. (2001). Time preferences for the very long term. Acta Psychologica, 108, 95116.
Clayton, S. (1994). Appeals to justice in the environmental debate. Journal of Social Issues, 50(3), 1327.
Clayton, S. (1996). What is fair in the environmental debate? In L. Montada and M. J. Lerner (Eds.), Current social
concerns about justice (pp. 191211). New York: Plenum.
Clayton, S. (1998). Preference for macrojustice versus microjustice in environmental decisions. Environment and
Behavior, 30, 162183.
Clayton, S. (2000). Models of justice in the environmental debate. Journal of Social Issues, 56(3), 459474.
Clayton, S., & Opotow, S. (2003). Justice and identity: Changing perspectives on what is fair. Personality and
Social Psychology Review, 7, 298310.
Cortner, H. J., & Shannon, M. A. (1993). Embedding public participation in its political context. Journal of Forestry,
91(7), 1416.
DAmbrosio, C., & Frick, J. R. (2007). Income satisfaction and relative deprivation: An empirical ink. Social
Indicators Research, 81, 497519.
Dasgupta, P. (2008). Discounting climate change. Journal of Risk and Uncertainty, 37(4), 141169.
Dietz, T., Dan, A., & Shwom, R. (2007). Support for climate change policy: Social psychological and social
structural differences. Rural Sociology, 72(2) 185214.
Droseltis, O., & Vignoles, V. L. (2010). Towards an integrative model of place identification: Dimensionality and
predictors of intra-personal-level place preferences. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30, 2334.
Edelenbos, J., & Klijn, E-H. (2007). Trust in complex decision-making systems: A theoretical and empirical
exploration. Administration and Society, 39, 2550.
Page 18 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
Eek, D., & Bies, A. (2003). The interplay between greed, efficiency, and fairness in public-goods dilemmas. Social
Justice Research, 16(3), 195215.
Egri, C. P. (1997). Spiritual connections with natural environment. Organization and Environment, 10, 407431.
Epstein, S. (1994). The integration of the cognitive and psychodynamic unconscious. American Psychologist, 49,
709724.
Forester, J. (1981). Questioning and organizing attention: Towards a theory of planning and administrative practice.
Administration and Society, 13, 161205.
Fujita, K., Henderson, M. D., Eng, J., Trope, Y., & Liberman, N. (2006). Spatial and mental construal of social events.
Psychological Science, 17, 278282.
Fulton, E. A., Smith., A. D. M., Smith, D. C., & van Putten, E. (2010). Human behaviour: The key source of
uncertainty in fisheries management. Fish and Fisheries, 11, 116.
Green, D. W. (1997). Explaining and envisaging an ecological phenomenon. British Journal of Psychology, 88,
199217.
Guidotti, T. L., & Abercrombie, S. (2008). Aurum: A case study in the politics of NIMBY. Waste Management and
Research, 26, 582588.
Guillet, D. (2006). Rethinking irrigations efficiency: Chain irrigation in northwestern Spain. Human Ecology, 34(3),
305329.
Hafer, C. L., & Olson, J. M. (2003). An analysis of empirical research on the scope of justice. Personality and Social
Psychology Review, 7, 311323.
Harstone, M., Failing, L., & Gregory, R. (2007). Integrating science and local knowledge in environmental risk
management. Ecological Economics, 64, 4760.
Head, B. W. (2008). Wicked problems in public policy. Public Policy, 3(2), 10011008.
Heynen, N., Perkins, H. A., & Roy, P. (2006). The political ecology of uneven urban green space: The impact of
political economy on race and ethnicity in producing environmental inequality in Milwaukee. Urban Affairs Review,
42(1), 3-.25.
Hoekstra, A. Y., Saveneji, H. H. G., & Chapagain, A. K. (2001). An integrated approach towards assessing the value
of water: A case study of the Zambezi basin. Integrated Assessment, 2, 199208.
Johansson-Stenman, O., & Konow, J. (2010). Fair air: Distributive justice and environmental economics.
Environmental and Resource Economics, 46, 147168.
Jones, B., & Rachlin, H. (2006). Social discounting. Psychological Science, 17, 283286.
Lange, A., Loschel, A., Vogt, C., & Zeigler, A. (2010). On the self-serving use of equity in international climate
negotiations. European Economic Review, 54, 359375.
Lauber, T. B., & Knuth, B. A. (1999). Measuring fairness in citizen participation: A case study of moose
management. Society and Natural Resources, 11, 1937.
Lawrence, R. L., Daniels, S. E., & Stankey, G. H. (1997). Procedural justice and public involvement in natural
resources decision making. Society and Natural Resources, 10, 577589.
Lilly, J. D., Virick, M., & Hadani, M. (2010). The dynamic nature of justice: Influential effects of time and work
outcomes on long-term perceptions of justice. Social Justice Research, 23, 3759.
Lind, E. A., & Tyler, T. (1988). The social psychology of procedural justice. New York: Plenum.
Loewenstein, G. (1996). Out of control: Visceral influences on behavior. Organizational Behaviour and Human
Page 19 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
Decision Processes, 65, 272292.
Major, B. (1994). From social inequity to personal entitlement: The role of social comparisons, legitimacy appraisals,
and group membership. Advances in Experimental Social Psychology, 26, 293355.
McIntyre, W., Tucker, D., Green, M., Syme, G., Bates, L., Porter, N., & Nancarrow, B. (2006). Water benefits
accounting and assessment: Lake Mulwala case study. Perth, Australia: CSIRO (p. 111) Water for a Healthy
Country National Research Flagship, Land and Water.
Messick, D. M. (1993). Equality as a decision heuristic. In B. A. Mellers and J. Baron (Eds.), Psychological
perspectives on justice theory and applications (pp. 1131). New York: Academic Press.
Milfont, T. L., & Gouveia, V. V. (2006). Time perspective and values: An exploratory study of their relations to
environmental attitudes. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 26, 7282.
Miller, D. (1999) The norm of self-interest. American Psychologist, 54, 10531060.
Miller, D. T. (2001). Disrespect and the experience of injustice. Annual Review of Psychology, 52, 527553.
Miller, J. G. (1997). Culture and the self: Uncovering the cultural value of psychological theory. In J. G. Snodgrass
and R. L. Thompson (Eds.), The self across psychology (pp. 217231). New York: New York Academy of Sciences.
Montada, L. (1998). Justice: Just a rational choice? Social Justice Research, 12, 81101.
Nancarrow, B. E., & Syme, G. J. (2001). Challenges in implementing justice research in the allocation of natural
resources. Social Justice Research, 14(4), 441452.
Newell, B., Crumley, C. L., Haasan, N., Lambin, E. F., Pahl-Wostl, C., Underdal, A., & Wasson, R. (2005). A
conceptual template for integrative human-environment research. Global Environmental Change, 15, 299307.
Nilsson, A., von Borgstede, C., & Biel, A. (2004). Willingness to accept climate change strategies: The effect of
values and norms. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 24, 267277.
Oberholzer-Gee, F., Bohnet, I., & Frey, B. (1997). Fairness and competence in democratic decisions. Public Choice,
91(1), 89105.
Oda, H., & Toyama, M. (2002). The third world water forum: To translate vision into actions and commitments.
Hydrological Processes, 16, 20672077.
Opotow, S. (1993). Animals and the scope of justice. Journal of Social Issues, 49(1), 7185.
Opotow, S. (1994). Predicting protection: Scope of justice and the natural world. Journal of Social Issues, 50(3), 49
63.
Opotow, S. (1995). Drawing the line: Social categorization, moral exclusions, and the scope of justice. In B. B.
Bunker & J. Z. Rubin (Eds.), Conflict cooperation & justice (pp. 347369). San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
Osinski, J. (2009). Kin altruism, reciprocal altruism, and social discounting. Personality and Individual Differences,
47, 374378.
Paavola, J. (2008). Science and social justice in the governance of adaptation to climate change. Environmental
Politics, 17(4), 644659.
Page, T. (1988). The discount rate and intergenerational equity. In G. Kirsch, P. Nijkamp, & K. Zimmerman (Eds.),
The formulation of time preferences in a multi-disciplinary perspective (pp. 151165). Aldershot, UK: Avebury.
Perrings, C., & Hannon, B. (2001). An introduction to spatial discounting. Journal of Regional Sciences, 41, 2238.
Peterson, R. S. (1994). The role of values in predicting fairness judgments and the support of affirmative action.
Journal of Social Issues, 50, 95115.
Page 20 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
Rachlin, H., & Jones, B. (2008). Social discounting and delay discounting. Behavioral Decision Making, 21, 2943.
Rachlin, H., & Jones, B. A. (2010). The extended self. In G. J. Madden & W. K. Bickel (Eds.), Impulsivity: The
behavioral and neurological science of discounting (pp. 411432). Washington, DC: American Psychological
Association Books.
Rasinski, K. A. (1987). Whats fair is fairOr is it? Values differences underlying public views about social justice.
Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 53, 201211.
Rawls, J. (1971). A theory of justice. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Sen, A. (2010). The idea of justice. London: Allen Lane.
Settle, C., & Shogren, J. F. (2004). Hyperbolic discounting and time inconsistency in a native-exotic species
conflict. Resource and Energy Economics, 26, 255274.
Skitka, L. (2003). Of different minds: An accessible identity model of justice reasoning. Personality and Social
Psychology Review, 7, 286296.
Skitka, L. (2009). Exploring the lost and found of justice theory and research. Social Justice Research, 22, 98
116.
Smith, D. M. (2000). Moral geographies: Ethics in a world of difference. Edinburgh, Scotland: Edinburgh University
Press.
Syme, G. J., & Nancarrow, B. E. (1996). Planning attitudes, lay philosophies, and water allocation: A preliminary
analysis and research agenda. Water Resources Research, 32(6), 18431850.
Syme, G. J., & Nancarrow, B. E. (1997). The determinants of the perception of fairness in the allocation of water to
multiple uses. Water Resources Research, 32(11), 21432152.
Syme, G. J., & Nancarrow, B. E. (2002). Evaluation of public involvement programs: Measuring justice and process
criteria. Water, 29(4), 1824.
Syme, G. J., & Nancarrow, B. E. (2008). Justice and the allocation of benefits from water. Social Alternatives, 27(3),
2125.
Syme, G. J., & Nancarrow, B. E. (2009). Report to the Western Australian Office of Climate Change: Climate change
in WA. Longitudinal study of community attitudes and preferences for mitigation and adaptation policies: The
baseline measure. Joondalup, Western Australia: Edith Cowan University.
Syme, G. J., Kals, E., Nancarrow, B. E., & Montada, L. (2006). Ecological risks and community perceptions of
fairness and justice: A cross cultural model. Human and Ecological Risk Assessment: An International Journal, 12,
102119.
Syme, G. J., Nancarrow, B. E., & Jorgensen, B. S. (2002.) The limits of environmental responsibility: A stormwater
case study. Environment and Behavior, 34, 836847.
Syme, G. J., Nancarrow, B. E., & McCreddin, J. A. (1999). Defining components of fairness in the allocation of water
to environmental and human uses. Journal of Environmental Management, 57, 5170.
Syme, G. J., Porter, N. B., Goeft, U., & Kington, E. A. (2008). Integrating social wellbeing into assessments of water
policy: Meeting the challenge for decision makers. Urban Policy, 1(4), 323343.
Trope, Y., & Liberman, N. (2003). Temporal Construal. Psychological Review, 110, 403421.
Tversky, B. (2003). Structures of mental spaces: How people think about space. Environment and Behavior, 35,
6680.
Tyler, T., & Blader, S. L. (2000). Cooperation in groups: The group engagement model: Procedural justice, social
identity, and behavioral engagement. Philadelphia: Psychology Press.
Page 21 of 23
Justice and the Allocation of Natural Resources: Current Concepts and Future
Directions
Uitto, J. S., & Wolf, A. T. (2002). Water wars? Geographical perspectives: An introduction. Geographical Journal,
168(4), 289292.
van den Bos, K., & Lind, E. A. (2002). Uncertainty management by fairness judgments. Advances in Experimental
Social Psychology, 34, 1060.
(p. 112) van den Bos, K., Wilke, H. A. M., & Lind, A. E. (1998). When do we need procedural fairness? The role of
trust in authority. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 75(6), 14491458.
van den Bos, K., Lind, E. A., Vermunt, R., & Wilke, H. A. M. (1997a). How do I judge my outcome when I do not know
the outcome of others? The psychology of the fair process effect. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology,
72, 10341046.
van den Bos, K., Vermunt, R., & Wilke, H. A. M. (1997b). Procedural and distributive justice: What is fair depends
more on what comes first than on what comes next. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 72, 95104.
Vanclay, F., Higgins, M., & Blackshaw, A. (2008). Making sense of place: Exploring concepts and expressions of
place through different senses and lenses. Canberra: National Museum of Australia Press.
Vanderheiden, S. (2008). Atmospheric justice: A political theory of climate change. New York: Oxford University
Press.
Wani, S., Sreedevi, T. K., & Marimuthu, S. (2007). A comprehensive assessment of watershed programs in India.
Proceedings of the Review Meeting and Component Workshops, 23rd27th July. Pantancheru: ICRASAT.
Wenz, P. S. (1988). Environmental justice. Albany: State University of New York Press.
White, P. A. (2008). Beliefs about interactions between factors in the natural environment. Applied Cognitive
Psychology, 22, 559572.
Wilke, H. A. M. (1991). Greed, efficiency, and fairness in resource management situations. European Review of
Social Psychology, 2, 165187.
Wood, C. H. (2008). Time cycles, tempos in socio-ecological research, and environmental policy. Time and
Society, 17, 261282.
World Commission on Environment and Development. (1987). Our common future. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
Zajonc, R. B. (1968). The attitudinal effects of mere exposure. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology,
Monograph Supplement. No. 2.
Zeckhauser, R. J., & Viscusi, W. K. (2008). Discounting dilemmas: Editors introduction. Journal of Risk and
Uncertainty, 37(4), 95100.
Zurick, D. (2006). Gross national happiness and environmental status in Bhutan. Geographical Review, 96, 657
681.
Notes:
(1.) Virtual water is the water used by the exporting country in producing food and manufactured goods.
Geoffrey J. Syme
Geoffrey J. Syme Centre for Planning Edith Cowan University Perth, Australia
Blair E. Nancarrow
Blair E. Nancarrow The Fenner School of Environment and Society The Australian National University Ellery Crescent, Acton,
Australia
Page 22 of 23
Introduction
The study of childrens relationships to nature entails considerations particular to the early part of the human life
span intersecting with the features of the natural environment. Both childhood and nature show marked variability
(across cultures, individuals, and natural settings) as well as potential commonalities. Given this complexity,
together with the comparatively limited attention given this relationship within psychology, our knowledge is
expectably modest. Nonetheless, the subject has garnered sustained attention by researchers and the public, and
interest in it is enjoying a renaissance.
What is nature? Although humans themselves are of nature, here we consider nature to be the nonhuman
environmentencompassing (potentially) all biomes, landscapes, the waters, atmosphere, and heavens
surrounding the earth, as well as all the orders of its nonhuman living occupants. Increasingly there is a fuzzy line
between what is human-modified and what is not, at all levels of nature as we experience it. In this chapter we
accept in principle this full gamut of modification: the child-nature relation includes everything from wild landscapes
and animals to restored areas, manicured zoos, domestic and companion animals, and tended plants. For any
given person, these settings vary in closeness and accessibility; degree of familiarity versus novelty; control by
human versus nonhuman forces; and scale. The common denominator is the presence of some degree of natural
process, but which natural process, how this occurs, is framed, and experienced, seems to fall roughly along a
domestic-managed-wild continuum. Nature also includes symbolic and technological mediation and simulation of
natural entities and settings. Although such a broad scope is impossible to fully treat, it allows realism as well as
comparisons that may inform us about what the dimensions of natural phenomena singularly afford children. In
general the scope of (p. 114) this entry reflects the predominant literatures that focus on typical natural or
naturalized spaces that children inhabit.
Page 1 of 18
Page 2 of 18
Page 3 of 18
Page 4 of 18
Page 5 of 18
Childrens use of space shows a pattern of increase over development as children gain mobility and independence
from their home base. This pattern extends to nature, as childhood ethnographies have shown. Hart (1979) in the
United States and Moore (1986) in the United Kingdom developed rapport with existing mixed-age groups of middlechildhood subjects and learned directly from them that they preferred interstitial spaces, vacant land, neglected,
and semi-wild spaces over more manicured ones. Their landscapes were imbued with meanings that derived from
the childrens own activities and interactions with both nature and other people. They felt strong identification and
special meanings with certain spaces and found or made hideouts in vegetation or other locations. Similar patterns,
including the spatial increase of home range over development, are documented in childrens maps of their
neighborhood (Sobel, 1993). Chawla (1992) synthesized factors affecting this tendency, as shown in Figure 7.1:
motivations pulling one outward or toward home base, social factors, and identity development. Interestingly,
adolescents show a drop in (p. 119) interest in nature, at least nature experiences that are not undertaken by
their preferred environment: peers (Kaplan & Kaplan, 2002).
Studies have shown that children prefer natural areas for play (Maxey, 1999; Chawla, 2002; Korpela, 2002). Play is
a universal way children learn about their environment and gain skills in a nonthreatening context. Play is a varied
concept, but childrens play in nature has been categorized by Frost (1992) as functional play (running, tumbling,
climbing, sliding, etc.), constructive play (building huts, playing with loose parts, etc.), and symbolic play (roleplay, dramatic play). Alternately, several dimensions have been delineated: stationary or exploratory; socially
facilitated; distance from home; interspersed with chores or other activities; and type (fantasy, creative, gaming, or
searching and trapping) (Vadala, Bixler, & James, 2007). In agreement with affordance theory, environmental
variables have been shown to affect the quality and type of childrens play. As compared with playgrounds without
vegetation and trees, children engage in more physical, constructive, and symbolic play when plants are present
(Fjrtoft, 2004). On more naturalized (higher biodiversity) play spaces as compared with more simple playgrounds,
children tend to engage in more varied, functional, constructive, and symbolic play and are more oriented to
nature (Samborski, 2010). Children in very different cultures and climates create or find their own private spaces,
for example, constructing shelters in nature, a desire that peaks between ages 8 and 11. Boys tend to range
farther and build actual dwellings, and girls tend more to make playhouses and small worlds. Both genders enjoy
searching and gathering or making collections of objects found in nature (Sobel, 1993, 2008).
Children observed in naturalistic free-ranging contexts (such as by Hart or Moore) tended to take risks and
Page 6 of 18
Page 7 of 18
Page 8 of 18
Page 9 of 18
Page 10 of 18
Page 11 of 18
Conclusion
Natural surroundings are no doubt an essential part of humanitys common patrimony, which, according to Locke,
should be handed down in as good condition to succeeding generations, affording basic needs as well as
options. From what we understand at this point, to this set of physical conditions should be added the many
psychological experiences, challenges, and benefits children derive from natural settings. Lacking these (and
considering their possible technological substitutes), it is an urgent question what the pathways of human
development can produce. At this point, it is fair to say the answer is that impoverished exposure to nature will
result in deficits of which we may not be aware. While this lack of awareness can be rectified through further
research, and through attention to childrens own voices, it also calls for a critical rethinking of major institutions
structuring childhood and its environments, as well as management of natural spaces.
Future Directions
Many avenues of research need further attention in this field. A clear and conceptual mapping of the affordances
of the range of natural settings, including what children actually do in such settings, is still not possible from the
literature. This would be necessary to get beyond the tantalizing suggestions of the developmental sequelae of
various nature experiences we have. More rigorous designs are needed, particularly if there is the hope that
claims of health and psychological benefits will gain traction in major institutions. Of course, however, wellcontrolled (p. 125) experiments may deliver narrow-scope results, and longitudinal or cross-sequential designs
are practically difficult and funding is scarce. Not only that, the target is hardly sitting still. So rather than aiming for
comprehensive knowledge, it may be more important to pursue research that tests both theory and practical
intervention strategies. Researchers and practitioner allies could use the best hints from what we know, and seek,
for example, through educational or design-oriented work, to create positive outcomes for children. The children
should be prime stakeholders in such participatory processes as they grow in real communities. They should be
partners, empowered to describe their experiences and be part of their communities efforts to enhance both
nature and human flourishing.
References
Alerby, E. (2000). A way of visualizing childrens and young peoples thoughts about the environment: A study of
drawings. Environmental Education Research, 6(3), 205222.
Armitage, K. (2009). The nature study movement. Lawrence: University Press of Kansas.
Astuti, R., Solomon, G. E. A., & Carey, S. (2004). Constraints on conceptual development: A case study of the
acquisition of folkbiological and folk sociological knowledge in Madagascar. Monographs of the Society for
Research in Child Development 69( 3, Serial No. 277).
Atran, S., & Medin, D. (2008). The native mind and the cultural construction of nature. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Bagot, K. (2004). Perceived restorative components: A scale for children. Children, Youth, and Environments,
14(1), 107129.
Bagot, K. L., Kuo, F. E., & Allen, F. C. (2007). Amendments to the Perceived Restorative Components Scale for
Children (PRCS-C II). Children, Youth, and Environments, 17(4), 124127.
Balmford, A., Clegg, L., Coulson, T., & Taylor, J. (2002). Why conservationists should heed Pokmon. Science,
295(5564), 2367.
Page 12 of 18
Page 13 of 18
Page 14 of 18
Page 15 of 18
Page 16 of 18
Page 17 of 18
Introduction
The natural (synonymously ecological) environmentdefined as our environment with its multiple components,
such as air, soil, and wateris the fundamental base for human life, but without doubt it is set at a serious risk by
exploitation and modern behavior patterns (IPCC, 2007; WCED, 1990). Worldwide pollution of air, water, and soil,
the greenhouse effect, damage to the ozone layer, and the extinction of species are some examples of the
ecological problems (Pawlik, 1991) caused by modern societies with an energy-intensive lifestyle. Therefore,
Maloney and Ward (1973) called the energy crisis of the 1970s a crisis of maladapted behavior; nearly a decade
later, Devall (1982) spoke of a crisis of culture. Today, despite numerous attempts to reduce environmental
threats, most of the global ecological problems and their long-term effects still are not under control (IPCC, 2007).
The solution of these environmental problems is a technical challenge to the natural and engineering sciences, but
even more to psychology as the science dealing with human behavior and experience (Gifford, 2008). Above all,
environmental problems are caused by human behavior and decisions, and therefore should be addressed by
analyzing the underlying motives of the relevant behaviors. Based on this understanding of the underlying motives
of pro-environmental behaviors as well as behaviors that harm the environment,1 efficient intervention strategies
can be derived.
In environmental psychology there are research traditions on both tasks; however, the special role of emotions is
not always taken sufficiently into account: although at the very beginning of environmental psychology, emotions
were taken into account (cf. Amelang, Tepe, Vagt, & Wendt, 1977), a phase of strong cognitive bias, mainly
omitting (p. 129) emotions, followed. This goes hand in hand with the development of models aiming to explain
environmentally relevant behaviors without integrating emotions. In line with the explanation of human behavior in
other action fields, the significant role of emotions was, consequently, for a long time mainly overlooked. Instead,
Page 1 of 24
Page 2 of 24
Page 3 of 24
Measuring Emotions
It is comparatively difficult to measure emotions (Scherer, 2005). Taking component models of emotions as a
theoretical base, one has to consider different aspects of emotions that cannot be measured by the same methods
but require a wide range of instruments, such as standardized questionnaires, semi-structured interviews,
physiological measures, behavioral observation, and so on. A special challenge is measuring the subjective
component of feeling. It is unclear how well people can give an answer when asked about their feelings: Can they
differentiate between emotions? Are they willing to answer such a personal question? In many cultural contexts, the
Page 4 of 24
Classification of Emotions
There is a broad discussion concerning the taxonomy of emotions. The easiest taxonomy distinguishes between
emotions experienced as positive or negative, but such a classification is unclear because although it seems
plausible at first sight, so-called positive emotions can also have negative consequences and vice versa. There
are more complex, often linguistic classification systems (e.g., Frijda, 1986; Lazarus, 1991; Scherer, 1984), which
are primarily of heuristic value as they offer a structure to bring order to the diversity of emotions. However, they
are not very helpful to distinguish emotional categories (for example, resentment, moral outrage, and indignation)
or to get a deeper understanding of their underlying structure.
Therefore, we propose a general framework of emotion clusters that closely belong together with regard to
theoretical model building and their specific impact on environmental behavior. This leads to four categories or
clusters, some with subgroups: (1) emotional burdens and worries; (2) emotions associated with environmentally
relevant behavior; (3) affective connection to nature; and (4) moral emotions.
Page 5 of 24
Affective connection to nature can be considered a distinct class of emotions related to the environment. It is
closely related to the development of an environmental identity (Clayton, 2003; Eigner & Schmuck, 1998; Kaplan &
Kaplan, 1989).
The relationship of humans to nature can be understood in two ways: first, there are psychological correlates of
time spent in nature that could be classified as emotions accompanying actions. Such a perspective is taken by
Kaplan (1995). In his attention restoration theory, he argues that being in nature can have restorative impacts, and
he makes a distinction among four components. The first is the feeling of being away, of being freed from mental
activity. This does not necessarily presuppose that one takes a long way to get to a natural site; even a short walk
in a park or a look out of the window can have a restorative impact (Kaplan, 2001). The second component is the
fascination for nature, which has the effect of binding attention without effort. Third, feelings of greatness often
accompany experiences in nature, most evidently in wilderness, but possibly also in parks or gardens. And fourth,
Kaplan (1995) argued that there is a compatibility between human inclinations, such as locomotion or dominance,
and nature, that can also lead to a positive valence of nature for human beings. A growing body of research shows
that being in nature or merely in contact with nature can have a large number of positive effects, such as the
restoration of attention (Kaplan, 1995), vitality (Ryan et al., 2010), but also on other aspects of well-being or on the
reduction of aggressive motivations (Kuo & Sullivan, 2001). Although the findings from this research are quite
robust and have been validated by many studies, it should also be noted that contact with nature can also lead to
more negative feelings, for example, of disgust or fear (e.g., Bixler & Floyd, 1997). These results are also picked up
in the chapter of Joanne Vining and Melinda Merrick on environmental epiphanies in the current book.
One of the possible positive consequences of contact with nature especially in childhood and youth is that it can
contribute to a relatively stable emotional attachment to nature (Kals, Schumacher, & Montada, 1999; Mller, Kals,
& Pansa, 2009). Writers in environmental ethics have argued that humans can be considered a part of nature, an
argumentation that has led to the new environmental paradigm (Van Liere & Dunlap, 1980). From a psychological
point of view, however, the connectedness of humans to nature goes beyond this rational-cognitive perspective
because it is also based on affective experiences in nature. The biophilia hypothesis (Kellert, 1997), drawing on
Fromms psychoanalytic tradition, assumes that humans have an innate need to be part of nature, making contact
with nature an important source of well-being and restoration (Eckardt, 1992). In their differential approach, Kals et
al. (1999) argued that the attachment to nature is not a constant that is valid for all persons, but rather can be
considered a trait that varies among individuals. Data from questionnaire surveys have showed that the time spent
in nature in childhood as well as positive experiences in nature with significant others are strong predictors of this
emotional attachment to nature (Kals et al., 1999; Mller et al., 2009). In recent years, several similar conceptions
of human relationship to nature have been proposed (e.g., Clayton, 2003; Dutcher, Finley, Luloff, & Johnson, 2007;
Hinds & Sparks, 2008; Mayer & Frantz, 2004; Nisbet, Zelenski, & Murphy, 2009; Schultz, 2000), but despite some
Page 6 of 24
Moral Emotions
Moral emotions concerning behavior affecting the environment are a fourth class of emotions related to the
environment that have been studied in more detail recently (e.g., Berenguer, 2010; Ferguson & Branscombe,
2010). This interest in moral emotions is due to the social, temporal, and geographical distance between actors and
victims of global environmental change (Pawlik, 1991). Self-interest alone cannot explain why people make
renunciations for the sake of the natural environment. The increasing interest in norms, values, justice, and other
moral issues in conservation psychology reflects the fact that behavior to protect the environment is not merely
based on social incentives or the fulfillment of self-interest, but is also driven by social responsibility and moral
convictions. If morality plays a role in pro-environmental behavior, then moral emotions can be considered a direct
reaction to behavior or rules or laws that are either compliant with these moral standards or deviant from them.
Page 7 of 24
Page 8 of 24
Page 9 of 24
Page 10 of 24
Based on the described models and theories, empirical research on the impact of various motives and variables on
environmentally relevant behavior was conducted, questionnaire studies being the main research methodology.
From this bulky research the following statements on the impact of the four emotion categories introduced above
can be regarded as validated:
Page 11 of 24
Moral Emotions
This last category of emotions is the one that has been analyzed the best in empirical research of environmental
psychology, although it cannot touch upon the overwhelming literature dealing with the cognitive aspect of moral
ecological responsibility and justice appraisals. Nevertheless, moral emotions are part of many newer environmentspecific behavior models. Especially emotions that are related to the violation of norms, such as guilt, shame,
indignation, or moral outrage, have been shown to be impactful variables that can explain distinct parts in the
variation of behavior (Ferguson & Branscombe, 2010; Kals, 2000). They all imply the acceptance or refusal of
ecological norms and responsibilities.
Page 12 of 24
Page 13 of 24
Page 14 of 24
Conclusion
In this text environmentally relevant emotions were analyzed theoretically and with regard to their power to predict
pro-environmental and environmentally risky behavior. At the end of this text the state of the art is summarized and
discussed in the form of questions that remain to be addressed in future research:
What implications does the theoretical discussion of environmentally relevant emotions have for
future theory and model building?
On a theoretical level, a further validation and development of the classification system is necessary. This should
be supplemented by further elaboration of theories that focus on emotion models of environmentally relevant
behavior. These models should include pro-environmental as well as environmentally risky behavior, as most parts
of research in environmental psychology still refer only to the explanation of pro-environmental behavior. The
analysis of environmentally risky behavior is still rare. However, it can be shown that there is a significant overlap
between the relevant emotional predictor variables of both behavior categories. The corresponding regression
weights of those predictors are reversed (e.g., high affective connection to nature leads to pro-environmental
behavior, whereas environmentally risky behavior is based on low emotional affinity), but there are some
differences in the relative power of the emotions as was shown by the various forms of indignation. This reflects
that for environmentally risky behavior, the acceptance of moral arguments against pollution control or
sustainability is especially powerful. People behaving in an environmentally risky way often justify their decisions
by pointing to corresponding moral arguments, such as economic welfare or personal rights of freedom, or by
endangering the behavior of others who might profit from their own renunciations, provoking free-riding (Clayton,
2000; Montada & Kals, 2000). In future theories these varying moral norms and arguments, which are implicitly part
of sustainability, should be covered on a cognitive and emotional level.
Moreover, theories that focus on environmentally relevant emotions are still missing but would help to analyze the
multiple interactions between cognitions and emotions as well as between various forms of emotions in depth: How
are moral emotions influenced by nature experiences or affective connection to nature ? Can understanding and
empathy for the position of the other parties in ecological conflicts be promoted when interactional justice in the
process is experienced? What happens on an emotional level when people empathize with the emotional
experiences of the conflict partners (in role-plays, through practical experiences, etc.)? What happens when the
Page 15 of 24
Future directions
What future tasks derive from the implications of the findings for practical intervention programs?
In the preceding paragraph detailed implications for practical purposes were discussed. Many of them have
already been realized. However, up to now only a few approaches have combined responsibility-related
approaches with providing experiences with nature (cf. Kaplan & Kaplan, 1989; Lyons & Breakwell, 1994). The
majority of educational programs either promote discussions on ecological ethics and norms, or exclusively
provides experiences with nature (cf. Kruse & Schwarz, 1988). As a future task, the development and evaluation of
integrated intervention programs for children and adults should be explored. Moreover, theoretical analyses and
practical interventions should be more strongly related to one another: from theoretical analyses knowledge should
be derived and communicated that can be applied directly to practical purposes. People working in the field should
in turn use the knowledge and evaluate the effects of their (p. 143) interventions to further validate the underlying
theoretical models and their working mechanisms. In this way there might be a mutual fruitful interactive
collaboration.
How can different samples and target groups be addressed? What different forms of research
approach should be used?
The presented data are based mainly on questionnaire studies with representatives of the general population as
well as with members of criterion groups for pro-environmental behavior (for example, members of Greenpeace)
and for environmentally risky behavior (for example, members of motorsport clubs). Data on decision makers in
politics and economics are very rare, and existing research confirms the theoretical and practical difficulties of
gathering the data (Niegot, 2003). On a theoretical level, the models need to be adapted to the specific level of
decision-making behavior of these target groups; on an empirical level, it is especially difficult to gain the
commitment of these mega-actors to fill in questionnaires for scientific purposes, which is also due to their full
schedule. These problems get even bigger when the research is focused on emotions. These problems can be
diminished by various strategies: the request to participate in the scientific study should be combined with a
concrete occasion of environmental issues or conflicts currently debated. This would pave the way for this issue,
as personal interests of the target people could be taken into account. If, for example, data are gathered in the
context of the psychological mediation of an ecological conflict, data are not of pure scientific interest but can be
directly used for resolving the conflict. The fact that decision makers are also willing to talk about their attitudes
and emotions might strengthen their public acceptance. Moreover, scientists might think of different forms to
measure emotions. Instead of standardized questionnaires, half-structured interviews might be more appropriate. If
these interviews are conducted by high potentials who have already gained trust in advance, the readiness for
the interviews and for open-minded answers will be improved.
Page 16 of 24
References
Abell, P. (1992). Is rational choice theory a rational choice of theory? In J. S. Coleman & T. J. Fararo (Eds.), Rational
choice theory: Advocacy and critique (pp. 183206). Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
Ajzen, I. (1991). The theory of planned behavior: Some unresolved issues. Organizational Behavior and Human
Decision Processes, 50, 179211.
Amelang, M., Tepe, K., Vagt, G., & Wendt, W. (1977). Mitteilung ber einige Schritte der Entwicklung einer Skala
zum Umweltbewutsein [Notice about some steps of the development of a scale measuring environmental
consciousness]. Diagnostica, 23, 8688.
Arnold, M. B. (1960). Emotion and personality. New York: Columbia University Press.
Bamberg, S., & Schmidt, P. (1993). Verkehrsmittelwahleine Anwendung der Theorie geplanten Verhaltens [Travel
mode choicesan application of the theory of planned behavior]. Zeitschrift fr Sozialpsychologie, 24, 2537.
Becker, R. (1998). Verantwortlichkeits- und Wertekonflikte bei der Verkehrsmittelwahl. In B. Reichle & M. Schmitt
(Eds.), Verantwortung, Gerechtigkeit und Moral [Responsibility, justice, and morality] (pp. 133146). Mnchen:
Juventa.
Berenguer, J. (2010). The effect of empathy in environmental reasoning. Environment and Behavior, 42, 110134.
Bernhardt, K. (2000). Steuerung der Emotion Emprung durch Umwandlung assertorischer Urteile in
hypothetische Urteile und Fragen: Ein Trainingsprogramm [Control of the emotion resentment through changing
assertoric judgments into hypothetical judgments and questions]. (Doctoral dissertation). Trier:
Universittsbibliothek Trier.
Biel, A. (2000). Factors promoting cooperation in the laboratory, in common pool resource dilemmas, and in largescale dilemmas: Similarities and differences. In M. van Vugt, M. Snyder, T. Tyler, & A. Biel (Eds.), Cooperation in
Page 17 of 24
Page 18 of 24
Page 19 of 24
Page 20 of 24
Page 21 of 24
Page 22 of 24
Notes:
(1.) In this text the opposite of pro-environmental behavior is not called contra-environmental behavior, but this
form of behavior is circumscribed (e.g., behavior that sets the protection of nature at risk). These behavioral
decisions do not intend to set ecological aims at risk, but these risks are more or less consciously accepted as
negative side effects of enjoyable or profitable activities. This is the case for private behavior (e.g., car driving) but
also for political decision-making or industrial production.
Elisabeth Kals
Elisabeth Kals Professor of Social and Organizational Psychology The Catholic University Eichsttt-Ingolstadt Eichsttt, Germany
Markus M. Mller
Markus M. Mller The Catholic University Eichsttt-Ingolstadt Eichsttt, Germany
Page 23 of 24
Place Attachment
Introduction
Research on place attachment has been rapidly expanding during the 2000s (Lewicka, 2010). A search in
ScienceDirect on October 29, 2010, with place attachment in the title, abstract, or key words in journals or
books within psychology, social sciences, arts and humanities, nursing and health professions, environmental
science, and decision sciences found 143 articles. These articles were published between 2000 and 2010 and the
figure counts 72% of all place attachment articles published between 1993 or earlier and 2010. However, as some
mismatches were obviously included in the results, a correct figure from 20002010 is approximately 112 articles.
As at least 15 review articles published between 1992 and 2010 are within this field (Lewicka, 2010), the current
review is not an all-inclusive one but focuses mostly on the dynamics of place attachment (including
consequences for conservation behavior) on the individual level. The chapter is structured according to the
antecedents, development, and consequences of place attachment, but with a limited amount of accumulated
causal knowledge it is difficult to rigorously argue whether different processes or variables are
consequences/outcomes, antecedents, or mediating/moderating processes. Measurement methodology is left
largely aside in this review (for review, see Lewicka, 2010; see Clayton, this volume, for a review of environmental
identity measures).
Page 1 of 19
Place Attachment
the series Human Behavior and Environment was dedicated to place attachment (Altman & Low, 1992). It was
noted that the scale or scope of environments to which people are attached may vary from microenvironments,
such as personal objects, to homes, settings of care, local environments, and larger-scale environments, such as
towns or cities.
Place attachment has been defined as an integrating concept incorporating several interrelated and inseparable
aspects of people-place bonding (Altman & Low, 1992). Affects, emotions, and feelingsboth positive and
negativeare central to the concept, although often accompanied by cognition and action (or behavioral
intention; see Jorgensen & Stedman, 2001). Thus, more specific definitions of place attachment include a positive
affective bond between an individual and a specific place, the main characteristic of which is the tendency of the
individual to maintain closeness to such a place (Hidalgo & Hernndez, 2001, p. 274), affective relationship
between people and the landscape that goes beyond cognition, preference or judgment (Riley, 1992, p. 13), or a
state of psychological well-being experienced by a person as a result of the mere presence, vicinity, or
accessibility of the place (Churchman & Mitrani, 1997; Sharpe & Evert, 2000). The place aspect of attachment
includes not only tangible places of different scale but also symbolic or imagined places or objects. Objects may be
temporally different: past, present, or future that may appear cyclically as well.
In addition to individual attachments, collective, shared group, and cultural place attachments may exist. On the
other hand, the object of attachment may not be only the physical environment but also the social relations that a
place signifies. Place attachment is also a developing, temporal phenomenon (Altman & Low, 1992). In analogy to
place identity literature including place identity and settlement identity (identification with types of settings;
Feldman, 1990; Lalli, 1992), a distinction between a place-specific and a conceptual attachment (attachment to a
type of landscape rather than to a particular place) has been made (Ryan, 2005).
A fact is that a variety of operationalizations of place bonding/attachment have been used, with many concepts
used interchangeably (Giuliani, 2003; Hidalgo & Hernndez, 2001). To increase integration, however, several
dimensional models of place attachment have been presented. For example, the theme of place attachment in the
recreation resource management literature is around 20 years old and has been focused on the psychometric
scales (for a discussion about several scales, see Giuliani, 2003; Lewicka, 2010) and models for measuring place
attachment and the relationship of attachment to recreation behaviors (Hammitt et al., 2009). The first place
attachment model used in recreation resource management literature was a two-dimensional model including place
identity and place dependence (a functional reliance on a place) (Hammitt et al., 2009). Another two-dimensional
model from recent environmental psychological literature suggests place attachment (emotional) and identification
with a locally defined group as correlated but distinct dimensions (Rollero & De Piccoli, 2010). Recreation
researchers have added dimensions to the model to introduce three-dimensional (place attachment, identity, and
dependence), four-dimensional (social bonding, place attachment, identity, and dependence), and fivedimensional (familiarity, belongingness, rootedness, place identity, and dependence) models (Hammitt, Backlund, &
Bixler, 2006; Hammitt et al., 2009).
Recently, a three-dimensional synthesizing framework of the various definitions of the place attachment concept
has been introduced (Scannell & Gifford, 2010a). The framework includes person, psychological process, and
place dimensions. The person dimension acknowledges that place attachment occurs at both the individual and
the group level. Psychological processes where place attachment occurs involve affect, cognition, and behavior.
Place dimension is divided into not only a physical but also a social level, the former including various geographic
scales. Moreover, the psychological functions of place attachment (conscious or unconscious motivations to form
enduring bonds with places) are listed and include offering survival and security, supporting goal attainment and
self-regulation, providing self-continuity, sense of belongingness, sense of identity, and self-esteem.
To summarize, it seems that a considerable amount of taxonomical work of the place attachment
concept/phenomenon and its relevant dimensions/co-processes has already been carried out (Scannell & Gifford,
2010a; Altman & Low, 1992). It remains to be seen whether such diversity of models means lack of clarity or
inadequate theoretical development. For example, on the level of place research as a whole, several conceptual
origins (social psychology, tourism and recreation studies, consumer research, environmental psychology, (p.
150) phenomenology) and research programs reflecting differing paradigms and worldviews can be discerned,
and some regard this situation as a valuable diversity of thought (Patterson & Williams, 2005; Morgan, 2010).
Page 2 of 19
Place Attachment
In the present authors opinion, dimensional and tripartite frameworks provide researchers taxonomies where they
can situate their specific operationalizations and studies. Such a situation warrants effort to deepen the theoretical
and empirical work related to the functions and processes/dynamics of place attachment in the future. This may
include both quantitative and qualitative approaches. For example, in recreation research, emotional attachments
to place have been studied as an antithesis to the commodity or consumer metaphor wherein settings are
represented as collections of features, related to psychological experiences, from which an optimal combination
for a given clientele could be selected (Brooks, Wallace, & Williams, 2006; Williams, Patterson, Roggenbuck, &
Watson, 1992). In contrast, the place attachment or relationship metaphor emphasizes that places may be whole
entities and valued in their entirety (Brooks et al., 2006; Williams et al., 1992). Moreover, qualitative researchers
argue that the focus on measuring the strength of attachment with scales excludes meanings that people attribute
to places and the dynamic processes of developing place relationships (Brooks et al., 2006; Davenport &
Anderson, 2004).
Thus, in addition to having a structural aspect, psychological processes, such as place attachment, are dynamic.
An example of the dynamic nature of place attachments is a potential interplay between experiences of different
places: places outside residence may influence the experience of residence (Manzo, 2003). The question of
unconscious and conscious identity work through attachments to and relationships with places is a second
example of important dynamics (Manzo, 2003). An overwhelmingly important question of why people develop
psychological bonds with places has been answered by reflecting on the functions that place attachments serve
(Scannell & Gifford, 2010a). The term functions of place attachment is somewhat technical because these
functions actually represent basic motives, needs, or the guiding principles of human behavior and self-regulation.
We now turn to the dynamics of place attachment in the subsequent paragraphs of the antecedent, developmental,
and outcome processes of place attachment on the individual level.
Page 3 of 19
Place Attachment
own environment may be a pervasive and continuous process in our lives. Arguments exist that this may hold
even to such a degree that features of the environment may trigger processes that operate outside of conscious
awareness and guidance and may determine a significant portion of our daily emotions, motivations, judgments,
and actions (Bargh & Chartrand, 1999). Thus, perception may have automatic effects on action, goal pursuit, and
evaluations of ones experience. Some of the automaticities seem to require no experience, whereas other forms
of automatic self-regulation develop out of repeated and consistent experience (Bargh & Chartrand, 1999). Note
that this automaticity resembles the suggestion that nature attachment, that is, implicit connections to or
identification with nature (measured with a modification of Implicit Association Test) operates outside conscious
awareness (Schultz, Shriver, Tabanico, & Khazian, 2004). Similar ideas are seemingly included in the
phenomenological descriptions where body ballets, that is, continual and continuous movements in space, are
thought to produce the sense of existential insideness (a situation involving a spontaneous feeling of attachment,
belonging, and at-homeness), which is one of the expressions used in describing place attachment (Buttimer &
Seamon, 1980; Lewicka, 2010).
Moreover, affective responses to environments are not limited to the first milliseconds or seconds of the encounter.
Entering or moving through a place may induce changes in a persons mood (Staats, Gatersleben, & Hartig, 1997;
Kerr & Tacon, 1999) and metamotivational state (serious-playful, planning-spontaneous) (Kerr & Tacon, 1999).
After stress manipulation, viewing or visiting natural environments promotes physiological recovery and relaxation
evident within 3 to 40 minutes of the start of the exposure (Hartig, Evans, Jamner, Davis, & Grling, 2003; Ulrich,
1981; Ulrich et al., 1991). This is indexed, for example, by lowered blood pressure, muscle tension, and skin
conductance, and increased brain activity in the alpha frequency band (an index of wakeful relaxation); change to
positively toned self-reported emotions and recovery of attention-demanding cognitive performances (Parsons,
Tassinary, Ulrich, Hebl, & Grossman-Alexander, 1998; Ulrich, 1981; Ulrich et al., 1991). These types of positive
psychophysiological changes are called restoration and the environments inducing these changes are called
restorative environments (Hartig, Mang, & Evans, 1991; Kaplan & Kaplan, 1989; Ulrich et al., 1991). Perceptions of
restorative potential are known to be associated with environmental preference judgments (Nordh, Hartig,
Hgerhll, & Fry, 2009; Pals, Steg, Siero, & van der Zee, 2009; Herzog, Maguire, & Nebel, 2003). Furthermore,
recent studies suggest that being outdoors has also vitalizing (a positively toned, energized state) effects (Ryan et
al., 2010) as well as positive effects on feelings of personal autonomy and intrinsic aspirations (inherently
rewarding psychological needs, such as personal growth or intimacy) (Weinstein, Przybylski, & Ryan, 2009).
How do we combine these studies and results to the development of place attachment and place identity? This
work remains to be done in future studies in this field. However, we may note that the studies indicating rapid,
automatic affective reactions and self-regulation give support to such definitions of place identity that argue that an
affective process, that is, place attachment, is implicit or even fundamental in place identity, the development of
which requires also conscious, more time-consuming, cognitive identity work (Korpela, 1989). In this interpretation,
it is argued that place identity is fundamentally formed by the experiences and cognitions in places that have a
role in a persons emotion and self-regulation. This postulation has a predecessor in Zajoncs (1980) argument that
the initial level of response to environment is affective and that environmental stimuli are evaluated as positive or
negative for the self at a preattentive level. This notion further opens up a connection to self-theories that
acknowledge affective processes and preconscious conceptual systems, such as cognitive-experiential selftheory (CEST) (Epstein, 1985, 1991). These theories are described further in the subsequent paragraphs.
Page 4 of 19
Place Attachment
retrospective accounts of past experiences (use history; years of visiting, times of visiting during the past year) of
public lands and place attachment, including the dimensions of place identity (affective) and place dependence
(functional), showed that the associations were weak to moderate (Backlund & Williams, 2003). The strongest
overall association was between place identity and visitation in the past year, r = .25. The study showed that the
mere-exposure effect accounts for some variation in the degree of reported affective connection with a place. The
associations were very variable; the larger studies with more variation in the variables produced weaker
associations (Backlund & Williams, 2003). The direction of causality is not altogether clear, as place attachment
might lead people to evaluate their past use history incorrectly. However, evaluations of length of residence (the
date of the change of residence is known or easily checked) might not be so prone to such a memory bias (cf.
Conway, 1990, pp. 5360), and these studies also provide some support for the mere-exposure effect. For
example, in an Italian study with a two-dimensional model of place attachment, attachment to the residential area
was associated with social relationships in the area and participation in local groups, whereas identification with
local inhabitants was positively associated with length of residence and negatively with educational level (Rollero &
De Piccoli, 2010). Length of residence was also correlated to social relationships in the area, which, in turn, was
associated with residential attachment (Rollero & De Piccoli, 2010). An association between the length of residence
and identification with the neighborhood was also reported in a French study (Fleury-Bahi, Flonneau, & Marchand,
2008). Length of residence seems to be the strongest predictor of place attachment; however, the increment is not
linear but the highest increments of attachment occur in the first years of residence (Lewicka, 2010).
Regarding motivations and values, a study on the relationship between landscape values and place attachment
showed that the landscape perceptions of spiritual importance, wilderness and attractive scenery, sights, sounds,
or smells (aesthetic values) were associated with the place attachment scales of place identity and place
dependence (Brown & Raymond, 2007). Moreover, it was observed that aesthetic, recreation, economic, spiritual,
and therapeutic landscape values spatially co-located with the respondents special places in the region measured
by a map-based index. A map-based measure allowed the respondents to identify up to six special places in the
region of the study (Brown & Raymond, 2007). In a study with a four-dimensional model of place attachment,
motivation to visit a large urban park (to learn, to feel autonomy, to be active, to socialize, to enjoy nature, and to
enhance health) was associated with the strength of attachment (Kyle, Mowen, & Tarrant, 2004). More specifically,
motivations to enhance health and to feel autonomy were positively associated with place dependence and
affective attachment. The motivation to enjoy nature was associated with affective attachment and social bonding.
Lastly, the motivation to learn was associated with place identity dimension.
In conclusion, length of time or exposure is associated with place attachment only partly (not all dimensions) and
not very strongly. Moreover, length of time and related variables do not reveal psychological or other processes
taking place during a certain time (cf. Lewicka, 2010). However, the mere-exposure hypothesis may include or
subsume automatic processes that were discussed in this chapter earlier.
Automatic processes may relate to evolutionary-based inclinations in place perception or place preferences.
Evolutionary models of environmental perception postulate that the rapid and automatic processing of
environmental features has developed during human evolution in savannah-like natural environments (Ulrich,
1983; Ulrich et al., 1991). More specifically, it is assumed that physical environments include preferenda, that is,
gross features of a stimulus array (such as gross structural aspects, depth properties, and classes of content),
which are analyzed very rapidly on the basis of crude sensory information in the subcortical structures of the brain
(Parsons, 1991; Ulrich, 1983). Whether there are specific structures in the human brain for place preferences
remains an interesting, open question (Kim et al., 2010; Epstein, Harris, Stanley, & Kanwisher, 1999). However,
motivational processes relating place to self-regulation and identity processes (and thus to personality, learning,
and cultural processes) (p. 153) are equally interesting in this respect and they are further discussed in the
subsequent paragraphs. The combination of these two lines of research awaits further studies.
Page 5 of 19
Place Attachment
First, Morgan (2010) provides a review of attachment theory in developmental psychology to understand the
emergence of (physical) place attachment in childhood. He proposes a model where place attachment arises from
an interactional sequence of attachment and affiliation to a human attachment figure, which enables a child to
explore and be fascinated by the physical environment and place. When place interactions stop producing the
sense of mastery, adventure, and pleasure and produce pain or anxiety, the child seeks proximity to and comfort
from the attachment figure. After emotional arousal is safely regulated and the sense of connectedness regained,
the child is again drawn by environmental cues to explore the outer world.
However, the model actually does not specify how attachment to place is generated. For example, is the sense of
attachment to a human figure somehow transferred, generalized to a physical place (as in learning), or do the
experiences of mastery and pleasure in the place suffice to create attachment toward a certain place? The results
of an interview study with seven adults suggest that the latter might hold: the repeated enactments of arousal,
interaction, and pleasure within the place seem to generate an internal working model of the childs relationship
with the environment. Furthermore, it is suggested that the soothing and restorative environmental qualities are
analogous to the soothing effect of human caregiving (Morgan, 2010). The model seems to be in agreement with
the mere-exposure hypothesis (by exposing an individual to a stimulus [place], a preference for that stimulus will
emerge), which accounts for some variation in the degree of reported affective connection with a place (Backlund
& Williams, 2003).
Second, the role of social development and the interplay between physical and social attachments is an
underinvestigated issue. A longitudinal study by Elder, King, and Conger (1996) on pupils in the 8th and 11th
grades in rural Iowa is interesting with respect to this interplay of social ties and place attachments (in the form of
migration plans). Adolescents who were not doing well in school and saw little prospect for college were inclined to
favor a future adult residence near to parents, kin, and local community. Strong educational prospects, lack of
socioeconomic opportunity, and relatively weak and declining ties to parents, kin, and religion were sources of a
declining preference for living near family and in the local community. The study demonstrates that place
attachment and place disruptions depend on life stage and require life course studies.
Among adults, it seems that the physical setting and landscape features are also an important source of place
meaning and attachment in the first encounters of a place, at least for vacation destinations of scenic beauty. This
meaning does not disappear or become less important over time but other meanings, especially social and
emotional, become added to the experience transforming attraction to attachment (Smaldone, Harris, & Sanyal,
2008). It is also possible that the basis of place attachment changes from physical to social over time or the
meanings are simply added to an ever-richer conceptual structure but the salience of meanings may change.
During old age, when remembering and organizing ones life course becomes an increasingly important
developmental task, place memories and attachments may foster the identity work and sense of continuity;
attachments to a current place may also be a way of retaining positive self-image (Rubinstein & Parmelee, 1992).
Third, from the perspective of childrens place preferences it has been theorized that the development of these
preferences is tied to the development of self-identity, needs of privacy, and social affiliations (Chawla, 1992;
Korpela, 2002). For example, middle childhood, ages 6 to 11, is characterized by expansive local exploration,
cooperation with others in exploring and in games, self-identity determined by ones physical strength and
dexterity, and the creation of playhouses and forts in the nearby environment. After this expansive engagement
with the local landscape in the company of same-sex friends, there comes a period of forming new mixed-sex
groups and turning to the privacy of home or to more distant commercial or downtown settings in adolescence,
ages 12 to 17. Place preferences during childhood and adolescence are assumed to provide support for the
developing self-identity, the need for security, social attachments to caregivers and to the peer group, and the
practice of (p. 154) social roles. Regarding social attachments, the concept of childrens friendship with place
and its development has been introduced (Chatterjee, 2005). Childrens conceptions of friendship are assumed to
develop from momentary physical interaction (ages 3 to 7) to autonomous interdependence (12 years to adult). It
is proposed that child-friendly places could be evaluated with the essential elements (including mutual affection,
shared activities, commitment, loyalty, self-disclosure, and horizontality) within these phases of friendship
development, but whether children themselves select or evaluate placesconsciously or preconsciously
according to such developmental criteria and phases remains an open question for further study.
Page 6 of 19
Place Attachment
Interplay Between Self-Regulation and Place Attachment
Studies by Silbereisen, Noack, and Eyferth (1986); Noack and Silbereisen (1988); and Silbereisen and Noack
(1988), in Berlin, Germany, were probably the first to adopt a self-regulative view of place selection. They consider
individual development as action in context and suggest that adolescents regulate their own development by
selecting and shaping appropriate outer contexts. For example, leisure time place preferences can be seen as one
strategy of coping with developmental tasks such as forming a personal identity or peer-group relations.
Self-regulation in the environmental self-regulation hypothesis implies that the psychological influences of any
external factor, such as sensory stimuli, visceral processes, or social norms, are processed according to an
individuals conscious or unconscious mental activity that follows certain basic principles of motivation (Korpela,
1989). Cognitive-experiential self-theory (CEST; Epstein, 1985, 1991) describes the principles of self-regulation that
have been applied to place identity and place attachment (Korpela, 1989). The principles are basically similar in
many theories of identity and self (see Breakwell, 1986; Clayton, this volume; S. Taylor, 1991; Tesser, 1986), and
these other theories have also been used in relating place and identity processes (Twigger-Ross & Uzzell, 1996).
The principles of CEST correspond to psychoanalytic, learning, and phenomenological theories and integrate them
(Epstein, 1983, 1985). The first principle is the need to maximize the pleasure/pain balance, which corresponds
to the pleasure principle in Freudian theory and to the principle of reinforcement in learning theory. The second
principle is the need to assimilate the data of reality into a coherent conceptual system and to maintain this
system, that is, the unity principle, put forward by phenomenological personality theorists. The third principle is
the need to maintain a favorable level of self-esteem, which is derived from the pleasure principle, and becomes
important once a self-theory has been formulated. Thus, the pleasure principle in the form of regulating sensory
pleasure and pain is dominant first and foremost in early childhood. The fourth principle is the need to maintain
relatedness, that is, favorable relationships with significant others (Epstein, 1991). The principles are assumed to
overlap and interact with one another. Thus, the four functions are all of central importance, and any one of them
may have a dominant effect in a persons self-theory, that is, self-experience, depending on the individual and
circumstances. Thus, behavior is always viewed as a compromise among the four basic functions (Epstein, 1985).
These principles can be related to place attachment when assuming that self-regulation proceeds with the
application of mental, physical, social, and environmental strategies (Korpela, 1989, 1992). Environmental
strategies of self- and emotion-regulation imply interaction with the environment, and involve the unconscious,
preconscious, or sometimes conscious use of places and place cognitions and affects in the service of regulation.
Self- and emotion-regulation enable an individual to function adaptively in situations that are, for example,
emotionally arousing (Dodge & Garber, 1991). The concepts of self- and emotion-regulation are neutral and not
synonyms for the concept of control, suppression, or elimination but can refer to remediation, enhancement. or
maintenance as well (Izard & Kobak, 1991).
CEST also postulates that human beings construct a personal theory of themselves and of the world that exists at a
preconscious level of awareness and directs behavior. There are three conceptual systems: rational, experiential,
and associationistic (Epstein, 1991). A personal theory of self and reality is governed by the experiential system at
the preconscious level of awareness. The experiential conceptual system is closely related to emotional
experience and could also be called the affective conceptual system (Epstein, 1983). Whereas the rational system
operates primarily according to the conventional rules of logic, analysis, and external evidence, the experiential
system is concerned primarily with feelings and personal welfare. The associationistic conceptual system operates
according to associationistic thinking, wishful thinking, concrete (p. 155) visual imagery or metaphors,
displacement, condensation, and lack of consideration of the constraints of time and place.
Note the similarity of CESTs conceptual systems at varying levels of awareness with the automatic, affective
processes and Zajoncs position on immediate responding to environments. In the self-regulation view, place
identity is fundamentally formed by the experiences and cognitions in places that have a role in a persons emotion
and self-regulation. Thus, place attachment is implicit in place identity (Korpela, 1989, 1992). Attachments are
formed to places that fulfill peoples emotional needs and enable them to maintain and develop their identities. The
principles of self-regulation suggest that in this effort humans strive for cognitive integration and consistency,
anxiety reduction, and self-esteem maintenance, and they use places to achieve these goals (cf. Proshansky,
Fabian, & Kaminoff, 1983; Korpela, 2002). To begin with, cross-sectional self-report studies do indicate that favorite
nearby places provide restorative, stress-alleviating experiences, such as relaxation, decrease in negative
Page 7 of 19
Place Attachment
feelings and increase in positive ones, and forgetting worries, and that people visit these places for the regulation
of their self-experience and feelings (see Evans, Owens, & Marsh, 2005; Gross & Lane, 2007; Gulwadi, 2006;
Jorgensen, Hitchmough & Dunnett, 2007; Knez, 2006; Korpela, 1992; Korpela & Hartig, 1996; Korpela, Hartig,
Kaiser, & Fuhrer, 2001; Mason et al., 2010; Mason & Korpela, 2009; Newell, 1997; Regan & Horn, 2005; Smaldone
et al., 2005). In line with this argument is also the finding that among 162 relatively distinct affect-regulation
strategies, going to a favorite place is included (Parkinson & Totterdell, 1999).
More specifically and regarding the early development of attachment and self-regulation within places, adults and
children provide converging self-report evidence that emotion-regulation and self-regulation do occur in the
favorite places of childhood. Studies of adults memories of childhood favorite places (Cooper Marcus, 1978;
Hester, 1979; Sobel, 1990) indicate that they provided feelings of security, privacy, and control. The need to be
alone, the importance of hiding places, and the need to escape from social demands are commonly reported in
these studies. Findings from studies with children and adolescents corroborate the significance of both solitary
places and social places (Abbott-Chapman & Robertson, 2001, 2009; Owens, 1988, 1994; Sobel, 1990). Moreover,
an observational study with children ages 2 months to 11 years showed that nearly half of the children used (often
solitary) informal retreat places in family care homes (Weinberger, 2006). Retreats were places where a child
spontaneously chose to go to pull away from the activity of the group. Children observed to be in a negative mood
were likely to be involved in passive behaviors (watching others, crying, cuddling comfort objects) during their
retreat. Thurber and Malinowskis (1999) study showed how emotional experiences and individual differences
related to emotion may be responsible for differences in childrens place selections and use. They found that 8- to
16-year-old boys with higher levels of negative emotion were more likely to favor places where they could be
alone in a residential summer camp, whereas happier boys favored places where they could socialize. Boys with
higher levels of negative emotion also were more likely to visit new places at camp than their less distressed peers.
As a particular aspect of self-regulation, restorative experience commonly appears in studies based on childrens
accounts. For example, 9- and 12-year-old children described their favorite places as providing opportunities not
only to enjoy many activities and play but also to clear their minds, relax, and pour out troubles (Korpela, 1989;
Spencer & Woolley, 2000). For the 11- to 17-year-olds studied by Sommer (1990), favorite places provided relief
from daily hassles and evoked feelings of well-being and peace. The 14- to 18-year-olds studied by Owens (1988)
regarded natural settings as one of the best types of place to go for feeling better and getting things in perspective.
A study on 13- to 20-year-olds again showed that natural environments provide important settings for recreation,
restoration, and socializing (Owens & McKinnon, 2009). In a study of Finnish children aged 89 or 1213, over half
(55%) of the children appeared to use their favorite places for cognitive restoration, reporting a desire to pour out
troubles, reflect on personal matters, clear ones mind, and feel free and relaxed in the favorite place (Korpela,
Kytt, & Hartig, 2002). One-third of the children reported using their favorite places for emotion-regulation,
reporting visiting the favorite place after setbacks, disappointments, and feeling down and lonely. Cross-sectional
studies have shown mixed results concerning the relationship between childhood experiences and later
experiences and use of woodlands. Childhood experiences may include therapeutic and restorative experiences
but also scary experiences leading to the avoidance of woodland spaces (Milligan & Bingley, 2007). On the other
hand, childhood involvement (p. 156) with the natural environment is related to pro-environmental attitudes
(Wells & Lekies, 2006) and to frequent use and comfortable feelings in woodlands (Bixler, Floyd, & Hammitt, 2002;
Ward Thompson, Aspinall, & Montarzino, 2008).
Among adults favorite places, everyday natural settings, such as parks, beaches, or forests, have constituted the
largest category (50%63%) in the studies from Finland, Ireland, Senegal, the United States, and the United
Kingdom (Evans et al., 2005; Gross & Lane, 2007; Gulwadi, 2006; Jorgensen et al., 2007; Korpela, 1992; Korpela &
Hartig, 1996; Korpela et al., 2001; Newell, 1997; Regan & Horn, 2005; Smaldone et al., 2005). Providing evidence
for environmental self-regulation hypothesis, attachment toward favorite places (measured by a two-item scale)
was very strong, and favorite place preferences were not momentary choices but showed stability over a 10month period in a Finnish follow-up study with adults (Korpela, Yln, Tyrvinen, & Silvennoinen, 2008).
Restorative outcomes, that is, being relaxed, forgetting worries, and contemplation, have characterized visits to
natural favorite places in particular (Korpela et al., 2001). Adults with high negative moods are more likely than low
negative mood scorers to choose natural favorite places than other favorite places, such as sports, commercial, or
community service settings (Korpela, 2003). Moreover, adults with a certain number of health complaints are more
likely than few-complaint scorers to choose natural favorite places in the vicinity than to choose other favorite
Page 8 of 19
Place Attachment
places, such as sports, commercial, or community service settings (Korpela & Yln, 2007). More important and
indicating self-regulation is the fact that they also benefited more in emotional terms from their visits than did those
with few complaints. Furthermore, a controlled, prospective field experiment showed that there is a kind of doseresponse relation between the frequency of visiting a favorite place and restorative experiences (Korpela & Yln,
2009). Thus, the increase in the frequency of favorite place visits during five days increased the strength of
restorative, stress-alleviating experiences.
Page 9 of 19
Place Attachment
level/scale of the attachment object: a difference between attachment to a particular place and attachment or
connectedness to nature (Gosling & Williams, 2010). Results of a survey among Australian farmers showed that
on-farm vegetation protection behaviors (e.g., planting of native trees to improve degraded areas) were positively
correlated to connectedness to nature but not to place attachment (to a persons own farm). The relationship
between connectedness to nature and protection behaviors was mediated by the importance given to the
environmental benefits of vegetation management, such as the protection of native birds or contributing to the
health of the landscape (Gosling & Williams, 2010). Measures of environmental identity, which also refer to the
level of nature in general (incorporating emotional association and identity with nature, importance of nature, the
extent of interactions with nature), not specific places, have had significant positive correlation to environmentally
protective behavior (e.g., donating to environmental organizations, turning off lights) and to support for providing
rights to animals and to the environment in general (Clayton & Myers, 2009; Clayton, this volume). Similarly,
Schultzs (2001) Inclusion of Nature in Self (INS) scale was quite highly (r = .43) correlated with the frequency of
self-reported pro-environmental behavior, such as recycling newspaper or purchasing products in a reusable or
recyclable container, among US undergraduates. In a similar sample population, a moderate positive relationship
between biospheric concerns and implicit connections with nature, and a negative relationship between implicit
connections with nature and egoistic concerns was found (Schultz et al., 2004).
An on-site survey study with 20- to 71-year-old Canadian residents from two towns showed that attachment to the
natural aspects of the local area was a significant unique predictor of pro-environmental behavior when controlling
for the town of study, length of residence, gender, education, and age. In contrast, attachment to the socialsymbolic (civic) elements of the place was not a significant predictor of pro-environmental behavior once the other
variables were taken into account (Scannell & Gifford, 2010b). Echoing the nature versus civic distinction, DevineWright and Howes (2010) found that natural places interpreted as psychologically restorative were most likely to
be defended by the strongly attached local residents.
The above-mentioned inconsistencies in the results may also partly reflect the current methodological problems in
measuring emotional attachments to place with questionnaires. Namely, Perrin and Benassi (2009) reported on the
basis of a series of studies that rather than measuring emotional connections, the connectedness to nature scale
(Mayer & Frantz, 2004) measures cognitive beliefs about a persons connection to nature.
Page 10 of 19
Place Attachment
maintain self and well-being in the disruptions of place relationships and attachment.
Somewhat in contrast to the above mentioned study by Boa (2009) (refugees having difficulty in giving up a
cherished memory, resulting in alienation in the new settlement), a study of young (11- to 19-year-old) refugees to
Australia found that an individuals active efforts toward place-making may provide therapeutic benefits and
enhance becoming at home in a new country (Sampson & Gifford, 2010). Understanding such mixed results (the
feelings of alienation, not giving up cherished memories vs. active place-making providing therapeutic benefits)
requires further theoretical thinking in this area and may involve understanding the regularities in emotional
reactions to negative and positive events. For example, there is evidence for the mobilization-minimization
hypothesis assuming that adverse or threatening events evoke strong and rapid physiological, cognitive,
emotional, and social responses (Taylor, 1991). Negative events elicit more causal attributional activity than
positive events (Bohner, Bless, Schwarz, & Strack, 1988). People are also inclined to assume responsibility for
positive outcomes but avoid it for failure, although sex, self-esteem, and achievement motivation affect this
tendency (Zuckerman, 1979). The mobilization of the organism is followed by physiological, cognitive, and
behavioral responses that minimize and even erase the impact of that event (Taylor, 1991). For example, the
opponent-process theory of Solomon and Corbit (1974) holds that emotional states are automatically opposed by
offsetting responses that reduce the intensity of the original emotional experience. Taylor (1991) assumed that the
pattern of mobilization and minimization is greater for negative events than for neutral or positive events. The
question of how such regularities of emotional and cognitive (attributional) processes affect place attachment and
place identity cognitions poses an interesting challenge for future studies.
Conclusion
In brief, dimensional frameworks and models of place attachment provide researchers adequate taxonomies with
which they can locate their specific operationalizations and studies. We need more studies to verify causal
sequences, underlying needs, and processes/dynamics of place attachment, and we need more evidence to be
able to differentiate between consequences/outcomes, antecedents, and mediating/moderating processes.
Noteworthy in the studies of rapid affective responses to environments is that such automatic evaluation of ones
own environment may be a pervasive and continuous process in our lives. Such processes in future theories of
place attachment have to be acknowledged. Automatic inclinations may be the first phase in our reactions to
places but how self, personality, learning, and culture play upon these inclinations is a largely open question.
The development of place attachment includes a complex interplay of automatic processes, social influence,
individual and collective values and meanings, needs, and personality characteristics. To capture these
developmental issues, several theoretical starting points are already available including (p. 159) general
attachment theory; the mere-exposure hypothesis; theories of self-, privacy, and friendship regulation; theories of
coping (with developmental tasks and stress); theories of identity development; and self-theories.
Evidence for the positive connection between place attachment and conservation behavior is still mixed and we
cannot be sure whether place attachment affects pro-environmental behavior or vice versa. Moreover, the scale of
the object of attachment may be crucial, and from a psychological perspective there is little research on
attachment to the globe or biosphere level. In this regard, studies on environmental attitudes (and their biases)
might prove a fruitful direction of study (see Gifford et al., 2009). Disruptions of place bonds and relationships may
be one window to further studies on coping with threatening events and the use of places and place attachment in
the service of this coping.
Future Directions
The current situation warrants efforts to deepen the theoretical and empirical work in at least three directions. First,
integrative workeven speculative to start withbringing together theories and results from several areas of
psychology, such as emotion, developmental, and personality psychology, with place research would be fruitful.
For example, how do we connect place attachment to theories of affect and emotion (including automatic
responses to the environment) and how do rational, experiential, and associationistic conceptual systems
(described by CEST) operate in place attachment? How do attachments to different places influence one another?
What views of personality functioning are included in the lists of the functions of place attachment? Why does the
Page 11 of 19
Place Attachment
human psyche develop attachments in the first place?
Second, questions concerning the role of pleasure and human attachment figures wait for further study. For
example, what is it that provides pleasure in the place? Why do experiences of pleasure create attachment and
not just the sense of security or familiarity? What creates arousal and motivates a child to seek pleasure in places
and what is the role of human attachment figures in this? Is place attachment a substitute for the lack of human
attachment?
Third, the development of place attachment in different types of places deserves further study. For example, does
place attachment grow and develop on the basis of restorative, vitalizing, or autonomy-enhancing experiences in
personally important places? Do natural settings provide a different basis for place attachment than built
environments (cf. Scopelliti & Giuliani, 2004)? Does the basis of place attachment change from physical to social
over time or vice versa? What is the interplay between aesthetic, cognitive, emotional, and social needs in the
development of place preferences and place attachment?
Questions abound but the door to a deeper understanding about place attachment is invitingly open.
References
Abbott-Chapman, J., & Robertson, M. (2001). Youth, leisure, and home: Space, place, and identity. Society and
Leisure, 24, 485506.
Abbott-Chapman, J., & Robertson, M. (2009). Adolescents favourite places: Re-defining the boundaries between
private and public space. Space and Culture, 12, 419434.
Altman, I., & Low, S. M. (Eds.). (1992). Place attachment. New York: Plenum Press.
Backlund, E. A., & Williams, D. R. (2003). A quantitative synthesis of place attachment research: Investigating past
experience and place attachment. In J. Murdy (Ed.), Proceedings of the 2003 Northeastern Recreation Research
Symposium. Gen. Tech. Rep. NE-317. Newtown Square, PA: US Department of Agriculture, Forest Service,
Northeastern Research Station.
Bargh, J. A., & Chartrand, T. L. (1999). The unbearable automaticity of being. American Psychologist, 54, 462479.
Bixler, R. D., Floyd, M. F., & Hammitt, W. E. (2002). Environmental socialization: Quantitative tests of the childhood
play hypothesis. Environment and Behavior, 34, 795818.
Block, J., & Colvin, C. R. (1994). Positive illusions and well-being revisited: Separating fiction from fact.
Psychological Bulletin, 116, 28.
Boa, C. (2009). Place attachment in a foreign settlement. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 29, 267278.
Bohner, G., Bless, H., Schwarz, N., & Strack, F. (1988). What triggers causal attributions? The impact of valence
and subjective probability. European Journal of Social Psychology, 18, 335345.
Breakwell, G. M. (1986). Coping with threatened identities. London: Methuen.
Brooks, J. J., Wallace, G. N., & Williams, D. R. (2006). Place as relationship partner: An alternative metaphor for
understanding the quality of visitor experience in a backcountry setting. Leisure Sciences, 28, 331349.
Brown, G., & Raymond, C. (2007). The relationship between place attachment and landscape values: Toward
mapping attachment. Applied Geography, 27, 89111.
Budruk, M., Thomas, H., & Tyrrell, T. (2009). Urban green spaces: A study of place attachment and environmental
attitudes in India. Society and Natural Resources, 22, 824839.
Buttimer, A., & Seamon, D. (Eds.). (1980). The human experience of space and place. London: Croom Helm.
Chatterjee, S. (2005). Childrens friendship with place: A conceptual inquiry. Children, Youth, and Environments,
Page 12 of 19
Place Attachment
15, 126.
Chawla, L. (1992). Childhood place attachments. In I. Altman & S. M. Low (Eds.), Place attachment (pp. 6386).
New York: Plenum Press.
(p. 160) Chow, K., & Healey, M. (2008). Place attachment and place identity: First-year undergraduates making
the transition from home to university. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 28, 362372.
Churchman, A., & Mitrani, M. (1997). The role of the physical environment in culture shock. Environment and
Behavior, 29, 6486.
Clayton, S., & Myers, G. (2009). Conservation psychology: Understanding and promoting human care for nature.
Malaysia: Wiley-Blackwell.
Colvin, C. R., & Block, J. (1994). Do positive illusions foster mental health? An examination of the Taylor and Brown
formulation. Psychological Bulletin, 116, 320.
Conway, M. A. (1990). Autobiographical memory: An introduction. Guildford, UK: Open University Press.
Cooper Marcus, C. (1978). Remembrance of landscapes past. Landscape, 22, 3543.
Davenport, M. A., & Anderson, D. H. (2004). Getting from sense of place to place-based management: An
interpretive investigation of place meanings and perceptions of landscape change. Society and Natural
Resources, 18, 625641.
Devine-Wright, P., & Howes, Y. (2010). Disruption to place attachment and the protection of restorative
environments: A wind energy case study. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30, 271280.
Dimberg, U. (1990). Facial electromyography and emotional reactions. Psychophysiology, 27, 481494.
Dodge, K. A., & Garber, J. (1991). Domains of emotion regulation. In J. Garber & K. A. Dodge (Eds.), The
development of emotion regulation and dysregulation (pp. 311). Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Elder, G. H., Jr., King, V., & Conger, R. D. (1996). Attachment to place and migration prospects: A developmental
perspective. Journal of Research on Adolescence, 6, 397425.
Epstein, R., Harris, A., Stanley, D., & Kanwisher, N. (1999). The parahippocampal place area: Recognition,
navigation, or encoding? Neuron, 23, 115125.
Epstein, S. (1983). The unconscious, the preconscious, and the self-concept. In J. Suls & A. G. Greenwald (Eds.),
Psychological perspectives on the self (Vol. 2, pp. 219247). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Epstein, S. (1985). The implications of cognitive-experiential self-theory for research in social psychology and
personality. Journal for the Theory of Social Behavior, 15, 283310.
Epstein, S. (1991). Cognitive-experiential self-theory: An integrative theory of personality. In R. C. Curtis (Ed.), The
relational self: Theoretical convergences in psychoanalysis and social psychology (pp. 111137). New York:
Guilford Press.
Evans, W. P., Owens, P., & Marsh, S. C. (2005). Environmental factors, locus of control, and adolescent suicide risk.
Child and Adolescent Social Work Journal, 22, 301319.
Feldman, R. M. (1990). Settlement-identity: Psychological bonds with home places in a mobile society. Environment
and Behavior, 22, 183229.
Fleury-Bahi, G., Flonneau, M-L., & Marchand, D. (2008). Processes of place identification and residential
satisfaction. Environment and Behavior, 40, 669682.
Fried, M. (1963). Grieving for a lost home. In L. J. Duhl (Ed.), The urban condition (pp. 151171). New York: Basic
Books.
Page 13 of 19
Place Attachment
Gifford, R., Scannell, L., Kormos, C., Smolova, L., Biel, A., Boncu, S., Uzzell, D. (2009). Temporal pessimism and
spatial optimism in environmental assessments: An 18-nation study. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 29, 1
12.
Giuliani, M. V. (2003). Theory of attachment and place attachment. In M. Bonnes, T. Lee, & M. Bonaiuto (Eds.),
Psychological theories for environmental issues (pp. 137170). Aldershot, UK: Ashgate.
Gosling, E., & Williams, K. J. H. (2010). Connectedness to nature, place attachment, and conservation behaviour:
Testing connectedness theory among farmers. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30, 298304.
Greene, M. R., & Oliva, A. (2009). The briefest of glances: The time course of natural scene understanding.
Psychological Science, 20, 464472.
Greenwald, A. G. (1981) Environmental structure and cognitive structure. In J. H. Harvey (Ed.), Cognition, social
behavior, and the environment (pp. 535553). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Gross, H., & Lane, N. (2007). Landscapes of the lifespan: Exploring accounts of own gardens and gardening.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 27, 225241.
Gulwadi, G. B. (2006). Seeking restorative experiences: Elementary school teachers choices for places that
enable coping with stress. Environment and Behavior, 38, 503520.
Hammitt, W. E., Backlund, E. A., & Bixler, R. D. (2006). Place bonding for recreation places: Conceptual and
empirical development. Leisure Studies, 25, 1741.
Hammitt, W. E., Kyle, G.T., & Oh, C.-O. (2009). Comparison of place bonding models in recreation resource
management. Journal of Leisure Research, 41, 5772.
Hartig, T., Evans, G. W., Jamner, L. D., Davis, D. S., & Grling, T. (2003). Tracking restoration in natural and urban
field settings. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 23, 109123.
Hartig, T., Mang, M., & Evans, G. W. (1991). Restorative effects of natural environment experiences. Environment
and Behavior, 23, 326.
Heine, S. J., & Buchtel, E. E. (2009). Personality: The universal and the culturally specific. Annual Review of
Psychology, 60, 369394.
Herzog, T. R., Maguire, C. P., & Nebel, M. B. (2003). Assessing the restorative components of environments. Journal
of Environmental Psychology, 23, 159170.
Hester, R. (1979, September). A womb with a view: How spatial nostalgia affects the designer. Landscape
Architecture, 475482.
Hidalgo, M. C., & Hernndez, B. (2001). Place attachment: Conceptual and empirical questions. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 21, 273281.
Hietanen, J. K., Klemettil, T., Kettunen, J. E., & Korpela, K. M. (2007). What is a nice smile like that doing in a place
like this? Automatic affective responses to environments influence the recognition of facial expressions.
Psychological Research, 71, 539552.
Hietanen, J. K., & Korpela, K. M. (2004). Do both negative and positive environmental scenes elicit rapid affective
processing? Environment and Behavior, 36, 558577.
Izard, C. E., & Kobak, R. R. (1991). Emotions system functioning and emotion regulation. In J. Garber & K. A. Dodge
(Eds.), The development of emotion regulation and dysregulation (pp. 303321). Cambridge, UK: Cambridge
University Press.
Jorgensen, A., Hitchmough, J., & Dunnett, N. (2007). Woodland as a setting for housing-appreciation and fear and
the contribution to residential satisfaction and place identity in Warrington New Town, UK. Landscape and Urban
Planning, 79, 273287.
Page 14 of 19
Place Attachment
(p. 161) Jorgensen, B. S., & Stedman, R. C. (2001). Sense of place as an attitude: Lakeshore owners attitudes
toward their properties. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 21, 233248.
Kaplan, R., & Kaplan, S. (1989). The experience of nature: A psychological perspective. Cambridge, UK:
Cambridge University Press.
Kerr, J. H., & Tacon, P. (1999). Psychological responses to different types of locations and activities. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 19, 287294.
Kim, T-H., Jeong, G-W., Baek, H-S., Kim, G-W., Sundaram, T., Kang, H-K., Lee, S-W., Kim, H-J., & Song, J-K. (2010).
Human brain activation in response to visual stimulation with rural and urban scenery pictures: A functional
magnetic resonance image study. Science of the Total Environment, 408, 26002607.
Knez, I. (2006). Autobiographical memories for places. Memory, 14, 359377.
Korpela, K. (1989). Place-identity as a product of environmental self-regulation. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 9, 241256.
Korpela, K. (1992). Adolescents favourite places and environmental self-regulation. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 12, 249258.
Korpela, K. (2002). Childrens environment. In R. B. Bechtel & A. Churchman (Eds.), Handbook of environmental
psychology (pp. 363373). New York: John Wiley & Sons.
Korpela, K. (2003). Negative mood and adult place preference. Environment and Behavior, 35, 331346.
Korpela, K., & Hartig, T. (1996). Restorative qualities of favorite places. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 16,
221233.
Korpela, K., Hartig, T., Kaiser, F., & Fuhrer, U. (2001). Restorative experience and self- regulation in favorite places.
Environment and Behavior, 33, 572589.
Korpela, K., Klemettil, T., & Hietanen, J. (2002). Evidence for rapid affective evaluation of environmental scenes.
Environment and Behavior, 34, 478494.
Korpela, K., Kytt, M., & Hartig, T. (2002). Restorative experience, self-regulation, and childrens place
preferences. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 22, 387398.
Korpela, K., & Yln, M. (2007). Perceived health is associated with visiting natural favourite places in the vicinity.
Health & Place, 13, 138151.
Korpela, K., & Yln, M. (2009). Effectiveness of favorite place prescriptionsA field experiment. American Journal
of Preventive Medicine, 36, 435438.
Korpela, K., Yln, M., Tyrvinen, L., & Silvennoinen, H. (2008). Determinants of restorative experiences in everyday
favourite places. Health & Place, 14, 636652.
Kyle, G., Graefe, A., Manning, R., & Bacon, J. (2004). Effects of place attachment on users perceptions of social
and environmental conditions in a natural setting. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 24, 213225.
Kyle, G., Mowen, A. J., & Tarrant, M. (2004). Linking place preferences with place meaning: An examination of the
relationship between place motivation and place attachment. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 24, 439454.
Lalli, M. (1992). Urban-related identity: Theory, measurement, and empirical findings. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 12, 285303.
Lewicka, M. (2011). Place attachment: How far have we come in the last 40 years? Journal of Environmental
Psychology,31, 207230.
Manzo, L. (2003). Beyond house and haven: Toward a revisioning of emotional relationships with places. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 23, 4761.
Page 15 of 19
Place Attachment
Mason, M., & Korpela, K. (2009). Activity spaces and urban adolescent substance use and emotional health.
Journal of Adolescence, 32, 925939.
Mason, M., Korpela, K., Coatsworth, J. D., Mennis, J., Valente, T., Lawrence, F., Pate, P., & Pomponio, A. (2010).
Patterns of place-based self-regulatory experiences and associated mental health of urban adolescents. Journal of
Community Psychology, 38, 155171.
Mayer, F. S., & McPherson Frantz, C. (2004). The connectedness to nature scale: A measure of individuals feeling
in community with nature. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 24, 503515.
McCrae, R. R., & Costa, P. T., Jr. (1987). Validation of the five-factor model of personality across instruments and
observers. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 52, 8190.
Milligan, C., & Bingley, A. (2007). Restorative places or scary spaces? The impact of woodland on the mental wellbeing of young adults. Health & Place, 13, 799811.
Morgan, P. (2010). Towards a developmental theory of place attachment. Journal of Environmental Psychology,
30, 1122.
Newell, P. B. (1997). A cross-cultural examination of favorite places. Environment and Behavior, 29, 495514.
Noack, P., & Silbereisen, R. K. (1988). Adolescent development and choice of leisure settings. Childrens
Environments Quarterly, 5, 2533.
Nordh, H., Hartig, T., Hgerhll, C. M., & Fry, G. (2009). Components of small urban parks that predict the possibility
for restoration. Urban Forestry & Urban Greening, 8, 225235.
Owens, P. E. (1988). Natural landscapes, gathering places, and prospect refuges: Characteristics of outdoor
places valued by teens. Childrens Environments Quarterly, 5, 1724.
Owens, P. E. (1994). Teen places in Sunshine, Australia: Then and now. Childrens Environments, 11, 292299.
Owens, P. E., & McKinnon, I. (2009). In pursuit of nature: The role of nature in adolescents lives. Journal of
Developmental Processes, 4, 4358.
Pals, R., Steg, L., Siero, F. W., & van der Zee K. I. (2009). Development of the PRCQ: A measure of perceived
restorative characteristics of zoo attractions. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 29, 441449.
Parkinson, B., & Totterdell, P. (1999). Classifying affect-regulation strategies. Cognition & Emotion, 13, 277303.
Parsons, R. (1991). The potential influences of environmental perception on human health. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 11, 123.
Parsons, R., Tassinary, L. G., Ulrich, R. S., Hebl, M. R., & Grossman-Alexander, M. (1998). The view from the road:
Implications for stress recovery and immunization. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 18, 113139.
Patterson, M. E., & Williams, D. R. (2005). Maintaining research traditions on place: Diversity of thought and
scientific progress. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 25, 361380.
Perrin, J. L., & Benassi, V. A. (2009). The connectedness to nature scale: A measure of emotional connection to
nature? Journal of Environmental Psychology, 29, 434440.
Proshansky, H. M., Fabian, A. K., & Kaminoff, R. (1983). Place-identity: Physical world socialization of the self.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 3, 5783.
(p. 162) Regan, C. L., & Horn, S. A. (2005). To nature or not to nature: Associations between environmental
preferences, mood states, and demographic factors. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 25, 5766.
Riley, R. (1992). Attachment to the ordinary landscape. In I. Altman & S. M. Low (Eds.), Place attachment (pp. 13
35). New York: Plenum Press.
Page 16 of 19
Place Attachment
Rollero, C., & De Piccoli, N. (2010). Place attachment, identification, and environment perception: An empirical
study. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30, 198205.
Rubinstein, R. L., & Parmelee, P. A. (1992). Attachment to place and the representation of the life course by the
elderly. In I. Altman & S. M. Low (Eds.), Place attachment (pp. 139163). New York: Plenum Press.
Ryan, R. L. (2005). Exploring the effects of environmental experience on attachment to urban natural areas.
Environment and Behavior, 37, 342.
Ryan, R. M., Weinstein, N., Bernstein, J. H., Brown, K. W., Mistretta, L., & Gagn, M. (2010). Vitalizing effects of being
outdoors and in nature. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30, 159168.
Sampson, R., & Gifford, S. M. (2010). Place-making, settlement and well-being: The therapeutic landscapes of
recently arrived youth with refugee backgrounds. Health & Place, 16, 116131.
Scannell, L., & Gifford, R. (2010a). Defining place attachment: A tripartite organizing framework. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 30, 110.
Scannell, L., & Gifford, R. (2010b). The relations between natural and civic place attachment and proenvironmental behavior. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30, 289297.
Schultz, P. W. (2001). The structure of environmental concern: Concern for self, other people, and the biosphere.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 21, 327339.
Schultz, P. W., Scopelliti, M., & Tiberio, L. (2010). Homesickness in university students: The role of multiple place
attachment. Environment and Behavior, 42, 335350.
Schultz, P. W., Shriver, C., Tabanico, J. J., & Khazian, A. M. (2004). Implicit connections with nature. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 24, 3142.
Scopelliti, M., & Giuliani, M. V. (2004). Choosing restorative environments across the life span: A matter of place
experience. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 24, 423437.
Sharpe, E. K., & Evert, A. W. (2000). Interferences in place attachment: Implications for wilderness. USDA Forest
Service Proceedings RMRS-P-15. Vol. 3, 218222.
Silbereisen, R., & Noack, P. (1988). Adolescence and environment. In D. Canter, M. Krampen, & D. Stea (Eds.),
Ethnoscapes. Environmental policy, assessment and communication (Vol. 2., pp. 1934). Aldershot, UK: Avebury.
Silbereisen, R., Noack, P., & Eyferth, K. (1986). Place for development: Adolescents, leisure settings, and
developmental tasks. In R. K. Silbereisen, K. Eyferth, & G. Rudinger (Eds.), Development as action in context:
Problem behavior and normal youth development (pp. 87107). Berlin: Springer-Verlag.
Smaldone, D., Harris, C., & Sanyal, N. (2005). An exploration of place as a process: The case of Jackson Hole, WY.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 25, 397414.
Smaldone, D., Harris, C., & Sanyal, N. (2008). The role of time in developing place meanings. Journal of Leisure
Research, 40, 479504.
Sobel, D. (1990). A place in the world: Adults memories of childhood special places. Childrens Environments
Quarterly, 7, 512.
Solomon, R. L., & Corbit, J. D. (1974). An opponent-process theory of motivation: Temporal dynamics of affect.
Psychological Review, 81, 119145.
Sommer, B. (1990). Favorite places of Estonian adolescents. Childrens Environments Quarterly, 7, 3236.
Spencer, C., & Woolley, H. (2000). Children and the city: A summary of recent environmental psychology
research. Child: Care, Health, and Development, 26, 181198.
Staats, H., Gatersleben, B., & Hartig, T. (1997). Change in mood as a function of environmental design: Arousal and
Page 17 of 19
Place Attachment
pleasure on a simulated forest hike. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 17, 283300.
Stedman, R. C. (2002). Toward a social psychology of place: Predicting behavior from place-based cognitions,
attitude, and identity. Environment and Behavior, 34, 561581.
Taylor, S. E. (1983). Adjustment to threatening events: A theory of cognitive adaptation. American Psychologist,
38, 11611173.
Taylor, S. E. (1991). Asymmetrical effects of positive and negative events: The mobilization-minimization
hypothesis. Psychological Bulletin, 110, 6785.
Taylor, S. E. & Brown, J. D. (1994). Positive illusions and well-being revisited: Separating fact from fiction.
Psychological Bulletin, 116, 2127.
Tesser, A. (1986). Some effects of self-evaluation maintenance on cognition and action. In R. M. Sorrentino & E. T.
Higgins (Eds.), Handbook of motivation and cognition: Foundations of social behaviour (pp. 435464). Chicester,
UK: John Wiley & Sons.
Thurber, C. A., & Malinowski, J. C. (1999). Environmental correlates of negative emotions in children. Environment
and Behavior, 31, 487513.
Twigger-Ross, C., & Uzzell, D. L. (1996). Place and identity processes. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 16,
139169.
Ulrich, R. S. (1981). Natural versus urban scenes: Some psychophysiological effects. Environment and Behavior,
13, 523556.
Ulrich, R. S. (1983). Aesthetic and affective response to natural environment. In I. Altman & J. F. Wohlwill (Eds.),
Human behavior and environment: Advances in theory and research, Vol. 6: Behavior and the natural
environment (pp. 85125). New York: Plenum Press.
Ulrich, R. S., Simons, R. F., Losito, B. D., Fiorito, E., Miles, M. A., & Zelson, M. (1991). Stress recovery during
exposure to natural and urban environments. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 11, 201230.
Uzzell, D., Pol, E., & Badenas, D. (2002). Place identification, social cohesion, and environmental sustainability.
Environment and Behavior, 34, 2653.
Vaske, J. J., & Kobrin, K. C. (2001). Place attachment and environmentally responsible behavior. The Journal of
Environmental Education, 32, 1621.
Ward Thompson, C., Aspinall, P., & Montarzino, A. (2008). The childhood factor: Adult visits to green places and
the significance of childhood experience. Environment and Behavior, 40, 111143.
Weinberger, N. (2006). Childrens use of retreats in family child care homes. Early Education and Development,
17, 571591.
(p. 163) Weinstein, N., Przybylski, A. K., & Ryan, R. M. (2009). Can nature make us more caring? Effects of
immersion in nature on intrinsic aspirations and generosity. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 35, 1315
1329.
Wells, N. M., & Lekies, K. S. (2006). Nature and the life course: Pathways from childhood nature experiences to
adult environmentalism. Children, Youth, and Environments, 16, 124.
Williams, D. R., Patterson, M. E., Roggenbuck, J. W., & Watson, A. E. (1992). Beyond the commodity metaphor:
Examining emotional and symbolic attachment to place. Leisure Sciences, 14, 2946.
Wlfing, S. (1996). The use of identity-relevant functions of things and places in the context of migration. Swiss
Journal of Psychology, 55, 241248.
Zajonc, R. B. (1980). Feeling and thinking: Preferences need no inferences. American Psychologist, 35, 151175.
Page 18 of 19
Place Attachment
Zuckerman, M. (1979). Attribution of success and failure revisited, or: The motivational bias is alive and well in
attribution theory. Journal of Personality, 47, 245287.
Kalevi M. Korpela
Kalevi M. Korpela School of Social Sciences and Humanities University of Tampere Tampere, Finland
Page 19 of 19
Page 1 of 21
Identity
Some of the earliest work in psychology focused on the self, including work by William James, early social
psychology by George Herbert Mead and Charles Horton Cooley, and more psychodynamically oriented
explorations of the topic by writers such as Albert Adler and Erik Erikson. Although the behaviorist revolution
eschewed a focus on such abstract and ill-defined topics as the self, the limitations of the behavioral approach
quickly became clear and psychologists turned their attention again to cognition, emotion, and finally identity. That
identity emerged as an important topic reflects its central role in the way humans process and respond to external
stimuli. Fundamentally, a discussion of identity is required by the recognition of the importance of the individual:
people are not passive recipients of experience, but active constructors of that experience. When we start to think
about what it is that selects and interprets information and constructs a narrative about experience, in ways that
result in different narratives for different individuals, we open the door for discussions of identity.
Identity is fundamentally a way of defining, describing, and locating oneself. There are many possible definitions
that can be generated, and most theorists would agree that people have multiple identities, which can vary in
salience and significance over a lifetime and across different social contexts. McGuire (1984), for example, found
evidence that the salience of ones own gender was greater when it was a distinguishing characteristic. An identity
can be generated from within, when people choose their own labels, but it can also be imposed by others. An
internal or self-generated identity, one that represents the way in which one represents oneself, to oneself, is a
self-concept or sense of self. An identity is not just a self-concept, however, but also a label that locates a person
within a broader social context. Societies have certain semi-fixed categories and emphases that serve to highlight
particular identities for their members. Ones position in regard to the natural environment and environmental
issues, for example, is more relevant to society than it was a few decades ago.
The dividing line between an internal and an external source of identity is not firm. Internal identities that are selfconsciously adopted by a person are likely to have an effect on the way in which he or she is perceived by the
rest of society, and external labels that are imposed by society, even when they are not freely chosen by the
individual, will probably affect that persons self-perception. Attributes that are considered to be important by a
society, such as gender and some ethnicities, are more likely to form the basis for an enduring identity than ones
that are not particularly relevant to a culture, such as eye color and handedness. The impact of societal
stereotypes on peoples sense of themselves has been demonstrated by a wide body of work on self-fulfilling
prophecies (Snyder & Swann, 1978) and stereotype threat (Steele, 1997). People who are stereotyped as flaky
environmentalists may develop attitudes and behaviors that are consistent with that identity. Alternatively, people
whose identities are thought to be anti-environmental, such as industrialists and members of the Republican Party,
may begin to act in more environmentally unsustainable ways to uphold the norms they associate with those
identities.
Identities are acquired over time (Ryan & Deci, 2003) and within particular sociopolitical contexts, as people
develop a sense of how they fit into a particular place and time. Social contexts affect identities in several ways.
One is by making certain attributes more salient and giving them specific significance. Cultures vary in the way
they highlight specific attributes; for example, the importance of religious affiliation is far greater in some societies
than in others, and although gender is important in every society, its specific implications vary widely across time
and culture.
A second impact of social context is the extent to which identities are fixed or fluid. In Western society today,
people have far more choice in identities than they used to, with greater flexibility in geographical location,
religious affiliation, political ideology, occupational identity, and even gender identity than was typical a century
ago. This flexibility makes identities more responsive to political events, and more reflective of personal
preferences, blurring the line between personal and social. Although some identities, such as ethnicity and gender,
are (p. 166) still imposed, people are strongly defined by identities they choose, such as those based in political
Page 2 of 21
Content
Identity is a rich and complex topic in part because it can be viewed either as an object, whose content and
organization demand elucidation, or as a process, whose impacts should be investigated. William James (1890)
described this as the me and the I; more recently, McAdams, Jossellson, and Lieblich (2006) have referred to
the self-as-tale-told and the self-as-teller. In describing the objective (i.e., self-as-object) self, one of Jamess
important contributions to our understanding of identity was to define three aspects: the personal or spiritual,
social, and material. The personal self referred to inner states, felt experiences, and psychological dispositions; the
social self to the recognition from, and relationships with, others; and the material to physical things associated
with the self, including body, clothes, family, and property. James did not go beyond this to consider the wider
environment, but in describing the material aspects of the self, he acknowledged that identity existed not just inside
a persons head, but also extended into the physical environment. He thus made room for a consideration of the
relevance of natural entities to ones self-definition.
Within psychology, an important (but imperfect) distinction has been made between personal and social identities.
Personal identities are generally considered to be those based on ones individual traits, values, and abilities.
Social identities are those that reflect ones position in a social network: social roles and group memberships.
Group identities (a subset of social identities) are based on shared attributes, including external features, such as
skin color; internal features, such as values or attitudes; experiences; and heritage. They may be based on direct
interaction with like-minded others, such as a political action group, a soccer team, or a book group, or merely on a
perceptual grouping of oneself with similar others who may rarely or never meet in person, such as other New
Englanders, socialists, or people with diabetes.
The distinction between personal and social is inexact, because personal identities can become social when
people with similar personal identities find each other and then a social meaning is attributed to that identity. Rather
than consider personal and social identities as discrete categories, Clayton and Opotow (2003) argued that
identities can be described according to the degree to which social forces have been influential. When social
influence is minimal, the focus is on individual experience. As social influence becomes stronger, social
connotations of identities and interactions with others become more important. Finally, the societal groupings and
political implications of identities become salient when social influence is powerful. To the extent that identities
have a social component, they are likely to acquire associated social stereotypes.
According to Self-Determination Theory (Ryan & Deci, 2003), identities are adopted in the service of basic needs:
the desire for relatedness or belonging, competence or esteem, and autonomy or independence. Identities can
also serve a defensive function, as a way to resist influence or threats from others. Thus identities that are more
effective in filling these needs are likely to become stronger and more salient. Both cultural context and personal
experience will affect identity development (p. 167) through their influence here. People who experience
Page 3 of 21
Process or Function
Identity demands our consideration because of its function. Identities can affect attention, evaluation, memory, and
motivation. Decades of research have shown, for example, that information that is self-relevant attracts more
attention (Kihlstrom et al., 1988). The so-called cocktail-party effect references the fact that ones own name will
emerge and be recognized in a background hum of noise that is otherwise ignored. Identities tend to generate
cognitive schemas that affect the way people organize and process information (Bem, 1981). Self-relevant
information is also better remembered, as reflected in classroom study techniques that encourage students to
apply information to situations in their own lives, and is likely to have more emotional significance because of its
implications for ones self-image and social standing.
More insidiously, identities are responsible for information-processing biases. Best known is the tendency to
evaluate oneself and ones own groups as better, more worthy, and more moral than others on average. Selfserving attributional processes ensure that we tend to explain events in ways that enhance our own self-image. Ingroup biases show that we rate work by people with whom we share an identity as better than work by others.
Beneffectance refers to the tendency to preferentially remember information that casts us in a positive light
compared to information that portrays us more negatively. Identities even determine ethical standards; people who
share an identity with us are evaluated according to a different standard than those who do not (Lerner & Clayton,
2011), and some people may fall completely outside the realm of moral relevance (Opotow, 1996).
Relatedly, identities can both prescribe and motivate action. Role-based identities describe the social expectations
for associated behavior. Across multiple different roles, we are motivated to behave in ways that are socially
valued to maintain identities that present us positively to others as well as to ourselves. Even more important,
perhaps, is the motivation to behave in ways that are consistent with our desired self-image. Research suggests
that the desire for consistency can be stronger than the desire for a positively evaluated self. A greater degree of
consistency across different life roles is even associated with greater well-being (Ryan & Deci, 2003).
In a more abstract and indirect way, identities serve an important psychological function in allowing people to make
meaning of their lives. Cary (1993) described symbolic beliefs, those connected with identity and values, as
allowing people to transform transient experiences into internal models (p. 556); in other words, to construct an
internal sense of self out of external experiences. Identity theorists (e.g., McAdams et al., 2006) have described
identity as the stories people construct and tell about themselves to define who they are for themselves and for
others (p. 4). These stories serve an important function in addressing developmental challenges (Erikson, 1963)
and allowing people to maintain a sense of themselves as consistent and continuous over time. The success with
which people construct an integrated identity for themselves will have implications for their psychological wellbeing (Hinds & Sparks, 2009), and the content of these identities will have a major impact on how people relate to
the world.
Page 4 of 21
Social Identities
Identity can be considered in many subtle and complex ways, but the more obvious components of identity should
not be overlooked. Socially ascribed identities, based on characteristics such as gender, nationality, ethnicity, and
socioeconomic status, have important implications for ones relationship with nature. Identities affect access to
nature and ability to benefit from natural environments, as well as vulnerability to environmental hazards (e.g.,
Bullard, 2000). The term environmental injustice, as used in the sociological or political sense, refers to the
unequal distribution of environmental harms across social categories. These objective social realities, because of
which the natural environment affords different experiences for different social groups, in turn become refracted
into social identities that describe different relationships with nature. Many writers have examined and debated the
extent to which national, cultural, gender, and ethnic identities are associated with differences in environmental
attitudes.
There has been much written by anthropologists and others about cultural differences in the ways people
conceptualize their relationship with nature (see Milfont, this volume). Some Native American cultures, for example,
Page 5 of 21
Page 6 of 21
Page 7 of 21
The 24-item EID scale was developed to assess the extent to which the natural environment plays an important
part in a persons self-definition. More recently a shorter form of only 11 items has been developed. It includes
items relating to a sense of connection to the natural world as well as to its importance to the individual. The EID
Scale also includes items related to competence, autonomy, and belongingness, and to engaging in outdoor
activities. Reliabilities for the EID Scale are high, with alphas of about 0.90 in samples from the United States,
Turkey, Spain, and Finland, both student and nonstudent, and it has shown the expected pattern of correlations
with attitudes, values, and worldview: it is positively correlated with ecocentric attitudes, universal values, and
horizontal collectivism, and negatively correlated with environmental apathy and vertical individualism (Clayton,
2003). Importantly, it also seems to reflect the internal cognitive structure of information related to environmental
issues: in one study, people high in EID found it slightly easier to make decisions about environmental dilemmas
and were more confident in their decisions. In research in a zoo setting, EID was related to a reported sense of
connection to the animals and a perception of the animals as similar to humans. Zoo members also scored higher
than nonmembers on a measure of environmental identity (Clayton et al., 2011).
Although Clayton (2003), in a factor analysis of the scale among college students, found only a single dominant
factor, Olivos and Aragones (2011) found evidence for five factors in a Spanish sample. The first factor,
accounting for by far the largest proportion of variance (32.8%, with the second factor accounting for only 7.2%),
was described as environmental identity; additional factors (after eliminating one that was represented by a
single item) were identified as assessing time in nature, appreciation for nature, and environmentalism. Each
subscale was correlated with pro-environmental behavior, but only the environmentalism and environmental
identity subscales contributed unique variance in a regression analysis.
Connectivity to Nature
Dutcher et al. (2007) developed a measure of connectivity, which they defined as assessing a fundamental
sameness between [oneself] and the natural world (p. 478). Their measure included some survey items, similar to
those on the EID, and the overlapping-circles measure included on the INS, and was a stronger predictor of
environmental concern than demographic characteristics such as age, education, gender, income, and political
orientation. However, with an internal reliability of only 0.72 for the combined scale, it does not seem to represent
Page 8 of 21
Related Constructs
New Environmental Paradigm
The New Environmental Paradigm (NEP; Dunlap & Van Liere, 1978; Dunlap, Van Liere, Mertig, & Jones, 2000) is a
widely used and well-validated measure of what might be called an ideology or belief system concerning nature
and the relationship between humans (as a species) and the natural world. The NEP has been shown to predict
self-reported environmental behavior. Although it includes items regarding belief in the balance of nature, limits to
growth, and human domination over nature, it is generally considered a unidimensional scale. Compared to
identity, the NEP is a set of relatively cold cognitions about what nature is, while measures of environmental identity
are more emotionally tinged assessments of the personal significance of nature. Nevertheless, endorsement of the
NEP should be associated with a strong environmental identity. Data collected by Schultz (2002, personal
communication) from 75 college students show a correlation of r = .44 (p < .001) between the EID and the NEP.
Page 9 of 21
Emotional Significance
Like other identities, environmental identities have strong emotional consequences. In a small study of British
undergraduate students, Hinds and Sparks (2009) found a positive correlation between environmental identity and
affective well-being. Emotional consequences of identity can be linked to specific environments, or to changes in
environments. To the extent that people feel personally reflected in the natural environment, a beautiful
environment can be a source of self-esteem. On the other hand, a contaminated environment can be a source of
stigma. Those who reside in environments that are known to be toxic experience a range of effects including
threats to their social identity, as they recognize not only the negative perceptions others have of their
communities but also the limits to their own sense of self-control and personal security (Edelstein, 2002). Some
authors have argued that a general tendency toward decreased psychological well-being stems from our attempts
to construct a sense of self within degraded and industrialized environments (Jordan, 2009; Kidner, 2007).
Frightening messages about environmental degradation or dangers may be personally threatening by evoking a
fear of death. Terror management theory suggests that people respond to a fear of death by emphasizing and
promoting personal values; that is, they respond by affirming their identities (Solomon, Greenberg, & Pyszczynski,
1991). Research has shown that mortality salience may encourage increased consumption, but that people who
are self-defined as environmentalists, instead, are likely to affirm their identities by acting on their environmental
values (Vess & Arndt, 2008). An environmental identity may provide a buffer that helps people cope with these
frightening messages. On the other hand, it may increase the anxiety that is associated with environmental
problems by making them more salient and self-relevant.
Bearing in mind the core self-motivations of autonomy, connectedness, and esteem and the more basic need for
security, as well as the possible ability of the natural environment to satisfy these needs, Kasser (2009) has argued
for more research into ways to promote psychological well-being through environmental opportunities.
Ethical Implications
Identity matters in considering environmental problems because it is contested: Who counts? Who is considered?
Standards of justice vary according to the status of those involved (Lerner & Clayton, 2011; Skitka, 2003); even
the tendency to consider justice may depend on the extent to which personal identity is salient (Opotow, 1996;
Skitka, 2003). Do animals have rights? Do trees have legal or moral standing (cf. Stone, 1974)? There is wide
variability in the extent to which people believe that the environment, and nonhuman entities, are entitled to justice.
Those who are defined as having an identity within a particular moral universe (Opotow, 1996) are entitled to just
treatment; otherwise, their treatment is guided by purely instrumental considerations. Thus it is telling that an
Page 10 of 21
Behavioral Implications
Identities make the link between abstract issues and personal relevance. One reason so few people take action to
address environmental problems, such as climate change, is probably that it seems remote, and people do not feel
personally responsible (Broder & Connelly, 2007). However, a strong place-based identity can motivate action to
protect a particular location, and a strong environmental identity can motivate action to protect the environment.
Schultz argued that environmental concern was a function of the extent to which people include nature in their
cognitive representation of self (2000 , p. 403), and in a manipulation of perspective-taking he found that students
who took the perspective of an animal harmed by environmental degradation showed greater concern about
environmental problems. Berenguer (2007), in a similar manipulation, succeeded in getting participants to adopt the
perspective of a tree, with a corresponding increase in environmental concern.
In a sense, an environmental identity can serve to transform the motive for environmental behavior; when one
shares an identity with another, promoting their welfare is selfish rather than altruistic. Some evidence for this
Page 11 of 21
Self-Presentation
Perhaps the most overt way in which identities impact behavior is by setting up the presentational pressures that
were described above. So, to the extent that behaving pro-environmentally is positively valued, people should
want to present themselves as supporting the environment; to the extent that people think of themselves as
supporting the environment, they should be motivated to act in a way that is consistent with that self-image.
Crompton and Kasser (2009; Ecopsychology Roundtable, 2009) have argued for the importance of identity
campaigning in attempts to promote pro-environmental behavior, campaigns that understand how people think of
Page 12 of 21
Page 13 of 21
Future Directions
Three foci for future research seem particularly promising to advance the practical relevance, and conceptual
understanding, of environmental identity. First, as described above, given the evidence that environmental identity
can contribute to personal and societal well-being, there is a need for applied environmental psychologists to
consider how to design environments that nurture environmental identity.
In addition, research is needed to further explore what it means to talk about environment as an aspect of identity,
as distinct from an attitude or value. Conceptual confusion and lack of precision can be reduced by clarifying what
it means to refer to an identity: how and why it becomes part of a self-concept, and how it affects psychological
functioning. Two directions for such research can be described. The first would address the extent to which, and
ways in which, an environmental identity helps to satisfy different core self-relevant needs, such as esteem,
autonomy, and connectedness. The second would examine the effects of environmental identity on cognitive
processes as well as on affective responses to others who share the identity.
Finally, environmental identities clearly exist within a social context. Further research is needed to examine ways in
which people create a socially shared sense of identity that links them to the natural environment. Given the social
meanings that currently adhere to environmental attitudes and values, intra- and intergroup processes are
implicated in the development of an environmental identity.
Acknowledgements
Many thanks to Kalevi Korpela and Wes Schultz for their comments on an earlier version of this chapter.
References
Altman, I., & Low, S. (Eds.). (1992). Place attachment. New York: Springer.
Page 14 of 21
Page 15 of 21
Page 16 of 21
Page 17 of 21
Page 18 of 21
Page 19 of 21
Page 20 of 21
Page 21 of 21
Introduction
Our individual lifetime represents only a fraction of the history of humanity, which in turn represents merely a
fragment of the history of planet Earth. Yet, the impact of our individual actions upon the environment can last
many lifetimes, and the cumulative impact of humanity on the planet is far greater than that caused by any other
species. Human societies have always had to adapt to their surroundings, learn seasonal and ecological patterns,
and change the environment to survive. However, in the relatively short time since the Industrial Revolution,
humans have made unprecedented environmental transformations (Gardner & Stern, 2002; Millennium Ecosystem
Assessment, 2005).
The history of human-environment interactions can be broadly classified into five stages (Simmons, 1993): huntinggathering economy and early agriculture (fully established around 7500 BC in Asian regions), riverine civilizations
(from about 4000 BC until about the first century AD), agricultural empires (from about 500 BC to AD 1800), the
Atlantic-industrial era (from AD 1800 to about the 1960s), and the Pacific-global era (from about 1960 to the present
day). The hunter-gatherer stage covered at least 99% of human history (Wilson, 1993) and its permanent impact
upon the environment is well documented, including reduction or extinction of animal species and the clearance of
land by fire. But recent environmental transformations are unequaled in their scale and impact. These
transformations include the accumulation of materials in large concentrations and the creation of new materials
unknown in nature, such as pesticides; the expansion of cultivated areas and unsustainable agricultural practices,
leading to erosion, deforestation, and the extinction of many species; and the development (p. 182) of large
conglomerates of humans in urban cities, resulting in resource shortages and increases in waste production. It is
estimated that from 1800 to 1985 the world human population increased fivefold, and the proportion living in urban
Page 1 of 24
Kluckhohn
The American anthropologist Florence Kluckhohn (1951, 1953) proposed a conceptual scheme distinguishing five
basic human problems that all peoples across history must find some solution for. She argued that specific
patterns of behavior insofar as they are influenced by cultural factors (and few are not so influenced) are the
concrete expressions reflecting generalized meanings or values (Kluckhohn, 1953, p. 345). Table 11.1 presents
Kluckhohns five problems and their possible responses. Another value dimension of space (here, there, or far
away) was also later proposed but not fully developed (Kluckhohn & Strodtbeck, 1961).
The five problems and their answers lead to cultural value orientations that are distinct from each other in terms of
their main solutions to the universal problems, but are at the same time related. The second problem regarding the
way humans relate to nature is the most relevant in the context of this chapter. In her seminal text, Kluckhohn
(1953) illustrated possible cultural answers to this problem by arguing that Spanish-American cultures have a (p.
183)
Page 2 of 24
Table 11.1 Five Universal Basic Questions and the Value Orientations Reflected in Their Answers (adapted from
Kluckhohn, 1953; Hills, 2002)
Human
problems
Human
nature: What
are the innate
predispositions
(basic nature)
of humans?
Evil (mutable or
immutable). Born evil
and capable/incapable
of being changed.
Good (mutable or
immutable). Born
good and
capable/incapable of
being changed
Humannature
relationship:
What is the
relation of
humans to
nature?
Humans subjugated
to nature
(submissive).
Emphasis on lack of
control over nature,
and submission to the
higher power of natural
forces.
Human over
nature. Emphasis on
total control over
nature and the
supernatural.
Time
orientation:
What is the
significant time
orientation?
Future. Emphasis on
the future (the time
to come), planning
ahead, and seeking
new ways to replace
the old.
Mode of
Activity:
What is the
valued
personality
type?
Being. Emphasis on
being, on internal
motivations, and
activities valued by
oneself, which are not
necessarily valued by
others in the group.
Being-in-becoming. Emphasis on
developing and growing abilities
related to activities valued by
oneself, which are not necessarily
valued by others in the group.
Doing. Our
motivation is
external to us,
emphasizing activity
that is both valued
by ourselves and is
approved by others
in our group.
Mode of
social
relations:
What is the
nature of the
relationships
of humans to
other humans?
Lineal (hierarchical).
Emphasis on
hierarchical principles
and deferring to higher
authority or authorities
within the group.
Individualistic.
Emphasis on the
individual or
individual families
within the group who
make decisions
independently from
others.
fate orientation toward nature, in which humans are subjugated to and victims of natural forces, while Chinese
culture places humans in nature and sees humans and nature as equal parties in a harmonious whole, and
American culture is oriented toward dominance over nature, in which the environment is to be put to the use of
human beings. These cultural value orientations are thus theoretically useful for between-group comparisons (e.g.,
Werner, Brown, & Altman, 1997) and have been empirically applied for this aim (for a review, see Hills, 2002).
Page 3 of 24
Description
Individualism
versus
collectivism
Power
distance
Different solutions to the basic problem of human inequality. In a society with high
power distance, people accept the fact that power in institutions and organizations is
distributed unequally, and the level of inequality is endorsed by the followers as much as by
the leaders (e.g., India, Malaysia, Panama). A society with lower power distance has less
tolerance to inequality (e.g., Austria, Denmark, New Zealand).
Uncertainty
avoidance
Masculinity
versus
femininity
Division of emotional roles between men and women. In a masculine society, there
is a higher degree of sex differentiation of roles and the dominant values are related to
assertiveness, the acquisition of money and things (e.g., Japan, Switzerland, Italy). In a
feminine society, the dominant values are related to caring for others and the quality of life
or people (e.g., Sweden, Norway, Costa Rica).
Long-term
versus
short-term
orientation
Choice of focus for peoples efforts, on the future or the present. In a society with
long-term orientation, people focus on future-oriented values such as persistence and thrift
(e.g., China, Japan, Brazil), whereas in a society with short-term orientation people focus on
past- and present-oriented values such as respect for tradition and fulfilling social
obligations (e.g., Philippines, United Kingdom, Canada)
of each dimension. Drawing from the findings of the Chinese Culture Connection (1987), he later introduced a fifth
dimension related to temporal orientation: short-term/long-term orientation (Hofstede, 2001; Hofstede & Bond,
1988).
None of Hofstedes dimensions are conceptually linked to environmental issues. However, his dimensions have
been empirically related to environmental engagement. For example, Hofstede (2001) correlated his dimensions to
Page 4 of 24
Schwartz
The American social psychologist Shalom Schwartz (1992, 1994a; Schwartz & Bilsky, 1987) expanded on
Rokeachs (1973) work to develop a broad model for classifying the dimensions of human values. Drawing from
large cross-cultural data, he proposed 10 value dimensions that manifest universally in individuals and 7
dimensions that appear at the cultural level of analysis. A number of cross-cultural studies have demonstrated the
usefulness of his model (e.g., Fontaine, Poortinga, Delbeke, & Schwartz, 2008; Spini, 2003).
Schwartz defines values as trans-situational goals ordered by importance that serve as guiding principles in life.
Examining the grouping of 56 value-items across 97 samples in 44 countries, Schwartz (1994a) observed the
emergence of 10 motivationally distinct types of values: achievement, hedonism, stimulation, self-direction,
universalism, benevolence, tradition, conformity, and security. These 10 motivational value types could, in turn, be
located in a two-dimensional value space, grouped into four higher order value clusters: openness to change
(values favoring change and independent thought and behavior), conservation (preservation of traditional
practices and stability), self-transcendence (concern for the welfare of others), and self-enhancement (pursuit of
ones own relative success and dominance over others). Schwartzs is the most widely used model of human
values and has been used to explain environmental engagement. Cross-cultural studies have shown that
environmental attitudes and behaviors are associated with greater levels of self-transcendence values and lower
levels of self-enhancement values (Milfont, Sibley, & Duckitt, 2010; Schultz et al., 2005; Schultz & Zelezny, 1998,
1999; Schwartz, Sagiv, & Boehnke, 2000).
Later, Schwartz (1994b, 1999; Smith & Schwartz, 1997) established equivalence for 45 of the 56 value-items and
proposed a theory of cultural values, defining these as the implicitly or explicitly shared abstract ideas about what
is good, right, and desirable in a society (Schwartz, 1999, p. 25). Using the same organizing principle used by
Kluckhohn, Schwartz argued that there are issues that all societies must confront, but instead of Kluckhohns five
problems, he proposed three basic issues with their resolutions leading to specific cultural dimensions. Table
11.3 provides a description of the resulting cultural dimensions. The first issue refers to the nature of the relations
between the individual and the group, which yields a cultural emphasis on conservatism (person viewed as an
entity embedded in the collective) on one pole of the dimension, and autonomy (person viewed as an autonomous
entity) at the other pole. The second issue refers to ensuring responsible behavior that preserves the social fabric,
which yields a cultural emphasis on hierarchy (socially responsible behavior ensured via power differences and
hierarchical systems) versus egalitarianism (socially responsible behavior ensured via voluntary cooperation and
recognition of others as moral equals). The third issue, which is most related to the context of this chapter, refers to
the relation of humans to the natural and social environment. This basic issue leaves societies with two possible
Page 5 of 24
Cultural Theory
Cultural theory was originally proposed by the British anthropologist Mary Douglas, and further developed by other
scholars including American political scientist Aaron Wildavsky and British anthropologist Michael Thompson.
According to the theory, group and grid are the two dimensions of sociality that reflect ways of looking at the world
(Douglas, Thompson, & Verweij, 2003; Douglas & Wildavsky, 1982; Thompson, Grendstad, & Selle, 1999). The
group dimension refers to inclusion, or the claim of groups over members. High group indicates the extent to which
the life of an individual is absorbed and sustained by group membership, whereas low group indicates the extent to
which an individual avoids all group involvement. The grid dimension refers to classification, or the (p. 186)
Table 11.3 Cultural Value Dimensions Proposed by Schwartz
Schwartzs dimensions
Conservatism
Cultural emphasis on maintenance of the status quo, and restraint of actions or inclinations
that might disrupt the status quo or the traditional order (social order, respect for tradition,
family security) (e.g., Nepal, Malaysia, Georgia).
Autonomy
Hierarchy
Cultural emphasis on the legitimacy of inequality in the distribution of power, roles, and
resources (social power, authority, wealth) (e.g., China, Zimbabwe, India).
Egalitarianism
Mastery
Harmony
Cultural emphasis on fitting harmoniously into the environment rather than on changing or
exploiting it (unity with nature, protecting the environment, world of beauty) (e.g., Slovenia,
Estonia, Czech Republic).
degree to which social interaction is subject to rules. High grid indicates the extent to which there is an emphasis
on institutionalized classifications (based on class, social roles, ethnicity) in a society to regulate the interactions of
its members and keep individuals apart, whereas low grid indicates the extent to which there is less emphasis on
institutionalized regulations making individuals to negotiate their own relationships with other members in society.
The interplay of the group-grid dimensions produces a fourfold typology of social solidarities: individualism,
hierarchy, fatalism, and egalitarianism. Each of these four forms of social solidarities represent primary ways of
organizing, perceiving, and justifying social relations (see Table 11.4). The social solidarities also correspond to
particular myths of nature that are symbolized by the balance between the vulnerability of nature and
Page 6 of 24
Page 7 of 24
Strong group involvement (high group) coupled with maximum regulation (high grid)
produces social relations that are hierarchical. In this form of social solidarity, there are
strong group boundaries and binding prescriptions. Individuals in this type of social
environment are subject to the control/influence of other individuals and the demand of
socially imposed roles. Inequality and autonomy are justified because imposing different
roles to different people allows them to live together harmoniously. The world is
controllable and nature is stable until pushed beyond discoverable limits set by certified
experts and authorities (hence the perverse/tolerant myth of nature in which the ball is
stable until pushed beyond certain limits). Hierarchists want to regulate the natural
environment from the top down. Hierarchy items measure support for authority and respect
for the past (One of the problems with people today is that they challenge authority too
often; The best way to provide for future generations is to preserve our customs and
heritage).
Individualism
Weak group involvement (low group) coupled with minimal regulation (low grid) produces
social relations that are individualistic. In this form of social solidarity, individuals are not
bound by group assimilation or prescribed roles. In this form of social solidarity, nature is a
resilient system able to recover from any exploitation (hence the benign myth of nature in
which the ball will always return to stability at the bottom of the landscape). Individualists
oppose collective control and view the market system with its self-regulated networks as
the best way to regulate the natural environment. Individualism items measure support for
equal opportunity and the accumulation of property (Everyone should have an equal
chance to succeed and fail without government interference; If people have the vision
and ability to acquire property, they ought to be allowed to enjoy it).
Egalitarianism
Strong group involvement (high group) coupled with minimal regulation (low grid) produces
social relations that are egalitarian. In this form of social solidarity, the natural environment
is seen as an intricately interconnected system with a delicate balance that may easily
collapse (hence the ephemeral myth of nature in which the ball has a fragile equilibrium).
As a result, egalitarians are concerned with environmental problems and favor a
concerted grassroots effort to solve these problems. Egalitarianism items measure
commitment to make things equal (What this world needs is a fairness revolution to make
the distribution of goods more equal; I support a tax shift so that the burden falls more
heavily on corporations and people with large incomes).
Fatalism
Weak group involvement (low group) coupled with maximum regulation (high grid)
produces social relations that are fatalistic. In this form of social solidarity, individuals are
non-actors and excluded from group membership but experience strong binding
prescriptions responsible for regulating their lives. Nature is seen as unpredictable and
unmanageable and having no clear principles (hence the capricious myth of nature in
which there is no obvious indication of the direction the ball will roll and the resulting
consequences). Fatalism items measure individual inefficacy and the futility of cooperation
(Cooperation with others rarely works; It seems that whomever you vote for, things go
on pretty much the same).
equality matching and horizontal individualism; egalitarianism is related to communal sharing and horizontal
collectivism; and fatalism is related to market pricing and vertical individualism.
Inglehart
Page 8 of 24
The American political scientist Ronald Inglehart has developed a model to explain the development of modern
societies that also addresses mass attitudes toward environmental problems. Based on data from the World Values
Survey, which comprises representative national surveys from many countries, Inglehart (1977) argued that the
increasing affluence and security achieved by industrial societies, especially after World War II, resulted in a shift
from materialist values (personal and national security, economic well-being) to post-materialist values (quality of
life, self-expression). He argued that this shift in values, led by economic prosperity and political security, resulted
in societies becoming more environmentally concerned. Although some variations were found across countries,
the overall finding from cross-cultural studies support this view by showing that the links between post-materialist
(p. 188) values and environmental protection are stronger than those between materialist values and
environmental protection (e.g., Grob, 1995; Inglehart, 1995; Olofsson & Ohman, 2006; Pierce, Lovrich, Tsurutani, &
Abe, 1987).
Several scholars have challenged Ingleharts post-materialist values thesis because of its underlying assumption
that concern for the environment can be found only among Western industrialized countries, and because of
empirical evidence showing that participants from poorer nations also express high levels of environmental
concern (for a discussion of this issue, see Social Science Quarterly, 78[1], March 1997). Indeed, Inglehart himself
recognized that a shift to post-materialist values is not the only factor that could explain environmental concern;
he later proposed a challenge-response model to explain public support for environmental protection not
accounted by his post-materialist values thesis (Inglehart, 1995). Environmental concern, he argued, is also
derived from direct experience of pollution and other environmental degradation. People who experience objective
environmental problems in their own country will be more willing to support environmental protection than those
who are not exposed to severe environmental problems. Environmental concern can thus be a response to
environmental challenges experienced in ones country. It worth noting that this view of greater environmental
concern linked to greater exposure to pollution and environmental degradation has long been proposed by the
environmental deprivation theory (Tremblay & Dunlap, 1978).
When combined, Ingleharts challenge-response model and the post-materialist values thesis are often referred to
as the objective problems, subjective values hypothesis, and both are important for understanding and
explaining global environmentalism (Brechin, 1999; Inglehart, 1995). According to this hypothesis, environmental
concern stems from a negative effect of experienced environmental degradation and/or from a positive effect of
post-materialist values.
The materialistpost-materialist value dimension is still used extensively to compare countries, even though
Inglehart went on to propose two different dimensions: one reflecting cross-cultural differences between survival
versus self-expression values (similar to materialistpost-materialist values) and another reflecting differences
between traditional versus secular-rational orientations toward authority (Inglehart, 1997). Analyses have (p. 189)
been conducted to locate societies based on these two dimensions (Inglehart, 1997; Inglehart & Baker, 2000).
Traditional societies (e.g., Nigeria, Pakistan, India) tend to have low levels of tolerance for abortion, divorce, and
homosexuality, and tend to emphasize religion, deference to parental authority, and the importance of family life,
while secular-rational societies (e.g., Germany, Japan, Norway) tend to have the opposite characteristics.
Page 9 of 24
Individual-Level Studies
An increasing number of studies examine the influence of culture on environmental engagement and
environmental risk perception (Ando, Ohnuma, & Chang, 2007; Chan & Lau, 2001; Lvy-Leboyer, Bonnes, Chase,
& Ferreira-Marques, 1996; Lorenzoni, Leiserowitz, Doria, Poortinga, & Pidgeon, 2006). Additionally, research
Page 10 of 24
Culture-Level Studies
Gouveia (2002) examined the associations between Schwartzs cultural values and economic, environmental,
institutional, and social indicators of sustainable development across 30 countries. By combining cultural values
into self-centered (egalitarianism, intellectual autonomy) and social-centered (harmony, conservatism) values, he
created individualist and collectivist scores. Individualist (p. 191) cultural values were negatively (albeit
nonsignificantly) related to a general index of sustainable development, while collectivist cultural values were
strongly and positively related to the sustainable development index. His findings support the individual-level
studies linking collectivistic orientations and concern for the environment as discussed above.
Oreg and Katz-Gerro (2006) analyzed data from the 2000 International Social Survey Programme across 27
countries and used structural equation modeling to test a mediating model of the influence of values on ecological
Page 11 of 24
Page 12 of 24
Multilevel Studies
Some recent studies have used multilevel models to assess the combined effect of individual-level and countrylevel variables in explaining environmental attitudes. Cross-cultural studies often work with multilevel data. These
data sets have a hierarchical structure in which observations at the individual level of analysis are nested within
observations at the culture level of analyses (see Nezlek, 2011; Raudenbush & Bryk, 2002). In multilevel analyses,
the effects of variables in each level of analysis on the outcome variable are estimated while controlling for the
other variables, and cross-level interaction can also be estimated.
Although not strictly using multilevel modeling techniques, Kemmelmeier, Krol, and Young (2002) examined
individual-level and country-level variables in explaining environmental attitudes across 22 countries that took part
in the 1993 International Social Survey Programme. At the individual level they observed no consistent effects of
age and sex on willingness to protect the environment (measured by three economy-vs.-environment trade-off
items), but environmental protection was higher for those holding post-materialist values and with higher levels of
education and income. At the country level, they found a linear relationship between a countrys wealth (measured
by the gross national product per capita) and both post-materialist values and environmental protection, so that
greater affluence is related to higher post-materialism and greater willingness to protect the environment. The
authors also tested the mediating role of post-materialist values on the associations between affluence and
environmental protection at both levels of analysis. This mediating model is derived from Ingleharts theory and
posits that post-materialist values can explain the impact of economic prosperity on environmental engagement.
However, this position was not supported; the effect of personal income and the countrys wealth on environmental
protection was not mediated by post-materialist values. Instead, they observed a cross-level interaction: the
correlation between personal income and environmental protection was greater in countries that had experienced
recent economic growth (for another study using the same data set, see Ignatow, 2006).
Using data from the World Values Survey and European Values Study, Gelissen (2007) examined how support for
environmental protection (measured by two economy-vs.-environment trade-off items) could be explained by a
number of variables at the individual level (age, sex, household income, post-materialist values, environmental
involvement, and educational attainment) and country level (national wealth, growth in national wealth, societallevel post-materialist values, and objective environmental problemsincluding population density, and air and
water quality). Examining variables at the individual level first, Gelissen observed that older individuals with higher
income who held post-materialist values, who were actively committed to environmental organizations either by
membership or volunteer work, and with higher levels of educational attainment were those with greater willingness
to make financial sacrifices to protect the environment. Unexpectedly, male and female participants did not differ
on their support for environmental protection in this analysis. (Female participants often hold higher environmental
concern and pro-environmental behavior than their male counterparts [see, e.g., Milfont & Duckitt, 2010; Zelezny,
Chua, & Aldrich, 2000].) Examining country-level variables, Gelissen found that (surprisingly) national wealth was
negatively related to public support for environmental protection, (p. 193) while higher levels of post-materialist
values and growth in national wealth were related to greater public willingness to make financial sacrifices for the
environment. None of the measures of objective environmental problems was significantly related to support for
environmental protection. Taken as a whole, these findings support Ingleharts post-materialist values thesis while
rejecting his objective problems thesis.
Liu and Sibley (2010) examined in 34 countries the association between perceived importance of global warming
and participants willingness to make sacrifices in their standard of living to protect the environment; they also
examined whether human development in the country would moderate that association. First, they observed that
older and female participants were more willing to make sacrifices to protect the environment, and that greater
importance placed on global warming was predictive of intention to make sacrifices. More important, they examined
cross-level interaction effects in which observations at the individual level interact with observations at the country
level. As they predicted, Human Development Index moderated the effect of perceived importance of global
warming on willingness to make sacrifices to ones living standard to protect the environment. That is, the influence
Page 13 of 24
Page 14 of 24
Ecological Fallacy
Ecological fallacy is the incorrect assumption that relationships occurring at the country level of analysis (or
another aggregate or higher ecological level) are necessarily the same at the the individual level of analysis
(Jargowsky, 2005). This fallacy often arises in cross-cultural studies when culture-level characterization is used ex
post facto to explain relationships between variables at the individual level without any empirical justification. For
example, it is an ecological fallacy to assume that all members of individualistic cultures hold individualistic values
and that all members of collectivistic cultures hold collectivistic values, or to assume that because a strong and
positive correlation was found between societal post-materialist values and environmental concern, the correlation
between these two variables will have the same direction and strength for individuals. The reverse ecological
fallacy occurs when it is assumed that relationships between variables at the individual level correspond to the
same relationships at the culture level.
Page 15 of 24
Page 16 of 24
Acknowledgments
I would like to thank the 2010 students from the Environmental Psychology Research Group at the Victoria
University of Wellington, P. Wesley Schultz, Ross Galbreath, and Aidan Tabor, for their helpful comments on an
earlier draft of this chapter.
References
Ando, K., Ohnuma, S., & Chang, E. C. (2007). Comparing normative influences as determinants of environmentally
conscious behaviours between the USA and Japan. Asian Journal of Social Psychology, 10, 171178.
Arnocky, S., Stroink, M., & DeCicco, T. (2007). Self-construal predicts environmental concern, cooperation, and
conservation. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 27, 255264.
Atran, S., Medin, D. L., & Ross, N. O. (2005). The cultural mind: Environmental decision making and cultural
modeling within and across populations. Psychological Review, 112, 744776.
Bamberg, S., & Mser, G. (2007). Twenty years after Hines, Hungerford, and Tomera: A new meta-analysis of
psycho-social determinants of pro-environmental behaviour. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 27, 1425.
Berry, J. W. (1969). On cross-cultural comparability. International Journal of Psychology, 4, 119128.
(p. 197) Berry, J. W. (1999). Emics and etics: A symbiotic conception. Culture and Psychology, 5.
Berry, J. W., Poortinga, Y. H., Segall, M. H., & Dasen, P. R. (2002). Cross-cultural psychology: Research and
Page 17 of 24
Page 18 of 24
Page 19 of 24
Page 20 of 24
Page 21 of 24
Page 22 of 24
Page 23 of 24
Page 24 of 24
Cities
Introduction
Since the early 20th century, along with industrialization, populations across the globe have been concentrating in
large urban structures. Cities spread out and transformed themselves in vast agglomerations. Today more than half
of the worlds population lives in cities, many of them in urban structures of more than 10 million inhabitants, socalled megapoles, which offer particular living conditions. They give shelter to a diverse population from a wide
range of backgrounds. This intermingling of cultures is certainly enriching, but it raises the problem of living
together in cooperative harmony. Moreover, the built-up area, the physical urban environment (noise, pollution),
and the social environment (density) trigger a number of repercussions on behavior patterns and conduct through
the conditions of daily life, as well as on the individuals interpersonal relations. These different aspects of the
urban environment and the adjustments that result from them imply that the inhabitants of big cities have to face
conditions that certainly make them more flexible, but at the same time expose them to more risks in their physical
and mental health. And this is all the more true for those living in mediocre conditions, or in disastrous conditions,
as is the case in the ever-present shantytowns in most big agglomerations over the world.
The inhabitants of the big metropolises are often identified as such by their behavior. In this chapter, we will focus
on objective urban characteristics and the perception of cities and different behavior patterns identified in the
literature, as well as on urban sociability and the development of interpersonal relationships. The cornerstone of
sustainable development of metropolises is the appropriation not only of the residential neighborhood but also of
the city, itself a beneficiary of the individuals (p. 204) investment in the urban territory and in a certain social
cohesion. It is only under these conditions that an urban identity can develop, based on the physical as well as on
the social aspects of the city. These different aspects are dealt with from a descriptive and perceptive view of the
urban environment, city life, and typical urban behavior patterns. A final paragraph brings together the urban
identity through the appropriation of the urban infrastructure and a certain social cohesion, conditions for the
Page 1 of 21
Cities
transition of the city dweller into an urban citizen concerned with sustainability.
Page 2 of 21
Cities
Cities can be characterized by the opportunities and facilities they offer their inhabitants: school and educational
opportunities, health care resources, leisure pursuits, cultural aspects. They can also be characterized by their
principal activity (tourism, industry, commerce, university, or a mix), and they are often the mirror of their
inhabitants, for example, industrial cities, touristic places, university cities (Thorndike, 1939). Cities are meant to
determine behavior by providing the context in which practices are shaped (Wicker, 1979; Wirth, 1938).
Big cities are perceived as culturally diverse, allowing for a free choice of the type or style of life, tolerant but
overcrowded, noisy, exacerbating competition, anonymous, producing isolation, impersonal, and encouraging
mistrust (Krupat, 1985). Noise and pollution, problems of security, inadequate facilities in the neighborhood, and
lack of satisfactory transport are repeatedly mentioned by city dwellers as threatening their quality of life (Rizk,
2003). On the other hand, small towns are perceived as calm, safe, healthy, intimate, and relaxing, but the people
are too concerned by what their neighbors are doing and do not like strangers. In a general way, city dwellers
seem to be less satisfied and less optimistic about life than country dwellers (Hynson, cited in Krupat, 1985).
The research concerning the perception of the city highlights the very personal knowledge of the people.
Evaluations are based on four dimensions: an evaluative aspect of the environment (beautiful, rich); the presence
of activity (busy, noisy); the spatial configuration of the buildings (horizontal, open); and the descriptive aspect
(uniform, dense). Others have looked into the emblematic aspects of some cities (Milgram, 1970). In a research
by questionnaire built on critical incidents, the author shows that New York is characterized by its physical
attributes: its diversity, its size, its rhythm of life, the cultural opportunities it offers, the heterogeneity of its
population, and the respective isolation of the different urban communities; London by its tolerance and the
courteous relations between its inhabitants. Paris is the subject of evaluations focusing as much on its architectural
aspects as on the special nature of its inhabitants: Parisians are perceived as being cold and unfriendly, even
hostile; others mention the cafs, parks, and gardens illustrating the citys charm.
Page 3 of 21
Cities
Citizens not only are exposed to environmental stress factors, but also face bad living conditions. Urban mobility is
more constraining than in small towns: commuting daily from residence to the workplace and facing frequent
gridlock or crowded mass transit increases the stress of city dwellers. Their spare time is compressed because of
larger commuting duration, and there is less time available for social interactions. Compared to inhabitants of small
towns, city dwellers experience overall ever-increasing difficulties of access to various services due to increased
competition (subway, taxis, lining up for services, etc.). And bureaucratic formalism is also more frequent in big
cities than in small towns.
However, despite being generally more exposed to environmental stress factors, the inhabitants of big cities, with
the exception of newcomers, do not mention these factors as annoying them more frequently than the inhabitants
of small towns or even than people living in rural habitats (Moser & Robin, 2006). Overall, city life seems to be
constraining and demanding. All the analyses in terms of environmental overload, environmental stress, and
behavioral constraint point out the potentially negative effects of life in big cities compared to life in small towns.
Sustainable cities cannot be achieved without reference to local culture and local needs and therefore also by
taking into account the inhabitants and their needs. People do have environmental concerns, and the lack of
environmental quality may be seen as an important threat to their well-being and thus impeding sustainability
(Moser, 2009).
Page 4 of 21
Cities
victimhood makes people who have been victims believe they are vulnerable and incapable of protecting
themselves. If the feeling of insecurity and vulnerability can be explained by a perceived loss of control, it can be
analyzed in terms of personal control (Fischer, 1986; Moser, 1992). Distress, the feeling of insecurity, the fear of
becoming a victim again, and the strong emotion, as well as the helplessness that follows the experience of an
aggression, are clearly attributable to the perceived loss of control of the situation, as the victim sees no way of
protecting him- or herself. Attributing the potential cause of such an event makes it possible to explain the
emergence of a feeling of insecurity. Attribution theory has emphasized the relationship between internal
explanations and the accompanying feeling of control (Kelley, 1967; Deschamps, 1990). On the other hand, the
victim is likely to be all the more distressed given that he or she attributes what has happened to external causes,
which are therefore, by definition, beyond his or her control, increasing the fear of being very probably a victim of
the same incident again (Moser, 1988b).
How does the feeling of insecurity express itself in environmental terms? The characteristics dark, deserted,
winding streets, and presence of graffiti generate a feeling of insecurity, and this is even more the case in
unknown environments (Moser & Lidvan, 1992). Familiarity with the environment turns out to be a key
characteristic in the differentiated representation of the insecurity of a given place. Moreover, Newman and Franck
(1982) showed that anxiety about criminality and fear of being a victim in urban environments differ according to
the size of the housing estates; they explained this phenomenon by the lack of social contacts in the big estates.
The nature of the built-up area would tend to encourage a person to extend the zone for mixing with others outside
his or her apartment toward neighboring zones, which would increase or diminish the feeling of security. Likewise,
Fischer (1976) and Hunter (1978) attributed the feeling of security to the sharing of the same behavior norms in a
given residential environment. This approach is corroborated by other studies that highlight the link between the
presence of graffiti and the feeling of insecurity (Skogan & Maxfield, 1981; Lewis & Salem, 1985). On the other
hand, when there is no perceived incivility, the inhabitants would support a lower rate of criminality, which led
Taylor, Gottfredson, and Brower (1984) to conclude that the feeling of insecurity is positively linked to the loss of
territorial control.
Living in Cities
Adaptive Behaviors
City dwellers seem to have special strategies for adapting: Franck (1980) noted, for example, that individuals newly
arrived in the city are more involved in planning their actions and their movements. This is even more so if they
come from a rural area than if they come from another big city. The latter are more relaxed, probably because they
feel the stress of the city less, having already lived in one.
People accomplish a certain number of activities more rapidly in big cities than in small towns (Lowin, Hottes,
Sandler, & Bornstein, 1971). Wirtz and Ries (1992) observed that the speed at which people move around
increases with the size of the agglomeration. The authors concluded that life in big cities is less easygoing due to
its stress conditions. An extension of this study to cover a greater number of agglomerations confirms that the
rhythm of life is faster in cities (Bornstein, 1979). In fact, the speed at which pedestrians move varies in a straight
line according to the number of inhabitants. Marked cultural differences exist between reactions to environmental
conditions: the Chinese accept conditions of high density; they are reserved at an emotional level and have a
highly regulated family life, in all probability because of the high density of their living quarters (Mitchell, 1971).
Canter and Canter (1971) pointed out that in Tokyo there is a very low rate of vandalism and delinquency because
Page 5 of 21
Cities
that city is made up of small districts organized as villages, which facilitate social control. Similarly, (p. 208)
Rogler (1967) underlined the respect for intimacy and an intense community life in the shantytowns of South
America. In the final analysis, there are multiple ways for city dwellers to adapt and adjust their behavior when they
are provided with stable social structures.
Urban Civilities
Urbanity is rooted in the respect of individuals for a number of routines concerning relations with other people
that define social order in a normative way (Goffman, 1974). Urbanity is commonly associated with civilization, with
control of the self and its impulses (Elias, 1969), with good manners toward each other, and with socially
acceptable practices; however, it is also known that the urban environment, by generating specific stressful
situations, has a significant effect on interpersonal relations to the extent that they provoke indifferent and selfish
behavior (Simmel, 1903). Urbanity functions like a guide to managing social relations through observing current
proprieties (Bernard, 1997, p. 107). Rules of civility are tacit rules, a set of shared conventions concerned with
the normal acts of daily life.
Public spaces as places where community values are in evidence reveal the changing rules and codes
indispensable to the individual by which he or she keeps his distance from others to protect personal space or, on
the contrary, comes closer to them. Urban behavior is paradoxical: individuals must cooperate socially to maintain
their anonymity. Indifference has to be controlled; it is the object of socialized and socializing precautions. For
Hannerz (1980) social density, such as it can be observed in big cities, has the effect that contacts are
characterized by physical proximity and social distance. Polite behavior, therefore, seems indispensable to living
peacefully together in an urban setting. Moser and Corroyer (2001) showed that polite behavior, like most pro- or
antisocial interactional behavior, is both dependent on general environmental conditionsless so in an urban
setting than in a small townand susceptible to occasional environmental overload, depending on the existence or
not of a heavy, prevailing density. Big cities are characterized by more indifference and by a lack of regard for
others; in the modern world they have ceased to be synonymous with civility, and polite behavior no longer figures
in their daily way of life.
The city, in principle, encourages the multiplication and diversification of social contacts, but at the same time it
creates withdrawal and an indifference to others. City dwellers regularly mix with a number of people without
necessarily having any real contact with them. Nearly all travelers recognize at least one person familiar to them in
a photo of the crowd waiting for the same suburban train, but would not be able to imagine getting to know them
(Milgram, 1977). Thus individuals who have just arrived in a big city reckon that it is more difficult to make friends
than in a small town. But after a certain time these differences disappear (Franck, 1980).
Newman and McCauley (1977) observed that in a big city, eye contact with strangers is less frequent, and one
finds less eye contact in city-center railway stations than in suburban stations. Korte (1978) showed that in big
cities pedestrians not only walk more quickly, but also look straight ahead without noticing what is happening
around them. Snapshots taken without warning of passers-by in big and small cities and then blind-tested by
students show that city dwellers are perceived as being more hostile and less friendly than inhabitants of small
towns (Krupat, 1985). At the behavior level, a study by Milgram (1977) showed that when you offer a helping hand
to someone in the street, one-third of city dwellers respond, while in small towns two-thirds do so. Likewise,
apartment dwellers or inhabitants in high-density districts have less eye contact, a much greater interpersonal
distance, and fewer spontaneous conversations (Sundstrom, 1978; Baum & Paulus, 1987). Does this relative
indifference toward others in daily routine have any effect on behavior patterns involving interacting with others,
such as being helpful?
Social Behavior
Reticence to help others, such as answering an inquiry by a passer-by, helping someone to pick up something he
or she has dropped, and so on, has been described as one of the characteristics of life in the big urban
agglomerations. Indifference to someones distress was highlighted in a series of studies undertaken following an
event: the case of Catherine Genovse, a girl murdered in a New York street, in 1964, without any witness
intervening. Latan and Darley (1970) showed that when the subjects are alone they intervene in 70% of cases to
help someone in distress, while the higher the number of witnesses, the weaker the probability that someone will
Page 6 of 21
Cities
intervene. For the authors, these results are to be explained by the fact that in the city the presence of a high
number of witnesses likely to intervene creates a dispersion of responsibility. But these behavior patterns change
with the context. (p. 209) Latan and Darley (1970) showed that being helpful to others varies according to the
context in the same city (in this case New York). When a person on crutches approaches and collapses, four out of
five people help him into the subway, while fewer than half help him in an airport. The authors conclude that it is
familiarity with the place: to most people, the subway is more familiar than the airport. Drawing on the field studies
by Latan and Darley (1970), Korte (1978, 1980) and Merrens (1973) agreed in pointing out that urban conditions
reduce regard for others and decrease the behavior of availability and help. City dwellers are less willing to let a
stranger in distress use their telephone, are less likely to correct receiving too much change in a shop, and less
frequently denounce a thief than people in rural settings (Korte & Kerr, 1975). The mistrust that city dwellers have
for one another can be observed with new householders, who open their door more slowly to a stranger than
householders who have lived there for any length of time, and might be better integrated in their neighborhood
(Edney, 1975). Similarly, a child alone who asks for help in a New York street or in a small town is more likely to be
helped in small towns.
What explanations can be given for these phenomena? Kammann, Thompson, and Irwin (1976) considered that
one determinant is the number of passers-by on the site. Korte (1980) observed less helpful conduct in cities
exclusively toward strangers, a phenomenon that has been shown in a study on the role of the ethnic group to
which the protagonists belong. In fact, several research projects show that subjects offer more help to someone
needing assistance from the same ethnic group as the one to which they belong.
While we are aware of the global effects of the urban environment, we know very little about the respective impact
of the single components of this environment (available space, density, number of visual stimulants, noise, traffic
noise, etc.) as far as they are interlinked for the most part and constitute what some authors call urban stress.
Noise is often identified as the most important component of urban life and it is not surprising that most expressions
of discomfort crystallize around noise. A study on the effect of noise on behavior and/or verbal responses shows
that the subjects in a noisy condition have a tendency on the one hand to avoid verbal interaction and on the
other to be less attentive (Moser, 1987, 1988a). Environmental overload, such as the presence of intensive noise,
has a negative effect on helpful behavior toward others.
It would seem that urban environmental conditions have an impact on aggressiveness and rude behavior (LvyLeboyer, 1980). Phone booths that dont work are treated more brutally in Paris than in a provincial town (Moser,
1984). In Paris, the introduction of information (the possibility of being reimbursed, and to locate other booths
available nearby) gives back to the individual partial control by indicating the possibilities of being able to complete
his or her phone call. Brutal behaviors, when this information is provided, are far less prevalent.
Overall, physical environmental conditions function as stress factors and are likely to have the following effects
(Moser, 1987):
(1) an activation effect from which one can observe that some dominant behavior patterns are amplified
under stress. Physical conditions can, therefore, increase peoples aggressive behavior through a transfer of
excitement effect;
(2) an interference effect on the behavior of the individual. The unsuitability of the environment can prevent
the latter from reaching certain goals and can bring on a feeling of losing control over the environment.
Losing control, as well as the attempt to master the situation, is often accompanied by aggressive behavior
(Moser & Lvy-Leboyer, 1985); and
(3) an extreme annoyance and discomfort, which the individual will attempt to stop by running away from the
situation. If, however, this proves impossible, instrumental aggressive behavior (i.e., intended to put an end to
the disagreeable situation) or hostile behavior can appear.
Added to this, in complex environments, an overloading of demands to which the subject can respond only
inadequately increases the risk of behavior badly suited to the situation and as a consequence increases the risk
of aggressive conduct.
Finally, it seems that the city for Freedman (1975) has effects that are both positive and negative according to the
characteristics of each and every person: urban density would intensify and amplify the typical response of the
individual; those who tend to isolate themselves will be even more alone, while sociable people will find numerous
Page 7 of 21
Cities
opportunities for encounters in the city.
Urbanites Relationships
Work carried out on sociability and loneliness shows that it is essential for the individual to belong to a social
network and to maintain stable links. Numerous research projects have amply shown that interpersonal relations
are particularly important when confronting stressful situations (Moser, 1994). A positive relationship exists
between the fact of spending time with a number of friends and acquaintances and effectively overcoming stressful
periods of life (Arling, 1976), and the intensive interaction with friends correlates with a high level of well-being
(Palisi, 1985). Emotional support relies essentially on friendships in an urban setting because of the higher
incidence of separation from families (Amato, 1993). Moreover, individuals strike up acquaintances less easily in
urban settings (Sundstrom, 1978).
The rapid demographic growth of the large agglomerations is accompanied by a diversification and an extension of
daily to-ing and fro-ing, which tends to limit opportunities for getting together with other people. Consequently, it is
not surprising that many inhabitants of large agglomerations complain that it is impossible to have a satisfactory
Page 8 of 21
Cities
social life. For all that, can one conclude that city dwellers in general are lacking in sociability and interpersonal
relations and have poor social ties? A comparison of the world of relationships and the social behavior between
provincials, Parisians, and inhabitants of the outskirts of Paris (Moser, Legendre, & Ratiu, 2003) showed that
provincials have significantly more long-term interpersonal relationships than those who live in outer Paris (an
average of 6.8 in the Paris region, 8.1 in the provinces). At an adult age, the friendship network is essentially
centered on work and leisure pursuits (Fischer, 1982; Fischer & Phillips, 1982). In large agglomerations, nearly half
of all relationships originate from the world of work, from mixing with people in the neighborhood and in
associations. For this population the network is based essentially on the local area and on their relations at work. In
small towns, more than two-thirds of all relationships are based on older friendships from childhood and school.
Thus city dwellers relational networks distinguish themselves from those of medium-size towns, by being
composed essentially of recent acquaintances.
The city does not damage social relations; it favors a different organization of the world of relationships, at least for
internal or external immigrants who have put their roots down more recently. Because of mobility, the inhabitants of
big cities lose some of their former relations and thus compensate by establishing relationships dependent on their
place of residence. City dwellers networks of relations are not based in a single place on account of social and
residential mobility and the separation of workplace and residence. City dwellers are thus members of several
networks, dispersed in different places (network with work colleagues, for leisure pursuits, etc.), with whom they
mix according to their activities and special interests. In big cities, relationships and exchanges are based more on
affinity criteria (interests, values, beliefs) than on physical or territorial proximity. In a study on different Italian
cities, Prezza and Constantini (1998) showed that the relationship between a community feeling based on territory
and life satisfaction is higher in villages than in large agglomerations.
Urban Sociability
The fact that daily life in large urban centers is fragmented in place with a relatively limited time span is bound to
influence social relations, activities, and the satisfaction of needs, as well as the position of the individual where
others are concerned. According to Grafmeyer (1995), three types of urban sociability can be distinguished: an
organized or formal sociability, an informal sociability involving a minimum of how often and for how long the
exchanges take place, and a sociability of interactions or contacts.
Friendlier relations and more life satisfaction have been noted in small towns than in the large agglomerations
(Oppong, Ironside, & Kennedy, 1988). There are twice as many inhabitants of residential estates in the Paris
agglomeration without any relationship with neighbors as among inhabitants of individual houses in the provinces
(Hran, 1987), and it is in cities that one meets most people having a strong feeling of loneliness.
Relationships in small towns are composed more often than not of a unique, multifunctional network characterized
by shared social norms; by the existence of strong constraints, pressure to conform, and little privacy; and by
being a place where people all know each other. More than three-quarters of the inhabitants of small towns see
each other at least once a week, while in Paris only two-thirds can meet up regularly with friends and
acquaintances. In the city, these encounters are much more planned in advance and are based around specific
activities, especially sporting and leisure activities. Ways of expressing sociability in big cities are by no means
spontaneous. The time involved in commuting is the important issue facing inhabitants on the periphery, and this
not only restricts the time available for visiting with friends and acquaintances but also reduces the possibility of
informal encounters by obliging suburban dwellers to plan them with more care (Moser et al., 2003). In a study on
Mexico City, Salvador (2000) identified two types of everyday social contacts according to districts: opening
outward, or withdrawal into the home. According to the author, this tendency to open out or to withdraw is
expressed through the various ways of life in different districts. Inhabitants in working-class areas tend, on a daily
basis, to have continuous informal social contacts in outdoor spaces, such as the street, local shops, and meeting
places, while in better-off districts, inhabitants tend to keep to private spaces to a great extent.
On the periphery, whatever the status of the neighborhood happens to be, privileged or not, the inhabitants refer
much less to acquaintances and/or friends living nearby than in the inner-city districts (Flonneau, 2003).
Sociability turns out therefore to be geographically more spread out. Asked to characterize their neighborhood,
inhabitants of the city center mention more sociable places, such as bars and restaurants, than those living in the
outskirts (Flonneau, 2003). Paris, for instance, is rich in places where the inhabitants have the opportunity to meet
Page 9 of 21
Cities
with each other and to cultivate their sociability. In Mexico sociable places vary considerably between Mexico City
and provincial cities and according to whether the district is well off (Contreras, Moser, & Savina, 2008). Inhabitants
in less well-off districts meet in the street and in public places. In Mexico City meetings take place in bars and
variety theaters, as well as in one anothers homes. They are thus, for the most part, formalized, (p. 212)
organized, and planned sociability activities, while in the more provincial region of Queretaro these activities seem
less formal and meetings also take place in public spaces during the daily promenade.
Page 10 of 21
Cities
proximity by changing it from something of physical importance to a less spatial notion, more connected with time,
and more psychological (Fhrer & Kaiser, 1997). Proximity, defined first on an exclusively spatial and objective
basis, is more and more based on subjective dimensions linked above all to accessibility and to the perceived
desirability of each sector by the different populations (Blasco, Lajoie, Marchand, & Rople, 1998).
The context of large conurbations and neighborhoods resulting from zoning and from a monofunctional
specialization of the urban infrastructure (p. 213) has revealed other kinds of relationships with the city, the
catchment area of daily life (Benot et al., 1993). In these conditions, proximity is completely relative, growing
according to distance from the habitat. This context has brought out two ways of functioning vis--vis the urban
infrastructure, one local and the other not local, which means for certain categories of people the local and the
global (Burgel, 1993).
Urban proximity is not only a matter of distance. Large-scale mobility turns proximity into a distance in time that
depends on available amenities as well as on their accessibility and on the choice of the individual to make use of
them. Today, mobility constitutes one way of managing specific proximities (avoidance/convergence) according to
the perceived characteristics of the places. Accessibility becomes multifaceted, proximity multidimensional;
consequently, the appropriation of the city is less dependent on local conditions, except for people who feel
confined in their place of residence. In this way the city dweller constructs links with the city based on several
scales (local/global) that incorporate two distinct dimensions: territory and network (Haegel & Levy, 1998).
Page 11 of 21
Cities
compensate elsewhere for certain perceived insufficiencies in the residential environment. City dwellers are ready
to cover, under pressure but also by choice, longer and longer distances and to cross more or less distinct
environmental units to work, consume, see their family, pursue leisure, or simply meet one another. Breaking with
the place or places that have been appropriated leads to the reconstruction of the spatial identity through
significant experiences with other places (Stokols & Shumaker, 1981).
(p. 214)
Attachment to a specific environment supports place identity. People often develop an emotional bond to their life
space, essentially their home and neighborhood, but often also to urban places and spaces on a larger scale.
Such anchoring is an ongoing process, dependent on individual time perspectives: the duration of residence is
essential for the individuals appropriation of his or her life space, which in turn is indispensable for well-being.
Anchoring reflects the individuals motivations, social status, family situation, and projects for the future.
Page 12 of 21
Cities
The Spatial Extension of Appropriation: Toward an Urban Identity
The spatial extension of identity draws on concepts such as place identity (Proshansky, 1978; Proshansky, Fabian,
& Kaminoff, 1983; Sarbin, 1983; Korpela, 1989), urban identity, urban related identity (Lally, 1992), settlement
identity (Feldman, 1990), and residential attachment (Fried, 1982). Residential identity is strongly associated with
residential history (Fleury-Bahi, 2000). The belonging of individuals in a given urban neighborhood is linked to
residential history, to the notions of taking root, of attachment, of identification, and of familiarity, while the
belonging of city dwellers to (p. 215) the city is linked to the position they occupy within the variety of urban
setting. The city dwellers need to distance themselves from home and neighborhood, and to gradually appropriate
the city. In this perspective, one might describe them as construing the city as representation made up of positive
areas and areas to avoid (Moser & Uzzell, 2003).
Feeling at home leads to a more extended image of the home range, a familiarity with more distant places, and
often also with the expression of an urban identity. On the other hand, withdrawal into oneself is accompanied by a
search for well-being in a more confined world, with fewer social relations in the neighborhood and an identity that
reflects nostalgia for a residential past elsewhere (Lvy-Leboyer & Ratiu, 1993). Appropriating ones residential
environment is accompanied by attitudes of familiarity and solidarity based on the neighborhood, a phenomenon
that has for some time been highlighted in studies on the dynamic of neighborhood communities: Sanchez,
Wiesenfeld, and Cronick (1991) for Venezuela and Reid and Aguilar (1991) for Mexico. We are thus witnessing
essentially a search for consistency in the way of life and interpersonal relations by achieving a positive
environmental identity based on ones feeling of being safely at rest in ones neighborhood. Residential satisfaction
is associated with social conditions in the neighborhood, with the social circle, with being in contact with others,
and with the social atmosphere, as well as with the security elements found there.
According to Pol and Valera (1999), five aspects shape the construction of the urban identity: (1) the territorial
dimension, (2) the temporal dimension, (3) the behavioral dimension, (4) the social and psycho-social dimension,
and (5) the ideological dimension through cultural values. The spatial identity or topological identity (Flonneau,
2003) is expressed at different levels of the environmental scale from the home to the region (Feldman, 1990), but
the social dimension appears to be more important for extended scales of the urban environment (Lally, 1992).
For Feldman (1990), the concept of urban identity corresponds to the realities of modern society undergoing major
changes, which involve the mobility of its members. She proposes the concept of settlement identity, which allows
the categorization of these places at a cognitive level, while at an emotional level it involves preferences and
sensitivity for certain categories of places frequented by the individual that the latter can distinguish and for which
he is prepared at a cognitive level (scripts, prototypes, and situational, social, and material frameworks). By
adapting the definition of Proshanskys place identity, Feldman makes clear that living identity is characterized by a
group of ideas, feelings, expectations, preferences, values, and conscious or unconscious goals, as well as by
behavior tendencies and skills that link identity to a type of space organization and then encourage its relations
with the same type of environment. These preferences allow people who are mobile to establish coherence and an
identity beyond their multiple residences. Mobile individuals, because they maintain relations with the same type of
environment, are thus capable of keeping the predictive nature of their environmental experiences.
In conclusion, the urban social identity is as much an individual and social construction of meanings concerning
space and its division into coherent units and of the identification of associated social groups, as strategies of
social differentiation through investment in ones environment.
Page 13 of 21
Cities
becoming depopulated, are we not witnessing a tendency to progressively disqualify a cosmopolitan model that
has gained value from its potential for encounters, for exchanges, and for the unknown, to satisfy the increasingly
acute desire of citizens to be exclusively among their own kind in a socially homogenous space? If this is already a
long-standing tendency, it seems to be gathering strength today and spreading to new social categories,
especially on the American continent and the Middle East. While in our culture the very idea of the city, a public
space, is associated with the idea of democracy, the exchange of goods and ideas, and freedom, certain planners
are developing gated communities, socially and culturally homogenous by taking (p. 216) advantage of the
feeling of insecurity. In the United States there are some 20,000 private cities. These communities have been
constituted by and for populations wanting to isolate themselves from an urban environment judged to be
increasingly hostile. The motivation for living there is the choice of a certain way of life, based on the principle of
exclusion. These projects clearly not only run counter to social diversity strongly recommended in the framework
of urban solidarity, but also fly in the face of the final declaration of the World Congress of Cities and Local
Authorities (Habitat II, Istanbul, Turkey, May 3031, 19961). Moreover, well-being, as defined by the World Health
Organization (1997), includes the relationship with the place where one lives and is defined in terms of a match
between the individual and his environment. Identification with ones place of residence and social cohesion are
closely linked to environmental-friendly behavior (Uzzell, Pol, & Badenas, 2002).
For successful integration, it is not sufficient to live next door to each other, but together. Far from encouraging
withdrawal into oneself as it is commonly accepted, social and cultural diversity, for a large part of the population,
seems to be an essential asset of the city, at least in Europe. And this does not vary because of strategic
capacities, geographical position, or neighborhood (Flonneau, Marchand, & Fleury-Bahi, 2005). In response to a
questionnaire on urbanity developed by the authors, a majority of Parisians say that a neighborhood composed
of very different people can be enriching and that respect for different ways of life is indispensable. This shows
that at least in French society, conditions for cohabitation at a neighborhood level seem to be fairly accepted,
which constitutes a necessary condition for living together harmoniously through the discovery and acceptance of
others.
In conclusion, the environmental psychology of the city must not forget that the individual is part of a group or a
community through which he perceives and conceives the city in both its physical and social dimensions. If we
wish to understand the relationship between the individual and the city, we need to know the individual and the
social image the individual constructs for himself of the urban territories and their population. What is more, the
appropriation of the city can be achieved only if the physical and social environmental conditions allow the
individual to identify himself within the overall urban community. In other words, one has to move from cohabiting at
the level of the district and neighborhood to living harmoniously together and appropriating the city as a whole.
It is therefore urgent today to emphasize the socio-environmental management of urban diversity. One must not
only favor coexistence between cultures and encourage a harmonious development of all minorities, but also
ensure a fair and just distribution of services by providing different communities with the infrastructures they need.
Only good collaboration between inhabitants and the authorities and participation in decision-making will
encourage the feeling of belonging to the same urban community. Two complementary aspects need to be
promoted and consolidated: the public expression and recognition of difference on the one hand, and on the other
the construction of a common destiny through the feeling of belonging to the urban community. Could the wish to
stay there forever, that is, to be buried there, be the ultimate expression of ones having become an urban citizen
(Casal, Aragons, & Moser, 2010)?
Future Directions
Of course, there are a lot of questions open, and therefore to be addressed in the coming years. Further studies
should be based on two aspects: first, the fact that cities face an increase of urban populations with specific
needs, and second, that cities are not always prepared to furnish an adequate framework and a proper
infrastructure for the development of their citizens. Some specific research priorities include the following:
Looking at the health impact of the urban physical and social living conditions linking behavioral studies and
fragility of urban dwellers.
Poverty has been identified as having an important impact on the development of children (see Evans &
Page 14 of 21
Cities
Wachs, 2010). Further studies within that framework are needed.
How populations with high economic capacities and frequent intra- and intermobility and sedentary
populations with weak economic capacities experience the city, and what their respective needs are.
What is the impact of telecommuting and relocation of activities on mobility and more generally on the urban
way of life?
Overall, further studies of environmental quality-of-life criteria according to different urban populations with
different cultures and aspirations are needed.
References
Ackerman, D., Dulong R., & Jeudy, H. P. (1983). Imaginaires de linscurit [The imaginations of insecurity]. Paris:
Librairie des Mridiens.
Amato, P. R. (1993). Urban-rural differences in helping friends and family members, Social Psychology Quarterly,
56(4), 249262.
Amerio, P., & Roccato, M. (2003). Structure multi-facette du sentiment dinscurit [Multifaceted structure of the
feeling of insecurity]. Psychologie et socit, 4(1), 7.
Arling, G. (1976). The elderly widow and her family, neighbours, and friends. Journal of Marriage and the Family,
38, 757768.
Baba, Y., & Austin, D. M. (1986). Neighborhood environmental satisfaction, victimization, and social participation as
determinants of perceived neighborhood safety. Environment and Behavior, 21(6), 763780.
Barker, R. G. (1968). Ecological psychology: Concepts and methods for studying the environment of human
behavior. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
Barker, R. G., & Gump, P. V. (1964). Big school, small school: High school size and student behaviour. Stanford,
CA: Stanford University Press.
Barker, R. G., & Wright, H. F. (1955). Midwest and its children: The psychological ecology of an American town.
New York: Harper & Row.
Baum, A., & Paulus, P. (1987). Crowding. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.), Handbook of environmental psychology.
New York: Wiley.
Baum, A., Singer, J. E., & Baum, C. (1984). Stress and the environment. In G. W. Evans (Ed.), Environmental stress
(pp. 1544). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Benot, T. P., Benot, J-M., Bellanger, F., & Marzloff, B. (1993). Paris 1995, le grand desserrement. Enqute sur 11
millions de franciliens [Paris 1995, The big loosening: Inquiry on 11 million inhabitants of the great Paris]. Paris:
Romillat.
Bernard, Y. (1997). Les reprsentations de la civilit dans la socit urbaine daujourdhui [The representation of
civility in the contemporary urban society]. Paris: Laboratoire de Psychologie environnementale, CNRS/Universit
Paris-Descartes.
Blasco, F., Lajoie, G., Marchand, D., & Rople, F. (1998). Regards croiss sur les proximits urbaines [Crossview
on urban proximities]. In J. M. Huriot (Ed.), La ville ou la proximit organise [The city or the organized proximity]
(pp. 223234). Paris: Anthropos, Collection Villes.
Bonnes, M., Mannetti, L., Secchiaroli, G., & Tanucci, G. (1990). The city as a multiplace system: An analysis of
peopleurban environment transactions. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 10, 3765.
Bornstein, M. H. (1979). The pace of life revisited. International Journal of Psychology, 14, 8390.
Burgel, G. (1993). La ville aujourdhui [The city of today]. Paris: Hachette Pluriel.
Page 15 of 21
Cities
Canter, D. (1977). The psychology of place. London: Architectural Press.
Canter, D., & Canter, S. (1971). Close together in Tokyo. Design and Environment, 2, 6063.
Casal, A., Aragons, J-I., & Moser, G. (2010). Attachment forever: Environmental and social dimensions, temporal
perspective, and choice of ones last resting place. Environment and Behavior, 42(6), 765778.
Contreras, R., Moser, G., & Savina, Y. (2008). Inscurit et convivance urbaine. Le cas de deux villes Mexicaines:
Mexico et Quertaro [Insecurity and urban convivance: The case of two Mexican cities: Mexico and Queretero].
Psicologia, 20(2), 5977.
Deschamps, J. C. (1990). Attribution et explication [Attribution and explication]. In J. C. Deschamps & A. Clmence
(Eds.), Lattribution. Causalit et explication au quotidien [Attribution. Causality and current explication].
Lausanne, Switzerland: Delachaux & Niestl.
Edney, J. J. (1975). Territoriality and control: A field experiment. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 31,
11081115.
Elias, N. (1969). La civilisation des murs [The civilization of customs]. Paris: Calmann-Lvy.
Evans, G., & Cohen, S. (1987). Environmental stress. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.), Handbook of environmental
psychology (Vol. 1, pp. 571610). New York: Wiley-InterScience.
Evans, G.W., & Wachs, T.D. (Eds.). (2010). Chaos and its influence on childrens development: An ecological
perspective. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Feldman, R-M. (1990). Settlement-identity: Psychological bonds with home places in a mobile society. Environment
and Behavior, 22(2), 183229.
Flonneau, M. L. (1997). Ltudiant dans la ville. Territorialits tudiantes et symbolique urbaine [The student in
the city: Student territoriality and urban symbolic]. Paris: LHarmattan.
Flonneau, M. L. (2003). Cognition sociale et environnement [Social cognition and environment]. Habilitation
diriger des recherches, Universit Bordeaux Segalen. Unpublished manuscript.
Flonneau, M. L., Marchand, D., & Fleury-Bahi, G. (2005). Les reprsentations sociales de lurbanit. Modalits du
vivre ensemble et sentiment de proximit [Social representations of urbanity: Modalities of living together and
feeling of proximity]. Psychologie et Socit, 8, 113144.
Fischer, C. S. (1976). The urban experience. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
Fischer, C. S. (1982). To dwell among friends: Personal network in town and city. Chicago: University of Chicago
Press.
Fischer, C. S., & Phillips, S. L. (1982). Who is alone? Social characteristics of people with small networks. In L. A.
Peplau & D. Perlman (Eds.), Loneliness: A sourcebook of current theory, research, and therapy. New York: WileyInterScience.
Fisher, S. (1986). Stress and strategy. London: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Fleury-Bahi, G. (2000). Mcanismes dinfluence de lhistoire rsidentielle sur lidentit rsidentielle: une approche
dynamique [Ways of influence of the residential history on residential identity: A dynamic approach]. Revue
Internationale de Psychologie Sociale, 13(1), 93114.
Franck, K. A. (1980). Friends and strangers: The social experience of living in urban and non-urban settings.
Journal of Social Issues, 3, 5271.
Freedman, J. L. (1975). Crowding and behavior. San Francisco: Freeman.
(p. 218) Fried, M. (1982). Residential attachment: Source of residential and community satisfaction. Journal of
Social Issues, 38, 107119.
Page 16 of 21
Cities
Fhrer, U., & Kaiser, F. G. (1997). Lhabiter multi-local. Aspects psychologiques de la mobilit des loisirs
[Multilocal living: Psychological aspects of the mobility of leisure]. Paris: CNRS Editions.
Gans, H. J. (1962). The urban villagers. New York: Free Press.
Gaster, S. (1995). Rethinking the childrens home-range concept. Architecture & Behavior, 11(1), 3542.
Geller, D. M. (1980). Response to urban stimulation: A balanced approach. Journal of Social Issues, 36, 86100.
Geller, D., Cook, J., OConnor, M., & Low, A. (1982). Perception of urban scenes by small-town and urban residents:
A multidimensional scaling analysis. In P. Bart, A. Chin, & G. Francescato (Eds.), Knowledge for design:
Proceedings of the 13th International Conference of the Environmental Design Research Association. College
Park, MD: Environmental Design Research Association.
Goffman, E. (1974). Frame analysis: An essay on the organization of experience. New York: Harper & Row.
Grafmeyer, Y. (1995). Sociabilits urbaines [Urban sociabilities]. In F. Ascher, Le logement en questions [Habitat
under question]. Paris: Editions de lAube.
Haegel, F. & Levy, J. (1998). Une lecture spatiale des identities [A spatial reading of identity]. In N. Haumont,
Lurbain dans tous ses tats. Faire, vivre, dire la ville [The urban in all its forms: Making, living, speaking the city]
(pp. 203220). Collection Habitat et Socit, Paris, LHarmattan.
Hannerz, U. (1980). Explorer la ville [Exploring the city]. Paris: Editions de Minuit, Le sens commun
Hran, F. (1987). Comment les Franais voisinent [How the French relate to their neighbors]. Economie et
Statistiques, 195, 4359.
Hunter, A. (1978). Persistence of local sentiments in mass society. In D. Street (Ed.), Handbook of contemporary
urban life. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
Huriot, J. M. (1998). La ville ou la proximit organise [The city or the organized proximity]. Paris: Economica,
Villes.
Kammann, R., Thompson, R., & Irwin, R. (1976). Unhelpful behavior in the street: City size or immediate pedestrian
density? Environment and Behavior, 11, 245250.
Kelley, H. H. (1967). Attribution theory in social psychology. In D. Levine (Ed.), Nebraska Symposium on
Motivation (Vol. 15, pp. 192238). Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press.
Korpela, K. M. (1989). Place identity as a product of environmental self-regulation. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 9, 241256.
Korte, C. (1978). Helpfulness in the urban environment. In A. Baum, J. E. Singer, & S. Valius (Eds.), The urban
environment (Chap. 6). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Korte, C. (1980). Urbannon-urban differences in social behavior and social psychological models of urban impact.
Journal of Social Issues, 36, 2951.
Korte, C., & Kerr, W. (1975). Response to altruistic opportunities in urban and non-urban settings. Journal of Social
Psychology, 95, 183184.
Krupat, E. (1985). People in cities: The urban environment and its effects. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University
Press.
Ktsanes, T., & Reissmann, L. (1960). Suburbia: New homes for old values. Social Problems, 7, 187194.
Lagrange, H., & Roche, S. (1987). Baby alone in Babylone. St. Martin dHres: CERAT.
Lally, M. (1992). Urban related identity: Theory, measurement, and empirical findings. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 12, 285303.
Page 17 of 21
Cities
Latan, B., & Darley, J. M. (1970). The unresponsive bystander: Why doesnt he help? New York: Prentice-Hall.
Lavrakas, P. J. (1982). Fear of crime and behavioral restrictions in urban and suburban neighborhoods. Population
and Environment, 5(4), 242264.
Lefebvre, H. (1970). Du rural lurbain [From the rural to the urban]. Paris: Anthropos.
Lvy-Leboyer, C. (1978). tude psychologique du cadre de vie [Psychological study of living conditions]. Paris:
CNRS Editions.
Lvy-Leboyer, C. (1980). Psychologie et environnement [Psychology and environment]. Paris: PUF.
Lvy-Leboyer, C., & Ratiu, E. (1993). Need of space and residential satisfaction. Architecture & Behaviour, 9(4),
475490.
Lvy-Leboyer, C., & Veyssire, M. (1978). Psychologie diffrentielle du cadre de vie tudes dun groupe restreint
[Differential psychology of the life space: A study on a limited group]. Paris: CNRS Editions.
Lewis, D. A., & Salem, G. W. (1985). Fear of crime: Incivility and the production of a social problem. New
Brunswick, NJ: Transaction.
Lofland, L. (1973). A world of strangers. New York: Basic Books.
Lowin, A., Hottes, J. H., Sandler, B. E., & Bornstein, M. (1971). The pace of life and sensitivity to time in urban and
rural settings. Journal of Social Psychology, 83, 247253.
Marchand, D. (2002). Representation of the city and image of the centre in two different structures: A modern and
a traditional one. In G. Moser, E. Pol, Y. Bernard, M. Bonnes, J. Corraliza, & V. Giuliani (Eds.), Places, People &
Sustainability (pp. 1124). Gttingen, Germany: Hogrefe & Huber.
McCann, I. L., Sakheim, D. K., & Abrahamson, D. J. (1988). Trauma and victimization: A model of psychological
adaptation. The Counseling Psychologist, 16, 531594.
Merrens, M. (1973). Nonemergency helping behaviour in various sized communities. Journal of Social Psychology,
90, 327328.
Milgram, S. (1970). The experience of living in cities: A psychological analysis. In F. F. Korten, S. W. Cook, & J. I.
Lacey (Eds.), Psychology and the problems of society. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
Milgram, S. (1977). The individual in a social world. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.
Mitchell, R. (1971). Some social implications of high density housing. American Sociological Research, 36, 1824.
Moser, G. (1984). Everyday vandalism: User behavior in malfunctioning public phones. In C. Lvy-Leboyer (Ed.),
Vandalism, behavior, and motivations (pp. 167174). Amsterdam: North-Holland Publishers.
Moser, G. (1987). Surcharge environmentale et conduites daide [Environmental overload and helping behavior].
Psychologie Franaise, 32(12), 4554.
Moser, G. (1988a). Urban stress and helping behavior: Effects of environmental overload and noise on behavior.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 8, 287298.
Moser, G. (1988b). Vandalism in urban public telephones. In D. Canter, J. Jesuino, L. Soczka, & G. M. Stephenson
(Eds.), Environmental Social Psychology. Dordrecht, Boston, & London: Kluwer.
Moser, G. (1992). Les stress urbains [Urban stress]. Paris: Armand Colin.
(p. 219) Moser, G. (1994). Les relations interpersonnelles [Interpersonal relations]. Paris: University Press of
France.
Moser, G. (1998). Attribution causale et sentiment dinscurit de victimes de diffrents types de vols. Les Cahiers
Page 18 of 21
Cities
Internationaux de Psychologie Sociale, 39(3), 4352.
Moser, G. (2004). Les conditions psychosociales et environnementales dun sentiment de scurit [Psychosocial
and environmental conditions of insecurity]. Psychologie et Socit, 7, 1124.
Moser, G. (2009). Sociability and environmental anchoring: Keys to sustainable cities. In J. Nevarez & G. Moser
(Eds.), On global grounds: Urban change and globalization. Hauppauge, NY: Nova Science.
Moser, G., & Corroyer, D. (2001). Politeness in an urban environment: Is city life still synonymous with civility?
Environment and Behavior, 33(5), 611625.
Moser, G., Legendre, A., & Ratiu, E. (2003). City dwellers relationship networks: Patterns of adjustment to
environmental constraints. In R. Garcia-Mira, J. M. Sabucedo Cameselle, & J. Romay Martinez (Eds.), Culture,
environmental action, and sustainability (pp. 161170). Gttingen, Germany: Hogrefe & Huber.
Moser, G., & Lvy-Leboyer, C. (1985). Inadequate environment and situation control. Environment and Behavior,
17(4), 520533.
Moser, G., & Lidvan, P. (1992). Environnement et sentiment dinscurit [Environment and the feeling of insecurity].
In Y. Bernard & M. Segaud (Eds.), La ville inquite [The anxious city] (pp. 5366). Paris: Editions de lEspace
Europen.
Moser, G., & Robin, M. (2006). Environmental annoyances: A threat to quality of life? European Review of Applied
Psychology, 56(1), 3541.
Moser, G., & Uzzell, D. (2003). Environmental psychology. In T. Millon & M. J. Lerner (Eds.), Comprehensive
handbook of psychology, Vol. 5: Personality and social psychology (pp. 419445). New York: John Wiley & Sons.
Nevarez, J. (2009). Locating the global in Harlem, NYC: Urban development initiatives. In J. Nevarez & G. Moser
(Eds.), On global grounds: Urban change and globalization (pp. 135150). Hauppauge, NY: Nova Science.
Newman, J., & McCauley, C. (1977). Eye contact with strangers in city, suburb, and small town. Environment and
Behavior, 9, 547558.
Newman, O., & Franck, K. A. (1982). The effect of building size on personal crime and fear of crime. Population and
Environment, 5(4), 203220.
Norris, F. H., & Kaniasty, K. (1991). The psychological experience of crime: A test of the mediating role of beliefs in
explaining the distress of victims. Journal of Social and Clinical Psychology, 10(3), 239261.
Noschis, K. (1984). Signification affective du quartier [The affective meaning of the neighborhood]. Paris: Mridien.
Oppong, J. R., Ironside, R. G., & Kennedy, L. W. (1988). Perceived quality of life in a center-periphery framework.
Social Indicators Research, 20, 605620.
Palisi, B. J. (1985). Formal and informal participation in urban areas. Journal of Social Psychology, 125(4), 429447.
Palmade, F. (1977). Systme symbolique et idologique de lhabiter [The symbolic system and the ideology of
living]. Paris: CSTB.
Pol, E. (2002). The theoretical background to the City-Identity-Sustainability (CIS) Network (Special issue).
Environment and Behavior, 34(1), pp. 825.
Pol, E., & Valera, S. (1999). Symbolisme de lespace public et identit sociale [Social identity and the symbolism of
public space]. Villes en Parallle, 2829, 1333.
Prezza, M., & Constantini, S. (1998). Sense of community and life satisfaction investigation in three different
territorial contexts. Journal of Community and Applied Social Psychology, 8, 181194.
Proshansky, H. M. (1978). The city and self-identity. Environment and Behavior, 10(2), 147169.
Page 19 of 21
Cities
Proshansky, H. M., Fabian, A. K., & Kaminoff, R. (1983). Place-identity: Physical world socialization of the self.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 3, 5783.
Ratiu, E. (2003). Lvaluation de lenvironnement [The evaluation of the environment]. In G. Moser & K. Weiss
(Eds.), Espaces de vie: Aspects de la relation homme-environment [Life spaces: Aspects of the peopleenvironment relations] (pp. 85112). Paris: Armand Colin.
Reid, A., & Aguilar, M. A. (1991). Constructing community social psychology in Mexico. Applied Psychology: An
International Review, 40(2), 181199.
Rivlin, L. (1982). Group membership and place meaning in an urban neighborhood. Journal of Social Issues, 38(3),
7593.
Rizk, C. (2003). Citadins, votre quartier est-il agrable vivre? [Citizens, is your neighborhood nice to live in?].
Paris: INSEE-premire, 934.
Rogler, L. H. (1967). Slum neighborhoods in Latin America. Journal of Inter-American Studies, 9(4), 507528.
Sadalla, K. E., & Stea, D. (1978). Approaches to a psychology of urban life. Environment and Behavior, 10(2),
139146.
Salvador, J., (2000). Las tensiones espacio-temporales de la vida cotidiana [The spatio-temporal tensions of
everyday life]. In A. Lindon (Ed.), La vida cotidiana y su espacio temporalidad. Barcelona: Anthropos.
Sanchez, E., Wiesenfeld, E., & Cronick, K. (1991). Community social psychology in Venezuela. Applied
Psychology, 40(2), 219236.
Sarbin, T. R. (1983). Place identity as a component of self: An addendum. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 3,
337342.
Serfaty-Garzon, P. (2003). Les territoires de lintimit [The territories of intimacy]. Paris: Armand Colin.
Simmel, G. (1903). The metropolis and mental life. In K. Wolff (Ed.), The sociology of Georg Simmel. Glencoe, IL:
Free Press.
Sixsmith, J. A. (1986). The meaning of home: An exploratory study of environmental experience. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 6, 281298.
Skogan, W., & Maxfield, M. (1981). Coping with crime. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage.
Stokols, D., & Shumaker, S. (1981). People in places: A transactional view of settings. In J. H. Harvey (Ed.),
Cognition, social behavior, and the environment (pp. 441488). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Strauss, A. (1961). Images of the American city. New York: Free Press of Glencoe.
Sundstrom, E. (1978). Crowding as a sequential process: Review of research on the effects of population density
on humans. In A. Baum & Y. Epstein (Eds.), Human response to crowding (pp. 32116). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence
Erlbaum Associates.
Taylor, R., Gottfredson, S. O., & Brower, S. M. (1984). Understanding block crime and fear. Journal of Research in
Crime and Delinquency, 21, 303331.
Thorndike, E. L. (1939). Your city. New York: Harcourt, Brace, & World.
(p. 220) Uzzell, D., Pol, E., & Badenas, D. (2002). Place identification, social cohesion, and environmental
sustainability. Environment and Behavior, 34(1), 2653.
Wicker, A. W. (1979). An introduction to ecological psychology. Monterey, CA: Brook/Cole.
Wirth, L. (1938). Urbanism as a way of life. American Journal of Sociology, 44, 124.
Page 20 of 21
Cities
Wirtz, P., & Ries, G. (1992). The pace of lifereanalysed: Why does walking speed of pedestrians correlate with
city size? Behaviour, 123(1/2), 7783.
World Health Organization. (1997). World health report 1997: Conquering suffering, enriching humanity. Geneva:
World Health Organization.
Wright, H. F. (1967). Recording and analyzing child behavior. New York: Harper & Row.
Zeisel, J. (1975). Sociology and architectural design. New York: Free Press.
Zeisel, J. (2006). Inquiry by design: Environment/behavior/neuroscience in architecture, interiors, landscape, and
planning. New York: W. W. Norton.
Zimbardo, P. G. (1969). The human choices: Individuation, reason, and order versus deindividuation, impulse, and
chaos. In W. J. Arnold & D. Levine (Eds.), Nebraska Symposium on Motivation. Lincoln: University of Nebraska
Press.
Notes:
(1.) The city, as a fundamental place for social interaction, must be recognised as the pivotal human settlement
which provides a focal point for growth and sustainable development, for the well-being and social cohesion of the
majority of the population, for its capacity to adapt and to innovate technically, socially, culturally and politically,
for the creation of our future and a renewed vision of the progress of humanity and for the evolution of our
civilisation.
Gabriel Moser
Gabriel Moser Institute of Psychology University of Paris Descartes LPS, University of Aix-en-Provence Paris, France
Page 21 of 21
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
Introduction
The purpose of this chapter is to provide an overview of research examining residential environments within the
discipline of environmental psychology: Attention is given to different levels of the residential environment, but
especially to the residential neighborhood. Residential environments are defined in a broad way both to
encompass actual physical properties and to take into account peoples perceptions and use of these spaces by
highlighting different theoretical approaches. In the first part of the chapter, a broad conceptual framework based
on the notion of environmental fit is presented to integrate research on residential environments and
neighborhoods. In the second part of the chapter, a review of four main research topics is given, including
traditional ones, such as perception, evaluation, and satisfaction, as well as new developments, such as branding
and reputation; all provide empirical evidence of the main theoretical tenets presented in the first part of the
chapter. In conclusion, suggestions for future researches in this field are given based on the conceptual framework
and the empirical evidence offered.
The theoretical framework presented in this chapter is based on our past work and focuses on the notions of
environmental fit (Bonaiuto & Bonnes, 2002; Bonnes & Bonaiuto, 2002) and supportive environments (Sugiyama,
Ward Thompson, & Alves, 2009). The framework emphasizes not only actual and perceived properties of
environments, but also peoples capabilities and how resources are used to promote quality of life in the context of
their everyday lives. Central to this framework are the notions of fit (e.g., Higgins, 2005; Kaplan, 1983; Lawton,
1980), everyday life and its time dimension (e.g., Horelli, 2010; Alves, 2011), and environmental affordances
(e.g., Heft, 2011; Kytt, 2002; Gibson, 1979).
The theoretical framework requires the use of transactional concepts (e.g., affordances; everyday life) to integrate
peoples experiences with perceived and actual properties of their residential and (p. 222) neighborhood
environment. It also requires addressing residential environments in a more integrated way as to relate to everyday
Page 1 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
patterns of activities and their temporal qualities. The frequently cited notion of person-environment (P-E) fit
(Lawton, 1980) is proposed as applicable to research addressing residential and neighborhood environments.
However, here we emphasize the cross-setting perspective, which poses that residential fit depends on both the
congruence with the specific residential setting and the perceived quality of other major life domains, such as work
and recreational activities that are also part of the current residential period (Stokols & Shumaker, 1982).
Lewins (1951) early explanation of behavior as a function of the person and the environment is taken as a starting
point to try to enlarge the notion of fit in the context of neighborhood and residential environments research. A
situated approach (Alves, in press) shows that evaluations, preferences, and choice of activities are bound to a
larger ecological system of everyday spaces to which individuals take part (see also Bonaiuto, Bonnes, &
Continisio, 2004). In particular, studies are considered for how they endeavor to complement and expand Lewins
initial work (e.g., Bronfenbrenner, 1979).
For example, Bonnes, Passaro, and Carrus (2010) examined attitudes in relation to urban green areas. The results
showed a two-factor structure toward urban green areaswith positive evaluations linked to ecocentric values and
biospheric worldviews and negative evaluations related to conservative values and anthropocentric and apathetic
worldviews. Ambivalent attitudes toward green areas seem to be associated with environmental values and
worldviews and to a lesser extent with everyday experiences in urban green spaces. This finding points to the
consideration of motivations and factors other than attitudes (such as habits) as guiding the decision to spend time
in neighborhood green areas. Experiences and time spent in urban green areas may be linked to habitual
organization of everyday activities with the motivation and decision to spend time in green areas in the
neighborhood being based on the organization of everyday activities. As such, this study shows the need to
consider moderator variables (such as habits) and sociocultural differences in the examination of attitudes toward
residential green areas. The way the residential neighborhood affords the realization of specific activities may
explain the decision to spend time in the green areas in the neighborhood.
Bonnes et al. (2010) have expanded the concept of environmental fit in the sense of considering the motivational
basis of peoples attitudes and use of urban green areas. By doing this, the concept of fit is considered within
peoples everyday life and environment. Horelli (2010) defined everyday life as referring to the subjective
experience of everyday, in contrast to the structures or systems made of institutions, financial flows, etc.
Scientifically everyday life can be approached as a process and practices in which people shape in their homes,
at work, or in the living environment the structural conditions into lived life (p. 11).
The notion of everyday life and its affordances may be a path to integrate diverse topics of research in residential
environments. Accordingly, enhancing quality of life means creating a supportive infrastructure of everyday life. In
this sense, design and management of residential environments and neighborhoods need to be linked to peoples
everyday practices. Such a view demands a systemic and transactional approach, that is, an ecological view, and
the examination of environmental affordances, place-specific experiences, and their temporal operations, which
are reflected in the conceptual framework presented next.
Page 2 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
perceptions and actions regarding the residential environment (pp. 4142).
Peoples daily activities (but also perceptions, evaluations, etc.) are emphasized as part of a broader system of
activities and related settings, that is, a so-called multi-place system of activities (e.g., Bonnes, Mannetti,
Secchiaroli, & Tanucci, 1990; Bonaiuto & Bonnes, 1996, 2002; Bonaiuto, Bonnes, & Continisio, 2004; Rapoport,
1990). To understand the responses of adjustment or maladjustment (environmental fit or environmental misfit) in
terms of health and quality of life, there is a need to understand patterns of activities and their locatedness
(Dixon, 2001); that is, how they are carried out in urban residential and neighborhood settings considering also
corresponding patterns of activities carried out by the same person in other places (e.g., city center and
periphery). By addressing these different scales, the sequential and time-related purpose of residential activities is
pointed out. Within this framework, time is also a crucial dimension (both linear and cyclic time) as environmental
experience can be analyzed according to psychologically meaningful temporal and spatial boundaries. This model
is depicted and summarized in Figure 13.1. It focuses on residential features, activities, and their affordances and
consequence in terms of quality of life.
The issue of residential places necessarily links to quality of life. Quality of life is therefore an overarching
construct within which residential place quality plays a role (Lawrence, 2010). Quality of life is a multidimensional
concept related to the assessment (affective or cognitive) of the congruence between ones life expectations and
achievements and the objective properties of the physical environment. It includes the objective environment,
behavioral competence, perceived quality of life, and psychological well-being (Lawton, 1991). Despite problems
with definition and measurement, quality of life has been used as an important outcome measure in socialeconomic policy (Costanza et al., 2008). An ecological understanding of the concept of quality of life
(Bronfenbrenner, 1979) proposes the analysis of person-environment relations as referring to a system comprising
four embedded levels: the microsystem (e.g., the immediate social setting); the mesosystem (e.g., the relations
among different social settings); the exosystem (organizations, communities, and social systems); and the (p.
224) macrosystem (e.g., broader cultural and sociopolitical influences).
For examplefollowing what Becker, Bonaiuto, Bilotta, and Bonnes (2011) noted for health care environments and
translating it here to the residential environmentthe microsystem focuses on the interactions between individuals
and the members of their immediate environment; for example, family, friends, local acquaintances. The
mesosystem considers the relationships and connections among different microsystems, and the ways in which
they operate on each other: for example, ones local acquaintances and the settings in which one interacts with
them influence, and are influenced by, related microsystems, such as friends or family members. Thus, ones
response to and evaluation of the local acquaintances microsystem may be affected by what ones spouse or
other family members think about the nature of the local residential system. The effects also flow in the opposite
direction: our experience with local acquaintances affects our family relations. The exosystem includes
organizations and social systems with which individuals may or may not have a formal contact, but which are still
part of and influence their actions and lives. The legal system, along with its laws and regulations that influence our
behavior, is an example of one such exosystem. Finally, the macrosystem includes societal norms, expectations,
and beliefs that characterize the larger social environment in which the other systems operate: for example, beliefs
about the proper role of the government in the management of residential environments. The central tenant of
Bronfenbrenners ecological theory is that the focus of ecological research should be on identifying the properties
Page 3 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
and relationships among these interdependent, loosely coupled systems. Bronfenbrenners (1979) proposal, with
its ecological emphasis on the several levels of people-environment transactions, necessarily implies an
examination of environmental affordances.
The concept of affordances becomes a useful reference to explore the multi-place system of activities and to
examine the relations between evaluations and actions. When addressing specific environmental elementssuch
as existence of urban green spaces, streets, routes, and presence of other peopleand their effects on the quality
of life, a useful question to ask is how these elements support peoples daily activities and personal projects (Little,
1983). Everyday life and its physical, social, and temporal affordances become necessary issues to address.
Affordances are possibilities or preconditions for action expressed as properties of objects and layouts that are
available to the perceivers perceptual system (Gibson, 1979). They range from interactions with fixed and
semifixed elementsan aesthetically pleasing and well-maintained path will offer people possibilities for walking,
while a dark and poorly maintained one will perhaps restrict itto complex relations involving nonfixed elements,
such as spatial dimensions of relations between groups. In this regard, Dixon and Reicher (1997) reminded us that
social affordances as expressed in positive intergroup contact are unlikely to happen in desegregated spaces
where everyday encounters may be viewed as a threat to those perceived as outsiders.
Affordances as bound on physical/spatial properties, time, peoples goals and capabilities, and intergroup
perceptions are a means to frame quality of life in reference to everyday patterns of activities. For instance,
different groups can be analyzed in terms of urban qualities and related environmental affordances. If the goal is,
for example, to maximize quality of life in residential environments and neighborhoods, then it is important to detect
those features in the environment that are significant for ensuing action and well-being for those target people. In
this sense, the temporal dimension of activitiesthe availability of time for different activities; the integration of
activities in different time periods, in relation to work, mobility, recreation, private and social activities, and so on
may be seen as a good indicator of fit/unfit and quality of life.
In the line of argument proposed by Horelli (2010), when referring to psychological sustainability, it is possible to
argue that quality of life needs to be seen in the context of a supportive infrastructure where positive affordances
in ordinary settingswhere most of ordinary peoples lives takes placepromote everyday behavior in its
individual, social, and environmental dimensions. This line of theorizing fits with current European policies, such as
urban time policies (Mckenberger, 2011) in support of health (but just for a similar line of reasoning applied to
health care environments in the United States, see Becker et al., 2011) and quality of life. The examination of a
supportive environmental infrastructure touches directly on the reciprocal relation between people, settings, and
activities, their fit, and consequent implications for quality of life.
Page 4 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
different components. Quality of life, as the outcome variable in the model, thus depends on the physical as well as
the social and temporal structure offered in a specific residential environment. Supportive residential environments
are those with an infrastructure to support everyday patterns of activities and integrate them in its spatial and
temporal dimensions.
The diagram depicted in Figure 13.1 refers to these processes at any possible level of the residential environment:
from home, to residential neighborhood, to outdoor spaces, up to the whole city (for a similar, simpler model
referring to health care environments, see Bonnes, Bonaiuto, Fornara, & Bilotta, 2009). It synthesizes how the
match between people and environment features is realized through peoples activities according to the
affordances available in the transaction of any given person with any given environment. This process originates
either a fit or a misfit between certain people and certain environments within a specific time. Since these
processes happen within time, time itself is an important component on the process of environmental fit and quality
of life. Time budgets in a persons life, as spent in particular places (e.g., open spaces, airports, waiting rooms, and
kitchens), as well as time budgets related to others, such as between men and women, and to those who need
care, such as children or older people, are important aspects of ones quality of life.
Thus fit, rather than being evaluated in absolute terms, needs to be referred to particular settings, social roles, and
their times. Varying degrees of fit or misfit can be reached and people will regulate their behaviors to manage this
issue: their main strategies in managing the fit can be oriented toward the preventive side (i.e., avoiding the
negative outcomes) or toward the promotion side (i.e., looking for positive outcomes), as theorized by Higgins
(2005). Finally, the either subjectively or objectively evaluated outcome of this process corresponds to the quality
of life (QOL) issue: in fact, the quality of the urban environment, especially of the residential one, is one of the main
components of peoples overall QOL, although it tends to come, in terms of importance in the overall QOL, after
elements such as leisure activities, economic conditions, work, friendships, and marriage/family life (e.g., Bonaiuto,
2004; Lawrence, 2002). But at the same time it is strongly correlated with and facilitates or impedes all those other
features of the QOL.
This framework, coherent with transactional approaches (e.g., Altman & Rogoff, 1987; Stokols, 1987), tries to
convey the point that public policies, design, and governance activity in residential environments should be
directed to support everyday life and thus promote quality of life.
Reality appears as a result of people and environment transactions. Mead (1934, p. 131) expressed this idea with
the simple example of grass starting to be a food only when an ox appears: the grass as food is therefore created
by the outcome of the interaction between an organism and an environment. Similarly (Figure 13.1), it can be said
that any residential place is the outcome of the transaction between person(s) and environment. Strictly speaking,
the term environment could be used to refer to physical and social features, while a residential place would
necessarily be the outcome of organism(s) experiencing an environment within a residential framework. Although
here organism is (p. 226) always intended in terms of human beings, such a general framework can of course
be applied to animal and particularly to urban domestic animals, which are increasingly considered as residents of
the urban ecology, for example, in the case of urban cat colonies (e.g., Benson, 1981).
Following this ecological understanding, the chapter can be divided into sections addressing residential settings at
different scales in which daily activities are embedded. These sections are used here for illustrative and
classification purposes. In this sense, they are not exhaustive, with in-between categories being also possible.
Moreover, it is perfectly plausible to have smaller or larger geographical scale environments: for example, ones
own room, on the one side, or ones own country, on the other side. Any scale can be more or less salient
according to the specific moment: for example, being abroad or coming back from a travel abroad, can make
ones own country as the most salient residential level, maybe for nostalgia feelings; another example can be
adolescence as a period during which ones own room is a residential preferred level to experience attachment
and satisfaction compared to the whole home, etc.
For the sake of the present chapter, the following four main geographical levels, or places can be formalized:
1. Home-related settings, with indoor and outdoor spaces
2. Neighborhoods at a larger level
3. Outdoor spaces: natural and built urban spaces, streets, leisure spaces, and so on
4. City
Page 5 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
Moreover, there are a number of classical or recent issues and problems that can be addressed across these main
residential places, which are listed in Table 13.1. The list proposed in Table 13.1 must be considered as an openended list. This means that a number of other issues and problems can be conceptualized and therefore the list
could be enlarged to incorporate other residential relevant issues. Four topics or residential processes are
discussed here, starting with some more traditional issues within environmental psychology about residential
places discussed in the first section and then progressing with more recent issues in the following three sections. It
may be noted that in many cases a research topic addressed at a certain place level brings knowledge relevant
for another topic and/or another place level: this is evident in the next paragraph in several passages and it shows
how Table 13.1 serves as a conceptual clarifying tool rather than a systematic map of the empirical studies. This is
also highlighted by ticks in Table 13.1 to stress main emphasis in relating a topic to the possible residential places.
Neighborhood
Segregation or aggregation
Outdoor Spaces
City
x
(p. 227) evaluative level (first topic or process); passing to the individual action level (second topic or process);
moving then to the social level of groups and collective action (third topic or process); to finally reapproach the
persons perceptual and evaluative level within a different conceptual view (fourth topic or process).
In fact, perception and evaluation of, and satisfaction with, the residential neighborhood have been extensively
researched. Here we try to show how peoples perceptions and evaluations can be linked to uses and activities a
person carries out within her or his own several residential places.
Peoples uses and activities in residential places are therefore subsequently considered in the second selected
topic, with particular emphasis on implications for health and well-being. This first passage, between the first two
topics, adds an enriched transactional and ecological flavor to the residential place that is given by treating
peoples activities as the interface between an individual and her or his own everyday environment (as depicted in
Figure 13.1).
Afterward, the third selected topic shows how, in turn, peoples residential activities can be crucial not only for their
own personal QOL but also, at a broader and more social level, for the collective impact they have on other people
Page 6 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
and groups. This second passage, between topic two and three, highlights a further increased transactional and
ecological flavor in the residential place analysis, which is given again by the activity as the interface between the
person and her or his environment, but this time within the frame of social and cultural groups, categories, and
systems they belong to.
Finally, the fourth topic allows us to go back to the first topic with a refreshed conceptual perspective, that is,
focusing on recent developments that can be relevant for peoples perceptions and evaluations of residential
places. This process is framed in terms of place branding and reputation, which emphasize the impacts on the
residential perceptions and evaluations of the individual and collective residential pragmatics resulting from the
people-environment transactions happening at all the ecological levels of the residential places system.
Neighborhood
The topic of residential neighborhood has been traditionally addressed within environmental psychology since its
inception and, therefore, represents a classical one within the disciplines statutory or established knowledge (e.g.,
Bonnes & Secchiaroli, 1992; Lawrence, 2002; Tognoli, 1987).
Various authors concerned with residents evaluation of their neighborhood (e.g., Guest & Lee, 1984) have
Page 7 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
referred to a theoretical model that considers three main aspects of the neighborhood: spatial (architectonic and
town planning, including green areas), human (population and type of social relations), and functional (available
services). Subsequently, further developments showed that a fourth component characterized residents
evaluation of their neighborhood (Bonaiuto et al., 1999; Bonaiuto et al., 2003; Bonaiuto et al., 2006; Fornara,
Bonaiuto, & Bonnes, 2010a): that is, contextual features (time and pace of life, health/nonpollution, upkeep).
Moreover, within a contextual or transactional theoretical perspective (e.g., Altman & Rogoff, 1987; Stokols,
1987), investigators have underlined the importance of considering molar units of analysis, such as place, in the
study of people-environment relationships (Canter, 1977, 1988; Proshansky, Fabian, & Kaminoff, 1983; Russell &
Ward, 1982). Researchers have also emphasized recognizing the centrality of the temporal dimension for peoples
environmental experience (e.g., Werner, Altman, & Oxley, 1985), both in terms of linear time (referring to the length
of time a resident has lived in the neighborhood) and in terms of cyclic time (referring to time spent daily in the
neighborhood).
In theoretical terms, it is useful here to distinguish among three main conceptual constructs following Bonaiuto
(2004).
Residential satisfaction (RS): the experience of pleasure or gratification deriving from living in a specific place; that
is, global evaluation inhabitants report with their housing, which can be considered at various levels of scale
(home, building, neighborhood, city).
Place attachment (PA): forms and degrees of affectfeelings, moods, emotionsthat people develop over time and
come to experience with reference to the places in which they are born, live, and act. Neighborhood attachment
(NA) focuses specifically on bonds developed with ones own residential neighborhood. Another construct dealing
with the affective evaluation of the place is the perceived affective quality (e.g., Russell & Pratt, 1980; Perugini,
Bonnes, Aiello, & Ercolani, 2002), which is not a place-specific one but can also be used for differentiating
residential places (e.g., Bonaiuto & Bonnes, 2002).
Residential (urban) quality (RQ): evaluation of the different specific attributes of the residential (urban)
environment; such evaluation can be technical (i.e., expert-based, objective) or observer-based (i.e.,
perceived, subjective). Within the second one, perceived residential environmental quality indicators (PREQIs)
are a standard set of perceived indicators for evaluating a specific place, which can also be used for policy and
monitoring functions.
The first construct, RS, can be considered an overall, global evaluation of the residential environment from the
perspective of the inhabitant and operationally, most of the time, is measured via the inhabitant answer (in a range
from not at all to completely) to global items such as How satisfied are you with the house (or building or
neighborhood)? It can be, however, conceptually considered as comprising the three main components of the
psychological construct of attitude (affect, cognition, behavior): the realm of peoples affective response toward
the residential environment, the realm of their cognitive evaluations of the same environment, and the realm of the
action carried out in that environment. Only a very few studies concern the behavioral component, while the first
two components have been studied to a greater extent. The first two aspects are caught, respectively, by the
other two important constructs mentioned above, which are strictly related to, and partly overlapping, with
residential satisfaction: namely, PA and perceived RQ.
PA, and more particularly residential attachment and NA in our case here, encompasses cognitive, motivational,
and behavioral aspects, reflected in psychological correlates such as the tendency to give favorable evaluations
of their dwelling place, reasons for improving it, and reluctance to leave it. PA, and specifically NA, can be
operatively defined in terms of inhabitants responses to items such as (in the case of the neighborhood scale
level) This neighborhood is part of me or It would be very hard for me to leave this neighborhood: it aims to
catch the global affective response of the person toward her or his own residential environment.
(p. 229) Differently, RQ refers to evaluations of the degree of quality of a range of single features of the
home/neighborhood, and perceived residential environment quality refers to such evaluation from the point of view
of the users, typically inhabitants. Perceived residential environment quality can be operatively defined in terms of
inhabitants answers to items such as (again, referring to the neighborhood scale level) Buildings have unpleasant
colors or The air is clean: it aims to catch specific cognitive evaluations with respect to a range of certain
Page 8 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
residential features from the point of view of the person. Moreover, environmental quality is typically considered a
multidimensional construct because, for example, RQ can comprise an array of features (e.g., as mentioned
above, from architectonic and town planning features to human and social features, from services to contextual
elements, where each of these categories comprises a range of subcategories, each having many different items).
Finally, environmental quality, including RQ, can be viewed in terms of both technical and observational
assessments (Craik & Feimer, 1987): in the first case, environmental quality is evaluated on the basis of technical
systems of measurement (so-called objective or expert assessment); in the second case, perceived environmental
quality is evaluated on the basis of consensual impressions expressed in an ordinary language framework by the
inhabitants (so-called subjective or layperson assessment).
In fact, the quality of the very same urban environment can then be evaluated from at least two perspectives: the
technical, experts assessment or the observer-based, laypersons assessment. The first perspective is often
referred to as objective because it involves tools and measures (metrics, weights) of scientific and technical
disciplines; that is, mechanical monitoring equipment or other physical means to produce a reading of environment
quality (it does not require individual exposition). The second perspective can be referred to as subjective
because it relies on self-report tools through which the person expresses her or his everyday life in terms of
perceptions, observations, impressions; that is, it employs the perceptual abilities of humans to judge
environmental quality. This means that observational assessment offers a measure of the quality of the
environment as it is experienced.
However, both kinds of environmental assessments aspire to objectivity, inasmuch as they strive to have
reproducible measures that are valid, reliable, sensible, and useful. Similarly, both share subjectivity, because
technical assessment relies on human choice about selecting which dimension to examine, sampling times and
places, interpreting results; and observational assessment is derived, by definition, from individual experiencebased responses (which, however, in some cases can show a strikingly high intersubjective agreement). Both
kinds of evaluations aim to address the environment in which people live, but probably different values, ideals, and
goals about the environment underlie the experts technical and laypersons observational assessments.
Theoretically, such underlying discrepancies reflect the processes of social and cultural construction of the
environment and of environmental issues, where social conflicts and controversies affect environmental
descriptions and evaluations. For example, ethical, aesthetic, and ideological forces play a role in defining what
should be considered polluted or dangerous for the environment and for people (Douglas, 1966).
Therefore, the degree of correspondence among the different types of evaluations (technical and observational)
can be a problematic issue. For example, when assessing the quality of urban green areas, experts and laypeople
are often in strong disagreement because laypeople give strong importance to green areas accessibility and
usability during different times of the day, while experts assessments tend to overlook such components (e.g.,
Bonnes & Bonaiuto, 1995). Thus, different systems of values can generate different, and sometimes opposite,
evaluations of the quality of the same urban residential environment. For this reason, it is important to compare and
to integrate technical assessments with observational ones in designing and managing the environment.
Page 9 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
In describing how inhabitants perceive, conceive, and evaluate a residential place, two main methodological
approaches can be adopted (Bonaiuto, 2004). The first, more inductive approach, which moves from how the
inhabitants spontaneously think and/or talk about their own residential environment, and the second, more
deductive approach, moving from the features of the residential environment that the researcher reckons to be
theoretically relevant, and then eliciting the inhabitants evaluations about such features. Often the two
approaches represent two successive phases of a broader research effort.
On the basis of the first approach, inhabitants can take part in unstructured or semi-structured interviews, or in
small group discussions, and the researcher can then try to describe the way they talk about their residential
environment: this approach usually privileges qualitative evidence to depict the folk, commonsense ways to
conceive and evaluate the residential environment.
On the basis of the second approach, inhabitants are typically administered a questionnaire where they are
presented with several items, selected as relevant within the researchers theoretical framework and referring to
their residential environment; then they are requested to answer them by filling in agreement-disagreement or
satisfaction-dissatisfaction graduated scales: this approach typically privileges quantitative methods, gathering
large samples of inhabitants and using statistics to infer a populations main trends.
While the first approach can offer an in-depth and fresh description of the residential ethnography, that is, of the
inhabitants ways to give meaning to and to organize their social-physical residential reality, the second approach
can offer quick, systematic, and broad information on how the inhabitants position themselves on the whole array
of features that are considered crucial by the researcher to evaluate the perceived residential environment quality.
Each method can emphasize different aspects. Take, for instance, the residential neighborhood perceived quality:
if you concentrate on inhabitants free expressions, you will probably notice that they often collapse together the
evaluation of aspects that are technically or theoretically considered as separate (say, architectonic or urban
planning features with social features, or services and social features); on the contrary, if you ask them directly,
via ad hoc prepared scales, to evaluate each feature of the residential environment, you will end up with separate,
pure indicators for each feature. In the first case, you can, for example, appreciate the fact that the method
allows you to reconstruct the weft of the inhabitants residential perceptions and evaluations, discovering how
they psychologically bring together different features on the basis that, for example, they all pertain to urban
safety. In the second case, you would probably appreciate the possibility of knowing the inhabitants position on
exactly the same matters you are interested in, which can then be used to make systematic comparison among
different groups or places, or among such perceptions and other indicators that consider the very same features
from the point of view of a technical assessment.
Having said that, it must be recognized that the results of different studies carried out in several countries in the
past 30 years converge to show a stable structure lying at the basis of peoples evaluation of their residential
environment: keeping the focus on the residential neighborhood scale level and considering the initial starting
model mentioned above comprising four main areas of evaluation (space, people, services, context), some main
results can be summarized in the following five main points (adapted and updated from Bonaiuto & Bonnes, 2002,
referring mainly to a long-term research line that started from that initial model within a UNESCO-MAB Rome Project;
see also Bonnes, Carrus, Bonaiuto, Fornara, & Passafaro, 2004).
1. Spontaneous inhabitants evaluations of their own residential neighborhood tend to collapse different aspects of
the environment, especially gathering together human/social features with architectonic, town-planning, and
functional features (Bonnes, Bonaiuto, & Ercolani, 1991; Bonnes, Bonaiuto, Ercolani, & De Rosa, 1991). Laypeople
thus tend to evaluate their residential environment not in a molecular way, but according to a molar perspective
that almost always integrates social with physical (p. 231) or functional elements. The three main dimensions
underlying these links (confirmed in different towns and times) seem to be density (space and social), safety
(space and social), and opportunity of use (services and social uses).
2. The subjective molar perspective intuitively adopted by laypeople partially correlates with experts technical
and objective indicators, as far as the built environment is concerned (architectural, town-planning, or functional
features of the neighborhood). However, as far as green spaces are concerned, the overlap between laypeoples
perspective and objective indicators is more problematic. Molecular indicators referring to specific aspects of
green areas and vegetation tend to negatively correlate with peoples molar evaluations of green areas (which
Page 10 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
collapse together spatial features with social uses of green areas). These results (see Bonnes & Bonaiuto, 1995)
highlight the importance of questioning and further analyzing the correspondence between the two evaluative
perspectives: it does not appear that they can be easily reduced, one to the other. Congruently, a proper
environmental assessment should always include both perspectives and approaches. These observations also
raise the problem of devising proper instruments for tapping both kinds of environmental assessment (as
traditionally known; e.g., Craik & Feimer, 1987).
3. The development of the PREQI (perceived residential environment quality indicator) measurement scales aims to
give an answer to this problem, too; that is, to provide a reliable and valid tool for measuring inhabitants
evaluations of their own residential neighborhood. PREQIs are designed to tap three main features of the residential
environment according to traditional theoretical models of place (architectonic and town-planning, social, and
services; e.g., Canter, 1997; Guest & Lee, 1984), plus contextual features (as emerged from further qualitative
exploratory studies). Furthermore, it is conceived with a modular and flexible structure: that is, it provides a tool
composed of a set of partly independent indicators that can be used together or separately, according to the
needs of the specific environmental assessment. They comprise 19 specific indicators of perceived residential
environmental quality. Moreover, a measure of PA has been developed, too, with reference to the residential
neighborhood and in terms of both process and outcome (Altman & Ginat, 1992; Harris, Brown, & Werner,
1996) as one NA scale. Both PREQIs and NA scale have been created and refined with a systematic progression of
correlation studies: an initial study on several neighborhoods in Rome (Bonnes et al., 1997; Bonaiuto et al., 1999);
a confirmation study on a different sample in Rome (Bonaiuto et al., 2003); a generalization study to extend their
validity through a large sample of medium and small cities in Italy (Bonaiuto et al., 2006); and the development of a
final extended version and a final short version of the PREQIs and of the NA scale, via confirmatory factorial
analyses techniques (Fornara, Bonaiuto, & Bonnes, 2010a). In the last version, the 19 PREQIs are grouped as
follows (141-item extended version: 612 items for each indicator with 0.71 < alpha < 0.90; 62-item short version:
34 items for each indicator with 0.62 < alpha < 0.88): architectural and town-planning features (visual-perceptual
space: architectural and urban planning space, functional space: organization of accessibility and roads, green
areas: indicators 16); socio-relational features (indicators 79); functional features (welfare services, recreational
services, commercial services, transport services: indicators 1015); context features (pace of life, environmental
health, upkeep and care: indicators 1619). The 19 specific indicators are the following:
1) buildings aesthetics
2) buildings density
3) buildings volume
4) internal functionality
5) external connections (with the city)
6) green areas (presence and care)
7) security
8) discretion
9) sociability
10) school services
11) social-care services
12) sport services
13) social-cultural activities
14) commercial services
15) transport services
16) relaxing versus distressing pace of life
17) stimulating versus boring pace of life
18) environmental health (unpolluted environment)
19) upkeep
There is also a neighborhood attachment (NA) scale (8-item extended version and 4-item short version,
respectively alpha = 0.91 and 0.82).
A first Italian standard version of PREQIs and NA scale has been released (Fornara, Bonaiuto, & Bonnes, 2010b).
Further studies in other countries are in progress to extend the generalizability of the PREQIs and NA scale to
different linguistic (p. 232) and cultural contexts, starting with samples from Turkey, France, Portugal, China, and
Page 11 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
so on.
Moreover, some of the PREQIs proved to be important in predicting NA, which appears to have therefore a multicomponential nature, being predicted by a mix of indicators belonging to all the four areas, with the following
priority: contextual features especially with pace of life (indicators 16 and 17); then architectural and townplanning especially with built and green features (particularly indicators 1 and 6); and finally social (particularly
indicator 9) and services (particularly indicator 13) features (Bonaiuto et al., 1999). Thus, an affective-molar
evaluation of the neighborhood is linked to cognitive-molecular evaluations of the same place.
Such PREQIs and NA scale, together with traditional measures of RS, have been used in post-occupancy
evaluation (POE) researches and assessments, that is, to examine the effectiveness for human users of occupied
designed (residential) environments. They have been successfully used, for example, to provide evidence-based
information for the design in Rome of a public square in a peripheral degraded area of the city (e.g., see Bonaiuto
& Bonnes, 2002), or in the assessment and design of high-quality complexes in residential areas of the city
(Fornara, Bonaiuto, Bonnes, Carrus, & Passafaro, 2007).
4. As traditionally stated in theoretical models of people-place transactions (e.g., Canter, 1977, 1986; Russell &
Ward, 1982), peoples residential experience is not limited to perceptions and evaluation (whether cognitivemolecular or molar-affective) of neighborhood features: it also comprises activities carried out within the residential
place (see also Rapoport, 1990). Moreover, these activities are interdependent with activities carried out within
other urban places, namely, the city center and the periphery. Studies showed that each city inhabitant develops a
specific multi-place system of activities composed of activities carried out within these three locations (Bonnes et
al., 1990). These systems of activities seem to be organized according to very typical and stable configurations
that recur in cities of different sizes as well as in the same city across a period of 10 years (Bonaiuto & Bonnes,
1996; Bonaiuto & Bonnes, 2002). Generally, the residential place tends to be a pivot in organizing the inhabitants
system of activities and each system of multi-place activities tend to integrate complementary activities across
different places. However, different social categories of inhabitants are characterized by different patterns of
activities: some people living in a large metropolitan area (apparently this does not happen within a small city) are
confined in a single place (usually the neighborhood, sometimes the city center); some people use two places; and
a relative minority of people display an integrated mastering of the city by using all three urban places. Socialdemographic features allow these categories of inhabitants to be described by gender, age, years of residence,
occupation, and so on. On the whole, such an approach shows the systemic and ecological nature of places,
which are organized in terms of a system of places interconnected, through the persons inter-place activities.
5. Finally, such a multi-place system of activities proves to be significantly correlated with perceptions and
evaluations regarding the specific residential place involved in such a pragmatic system (Bonaiuto, Bonnes, &
Continisio, 2004): that is, environmental cognition and action are coherently merged within the personal and
everyday experience of the residential place. In fact, that research shows that four groups characterized by
specific different patterns of multi-place activity were significantly different in their degree of satisfaction with
respect to the three dimensions of residential environmental qualities. Briefly, as Bonaiuto et al. (2004) summarized,
a system of urban practices oriented toward integrationthat is, high degree of specificity and variety, high urban
mobility, high social exchange (quality users group and multi-place hyperactive group)is associated with (1)
greater perceived residential quality regarding the relational aspects linked to social-spatial security and (2) more
negative evaluations for the functional aspects and, to a lesser degree, for the aspects of spatial-social density. In
contrast, a system of urban activities oriented toward alienation and confinementthat is, low specificity, low urban
mobility, and little social exchange (marginal escape users group) is associated with greater perceived residential
quality regarding the aspects of both spatial-physical density and functional adequacy; however, for relational
aspects linked to social-spatial security, it is associated with an experience of lower quality.
These results verify the association between the evaluations of residential quality and satisfaction regarding the
neighborhood and the system of activities carried out in the place-city and in the neighborhood subplace. The
existence of this type of association pattern is consistent with the conceptual model of residential place (in this
case, the neighborhood) as a psychological unit constituted by activities and by coherently articulated evaluations
(p. 233) (Canter, 1977, 1991). Overall, these results show that residential evaluation and satisfaction are
articulated coherently with the type of activities carried out in the residential place and in other parts of the city,
underscoring the interconnection between evaluative and action aspects involved in the psychological experience
Page 12 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
of place. Such a relationship has been empirically tested in very few cases (e.g., Aragons, Amrigo, & Sukhwani,
1992, cited in Amrigo & Aragons, 1997, p. 51; Skjaeveland & Grling, 1997).
The general issue of uses and activities is therefore expanded in the second point in the above list in relation to
recent research about residential place uses and activities relating to both individual health and collective
processes.
City
Urban green spaces enhance residential satisfaction (Bonaiuto, Aiello, Perugini, Bonnes, & Ercolani, 1999). Van der
Meer et al. (2011) have used the city of Berlin as an example of a high-density residential environment to test their
model of residential satisfaction. They designed three studies to examine the relationship between objective
attributes of residential environments (e.g., street width, building height); peoples evaluations (cognitive and
affective judgments); and the effect of different types of greenery (vegetation-covered wasteland areas) on
peoples perception and affective judgment; as well as a task-evoked pupillary response as an indicator of
cognitive resource allocation. First, they showed that building density has an impact on crowding. This was shown
by manipulating specific attributes of the built environment, namely street width, building height, story height,
number of parked cars, and greenery. Thus, wide streets, greenery, and a fewer number of parked cars decrease
the perception of crowding among residents.
Second, they tested the hypothesis that processing highly complex urban wilderness areas consumes more
resources than processing less complex urban wilderness areas and measured peak dilation to evaluate the
magnitude of the pupillary response. The results showed that visually structured sites (less demanding visually)
were associated with smaller pupil dilations.
Finally, they examined what factors predicted residential satisfaction in the urban area of Berlin. They found that
traffic noise, litter and dirt, unpleasant odors, cold temperatures in winter, and air pollution were rated as the most
critical ambient stressors.
Home
In relation to health and quality of life promotion, which is the focus of this chapter, studies show that green and
open spaces closer to home reduce stress with a lower likelihood of obesity being associated with access to a
garden and shorter distances to green areas from the dwelling (Nielsen & Hansen, 2007). The health impact of
Page 13 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
private gardening (Stigsdotter & Grahn, 2004) has also been studied. Green space in peoples living environment
has also (p. 234) been examined to see whether social contacts are an underlying mechanism of the relationship
between green space and health. Results showed that less green space in peoples living environment coincided
with feelings of loneliness and with perceived shortages of social support (e.g., Maas, van Dillen, Verheij, &
Groenewegen, 2009a).
A current major concern for research refers to sedentary behavior and obesity, particularly among children. A
study by Granich (2010) demonstrated that the family home environment (house design and the availability of
multiple electronic devices within the home) was associated with childrens use of electronic media (i.e., television,
electronic games, and computer) in the home environment. The examination of routine activities showed that
children spent two or more hours a day using electronic media. Home and the activity routines related to it may be
a strong context-specific factor associated with sedentary behavior among children. However, additional studies
related to peoples daily routines in home settings are needed.
Neighborhood
In general, the use of the cumulative risk model (Evans & Marcynyszyn, 2004) shows that the ample aggregated
number of potential risk factors increases fear of crime and decreases well-being in the inhabitants (Bilotta,
Bonaiuto, & Bonnes, 2010). More specifically, research at the neighborhood place level has addressed the
percentages of green space in a 1 km and 3 km radius around the home to examine how perceived general health
is moderated by amount of green space in the neighborhood. The findings have demonstrated that participants
with a high amount of green space in a 3 km radius are less affected by experiencing stressful life events than
respondents with a low amount of green space in this radius (van den Berg et al., 2010). When addressing the
amount of green space in relation to the prevalence of physician-assessed morbidity, Maas et al. (2009b) showed
that green space close to home (1 km radius) was also associated with lower annual prevalence rates of
investigated disease clusters than green space farther away.
Common outdoor spaces in deprived communities might contribute to social cohesion (Kuo, Sullivan, Coley, &
Brunson 1998; Kweon, Sullivan, & Wiley, 1998), and perceived amounts of open spaces and level of vegetation
are linked to lower crime rates and feelings of safety in urban contexts (Kuo et al., 1998; Kuo & Sullivan, 2001b). In
fact, the amount of green space close to where people live has a significant relationship with their perceived health
(Maas et al., 2006) with green spaces being a preferred element when trade-offs among specific attributes of
neighborhood open spaces are put into question (Alves et al., 2008).
Research findings also point to the potential of neighborhood green space to enhance health by helping people
restore from mental fatigue (Scopelliti & Giuliani, 2005), by acting as a resource to facilitate physical activities
(Bjrk et al., 2008), by reducing mortality (Mitchell & Popham, 2008), by reducing stress levels (e.g., Nielsen &
Hansen, 2007), and mitigating stressful life events (van den Berg, 2010). Korpela et al. (2010) showed that there is
a link between the need for restoration (worries and stress), the use of environmental self-regulation strategies
(favorite places), and restorative outcomes.
Use of green spaces has also been examined in relation to thermal discomfort during periods of heat stress. Users
of selected green spaces in Italy and the United Kingdom have been studied. The findings show that longer and
frequent visits to green spaces may alleviate the perception of thermal discomfort during periods of heat stress
among users (Lafortezza, Carrus, Sanesia, & Davies, 2009).
A group of studies have focused on younger populations and children showing, for instance, that preferred outdoor
places vary according to childrens age and degree of vegetation (Castonguay & Jutras, 2009). For example, a
study comparing the cultural contexts of Finland and Italy demonstrated the importance of child-friendly
neighborhood spaces, particularly the existence of settings that allow outdoor playing (Haikkola, Pacilli, Horelli, &
Prezza, 2007). Child-care policies and environment (Trost, Stewart, Ward, & Senso, 2010) and childrens physical
activity after school in green space (Wheeler, Cooper, Page, & Russell, 2010) have also been main topics of recent
research with proximal social and physical variables been studied (e.g., Aarts et al., 2010).
A considerable portion of recent studies have focused on neighborhood variables, such as open and green
spaces, and their effect on physical health. Both objective and subjective assessments (e.g., Seaman, Jones, &
Ellaway, 2010) have been used to understand why people in urban areas choose to use, or not use, local public
Page 14 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
green space. Studies have been giving attention to children and have investigated associations between observed
built environmental characteristics and childrens walking and cycling behaviors (e.g., de Vries et al., 2010).
(p. 235) In relation to objective and subjective/perceived evaluations of green and open spaces, there seems to
be a lack of agreement in the literaturesuggesting that these measures are capturing different aspects of
neighborhood greenness (Leslie et al., 2010). Recent efforts have been targeted to objective measurements of
specific diseases (as derived from electronic medical records of general practitioners) and how they are related to
green space (Maas et al., 2009b) and to differences in the perceptions and evaluations of urban green areas in
relation to peoples attitudes and values toward human-nature relationship (Bonnes, Passafaro, & Carrus, 2010).
Moreover, green areas is one of the 19 PREQIs (perceived residential environment quality indicators) identified by
Bonaiuto et al. (1999, 2003, 2006) and Fornara et al. (2010a, 2010b), showing therefore that inhabitants focus on
both the amount and the maintenance and accessibility of the green areas located in ones own neighborhood. In
fact, green areas presence, perceived availability, and maintenance index are also among the best predictors of
NA among PREQIs (Bonaiuto et al., 1999). However, subjectively measured general areas quality does not seem to
relate with objectively measured specific green quality (e.g., Bonnes & Bonaiuto, 1995) because of different foci in
the measures. Further research is needed to understand which objective measures of green spaces quality better
relate with peoples perceptions of quality of green spaces. As previously mentioned, a persons uses and
activities in the residential neighborhood are related to her or his own activities in other places (e.g., the periphery
and the city center) and therefore a places uses are always part of a broader multi-place pragmatics (e.g., Bonnes
et al., 1990; Bonaiuto & Bonnes, 1996; Bonaiuto & Bonnes, 2002).
Outdoor Spaces
Research on neighborhood outdoor spaces has addressed specific environmental attributes, such as
attractiveness (which is related to the presence of natural features and environments), street connectivity, access
to outdoor recreational facilities, and access to places of interest (Sugiyama et al., 2009), demonstrating that these
factors are related to recreational physical activity. The perceived attractiveness of streets for walking has also
been examined and showed that tidiness of the street, its scenic value, and the presence of activity or other
people along the street contributed to walking behavior (Borst et al., 2008). In general, there are few studies
concentrating on street settingsspecifically for green spaces and outdoor activities (Alves, under review).
Specific configurations of park environments have been examined in relation to physical activity (e.g., Floyd et al.,
2008) by means of direct observation. Also, assessment of physical activity in public parks has been directed to
the study of outdoor play areas and their association with physical activity for children (Sugiyama et al., 2010).
Availability of neighborhood parks has been associated with higher participation in active sports, and greater green
space coverage has been associated with reporting higher indices of physical activity (Boone-Heinonena,
Casanova, Richardson, & Gordon-Larsena, 2010).
Outdoor spaces at larger scales, such as woods, have been studied in relation to emotional and physical stress.
For instance, Hartig et al. (2003) compared participants taking a walk in the woods versus those taking an urban
walk and found lower levels of stress in the nature-related walk. Also, Staas and Hartig (2003) tested social context
and the need for psychological restoration by simulating a walk through a forest and a walk through an urban
center. They found that fatigue increased preference for the natural over the urban environment.
Research has revealed which aspects of neighborhood outdoor spaces affect levels of physical activity and other
outdoor activities, such as walking (e.g., Pikora et al., 2006). Specific factors in the neighborhood settingsuch as
the neighborhood walkability (Saelens et al., 2003), level of traffic in the neighborhood, and the type of urban
design (e.g., pedestrian-friendly design; e.g., Cervero & Kockelman, 1997)also exert an influence on patterns of
physical activity (Appleyard, 1981; Strach et al., 2007). Neighborhood socioeconomic status (van Lenthe et al.,
2005) is also associated with the levels of physical activity, such as walking, with deprived neighborhoods offering
fewer chances for independent mobility for older people. Walking, for instance, can be used by people in diverse
settings and the promotion of regular physical activity can be a main nonpharmaceutical measure toward a
preventive approach for a successful ageing (Vogel et al., 2009).
City
Page 15 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
Here the relevance of residential green areas and outdoor spaces refers to the fact that a city can have different
levels of outdoor and green areas available for its citizens. This can have a range of possible effects, from
increase in health indices of, and (p. 236) well-being activities carried out by, the local population, to pollution
decrease; from attraction toward tourism to maintenance of local citizenship and contrast to city shrinkage. Cities
become differentiated among more and less desirable residential places according to their being more or less
green. This started from the degree of green and outdoor areas, as a first evidence of their sustainability, and is
moving to their capacity of hosting a number of sustainability activities and tools (from proper recycling, to green
mobility, to intensive use of alternative energies sources, etc.).
Home
The immediate home environment represents a major living space, and issues of segregation have been studied in
relation to older and younger adults. Based on the understanding that older people in such neighborhoods are
prone to different types of exclusion and exposed to different stressors (e.g., reduced material resources, lack of
safety), the question arises of the degree to which outdoor spaces can mitigate these negative effects and
ameliorate their quality of life. It also must be remembered that this trend toward a home confinement system of
place activities, which especially characterizes the older population, is peculiar to a large city compared to a small
city (Bonaiuto & Bonnes, 1996, Bonaiuto & Bonnes, 2002).
Research by Kuo (2001) in the US context of public housing has revealed that exposure and activities in green
spaces may help people cope with major life eventsincluding stressors related to demands of living in
impoverished neighborhoods, which may include poverty and violence and bringing up children under stressful
conditions. With the aim of testing the attention restoration theory in the context of life demands and coping
strategies, the author demonstrated that residents who had some nearby vegetation were more effective in
managing major life issues than residents living in barren environments. Higher scores in the measure of attention
were also achieved for those in greener settings, showing that contact with natural environments restored
individuals from depleted attention resources and helped them cope with major life issues. The explanation has
been that exposure to green surroundings refreshes the ability to concentrate, leading to greater effectiveness at
coping with major life issues. Goffmans (1959) concepts of frontstage and backstage regions have been used
to analyze the relationship between adolescents use of inside and outside spaces (Abbott-Chapman & Robertson,
2009). Abbott-Chapman and Robertson suggested that adolescent preferences for home-related spaces, including
their own bedroom as well as outdoor spaces, may be a way to redefine the boundaries of private spaces and face
intergenerational power relationships.
Page 16 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
Neighborhood
A recent literature review on how residential environments may affect health and contribute to social and
race/ethnic inequalities in health (with emphasis on obesity and depression) shows how studies have been divided
into those that use census proxies and studies that directly measure neighborhood attributes using a variety of
methods (Diez Roux & Mair, 2010). When looking at the features (p. 237) of the social environmentfor example,
safety/violence, social cohesion and related constructs, and measures of disorderthe authors show that the
evidence linking neighborhood social environments to health is present for mental health outcomes (specifically
depression). In a recent analysis, a study showed that lower levels of social cohesion and aesthetic quality and
higher levels of violence were associated with higher levels of depressive symptoms in a large sample of adults
(Mair et al., 2009). When addressing residential satisfaction, Checa and Arjona (2010) have demonstrated that
run-down area, conflictive inter-ethnic relationships, isolated location, low quality construction, shops,
and crime predicted residential dissatisfaction among the inhabitants (immigrants and Spanish-born) of El Puche,
a neighborhood on the outskirts of the city of Almeria in Spain.
A major factor in the aggregation-segregation literature is the association between deprived neighborhoods with
aging. Aging in place may be associated with several risks that are tied to the physical structure of deprived
settings, such as poor transportation and housing, high crime rates, and consequent reduced safety and the loss
of local amenities and serviceswhich can impair the management of everyday activities, such as going outdoors.
It is estimated that the majority of older people will continue to live in the community well into later life. Thus the
quality of the neighborhood environment and how it is perceived may play a major role in successful aging and in
delaying the chances of institutionalization (Baltes & Carstensen, 1996).
Evans (2004) studied the association between income inequalities and development, particularly in childhood, to
examine why childhood poverty is so harmful. He has pointed to the role of exposure to multiple stressful
conditions (e.g., counting the number of physical or psychosocial risks to which a child has been exposed) to
evaluate cumulative risk and its health consequences in adulthood (e.g., Evans & Marcynyszyn, 2004). For
example, Wells et al. (2010) showed that early childhood poverty predicted obesity in young adulthood. Social and
physical risk factors served as a mediator of the relationship with family turmoil, violence, child separation from
family, density noise, and housing quality acting as mediators of the link between poverty and obesity. A life course
approach has been used to explain that children exposed to multiple risk factors tend to become overweight
adults. The life course approach represents a major contribution of this literature in the sense that it not only
elucidates the association between risk exposure and obesity, but also points to key environmental attributes
contributing to this relationship.
These results show that low-income children are exposed to risk factors, putting much pressure on their adaptive
abilities and thus generating stress, which Evans described, to enhance levels of chronic (and toxic) stress within
the body (e.g., obesity problems and lower academic achievement). The findings have major implications for the
planning of health-related strategies: for example, to target the mediating role of risk factors, such as family turmoil
and violence. A key point derived from the research by Evans and colleagues is that in disadvantaged residential
settings, individuals are exposed to more than one risk factor at a time. This exposure to multiple stressors has
major negative physical and psychological consequences. That is, chaotic environmental systems, which are
characterized by lack of structure and predictability in everyday activities in daily life, lead to major decrements in
health and psychological well-being. Everyday activities thus may be one key element to be targeted in future
interventions and health-related strategies.
Recent research (Young, LaMontagne, Dietrich, & Wells, 2012) has demonstrated that socioeconomic status (i.e.,
participants from lower SES families) is associated with negative attitudes (i.e., negative inferential style and
ruminative thinking style). It may be that negative life events experienced in childhood will contribute to
dysfunctional developments when individuals face stressful and negative situations. Moreover, researches show
also that low socioeconomic status is associated not only with lower objectively assessed residential conditions but
also with lower perceived quality of residential conditions (e.g., for crowding perception, Bonnes, see Bonaiuto, &
Ercolani, 1991).
Outdoor Spaces
Do outdoor/green spaces mitigate the experience of multiple deprivation? There are two mechanisms to worsen
Page 17 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
health: one through psycho-physiological stress and another through unhealthy means of coping with stress.
Doing activities in outdoor/green spaces may be a healthy coping strategy against major life stresses.
When studying outdoor spaces in deprived areas and trying to prioritize interventions for maximum benefit, a main
question to be asked is the extent to which open and green spaces help ameliorate and decrease stress related to
deprivation. Evidence shows that older people living in deprived areas are (p. 238) at a higher risk of being
affected by poor mental and physical health (Lang et al., 2008). Since they are long-term residents of areas high in
social and environmental stressors, they are also directly confronted with negative neighborhood factors.
Scharf et al. (2003) have studied the characteristics of poverty and its impact on the daily life of older people in the
UK context. The results of this study showed that the experience of multiple exclusion was significantly linked to
age and ethnicity. People age 75 and over were more likely to be excluded than those age 60 to 74. Of the
respondents who were excluded on the material dimension, 58% were also excluded from social relations. Older
people who feel cut off from their surroundings are more likely to experience limitations in their informal
relationships than those who perceive their neighborhood more favorably.
A key factor to be encouraged in old age is maintenance of independence (Baltes & Carstensen, 1996). Evidence
has shown that QOL is reduced by limitations in mobility and difficulties with everyday activities (Netuveli et al.,
2006) Situations of reduced independence (Lang et al., 2008), such as inability to participate in activities and
social networks, loss of maintenance of usual routines, and forced reliance on other people, may be aggravated in
the context of multiple deprivation. Different kinds of disadvantage can combine to exclude older people in
deprived neighborhoods, including relying on income from state benefits and being exposed to higher crime rates,
air pollution (associated with fewer green spaces), and an accident-prone residential setting. However, despite the
poor living conditions, some older people may have resided in these areas for an entire life and may hold a sense
of attachment to their neighborhoods (Kearns & Parkes, 2003).
Notwithstanding the restricted social and environmental conditions of these places, a percentage of older people in
the United Kingdom will spend the rest of their lives in these places. The question raised is how to create more
supportive environments to encourage higher levels of mobility and help people undertake daily activities and
projects.
Research has revealed some key environmental factors that can be used to improve situations of independence
for an older population (e.g., Lord, Desprs, & Ramadier, 2011;). Exposure to open and green spaces has been
associated with increased social networks, increased physical activity, increased capacity to deal with major life
events such as poverty, and recovery of attentional resources that are depleted in conditions of extreme stress
(i.e., to achieve restorativeness): all common relevant factors for people living in deprived urban environments.
City
The dynamics of desegregation and re-segregation (Dixon, Durrheim, & Tredoux, 2011, p. 239) in residential
and urban spaces take different forms. According to Dixon, et al., (2008), segregation is part of a social system,
which includes micro-ecological scales of analysis and thus needs to be analyzed according to different scales.
Here the focus is on uncovering some of the physical features portrayed in segregation research that afford
opportunities for increased sustained social relations and aim to decrease discrimination and inequality.
Based on his work in post-apartheid South Africa, Dixon, Durrheim, and Tredoux (2011) observed that urban
design reflected in different social-spatial arrangements can either encourage or restrict social integration. In this
sense, environmental psychology has a fundamental role to help overcome racial segregation as it can identify
person-environment relationships and environmental features that may promote racial social integration. The
analysis of ordinary peoples perceptions and evaluations and everyday patterns of social contact and isolation
is fundamental to understand the different meanings of desegregation in everyday contexts, such as suburbs
(Cape Town in Dixon et al.s research), public seating areas, leisure spaces, bars, clubs, cafeterias, and so on.
The processes of segregation have been studied in relation to residential and urban settings. Everyday settings
and activities have been researched to understand lived realities of contact and separation (Clack, Dixon, &
Tredoux, 2005, p. 13). For example, Clack, Dixon, and Tredoux (2005) have investigated segregation in relation to
its micro-ecological process by observing social-spatial patterns of seating in a cafeteria among university
Page 18 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
students from a university in northwestern England. The results showed that segregation is revealed in the socialspatial organization of mundane activities, such as seating and eating. The authors found that most individuals of
white and Asian descent sat in units with members of their own ethnic group. These two groups were also found in
disproportion in different areas in the cafeteria. One conclusion of this study is that even though the cafeteria
served a diverse clientele, its everyday context was marked by segregation, such as convergence of groups in a
specific area of the cafeteria. An important aspect of (p. 239) this research is the focus on micro-ecological
processes and the understanding that segregation takes place in settings where proximity and co-presence are
expected and where informal relationships are taking place.
Page 19 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
elements that collectively generate a unique set of associations with the place in the public mind (Kavaratzis,
2005).
The basic argument is that it is through perceptions and related images that people come to understand a place or
a city (similar to more traditional image-based approaches, e.g., Lynch, 1960). For cities, a process takes place in
the formation of (p. 240) images that is similar to that of other social entities, such as products or corporations,
managed as brands. These arguments are rooted in the assumption that in essence, people understand cities in
the same way as brands. Extending this assumption raises the argument that the best way to attempt to influence
perceptions and images about cities must be similar to the way that businesses have been successfully attempting
the same for their products, namely branding. The above assumptions are, of course, subject to scrutiny as is
found in the academic literature on place and city branding.
According to Klingmann (2007), branding can be seen in positive and negative terms. It is negative when it is a
mere culture of copy. However, it can be seen as positive and a catalyst for cultural and economic
transformation when it puts together architecture, economics, sustainable strategies, and QOL in an attempt to help
people and places regain self-sufficiency (for a similar view, see also Florida, 2002).
Neighborhood
Brand or reputation at the level of residential neighborhood is a greatly under-researched topic. This contrast with
commonsense experience where our information search, judgments, and actions (in terms of approaching or
avoiding a certain environment) are greatly affected by a neighborhoods being famous or infamous on the basis of
either our own direct experiences, or of our acquaintances reported direct and indirect experiences, or of news
and guides reported direct and mediated experiences. Moreover, very tangible consequences arise from a
neighborhood reputation, such as housing prices on the market, investments, tourism, and so on; as well as
consequences in terms of residents behaviors (Parmentier, van Ham, & Bolt, 2007).
A typology of marketing themes is usually used to change the image of a neighborhood. Quite often, the physical
environment is used to build a specific brand identity of the urban neighborhood. For instance, branding attempts
include major cultural facilities and entertainment complexes, public art installations, renovated historic areas, and
ethnic neighborhoods to represent an attempt to revitalize the image of the entire city. Neighborhood marketing
and branding is part of the local governments strategy to present a positive image of the local place and
neighborhood. This is done with the objective of attracting potential investors, tourists, and residentsthat is, the
various stakeholders. It is often the case that municipalities are engaged in what Pine and Gilmore (1999) called
experience economy. Similar to the brand of many companies in the global market, which have created a
powerful image around their products or services using logos, mottos, jingles, and so on, municipalities also try to
create an experience and to brand their cities and neighborhoods in a competitive real estate market. The
presentation of a positive image, brand, or reputation of a place can bring economic advantages but can as well
distract the use of common goods away from the interests of the local community.
Urban design and planning have become even more intertwined with branding and imaging (Vale & Warner, 2001).
Authors have referred to staging of experiences (Grodach, 2009) and symbolic economy (Zukin, 1995) to
define the manipulation of a neighborhood image. Many cities also promote their manicured suburban
neighborhoods. For instance, the San Lorenzo quartiere in Rome is trying to emerge as a more attractive place,
particularly for young people, where the presence of places to go out, such as restaurants, cafs, and recreationrelated venues may be a way to put behind the declined industrial past of the district. For example, an antique
chocolate factory has been enriched by an attractive caf and restaurant, behind the still active chocolate factory.
Additional research is needed in this area to find out what are the marketing images of some urban neighborhoods,
how they are used to attract specific groups of people, and what images of QOL they try to depict or hide.
City
Branding is a holistic process that affects settings and peoples perceptions, activities, and relations with others.
Landmarks to communicate a citys image are constructed, especially to attract tourists and business (and there
have been very good examples in recent decades, such as the Guggenheim Museum in the city of Bilbao in Spain).
However, the extent to which residents recognize and identify themselves with the image transferred is questioned.
Page 20 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
The subfield of place management and marketing has emerged in the past decade and recognizes satisfaction with
a place as important. Cities and municipalities try to bring together a range of images into a singular, coherent
messageor brand. The goal is to increase the symbolic and economic value of their urban spaces and
economies (Mommaas, 2002) and to retain tourists, residents, and businesses. Several branding packing and
branding practices are used to revitalize the image of a city. It is important to study the ways city branding is used,
as these practices play a fundamental role in peoples perception (p. 241) of urban places and in what type of
activities people would subsequently engage in there.
The discussion also addresses the role of the local community and the social responsibility behind fostering the
construction of place brands. Grodach (2009) did an analysis and inventory of the images displayed on the official
city and visitors bureau websites in the United States. He showed that picturesque built environments on city sites
potentially reflect local governments concerns with marketing an attractive quality of life to new and existing
residents.
Associated with the emphasis on cities as places to play or to engage in unique experiences is the tendency to
downplay cities as sites of work. An interesting result is that the portrayal of scenes of everyday lifesuch as
those involving workplacesis usually avoided in these websites. Grodach said that when cities claim to portray
everyday life, they focus on iconic images such as San Franciscos homepage, which features pristine Victorian
houses, cable cars, and the Golden Gate Bridge under the heading images of life in San Francisco (p. 187).
Many cities have tried to change or overcome negative images and perceptions of urban decline and enhance
perception of a rich multicultural environment. For instance, Bilbao has used the Guggenheim Museum as an urban
icon to promote the image of the city characterized by an image of negative social and economic elements. The
use of underutilized areas to promote diversity of activities and attract different groups of people has been
illustrated in Copenhagen, with its large pedestrian area and good paths and locations for cycling: the city is
usually associated with sustainable transport and healthy lifestyle (Gehl & Hook, 2005; Gehl, 1996).
The local population is usually a salient target audience for brand construction (Lindstedt, 2011). Thus the types of
images that are featured as well as the ones that are not featured in branding campaigns are very important for
planners and designers. They can get a better understanding of how people (outsiders and insiders alike) perceive
and experience their neighborhoods, local spaces, and cities. Place branding is a political process that is carried
out through policy agendas, as branding also means to communicate and target images of places in the continuum
of past, present, and future of places. The aim of place branding to control these representations is present in the
literature (e.g., Bellini, Loffredo, & Pasquinelli, 2010). Rizzi and Dioli (2010) pointed to some evidence in measuring
the effects of place marketing. For instance, these authors showed that Italian cities such as Turin and Genoa have
improved their appeal and changed their look by taking advantage of events hosting and by conceiving a new
image to communicate.
An issue that was mentioned as crucial more than 20 years ago for future reputation research was the dimensions
of reputation (e.g., Emler, 1990, p. 190). This is central information to be obtained to promote any area of
research about reputation and, indeed, some of these areas devoted a high effort in identifying the pillars of
reputation. Recently, contributions started to appear addressing the issue of identifying and measuring a countrys
or a citys reputation features. For example, such an approach has been developed by the Reputation Institute
(e.g., Fombrun & van Riel, 2004) to measure a countrys reputation. Though the conceptual and methodological
assumptions are basically the same of the corporate Rep Trak, used to measure a corporate reputation, the
identified dimensions are specific to the peculiarity of this social agent or entity: the country. This highlights that
even using the same approach, the reputation dimensions are different for different social agents (in that case,
moving from the corporate to the national level). Within the geographical realm, other models have been
developed for addressing and measuring city branding. Although this has not been explicitly conceptualized in
terms of reputation, it is a field that is evolving along very similar lines, aiming at tapping conceptual and
methodological features describing a citys evaluations from the perspectives of several stakeholders with
references to the pragmatic effects that a place exerts on its stakeholders.
One of the most well-known examples systematically applied to a geographical entity is the model proposed by
Anholt (2007, 2010). In 1996 he used the expression nation branding and then developedin collaboration with
GfK (Growth for Knowledge)the Anholt-GfK Roper Nations Brands Index and, since 2005, the Anholt-GfK Roper
City Brands Index (CBI). The CBI has six dimensions: Presence, based on the citys international status and
Page 21 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
standing and the global familiarity/knowledge of the city. It also measures the citys global contribution in science,
culture and governance. Place explores peoples perceptions about the physical aspect of each city in terms of
pleasantness of climate, cleanliness of environment, and attractiveness of buildings and parks. Prerequisites
determines how people perceive the basic qualities of the citywhether they are satisfactory, affordable, and
accommodatingas (p. 242) well as the standard of public amenities, such as schools, hospitals, transportation,
and sports facilities. People reveals whether the inhabitants of the city are perceived as warm and welcoming,
whether respondents think it would be easy for them to find and fit into a community that shares their language and
culture, and whether they would feel safe. Pulse measures the perception that there are interesting things to fill
free time with and how exciting the city is perceived to be in regard to new things to discover. Potential measures
the perception of economic and educational opportunities within the city, such as how easy it might be to find a job
and whether it is a good place to do business or pursue a higher education. This system is based on 40 items and
a panel of 20,000 people living in 20 different countries, and allows us to rank the main 50 metropolises in the
world, but apparently pays little or no attention to the smaller scale urban contexts.
Conclusion
The present chapter proposes a general ecological, transactional, and systemic model to frame the study of all
residential places, from personal room, to home, neighborhood, outdoor places, and city, up to the country. The
model focuses on person-environment transactions emphasizing the role of activities through which affordances
are realized, at several ecological levels. Such transactions generate different degrees of environmental fit or misfit
that impact the general quality of life of the person. Evidences for such a model are presented with a preferential
emphasis on the residential neighborhood, but also with reference to other residential places such as home,
outdoor spaces, and city. The processes addressed in this chapter illustrate the components of the conceptual
model (Figure 13.1), which include perception, evaluation, and satisfaction with neighborhood spaces; uses and
activities in the residential place, particularly in relation to health and well-being; social segregation and
aggregation between individuals and groups; and branding and reputation of residential places. The examination of
these different topics illustrates the increasing importance of ecological factors in the study of residential spaces.
Although many of these processes have been investigated, thus allowing the accumulation of knowledge, for
example, in terms of measurement tools and established relationships among variables, there are a number of
important processes still to be researched: the following are 12 recommendations.
Future Directions
1. Need for innovative methodologies, integrating different strategies.
2. Need for more standard valid and reliable measurement tools.
3. More behavioral and observational data.
4. More mediation and moderation analyses.
5. Need for an integrated definition of residential places quality, using both subjective and objective measures
and comparing these measures to integrate them in one system.
6. Need to enhance the knowledge and methodologies transfers from research to policy: to develop
evidence-based residential design and to increase post-occupancy evaluation.
7. Using more new technologies for integrating different kinds of data and making social research data more
available to the laypeople or to other scientists and experts, to increase the diffusion of good-quality
environmental psychology knowledge on residential places and to increase the probability that it can be used
in design and political decision-making over residential place issues.
8. Emphasis on complex social aspects of peoples interaction in and with residential places, linked to multifactorial and cumulative factors models.
9. Exploration of new residential hybrid places: that is, public places people use for carrying out residential
activities (e.g., cafs or other places people can use for realizing traditional residential functions, such as emailing or reading as if they were at home).
10. Globalization and/or localization of residential places features and processes.
11. Longitudinal frameworks and time-related analysis as crucial to understand the dynamic relationship of
peoples experiences of their residential and neighborhood spaces.
12. Participatory planning strategies are necessary to create a supportive infrastructure for everyday life.
Page 22 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
Further research on participatory planning can involve issues of urban time policies, therefore taking always
into account not only the spatial dimension but also the time dimension involved in peoples uses and
activities in residential neighborhood environments.
Acknowledgments
The authors are grateful to Professor Mirilia Bonnes for her helpful comments on draft versions of this chapter. They
also would like to thank Barrett Gaylord for the English review.
(p. 243) The first author would like to thank the Sapienza University of Rome 2010 grant City Reputation:
Multidimensional Offer and Stakeholder Demands and 2011 grant City Reputation: Development of Measurement
Indicators in partial support of his work on this chapter.
The second author would like to thank the Royal Society of Edinburgh for partially supporting her work on this
chapter through the RSE Research Award in the Arts and Humanities.
References
Aarts, M-J., Wendel-Vos, W., van Oers, H. A. M., van de Goor, I. A. M., & Schuit, A. J. (2010). Environmental
determinants of outdoor play in children: A large-scale cross-sectional study. American Journal of Preventive
Medicine, 39(3), 212219.
Abbott-Chapman, J., & Robertson, M. (2009). Adolescents favourite places: Redefining the boundaries between
private and public space. Space and Culture, 12(4), 419434.
Aiello, A., & Bonaiuto, M. (2003). Rhetorical approach and discursive psychology: The study of environmental
discourse. In M. Bonnes, T. Lee, & M. Bonaiuto (Eds.), Psychological theories for environmental issues (pp. 235
270). Aldershot, UK: Ashgate.
Altman, I., & Ginat, J. (1992). Place attachment: How many meanings? In A. Matzis & C. Karaletson (Eds.), Socioenvironmental metamorphoses: Builtscape, landscape, ethnoscape, Euroscape. Proceedings of the 12th Biennial
Conference of the IAPS (Vol. 5, pp. 125131). Thessaloniki, Greece: Aristotle University of Thessaloniki.
Altman, I., & Rogoff, B. (1987). World views in psychology: Trait, interactional, organismic, and transactional
perspectives. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.), Handbook of environmental psychology (Vol. 1, pp. 740). New York:
Wiley.
Alves, S. (in press). Toward a situated understanding of peoples interaction with outdoor spaces. In S. Ahrentzen,
C. Desprs, & B. Schermer (Eds.), Blurring boundaries, building bridges: The legacy of the Milwaukee School in
environment-behavior studies. Milwaukee: University of Wisconsin-Milwaukee, School of Architecture and Urban
Planning.
Alves, S. (2011). Everyday life in the context of outdoor spaces for older people. Psyecology, 2(3), 299307.
Alves, S., Aspinall, P. A., Ward Thompson, C., Sugiyama, T., Brice, R., & Vickers, A. (2008). Preferences of older
people for environmental attributes of local open space. Facilities, 26(11/12), 433453.
Amrigo, M., & Aragons, J. I. (1997). A theoretical and methodological approach to the study of residential
satisfaction. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 17, 4757.
Anholt, S. (2007).Competitive identity: The new brand management for nations, cities, and regions. Houndmills,
Basingstoke, Hampshire, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.
Anholt, S. (2010). Places: Identity, image, and reputation. Houndmills, Basingstoke, Hampshire, UK: Palgrave
Macmillan.
Appleyard D. (1981). Livable streets. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.
Page 23 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
Baltes, M. M., & Carstensen, L. L. (1996). The process of successful ageing. Ageing and Society, 16, 397422.
Barker, R. G. (1968). Ecological psychology: Concepts and methods for studying the environment of human
behavior. Palo Alto, CA: Stanford University Press.
Becker, F., Bonaiuto, M., Bilotta, E., & Bonnes, M. (2011). Integrated healthscape strategies: An ecological
approach to evidence-based design. Health Environments Research and Design Journal (HERD), 4, 114129.
Belloni, C. M. (1984). Il tempo della citt. Milan, Italy: Angeli.
Bellini, N., A. Loffredo and Pasquinelli, C. (2010). Managing otherness: the political economy of place images in the
case of Tuscany. In G. Ashworth & M. Kavaratzis (Eds.), Towards effective place brand management. Branding
European cities and regions (pp. 89116). Cheltenham: Edward Elgar.
Benson, J. F. (1981). Animal communities in an urban environment. Landscape Research, 6, 811.
Berto, R. (2005). Exposure to restorative environments helps restore attentional capacity. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 25(3), 249259.
Bilotta, E., Bonaiuto, M., & Bonnes, M. (2010). The ecology of perception of safety in urban environment: The case
of the city of Rome. In V. Mrowinsky, M. Kyrios, & N. Voudouris (Eds.), 27th International Congress of Applied
Psychology July 1116, 2010, Melbourne, Australia, Abstracts of the 27th International Congress of Applied
Psychology (pp. 15901591). Melbourne: Australian Psychological Society.
Bjrk, J., et al. (2008). Recreational values of the natural environment in relation to neighbourhood satisfaction,
physical activity, obesity, and wellbeing. Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 62:e2.
doi:10.1136/jech.2007.062414
Bonaiuto, M. (2004). Residential satisfaction and perceived urban quality. In C. Spielberger (Ed.), Encyclopedia of
applied psychology (Vol. 3, pp. 267272). Oxford, UK: Elsevier Academic Press.
Bonaiuto, M., Aiello, A., Perugini, M., Bonnes, M., & Ercolani, A. P. (1999). Multidimensional perception of residential
environment quality and neighbourhood attachment in the urban environment. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 19, 331352.
Bonaiuto, M., Bilotta, E., Stolfa, A. (2010). Feng shui and environmental psychology: A critical comparison. Journal
of Architectural and Planning Research, 27(1), 2334.
Bonaiuto, M., & Bonnes, M. (1996). Multi-place analysis of the urban environment: A comparison between a large
and a small Italian city. Environment and Behavior, 28, 699747.
Bonaiuto, M., & Bonnes, M. (2002). Residential satisfaction in the urban environment within the UNESCO-MAB Rome
Project. In J. I. Aragons, G. Francescato, & T. Grling (Eds.), Residential environments: Choice, satisfaction, and
behavior (pp. 101133). Westport, CT: Bergin & Garvey.
Bonaiuto, M., Bonnes, M., & Continisio, M. (2004). Neighborhood evaluation within a multi-place perspective on
urban activities. Environment and Behavior, 36, 4169.
Bonaiuto, M., Bonnes, M., Nenci, A. M., & Carrus, G. (Eds.). (2011). Urban diversitiesEnvironmental and social
issues. Gttingen, Germany: Hogrefe.
Bonaiuto, M., Fornara, F., & Bonnes, M. (2003). Indexes of perceived residential environment quality and
neighbourhood attachment in urban environments: A confirmation study on the city of Rome. Landscape and Urban
Planning, 65, 4152.
Bonaiuto, M., Fornara, F., & Bonnes, M. (2006). Perceived residential environment quality in middle- and lowextension Italian cities. Revue Europenne de Psychologie AppliqueEuropean Review of Applied Psychology,
56, 2334.
Bonnes, M., & Bonaiuto, M. (1995). Expert and layperson evaluation of urban environmental quality: The natural
Page 24 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
(p. 244) versus the built environment. In Y. Guerrier, N. Alexander, J. Chase, & M. OBrien (Eds.), Values and
the environment: A social science perspective (pp. 151163). New York: Wiley.
Bonnes, M., & Bonaiuto, M. (2002). Environmental psychology: From spatial physical environment to sustainable
development. In R. Bechtel & A. Churchman (Eds.), Physical environment of environmental psychology (pp. 607
628). New York: Wiley.
Bonnes, M., Bonaiuto, M., Aiello, A., Perugini, M., & Ercolani, A. P. (1997). A transactional perspective on residential
satisfaction. In C. Desprs & D. Pich (Eds.), Housing surveys: Advances in theory and methods (pp. 7599).
Qubec, Canada: CRAD Universit Laval.
Bonnes, M., Bonaiuto, M., & Ercolani, A. P. (1991). Crowding and residential satisfaction in the urban environment: A
contextual approach. Environment and Behavior, 23(5), 531552.
Bonnes, M., Bonaiuto, M., Ercolani, A. P., & De Rosa, A. M. (1991). Residential satisfaction in the big city: A
transactional-contextual study. In M. Bonnes (Ed.), UNESCO programme on man and biosphere, MAB Italia
Project 11 urban ecology applied to the city of Rome, Progress Report No. 4 (pp. 127148). Rome: MAB e Istituto
psicologia del C.N.R.
Bonnes, M., Bonaiuto, M., Fornara, F., & Bilotta, E. (2009). Environmental psychology and architecture for health
care design. In R. Del Nord (Ed.), The culture for the future of healthcare architecture (pp. 3541). Proceedings of
the 28th International Public Health Seminar. Firenze, Italy: AlineaEditrice.
Bonnes, M., Carrus, G., Bonaiuto, M., Fornara, F., & Passafaro, P. (2004). Inhabitants environmental perceptions in
the city of Rome within the framework for urban biosphere reserves of the UNESCO Programme on Man and
Biosphere. Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences, 1023, 175186.
Bonnes, M., Mannetti, L., Secchiaroli, G., & Tanucci, G. (1990). The city as a multi-place system: An analysis of
people-urban environment transactions. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 10, 3765.
Bonnes, M., Passafaro, P., Carrus, G. (2010). The ambivalence of attitudes toward urban green areas: Between
proenvironmental worldviews and daily residential experience. Environment and Behavior, 43(2), 207232.
Bonnes, M., & Secchiaroli, G. (1995). Environmental psychology: A psycho-social introduction. (C. Montagna,
Trans.). London: Sage. (Original published 1992).
Boone-Heinonena, J., Casanova, K., Richardson, A. S., & Gordon-Larsena, P. (2010). Where can they play?
Outdoor spaces and physical activity among adolescents in U.S. urbanized areas. Preventive Medicine, 51(34),
295298.
Borst, H. C. (2009). Influence of environmental street characteristics on walking route choice of elderly people.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 29(4), 477484.
Bronfenbrenner, U. (1979). The experimental ecology of human development. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University
Press.
Canter, D. (1977). The psychology of place. London: Architectural Press.
Canter, D. (1986). Putting situations in their place: Foundations for a bridge between social and environmental
psychology. In A. Furnham (Ed.), Social behaviour in context (pp. 208239). London: Allyn & Bacon.
Canter, D. (1988). Action and place: An existential dialectic. In D. Canter, M. Krampen, & D. Stea (Eds.),
Ethnoscapes: Environmental perspectives (Vol. 1, pp. 118). Aldershot, UK: Gower.
Canter, D. (1991). Understanding, assessing, and acting in places: Is an integrative framework possible? In T.
Grling & G. W. Evans (Eds.), Environment, cognition, and action: An integrated approach (pp. 191209). New
York: Oxford University Press.
Canter, D. (1997). The facets of place. In G.T. Moore & R. W. Marans (Eds.), Advances in environment, behavior,
and design: Toward the integration of theory, methods, research, and utilization (pp. 109147). New York:
Page 25 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
Plenum.
Castonguay, G., & Jutras, S. (2009). Childrens appreciation of outdoor places in a poor neighborhood. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 29(1), 101109.
Castro, P. (2006). Applying social psychology to the study of environmental concern and environmental
worldviews: Contributions from the social representations approach. Journal of Community and Applied Social
Psychology, 16, 247266.
Cervero, R., & Kockelman, K. M. (1997). Travel demand and the 3Ds: density, diversity, and design. Transportation
Research-Part D, 2, 199219.
Checa, J-C., and Arjona, . (2010). Residential satisfaction in a context of urban exclusion. Psyecology, 1(2), 221
237.
Clack, B., Dixon, J., & Tredoux, C. (2005). Eating together apart: Patterns of segregation in a multi-ethnic cafeteria.
Journal of Community & Applied Social Psychology, 15, 116.
Costanza, R. et al. (2008) An integrative approach to quality of life measurement, research, and policy.
S.A.P.I.EN.S. (online), 1(1). Retrieved from http://sapiens.revues.org/169.
Craik, K. H., & Feimer, N. R. (1987). Environmental assessment. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.), Handbook of
environmental psychology (Vol. 2, pp. 891918). New York: Wiley.
de Vries, S. I., Hopman-Rock, M., Bakker, I., Hirasing, R. A., & van Mechelen, W. (2010). Built environmental
correlates of walking and cycling in Dutch urban children: Results from the SPACE Study. International Journal of
Environmental Research and Public Health, 7(5), 23092324.
Desprs, C., & Lord, S. (2005). The meaning of home for elderly suburbanites. In G. D. Rowles & H. Chaudhury
(Eds.), Home and identity in late life: International perspectives (pp. 317340). New York: Springer.
Lord, S., Desprs, C., & Ramadier, T. (2011). When mobility makes sense: A qualitative and longitudinal study of
the daily mobility of the elderly. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 31(1), 5261.
Diez Roux, A. V., & Mair, C. (2010). Neighborhoods and health. Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences,
1186, 125145.
Dixon, J., Durrheim, K., & Tredoux, C. (2011). From divided space to shared space: How might environmental
psychology help us to understand and overcome the tenacity of racial segregation? In M. Bonauito, M. Bonnes, A.
M. Nenci, & G. Carrus (Eds.), Urban diversitiesEnvironmental and social issues. Gttingen, Germany: Hogrefe.
Dixon, J., & Reicher, S. (1997). Intergroup contact and desegregation in the new South Africa. British Journal of
Social Psychology, 36, 361381.
Dixon, J., Tredoux, C., Durrheim, K., Finchilescu, G., & Clack, B. (2008). The inner citadels of the color line:
Mapping the microecology of racial segregation in everyday life spaces. Personality and Social Psychology
Compass, 2, 15471569.
Dixon, J. A. (2001). Contact and boundaries: Locating the social psychology of intergroup relations. Theory and
Psychology, 11, 587608.
Douglas, M. (1966). Purity and danger: An analysis of concepts of pollution and taboo. New York: Praeger.
(p. 245) Emler, N. (1990). A social psychology of reputation. European Review of Social Psychology, 1, 17119.
Evans, G. W. (2004). The environment of childhood poverty. American Psychologist, 59(2), 7792.
Evans, G. W., & Marcynyszyn, L.A. (2004). Environmental justice, cumulative environmental risk, and health among
low- and middle-income children in upstate New York. American Journal of Public Health, 94, 19421944.
Evans, G. W. et al. (2010). Crowding and cognitive development: The mediating role of maternal responsiveness
Page 26 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
among 36-month-old children. Environment and Behaviour, 42(1), 135148.
Florida, R. (2002). The rise of the creative classand how its transforming work, leisure, community, and
everyday life. New York: Basic Books.
Floyd, M. F., Spengler, J. O., Maddock, J. E., Gobster, P. H., & Suau, L. J. (2008). Park-based physical activity in
diverse communities of two U.S. cities: An observational study. American Journal of Preventive Medicine, 34(4),
299305.
Fombrun, C. J., & van Riel, C. B. M. (2004). Fame & fortune: How successful companies build winning reputations,
financial times. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
Fornara, F., Bonaiuto, M., & Bonnes, M. (2010a). Cross-validation of abbreviated Perceived Residential Environment
Quality (PREQ) and Neighbourhood Attachment (NA) Indicators. Environment and Behavior, 42, 171196.
Fornara, F., Bonaiuto, M., & Bonnes, M. (2010b). Indicatori di qualit urbana residenziale percepita (IQURP).
Manuale duso di scale psicometriche per scopi di riccerca e applicativi. Milan, Italy: Franco Angeli/Linea Test.
Fornara, F., Bonaiuto, M., Bonnes, M., Carrus, G., & Passafaro, P. (2007). Sustainability and residential satisfaction
within exclusive residential complexes in the city of Rome. In D. Shehayeb, H. Turgut Yildiz, & P. Kellett (Eds.),
Appropriate home: Can we design appropriate residential environments? (pp. 2940). Cairo: HBRCHousing &
Building National Research Centre. Also published in HBRC Journal, 3, 118128.
Gehl, J. (1996). Life between buildings: Using public space (6th ed.). Copenhagen: The Danish Architectural Press.
Gehl, J., & Hook, W. (2005). Our cities, ourselves: 10 principles for transport in urban life. Copenhagen: Institute of
Transportation and Development Policy.
Gibson, J. J. (1979). The ecological approach to visual perception. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
Goffman, E. (1959). The presentation of self in everyday life. New York: Doubleday Anchor.
Granich, J., Rosenberg, M., Knuiman, M., & Timperio, A. (2008).Understanding childrens sedentary behaviour: A
qualitative study of the family home environment. Health Education Research, 25(2), 199210.
Grodach, C. (2009). Urban branding: An analysis of city homepage imagery. Journal of Architectural and Planning
Research, 26(3), 181197.
Guest, A. M., & Lee, B. (1984). How urbanities define their neighborhoods. Population and Environment, 7, 3256.
Haikkola, L., Pacilli, M. G., Horelli, L., & Prezza, M. (2007). Interpretations of urban child-friendliness: A comparative
study of two neighborhoods in Helsinki and Rome. Children, Youth, and Environments 17(4), 319351.
Harris, P. B., Brown, B. B., & Werner, C. M. (1996). Privacy regulation and place attachment: Predicting attachments
to a student family housing facility. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 16, 287301.
Hartig, T., Evans, G. W., Jamner, L. D., Davis, D. S., & Grling, T. (2003). Tracking restoration in natural and urban
field settings. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 23(2), 109123.
Hartig, T., Mang, M., Evans, G. W. (1991). Restorative effects of natural environment experiences. Environment
and Behavior, 23(1), 326.
Heft, H. (2011). Affordances and the perception of landscape: An inquiry into environmental perception and
aesthetics. In C. Ward Thompson, P. Aspinall, & S. Bell (Eds.), Open space: People space 2: Innovative approaches
to researching landscape and health. Abingdon, UK: Routledge.
Higgins, E. T. (2005). Value from regulatory fit. Current Directions in Psychological Science, 14, 209213.
Horelli, L. (2010). Managing time and space of everyday life with a focus on health promotion. In A. Abdel-Hadi, M.
Tolba, & S. Soliman (Eds.), Environment, health, and sustainable development. Gttingen, Germany: Hogrefe.
Page 27 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
Kahana, E., Lovegreen, L., Kahana, B., & Kahana, M. (2003). Person, environment, and person-environment fit as
influences on residential satisfaction of elders. Environment and Behavior, 35, 434453.
Kaplan, R., & Kaplan, S. (1989). The experience of nature: A psychological perspective. New York: Cambridge
University Press.
Kaplan, S. (1983). A model of person environment compatibility. Environment and Behavior, 15, 311332.
Kavaratzis, M. (2005). Place branding: A review of trends and conceptual models. Marketing Review, 5(4), 329
342.
Kavaratzis, M., & Ashworth, G. (2008). Place marketing: How did we get here and where are we going? Journal of
Place Management and Development, 1(2), 150165.
Kearns, A., & Parkes, A. (2003). Living in and leaving poor neighbourhood conditions in England. Housing Studies,
18(6), 827851.
Klingmann, A. (2007). Brandscapes: Architecture in the experience economy. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Korpela, K. M., Yln, M., Tyrvinen, L., & Silvennoinen, H. (2010). Favorite green, waterside, and urban
environments, restorative experiences, and perceived health in Finland. Health Promotion International, 25(2),
200209.
Kuo, F. E. (2001). Coping with povertyImpacts of environment and attention in the inner city. Environment and
Behavior, 33, 534.
Kuo, F. E., Bacaicoa, M., Sullivan, W. C. (1998). Transforming inner-city landscapesTrees, sense of safety, and
preference. Environment and Behavior, 30, 2859.
Kuo, F. E., & Sullivan, W. C. (2001b). Environment and crime in the inner cityDoes vegetation reduce crime?
Environment and Behavior, 33, 343367.
Kuo, F. E., Sullivan,W. C., Coley, R. L., & Brunson, L. (1998). Fertile ground for community: Inner-city neighborhood
common spaces. American Journal of Community Psychology, 26, 823851.
Kweon, B. S., Sullivan, W. C., & Wiley, A. R. (1998). Green common spaces and the social integration of inner-city
older adults. Environment and Behavior, 30, 832858.
Kytt, M. (2002). Affordances of childrens environments in the context of cities, small towns, suburbs, and rural
villages in Finland and Belarus. Journal of Environmental Psychology 22(1/2), 109123.
Lafortezza, R., Carrus, G., Sanesia, G., & Davies, C. (2009). Benefits and well-being perceived by people visiting
green spaces in periods of heat stress. Urban Forestry & Urban Greening, 8(2), 97108.
(p. 246) Lang, I., et al. (2008). Neighborhood deprivation, individual socioeconomic status, and cognitive function
in older people: Analyses from the English longitudinal study of ageing. Journal of American Geriatric Society,
56(2), 191198.
Lang, J. (2011). City branding. In T. Banerjee & A. Loukaitou-Sideris (Eds.), Companion to urban design. New York:
Routledge.
Lawrence, R. J. (2002). Healthy residential environments. In R. B. Bechtel & A. Churchman (Eds.), Handbook of
environmental psychology (pp. 394412). New York: Wiley.
Lawrence, R. (2010). Housing and health promotion: Moving forward. International Journal of Public Health, 55,
145146.
Lawton, M. (1991). A multidimensional view of quality of life in frail elders. In J. Birren, J. Lubben, J. Rowe, & D.
Detchman (Eds.), The Concept and Measurement of Quality of Life in the Frail Elderly (pp. 327). San Diego, CA:
Academic Press.
Page 28 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
Lawton, M. P. (1980). Environment and aging. Los Angeles: Brooks/Cole.
Leslie, E., Sugiyama, T., Ierodiaconouc, D., & Kremera, P. (2010). Perceived and objectively measured greenness
of neighbourhoods: Are they measuring the same thing? Landscape and Urban Planning, 95(12), 2833.
Lewin, K. (1951). Field theory in social science: Selected theoretical papers. D. Cartwright, (Ed.). New York: Harper
& Row.
Lindstedt, J. (2011). Place, identity, and the socially responsible construction of place brands. Place Branding and
Public Diplomacy, 7(1), 4249.
Little, B. R. (1983). Personal projects: A rationale and method for investigation. Environment and Behavior, 15(3),
273309.
Lord, S., Desprs, C., & Ramadier, T. (2011). When mobility makes sense: A qualitative and longitudinal study of
the daily mobility of the elderly. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 18(3), 307319.
Lynch, K. (1960). The image of the city. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Maas, J., van Dillen, S. M. E., Verheij, R. A., & Groenewegen, P. P. (2009a). Social contacts as a possible
mechanism behind the relation between green space and health. Health and Place, 15(2), 586595.
Maas, J., Verheij, R. A., de Vries, S., Spreeuwenberg, P., Schellevis, F. G., & Groenewegen, P. P. (2009b). Morbidity
is related to a green living environment. Journal of Epidemiological and Community Health, 63, 967973.
doi:10.1136/jech.2008.079038
Maas, J., Verheij, R. A., Groenewegen, P. P., de Vries, S., & Spreeuwenberg, P. (2006). Green space, urbanity, and
health: How strong is the relation? Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health 60, 587592.
Mair, C., et al. (2009). Cross-sectional and longitudinal associations of neighborhood cohesion and stressors with
depressive symptoms in the multiethnic study of atherosclerosis. Annals Epidemiology, 19, 4957.
Mareggi, M. (2002). Innovation in urban policy: The experience of Italian time policies. Planning Theory and
Practices, 3(2), 173194.
Mead, G. H. (1934). Mind, self, and society. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Mitchell, R., & Popham, F. (2008) Effect of exposure to natural environment on health inequalities: an observational
population study. The Lancet, 372(9650), 16551660.
Mommaas, H. (2002), City Branding: the necessity of socio-cultural goals, In T. Hauben, M. Vermeulen, & V.
Patteeuw (Eds.). (2002), City branding: Image building and building images., Rotterdam: NAI Uitgevers.
Mckenberger, U. (2011). Local time policies in Europe. Time & Society, 20(2), 241273.
Netuveli, G., Wiggins, R. D., Hildon, Z., Montgomery, S. M., & Blane, D. (2005). Functional limitation in long standing
illness and quality of life: Evidence from a national survey. British Medical Journal, 331(7529), 13821383.
Nielsen, T. S., & Hansen, K. B. (2007). Do green areas affect health? Results from a Danish survey on the use of
green areas and health indicators. Health and Place, 13, 839850.
Parmentier, M., van Ham, M., & Bolt, G. (2007). Behavioural responses to neighbourhood reputations. Journal of
Housing and the Built Environment, 22, 199213.
Perugini, M., Bonnes, M., Aiello, A., & Ercolani, A. P. (2002). Il modello circonflesso delle qualit affettive dei luoghi.
Sviluppo di uno strumento valutativo italiano. TPM-Testing Psicometria Metodologia, 9, 131152.
Pikora, T. J., Giles-Corti, B., Knuiman, M. W., Bull, F. C. L., Jamrozik, K. D., & Donovan, R. J. (2006). Neighbourhood
Environmental Factors Correlated with Walking near Home: Using SPACES. Medicine and Science in Sports and
Exercise, 38(4), 708714.
Page 29 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
Pine, J. B., II, & Gilmore, J. H. (1999). The experience economy: work is theatre and every business a stage.
Cambridge, MA: Harvard Business School Press.
Proshansky, H. M., Fabian, A. K., & Kaminoff, R. (1983). Place identity: Physical world socialization of the self.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 3, 5783.
Rapoport, A. (1990). Systems of activities and systems of settings. In S. Kent (Ed.), Domestic architecture and the
use of space (pp. 919). Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Rizzi, P., & Dioli, I. (2010). From strategic planning to city branding: Some empirical evidence in Italy. Pasos, 8(3),
3949.
Russell, J. A., and Pratt, G. (1980). A description of the affective quality attributed to the environment. Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology, 38, 311322.
Russell, J. A., & Ward, L. M. (1982). Environmental psychology. Annual Review of Psychology, 33, 651688.
Salingaros, N. (2000). The structure of pattern languages. Architectural Research Quarterly, 4, 149161.
Saelens, B. E., Sallis, J. F., Black, J. B., & Chen, D. (2003). Neighborhood-based differences in physical activity: An
environment scale evaluation. American Journal of Public Health, 93(9), 15521558.
Scharf, T., Phillipson, C., & Smith, A. E. (2003). Social exclusion of older people in deprived urban communities of
England. European Journal of Ageing, 2(2), 7687.
Scopelliti, M., Carrus, G., Cini, F., Mastandrea, S., Ferrini, F., Semenzato, P. (in press). Biodiversity, perceived
restorativeness, and benefits of nature: A study on the psychological processes and outcomes of on-site
experiences in urban and peri-urban green areas in Italy. In S. Kabisch (Ed.), Advances in people-environment
studies (Vol. 3). Gttingen, Germany: Hogrefe.
Scopelliti, M., & Giuliani, M. V. (2005). Restorative environments in later life: An approach to well-being from the
perspective of environmental psychology. Journal of Housing for the Elderly, 19 (3/4), 205228.
Seaman, P. J., Jones, R., & Ellaway, A. (2010). Its not just about the park, its about integration too: Why people
choose to use or not use urban greenspaces. International Journal of Behavioral Nutrition and Physical Activity,
7, 78.
(p. 247) Skjaeveland, O., & Grling, T. (1997). Effects of interactional space on neighbouring. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 17, 181198.
Stigsdotter, U. A., & Grahn, P. (2004). A garden at your doorstep may reduce stressPrivate gardens as
restorative environments in the city. OPENspacean international conference on inclusive environments.
Edinburgh, UK.
Stokols, D. (1987). Conceptual strategies of environmental psychology. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.), Handbook
of environmental psychology (Vol. 1, pp. 4170). New York: Wiley.
Stokols, D., & Shumaker, S. A. (1982). The psychological context of residential mobility and well-being. Journal of
Social Issues, 38(3), 149171.
Sugiyama, T., Sahaf, R., Masters, J., Okely, T., & Moore, G. (2010). Attributes of outdoor play areas in childcare
centres associated with childrens outdoor physical activity and sedentary behaviour. Journal of Science and
Medicine in Sport, 12(2), 2223.
Sugiyama, T., Ward Thompson, C., and Alves, S. (2009). Associations between neighbourhood open space
attributes and quality of life for older people in Britain. Environment and Behavior, 41(1), 321.
Tennessen, C. M., & Cimprich, B. (1995).Views to nature: Effects on attention. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 15(1), 7785.
Page 30 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
Tognoli, J. (1987). Residential environments. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.), Handbook of environmental
psychology (Vol. 1, pp. 655690). New York: Wiley.
Trost, S. G., Ward, D. S., & Senso, M. (2010). Effects of child care policy and environment on physical activity.
Medicine & Science in Sports & Exercise, 42(3), 520525.
Ulrich, R. S. (1981). Natural versus urban scenes: Some psychophysiological effects. Environment and Behavior,
13(5), 523556.
Ulrich, R. S. (1983). Aesthetic and affective response to natural environment. In I. Altman & J. F. Wohwill (Eds.),
Behavior and the natural environment (Vol. 6, pp. 85125). New York: Plenum.
Ulrich, R. S., Simons, R. F., Losito, B. D., Fiorito, E., Miles, M. A., & Zelson, M. (1991). Stress recovery during
exposure to natural and urban environments. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 11(2), 201230.
Vale, L., Warner, S. B. (2001). Imaging the city: Continuing struggles and new directions. New Brunswick, NJ:
Center for Urban Policy Research.
van den Berg, A. E., Maas, J., Verheij, R. A., & Groenewegen, P. P. (2010). Green space as a buffer between
stressful life events and health. Social Science & Medicine, 70(8), 12031210.
van der Klis, M., & Karsten, L. (2009). Commuting partners, dual residences, and the meaning of home. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 29, 235245.
van der Meer, E., Brucks, M., Husemann, A., Hofmann, M., Honold, J., & Beyer, R. (2011). Human perception of
urban environment and consequences for its design. In W. Endlicher et al. (Eds.), Perspectives of urban ecology
Ecosystems and interactions between humans and nature in the metropolis of Berlin. Berlin: Springer.
van Lenthe, F., Brug, J., & Mackenbach, J. (2005). Neighborhood inequalities in physical inactivity: the role of
neighborhood attractiveness, proximity to local facilities and safety in the Netherlands. Social Science & Medicine,
60, 763775.
Vogel, T., Brechat, P.-H., Leprtre, P.-M., Kaltenbach, G., Berthel, M., & Lonsdorfer, J. (2009). Health benefits of
physical activity in older patients: a review. International Journal of Clinical Practice, 63(2), 303320.
Wallenius, M. (1999). Personal projects in everyday places: Perceived supportiveness of the environment and
psychological well-being. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 19, 131143.
Wells, N. M., & Laquatra, J. (2010). Why green housing and green neighborhoods are important to the health and
well-being of older adults. American Society on Aging, 33(4), 5057.
Werner, C. M., Altman, I., & Oxley, D. (1985). Temporal aspects of homes: A transactional perspective. In I. Altman
& C. M. Werner (Eds.), Home environments: Human behavior and environment (Vol. 8, pp. 132). New York:
Plenum.
Wheeler, B. W., Cooper, A. R., Page, A. S., & Russell, J. (2010). Greenspace and childrens physical activity: A
GPS/GIS analysis of the PEACH project. Preventive Medicine 51(2), 148152.
Young, C. C., LaMontagne, L. L., Dietrich, M. S., & Wells, N. (2012). Cognitive vulnerabilities, negative life events,
and depressive symptoms in young adolescents. Archives of Psychiatric Nursing, 26(1), 920.
Zukn, S. (1998). Urban lifestyles: diversity and standardisation in spaces of consumption. Urban Studies, 35(56),
825839.
Marino Bonaiuto
Marino Bonaiuto CIRPA (Centro Interuniversitario di Ricerca in Psicologia Ambientale) Dipartimento di Psicologia dei Processi di
Sviluppo e Socializzazione Sapienza Universit di Roma Rome, Italy
Susana Alves
Susana Alves Faculty of Engineering & ArchitectureDepartment of Architecture Okan niversitesi Tuzla KampsAkfrat-
Page 31 of 32
Residential Places and Neighborhoods: Toward Healthy Life, Social Integration, and
Reputable Residence
Tuzla/Istanbul, Turkey
Page 32 of 32
Work Environments
Introduction
Offices are the dominant workplaces in North America, and the proportion of the workforce in these settings is
increasing (Woods, 2009). Over half of the workforce is employed in offices, a statistic that does not include the
many people for whom an office is part of the work setting rather than its entirety (e.g., nurses, teachers, retail
managers). Not surprisingly, offices also predominate among the settings studied by environmental psychologists.
For that reason, this chapter focuses primarily on the understanding the effects of the physical environment on
people in offices, and secondarily on the environmental effects of peoples working in offices. Offices are major
resource users, particularly for energy, as well as major sources of employment.
Understanding the behavior and experiences of people in offices requires a systems approach. One such
approach is shown in Figure 14.1. Individuals experience physical, social, and organizational contexts, and bring
to work their individual differences and states created by conditions and social roles outside of work. Many internal
processes, acting in parallel, take these various influences and result in a variety of outcomes. This figure cannot
show all of the possible contextual influences, processes, or outcomes, but does show the structure underlying the
chapter. Internal processes are the organizing principle.
Page 1 of 34
Work Environments
Sundstroms book (1986) and handbook chapter (1987) on work environments and the BOSTI books (Brill, Margulis,
Konar, & BOSTI, 1984) are the classic work environment psychology documents. The past quarter-century has of
course brought dramatic change to offices, principally in the rise of information technology. This has changed both
the nature of tasksfor example, few employees now need to read soft pencil or handwritten fourth-generation
carbon copiesand jobsfor example, (p. 249) no longer is there a typing pool. Consequently, some of the
results reported in these classic works do not generalize to present-day offices. This review focuses primarily on
papers published since 2002, with the publication of the second Handbook of Environmental Psychology and its
review of work environments (McCoy, 2002).
Popular media tell us that contemporary ways of working are dramatically different than old ways. This may be true,
but many of the fundamental characteristics of people in organizations are unchanged. Moreover, even in
organizations that emphasize teamwork, or that use hoteling to manage the assignment of workstations to itinerant
employees, there is need for quiet spaces with suitable lighting, temperature, and accommodation while doing
individual work (Brill, Weidemann, & BOSTI, 2001).
Employers perennially ask why one might concern oneself with providing superior working conditions. After all, the
Hawthorne experiments found contrary results in which performance could be improved even by placebo changes
in lighting conditions (Roethlisberger & Dickson, 1939; Snow, 1927). Herzberg (1966) theorized that the physical
work environment was a hygiene, rather than a motivating, factor, with increases beyond the baseline of adequacy
not providing any substantive return in the form of better job performance. However, several commentators have
observed flaws in the design of the Hawthorne illumination experiments (Gifford, 2007; Kompier, 2006), and
Herzberg had very limited data to support his theory.
More recent analyses of the costs of employment show the value of a better work environment. Brill and colleagues
(2001) calculated that over the life of a building, 82% of the costs are associated with the salary and benefits of
those who work in it; 10% of the costs (circa 2000) are for the technology they use; 5% is the initial cost of building
and furnishings; and 3% is the cost of operations and maintenance for the building. Small investments in the
physical (p. 250) environment can pay off well if they enable the employees to be more effective at work.
Moreover, unlike person-centered interventions. such as training, coaching, or immediate rewards, they persist
over time and affect new waves of employees as the workforce ebbs and flows. There is no general equation to
calculate the return on investment of work environment interventions, although there are methodologies that may
be applied to organizations (Linhard, 2005; Neftzger & Walker, 2010).
As these methods underscore, understanding which investments will pay off requires an integrative approach to
research, taking together not only human resources management, industrial-organizational psychology, and
facilities management (Haynes, 2007), but also engineering and environmental psychology. In some respects, work
Page 2 of 34
Work Environments
environment psychology illustrates the identity challenge described by Stokols (1995). Although it seeks to
understand the person embedded in a specific context (Craik, 1996), a complete understanding requires truly
interdisciplinary investigations.
Office Type
Few issues have created such debate among office workers as has office type; arguably, open-plan office design
was the inspiration for the comic strip Dilbert, by Scott Adams, and its many panels about life in the cube farm.
North American offices adopted this arrangement of modular furnishings cubicles in the 1960s (Albrecht & Broikos,
2000). (Note that in Europe, the label open plan describes offices in which many individual desks occupy a large
area, with no visual barriers between themwhat North Americans would call a bull penand systems of
furnishing panels are less common.) One reason for the popularity of the layout is economic: the reduced footprint
and ease of rearrangement translates into reduced organizational costs. The other is ideological: the belief that by
reducing barriers between individuals, one can increase the opportunities for interaction and communication in
ways that will promote teamwork, collaboration, and creative problem-solving. This belief is widespread among
designers and has appeared repeatedly in the popular press (Galt, 2002; Lets chuck the cubicles! 2011;
Mourtada, 2011). However, the reduced barriers also reduce privacy (Brill et al., 1984), as discussed below.
Broad comparisons between office types reveal many simultaneous processes and, consequently, mixed results.
For instance, Sundstrom (1987) observed that field studies reported both favorable and unfavorable outcomes in
comparisons of office types: some studies found that satisfaction declined with a shift from an enclosed to an
open-plan layout, perhaps because of decreases in privacy and increases in noise and distraction, whereas
others found that employees preferred more rather than less exposure to other people. Job category appeared to
moderate the relationships, in part because of the use of enclosed offices to provide status markers.
In recent years there have been few investigations that compared office types, probably because of the
dominance of the open-plan form (Brill et al., 2001; Haynes, 2008); BOSTI estimated that 71% of American offices
fall into this category (Brill et al., 2001). The recent publications demonstrate the complexity of the issues without a
clear conclusion about optimal office types.
Brennan, Chugh, and Kline (2002) followed an organization for an extended period before and up to six months
following a move from downtown quarters with primarily enclosed offices to a suburban location with open-plan
arrangements. The respondents to this longitudinal study reported a decline in privacy and confidentiality in two
post-move surveys, as well as persistent declines in environmental satisfaction, job performance, and increases in
physical stress. The longitudinal design is a strength (p. 251) of this report, but the authors had no physical
measurements of either the pre- or post-move offices and no control group. Moreover, although their questionnaire
focused on judgments of the interior of the workplace, the fact that the geographic location had also changed
remains a confound. The change in the commute to work might have been stressful, or the new commute itself
might be more stressful than the old; commuting stress is known to spill over into other life domains (Novaco &
Gonzalez, 2009).
Page 3 of 34
Work Environments
For further consideration of the complexity of the office type issue, consider the results from Danielsson and Bodin
(2008), concerning the health status of occupants in various Swedish offices. Classifying offices into seven types
differing in both enclosure and the number of occupants, they found that occupants of a medium-size open-plan
office (1024 occupants, with few architectural separations between them) had the highest risk of poor outcomes
for physical and emotional health and for aspects of job satisfaction. However, it was not possible from these data
to determine precisely which features of this layout were responsible for the increased risk. The large open-plan
office, rare in Sweden but more typical in North America, did not show as many increased risks as the smaller
version. This is puzzling, as one might expect less privacy and more distraction from the larger number of people.
Privacy
The original BOSTI study of workplace productivity identified visual and acoustic privacy as among the most
important design elements for individuals (Brill et al., 1984), and this remains an important issue. Veitch et al. (2003)
surveyed more than 770 occupants of cubicles in North America and found that privacy was the second-mostimportant feature to them among seven ranked features, and the lack of privacy was most likely to be mentioned in
open-ended responses as a disliked feature or a feature that the respondent would change.
One way to achieve visual privacy and a degree of acoustic privacy is to provide a higher panel between
cubicles. Brill et al. (1984) recommended 65 inches (165 cm) or higher on three sides as a means to provide
adequate privacy, but the design trend in recent years has been for panels to be lower than this (Space
planning, 2003). A field study comparing two Turkish companies found that privacy perceptions were better when
panels were 140 cm (~55 in)high enough to provide visual privacy to the seated occupantthan when they
were 120 cm (~47 in) (Yildirim, Akalin-Baskaya, & Celebi, 2007). However, Newsham, Veitch, and Charles (2008), in
a reanalysis of the Veitch et al. (2003) data, found no effect of panel height on the risk of dissatisfaction with
privacy and acoustics. Workstation size was a significant predictor, with larger workstations reducing the risk of
dissatisfaction, probably because of the greater separation between people (and their noise) that larger cubicles
provide.
Individual differences and the nature of the work both play a role in employees responses to work space design
(Maher & Hippel, 2005). Stimulus screening and inhibitory ability, perceived privacy, and task complexity showed
interactive effects on job satisfaction in this Australian sample. Higher panels increased perceived privacy. When
both perceived privacy and task complexity were high, stimulus screening ability was a significant predictor of job
satisfaction. Maher and Hippel suggested that this result revealed a weakness in the use of higher panels to
improve perceived privacy, in that they provide more visual privacy than acoustic privacy. Without acoustic
privacy, those with poor stimulus screening ability who have complex tasks might experience more distractions
than the higher visual privacy would lead them to expect, with concomitant reductions in job satisfaction. These
authors suggested that noise is a greater problem for poor stimulus screeners when they lack the visual cues to
identify where the noise is coming from.
The seating orientation in the cubicle offers another means to regulate social interaction or to provide privacy.
Physical constraints can limit this choice; for example, Sommer and Augustin (2007) found that 97% of users of
desktop computers with monitors worked with the primary work space facing into the corner of the cubicle (an
arrangement that was common when almost all monitors used cathode-ray tubes, needing a deep desk area for the
tube). However, users of laptop computers varied between orienting into the corner (facing in) and facing to the
side or the entrance (facing out). Interviews with employees of both orientations revealed that those who faced
out did so to facilitate communication and to avoid being surprised by visitors entering the cubicle; not being
startled by people coming up from behind outweighed increased distractions of people passing by. Those who
faced in cited fewer distractions and the availability of more desk space on which to spread materials, as well as
the physical constraints of the equipment. Personality variables (introversion-extroversion, locus of control, and
self-monitoring capacity) did (p. 252) not predict the choice of orientation, although the small sample size and the
fact of physical constraints limiting choice might have obscured the relationship. As computer monitors become
shallower the physical constraints should decline in the future, making it easier to detect the influence of
psychological variables.
The development of Internet-based survey technologies has greatly facilitated the development of large data sets
of office employees responses to their work environments. Physical measurements lag because they remain time-
Page 4 of 34
Work Environments
consuming and expensive to conduct. The Center for the Built Environment at the University of California, Berkeley,
is unusual in having a database comprising more than 50,000 individual responses together with a limited set of
physical parameters of each office (Goins, Jellema, & Zhang, 2010). A recent analysis of this data set revealed
than the measured height of cubicle enclosures was not as good a predictor of self-rated job performance as was
the symbolic character of the office, being viewed as having a home-like atmosphere or being a place to be proud
of. The authors suggested that designers seeking to influence organizational outcomes should attend to the
symbolic attributes over simple enclosure measures. However, physical attributes matter: the symbolic attributes
themselves were influenced by speech privacy, air quality, amount of light, and temperature, all of which are
influenced by the physical design of the work space (Newsham et al., 2003).
Page 5 of 34
Work Environments
Density
Personal space, or the control of it, largely concerns the regulation of our social interactions. The need to do so is
partly a function of the density of possible relations. Theorists differentiate between two types of density: social
density concerns the number of occupants per office, and addresses issues such as the number and complexity
of social relationships that an individual must manage. Spatial density is the area available to each occupant
(e.g., m2 per person) (Duval, Charles, & Veitch, 2002). For a given office size, the two are clearly related: if social
density increases, spatial density will decrease. However, the relationship is not perfect because architectural and
interior design choices also play a role; one could reduce social density by providing separation between work
groups, even if spatial density stayed constant.
Taken to an extreme, high social or low spatial density could give rise to perceptions of crowding (Stokols, 1972),
which can act as a stressor (Sherrod, 1974). At the other extreme, very low social or spatial density could lead to
isolation (real or perceived). Present-day office environment research provides little guidance on the effects of
density on employees, despite the importance placed on social interaction. In the facilities management and office
design literature it seems that real estate costs (Space planning, 2003) and the above-mentioned emphasis on
visual access, especially for work groups, drive social and spatial density choices.
Duval et al. (2002) surveyed the literature concerning open-plan offices specifically, seeking evidence for
recommendations concerning social and spatial density. Many studies were excluded from the review because of
insufficiently specific characterization of the density measure. They concluded that overall, both higher social
density and lower spatial density had adverse effects on overall environmental satisfaction, but were not able to
establish numerical limits. Other data suggested that workstations smaller than 4.5 m2 (49 sq ft) increase the risk of
dissatisfaction with privacy/acoustics and dissatisfaction with lighting (Newsham et al., 2008), but were unable to
address social density.
Territoriality
Territoriality is a difficult process to define (Gifford, 2007), but a colloquial definition would hold that it is the process
by which people mark space as their own, both to protect belongings and to regulate social interactions. The
literature on territoriality in offices is very limited, and focuses primarily on personalization as the means by which
individuals mark territories.
Wells has provided valuable insights into the predictors and consequences of office personalization with a series
of cross-sectional field investigations. The results are counterintuitive. Although most people believe that the items
on display give insight into the personality of the occupant, personality variables as assessed by the Big Five do
not predict the nature of the display or the number of items on display (Wells & Thelen, 2002). These personality
variables predict the individuals status in the organization, which in turn does predict personalization: for instance,
high-status individuals tend to personalize more. Organizational culture, rather than individual characteristics, is
the larger influence on personalization, particularly as it influences the work space design and the explicit policies
governing personalization (Wells, Thelen, & Ruark, 2007). Permissive personalization policies are important in that
organizations with such policies show a greater degree of personalization, and in turn higher levels of satisfaction
with the work environment, job satisfaction, and employee well-being as well as higher organizational well-being
(Wells, 2000).
Page 6 of 34
Work Environments
& Hancock, 2011). The nature of the sound is more important to the cognitive effects than is its level, at least within
the range of commonly encountered sounds, from 48 dB(A) through 80 dB(A) (Banbury, Macken, Tremblay, &
Jones, 2001). Sounds that are repeated are less disruptive than are sounds that have acoustic changes in pitch,
timbre, or tempo; the changing state attracts attention and disrupts task-related cognitive processing (Banbury et
al., 2001).
Individual differences moderate the effects, with those who have smaller working memory capacity being most
adversely affected by noise exposure (Srqvist, Halin, & Hygge, 2010). A different individual difference measure,
task absorption, showed complex interaction effects with noise exposure on performance and subjective mental
workload ratings (Smith-Jackson & Klein, 2009). Both papers concluded that the role of individual differences is
worthy of further investigation.
Although some laboratory studies show that habituation is possible, with the effect being diminished after 20
minutes of exposure to the irrelevant sound (Banbury & Berry, 1998), field studies do not find that the problems
disappear with repeated exposure (Banbury & Berry, 2005). This might be explained by the fact that even in
offices, exposure to irrelevant sound is not continuous. Banbury and Berry (1998) found that even a short silence
after a period of noise exposure was sufficient to reverse the habituation effect. Conversely, Szalma and Hancock
(2011) suggested that longer or repeated exposures might permit the development of compensatory or coping
mechanisms and identified this as a topic worthy of investigation.
Cognitive performance is not the only problem associated with distraction; there is also an affective component,
varyingly operationalized as annoyance, loudness, and distraction ratings, or combined into ratings of acoustic
satisfaction (Navai & Veitch, 2003). Acoustic satisfaction diminishes when the ambient sound level rises above 45
dB(A) and when the ambient sound is predominantly of high frequency (Navai & Veitch, 2003).
Speech sounds have the strongest relationship to acoustic satisfaction, and for this reason acousticians have
developed a predictive metric based on the physical properties of the acoustic environment. They calculate the
speech intelligibility index (SII) to quantify the degree to which speech sounds from outside the target area (a
workstation or a room, in the case of offices) are audible against general background noise (Acoustical Society of
America, 1997). SII replaces an older quantity known as the articulation index (AI) (American Society for Testing
and Materials [ASTM], 1993). Among acousticians, spaces with SII > .20 are thought to be unacceptable.
Adding masking sound to the office environment is one way to improve the SII, because it increases the
background level. Masking sound, being a continuous sound with no changing state, should not cause cognitive
performance problems. A successful masking sound will be loud enough to cover speech sounds and with enough
high-frequency sound to cover most speech sounds, but neither loud enough nor over-weighted in the high
frequencies to cause annoyance. Veitch et al. (2002) tested a variety of simulated masking sounds and levels in
two experiments, and concluded that spectra that closely match the speech spectrum can be good maskers and
provide good acoustic satisfaction, provided that they achieve an SII > .20 and an overall sound pressure level not
greater than 4548 dB(A).
Schlittmeier and Hellbrck (2009) found that a continuous masking sound played over office noise reversed the ill
effect of the office noise alone on a serial memory task, but that legato music was rated as a preferable sound
when heard in isolation. They observed that masking sounds need to be acceptable to the hearers, adding that
taking other processes into account, it would be preferable to add a degree of individual (personal) control to the
sound. Interestingly, Lee and Brand (2010) reported that the effect of distraction on self-rated performance in office
settings is mediated by the relationship between distraction and perceived control; people who reported higher
distraction reported lower perceived control, whereas those with higher perceived control reported higher
performance.
Page 7 of 34
Work Environments
good quality to the extent that the combination of light sources, their location and controls, and the surface
properties of the space and objects in it meet functional, cognitive, and emotional needs of the individual
occupants of the space in balance with the architectural characteristics of the space and the (p. 255)
environmental and energy constraints particular to the context (Quality of the Visual Environment Committee, 2009;
Rea, 2000).
Lighting requirements for North American workplaces are established by the Illuminating Engineering Society of
North America (IES, 2004). Providing an adequate quantity of light1 to see common office tasks is not difficult
because most office workers today use computer monitors, which are self-luminous, and most paper tasks are
printed crisply in relatively large type in high contrast (black on white). Under the 300500 lx that is currently the
recommended illuminance for office work (DiLaura, Houser, Mistrick, & Steffy, 2011; IES, 2004), relative visual
performance of these tasks will be high (Rea & Ouellette, 1991).
Light distribution is another important dimension of lighting design. Both experimental and field investigations have
consistently found that office workers prefer a mixture of direct and indirect lighting with higher proportions of
occupants rating such lighting as comfortable, judging spaces lit by direct/indirect systems as more attractive, and
reporting higher levels of environmental and job satisfaction after working in spaces lit with direct/indirect systems
(Boyce et al., 2006a; Hedge, Sims, & Becker, 1995; Houser, Tiller, Bernecker, & Mistrick, 2002; Veitch & Newsham,
2000a; Veitch, Newsham, Mancini, & Arsenault, 2010).
Most office workers today use computer monitors for much of the day. Display technology has changed in recent
years, with flat-panel liquid-crystal displays (commonly known as LCD monitors) having displaced the cathode-ray
tube (CRT). The overall effect is beneficial in that LCDs, being flat and having matte surfaces, are less prone to
reflection problems than were the spherical (curved), high-gloss surfaces of CRTs. LCDs are also capable of higher
luminances than were CRTs, with average luminances of ~300 cd/m2 for monitors available in 2010 versus 3035
cd/m2 being typical in the late 1990s (Veitch & Newsham, 2000b). Existing recommendations call for the ratio of
luminances between the task area and the surrounding surfaces to be on the order of 1:3 or 3:1 (IES, 2004),
although experiments with both CRTs (30 cd/m2 ) and LCDs (91 cd/m2 ) have shown that people prefer ratios closer
to 1:1 (Sheedy, Smith, & Hayes, 2005; Veitch & Newsham, 2000b). If this is true, it will be more difficult to lower
electric light levels as monitor luminances increase.
One obvious way to achieve both higher light levels and reduced energy consumption is to increase the use of
daylight. The preference for a window in the office is well established (Collins, 1976; Farley & Veitch, 2001).
Successful daylighting, however, requires careful planning so that one delivers the desired light level without
causing discomfort. There does not yet exist a widely accepted method to predict visual discomfort from daylight
(Osterhaus, 2005), but several methods and metrics have been proposed, such as the daylight glare probability
(DGP; Wienold & Christoffersen, 2006) and statistics based on high-dynamic-range images of the office
(Osterhaus, 2008; Van Den Wymelenberg, Inanici, & Johnson, 2010). Lindelof and Morel (2008) proposed a
Bayesian probability approach in which discomfort is inferred from occupants use of lighting and shading controls,
and built into the building automation system as an input to creating conditions that provide adequate light levels,
limited discomfort, and energy savings.
All of these approaches to understanding discomfort assume that discomfort can be reliably predicted from the
physical properties of light in the space. Research in this domain would benefit from improved scales to measure
discomfort and more sophisticated research designs to explore the role of individual differences and contextual
variables on the experience of discomfort. For instance, discomfort ratings are lower when participants are more
involved in their tasks (Osterhaus & Bailey, 1992) and when the source of the glare is a scene judged to be
interesting (Tuaycharoen & Tregenza, 2005).
Pressure to reduce lighting energy use is high, which has resulted in many technological developments in lighting
equipment, lighting controls, and daylighting systems. Some of the proposed techniques are controversial because
of their overall effects on office occupants. Among the most heated debates have occurred over the suggestion
that the electric lighting in an office should use a light source that, although still white, has a relatively higher
proportion of short-wavelength radiation (i.e., more blue light) so that its correlated color temperature (CCT) will be
around 6,500 K. The basis for this argument are findings that show increased depth of field, higher brightness
perception, and improved visual acuity for very small, low-contrast targets under this type of light (Berman, 1992);
Page 8 of 34
Work Environments
therefore, the proponents of so-called spectrally enhanced lighting argue that the same level of visual performance
could be achieved with lower illuminance levels than would be needed for other light sources.
Although the argument sounds compelling, there is no evidence that the correlated color (p. 256) temperature of
a fluorescent lighting system up to 6,500 K influences task performance at light levels typical of office interiors
(Boyce, Akashi, Hunter, & Bullough, 2003). In this laboratory experiment, higher CCT reduced pupil size, but the
increased depth of field made no difference to the performance of the task. The illuminance (light level) and size of
the task did affect both speed and accuracy. There was no interaction of illuminance and CCT, as there would
need to be to support the idea of spectrally enhanced lighting. Boyce et al. (2003) concluded that using high CCT
light sources would have no practical benefit on task performance.
This issue highlights the importance of considering multiple measures when making decisions about suitable design
criteria. Visual performance is only one aspect of office work: we might reduce light levels with a particular light
source to maintain visual performance of paper-based tasks, only to find that we have caused a problem with other
outcomes, such as aesthetic judgments or visual comfort. Taking a different approach to the question, Akashi and
Boyce (2006) examined the acceptability of a reduction in illuminance (from ~575 lx, slightly above the
recommended range, to ~450 lx, in the middle of the range) and a change in CCT (from 3,500 K to 6,500 K) in a
field setting. They found that office occupants could accept a reduction in ambient illuminance following an
adaptation period, that the low-illuminance offices were perceived as brighter under higher-CCT lamps (6500 K),
and that visual performance remained at the same level even with the reduction in light level. Some individuals
added task lamps to boost their local light levels. However, the 6,500 K lamps were perceived as unattractive when
used at higher illuminance. Akashi and Boyce concluded that energy savings are feasible, but do not necessitate
the use of a high-CCT lamp.
Environmental psychologists have long sought an understanding of the effects of color on behavior,
operationalized either by using colored room surfaces with conventional white light sources (fluorescent or
incandescent), or by using colored lights in a white room. Results in recent years do not contradict the conclusions
drawn by Beach, Wise, and Wise (1988) in a thorough review over 20 years ago: there are no simple, deterministic
effects of color on behavior. Kwallek, Soon, and Lewis (2007) concluded an extensive series of experiments
addressing the interactive effects of environmental sensitivity and room color (white, red, or blue-green) on clerical
task performance with a week-long test. Taking into account the changing pattern of results for the various tasks
over the work week, the three-way interactions had no straightforward interpretation. Hoonhout, Knoop, and Vanpol
(2009) used colored lights on white room surfaces to vary the stimulus, but also failed to find straightforward
effects of red versus blue light on task performance.
Kller et al. (2006) examined preferences for light and color cross-culturally and across seasons. They found that
seasonal differences in mood were more pronounced for people in countries farther from the equator, but overall
the main effect held that people preferred offices that they judged to be bright, rather than dim. There was a small
effect in which emotional states were more positive for those who judged their offices to be colorful rather than
neutral or colorless, but they did not collect data on precisely which colors were present in the offices. A
subsequent set of laboratory experiments by part of the team also supported the contention that moderately
colorful offices lead to beneficial emotional states that support task performance (Kller, Mikellides, & Janssens,
2009)but not that any specific color is the ideal color for office decor.
Photobiology
Until 2001, it was thought that the only light-sensitive (photoreceptive) cells in the retina were the rods and cones
that process visual signals. In that year we learned that there exist intrinsically photoreceptive retinal ganglion cells
(ipRGCs), which transduce information about light and dark but not detailed visual information (Berson, Dunn, &
Takao, 2002; Hattar et al., 2002). The ipRGCs have a unique spectral response function that has peak sensitivity in
the range from 459 to 483 nm (i.e., in the range of blue light) (Brainard & Provencio, 2006). The information from
these cells travels a different pathway from the retina to several higher structures (Commission Internationale de
lEclairage [CIE], 2009). These structures include the pineal gland, where the information about the presence of
light and dark regulates the release of the hormone melatonin, thereby setting the circadian clock (Berson et al.,
2002). The ipRGCs also interact with the rods and cones of the visual system and are part of the pupillary light
reflex (Gamlin et al., 2007; McDougal & Gamlin, 2010).
Page 9 of 34
Work Environments
This discovery has energized photobiology researchers and has excited the architectural lighting community as
well (van Bommel & van den Beld, 2004), although some commentators have cautioned that by placing application
ahead of fundamental science, we could do more harm than (p. 257) good (Boyce, 2006; DiLaura, 2005). Those
who urge caution point out that those who would make health claims of any kind for any technology require
evidence. Changes to workplace lighting based on limited evidence risk causing unintended problems, making
early application both an ethical and liability risk to practitioners and industry.
Of the many brain structures linked to the ipRGCs, only the connection to the suprachiasmatic nucleus and on to
the pineal gland has been extensively studied (CIE, 2009). This has given us a fair understanding of lights role in
circadian regulation but leaves much to be learned about other processes. This understanding has led to one area
where applications have been quickly developed: lighting for shift work settings (e.g., Eastman & Martin, 1999;
Smith, Fogg, & Eastman, 2009). Judicious use of light exposure during night work and time in darkness at home can
aid in maintaining alertness at work and promote better sleep afterward, benefiting the employee, the employer,
and society at large (the latter by reducing the risk of accidents both on the job and during the home commute).
The International Commission on Illumination (known by its French acronym, CIE) published a consensus report in
2004 (rereleased in 2009 with an erratum page) that outlined five Principles of Healthy Lighting as derived from
the literature of the day:
1. The daily light dose received by people in industrialized countries might be too low.
2. Healthy light is inextricably linked to healthy darkness.
3. Light for biological action should be rich in the regions of the spectrum to which the nonvisual system is
most sensitive.
4. The important consideration in determining light dose is the light received at the eye, both directly from the
light source and reflected off surrounding surfaces.
5. The timing of light exposure influences the effects of the dose. (CIE, 2009)
The most relevant principle for workplace lighting, for both day- and night-shift workers, is the conclusion that most
people in industrialized countries would benefit from higher light exposures than they currently experience. This is
controversial because it raises the possibility of a demand for higher light level requirements for electric lighting in
workplaces, at the same time as energy and environmental concerns are leading to pressure to lower light levels.
The suggestion that this light should be rich in the short-wavelength portion of the spectrum has led manufacturers
to propose new light sources and to field-test them. Despite these developments, many questions remain
unresolved (Brainard & Veitch, 2007). What should the light exposure be? Need it be continuous, all day, or could
it be achieved with an appropriately timed exposure?
The sum of knowledge does not yet permit a precise answer to any of these questions, but there are tantalizing
hints that light exposure can influence social behavior in the short term and sleep quality later, in addition to
measures of well-being cited in the CIE report (CIE, 2009). Using an event-contingent recording method combined
with wrist monitors of overall light exposure, aan het Rot, Moskowitz, and Young (2008) found that social
interactions that followed exposure to 1,000 lx of white light tended to be less quarrelsome than those following
lower light exposures. Participants were exposed to this level for on average 19.6 min per day, a value typical for
that latitude and season (Hbert, Dumont, & Paquet, 1998).
Three teams have developed devices to enable improved ecological measurements of daily light dose that take
into account its spectral properties (Gordijn, Gimnez, & Beersma, 2009; Hubalek, Brink, & Schierz, 2010; Miller et
al., 2010). Few studies have as yet been completed with these tools. As would be expected, Miller et al. (2010)
found that the daily light exposures of day- and night-shift nurses in the United States are very different and
suggested that this tool could be used for further studies of circadian disruption and its effects on health. Hubalek
et al. (2010) studied office workers in Germany, collecting both light exposures and questionnaire data concerning
mood and sleep quality. Light exposure did not directly predict mood but did influence sleep quality on the following
night: sleep quality improved with higher light exposure during the day.
Partly because of the energy implications and partly in recognition of circadian changes in light sensitivity,
researchers have begun to explore ways to increase light exposure for shorter periods rather than as continual
increases in light levels. The findings are suggestive but not conclusive, partly because of research design issues.
Kaida, Takahashi, and Otsuka (2006) exposed Japanese participants to daylight through a window (> 2,000 lx) for
Page 10 of 34
Work Environments
30 min after lunch and found that this improved one positive mood scale and reduced subjective sleepiness
relative to a control condition (100 lx electric light, lamp type unspecified); a short nap at the same time (p. 258)
on a different day improved three mood scales and reduced subjective sleepiness. Another Japanese team
examined the effect of using bright light in the morning and into the early afternoon, in comparison to a constant
lower level all day. They interpreted the findings to suggest that the higher light level increased afternoon clerical
task performance (Obayashi et al., 2007). Both studies, however, have order effect confounds, and the
performance data reported by Obayashi et al. (2007) seem to show a strong effect of practice over the three
weeks of the experiment.
de Kort and Smolders (2010) tested a dynamic lighting scheme in which both light level and correlated color
temperature varied according to a schedule that was designed to provide more short-wavelength stimulation at
times of day when it was thought to be beneficial, and reduced light levels at other times of day to reduce energy
use. The experimental condition varied from 700 lx at 4,700 K in the early morning and after lunch, then shifted
slowly to 500 lx at 3,000 K in the later morning and late afternoon. This was compared to a static condition of 500 lx
at 3,000 K. The field experiment took place in the Netherlands, where the law requires all employees to have a
window within 5 meters of the workstation, and this building had very large and unobstructed windows; thus, all
participants also experienced high levels of daylight in the workplace (which would not necessarily be the case in
North American offices). Daylight-responsive dimming reduced the amount of electric lighting to the extent that
daylight provided the required level, and therefore modified the experimental exposures. Although the
experimental design itself was strong (an ABA/BAB design over various floors in the building), it is not surprising
that most of the outcome measures did not show statistically significant differences. Most interestingly, however,
occupants with dynamic lighting did report higher satisfaction with the lighting than when they experienced the
static lighting condition.
Another approach to stimulate the ipRGCs has been to use a light source with relatively more light in the short
wavelengths to which these cells are more sensitive. The light source that has been tested is nominally white but
has a correlated color temperature of 17,000 K. Most people will experience this as much more blue than any
commonly used fluorescent lamp (in North America, most lamps are either 3,500 K or 4,100 K, although 5,000 K and
6,500 K lamps are sometimes used, particularly by those who invoke the spectrally enhanced lighting approach
described above). Two field trials of the 17,000 K lamp have found that employees in areas with this lamp reported
higher alertness and self-reported concentration and performance at work, and reduced fatigue at home in the
evening (Mills, Tomkins, & Schlangen, 2007; Viola, James, Schlangen, & Dijk, 2008). These initial positive results
merit further investigation and extension to include consideration of the aesthetic judgments of the spaces lit with
these lamps. (Anecdotal evidence suggests that some people will strongly dislike the appearance of rooms lit with
such an extreme CCT.)
Comfort
Comfort as an outcome receives research attention from human factors researchers, from engineers, and to a
lesser extent from psychologists, although each discipline takes its own perspective. Among human factors
researchers the focus is largely on physical comfort associated with the musculoskeletal system as influenced by
furnishings, equipment, and layout, although thermal conditions and thermal comfort also receive some attention
(Brand, 2008). Because Brand extensively reviewed physical comfort and musculoskeletal injury issues associated
with workstation design, these are not considered here. Here, we consider the temperature and ventilation
conditions that contribute to comfort as being topics less well-known among psychologists.
Thermal Comfort
The engineering community has a long tradition of interest in thermal comfort and perceived air quality (Fanger,
1970), particularly with the aim of setting standards for workplace temperature and ventilation systems (American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers [ASHRAE], 2001, 2004). Although comfort is
entirely a subjective phenomenon, few psychologists have engaged in its study. This is puzzling, as de Dear
(2004) has noted.2
Among engineers, the dominant model of thermal comfort is Fangers (1970) Predicted Mean VotePredicted
Percent Dissatisfied (PMV-PPD) model. Psychophysical experiments in climate chambers established that thermal
Page 11 of 34
Work Environments
sensation relates to air temperature, air velocity, radiant temperature, relative humidity, clothing, and activity
levels. This model forms the basis of standards for thermal conditions in sealed, air-conditioned buildings (typical in
North America), with the target being the achievement of conditions that 80% of the population will find satisfactory
(ASHRAE, 2004).
(p. 259) Although this model has dominated North American engineering practice for 40 years, its limitations have
long been apparent in the literature. Rohles (1980) reviewed five studies showing that context influences thermal
comfort. Newsham and Tiller (1997) found that the Fanger model predicted only 11% of the variance in thermal
sensation scores. Humphreys and Hancock (2007) asked respondents both their desired sensation and their
thermal sensation. More than half the time, the desired sensation was not neutral and there was substantial
individual variation in desired sensation.
Elsewhere in the world, natural ventilation (i.e., using windows that open) is more common than it is in North
America. In naturally ventilated buildings the PMV-PPD model is not predictive of thermal comfort (de Dear, 2004;
Wagner et al., 2007). Better prediction is possible using the adaptive model of thermal comfort, which takes
contextual factors into account, such as the individuals past thermal history, his or her expectations for the
thermal environment, and behavioral adjustments he or she makes (Brager & de Dear, 1998).
Ventilation
The North American standard for the supply of fresh air in mechanically ventilated buildings specifies that a volume
of 10 L/s/person of outdoor air should be provided (ASHRAE, 2001). The level was set with the aim of providing
sufficient outdoor air to remove pollutants (including carbon dioxide created by occupants) to maintain health and
comfort, and in parallel to limit energy use. In cold climates the outdoor air must be heated in winter, and in all
seasons fans are required to move the air.
The evidence is mounting, however, that this level may be too low. A multidisciplinary panel of European experts
(although not including any psychologists) reviewed the literature in 2002 and concluded that as much as 25
L/s/person might be needed for adequate comfort and health (Wargocki et al., 2002). They also noted that many of
the initially identified papers had to be excluded because of methodological limitations. Charles and Veitch (2002)
made some of the same criticisms; although they did not view the evidence in favor of levels above 10 L/s/person
as being clear, they did conclude that levels lower than this are clearly too low.
Many studies are limited to physical data at the building or perhaps the floor level; few have data on local
conditions in workstations. Therefore, there is little data on the achievement of the design conditions in the places
where people work. Charles et al. (2006) analyzed data from a study of ~770 North American workstations. The
dependent variable was a satisfaction with ventilation scale for which ratings of satisfaction with temperature, air
movement, and overall air quality were averaged (Veitch, Charles, Farley, & Newsham, 2007). The physical
conditions generally met the applicable standards (e.g., the mean carbon dioxide, or CO2 , concentration was 648
ppm [Charles et al., 2006], whereas the standard specifies 1,000 ppm as the upper limit [ASHRAE, 2001]).
Satisfaction with ventilation showed the predicted inverse relationship with CO2 , with satisfaction being higher when
CO2 levels were lower.
Newsham et al., (2008) used log-linear models to analyze the risk of dissatisfaction with this data set, and found
that people whose local CO2 levels were above 650 ppm had a three-times-higher risk of dissatisfaction with
ventilation. Other risk groups for dissatisfaction with ventilation were those who were either next to, or very far
away from, a window; experienced a temperature more than 0.5 degree C away from the calculated neutral
temperature; or were female.
Page 12 of 34
Work Environments
The North American workstation environmental satisfaction project cited earlier explicitly took an integrated
approach (Newsham et al., 2008; Veitch et al., 2003). All results and reports from the Cost-effective Open-Plan
Environments project are available online at www.nrc-cnrc.gc.ca/eng/projects/irc/cope.html. Its field study led to
the development of three separate scales for satisfaction with lighting; privacy and acoustics; and ventilation and
indoor air quality. There also was a separate scale for overall environmental satisfaction and one for job
satisfaction. Physical conditions in all environmental domains were measured simultaneously with the (p. 260)
occupant surveys. Domain-specific and general regressions were run. The value of this approach is evident when
one considers the different results for different satisfaction domains. For example, satisfaction with lighting was
highest for people next to a window, but satisfaction with ventilation and overall environmental satisfaction were
better for people in the second row (who benefit from the daylight without potential thermal problems) (Veitch et al.,
2003).
Bluyssen et al. (2011) tested regression models for overall comfort on a large European data set for which both
summer and winter data were available (N > 5,700). The outcome measures were derived from averages of scores
for comfort with individual dimensions (e.g., noise, lighting, etc.). The predictors were self-reported adequacy of
building conditions (view; environmental controls; and privacy, cleanliness, decor, and layout as one office
conditions scale) and office characteristics (cardinal orientation). The models showed strong effects (~25%
explained variance) for which the predictors differed in summer and winter. The strongest predictors in both
seasons were the reported quality of the view and the overall satisfaction with the office conditions. However, the
between-building differences were large enough to lead the authors to suggest that future studies require
additional data collection concerning individual and social variables, before the desired practical shortcuts for
building design can be developed.
Inadequate datanot enough studiesis a common refrain in this domain. Frontczak and Wargocki (2011)
reviewed the literature on workplace comfort, seeking studies that would permit the development of a ranking of the
importance of comfort in the domains thermal, lighting, acoustics, and air quality. They observed that such a
ranking would permit practical judgments to be made about which condition to address first. It was evident that
when such a ranking was possible, thermal comfort was the highest priority for occupants. However, they also
noted that there are too few studies to determine whether the importance of the domain is related to the level of
satisfaction with it. Some studies have found that when satisfaction with a building condition is high, the importance
of that condition is lower (Boubekri & Haghighat, 1993; Veitch et al., 2003). As did Bluyssen et al. (2011), Frontczak
and Wargocki (2011) called for more studies, and stronger methodologies, concerning the effects of personal and
organizational characteristics on comfort.
Ergonomists have begun to distinguish between comfort and discomfort as separate dimensions (Helander &
Zhang, 1997; Zhang, Helander, & Drury, 1996). This approach has had little influence as yet outside the domain of
product development. The studies cited here have considered comfort to be a unidimensional concept with a
negative state (discomfort) and a positive state (comfort), and largely synonymous with the concept of satisfaction
with the physical environment. Vink and Hallbeck (2011) have proposed a new model of comfort that differentiates
between comfort, neutral, and discomfort outcomes resulting from individual, environmental, and contextual
aspects of exposures. Whether indoor environment researchers (from any discipline) take up and test this model
remains to be seen.
Noise
Page 13 of 34
Work Environments
Noise is among the most-studied stressors. Apart from its effects on hearing, chronically high levels of community
noise have detrimental effects on health and well-being, influencing outcomes from annoyance to cardiovascular
health (Ising & Kruppa, 2004). This has led the World Health Organization Regional Office for Europe (WHO Europe)
to formulate guidelines for urban noise levels (WHO Europe, 2007).
Exposure to very high noise levels is associated with reports of stress-related health problems. Raffaello and
Maass (2002) observed a decline in reported stress-related health problems among factory workers whose
conditions changed from a range of 7884 dB(A) to 6972 dB(A) as a result (p. 261) of a move to a new factory,
in comparison to a control group whose conditions stayed in the range of 7586 dB(A).
Other investigations have found that the effects of workplace noise on health are interactive rather than simple. In
an industrial setting in Israel where the mean noise level was 71 dB(A), Melamed, Fried, and Froom (2001) found
that the effects of noise exposure on blood pressure and job satisfaction were greater for workers with greater job
complexity. Fried, Melamed, and Ben-David (2002) analyzed noise exposure and sickness absence data from
white-collar workers in Israel. (Both papers used data collected as part of a larger study in industrial organizations
conducted between 1985 and 1987.) The mean noise level was 63 dB(A) for this sample. Sickness absence was,
as predicted, a function of both noise exposure and job complexity. Working on cognitively complex jobs in noisy
conditions had adverse health consequences, particularly for women (Fried et al., 2002).
Evans and Johnson (2000) found that exposure to simulated office noise played at an average level of 55 dB(A)
with peaks to 65 dB(A) in a laboratory setting resulted in increases in epinephrine secretion (but not in cortisol, the
fight or flight hormone), reduced postural adjustments, and behavioral aftereffects typical of motivational deficits,
as compared to the quiet condition of 40 dB(A). A UK field study observed noise conditions in the range 4663
dB(A), with a mean of 55 dB(A) (Leather, Beale, & Sullivan, 2003). Noise did not exert a main effect on self-reported
health symptoms, but did moderate the relationship between job strain and symptom reports. Job strain had no
effect on health symptoms for people in low noise, but the combination of high job strain and high noise exposure
was associated with increased reporting of symptoms of ill health.
Overall, a workplace noise level of 55 dB(A) or higher may contribute to ill health, particularly for people with
complex jobs or who experience high levels of job strain. However, contemporary offices in North America are not
typically this noisy. Two field studies of North American open-plan offices found the median background sound
level to be 46 dB(A) (Veitch et al., 2003; Warnock & Chu, 2002).
Page 14 of 34
Work Environments
organization and the reduction of role stress might be effective responses to the problem of SBS, whereas
interventions designed to increase support from coworkers are less likely to reduce symptom severity.
Control
Classically, stressful conditions are created when environmental stimulation creates demands but one lacks control
over the source of stimulation (e.g., Glass & Singer, 1972). In occupational health psychology the dominant model
for this is the demand-control model (Karasek & Theorell, 1990). In the absence of control over the job (i.e., when
one has (p. 262) little job autonomy), greater demands act as stressors, leading to strain outcomes such as ill
health. In work environment psychology, it has long been thought that the provision of individual environmental
controls would facilitate stress reduction (Becker, 1985). Specifically, giving people control over the stressoror
the perception that they have the power to control the stressorwould be expected to diminish its physiological
and behavioral effects (Averill, 1973; Glass & Singer, 1972).
The demand-control model as understood by occupational health psychologists has been modified to include
social support (Doef & Maes, 1999). The availability of social supportfor example, friendly relations with
coworkerswould be expected to buffer (or prevent) the strain associated with exposure to a stressor, even if the
support does not itself confer actual or perceived control over the stressor. In environmental psychology, this
concept has an extension in the form of organizational support as evidenced in the work space design, the
organizations responsiveness to reported problems in the physical environment, and the involvement of
occupants in design and operation (Becker, 1985; Leaman & Bordass, 2001).
Vischer (2007) integrated negative and positive dimensions of stress in a proposal for a model of what she called
work space stress, a modification of the demand-control model (Karasek & Theorell, 1990). The key concepts in
Vischers model are the psychological demands that the work space makes on the occupant, and the decision
latitude available to the occupant for responding to the demands. Such a model, she argued, could encompass the
conceptual complexity of physical features that simultaneously influence several processes, such as work space
separations that create territories, define the boundaries of privacy, enable social interaction, define work groups
and social networks, and permit distractions, particularly by focusing on the fit of the environmental characteristics
with the needs of the occupant. Decision latitude, according to Vischer, means the degree to which individuals
may participate in determining what the work space conditions will be; a higher degree of decision latitude should
provide a buffer against the adverse effects of high levels of work space demands.
Most studies in this field examine the effects of perceived control (varyingly defined as limited to the physical
environment, or incorporating elements of the job, tasks, or work life) on outcomes such as environmental
satisfaction, job satisfaction, and self-reported job performance. (A few studies have experimentally manipulated
providing physical control; see below.) Lee and Brand (2005) found that perceived environmental control was
positively related to environmental satisfaction directly, and both directly and indirectly related to job satisfaction,
the indirect effect being through an effect on group cohesiveness. Distractions also negatively predicted
environmental satisfaction. Later, the team examined the effect of distractions on perceived (environment and job)
control and self-rated job performance (Lee & Brand, 2010), finding that perceived control mediated the effect of
distractions on performance; that is, where distractions were greater, control was perceived as lower and in turn,
self-rated job performance was also lower.
Through the integration of concepts from organizational psychology and environmental psychology comes a more
nuanced view of the influence of environmental control on employees. ONeill (2010) described environmental
control as about giving people the work space design, furnishings, technology and policy tools that provide
choice over how to work, as opposed to being controlled by the space and organizational policies (p. 133). He
developed a model of controlactual control, not only the perception of itat the individual, group, and
organizational levels, and identified research directions, pointing out that there is ample evidence for the benefits
to individual behavior and performance of adjustability and flexibility in the physical environment, but less evidence
for the consequences at the organizational levelthat is, the effects on business outcomes that will be used to
justify investments.
Knight and Haslam (2010a) conducted two elegant experiments testing hypotheses related to the performance and
satisfaction effects of working in offices they characterized as lean (without decoration), enriched (with plants
Page 15 of 34
Work Environments
and art), empowered (with plants and art chosen by the participant), and disempowered (with plants and art
chosen by the participant but then removed by the experimenter). As predicted, permitting peoples input into the
office decoration improved performance on clerical tasks and well-being (physical comfort, psychological comfort,
and job satisfaction), and removing their choices diminished their performance and well-being.
Knight and Haslam (2010a) did not observe expected effects on organizational identification in these laboratory
settings; they had expected that providing autonomy over the environment would lead to increased organizational
identification. In (p. 263) two field surveys they did find support for such a model (Knight & Haslam, 2010b).
Autonomy over the physical work environment and involvement in it predicted psychological comfort (conceptually
related to what other researchers have called environmental satisfaction; Veitch et al., 2007), which in turn
predicted organizational identification, and this concept in its turn predicted job satisfaction.
Organizational identification as defined by Knight and Haslam (2010b) has similarities to affective organizational
commitment as understood by organizational psychologists (Allen & Meyer, 1996), and in turn managerial control
of space is an element of organizational support, along with human resources practice and policies. Organizational
support is a predictor of affective organizational commitment (Meyer, Stanley, Herscovitch, & Topolnytsky, 2002).
Further exploration of the concepts explored by Knight and Haslam (2010a, 2010b) could provide the needed link
to organizational outcomes, by adding office space management concepts to existing models showing that
business units with greater average job satisfaction show reduced turnover, higher customer satisfaction, and
greater business unit performance (Harter, Schmidt, & Hayes, 2002).
Restoration
In addition to the classical physiological consequences of exposure to stressors (Selye, 1956), contemporary
researchers also hypothesize that demanding environmental conditions force the allocation of attentional
resources to cope with the threat (Hancock, Ross, & Szalma, 2007; Szalma & Hancock, 2011). Kaplan (1995,
2001) argued that natural environments are inherently rich in the properties required to restore directed attention,
such as mystery and coherence. Indeed, environmental psychologists studying homes, workplaces, and
recreation settings have found consistently that access to nature can provide opportunities for restoration from
stressful experiences. This access to nature can take the form of active presence, such as a wilderness hike
(Hartig, Mang, & Evans, 1991) or passive viewing of films (Berman, Jonides, & Kaplan, 2008; Ulrich et al., 1991).
The possibility of restoration might account for the persistent and strong preference for windows in workplaces
(Farley & Veitch, 2001; Veitch et al., 2003). Beyond the simple presence of a window, the amount of view provided
is a predictor of the judged pleasantness of the office (Cetegen, Veitch, & Newsham, 2008) and of satisfaction with
lighting (Newsham, Brand, et al., 2009). The preference for more view seems to cross cultures, as Dogrusoy and
Tureyen (2007) found that occupants of offices in Izmir, Turkey, also preferred window shapes providing more
extensive views. Similarly, Ozdemir (2010), studying the judgments of office occupants in a building in Ankara,
Turkey, found that occupants of offices with more natural views rated their satisfaction with the room more highly.
Chang and Chen (2005) found that watching a nature view and being in the presence of indoor plants reduced
both anxiety and physiological measures of tension and arousal.
Although most investigations have focused on access to nature, the relationship may be more complex. Aris,
Veitch, and Newsham (2010) obtained independent ratings of the attractiveness of office views, and studied both
this variable and the view content (natural vs. urban) as they affected judgments of the room appearance and in
relation to physical and psychological comfort at work and sleep quality at home. The data were obtained from
Dutch office workers, all of whom are guaranteed window access within 5 m of the desk. Those with more attractive
views had more favorable impressions of their offices, better psychological and physical comfort at work, and
better sleep quality at home. The views of nature from this set of offices had contrary effects: they directly
improved office impressions, thereby indirectly contributing to improved psychological and physical comfort;
however, nature views directly reduced comfort, as compared to urban views. The latter finding is very unusual,
and the study awaits replication.
Few field studies are able to incorporate detailed physiological measurements together with self-reported data on
environmental satisfaction, but Thayer et al. (2010) were able to do so in a pre/post comparison of employees in a
building undergoing renovation. Many aspects of the interior design changed in the renovation, making causal
Page 16 of 34
Work Environments
attributions difficult; however, the most salient changes according to the environmental satisfaction questionnaire
were an increase in daylight availability and access to a view, improved lighting quality, and improved air quality.
Overall results of heart-rate variability and cortisol secretion measurements showed lower autonomic activation
and lower stress hormonal response in the new space (Thayer et al., 2010). Whether these results relate to the
light exposure, the view content, or the air qualityor all threecannot be determined from these data.
(p. 264) In many North American buildings, the large floor plate precludes providing window access to all
employees, whereas in many European countries it is a legal requirement (e.g., Danish Building and Housing
Agency, 1995; Government of Norway, 1997). It might be thought that one way to provide a natural element in a
windowless space, or in a windowed space without a nature view, would be to provide plants. Two recent reviews
have concluded that the literature testing this idea has several methodological weaknesses (Bakker & Voordt,
2010; Bringslimark, Hartig, & Patil, 2009). Both reviews concluded that in general, the presence of indoor plants
appears to reduce stress in some fashion, but the precise physiological, affective, or cognitive effects and the
mechanism by which they operate is unknown. Bakker and Voordt (2010) further noted that little attention has been
paid to the type of plant or to its state of health.
Positive Affect
Individual control allows people to influence stressors at work, but also allows the possibility of obtaining conditions
that suit their personal preference. The default conditions might not themselves be stressorsthey might be
adequate conditions for the work to be donebut they might not be those that the individual prefers. By making it
possible for adjustments to be made it becomes possible for individuals to satisfy their desires. In experimental
work, this effect is subtle enough that there might be no main effect of individual control, as seen in Veitch and
Newshams (2000a) study of office lighting levels and light distribution, but large individual differences in preferred
conditions (Veitch & Newsham, 2000b) and evidence that individuals who work under their preferred conditions
experience greater well-being (Newsham & Veitch, 2001).
Positive affect theory is the mechanism by which this effect is thought to operate (Baron, 1994; Isen & Baron,
1991). Regardless of whether one has chosen the conditions or has the power to alter them, working under
preferred conditions can create a state of positive affect that in turn leads to benefits in the form of increased
cooperation, reduced competition, improved intellectual performance, and increased creativity (Baron, 1990;
Baron & Thomley, 1994). Barons experiments concerned scent. Kuller et al. (2006) conducted a multi-nation
survey of office lighting and color conditions and found that when light levels were said to be just right, mood
measures reached their highest levels.
Most thermal environment research is atheoretical, seeking deterministic relationships between environmental
conditions and various experiential and observable outcomes. However, positive affect might be the mechanism
behind findings that are used to justify engineering standards. For example, classroom performance on
standardized tests improved when temperatures were reduced such that students reported neutral comfort rather
than feeling too hot (Wargocki & Wyon, 2007). In the laboratory, when participants work in thermal environmental
conditions close to the neutral point of comfort between too warm and too cold, they show the best
performance on neurobehavioral and clerical tasks (Lan, Wargocki, & Lian, 2011).
The benefits of conditions that create positive affect can be used to justify investments in specific design features
known to be generally preferred, and particularly to support the implementation of individual environmental controls
in offices. Any single design criterion can satisfy only a portion of the population (Newsham & Veitch, 2001),
whereas individual control enables a broad range of conditions to be achieved. This was the motivation behind the
Light Right Consortium laboratory and field investigations of energy-efficient office lighting featuring workstationspecific, individually controllable direct-indirect lighting as the condition thought to create the best overall
environment. Both in the laboratory and in the field, this was the case. In the laboratory, this lighting system was
judged to be the most comfortable and the individual control appeared to provide a buffer against the progression
of fatigue over the workday (Boyce et al., 2006a). In the field, employees with this lighting installation reported
greater satisfaction with lighting, overall environmental satisfaction, job satisfaction, and organizational
commitment, and lower intent to turnover (Veitch et al., 2010).
Three studies, with five independent data sets, have supported a theoretical model in which people who report
Page 17 of 34
Work Environments
better appraisals of their office lighting show predicted beneficial effects through improved mood. Veitch,
Newsham, Boyce, and Jones (2008) used mediated regressions to establish a chain of effects from higher lighting
appraisals through improved room appearance judgments to more pleasant mood and on to improved health and
well-being in the form of physical and visual comfort reports at the end of the workday and higher end-of-day
satisfaction with the environment and their work during the day. Veitch, Stokkermans, and Newsham (in press)
found support for a similar (p. 265) model in which improved mood led to stronger work engagement. Data from
an organization undergoing an office renovation showed support for a model in which lighting appraisals led to
improved room appearance judgments, which in turn led to improved mood; improved mood in turn led to a chain
from improved overall environmental satisfaction to reduced intent to turnover and to a separate chain from
improved mood to reduced health problems in the form of visual and physical discomfort at work and fewer days
absent from work (Veitch et al., 2010). Thus, providing conditions that employees perceive as comfortable or better
has benefits for organizations as well as for the individuals themselves.
Famously, Herzberg (1966) concluded that the physical environment is a hygiene factor in work motivationthat if
the physical conditions are inadequate (e.g., dark, noisy, badly arranged) then motivation will decline, but that
there is no room to improve motivation above the baseline using the work space design or furnishings.
Contemporary researchers would beg to differ. Although most of the recent research testing the positive affect
theory has focused on lighting systems and their individual control, in principle this model could be applied to study
the benefits, to organizations as well as to individuals, of providing environmental conditions that create a state of
comfort or satisfaction.
Cognition
A few investigations have examined how cognitive processes influence ones environmental appraisals or
judgments about work environments. These investigations, although each taking a different perspective, remind us
of moderating effects internal to the observer that influence the processes described above.
Fischer, Tarquinio, and Vischer (2004) examined the influence of the self-schema on environmental appraisals and
job satisfaction. The work environments of the participants were broadly comparable, but the perceptions of those
environments differed for participants with a success-oriented or a failure-oriented professional self-schema. Those
with a success-oriented professional self-schema tended to hold more positive views of their work environments
and of their jobs.
For all but the self-employed, the provision of a work environment is managements responsibility. This has a
physical and a symbolic aspect, in that organizations implicitly communicate the value of the employees in the
office environment provided (Marquardt, Veitch, & Charles, 2002). One would expect this communication function
to influence the organizational identification process that Knight and Haslam (2010b) explored, although no studies
appear to have tested this notion.
Marquardt et al. (2002) concluded that when individuals needs are met by the working conditions provided,
environmental satisfaction is improved. Expressing the relation in this form, there is no room for a positive increase
in environmental satisfaction. Perhaps similarly, Lee (2006) found that when employees expectations for the office
environment are met, satisfaction plateaus; office environments that exceeded expectations did not result in higher
environmental satisfaction. This finding merits further examination, in view of the contrast with the positive affect
results and those of Goins et al. (2010), both discussed above.
Page 18 of 34
Work Environments
concluded that teleworkers desire in their home office the same qualities they would find in the corporate office, but
that there can be challenges to fulfilling these desires. Even for employers with policies that mandate the provision
of equipment and furnishings for home-based work, there is no guarantee that the employees home will have a
suitable space in which to put the office. The health and safety aspects of these issues remain unresolved in both
Canada and the United States; as Ng pointed out, there might be hidden costs to organizations associated with
moving employees out of the corporate office. This area warrants systematic research.
Communications researchers have begun to examine the social dimension of remote working. They note that the
information and communications technologies (ICT) that permit distributed working are paradoxical. Distributed
work means (p. 266) less face-to-face communication, which some argue is a fundamental aspect of work life
(van Meel, 2011), but also creates an expectation of constant, instant availability. Leonardi, Treem, and Jackson
(2010) observed that teleworkers used ICT in covert ways to manage availability so that it appeared that they used
time in the same way as they would have had they been in the corporate office. Leonardi et al. also observed that
some of the same distractions and interruptions that the teleworkers were trying to control, such as e-mail, also
affect workers in the corporate office. Others have found that the reduction in the experience of these stressors
explained higher job satisfaction for teleworkers as compared to office workers (Fonner & Roloff, 2010).
Danielsson and Bodin (2008) presented one of the few studies to consider the effects of hoteling in comparison to
other office types. The flex offices in their sample were assigned on an as-needed, temporary basis, and offered
no opportunity for personalization. Based on the previous discussion concerning territoriality, one would predict
that such an office would increase the employees risk of adverse health and well-being. In this sample, the
reverse was true: people in flex offices had a lower risk of ill health. Why this might be so is unclear from the data.
Summary
Overall, research into the effects of work environments on their occupants since the last major handbook chapter
(McCoy, 2002) has refined rather than revolutionized our understanding. There is a greater understanding of the
influence of the environment on attention processes in particular. Coupled with the increased evidence for the
merits of access to nature to promote restoration, we see the importance of understanding the mechanisms of
action, as these can lead to innovative or unexpected solutions. For example, if it is not possible to entirely remove
the sources of distraction, one might instead seek to provide opportunities for nature restoration.
Page 19 of 34
Work Environments
also save energy; where individuals have the opportunity to control the level of their local lighting, on average the
lighting energy use is ~1015% lower than it would be under a fixed level (Galasiu et al., 2007; Jennings et al.,
2000; Veitch & Newsham, 2000a). Given the benefits of individual control associated with positive affect, this
makes individual control over lighting a benefit to individuals, organizations, and the environment. However, both
the size of the energy savings and the possibility for individuals to obtain their preferred conditions will depend on
the equipment and the control system parameters, such as the possible range of light levels (Boyce et al., 2006b;
Fotios, Logadttir, Cheal, & Christoffersen, 2011; Newsham, Arsenault, Veitch, Tosco, & Duval, 2005), which leaves
room for further research.
As noted above, there is a strong preference for windows in offices and benefits to a view of outside. However,
direct sun causes both thermal and visual discomfort, leading people to lower the blinds. When this occurs early in
the day the tendency is not to raise them again (Reinhart & Voss, 2003), (p. 267) which can lead to an increase
in electric lighting use. The technical solution to this could be to provide automatic blinds, but people dislike fully
automated systems, which take away choice (Galasiu & Veitch, 2006). Cultural factors also influence the response
to automated building controls (Cole & Brown, 2009). Building automation generally is an area in which
psychologists contributions seem an obvious, but unmet, need, as there appear to be no systematic investigations
of the effectiveness or acceptability of these systems for individual occupants or for building operators.
Thermal comfort also offers room for individual action that can reduce energy use, particularly if one adopts the
adaptive model. Few North American buildings provide local options to change the ventilation or temperature, so
most of the research on adaptive responses comes from other continents. With a push from the adoption of energy
codes mandating strict limits on building energy consumption, natural ventilation and passive cooling strategies
become more attractive. Such buildings can have wider variation in thermal conditions than occur in mechanically
ventilated buildings, to which occupants may respond with adaptive behaviors to maintain thermal comfort, such as
adding or removing a layer of clothing, or opening or closing a window (de Dear, 2004). Field surveys reveal that
these occupants can perceive these buildings favorably (Barlow & Fiala, 2007; Wagner et al., 2007), but more
systematic investigations with more robust measurement tools and statistical analysis would support stronger
inferences about the features that work best.
Organizations Behaviors
Environmental psychologists have paid scant attention to organizational decision-making and its influence on
global environmental conditions (Stern, 2011), although a few management and industrial-organizational
psychologists have explored these questions (e.g., Bansal & Roth, 2000). Just as individuals choose to ride a
bicycle or drive a car, switch lights off or on, or purchase an energy-efficient appliance, organizations also make
decisions about their operations, facilities, and policies that influence the state of the environment. The decisions
are not based solely on financial considerations of initial costs or simple payback; for example, those who make
decisions about lighting systems place a high value on employee satisfaction and want to avoid creating problems
that could lead to employee turnover or reduced work output (Light Right Consortium, 2002).
Thus, building practitioners need information about the effects of organizational technology choices on individual
employees to demonstrate that environmentally responsible work environment choices will not have unintended
consequences. For example, demand response describes systems in which large electrical users reduce their
electrical loads by allowing temperature to drift upward and by dimming the lighting, both in response to a request
from the utility company. The system allows utilities to manage the peak demand (particularly on hot summer
afternoons) to maintain the stability of the electrical grid. The electrical user receives an incentive from the utility to
reduce demand, but overall savings will result only if the resulting work environment conditions remain adequate
for the employees. Laboratory and field investigations of the limits of such systems show that, at least for short
periods, people can tolerate these changes provided the change is not too rapid (Akashi & Boyce, 2006; Newsham
et al., 2006; Newsham, Mancini, et al., 2009).
Just as for individuals, the provision of space is a substantial investment for an organization. In the architectural
and design communities, so-called green buildings are in fashion, with the emphasis being on the design and
construction of buildings to meet targets for energy and water use, waste management, and ecologically sound
practices. However, this way of building generally comes at an increased cost that the organization must justify.
Page 20 of 34
Work Environments
Various rating schemes exist, including Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED), Green Globes, and
BREEAM (Portalatin, Koepke, Roskoski, & Shouse, 2010). Although they differ in their details, each aims to reduce
energy and resource use while providing a better indoor environment for occupants. Heerwagen (2000) concluded
that done well, such buildings could result in better well-being for occupants as well as improved organizational
performance and reductions in energy and resource use.
Again, this is a domain in which environmental psychologists and their measurement expertise are needed to
validate the rating schemes and provide feedback on the elements intended to preserve or improve indoor
environmental quality. Evidence that green buildings save energy as intended is mixed (Newsham, Mancini, & Birt,
2009). The limited information available as yet concerning indoor conditions shows that each building has unique
features and context that make case study results difficult to generalize (Brown, Cole, Robinson, & Dowlatabadi,
2010), but environmental psychologists with expertise in post-occupancy evaluation have tools to address this.
One issue that has emerged is acoustical satisfaction, in that some of the design features favored in green
buildings (few interior partitions, to permit daylight penetration, and exposed concrete ceiling slabs, to reduce
material use) lead to higher noise levels and reduced acoustic privacy (Zhang & Altan, 2011).
Summary
Engineers and inventors have developed many technologies to improve building energy efficiency, but their
adoption has been slower than had been hoped (K. Kampschroer, personal communication, Oct. 26, 2010). A likely
reason for this has been the relative absence of psychologists from the development of the technologies and their
deployment. The psychological literature is largely silent concerning the barriers to the adoption and use of
advanced building technologies and the incentives that might motivate more widespread use. Such research
needs to go beyond the general attitude-behavior approach commonly taken in the study of environmentally
responsible behavior to focus on specific structural, informational, and practical barriers as experienced by
various actors in the decision-making system, from vice presidents responsible for facilities through building
engineers who maintain them.
Conclusion
Work environments clearly influence the comfort, satisfaction, mood, performance, and well-being of the people
who work in them. Multiple physiological and psychological processes occur simultaneously and interactively,
often moderated by other contextual and individual conditions, leading together to the behavior of the person in
the space. The march of technology, bringing with it the possibility of working away from the corporate office, does
not change fundamental human nature. Many of the physical conditions of an effective office are the same
regardless of where the work occurs.
Our understanding of the influences of the environment on people at work, and equally our understanding of the
environmental effects of workplace behaviors, is clearly increasing, but is hampered by two problems, one
methodological and one interpersonal. The interpersonal problem arises from the inherently interdisciplinary nature
of work environment research. Understanding work environments ought not to be a purely intellectual exercise, but
one that leads to the design, construction, operation, and occupation of good environments. This requires
psychologists to work together with their counterparts in such fields as engineering, architecture, and physics and
not only with anthropologists and sociologists (Veitch, 2008). Without this, it will be impossible to solve the other
problem, which is methodological.
Many reviewers have noted methodological problems in work environment research (e.g., Bringslimark et al., 2009;
Frontczak & Wargocki, 2011; Winkel, Saegert, & Evans, 2009). To the commonly reported issues (monomethod
bias, inadequate statistical controls, threats to internal validity, etc.), we can add the tendency to emphasize either
the environmental measurements or the behavioral outcomes, each to the detriment of the other. Psychologists
can bring the strength of their research methods and statistical training; building scientists with backgrounds in
engineering or physics tend to bring expertise in measuring physical quantities with great precision. Absent such a
combination, we cannot know exactly which conditions trigger effects or what exactly those effects might be.
Overcoming professional inertia to change our own behavior in this regard will not be easy, but psychologists have
Page 21 of 34
Work Environments
the tools for behavior change. Using them, we can reap the rewards of increased influence over the environments
we all inhabit (Veitch, 2008).
Future Directions
Key research directions for work environment psychology to address in the near term include:
What are the space and physical accommodation needs of the increasingly prevalent older office employee?
How do they differ from youth entering the workforcefor example, in the experience of and expectation for
privacy (cf. Smith, 2008)?
What are the prospects for an integrated theory of comfort, encompassing the broad variety of indoor
conditions and bringing together the work of psychologists, engineers, and ergonomists (cf. Bluyssen et al.,
2011; Reffat & Harkness, 2001; Vink & Hallbeck, 2011)?
What are the balancing points between competing processes? For example, when is the inter-workstation
distance sufficient for privacy, and when does isolation begin? When does background sound provide a
desirable mask for intrusive speech, and when does it become annoying? How much environmental control
enables individualized (p. 269) environments, and when does the abundance of choice become a stressor in
itself? Investigations of such questions demand precision about the ranges of the independent variables, and
technical knowledge appropriate to the domain.
What are the costs, and what are the benefits, to individuals and to organizations, of space management
policies that include telework, hoteling, and similar practices that eliminate individual territories at the corporate
office? What contextual factors contribute to their success, or their failure? - What beliefs, knowledge, attitudes,
or other factors have prevented organizationsor key individuals within organizationsfrom adopting novel
environmental technologies? What specific information do decision-makers need to justify the investment?
References
aan het Rot, M., Moskowitz, D. S., & Young, S. N. (2008). Exposure to bright light is associated with positive social
interaction and good mood over short time periods: A naturalistic study in mildly seasonal people. Journal of
Psychiatric Research, 42(4), 311319.
Acoustical Society of America Standards Secretariat (ASA). (1997). Methods for calculation of the speech
intelligibility index (ANSI S3.51997). New York: ASA.
Akashi, Y., & Boyce, P. R. (2006). A field study of illuminance reduction. Energy and Buildings, 38(6), 588599.
Albrecht, D., & Broikos, C. B. (Eds.). (2000). On the job: Design and the American office. Washington, DC: National
Building Museum.
Allen, N. J., & Meyer, J. P. (1996). Affective, continuance, and normative commitment to the organization: An
examination of construct validity. Journal of Vocational Behavior, 49(3), 252276.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). (1993). Standard guide for open offices acoustics and
applicable ASTM standards. (ASTM E1374). Philadelphia, PA: ASTM.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). (2001). Ventilation for
acceptable indoor air quality. (ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 622001). Atlanta, GA: ASHRAE.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). (2004). Thermal
environmental conditions for human occupancy. (ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 55). Atlanta, GA: ASHRAE.
Andersson, L. M., & Bateman, T. S. (2000). Individual environmental initiative: Championing natural environmental
issues in U.S. business organizations. Academy of Management Journal, 43(4), 548570. doi: 10.2307/1556355
Aris, M. B. C., Veitch, J. A., & Newsham, G. R. (2010). Windows, view, and office characteristics predict physical
and psychological discomfort. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30(4), 533541. doi:
10.1016/j.jenvp.2009.12.004
Page 22 of 34
Work Environments
Averill, J. R. (1973). Personal control over aversive stimuli and its relationship to stress. Psychological Bulletin,
80(4), 286303. doi: 10.1037/h0034845
Bakker, I., & Voordt, T. v. d. (2010). The influence of plants on productivity: A critical assessment of research
findings and test methods. Facilities, 28(9), 416439.
Banbury, S. P., & Berry, D. C. (1998). Disruption of office-related tasks by speech and office noise. British Journal
of Psychology, 89, 499517.
Banbury, S. P., & Berry, D. C. (2005). Office noise and employee concentration: Identifying causes of disruption
and potential improvements. Ergonomics, 48(1), 2537.
Banbury, S. P., Macken, W. J., Tremblay, S., & Jones, D. M. (2001). Auditory distraction and short-term memory:
Phenomena and practical implications. Human Factors, 43(1), 1229.
Bansal, P., & Roth, K. (2000). Why companies go green: A model of ecological responsiveness. Academy of
Management Journal, 43(4), 717736. doi: 10.2307/1556363
Barlow, S., & Fiala, D. (2007). Occupant comfort in UK officesHow adaptive comfort theories might influence
future low energy office refurbishment strategies: Comfort and energy use in buildingsGetting them right. Energy
and Buildings, 39(7), 837846.
Baron, R. A. (1990). Environmentally induced positive affect: Its impact on self-efficacy, task performance,
negotiation, and conflict. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 20(5), 368384.
Baron, R. A. (1994). The physical environment of work settings: Effects on task performance, interpersonal
relations, and job satisfaction. Research in Organizational Behavior, 16, 146.
Baron, R. A., & Thomley, J. (1994). A whiff of reality: Positive affect as a potential mediator of the effects of pleasant
fragrances on task performance and helping. Environment and Behavior, 26(6), 766784.
Beach, L. R., Wise, B. K., & Wise, J. A. (1988). The human factors of color in environmental design: A critical
review. (NAS 1.26:177498; NASA-CR-177498; NTIS Accession No. N8915532/9). Seattle: University of
Washington, Department of Psychology.
Becker, F. D. (1985). Quality of work environment (QWE): Effects on office workers. Prevention in Human Services,
4(12), 3557.
Berman, M. G., Jonides, J., & Kaplan, S. (2008). The cognitive benefits of interacting with nature. Psychological
Science, 19(12), 12071212. doi: 10.1111/j.14679280.2008.02225.x
Berman, S. M. (1992). Energy efficiency consequences of scotopic sensitivity. Journal of the Illuminating
Engineering Society, 21(1), 314.
Berson, D. M., Dunn, F. A., & Takao, M. (2002). Phototransduction by retinal ganglion cells that set the circadian
clock. Science, 295(5557), 10701073.
(p. 270) Bluyssen, P. M., Aris, M. B. C., & van Dommelen, P. (2011). Comfort of workers in office buildings: The
European HOPE project. Building and Environment, 46(1), 280288.
Boubekri, M., & Haghighat, F. (1993). Windows and environmental satisfaction: A survey study of an office building.
Indoor and Built Environment, 2(3), 164172.
Boyce, P. R. (2006). Lemmings, light, and health. Leukos, 2(3), 175184.
Boyce, P. R., Akashi, Y., Hunter, C. M., & Bullough, J. D. (2003). The impact of spectral power distribution on the
performance of an achromatic visual task. Lighting Research and Technology, 35(2), 141161.
Boyce, P. R., Veitch, J. A., Newsham, G. R., Jones, C. C., Heerwagen, J. H., Myer, M., & Hunter, C. M. (2006a).
Lighting quality and office work: Two field simulation experiments. Lighting Research and Technology, 38(3), 191
Page 23 of 34
Work Environments
223.
Boyce, P. R., Veitch, J. A., Newsham, G. R., Jones, C. C., Heerwagen, J. H., Myer, M., & Hunter, C. M. (2006b).
Occupant use of switching and dimming controls in offices. Lighting Research and Technology, 38(4), 358378.
Brager, G. S., & de Dear, R. J. (1998). Thermal adaptation in the built environment: A literature review. Energy and
Buildings, 27, 8396.
Brainard, G. C., & Provencio, I. (2006). Photoreception for the neurobehavioral effects of light in humans.
Proceedings of the 2nd CIE Expert Symposium on Lighting and Health, Ottawa, Canada (Vol. CIE x031:2006, pp.
621). Vienna, Austria: CIE.
Brainard, G. C., & Veitch, J. A. (2007). Lighting and health workshopFinal report. Proceedings of the 26th session
of the Commission Internationale de lEclairage, Beijing, China, 411 July 2007 (Vol. CIE 178:2007 Vol. 2, pp.
550553). Vienna, Austria: CIE.
Brand, J. L. (2008). Office ergonomics: A review of pertinent research and recent developments. In C. M. Carswell
(Ed.), Reviews of Human Factors and Ergonomics (Vol. 4, pp. 245282). Santa Monica, CA: Human Factors &
Ergonomics Society.
Brasche, S., Bullinger, M., Morfeld, M., Gebhardt, H. J., & Bischop, W. (2001). Why do women suffer from sick
building syndrome more often than men? Subjective higher sensitivity versus objective causes. Indoor Air, 11(4),
217222.
Brennan, A., Chugh, J. S., & Kline, T. (2002). Traditional versus open office design: A longitudinal field study.
Environment and Behavior, 34(3), 279299.
Brill, M., Margulis, S. T., Konar, E., & BOSTI. (Eds.). (1984). Using office design to increase productivity. Buffalo, NY:
Workplace Design and Productivity.
Brill, M., Weidemann, S., & BOSTI. (Eds.). (2001). Disproving widespread myths about workplace design. Jasper,
IN: Kimball International.
Bringslimark, T., Hartig, T., & Patil, G. G. (2009). The psychological benefits of indoor plants: A critical review of the
experimental literature. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 29(4), 422433. doi: 10.1016/j.jenvp.2009.05.001
Brown, Z., Cole, R. J., Robinson, J., & Dowlatabadi, H. (2010). Evaluating user experience in green buildings in
relation to workplace culture and context. Facilities, 28(34), 225238.
Cetegen, D., Veitch, J. A., & Newsham, G. R. (2008). View size and office luminance effects on employee
satisfaction. In A. Orgulan (Ed.), Proceedings of Balkan Light 2008, Ljubljana, Slovenia, October 710, 2008 (pp.
242252). Maribor, Slovenia: Lighting Engineering Society of Slovenia.
Chang, C.-Y., & Chen, P.-K. (2005). Human response to window views and indoor plants in the workplace.
HortScience, 40(5), 13541359.
Charles, K. E., & Veitch, J. A. (2002). A literature review on the relationship between outdoor ventilation rates in
offices and occupant satisfaction. (NRC/IRC Research Report RR-160). Ottawa, Canada: NRC Institute for Research
in Construction. Retrieved from www.nrc-cnrc.gc.ca/obj/irc/doc/pubs/rr/rr160/rr160.pdf.
Charles, K. E., Veitch, J. A., Newsham, G. R., Marquardt, C. J. G., & Geerts, J. (2006). Satisfaction with ventilation in
open-plan offices: COPE field findings. In E. de Oliveira Fernandes, M. Gameiro da Silva, & J. Rosado Pinto (Eds.),
Proceedings of Healthy Buildings 2006: Creating a healthy indoor environment for people (Vol. 2, pp. 9398).
Lisboa, Portugal: International Society of Indoor Air Quality and Climate.
Cole, R. J., & Brown, Z. (2009). Reconciling human and automated intelligence in the provision of occupant comfort.
Intelligent Buildings International, 1(1), 3955.
Collins, B. L. (1976). Review of the psychological reaction to windows. Lighting Research and Technology, 8(2),
8088. doi: 10.1177/14771535760080020601
Page 24 of 34
Work Environments
Commission Internationale de lEclairage (CIE). (2009). Ocular lighting effects on human physiology and
behaviour. (CIE 158:2009). Vienna, Austria: CIE.
Craik, K. H. (1996). Environmental psychology: A core field within psychological science. American Psychologist,
51, 11861187.
Danielsson, B. C., & Bodin, L. (2008). Office type in relation to health, well-being, and job satisfaction among
employees. Environment and Behavior, 40(5), 636668.
Danish Building and Housing Agency. (Ed.). (1995). Building regulations. Copenhagen, Denmark: Danish Ministry
of Housing.
de Dear, R. (2004). Thermal comfort in practice. Indoor Air, 14(7), 3239.
de Kort, Y. A. W., & Smolders, K. C. H. J. (2010). Effects of dynamic lighting on office workers: First results of a field
study with monthly alternating settings. Lighting Research and Technology, 42(3), 345360.
DiLaura, D. L. (2005). Editorial: The next big thing. Maybe. Leukos, 2(1), 46.
DiLaura, D. L., Houser, K. W., Mistrick, R. G., & Steffy, G. R. (2011). The lighting handbook (10th ed.). New York:
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.
Doef, M. V. D., & Maes, S. (1999). The job demand-control(-support) model and psychological well-being: A review
of 20 years of empirical research. Work and Stress, 13(2), 87114.
Dogrusoy, I. T., & Tureyen, M. (2007). A field study on determination of preferences for windows in office
environments. Building and Environment, 42(10), 36603668.
Duval, C. L., Charles, K. E., & Veitch, J. A. (2002). A literature review on the effects of open-plan office density on
environmental satisfaction. (IRC-RR-150). Ottawa, Canada: NRC Institute for Research in Construction. Retrieved
from www.nrc-cnrc.gc.ca/obj/irc/doc/pubs/rr/rr150/rr150.pdf.
Eastman, C. I., & Martin, S. K. (1999). How to use light and dark to produce circadian adaptation to night shift work.
Annals of Medicine, 31, 8798.
Evans, G. W., Becker, F. D., Zahn, A., Bilotta, E., & Keesee, A. M. (2012). Capturing the ecology of workplace stress
with cumulative risk assessment. Environment and behavior, 44(1), 136154. doi: 10.1177/0013916510389981
(p. 271) Evans, G. W., & Johnson, D. (2000). Stress and open-office noise. Journal of Applied Psychology, 85,
779783.
Evans, G. W., & Stecker, R. (2004). Motivational consequences of environmental stress. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 24(2), 143165.
Fanger, P. O. (1970). Thermal comfort: Analysis and applications in environmental engineering. Copenhagen,
Denmark: Danish Technical Press.
Farley, K. M. J., & Veitch, J. A. (2001). A room with a view: A review of the effects of windows on work and wellbeing. (IRC-RR-136). Ottawa, Canada: NRC Institute for Research in Construction. Retrieved from www.nrccnrc.gc.ca/obj/irc/doc/pubs/rr/rr136/rr136.pdf.
Fischer, G. N., Tarquinio, C., & Vischer, J. C. (2004). Effects of the self-schema on perception of space at work.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 24(1), 131140.
Fonner, K. L., & Roloff, M. E. (2010). Why teleworkers are more satisfied with their jobs than are office-based
workers: When less contact is beneficial. Journal of Applied Communication Research, 38(4), 336361.
Fotios, S. A., Logadttir, ., Cheal, C., & Christoffersen, J. (2011). Using adjustment to define preferred illuminances:
Do the results have any value? Proceedings of the 27th session of the Commission Internationale de lEclairage,
Sun City, South Africa (Vol. 1, Part 1, pp. 203212). Vienna, Austria: CIE.
Page 25 of 34
Work Environments
Fried, Y., Melamed, S., & Ben-David, H. A. (2002). The joint effects of noise, job complexity, and gender on
employee sickness absence: An exploratory study across 21 organizationsThe CORDIS study. Journal of
Occupational and Organizational Psychology, 75, 131144.
Frontczak, M., & Wargocki, P. (2011). Literature survey on how different factors influence human comfort in indoor
environments. Building and Environment, 46(4), 922937. doi: 10.1016/j.buildenv.2010.10.021
Galasiu, A. D., & Newsham, G. R. (2009). Energy savings due to occupancy sensors and personal controls: A pilot
field study. Proceedings of Lux Europa 2009, Istanbul, Turkey (pp. 745752). Istanbul: Turkish National Committee
on Illumination.
Galasiu, A. D., Newsham, G. R., Suvagau, C., & Sander, D. M. (2007). Energy-saving lighting control systems for
open-plan offices: A field study. Leukos, 4(1), 729.
Galasiu, A. D., & Veitch, J. A. (2006). Occupant preferences and satisfaction with the luminous environment and
control systems in daylit offices: A literature review. Energy and Buildings, 38(7), 728742.
Galt, V. (2002, September 25). Inside the box. Globe and Mail, C1, C10.
Gamlin, P. D. R., McDougal, D. H., Pokorny, J., Smith, V. C., Yau, K. W., & Dacey, D. M. (2007). Human and macaque
pupil responses driven by melanopsin-containing retinal ganglion cells. Vision Research, 47(7), 946954.
Geller, E. S. (1987). Applied behavior analysis and environmental psychology: From strange bedfellows to a
productive marriage. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.), Handbook of environmental psychology (Vol. 1, pp. 361
388). New York: Wiley.
Gifford, R. (2007). Environmental psychology: Principles and practice (4th ed.). Victoria, Canada: Optimal Books.
Glass, D. C., & Singer, J. E. (Eds.). (1972). Urban stress: Experiments on noise and social stressors. New York:
Academic Press.
Goins, J., Jellema, J., & Zhang, H. (2010). Architectural enclosures effect on office worker performance: A
comparison of the physical and symbolic attributes of workspace dividers. Building and Environment, 45(4), 944
948.
Gomzi, M., Bobic, J., Radosevic-Vidacek, B., Macan, J., Varnai, V. M., Milkovic-Kraus, S., & Kanceljak-Macan, B.
(2007). Sick building syndrome: Psychological, somatic, and environmental determinants. Archives of
Environmental and Occupational Health, 62(3), 147155.
Gordijn, M. C. M., Gimnez, M. C., & Beersma, D. G. M. (2009). Lightwatchers: A new ambulatory recording system
in humans. Paper presented at the Society for Light Treatment and Biological Rhythms, Berlin, Germany.
Government of Norway. (1997). 835. Lys Forskrift om krav til byggverk og produkter til byggverk (TEK)
[Regulation on demands for buildings and products for buildings] (Vol. FOR 19970122 nr 33). Oslo: Government
of Norway.
Hancock, P. A., Ross, J. M., & Szalma, J. L. (2007). A meta-analysis of performance response under thermal
stressors. Human Factors, 49(5), 851877.
Harter, J. K., Schmidt, F. L., & Hayes, T. L. (2002). Business-unit-level relationship between employee satisfaction,
employee engagement, and business outcomes: A meta-analysis. Journal of Applied Psychology, 87(2), 268279.
Hartig, T., Mang, M., & Evans, G. W. (1991). Restorative effects of natural environment experiences. Environment
and Behavior, 23, 326.
Hattar, S., Liao, H. W., Takao, M., Berson, D. M., & Yau, K. W. (2002). Melanopsin-containing retinal ganglion cells:
Architecture, projections, and intrinsic photosensitivity. Science, 295(5557), 10651070.
Haynes, B. P. (2007). Office productivity: A shift from cost reduction to human contribution. Facilities, 25(11/12),
452462.
Page 26 of 34
Work Environments
Haynes, B. P. (2008). An evaluation of the impact of the office environment on productivity. Facilities, 26(5/6), 178
195.
Hbert, M., Dumont, M., & Paquet, J. (1998). Seasonal and diurnal patterns of human illumination under natural
conditions. Chronobiology International, 15(1), 5970.
Hedge, A., Sims, W. R., & Becker, F. D. (1995). Effects of lensed-indirect and parabolic lighting on the satisfaction,
visual health, and productivity of office workers. Ergonomics, 38(2), 260280.
Heerwagen, J. H. (2000). Green buildings, organizational success, and occupant productivity. Building Research &
Information, 28(56), 353367.
Heerwagen, J. H., Kampschroer, K., Powell, K. M., & Loftness, V. (2004). Collaborative knowledge work
environments. Building Research & Information, 32(6), 510528.
Helander, M. G., & Zhang, L. (1997). Field studies of comfort and discomfort in sitting. Ergonomics, 40(9), 895915.
Herzberg, F. I. (1966). Work and the nature of man. Oxford, UK: World.
Hodgson, M. (2002). Indoor environmental exposures and symptoms. Environmental Health Perspectives,
110(Suppl. 4), 663667.
Hoonhout, H. C. M., Knoop, M., & Vanpol, R. (2009). Colored lighting in offices the new caffeine? Looking into
performance effects of colored lighting. Proceedings of the Human Factors and Ergonomics Society 53rd annual
meeting (pp. 502506). Santa Monica, CA: HFES.
Houser, K. W., Tiller, D. K., Bernecker, C. A., & Mistrick, R. G. (2002). The subjective response to linear fluorescent
direct/ (p. 272) indirect lighting systems. Lighting Research and Technology, 34(3), 243264.
Hubalek, S., Brink, M., & Schierz, C. (2010). Office workers daily exposure to light and its influence on sleep quality
and mood. Lighting Research and Technology, 42(1), 3350.
Humphreys, M. A., & Hancock, M. (2007). Do people like to feel neutral?: Exploring the variation of the desired
thermal sensation on the ASHRAE scale: Comfort and energy use in buildingsGetting them right. Energy and
Buildings, 39(7), 867874.
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA). (2004). American national standard practice for office
lighting. (ANSI/IESNA-RP-12004). New York: IESNA.
Isen, A. M., & Baron, R. A. (1991). Positive affect as a factor in organizational behavior. In B. M. Staw & L. L.
Cummings (Eds.), Research in organizational behavior (Vol. 13, pp. 153). Greenwich, CT: JAI Press.
Ising, H., & Kruppa, B. (2004). Health effects caused by noise: Evidence in the literature from the past 25 years.
Noise and Health, 6(22), 513.
Jennings, J. D., Rubinstein, F. M., DiBartolomeo, D., & Blanc, S. L. (2000). Comparison of control options in private
offices in an advanced lighting controls testbed. Journal of the Illuminating Engineering Society, 29(2), 3955.
Kaarlela-Tuomaala, A., Helenius, R., Keskinen, E., & Hongisto, V. (2009). Effects of acoustic environment on work in
private office rooms and open-plan officesLongitudinal study during relocation. Ergonomics, 52(11), 14231444.
Kaida, K., Takahashi, M., Haratani, T., Otsuka, Y., Fukasawa, K., & Nakata, A. (2006). Indoor exposure to natural
bright light prevents afternoon sleepiness. Sleep, 29(4), 462469.
Kaplan, S. (1995). The restorative benefits of nature: Toward an integrative framework. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 15(3), 169182.
Kaplan, S. (2001). Meditation, restoration, and the management of mental fatigue. Environment and Behavior, 33,
480506.
Karasek, R., & Theorell, T. (1990). Healthy work: Stress, productivity, and the reconstruction of working life. New
Page 27 of 34
Work Environments
York: Basic Books.
Knight, C., & Haslam, S. A. (2010a). The relative merits of lean, enriched, and empowered offices: An experimental
examination of the impact of workspace management strategies on well-being and productivity. Journal of
Experimental Psychology: Applied, 16(2), 158172. doi: 10.1037/a0019292
Knight, C., & Haslam, S. A. (2010b). Your place or mine? Organizational identification and comfort as mediators of
relationships between the managerial control of workspace and employees satisfaction and well-being. British
Journal of Management, 21(3), 717735.
Kompier, M. A. (2006). The Hawthorne effect is a myth, but what keeps the story going? Scandinavian Journal of
Work, Environment, and Health, 32(5), 402412.
Kller, R., Ballal, S., Laike, T., Mikellides, B., & Tonello, G. (2006). The impact of light and colour on psychological
mood: A cross-cultural study of indoor work environments. Ergonomics, 49(14), 14961507. doi:
10.1080/00140130600858142
Kller, R., Mikellides, B., & Janssens, J. (2009). Color, arousal, and performanceA comparison of three
experiments. Color Research & Application, 34(2), 141152.
Kwallek, N., Soon, K., & Lewis, C. M. (2007). Work week productivity, visual complexity, and individual
environmental sensitivity in three offices of different color interiors. Color Research & Application, 32(2), 130143.
Lan, L., Wargocki, P., & Lian, Z. (2011). Quantitative measurement of productivity loss due to thermal discomfort.
Energy and Buildings, 43(5), 10571062.
Leaman, A., & Bordass, B. (2001). Assessing building performance in use. 4: The Probe occupant surveys and their
implications. Building Research & Information, 29(2), 129143.
Leather, P., Beale, D., & Sullivan, L. (2003). Noise, psychosocial stress, and their interaction in the workplace.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 23(2), 213222.
Lee, S. Y. (2006). Expectations of employees toward the workplace and environmental satisfaction. Facilities,
24(9/10), 343353.
Lee, S. Y., & Brand, J. L. (2005). Effects of control over office workspace on perceptions of the work environment
and work outcomes. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 25(3), 323333.
Lee, S. Y., & Brand, J. L. (2010). Can personal control over the physical environment ease distractions in office
workplaces? Ergonomics, 53(3), 324335.
Leonardi, P. M., Treem, J. W., & Jackson, M. H. (2010). The connectivity paradox: Using technology to both
decrease and increase perceptions of distance in distributed work arrangements. Journal of Applied
Communication Research, 38(1), 85105.
Lets chuck the cubicles! (2011, February). Managing People at Work, 347, 5.
Light Right Consortium. (2002). Lighting values. Richland, WA: Battelle/Pacific Northwest National Laboratory.
Lindelf, D., & Morel, N. (2008). Bayesian estimation of visual discomfort. Building Research & Information, 36(1),
8396.
Linhard, J. B. (2005). Understanding the return on health, safety, and environmental investments. Journal of Safety
Research, 36(3), 257260.
Maher, A., & Hippel, C. v. (2005). Individual differences in employee reactions to open-plan offices. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 25(2), 219229.
Marquardt, C. J. G., Veitch, J. A., & Charles, K. E. (2002). Environmental satisfaction with open-plan office furniture
design and layout. (IRC-RR-106). Ottawa, Canada: NRC Institute for Research in Construction. Retrieved from
Page 28 of 34
Work Environments
www.nrc-cnrc.gc.ca/obj/irc/doc/pubs/rr/rr106/rr106.pdf.
McCoy, J. M. (2002). Work environments. In R. B. Bechtel & A. Churchman (Eds.), Handbook of environmental
psychology (2nd ed., pp. 443460). New York: Wiley.
McDougal, D. H., & Gamlin, P. D. (2010). The influence of intrinsically photosensitive retinal ganglion cells on the
spectral sensitivity and response dynamics of the human pupillary light reflex. Vision Research, 50(1), 7287.
Melamed, S., Fried, Y., & Froom, P. (2001). The interactive effect of chronic exposure to noise and job complexity
on changes in blood pressure and job satisfaction: A longitudinal study of industrial employees. Journal of
Occupational Health Psychology, 6(3), 182195.
Mendell, M. J. (2003). Indices for IEQ and building-related symptoms. Indoor Air, 13(4), 364368.
Mendell, M. J., Lei-Gomez, Q., Mirer, A. G., Seppnen, O. A., & Brunner, G. (2008). Risk factors in heating,
ventilating, and air-conditioning systems for occupant symptoms in US office buildings: The US EPA BASE study.
Indoor Air, 18(4), 301316.
Mendelson, M. B., Catano, V. M., & Kelloway, K. (2000). The role of stress and social support in sick building
syndrome. Work and Stress, 14(2), 137155.
(p. 273) Meyer, J. P., Stanley, D. J., Herscovitch, L., & Topolnytsky, L. (2002). Affective, continuance, and
normative commitment to the organization: A meta-analysis of antecedents, correlates, and consequences. Journal
of Vocational Behavior, 61(1), 2052.
Miller, D., Bierman, A., Figueiro, M. G., Schernhammer, E. S., & Rea, M. S. (2010). Ecological measurements of light
exposure, activity, and circadian disruption. Lighting Research and Technology, 42(3), 271284.
Mills, P. R., Tomkins, S. C., & Schlangen, L. J. M. (2007). The effect of high correlated colour temperature office
lighting on employee wellbeing and work performance. Journal of Circadian Rhythms, 5, 2. doi: 10.1186/1740
33915-2.
Mourtada, R. (2011, February 8). Deconstructing the (unloved) cubicle. Globe and Mail, B14.
Navai, M., & Veitch, J. A. (2003). Acoustic satisfaction in open-plan offices: Review and recommendations. (IRCRR-151). Ottawa, Canada: NRC Institute for Research in Construction. Retrieved from www.nrccnrc.gc.ca/obj/irc/doc/pubs/rr/rr151/rr151.pdf.
Neftzger, A. L., & Walker, S. (2010). Measuring productivity loss due to health: A multi-method approach. Journal of
Occupational and Environmental Medicine, 52(5), 486494.
Newsham, G. R., Arsenault, C. D., Veitch, J. A., Tosco, A.-M., & Duval, C. L. (2005). Task lighting effects on office
worker satisfaction and performance, and energy efficiency. Leukos, 1(4), 726.
Newsham, G. R., Brand, J. L., Donnelly, C. L., Veitch, J. A., Aris, M. B. C., & Charles, K. E. (2009). Linking indoor
environment conditions to job satisfaction: A field study. Building Research & Information, 37(2), 129147.
Newsham, G. R., Donnelly, C. L., Mancini, S., Marchand, R. G., Lei, W., Charles, K. E., & Veitch, J. A. (2006). The
effect of ramps in temperature and electric light level on office occupants: A literature review and a laboratory
experiment. Proceedings of the 2006 ACEEE summer study on energy efficiency in buildings (Vol. 4, pp. 252
264). Washington, DC: American Council for an Energy-Efficient Economy.
Newsham, G. R., Mancini, S., & Birt, B. J. (2009). Do LEED-certified buildings save energy? Yes, but Energy and
Buildings, 41(8), 897905.
Newsham, G. R., Mancini, S., Veitch, J. A., Marchand, R. G., Lei, W., Charles, K. E., & Arsenault, C. D. (2009). Control
strategies for lighting and ventilation in offices: Effects on energy and occupants. Intelligent Buildings
International, 1(2), 101121.
Newsham, G. R., & Tiller, D. K. (1997). Field study of office thermal comfort using questionnaire software. ASHRAE
Page 29 of 34
Work Environments
Transactions, 103(pt 2), 317.
Newsham, G. R., & Veitch, J. A. (2001). Lighting quality recommendations for VDT offices: A new method of
derivation. Lighting Research and Technology, 33, 97116.
Newsham, G. R., Veitch, J. A., & Charles, K. E. (2008). Risk factors for dissatisfaction with the indoor environment in
open-plan offices: An analysis of COPE field study data. Indoor Air, 18(4), 271282.
Newsham, G. R., Veitch, J. A., Charles, K. E., Bradley, J. S., Shaw, C.-Y., Reardon, J. T.,Geerts, J. (2003).
Environmental satisfaction in open-plan environments: 4. Relationships between physical variables. (IRC-RR153). Ottawa, Canada: NRC Institute for Research in Construction. Retrieved from www.nrccnrc.gc.ca/obj/irc/doc/pubs/rr/rr153/rr153.pdf.
Ng, C. F. (2010). Teleworkers home office: An extension of corporate office? Facilities, 28(34), 137155.
Norbck, D. (2009). An update on sick building syndrome. Current Opinion in Allergy and Clinical Immunology,
9(1), 5559.
Novaco, R. W., & Gonzalez, O. I. (2009). Commuting and well-being. In Y. Amichai-Hamburger (Ed.), Technology
and psychological well-being (pp. 174205). New York: Cambridge University Press.
ONeill, M. J. (2010). A model of environmental control and effective work. Facilities, 28(34), 118136.
Obayashi, F., Kawauchi, M., Terano, M., Tomita, K., Hattori, Y., Shimoda, H.,Yoshikawa, H. (2007). Development of
an illumination control method to improve office productivity. In M. J. Smith & G. Salvendy (Eds.), Human interface
and the management of information. Interacting in information environments (Lecture Notes in Computer Science
4558/2007, pp. 939947). Berlin: Springer.
Osterhaus, W. K. E. (2005). Discomfort glare assessment and prevention for daylight applications in office
environments. Solar Energy, 79(2), 140158.
Osterhaus, W. K. E. (2008). Analysis of luminance histograms for the assessment of discomfort glare in daylight
offices. In A. Orgulan (Ed.), Proceedings of Balkan Light 2008, Ljubljana, Slovenia, October 710, 2008 (pp. 155
164). Maribor, Slovenia: Lighting Engineering Society of Slovenia.
Osterhaus, W. K. E., & Bailey, I. L. (1992). Large area glare sources and their effect on visual discomfort and visual
performance at computer workstations. Proceedings of the 1992 IEEE Industrial Applications Society Meeting,
Houston, TX, October 49, 1992 (Vol. 2, pp. 18251829). Piscataway, NJ: Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers.
Ozdemir, A. (2010). The effect of window views openness and naturalness on the perception of rooms
spaciousness and brightness: A visual preference study. Scientific Research and Essays, 5(16), 22752287.
Perham, N., Banbury, S. P., & Jones, D. M. (2004). The susceptibility of a call centerlike task to disruption by
extraneous sound: The role of semantic relatedness. Paper presented at the Human Factors and Ergonomics
Society Annual Conference.
Portalatin, M., Koepke, K., Roskoski, M., & Shouse, T. (2010). Green building rating systems. Houston, TX: IFMA
Foundation.
Quality of the Visual Environment Committee. (2009). Light + design: A guide to designing quality lighting for
people and buildings (Vol. DG-18). New York: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.
Raffaello, M., & Maass, A. (2002). Chronic exposure to noise in industry: The effects on satisfaction, stress
symptoms, and company attachment. Environment & Behavior, 34(5), 651671.
Rashid, M., Kampschroer, K., Wineman, J., & Zimring, C. (2006). Spatial layout and face-to-face interaction in
officesA study of the mechanisms of spatial effects on face-to-face interaction. Environment and Planning B:
Planning and Design, 33(6), 825844.
Page 30 of 34
Work Environments
Rea, M. S. (Ed.). (2000). Lighting handbook: Reference & application (9th ed.). New York: Illuminating Engineering
Society of North America.
Rea, M. S., & Ouellette, M. J. (1991). Relative visual performance: A basis for application. Lighting Research and
Technology, 23(3), 135144.
(p. 274) Reffat, R. M., & Harkness, E. L. (2001). Environmental comfort criteria: Weighting and integration. Journal
of Performance of Constructed Facilities, 15(3), 104108.
Reinhart, C. F., & Voss, K. (2003). Monitoring manual control of electric lighting and blinds. Lighting Research and
Technology, 35(3), 243258.
Roethlisberger, F. J., & Dickson, W. J. (1939). Management and the worker. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University
Press.
Rohles, F. H. (1980). Temperature or temperament: A psychologist looks at thermal comfort. ASHRAE Transactions,
86(1), 541551.
Runeson, R., Norback, D., Klinteberg, B., & Edling, C. (2004). The influence of personality, measured by the
Karolinska Scales of Personality (KSP), on symptoms among subjects in suspected sick buildings. Indoor Air, 14(6),
394404.
Runeson, R., Wahlstedt, K., Wieslander, G., & Norback, D. (2006). Personal and psychosocial factors and
symptoms compatible with sick building syndrome in the Swedish workforce. Indoor Air, 16(6), 445453. doi:
10.1111/j.16000668.2006.00438.x
Scherbaum, C. A., Popovich, P. M., & Finlinson, S. (2008). Exploring individual-level factors related to employee
energy-conservation behaviors at work. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 38(3), 818835. doi:
10.1111/j.15591816.2007.00328.x
Schlittmeier, S., J., & Hellbrck, J. (2009). Background music as noise abatement in open-plan offices: A laboratory
study on performance effects and subjective preferences. Applied Cognitive Psychology, 23(5), 684697.
Schwede, D. A., Davies, H., & Purdey, B. (2008). Occupant satisfaction with workplace design in new and old
environments. Facilities, 26(7/8), 273288.
Selye, H. (1956). The stress of life. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Sheedy, J. E., Smith, R., & Hayes, J. (2005). Visual effects of the luminance surrounding a computer display.
Ergonomics, 48(9), 11141128.
Sherrod, D. R. (1974). Crowding, perceived control, and behavioral aftereffects. Journal of Applied Social
Psychology, 4(2), 171186. doi: 10.1111/j.15591816.1974.tb00667.x
Smith-Jackson, T. L., & Klein, K. W. (2009). Open-plan offices: Task performance and mental workload. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 29(2), 279289.
Smith, J. (2008). Designing office space for an ageing workforce in the 21st-century knowledge economy.
Welcoming Workplace. Retrieved from www.welcomingworkplace.com.
Smith, M. R., Fogg, L. F., & Eastman, C. I. (2009). Practical interventions to promote circadian adaptation to
permanent night shift work: Study 4. Journal of Biological Rhythms, 24(2), 161172. doi:
10.1177/0748730409332068
Snow, C. E. (1927). Research on industrial illumination. Tech Engineering News, 8(6), 257, 272274, 282.
Sommer, R., & Augustin, S. (2007). Spatial orientation in the cubicle. Journal of Facilities Management, 5(3), 205
214.
Srqvist, P., Halin, N., & Hygge, S. (2010). Individual differences in susceptibility to the effects of speech on reading
Page 31 of 34
Work Environments
comprehension. Applied Cognitive Psychology, 24(1), 6776.
Space planning and interior design report: How much smaller can we go? (2003, September). Canadian Facility
Management & Design, 1820, 22.
Stern, P. C. (2011). Contributions of psychology to limiting climate change. American Psychologist, 66(4), 303314.
doi: 10.1037/a0023235
Stern, P. C., & Oskamp, S. (1987). Managing scarce environmental resources. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.),
Handbook of environmental psychology (Vol. 2, pp. 10431088). New York: Wiley.
Stokols, D. (1972). On the distinction between density and crowding: Some implications for future research.
Psychological Review, 79(3), 275277. doi: 10.1037/h0032706
Stokols, D. (1995). The paradox of environmental psychology. American Psychologist, 50, 821837.
Stokols, D., Clitheroe, C., & Zmuidzinas, M. (2002). Qualities of work environments that promote perceived support
for creativity. Creativity Research Journal, 14(2), 137147.
Sundstrom, E. (1986). Work places: The psychology of the physical environment in offices and factories. New
York: Cambridge University Press.
Sundstrom, E. (1987). Work environments: Offices and factories. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.), Handbook of
environmental psychology (Vol. 1, pp. 733782). New York: Wiley.
Szalma, J. L., & Hancock, P. A. (2011). Noise effects on human performance: A meta-analytic synthesis.
Psychological Bulletin, 137(4), 682707. doi: 10.1037/a0023987
Thayer, J. F., Verkuil, B., Brosschot, J. F., Kampschroer, K., West, A., Sterling, C.,Sternberg, E. M. (2010). Effects of
the physical work environment on physiological measures of stress. European Journal of Cardiovascular
Prevention and Rehabilitation, 17(4), 431439.
Tuaycharoen, N., & Tregenza, P. R. (2005). Discomfort glare from interesting images. Lighting Research and
Technology, 37(4), 329341.
Ulrich, R. S., Simons, R. F., Losito, B. D., Fiorito, E., et al. (1991). Stress recovery during exposure to natural and
urban environments. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 11(3), 201230.
United States Energy Information Administration. (2009). Annual energy review. Washington, DC: US Department of
Energy. Retrieved from www.eia.doe.gov.
van Bommel, W. J. M., & van den Beld, J. G. (2004). Lighting for work: A review of visual and biological effects.
Lighting Research and Technology, 36, 255269.
Van Den Wymelenberg, K., Inanici, M., & Johnson, P. (2010). The effect of luminance distribution patterns on
occupant preference in a daylit office environment. Leukos, 7(2), 103122.
van Meel, J. (2011). The origins of new ways of working: Office concepts in the 1970s. Facilities, 29(9), 357367.
Veitch, J. A. (2008). Investigating and influencing how buildings affect health: Interdisciplinary endeavours.
Canadian Psychology, 49(4), 281288. doi: 10.1037/a0013567
Veitch, J. A., Bradley, J. S., Legault, L. M., Norcross, S. G., & Svec, J. M. (2002). Masking speech in open-plan
offices with simulated ventilation noise: Noise-level and spectral composition effects on acoustic satisfaction.
(IRC-IR-846). Ottawa, Canada: NRC Institute for Research in Construction. Retrieved from www.nrccnrc.gc.ca/obj/irc/doc/pubs/ir/ir846/ir846.pdf.
Veitch, J. A., Charles, K. E., Farley, K. M. J., & Newsham, G. R. (2007). A model of satisfaction with open-plan office
conditions: COPE field findings. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 27(3), 177189.
Veitch, J. A., Charles, K. E., Newsham, G. R., Marquardt, C. J. G., & Geerts, J. (2003). Environmental satisfaction in
Page 32 of 34
Work Environments
open-plan environments: 5. Workstation and physical condition effects. (IRC-RR-154). Ottawa, Canada: NRC
Institute for (p. 275) Research in Construction. Retrieved from www.nrccnrc.gc.ca/obj/irc/doc/pubs/rr/rr154/rr154.pdf.
Veitch, J. A., & Newsham, G. R. (2000a). Exercised control, lighting choices, and energy use: An office simulation
experiment. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 20, 219237.
Veitch, J. A., & Newsham, G. R. (2000b). Preferred luminous conditions in open-plan offices: Research and practice
recommendations. Lighting Research and Technology, 32, 199212.
Veitch, J. A., Newsham, G. R., Boyce, P. R., & Jones, C. C. (2008). Lighting appraisal, well-being, and performance in
open-plan offices: A linked mechanisms approach. Lighting Research and Technology, 40(2), 133151.
Veitch, J. A., Newsham, G. R., Mancini, S., & Arsenault, C. D. (2010). Lighting and office renovation effects on
employee and organizational well-being. (NRC-IRC RR-306). Ottawa, Canada: NRC Institute for Research in
Construction. Retrieved from www.nrc-cnrc.gc.ca/obj/irc/doc/pubs/rr/rr306.pdf.
Veitch, J. A., Stokkermans, M. G. M., & Newsham, G. R. (in press). Linking lighting appraisals to work behaviors.
Environment and behavior. doi: 10.1177/0013916511420560.
Vink, P., & Hallbeck, S. (2012). Editorial: Comfort and discomfort studies demonstrate the need for a new model.
Applied Ergonomics, 43, 271276.
Viola, A. U., James, L. M., Schlangen, L. J. M., & Dijk, D. J. (2008). Blue-enriched white light in the workplace
improves self-reported alertness, performance, and sleep quality. Scandinavian Journal of Work, Environment, and
Health, 34(4), 297306.
Vischer, J. C. (2007). The effects of the physical environment on job performance: Towards a theoretical model of
workspace stress. Stress and Health, 23(3), 175184.
Wagner, A., Gossauer, E., Moosmann, C., Gropp, T., & Leonhart, R. (2007). Thermal comfort and workplace
occupant satisfactionResults of field studies in German low-energy office buildings: Comfort and energy use in
buildingsGetting them right. Energy and Buildings, 39(7), 758769.
Wargocki, P., Sundell, J., Bischof, W., Brundrett, G. W., Fanger, P. O., Gyntelberg, F.,Wouters, P. (2002).
Ventilation and health in non-industrial indoor environments: Report from a European multidisciplinary scientific
consensus meeting (EUROVEN). Indoor Air, 12(2), 113128.
Wargocki, P., & Wyon, D. P. (2007). The effects of moderately raised classroom temperatures and classroom
ventilation rate on the performance of schoolwork by children. (RP-1257). HVAC & R Research, 13(2), 193220.
Warnock, A. C. C., & Chu, W. T. (2002). Voice and background noise levels measured in open offices. (IRC-IR837). Ottawa, Canada: NRC Institute for Research in Construction. Retrieved from www.nrccnrc.gc.ca/obj/irc/doc/pubs/ir/ir837/ir837.pdf.
Wellens, B. T., & Smith, A. P. (2006). Combined workplace stressors and their relationship with mood, physiology,
and performance. Work and Stress, 20(3), 245258.
Wells, M. M. (2000). Office clutter or meaningful personal displays: The role of office personalization in employee
and organizational well-being. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 20, 239255.
Wells, M. M., & Thelen, L. (2002). What does your workspace say about you? Environment and Behavior, 34(3),
300321. doi: 10.1177/0013916502034003002
Wells, M. M., Thelen, L., & Ruark, J. (2007). Workspace personalization and organizational culture. Environment
and Behavior, 39(5), 616634. doi: 10.1177/0013916506295602
Wienold, J., & Christoffersen, J. (2006). Evaluation methods and development of a new glare prediction model for
daylight environments with the use of CCD cameras. Energy and Buildings, 38(7), 743757.
Page 33 of 34
Work Environments
Wineman, J. D. (1982). The office environment as a source of stress. In G. W. Evans (Ed.), Environmental stress
(pp. 256285). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Winkel, G., Saegert, S., & Evans, G. W. (2009). An ecological perspective on theory, methods, and analysis in
environmental psychology: Advances and challenges. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 29(3), 318328. doi:
10.1016/j.jenvp.2009.02.005
Woods, R. A. (2009). Monthly labor review. Washington, DC: US Bureau of Labor Statistics. Retrieved from
www.bls.gov/emp/ep_table_201.htm.
World Health Organization Regional Office for Europe (WHO Europe). (2007). Noise and health. Retrieved from
www.euro.who.int/Noise.
Yildirim, K., Akalin-Baskaya, A., & Celebi, M. (2007). The effects of window proximity, partition height, and gender on
perceptions of open-plan offices. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 27(2), 154165.
Zhang, L., Helander, M. G., & Drury, C. G. (1996). Identifying factors of comfort and discomfort in sitting. Human
Factors, 38(3), 377389.
Zhang, Y., & Altan, H. (2011). A comparison of the occupant comfort in a conventional high-rise office block and a
contemporary environmentally concerned building. Building and Environment, 46(2), 535545. doi:
10.1016/j.buildenv. 2010.09.001
Notes:
(1.) The quantity of light falling on a surface is the illuminance of the surface. The SI unit for illuminance is
lumens/m2 , abbreviated lx. The quantity of light emitted from a surface or a light source is its luminance. The SI unit
for luminance is the candela/m2 , abbreviated cd/m2 .
(2.) A few psychologists have bridged these communities. Most notably, Frederick Rohles, now an emeritus
professor at Kansas State University, has been awarded Fellow status in the American Psychological Association
(and its Divisions 21 and 34), the Human Factors and Ergonomics Society, and the American Society for Heating,
Refrigerating, and Air-Conditioning Engineersprobably the only person to have been so recognized by these
organizations.
Jennifer A. Veitch
Jennifer A. Veitch NRC Construction Ottawa, Ontario, Canada
Page 34 of 34
School Environments
Introduction
A growing understanding of how our learning environments affect people suggests that a school building is an
important tool for learning and teaching, and, like any tool, can enhance or hinder the process. School facility
factors such as building age and condition, quality of maintenance, lighting, color, noise, temperature, and air
quality can affect student health, safety, sense of self, and psychological state (National Research Council, 2007).
Research has also shown that the quality of facilities influences citizen perceptions of schools and can serve as a
point of community pride and increased support for public education (Uline, Tschannen-Moran, & Wolsey, 2008).
The goal then is to create school facilities that reflect everything known today about providing the best possible
education for all students in the twenty-first century.
Page 1 of 24
School Environments
was usually for the elite, through tutoring and one-room schoolhouses accommodating all ages of students with the
teacher presiding over instruction. The common school movement brought the idea of equal opportunity for
everybody to be educated regardless of economical, racial, or class background (Rothman, 1980). During this
progressive period American business and industry rapidly expanded and the school was viewed essentially as a
workplace (factory) and students learning was perceived in terms of productivity. Teachers were referred to as
the factory workers and students as the raw material to be turned into the product, which was to meet the needs of
the early 20th century. The common school movement, however, gave rise to the public education system and the
principle of free schooling (Pasalar, 2003).
During the first quarter of the 20th century, as school populations grew due to urbanization, the need for larger
district schools became clear. In the meantime, the idea of elementary and secondary schools appeared, which
later included middle schools as well. Buildings designed to specialize in the housing of junior high and high school
education programs were constructed, and many more types of auxiliary spaces were added. The junior high
school was created with the purpose of easing the transition from elementary school settings to the
departmentalized high school settings and solving the problem of general overcrowding (Rieselbach, 1992).
Page 2 of 24
School Environments
and bare, monotonous classrooms. Her educational philosophy was dominated by the principle of individual selfguided activity and her child-centered approach. Her ideas generated not only new didactic materials but also
valuable concepts for the design and organization of living spaces for children. She started from the belief that
from the moment of birth, every child has the ability to develop into an independent human being through active
exploration and learning processes (Dreier et al., 1999, p. 35; cf. Borrelbach, 2009).
John Dewey (18591952) suggested that education be based on a broader concept, making it an integral part of
the life process whereby students would learn by doing and interacting with one another (Alexander, 2000). Many
educators believed that programs needed to fit the child, but not that the child should fit the program.
Consequently, schooling in the United States dramatically changed. In the period between World War I and II, the
spatial layout characteristics of the school architecture evolved as a result of the pedagogic findings, the advent of
the modern movement in the architecture, and the measures taken by the hygienists for the prevention of disease.
In finger plan organizations, classrooms were connected to spaces for communal activities, and at the same time
aimed to provide appropriate ventilation, lighting, orientation, and immediate contact with external space. For the
first time classrooms were connected to the outdoors (courtyards, open playfields) introducing nature as part of
the learning experience in addition to classroom activities. However, the classrooms, which were often located
along the corridor in a linear development, were still a major component of the school.
Page 3 of 24
School Environments
However, the idea of open-design school was not accompanied by informal or open teaching. There were even
attempts to implement informal or open education in settings where school buildings were traditionally designed
(Wolfe & Rivlin, 1987). Therefore, the idea later failed due to the disorder caused by the incompatible teaching
activities and school buildings. Problems, such as visual distraction and noise as well as territorial need for different
activity settings, were experienced as well (Taylor, 1975; Gump, 1991; Sanoff, 2002). Many of those schools
implementing the open-design idea have undergone changes returning to the traditional way of divided classroom
arrangements (Sanoff, 2002). There are continuing mismatches between the educational philosophies and
practices. Although the current schooling system in the United States is experimenting with a student-centered
education model in innovative small schools, emphasizing learning through continuous interaction among peers
and teachers, it is still possible to observe teachers control and dominance on student activities restricting
students use of different spaces (Cushman, 1999).
School Size
In the 1970s and 80s, the United States and other countries built very large schools in most of their cities. Reasons
for this were the expectation of economic advantages as well as the benefit of being able to offer students a wider
and more comprehensive curriculum. A trend of separating the large schools into smaller, more personal units
developed (Duke & Trautvetter, 2001). The goal was, among other things, that a greater significance would be
attributed to the personalization of schools. This was shown through decorations, involvement in school clubs,
break rooms, works of art, and the overall feeling that I would like to be here.
The small school literature began with large-scale quantitative studies of the late 1980s and early 1990s that firmly
established small schools as more productive and effective than large ones. These studies, involving large
numbers of students, schools, and school districts, found a strong relationship between higher academic
achievement and lower enrollment (Lee & Smith, 1995; Eckman & Howley, 1997). A study commissioned by the US
Department of Education noted that the value of small schools in increasing achievement, graduation rates, and
satisfaction, and in improving behavior has been confirmed with clarity and a high level of confidence (Raywid,
1999). Students make more rapid progress toward graduation (McMullan, Sipe, & Wolf, 1994). They are more
satisfied with small schools, fewer of them drop out than from larger schools (Pittman & Haoghwout, 1987), and
students behave better in smaller schools (Stockard & Mayberry, 1992).
According to Wasley et al. (2000), the advantages of smaller schools seem to outweigh those of bigger schools.
Isolation, which reveals itself through alienation, vandalism, theft, and violence, can be avoided in smaller schools
(cf. Linneweber, Mummendey, Bornewasser, & Lschper, 1984). Smaller schools enable children of minorities and
those from underprivileged backgrounds to progress rapidly and encourage teachers to invest their experiences
for the benefit of the students (Wasley et al., 2000, p. 2). Barker and Gump already demonstrated in their classic
1964 study (cf. Helmke & Weinert, 1997, p. 94) that students in smaller schools are more inclined to take part in
school activities, despite the fact that larger schools may have more opportunities to offer these kinds of activities
to students.
A report by Carnegie Corporations Council on Adolescent Development (1988) revealed that adolescents had
been experiencing massive, impersonal schools with unconnected curricula and high student population. The idea
of creating smaller learning environments was introduced in the 1990s and was implemented by educational
planners. Smaller learning environments were generated through the creation of academic houses (or classroom
clusters forming a separate unit) accommodating 200 to 300 students. In each academic unit, students and
teachers were organized into teams where there were interactive educational and social activities. Other plans
emerged to create schools within schools within new and existing schools, sometimes referred to as a
neighborhood plan or learning community (McAndrews & Anderson, 2002).
More recently the idea of smaller schools with more specialized curriculum and educational activities, such as
magnet or academic house schools, has started to be widespread within the United States, thus the school
environment attributed to the new views in educational process concerning the organization of flexible classroom
spaces and the number of laboratories or project rooms supporting students practices. In general, the school
environment aimed to offer more stimuli to students who operate in a framework of freedom in a more balanced
network (p. 280) of social relations. The goal was integrating youth into various social roles, allowing equal
Page 4 of 24
School Environments
opportunity for each child, and promoting their psychological, social, and moral development and hence, their
personal fulfillment.
Educational research indicates that participation in school activities, student satisfaction, social connectedness,
and achievement are greater in small schools relative to large schools (Barker & Gump, 1964; Blundell Jones,
2007; Cotton, 1996; Sanoff, 2009), while disciplinary problems, incidents of vandalism, truancy, drug use, and
drop-out rates are lower (Fowler & Walberg, 1991).
Learning Environment
Learning is defined as a relatively long-lasting change in behavior that results from experience. Good teaching can
be found in poorly built schools, just as poor teaching can be found in well-built schools. However, it is widely
accepted that buildings can both promote as well as hinder learning (Weinstein, 1979).
In the results of the PISA study (Program for International Student Assessment; Lemke et al., 2001; OECD, 2004),
education ministers, supervisory school authorities, and planners deal with the effects of environment on the
performance as well as the social and emotional competence of students in kindergarten, grade schools, and
tertiary schools. The concept of the environment as the third teacher alongside the children and actual teachers
is the central issue within the question of how to optimize conditions for in-school learning (Edwards, Gandini, &
Forman, 1998). Loris Malaguzzi (19201994), one of the most important Reggio pedagogues, made the following
fundamental statement: in addition to the teacher and fellow students, the building acts as a third teacher (1984
).
Various studies have shown that schools need to be able to meet very diverse educational demands. Schools
need to be places of living and learning, and meeting points for social learning, which promotes conflict resolution
and encourages individuality and open exchange of ideas. A large volume of evidence shows a correlation
between environmental conditions in schools and academic performance (cf. Linneweber, 1996, p. 386; Gifford,
2007). The central focus of the dispute is also found in this chapter, in the analysis of the effects of the physical
environment. Well-planned school buildings can promote the development of successful, motivational learning
methods that contribute to a love of learning and generate a desire to achieve. Students are the ones responsible
for the future of the global market and the social utility of our economic system.
Gump (1978) determined that a person spends on average 14,000 hours in the learning environment from
kindergarten to the 12th grade. The results of the international PISA study became well known in numerous
countries, and since 2003, 7,200 of more than 40,000 schools in Germany were reconfigured to become full-time
schools, open all year, in the hope that this concept would help improve student performance. During this time, the
Federal Ministry of Education and Research invested four billion euros to help fund the shift to full-time schools.
There is a demand for todays schools to be more responsive (Sanoff, 2001), to be places where students and
teachers engage in learning and teaching inside and outside of the classroom. The goal is a school that responds
to the development needs of adults and teenagers. A multitude of learning methods and social forms should be
applied, such as small-group work, lectures, learning by doing, individual assignments, and study centers (Jacobs,
1999; Lackney, 2009). In addition to target-oriented learning, incidental learning also takes place. The areas in
which students spend their free time should also be included in the planning. The social realm should allow room
for eating, drinking, playing, and reflection. Also important is the flexibility to be used by various groups, children,
adults, and disabled people (cf. Lackney, 2000).
Page 5 of 24
School Environments
Barkers concept of behavior setting (Barker, 1968; Schoggen, 1989) influenced Gump (1991 ; see also
Schmittmann, 1985; Strhlein, 1998) in his definition of the main factors of his analysis as physical environment
(interior design and architecture), roles (e.g., teachers and learners), and behavior programs. Barker is concerned
with the synomorphic relationships between these components. Gifford (2007) referred to almost the same
relationships (p. 281) between personal characteristics of students, the physical features of the learning setting,
and the social-organizational climate.
There are other measuring tools that include the psycho-social school environment: for example, those from Moos
(1979); Anderson and Walberg (1974); Fisher and Fraser (1983); and Fraser, Anderson, and Walberg (1982). The
current contribution, however, is principally concerned with the effects of the physical environment on the
experience and behavior of students and teachers (see Gump, 1991, p. 723). Interviews, questionnaires, and roleplaying games have been developed in recent years, especially by Henry Sanoff (cf. Tanner, 1999) to measure
and evaluate features of the physical environment. Sanoff (2002) encouraged the local community, students,
parents, and teachers to participate in the design and building process. At the same time, he developed methods
for evaluating school buildings (2001a).
In 2001, the Federal Facilities Council (FFC, 2001) defined post-occupancy evaluation (POE) as a process of
systematically evaluating the performance of buildings [or places] after they have been built and occupied for
some time. POE differs from other evaluations of building performance in that it focuses on the requirements of
building occupants, including health, safety, security, functionality and efficiency, psychological comfort, aesthetic
quality, and satisfaction. (p. 1)
And also: As POEs have become broader in scope and purpose, POE has come to mean any activity that
originates out of an interest in learning how a building [or place] performs once it is built (if and how well it has met
expectations) and how satisfied building users are with the environment that has been created. POE has been seen
as one of a number of practices aimed at understanding design criteria, predicting the effectiveness of emerging
designs, reviewing completed designs, supporting building activation and facilities management, and linking user
response to the performance of buildings. POE is also evolving toward more process-oriented evaluations for
planning, programming, and capital asset management (FFC, 2001). Typical methods used in conducting POEs are
interviews, checklists, behavioral observations, and surveys. Each method reveals different insights into how
satisfactorily the building performs for its occupants.
School Condition
There is growing evidence of a correlation between the adequacy of a school facility and student behavior and
performance. Numerous studies conducted over the past three decades have found a statistically significant
relationship between the condition of a school or classroom and student achievement. In general, students
attending school in newer, better facilities score 5 to 17 points higher on standardized tests than those attending in
substandard buildings (Earthman, 1999; Earthman & Lemasters, 1996).
A study of working conditions in urban schools concluded that physical conditions do have direct positive and
negative effects on teacher morale, a sense of personal safety, feelings of effectiveness in the classroom, and on
the general learning environment. Building renovations in one district led teachers to feel a renewed sense of hope,
and of commitment, and a belief that district officials cared about what went on in that building. An improved
physical environment affected the social climate of the school, and that subsequently had a positive effect on
learning (Duke, 1988).
Two scholars have done comprehensive, non-overlapping compilations of research findings on the relationship of
school facility condition to student achievement and behavior. In 1979, Weinstein published a review of 141
published studies and 21 papers presented at professional conferences. Three years later, McGuffey (1982)
completed another review of the research, discussing 97 published studies. Following is a summary of research on
specific quality factors and their effect on educational outcomes.
In the mid-1990s, American industrial designer Ruth Lande Shuman initiated the Publicolor school design program
in New York. Jail-like school buildings with industrial, hostile appearances were brightened by lighter colors
and decorated with more variety. The results: lower dropout rates of students, fewer discipline issues, and marked
Page 6 of 24
School Environments
increases in concentration during lessons. These studies in the psychology of color show, for example, that drab
colors or bad lighting can createeven if the effect is slighta depressive mood among students and teachers,
which, in turn, influences learning and learning environment (http://www.gnn.com/article/nonprofit-brightens-nycpublic-schools/971361). In elementary school classrooms, warm, bright colors complement the students
extroverted nature, while cool colors facilitate the ability for middle and high school students to relax and focus
concentration (Mahnke, 1996). Wohlfarth (1985) also showed that certain colors have measurable (p. 282) and
predictable effects on the autonomic nervous system of people. In numerous studies, he found that blood pressure,
pulse, and respiration rates increase most under yellow light, moderately under orange, and minimally under red,
while decreasing most under black, moderately under blue, and minimally under green.
Gifford (2007) explored whether the maintenance of a school has an influence on students. He proposes that
satisfied teachers (and therefore better teachers) more often work in attractive schools. It is clear in the results that
students who are taught in new or newly renovated schools are more satisfied.
It is important to point out that some of the scholarly research on school facilities and student performance has
reached a negative conclusion. Although most scholars who have studied the question concur that achievement
suffers in poor school environments, most are deeply skeptical about studies linking improved achievement with
top-notch buildings. They point out that much of the work establishing such a link has been done by graduate
students, and that many of the facility assessments were done by volunteers, or school officials, and may have
lacked rigorous checklists. Some studies failed to control for critical variables, such as teacher experience. Critics
also point to anomalies in findingscorrelations on math scores, but not reading scores or vice versa; three-year
studies that found linkage in two years, but not in the third; one study in which disciplinary incidents were more
common in a new school than in older ones; and the fact that some of the research has been commissioned or
sponsored by groups of architects or facility plannerspeople who have a vested interest in proving a link.
Visual Appearance
Buildings, settings, and environments are accorded symbolic value by those who use them. Physical entities come
to symbolize certain qualities, values, aspirations, and experiences for individuals. A school may symbolize
opportunity, hope, stability, and a safe haven in a world of insecurity and transience, or, to someone else, the
school structure may symbolize failure and oppressive authority.
A study from Rittelmeyer (1994 ; cf. 2004; Forster & Rittelmeyer, 2010) develops conclusions regarding the impact
of improvements to aesthetic form by means of renovation or reconstruction of schools. Approximately 600 youths
were asked about their preferences and dislikes with regard to certain structural forms, colors, and interior
decorations. According to this study, school buildings are perceived as emotional gestures (that is, they appear to
be lively, cheerful, sad, brutal, and so on); students see spatial features such as facades, color schemes, and
landscaping as interaction partners. The effect of the elements of structure and color produce a background mood
for the observers. Rittelmeyer (2004) named three quality-criteria for an existing or planned school to be
beautifully, appealingly, attractively, or pleasantly effective: (1) inspiring, (2) unrestricted, and (3) warm or soft to
reinforce the significance of buildings form, Rittelmeyer (2004) cited an American study, according to which higher
levels of performance were achieved in positively rated school buildings (Earthman, 1999, 2004), and a German
study (Klockhaus & Habermann-Morbey, 1986), which determined that less vandalism occurs in such buildings.
In The Psychology of Vandalism, Goldstein (1996) included a basic study by Pablant and Baxter (1975), which
confirms the correlation between wanton destruction and the aesthetic quality as well as the degree of
maintenance of school property. Schools with fewer instances of vandalism are characterized by excellent
maintenance of the building and surrounding playgrounds. The age of the school shows no correlation with the
frequency of vandalism. Schools with low rates of destruction are generally found in districts with a variety of
buildings (e.g., commercial buildings, churches) in the surrounding area. Of schools with high rates of destruction,
81% are found near unoccupied land, such as parks and sports fields. Schools with low rates of vandalism can
usually be seen by neighbors because they are better lit, which makes it easy to view the property.
Classroom Design
Page 7 of 24
School Environments
One hundred fifty years ago, classrooms represented a common teaching method. Today teaching methods have
changed, but often the design of the classroom has remained static. An examination of current learning styles and
teaching methods suggests a new form of learning environment characterized by different activity settings and
small-group activities.
To experience healthy development, students require certain needs to be met. School-agers require diversity in
activities and in places where they are performed, which entails different opportunities for learning and different
relationships with a variety of people (Levin & Nolan, 2000). In a school that responds to its students need for
diversity, one would not find students all doing the same thing, at the same time, in similar rooms. One would not
(p. 283) expect to see students sitting in neat rows of desks, all facing teachers who are lecturing or reading from
textbooks. Instead, in responsive schools, students and teachers would be engaged in different learning activities
in and out of the classroom. A variety of teaching methods including small-group work, lectures, learning by doing,
individualized assignments, and learning centers would be used (Jacobs, 1999; Lackney, 2009).
Teachers are much more influenced by the physical environment than they realize. Malcolm Seabourne, a
historian of school buildings in England, suggests that the building made the teaching method (Robson, 1972). The
separate classroom was a sign that teachers were trusted to be independent and had greater privacy. The
classroom was designed and built to represent and shape a particular form of teaching behavior. The way a school
is designed to work reflects social ideas about institutions and the education these institutions are created to
further (Grosvenor et al., 1999). The shape of spaces, furniture arrangements, and signs are physical cues that
transmit silent messages, and both teachers and students will respond. These environmental messages stimulate
movement, call attention to some things but not others, encourage involvement, and invite students to hurry or
move calmly. This environmental influence is continuous, and how well it communicates with the users will depend
on how well the environment is planned. Classroom arrangement is not a mere technicality, or a part of the
teachers style. It reflects assumptions about the teaching-learning process and its outcomes.
Classroom Seating
The usual classroom seating arrangement of rows headed by a teacher at the front usually assumes that all
information comes from the teacher. This arrangement assumes a teacher-centered classroom where the learning
process depends upon the teachers direction. Considering the new thinking about how students learn, Halstead
(1992) envisioned the classroom of tomorrow where classrooms would be like studios where students would have
their own work space. In addition, there would be work spaces for cooperative learning by groups of different
sizes, quiet private areas for one-on-one sessions, and places where students could work independently.
Mobility and centeredness influence teachers movement patterns and how they interact with students in the
classroom. Student-centered classrooms are those where there is greater teacher movement and more interaction
with students. The most teacher-centered classrooms, for example, have a seating arrangement organized in a
circle (Horne, 2000).
Although transaction theories of student/teacher participatory interaction (STPI) have been discussed in the
educational literature for decades (Dewey, 1916; Friere, 1970; Krebs, 1982), more recently there has been
research describing a correlation between STPI and student motivation to participate (SMP) in the classroom
(Dormody & Sutphin, 1991; Skinner & Belmont, 1993). Similarly, if students experience the classroom as a
supportive place where there is a sense of belonging, they tend to participate more fully in the process of learning
(Brophy, 1987).
Research comparing the behavior of effective teachers with that of less effective teachers has clearly revealed the
importance of monitoring the class during seatwork periods. Such monitoring involves teachers moving around the
classroom, being aware of how well or poorly students are progressing with their assignments, and working with
students one-to-one as needed. The most effective teachers:
Have systematic procedures for supervising and encouraging students while they work
Initiate more interactions with students during seatwork periods, rather than waiting for students to ask for help
Have more substantive interactions with students during seatwork monitoring, stay task-oriented, and work
through problems with students (Brophy, 1979)
Page 8 of 24
School Environments
Classroom Privacy
The complexity of the concept makes it difficult to come up with clear specifications regarding the optimal room
setup. Some basic information, though, should be outlined. Every student needs a certain amount of privacy
(Gifford, 2007), which varies from individual to individual. Many studies (cf. Gifford, 2007, p. 312) concur that a
high classroom density negatively affects students performance when they undertake complex assignments, work
in small groups, or accomplish tasks, when they need maneuverability, or when games or teaching materials are
sparse.
Just like classroom density, the location of a students seat can influence his or her performance, well-being, and
social behavior. Thus, places in the middle of the classroom toward the front offer an optimal position for higher
performance (Becker, Sommer, Bee, & Oxley, 1973; cf. Bell, Greene, Fisher, & Baum, 2001, p. 263). According to
the sources of McAndrew (1993), the area of the classroom toward the rear is associated with the freedom to
interact with classmates while at the same time being outside the control of the teacher. As a result, students
arrange themselves within the different rows (Hillmann, Brooks, & OBrien, 1991). A study by Marx, Fuhrer, and
Hartig (1999) researched the relationship between the location of the seat in the classroom and the number of
questions asked by fourth graders. The results showed that children seated in a semicircle asked more questions
than those seated in rows, and that social interaction was encouraged when individual students could make faceto-face contact. Therefore, seating arrangement can influence communication between students. Soft
classrooms have semicircular benches covered with pillows, adjustable lighting, a small rug, and a few pieces of
movable furniture. Student participation noticeably improves in a soft classroom (Sommer & Olsen, 1980).
The open-plan classroom, which developed in the 1970s in many American schools, can have a relatively
negative influence on the performance of the average student (Bell, Switzer, & Zipursky, 1974; Wright, 1975). It is
important that the type of classroom matches the teaching method and meets the students and teachers needs
for privacy and intellectual stimulus. Likewise, the type of classroom should agree with the kind of activity and the
length of time needed for it.
Glass et al. (1982) believed that when a class reaches 20 to 25 students, each additional student makes a
relatively small difference (cf. Schnabel, 2001, p. 482). They concluded that smaller classes of 15 or fewer
students result in better learning environments in almost every regard, including teacher and student attitudes,
interaction, and performance.
Page 9 of 24
School Environments
Outdoor Environment
Today, school activities involve more than simply listening or writing. Learning can take place in many different
kinds and qualities of space. In addition, students activities outdoors (e.g., playgrounds) have shown to be more
creative than in classrooms or traditional playgrounds (Lindholm, 1995), with positive effects on learning and
cognitive qualities (Fjortoft & Sageie, 1999; Fjortoft, 2004). Schools in which children take on an active role outside
of the classroom, and schools with an attractive exterior, seem to be ideal schools for children (cf. Gifford, 2007;
cf. Wasley et al., 2000). Louv (2008) helped connect the idea of using natural landscaping expressly to K12
schools. He described American childrens nature-deficit disorder, or how children are increasingly becoming
disconnected from nature. Louv attributed the trend to several causes: a more technological society, parents fear
of strangers, less access to natural settings, and so on. But the case he and other child and environmental
advocates (p. 285) have made for the benefits of exposing children to the natural world has given schools cause
to examine their own surroundings and opportunities for outdoor learning and play. Studies now show that
connecting students to the environment improves not only their physical well-being, but also their social and
educational aptitude. A 2006 Canadian study (Dyment, Bell, & Lucas, 2009), for instance, found that students who
interact on school grounds with diverse natural settings were more physically active, more creative, more aware of
nutrition, and more cooperative with one another.
High-Performance Schools
One proposed solution to the problems facing school facilities is to design and construct high-performance
schools. The terms high performance, sustainable, and green are used to describe schools that minimize
environmental harm, maximize the performance of facilities, cost less over the life of the building, and create
educational environments that are optimal for learning (Gelfan & Freed, 2010). Although these terms do not
necessarily have the same meaning, practitioners often use them interchangeably and define them similarly. These
terms will also be used interchangeably in this paper to reflect the wording of the authors being cited.
School systems in the United States are struggling to build new schools and renovate aging ones to accommodate
increasing enrollments and new technologies. Given the high cost of new construction as well as the costs of
operating, maintaining, and retrofitting the current, declining building stock, many school systems are recognizing
the benefits of high-performance schools. High-performance schools, also called green or sustainable schools, are
designed, constructed, and maintained to be resource-efficient, healthy, comfortable, safe, secure, adaptable, and
easy to operate and maintain. They cost less to operate and create environments that enhance learning.
Additionally, high-performance schools reduce adverse impacts resulting from the construction and operation of
built facilities on the natural environment. For example, preserving natural vegetation reduces overall disturbance
to the site. And designing to reduce impervious surfaces mitigates storm-water runoff caused by construction and
protects the hydrologic functions of the site.
Page 10 of 24
School Environments
Given the level of interaction between people and their environments and other confounding factors, establishing
cause-and-effect relationships between an attribute of a school building and its effect on students, teachers, and
staff is difficult. The effects of the built environment will necessarily appear to be small, given the number of
variables (Bosch, 2004). Empirical measures do not, however, necessarily capture all relevant considerations that
should be applied when evaluating research results. Qualitative aspects of the environment are also important.
However, there is value in attempting to identify design features and building processes and practices that may
lead to improvements in learning, health, and productivity for students, teachers, and other school staff, even if
empirical results are less than robust.
Design Guides
As school systems seek to improve the performance of their facilities and reduce costs, they are relying on (or
creating) a variety of guides to assist them with design, construction, and operation/maintenance. These
documents are often region-specific and reflect the priorities of the authoring agency, but they may also be
appropriate for other regions and used by school systems across the country. Intended to educate stakeholders
about the concepts of high-performance facilities, these documents are important vehicles for implementing
research in sustainability, school design, environment and behavior, and related fields. However, to date, there
have been no reviews of the guidance documents to examine their focus and content. (p. 286) Without a doubt,
those involved with the development of these guidance documents have reviewed similar documents when
developing their guides; however, this information has not been published. Also, these reviews were conducted for
the purpose of developing a guidance document, rather than for identifying additional opportunities for providing
information to stakeholders (Bosch, 2003).
A consortium of state and utility leaders in California launched an effort in 2001 to develop energy and
environmental standards specifically for schools. The Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS, often
pronounced chips) aims to increase the energy efficiency of California schools by marketing information,
services, and incentive programs directly to school districts and designers. The CHPS website defines green
schools as having the following 13 attributes: healthy, comfortable, energy efficient, material efficient, water
efficient, easy to maintain and operate, commissioned, environmentally responsive site, a building that teaches,
safe and secure, community resource, stimulating architecture, and adaptable to changing needs (CHPS, 2005).
Green school objectives are to be achieved through guidelines that are similar to the Leadership in Energy and
Environmental Design (LEED) rating system but specifically geared to schools. Green school guidelines move well
beyond design and engineering criteria for the buildings themselves, addressing land use, processes for
construction and equipment installation, and operation and maintenance practices. They include design and
engineering techniques to meet specific objectives:
Locating schools near public transportation to reduce pollution and land development impacts
Placing a building on a site so as to minimize its environmental impact and make the most of available natural
light and solar gain
Designing irrigation systems and indoor plumbing systems to conserve water
Designing energy and lighting systems to conserve fossil fuels and maximize the use of renewable resources
Selecting materials that are nontoxic, biodegradable, and easily recycled and that minimize the impacts on
landfills and otherwise reduce waste
Creating an indoor environment that provides occupants with a comfortable temperature, and good air quality,
lighting, and acoustics
Green school guidelines also recommend construction techniques to meet objectives such as the appropriate
storage of materials on construction sites to avoid water damage, the reduction of waste materials and appropriate
disposal to reduce resource depletion, and the introduction of commissioning practices to ensure the performance
of building systems (US Green Building Council, 2007).
Page 11 of 24
School Environments
or development of students and teachers, in part because the concept of green schools is quite new. There are,
however, studies that examine specific building features often emphasized in green school design and the effects
of these components on health and learning (National Research Council, 2007).
Evidence-based design is a field of study that emphasizes the importance of using credible data to influence the
design process. The approach has become popular in health-care architecture in an effort to improve patient and
staff well-being, patient healing process, stress reduction, and safety.
School districts do not typically pursue high-performance design merely to be good stewards of the natural
environment. There is convincing evidence of multiple benefits from using high-performance, green design, such
as an association between excess moisture, dampness, and mold in buildings and adverse health outcomes,
particularly asthma and respiratory symptoms, among children and adults (Lstiburek & Carmody, 1994). Sufficient
scientific evidence exists to conclude that there is an inverse association between excessive noise levels in
schools and student learning (National Research Council, 2007). The impacts of excessive noise vary according to
the age of students, because the ability to focus on speech sounds is a developmental skill that does not mature
until about the ages of 13 to 15. Thus, younger children require quieter and less reverberant conditions than do
adults who hear equally well. As adults, teachers may not appreciate the additional problems that excessive noise
creates for younger students (Picard & Bradley, 2001).
Human perception of the thermal environment depends on four parameters: air temperature, radiant temperature,
relative humidity, and air speed (Kwok, 2000). Perception is modified by personal metabolic rates and the insulation
value of clothing. Thermal comfort standards are essentially based on a set of air and radiant temperatures and
relative humidity levels that will satisfy at least 80% of the (p. 287) occupants at specified metabolic rates and
clothing values. There is a literature on the effects of temperature and humidity on occupant comfort and
productivity, primarily from studies in office buildings (Fanger, 2000; Seppnnen & Fisk, 2005; Wyon, 2004; Wang
et al., 2005). These studies show that productivity declines if temperatures go too high (Federspiel et al., 2004).
The temperature, airflow, and humidity of a classroom will affect the quality of work produced by students. It is
agreed among researchers that a classroom with a temperature above 80 degrees Fahrenheit is a very poor
environment for learning. When a classroom is too warm, it induces drowsiness and fatigue, increases respiration,
and creates conditions favorable to disease. When the human body is fighting to stay alert and is uncomfortable, it
is not concentrating on the academic work at hand. Students make greater gains in academic achievement in
climate controlled schools as opposed to those students in nonclimate controlled schools (Jago & Tanner, 1999,
2005). However, there is a paucity of studies investigating the relationship between room temperatures in schools
and occupant comfort or productivity (Mendell & Heath, 2004).
Between 1999 and 2003, the Heschong-Mahone Group conducted several studies investigating the effect of
daylighting on student performance (National Research Council, 2007). In the 1999 study, data were obtained from
three elementary school districts located in Orange County, California; Seattle, Washington; and Fort Collins,
Colorado (Heschong-Mahone, 1999). The study looked for a correlation between the amount of daylight provided
by each students classroom environment and test scores. Close examinations of the findings indicate a very small
effect and one that cannot be justified as reliable (Boyce, 2004). These results could not be replicated in a
subsequent study. Among the authors conclusions of more detailed statistical analysis were that sources of glare
negatively affect student learning; direct sun penetration into classrooms, especially through unshaded sun-facing
windows, is associated with negative student performance, likely causing both glare and thermal discomfort; blinds
or curtains allow teachers to control the intermittent sources of glare or visual distraction through their windows;
when teachers do not have control of their windows, student performance is negatively affected (HeschongMahone, 2003, p. ix). They summarized that
characteristics describing windows were generally quite stable in their association with better or worse
student performance. Variables describing a better view out of windows always entered the equations as
positive and highly significant, while variables describing glare, sun penetration, and lack of visual control
always entered the models as negative. (Heschong-Mahone, 2003, p. viii)
Classroom lighting and thermal comfort are commonly cited by teachers as determinants of their own morale and
the engagement of their students (Corcoran, Walker, & White, 1988; Jago & Tanner, 1999). Lemasters (1997)
identified 53 studies that linked design features to student achievement.
Page 12 of 24
School Environments
School systems, like other public and private organizations, are becoming increasingly aware that design and
construction strategies that reduce harmful impacts on the natural environment also contribute to creating a more
productive and economically feasible facility. Case studies of schools provide evidence of these benefits. In this
day of increasing school enrollment and tight construction budgets, cost savings are often used to justify highperformance design. The Sustainable Building Industry Council estimates that school districts can achieve 3040%
savings on utilities if sustainable design and construction practices are utilized for new schools.
In addition to cost savings, high-performance strategies such as daylighting, improved thermal comfort, better
indoor air quality, and increased interaction with the natural environment are believed to enhance learning, provide
a valuable community resource, and minimize adverse impacts on the environment. Those who pursue highperformance design and construction have common goals, such as environmental protection, eco-education, and
superior building performance. Ecologically friendly is considered one of the top 10 design and planning
solutions for school facilities today (Kennedy, 2003). Principles of sustainable design are incorporated to teach
resource conservation, reduce resource use, and to enhance the learning environment.
School Trends
School facilities are powerful indicators of community values and aspirations. They not only support the academic
needs of students they serve, but can also address the social, educational, recreational, and personal needs of
the members of the broader community. It has been argued that successful schools strengthen a communitys
sense of identity and coherence.
Educational reform, however, has focused primarily on what is taught, and how it is taught. As (p. 288) a result,
curricula have been strengthened, instructional strategies improved, and instructional materials updated. However,
what has received too little attention is the physical environment in which education occurs. School systems find
that parents are much more discerning about which school their child will attend, including the physical
appearance of the school and the amount of modern technology available. In addition, school systems have
discovered that schools with sick internal physical environments are shunned by prospective teachers and
parents alike (Stevenson, 2006). Widespread misconceptions reinforce the view that the quality of school building
has no impact on academic performance. Consequently, a gap exists between the educators view of improving
quality and the process of planning schools.
It is also becoming more evident that students function best in different educational settings according to their
abilities; consequently, identical schools in terms of facilities do not equate with equal opportunity for students.
School systems in the United States are offering parents and children more choices about the school a child
attends. The one-size-fits-all approach is gradually disappearing and may give way to smaller and more diverse
learning environments that give parents and students more choices and options about what, where, and how they
learn. Therefore, the focus is shifting away from district-wide planning that provides equality of school facilities
toward plans that meet the unique program needs of each school (Stevenson, 2002). And as parents have more
choices about where to send their children, it follows that they demand schools that are personalized and fit their
needs.
Very different scenarios may affect what spaces will be included in future building designs (Butin, 2000). One view
of the future suggests that standard academic classrooms will disappear. In their place, specialized labs and
learning centers will become the norm (Lackney, 1999, 2009). Those with this vision maintain that separating
learning into academics, arts, vocational, and the like is a false dichotomy (Chan, 1996). Instead, they view
learning as holistic with, for example, art incorporated into language arts or math taught with specific job skills or
vocations in mind. In this scenario, classrooms must be multipurpose, allowing a blending of traditional instruction
with meaningful and diverse hands-on, lab-type experiences that may include anything from pottery making to
dramatic arts. This idea of personalized learning environments, which has generated immense interest in the
design of classroom clusters, house plans, and school-within-school settings, has magnified the role student
commons can play in a schools overall design, serving as a hub for an academic wing or providing a space for
alternative teaching strategies.
Another scenario sees the development of more shared school facilities. In this view, future schools will be created
or redesigned so that instructional and support spaces can also be used by social and community organizations or
Page 13 of 24
School Environments
even businesses. Schools as community learning centers have been supported by research documenting the
importance of active parental involvement, the growing importance of lifelong learning, and recognition that
communities have many assets to offer that are themselves important learning tools. This awareness presents an
opportunity to reconsider what constitutes an appropriate learning environment and to identify those factors that
can enhance student achievement. Sharing instructional and support facilities is expected to be beneficial to both
the school and the community. In such settings, students have access to a wide array of community and business
expertise that can bring the curriculum to lifeand those who do not normally have access to school facilities find
that the facilities better justify the money spent upon them. In any of the scenarios, school facilities would be
different from what exists today. The key to successful planning is to provide the most flexible and adaptable
spaces possible in our schools.
The previous trends suggest how school facilities may be different in the future. Though the possibility may be
remote, another scenario exists: schools as we know them will disappear (Northwest Educational Technology
Consortium, 2002). If one thinks about the combination of the rapid development of technology and the increasing
lack of confidence parents have in public education, the disappearance of the brick-and-mortar structure called
school is possible. The child has access to lessons prepared by the most knowledgeable professionals in the world
and can interact electronically with teachers and students in other countries as part of language, geography, or
political studies instruction. Parents who homeschool increasingly use technology to access instructional materials.
Students in remote areas of Canada and Australia, hundreds of miles from a school building, attend school by
logging on to their computers. Technology allows a high school student in a rural location to take a course online
from a teacher in another town.
The question, perhaps, is not whether it is possible that schools will cease to exist, but how virtual (p. 289)
schools will grow and to what extent. No one knows, but it raises some interesting issues about how much to invest
in physical structures, what kind of life expectancy they should have, and whether the future emphasis needs to
be on schools as traditional learning environments or schools as production and broadcast centers. It also raises a
question about the fundamental purpose of schooling. If technology consumes much of the instructional delivery of
the future, who or what will assume responsibility for the socialization process that schools have traditionally been
held accountable for?
Another new element to consider in school design is the reality that there are more active participants who want a
voice in how new school facilities are designed. Community-based groups, municipal agencies, and universities
are just a few of the groups in the past decade that have voiced their ideas. This activism has led to a greater need
for authentic citizen engagement and growing acceptance of shared space and public-private partnerships. In the
coming decade educators and facility planners may increasingly be thinking about the needs of preschool children
and senior citizens. In this new era of lifelong learning, educators and architects will have to expand their vision of
who uses these facilities and be keenly aware of changing demographics. It may be necessary to move away from
the traditional emphasis of creating facilities for seniors only and consider approaches that let the generations
mingle to keep retirees active and current (Sullivan, 2002). Schools can achieve more innovative approaches to
learning by creating learning environments in nontraditional settings, such as museums and shopping malls, as well
as by encompassing community needs (Nathan & Thao, 2007).
Page 14 of 24
School Environments
A lack of protection against delinquency, accidents, and violence due to insufficient visibility for supervisory
staff and unsafe paths, stairs, and playground equipment
Buildings that are too small and allow little space for project groups because of a lack of specialty rooms
An overly narrow connection between the main entrance and the classrooms
Wasted energy due to drafty and poorly insulated buildings
Dark hallways and rooms that require artificial lighting
Low ceilings
Classrooms that are too small or have insufficient learning materials for students
Designing classrooms while considering only a few learning methods, such as presentations and testing
knowledge
Too few or low-quality public facilities for teachers and students (technical equipment, ergonomic furniture,
noise), too few rooms for administration, or rooms that are too small
Ineffective sound insulation
No wheelchair accessible facilities for people with disabilities (lacking elevators, ramps, handrails, electric
door openers, etc.)
Poor building maintenance, which leads to an increase in vandalism
General lack of cleanliness, due to materials that are difficult to clean, and insufficient waste collection
Numerous physical factors have contributed to student and teacher dissatisfaction with the school environment.
School appearance, whether the result of poor design or lack of proper maintenance, is a contributing factor to
student motivation and teacher performance.
Schools of the future should consider (Walden, 2009):
The right of all users to take part in decision-making
The importance of a clear orientation that begins at the entrance
(p. 290) The use of the building by community members outside of class time
The appropriateness of the space design for and the various teaching and learning methods, such as handson project-based learning, team teaching and learning, presentations, and small-group lessons, using common
designs, such as large classrooms and relaxation rooms
Division into reasonable units (schoolhouses) within the school complex, each grade with up to 160 students
and organized into small numbers of students per class
The introduction of learning studios, suites, and communities for as many as 150 to 160 students of different
age ranges; the encouragement of social and emotional learning (Lackney, 2009)
The use of modern information technology; LAN, WLAN Internet connections in all areas of the school along
with the promotion of face-to-face social contact and flexible, individual learning areas for self-guided learning,
(covered) outdoor classrooms
The use of environmentally friendly, sustainable, low-maintenance, and durable building materials
The opportunity to personally regulate environmental stress factors (lighting, darkness, glare, ventilation,
heat, sunshine, protection from rain, acoustics, noise, etc.) and to use sensorial technology
The importance of natural, glare-free lighting
The flexibility and multifunctional nature of rooms
A setup of classrooms and hallways that offers opportunities for privacy
The importance of providing privacy for teachers (separated and spacious teacher areas; group office rooms
especially for all-day lessons)
The importance of being able to have experiences with all senses (cf. Kkelhaus & zur Lippe, 1992)
In contrast to the one-size-fits-all approach to school design, schools of the future need to provide formal as well
as informal places for learning. Clearly not all learning occurs in the classroom. Opportunities for peer interaction
Page 15 of 24
School Environments
constitute an important aspect of informal learning. Similarly, the design process needs to be more inclusive,
providing opportunities for the participation of students, teachers, and parents.
In the meantime, the building of schools is being addressed by various authors, who all establish a connection to
the process of learning to competently contribute to future innovation and sustainability in the interaction with the
built environment (Wstenrot-Stiftung, 2004; Buddensiek, 2001; Engel & Dahlmann, 2001; Kroner, 1994;
Rittelmeyer, 2009; Schavan, 2001; Watschinger & Khebacher, 2007; Wstenrot-Stiftung, 2004; cf. for the AngloAmerican room: Dudek, 2000, 2007; Gifford, 2007; Sanoff, 1994, 2002; Tanner & Lackney, 2006).
Future Directions
Decisions about school facilities tend to be made by a few people who are not themselves building users. Involving
a building committee does not by itself always solve the problem of gaining school-wide support. Future efforts
need to focus on methods of involving a full range of stakeholders in the design and planning process. Similarly,
school building performance from the occupants perspective continues to be a neglected ingredient in the building
process. The improvement of the research instruments used, specifically the system to assess the quality of school
buildings, remains a constant research challenge.
There are isolated examples of school designs that support personalized, self-directed learning, such as variableand flexible-size space, and individual work spaces, as well as spaces for collaboration. However, they do not
reflect the mainstream of school designs, which are guided by traditional specifications. The gap between how
children learn and the places that support this learning needs to be carefully examined, particularly since school
buildings today are constructed to support many future generations of children.
References
Ahrentzen, S., Jue, G.M., Skorpanich, M.A., & Evans, G.W. (1982). School environments and stress. In G. W. Evans
(Ed.), Environmental stress (pp. 224255). New York: Cambridge University Press.
Alexander, R. (2000). Culture and pedagogy: International comparisons in primary education. Oxford, UK:
Blackwell.
Anderson, G. J., & Walberg, H. J. (1974). Learning environments. In H. J. Walberg (Ed.), Evaluating educational
performance (pp. 8198). Berkeley, CA: McCutchan.
Barker, R. G. (1968). Ecological psychology: Concepts and methods for studying the environment of human
behavior. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
Barker, R. G., & Gump, P. V. (1964). Big school, small school. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
Barth, R. S. (1972). Open education and the American school. New York: Agathon.
Becker, F. D., Sommer, R., Bee, J., & Oxley, B. (1973). College classroom ecology. Sociometry, 36, 514525.
(p. 291) Bell, A. E., Switzer, F., & Zipursky, M. (1974). Open-area education: An advantage or disadvantage for
beginners? Perceptual and Motor Skills, 39, 407416.
Bell, P. A., Greene, T. C., Fisher, J. D., & Baum, A. (2001). Environmental psychology (5th ed.). Fort Worth, TX:
Harcourt College Publishers.
Blundell Jones, P. (2007). Peter Hbner: Architektur als sozialer Proze. Architecture as Social Process.
Stuttgart/London: Edition Axel Menges.
Borrelbach, S. (2009). The historical development of school buildings in Germany. In R. Walden (Ed.), Schools for
the future: Design proposals from architectural psychology (pp. 4574). Gttingen, Germany: Hogrefe & Huber.
Bosch, S. J. (2003). Sustainability in public facilities: Analysis of guidance documents. Journal of Performance of
Page 16 of 24
School Environments
Constructed Facilities, 17(1), 918.
Bosch, S. J. (2004). Identifying relevant variables for understanding how school facilities affect educational
outcomes. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation). Georgia Institute of Technology.
Boyce, P. R. (2004). Reviews of technical reports on daylight and productivity. Troy, NY: Lighting Research
Center. Retrieved from www.daylightdividends.org.
Brophy, J. (1979). Teacher behavior and its effects. Journal of Educational Leadership, 71, 733750.
Brophy, J. (1987, October). Synthesis of research strategies for motivating students to learn. Journal of Educational
Leadership, 45(2), 4048.
Buddensiek, W. (2001). Zukunftsfhiges Leben in Husern des Lernens. Gttingen, Germany: Verlag Die
Werkstatt.
Butin, D. (2000). Classrooms. Washington, DC: National Clearinghouse for Educational Facilities.
Chan, T. C. (1996). Environmental impact on student learning. Valdosta, GA: Valdosta State College.
Corcoran, T., Walker, J. and White, J. (1988). Working in Urban Schools. Washington, D.C.: Institute for Educational
Leadership.
Cotton, K. (1996). School size, school climate, and student performance. School Improvement Research Series,
Northwest Regional Educational Laboratory, Portland, OR. Retrieved January 15, 2002, from
www.nwrel.org/scpd/sirs/10/c020.html.
Cushman, K. (1999, November). How small schools increase student learning (and what large schools can do
about it). NAESP, Principal Magazine.
Dewey, J. (1967). Democracy and education. London: Macmillan. (Originally published 1916).
Dormody, T. J., & Sutphin, H. D. (1991, December). Student/teacher participation interaction, motivation, and
satisfaction during group problem solving. Journal of Agricultural Education.
Dreier, A., Kucharz, D., Ramseger, J., & Srensen, B. (1999). Grundschulen planen, bauen, neu gestalten.
Empfehlungen fr kindgerechte Lernumwelten [Planning, constructing, and renovating elementary schools:
Recommendations for child-appropriate learning environments]. Jubilumsband zum dreiigjhrigen Bestehen des
Grundschulverbandes, Arbeitskreis Grundschule e.V. Frankfurt a.M.
Dudek, M. (2000). Architecture of schools: The new learning environments. Oxford, UK: Architectural Press.
Dudek, M. (2007). Schools and kindergartens: A design manual. Basel, Switzerland: Birkhuser.
Duke, D. L. (1988). Does it matter where our children learn? Paper prepared for an invitational meeting of the
National Academy of Sciences, Thomas Jefferson Center for Educational Design. Charlottesville: University of
Virginia Press.
Duke, D. L., & Trautvetter, S. (2001). Reducing the negative effects of large schools. Washington, DC: National
Clearinghouse for Educational Facilities.
Dyment, J. E., Bell, R., & Lucas, A. (2009). The relationship between school ground design and physical activity.
Childrens Geography, 7(3), 261276.
Earthman, G. I. (1999). The quality of school buildings, student achievement, and student behavior. Bildung und
Erziehung, 52, 353372.
Earthman, G. I. (2004). Prioritization of 31 criteria for school building adequacy. Virginia Polytechnic Institute &
State University: Blacksburg, V.
Earthman, G. I., & Lemasters, L. K. (1996). Review of research on the relationship between school buildings,
Page 17 of 24
School Environments
student achievement, and student behavior. Scottsdale, AZ: Council of Educational Facility Planners International.
Eckman, J. M., & Howley, C. B. (1997). Sustainable small schools. Charleston, WV: ERIC Clearinghouse on Rural
Education and Small Schools.
Edwards, C., Gandini, L., & Forman, G. (1998). The hundred languages of children. The Reggio Emilia approach
advanced reflections. CT: Ablex.
Engel, O., & Dahlmann, Y. (2001). Pdagogische Architektur. Wege zu einer menschenwrdigen Schulgestaltung.
Abschlussarbeit an der Heilpdagogischen Fakultt der Universitt Kln: Seminar fr Sozialpdagogik.
Fanger, P. O. (2000). Indoor air quality in the 21st century: The search for excellence. Indoor Air, 10, 6873.
FFC. (2001). Learning from our buildings: A state-of-the-practice summary of post-occupancy evaluation. Federal
Facilities Council Technical Report No. 145. Washington, DC: Federal Facilities Council.
Federspiel, C. C., Fisk, W. J., Price, P. N., Liu, G., Faulkner, D.,Lahiff, M. (2004). Worker performance and
ventilation in a call center: Analyses of work performance data for registered nurses. Indoor Air, 14(Suppl. 8), 41
50.
Fisher, D. L., & Fraser, D. J. (1983). Validity and use of the classroom environment scale. Educational Evaluation &
Policy Analysis, 5, 261271.
Fjortoft I (2004). Landscape as Playscape: The Effects of Natural Environments on Childrens Play and Motor
Development. Children, Youth and Environments, 14 (2), 2144.
Fjortoft, I., & Sageie, J. (1999). The natural environment as a playground for children: Landscape description and
analyses of a natural playscape. Landscape and Urban Planning, 48, 8397.
Flade, A. (1998). Evaluation eines innerstdtischen Schulhofs. In F. Dieckmann, A. Flade, R. Schuemer, G. Strhlein,
& R. Walden (Eds.), Psychologie und gebaute Umwelt (pp. 243247). Darmstadt, Germany: IWU.
Forster, J., & Rittelmeyer, C. (2010). Gestaltung von Schulbauten. Ein Diskussionsbeitrag aus
erziehungswissenschaftlicher Sicht [Design of school buildings: A contribution to the discussion from a
pedagogical perspective]. Zurich, Switzerland: Education Authority.
Fowler, W., & Walberg, H. J. (1991). School size, characteristics, and outcomes. Educational Evaluation and Policy
Analysis, 13, 189202.
Fraser, D. L., Anderson, G. J., & Walberg, H. J. (1982). Assessment of learning environments: Manual for learning
(p. 292) environment inventory (LEI) and my class inventory. Bentley, Australia: Western Australian Institute of
Technology.
Freire, P. (1970) Pedagogy of the Oppressed. New York: Continuum.
Gelfan, L., & Freed, E. (2010). Sustainable school architecture: Design for primary and secondary schools.
Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
Gifford, R. (2007). Environmental psychology: Principles and practice (4th ed.). Colville, WA: Optimal Books.
Glass, G. V., Cahen, L. S., Smith, M. L., & Filby, N. N. (1982). School class size: Research and policy. Beverly Hills,
CA: Sage.
Goldstein, A. P. (1996). The psychology of vandalism. New York: Plenum.
Grosvenor, I., Lawn, M., & Rousmaniere, K. (1999). Silences and image: The social history of the classroom. New
York: Peter Lang.
Gump, P. V. (1978). School environments. In I. Altman & J. F. Wohlwill (Eds.), Children and the environment (pp.
131174). New York: Plenum.
Page 18 of 24
School Environments
Gump, P. V. (1991). School and classroom environments. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.), Handbook of
environmental psychology (Vol. 1, pp. 691732). New York: Wiley.
Halstead, H. (1992, October). Designing facilities for a new generation of schools. Educational Technology, 32(10)
4648.
Helmke, A., & Weinert, F. E. (1997). Bedingungsfaktoren schulischer Leistungen. In F.E. Weinert (Ed.), Enzyklopdie
der Psychologie, Themenbereich D: Praxisgebiete, Serie I: Pdagogische Psychologie, Band 3: Psychologie des
Unterrichts und der Schule (pp. 71176). Gttingen, Germany: Hogrefe.
Heschong-Mahone Group. (1999). Daylighting in schools: An investigation into the relationship between
daylighting and human performance. Fair Oaks, CA: Heschong-Mahone Group.
Heschong-Mahone Group. (2003). Windows and classrooms: A study of student performance and the indoor
environment. P50003082-A-7. Fair Oaks, CA: Heschong-Mahone Group.
Hillmann, R. B., Brooks, C. I., & OBrien, J. P. (1991). Differences in self-esteem of college freshmen as a function of
classroom seating-row preference. Psychological Record, 41, 315320.
Horne, S. C. (2000). The children/youth environment and its effects on the practice of teachers. Proceedings of the
31st EDRA conference: Building Bridges: Connecting People, Research, and Design. EDRA: San Francisco, CA.
Jacobs, E. (1999). Cooperative learning: An educational innovation in everyday classrooms. Albany: State
University of New York Press.
Jago, E., & Tanner, K. (1999). Influence of the school facility on student achievement: Thermal environment.
Athens: University of Georgia. Retrieved from www.coe.uga.edu/sdpl/researchabstracts/thermal.html.
Jago, E., & Tanner, K. (2005). Influence of the school facility on student achievement. Athens: University of
Georgia.
Kennedy, M. (2003). History in the making. American School & University, 75, 110.
Klockhaus, R., & Habermann-Morbey, B. (1986). Psychologie des Schulvandalismus. Gttingen, Germany:
Hogrefe.
Krebs, A. H. (1982). Critical points in problem solving. Journal of Agricultural Education, 54(10), 57.
Kroner, W. (1994). Architecture for children. Better: Karl Krmer Verlag: Stuttgart.
Kkelhaus, H., & Lippe, R. zur (1992). Entfaltung der Sinne. Ein Erfahrungsfeld zur Bewegung und Besinnung
(2nd ed.). Frankfurt, Germany: Fischer alternativ Taschenbuch 4065.
Kwok, A. G. (2000). Thermal comfort concepts and guidelines. In J. D. Spengler, J. M. Samet, & J. F. McCarthy (Eds.),
Indoor air quality handbook (15.115.13). New York: McGraw-Hill.
Lackney, J. A. (1999). Reading a school building like a book: The influence of the physical school setting on
learning and literacy. Jackson: Educational Design Institute, Mississippi State University.
Lackney, J. A. (2000). Thirty-three educational design principles for schools and community learning centers.
Jackson: Educational Design Institute, Mississippi State University.
Lackney, J. A. (2009). A design language for schools and learning communities. In R. Walden (Ed.), Schools for the
future: Design proposals from architectural psychology (pp. 155168). Gttingen, Germany: Hogrefe & Huber.
Lee, V. E., & Smith, J. B. (1995). Effects of high school restructuring and size on early gains in achievement and
engagement. Sociology of Education, 68(4), 241270.
Lemasters, L. (1997). A synthesis of studies pertaining to facilities, student achievement, and student behavior.
Blacksburg: University of Virginia, Educational Leadership and Policy Studies Center.
Page 19 of 24
School Environments
Lemke, M., Calsyn, C., Lippman, L., Jocelyn, L., Kastberg, D.,Bairu, G. (2001). Highlights from the 2000 Program
for International Student Assessment (PISA). OECD, Retrieved from .
http://nces.ed.gov/pubsearch/pubsinfo.asp?pubid=2002116
Levin, J., & Nolan, J. F. (2000). Principles of classroom management. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
Lindholm, G. (1995). Schoolyards: The significance of place properties to outdoor activities in schools.
Environment and Behavior, 27, 259293.
Linneweber, V. (1993). Wer sind die Experten?User needs analysis (UNA), post occupancy evaluation (POE),
und Stdtebau aus sozial- und umweltpsychologischer Perspektive. In H. J. Harloff (Ed.), Psychologie des
Wohnungs- und Siedlungsbaus: Psychologie im Dienste von Architektur und Stadtplanung (pp. 7585). Gottingen,
Stuttgart: Verlag fur Angewandte Psychologie.
Linneweber, V. (1996). Lernumwelt: Schule. In L. Kruse, C. F. Graumann, & E. D. Lantermann (Eds.), kologische
Psychologie (pp. 383388). Mnchen, Germany: PVU.
Linneweber, V., Mummendey, A., Bornewasser, M., & Lschper, G. (1984). Classification of situations specific to
field and behavior: The context of aggressive interactions in schools. European Journal of Social Psychology, 14,
281295.
Louv, R. (2008). Last child in the woods: Saving our children from nature-deficit disorder. Chapel Hill, NC:
Algonquin.
Lstiburek, J., & Carmody, J. (1994). The moisture control handbook: Principles and practices for residential and
small commercial buildings. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold.
Mahnke, F. (1996). Color and the human response. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
Malaguzzi, Loris. (1984).. Locchio se salt ail muro. Catalog of the Exhibit. Regione di Emilia Romagna: Comune di
Reggio Emilia, Assesserato Istruzione.
Marx, A., Fuhrer, U., & Hartig, T. (1999). Effects of classroom seating arrangements on childrens question-asking.
Learning Environments Research, 2(3), 249263.
(p. 293) McAndrew, F. T. (1993). Environmental psychology. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole.
McAndrews, T., & Anderson, W. (2002). Schools within schools. ERIC Digest 154. College of Education, Eugene,
University of Oregon, Clearinghouse on Educational Management.
McGuffey, C. (1982). Facilities. In H. J. Walberg (Ed.), Improving educational standards and productivity (pp. 237
288). Berkeley, CA: McCutchan.
McMullan, B. J., Sipe, C. L., & Wolf, W. C. (1994). Charters and student achievement: Early evidence from school
restructuring in Philadelphia. Bala Cynwyd, PA: Center for Assessment and Policy Development.
Mendell, M. J., & Heath, G.A. (2004). Do indoor pollutants and thermal conditions in schools influence student
performance? A critical review of the literature. Indoor Air, 15, 2752.
Montessori, M. (1988). The Montessori Method. New York: Random House.
Moore, R. (1989). Playgrounds at the crossroads. In I. Altman & E. Zube (Eds), Public spaces and places. New York:
Plenum.
Moos, R. F. (1979). Evaluating education environments. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
Nathan, J., and Thao, S. (2007). Smaller, safer, saner, successful schools. Minneapolis, MN: Center for School
Change. Hubert Humphrey Institute of Public Affairs.
National Research Council. (2007). Green schools: Attributes for health and learning. Washington, DC: National
Academies Press.
Page 20 of 24
School Environments
Northwest Educational Technology Consortium. (2002). Virtual schools: What do educational leaders need to
know? Paper presented at the 2002 NCCE Conference, Seattle, WA.
OECD (Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development). (2004). Learning for tomorrows world: First
results from PISA 2004. http://www.oecd.org/dataoecd/1/60/34002216.pdf
Oelkers, J. (1996). Reformpdagogik: Eine kritische Dogmengeschichte [Reform pedagogy: A critical history of
dogma]. Weinheim, Germany: Juventa.
Oliver, C., & Lippman, P. C. (2007). Examining space and place in learning environments. Paper presented at the
CONNECTED International Conference on Design Education, July 912, University of New South Wales, Sydney,
Australia.
Pablant, P., & Baxter, J. C. (1996). Environmental correlates of school vandalism. In A. P. Goldstein (Ed.), The
psychology of vandalism (pp. 213233). New York: Plenum.
Journal of the American Institute of Planners. 1975, 41, 270279.
Pasalar, C. (2003). The effects of spatial layouts on students interactions in middle schools. doctoral
dissertation. Retrieved from http://www2.lib.ncsu.edu/catalog/record/NCSU1698934
Petersen, P. (1927). Der Jena- Plan einer freien allgemeinen Volksschule [The Jena Plan for a free common
elementary school]. Weinheim, Germany: Beltz.
Petersen, P. (19301934). Der groe Jena- Plan. Schulleben und Unterricht einer freien Volksschule. Das
gestaltende Schaffen. Die Praxis der Schulen nach dem Jena- Plan [The Greater Jena Plan: Life and instruction in a
free elementary school: Creative activity: The practice of schools according to the Jena Plan]. Weinheim,
Germany: Beltz.
Picard, M., & Bradley, J. S. (2001). Revisiting speech interference in classrooms. Audiology, 40, 221244.
Pittman, R. B., & Haoghwout, P. (1987). Influence of high school size on dropout rate. Education Evaluation and
Policy Analysis, 9(4), 337343.
Raywid, M. A. (1999). Current literature on small schools. Charleston, WV: ERIC Clearinghouse on Rural Education
and Small Schools.
Rieselbach, A. (1992). Building and learning. In Architectural League (Eds.), New schools for New York: Plans and
precedents for small schools. New York: Princeton Architectural Press.
Rittelmeyer, C. (1994). Schulbauten positiv gestalten. Wie Schler Farben und Formen erleben. Wiesbaden,
Germany: Bauverlag.
Rittelmeyer, C. (2004). Zur Rhetorik von Schulbauten. ber die schlergerechte Gestaltung des architektonischen
Ausdrucks. Die Deutsche Schule, 96(2), 201208.
Rittelmeyer, C. (2009). Schule als gestalteter Raum: Schularchitektur. In S. Hellekamps, W. Plger, & W.
Wittenbruch (Eds.), Handbuch Schule (pp. 505511). Paderborn, Germany: Schningh.
Robson, E. R. (1972). School architecture. Leicester, UK: Leicester University Press.
Rothman, D. J. (1980). From conscience to convenience: The asylum and its alternatives in progressive America.
Boston, MA: Little, Brown.
Sanoff, H. (1994). School design. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
Sanoff, H. (2001). A visioning process for designing responsive schools. Washington, DC: National Clearinghouse
for Educational Facilities.
Sanoff, H. (2002). Schools designed with community participation. Washington, DC: National Clearinghouse for
Educational Facilities.
Page 21 of 24
School Environments
Sanoff, H. (2009). Schools designed with community participation. In R. Walden (Ed.), Schools for the future:
Design proposals from architectural psychology (pp. 123142). Gttingen, Germany: Hogrefe & Huber.
Schavan, A. (2001). Schulen in Baden-Wrttemberg. Moderne und historische Bauten zwischen Rhein, Neckar
und Bodensee. Stuttgart, Germany: Hohenheim Verlag.
Scheibe, W. (1999). Die reformpdagogische Bewegung 19001932. Eine einfhrende Darstellung [The reform
pedagogy movement 19001932: An introduction]. Weinheim, Germany: Beltz.
Schmittmann, R. (1985). Architektur als Partner fr Lehren und Lernen. Eine handlungstheoretisch orientierte
Evaluationsstudie am Groraum der Laborschule Bielefeld. Frankfurt, Germany: Lang.
Schnabel, K. (2001). Psychologie der Lernumwelt. In A. Krapp & B. Weidenmann (Eds.), Pdagogische Psychologie.
Ein Lehrbuch (4th ed., pp. 467511). Weinheim, Germany: Beltz/PVU.
Schoggen, P. (1989). Behavior settings: A revision and extension of Roger G. Barkers ecological psychology.
Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
Seppnen, O., & Fisk, W. J. (2005). Control of temperature for health and productivity in offices. ASHRAE
Transactions, 111, 680686.
Silberman, C. E. (1973). The open classroom reader. New York: Vintage Books.
Skinner, E. A., & Belmont, M. J. (1993). Motivation in the classroom: Reciprocal effects of teacher behavior and
student engagement across the school year. Journal of Educational Psychology, 85(4), 571581.
Sommer, R., & Olsen, H. (1980). The soft classroom. Environment and Behavior, 12, 316.
Stevenson, K. R. (2002). Ten educational trends shaping school planning and design. Washington, DC: National
Clearinghouse for Educational Facilities.
(p. 294) Stevenson, K. R. (2006). Educational facilities within the context of a changing 21st-century America.
Washington, DC: National Clearinghouse for Educational Facilities.
Stockard, J., & Mayberry, M. (1992). Effective educational environments. Newbury Park, CA: ERIC Document
Reproduction Service No. ED 350 674.
Strhlein, G. (1998). Beitrge zur Evaluation schulischer Umwelten. In F. Dieckmann, A. Flade, R. Schuemer, G.
Strhlein, & R. Walden (Eds.), Psychologie und gebaute Umwelt (pp. 178181). Darmstadt, Germany: IWU.
Sullivan, K. (2002). Catching the age wave: Building schools with senior citizens in mind. Washington, DC:
National Clearinghouse for Educational Facilities.
Tanner, C. K. (1999). The school design assessment scale: Validity, reliability, and weights. Paper presented at
CEFPI Annual Conference, Baltimore, MD.
Tanner, C. K., & J. Lackney. (2006). Educational architecture: Planning, designing, constructing, and managing
environments for learning. Needham Heights, MA: Allyn & Bacon.
Taylor, A. P. (1975). School zone: Learning environments for children. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold Company.
Trump, J. L. (1959). Images of the future: A new approach to the secondary school. Washington, DC: National
Association of Secondary School Principals.
US Green Building Council. (2007). LEED for schools. Green School Buildings website.
http://www.usgbc.org/DisplayPage.aspx?CMSPageID=1586
Uline, C. L., Tschannen-Moran, M., & Wolsey, T. D. (2008). The walls speak: The interplay of quality facilities,
school climate, and student achievement. Journal of Educational Administration, 46(1), 5573.
Page 22 of 24
School Environments
Walden, R. (Ed.). (2009). Schools for the future: Design proposals from architectural psychology. (T. Mann,
Trans.). Gttingen, Germany: Hogrefe & Huber.
Walden, R. (2010). Kap. 6: Lernumwelten. In V. Linneweber, E.-D. Lantermann & E. Kals (Hrsg.): Spezifische
Umwelten und umweltbezogenes Handeln die der Psychologie (Reihe: Enzyklopdie der Psychologie;
Themenbereich C, Theorie und Forschung; Serie IX Umweltpsychologie, Bd. 2; Teil II: Umwelten und ihre Nutzer:
kleinrumige Umwelten) (herausgegeben von N. Birbaumer et al.) (S. 151186). Gttingen: Hogrefe.
Walden, R., & Borrelbach, S. (2010). Schulen der Zukunft. Gestaltungsvorschlge der Architekturpsychologie (6th
ed.). Heidelberg, Germany: Asanger.
Wang, D., Federspiel, C. C., & Arens, E. (2005). Correlation between temperature satisfaction and unsolicited
complaint rates in commercial buildings. Indoor Air, 15, 1318.
Wasley, P. A., Fine, M., Gladden, M., Holland, N. E., King, S. P.,Powell, L. C. (2000). Small schools: Great strides.
New York: Bank Street College of Education.
Watschinger, J., & Khebacher, J. (Eds.) (2007), Schularchitektur und neue Lernkultur. Neues LernenNeue
Rume. Bern, Switzerland: h.e.p. verlag ag/Ott Verlag.
Weinstein, C. S. (1979). The physical environment of the school: A review of the research. Review of Educational
Research, 49, 577610.
Weinstein, C. S., & Pinciotti, P. (1988). Changing the schoolyard: Intentions, design decisions, and behavioral
outcomes. Environment and Behavior, 20(3), 345371.
Weiss, A. (2007), Creating the ubiquitous classroom: Integrating physical and virtual learning spaces. International
Journal of Learning, 14(3). 7784.
Wohlfarth, H. H. (1985). The effects of color-psychodynamic environmental color and lighting modification of
elementary schools on blood pressure and mood: A controlled study. International Journal for Biosocial Research,
7(1), 916.
Wolfe, M., & Rivlin, L. G. (1987). The institutions in childrens lives. In C. S. Weinstein & T. G. David (Eds.), Spaces
for children: The built environment and child development. New York: Plenum.
Wright, R. J. (1975). The affective and cognitive consequences of an open education elementary school. American
Educational Research Journal, 12, 449468.
Wstenrot-Stiftung, H. (Ed.). (2004). Schulen in Deutschland: Neubau und Revitalisierung. Stuttgart, Germany:
Krmer.
Wyon, D. P. (2004). The effects of indoor air quality on performance and productivity. Indoor Air, 14(7), 92101.
Yanagisawa, K. (2009). Trends in the design and planning of schools from the viewpoint of information technology
and communication. In R. Walden (Ed.), Schools for the future: Design proposals from architectural psychology
(pp. 143154). Gttingen, Germany: Hogrefe & Huber.
Henry Sanoff
Henry Sanoff College of Design North Carolina State University Raleigh, NC
Rotraut Walden
Rotraut Walden Institute for Psychology University in Koblenz Koblenz, Germany
Page 23 of 24
Introduction
This chapter concerns the influence of the environmental dimensions of spatial-physical nature on the
psychological and behavioral responses expressed by the users of health care environments. We will often use
the words hospital or hospital units with reference to health care environments, in line with most literature on
the effects of health care design.
The importance of this topic is firstly witnessed by the fact that it has to do with the birth of environmental
psychology as a distinct field of study, when the research group of the City University of New York (including
William Ittelson and Harold Proshansky), financially supported by the United States National Institute of Mental
Health, started to study the role of the spatial and architectural setting of a psychiatric hospital in patients behavior
(Ittelson, 1960). In the same period, psychologists and psychiatrists in other countries were involved in similar
research projects. In particular, the work of Humphrey Osmond in Canada at the end of the 1950s led him to
propose a theory on the existence of sociofugal spatial settings, which may discourage social interaction, or
conversely, sociopetal settings, which may encourage social interaction (Osmond, 1957). Similarly, the studies of
Robert Sommer on geriatric wards promoted the formulation of the two important constructs of human territoriality
and personal space (Sommer, 1969), which found a remarkable following in psychology in general and
environmental psychology in particular, as well as in architectural design (Gifford, 2002). In Europe, Paul Silvadon
a French psychiatriststarted a research collaboration with architects and studied the effect of the psychiatric
hospital design upon patients (p. 296) healing. This study was then published in a monograph supported by the
World Health Organization (Baker, Davis, & Silvadon, 1960).
Page 1 of 24
User-Centered Design
During the past decades there has been an increased attention in the design domain to the satisfaction of users
needs, desires, and goals. This awareness is mirrored in an approach called social design (Sommer, 1983) or
user-centered design (Gifford, 2002), which aims at planning and designing spaces by taking into account the
point of view of current and potential users. Thus, the underlying worldview expressed in this design approach
focuses on the main social actor for whom a given built space is intendedits user. This point is in contrast with
the rapid technological progress, which has encouraged the development of a wide range of design solutions
based on (i) new formal design principles, (ii) increased communication between professionals at the international
level, and (iii) use of innovative and more sophisticated building materials (Gifford, 2002, p. 472). This development
has generated a great deal of attention for the satisfaction of the technical requirements that a formal built space
should possess to be considered well done, but on the other side the satisfaction of its occupants has been
substantially neglected.
The contrast between formal satisfaction of technical requirements and users satisfaction is rooted in the
differences of opinion between designers and users, that is, between experts, whose judgment is influenced
mostly by their professional background, and laypeople, whose representations and images are socially and
culturally built up through the processes of knowledge and goal-directed action, which build on the systems of
practices that characterize the specific place (Bonnes & Secchiaroli, 1995).
An empirical proof of this dichotomy is provided by the research carried out by Duffy and colleagues (Duffy,
Bailey, Beck, & Barker, 1986) on the renewal of a health care residence, where directors and designers preferred a
project that fostered social interaction (assuming that this was the need for residents), whereas the residents
preferred a plan that would increase their level of privacy. Another study focusing on 10 hypothetical residential
projects showed a very weak relationship between the preferences expressed by a group of designers and those
of the neighborhood users (Stamps, 1991). Moreover, other studies showed that architects generally prefer
residential buildings with unusual forms, whereas non-architects prefer buildings that are recognizable in terms of
their residential function (Purcell & Nasar, 1992).
Page 2 of 24
Page 3 of 24
Page 4 of 24
Figure 16.1 Environmental Humanization as Interplay Between Users and Spatial-Physical Setting
Source: Bonnes, Bonaiuto, Fornara, & Bilotta, 2009
The adequacy of a given combination of these attributes depends on which user, which hospital unit, and which
functional area within the unit are involved. For example, a given combination of lights, colors, and materials can
be satisfying for patients but dysfunctional for staff. Similarly, what is appropriate in a cardiology unit may not be so
in an intensive care unit. And what is suitable for an inpatient area may not be the case in an outpatient area within
the same hospital unit. Moreover, it is crucial to take into account individual differences mediated by various
sociocultural memberships, (p. 299) such as gender, age, socioeconomic status, nationality, and so on.
In sum, promoting a higher level of spatial-physical humanization of a health care setting means to take into
account its architectural configuration to on the one hand facilitate the relationship between patients, staff, and
visitors, and on the other hand increase the degree of welcome and comfort. Unfortunately, the prototypical view
of hospitals is actually characterized by poor materials and furniture, difficult wayfinding, poor lighting, unpleasant
views, lack of upkeep, and poor user control over the environment. This negative appearance overlaps with the
distress, anxiety, helplessness, and dependence that often characterize the users (in particular inpatients)
hospital experience, whereas a humanized environment implies primarily a more familiar place, which refers to a
home-like or hotel-like conception of the health care setting (Verderber & Fine, 2000). Examples include the
possibility for inpatients to personalize their bedrooms, the reception similar to the hall of a hotel (with plants,
pictures, or other ornaments), the reduction of the number of beds per room (single or double room), the use of
warm materials such as wood (instead of the cold and aseptic iron), the presence of comfortable furniture and
appropriate colors, and the presence of pleasant views (possibly onto green spaces).
These suggestions derive from the research literature on the influence of health care environments on users wellbeing. Nevertheless, many scholars (e.g., Evans & McCoy, 1998; Nagasawa, 2000; Reizenstein, 1982; Verderber
& Fine, 2000) have underlined the need for more empirical research on this topic, since it is more common to find
in literature descriptive analyses of idiographic nature, guidelines supporting health design that are based on
taxonomies of spatial-physical attributes that seem to play a role in users health, and finally post-occupancy
evaluation (POE) studies that have dealt mainly with technological medical issues but have not taken the issues
of users well-being and quality of life sufficiently into account (Zimring, 2002). Furthermore, spatial-physical
features have not typically been included in assessment surveys on patients satisfaction (Devlin & Arneill, 2003),
despite the fact that patients mention the importance of aspects such as cleanliness, comfort, and privacy when
asked about their rooms (e.g., Bruster et al., 1994; Harris, McBride, Ross, & Curtis, 2002).
Nevertheless, some studies have supported that people do not ignore health care environments and that they
actually react to different levels of spatial-physical humanization. Comparative investigations among hospitals with
a different degree of spatial-physical humanization are provided by the studies of Davidson (1994), Devlin (1995),
and Fornara and colleagues (2006). Davidson (1994) showed that patients assessed a recently renewed oncology
unit more positively than an oldernot renewedoncology unit. Similarly, in the comparison between (p. 300)
two renewed wards and a not-renewed ward carried out by Devlin (1995), all the three main categories of hospital
users (i.e., patients, staff, and visitors) express higher satisfaction for the first as regards communication level,
relationship between patients and staff, comfort, and the surrounding environment. Fornara and colleagues (2006)
Page 5 of 24
Page 6 of 24
Page 7 of 24
This line of reasoning recalls from one side Barkers (1987) construct of behavioral setting, and from the other
side Bronfenbrenners (1979) ecological approach. A behavioral setting is conceived as a molar unit of analysis
that includes specific persons, behaviors, and spatial-physical and temporal features that represent
interdependent components organized according to a specific setting program (Barker, 1987). Thus, each hospital
subplace can be seen as a specific behavioral setting, and the interdependence among components appears both
intra- and inter-settings. Bronfenbrenners (1979) systemic view conceives the ecological environment as a
series of concentric structures, including the one in the other (see Figure 16.2). Such structures are (i) the
microsystem, the interactions between individuals and their immediate environment (e.g., patients or caregivers
staying in an inpatient area), (ii) the mesosystem, the relationships and connections among different microsystems
to which the individual takes part (e.g., the connections of a diagnosis unit and an inpatient unit with reference to
patients or caregivers behavior), (iii) the exosystem, that system where phenomena occur that can affect
individuals, even if they have no direct contact with that system (e.g., changes in the (p. 302) hospital
management or events in caregivers private life that could influence patients well-being), and finally (iv) the
macrosystem, the broader system including societal norms and systems of beliefs that characterize a cultural
context (e.g., the systems of norms and beliefs that characterize the health care issues in a given nation).
Place theory, the behavioral setting construct, and the ecological approach all have in common the conception of
the environment as interconnection and interplay between social and spatial-physical features. Following this
theoretical framework, Bonnes and Secchiaroli (1995) developed the multi-place perspective, where each place
can be seen as a system of subplaces whose relationship is expressed by the main criteria of inclusion versus
exclusion and nearness versus farness. From this perspective, the different subplaces appear as more or less
connected with reference to users goals, activities, representations, and opportunities. Thus, applying this view to
health care environments, a specific hospital unit (i) includes different areas (such as in- and outpatient areas, or
areas mainly for staff and areas mainly for patients/visitors, etc.), (ii) is in a relationship of nearness or farness with
another unit of the same hospital, (iii) is included in the hospital to which it belongs, and (iv) is excluded from
another hospital. In other words, single places should not be seen as separated, since each place is part of a
broader place system, that is, within a complex of other places that are connected with it in users representation
and behaviors. Thus, the individuals place experience will be organized in a multi-place sense, that is, integrating
the various levels of the different place systems implicated through the action in the socio-physical environment
(Bonnes & Secchiaroli, 1995, p. 194).
Page 8 of 24
Page 9 of 24
Page 10 of 24
Generic Patients
Most of the studies found do not relate to any special group of patients. Thus, we organized such studies on
generic patients in terms of health care environment characteristics.
As Dijkstra, Pieterse, and Pruyn (2008a) did, we used the classification of the physical environmental stimuli of
Harris et al. (2002). These authors distinguished three relevant dimensions of the physical environment:
architectural features, interior design features, and ambient features. Architectural features are relatively
permanent characteristics, such as the spatial layout of a hospital, room size, and window placement. Interior
design features are defined as less permanent elements, such as furnishings, colors, and artwork. Ambient
features comprise lighting, noise levels, odors, and temperature.
Architectural Features
The well-known study of Ulrich (1984) is a good example of a study on the effect of an architectural feature. Ulrich
focused on the effect of the view from a window that patients recovering from surgery could have. Patients with a
view of nature had shorter postoperative hospital stays, received fewer negative evaluative comments in nurses
notes, and took fewer potent analgesic doses than patients in similar rooms with a view of a brick wall.
Also concerned with architectural issues, the studies on the effects of single and multiple rooms tend to support
that single rooms are advantageous with respect to improvements in patient care, reduction in the risk of crossinfection, reduction in patient stress, improvement in patient privacy and control, and greater flexibility in operation
(Chaudhury, Mahmood, & Valente, 2005).
Two recent studies investigated the impact of architectural features.
Page 11 of 24
Page 12 of 24
Ambient Features
Noise is one of the most often examined ambient features in health care environment research, and consequent
difficulty to sleep is one of the studied outcomes.
Topf, Bookman, and Arand (1996) examined the effects of noise on the subjective quality of sleep. Volunteers,
attempting to sleep overnight in a laboratory, were randomly assigned to hear audiotapes of an actual critical care
unit or quiet. Participants in the noise condition took longer to fall asleep, spent less time sleeping, and awakened
more often. Hagerman and colleagues (2005) focused on the (p. 307) effects of room acoustics on patients with
coronary artery disease. They compared patients who were in the unit with sound-reflecting ceiling tiles (bad
acoustics) with patients who were there after the replacement with sound-absorbing tiles of similar appearance
(good acoustics). Patients with acute myocardial infarction and unstable angina showed lower pulse amplitude
during the night in the good acoustics period. In addition to these physiological effects, patients of the good
acoustics group considered the staff attitude to be much better and had a lower incidence of rehospitalization than
patients treated during the bad acoustics period.
Two recent studies investigated the impact of ambient features, focusing, however, not on noise, but on music.
Short and colleagues (2010) examined the effects of listening to music via headphones and an MP3 player on
reducing noise stress. Participants were randomly assigned to the control or the music intervention group. Results
regarding individual comments suggested participants enjoyment, distraction, and escape from the
environment; however, there were no significant differences between groups in terms of perceived stress, positive
affect, and negative affect.
Nilsson (2009) evaluated the effect of bed rest with music on relaxation for patients who had undergone heart
surgery, on postoperative day one. Patients undergoing open coronary artery bypass grafting and/or aortic valve
replacement surgery were randomly allocated to either music listening during bed rest (distributed through a music
pillow) or bed rest only. Results showed that in the music group, levels of oxytocin increased significantly in
contrast to the control group, and that subjective relaxations levels were higher in the music group. Since the
oxytocin system operates in parallel with the stress response systems (Evans, 1997, in Nilsson, 2009), Nilsson
concluded that music during bed rest after open-heart surgery affects the relaxation system.
Page 13 of 24
Page 14 of 24
Caregivers
Ulrich and colleagues (2008), in their literature review, observed different aspects in the built environment that can
affect staff outcomes, such as injuries, stress, work effectiveness, and satisfaction. Chaudhury et al. (2009)
proposed a conceptual approach in which factors such as stress, fatigue, distractions, and satisfaction might be
viewed as mediating factors in the relationship between both management decisions and organizational processes
and physical environment aspects, and nursing medication errors. For instance, Blomkvist, Eriksen, Theorell, Ulrich,
and Rasmanis (2005) found that lower noise levels were linked with reduced perceived work demands, less
pressure and strain, and better speech intelligibility. These results seem to indicate that improved acoustic
conditions in the health care environment may increase capacity to care for the patients and reduce risks of
conflicts and errors (Blomkvist et al., 2005; Chaudhury et al., 2009).
In fact, like patients, staff are not immune to effects of the health care physical environment. Fornara, Bonnes, and
Bonaiuto (2006) verified that staff members were less sensitive than patients and visitors to differences in design
Page 15 of 24
Page 16 of 24
Visitors
Another important category of users is represented by visitors, that is, patients relatives and friends who are using
the place for visiting patients. Visitors needs have been generally neglected by designers (Zimring, Reizenstein, &
Michelson, 1987), since they represent the last considered category in the typical hierarchy of needs in the
hospital, where the first are the caregivers, the second (p. 311) are the inpatients, and the third are the
outpatients (Leather et al., 2003). This scarce attention to visitors is witnessed by the fact that those who go to a
hospital to find a relative or a friend often have to cope with a stressful experience, since they may have difficulty
in finding their way around, or may have to stay in an unfriendly, frightening, chaotic, and aseptic environment.
Empirical studies that compared the responses of visitors with the ones of patients and staff show that visitors
assessment is generally closer to patients than to caregivers evaluation (Fornara, 2005; Fornara et al., 2006);
however, a recent research indicated that visitors are the least satisfied group, and rate the places as more
unpleasant and gloomy than patients and staff (Fornara et al., 2010).
Previous studies have found that social support from families reduces patient stress (e.g., Koivula et al., 2002), and
that family members have several cognitive, emotional, social, and practical needs (Verhaeghe et al., 2005), which
indicates that design should be more supportive of this group of users.
A recent study by Meert, Briller, Schim, and Thurston (2008) explored parents environmental needs during their
childs hospitalization and death in the pediatric intensive care unit (PICU). Through semi-structured in-depth
interviews with parents who had experienced the death of their child two years before, the environmental themes
identified included privacy, proximity, adequate space, control of sensory stimuli, cleanliness, safety, facilities to
care for self and others, access to their children, and the physical presence of people who provide professional
and personal support. They concluded that parents clearly remembered specific features of the PICU and that the
environmental attributes that have been found to benefit patients seem to support families as well.
Conclusion
This chapter has addressed the relationship between health care design features and users psychological and
behavioral responses. It showed the shift from a kind of design more affected by technological progress to a more
user-centered design, which tends to environmental humanization, thus recovering the lesson that Florence
Nightingale left us in the 19th century. Then it delineated the recent push toward an evidence-based design
concerning health care environments, which is evidenced by the interest of important associations (such as the
Center for Health Design and the Institute for Healthcare Improvement in the United States, and the Health and Care
Infrastructure Research and Innovation Centre in the United Kingdom) and the implementation of massive programs
(such as the Planetree model and the Pebble Project) at a national level.
A theoretical framework was then outlined to provide a conceptual lens that can be useful for the study of
psychological patterns occurring in the health care environment. Such a lens is composed of what we learned from
Canters (1977) place theory, Barkers (1987) behavioral setting, Bronfenbrenners (1979) ecological approach,
and the multi-place approach proposed by Bonnes and Secchiaroli (1995). The view of hospitals as multi-place
systems takes into account the presence of different categories of place users who differ in their environmental
roles (Canter, 1977, 1983) and thus, often show different responses to the settings spatial-physical dimensions
and express different design needs.
Page 17 of 24
Consistently, the recent research literature on the issue was organized according to the different target groups of
health care place users, that is, generic patients, specific patients in terms of age groups (children and elderly),
caregivers, and finally visitors (i.e., patients relatives and friends).
Studies that focus on generic patients show new and important evidence of the impact of architecture features on
the delivery of care. As previous studies have shown (e.g., Ulrich et al., 1991; Ulrich & Gilpin, 2003), recent
findings confirm the positive effects of the presence of plants on stress and hospital room appraisal, and also that
inpatients prefer realistic nature paintings over abstract (even if best-selling) art. Redecoration of rooms with wood
paneling and Japanese paper has a positive influence in thermal comfort and decreasing stress levels, and room
colors seem to have different impact on stress and arousal, depending on screening ability differences. The recent
results on the study of music effects on well-being are contradictory, which might indicate that music can be
effective only under certain circumstances (see also Evans, 2002), and that in some situations a quiet environment
can be more beneficial. Overall, recent studies on multiple environmental features reinforce that people can make
judgments about care, comfort, and therapist qualities only by looking at some prompts in the health care physical
environment. Additionally, results of Rowlands and Noble (2008) warn researchers and decision makers that single
rooms are not preferred by all users.
Recent studies focusing on children are based on interviews and other child/adolescent-friendly (p. 312)
techniques. The authors claimed that those approaches can be useful to inform architects and designers about
young peoples preferences; however, further studies evaluating the effects of health care environment and
childrens/adolescents behavioral, cognitive, and psychosocial outcomes are important to strengthen such
results.
Concerning studies about elderly people, contradictory results were found with respect to the effects of residential
care refurbishment. These studies seem to indicate that different sensibilities of elders to environmental change
need to be investigated, and that refurbishments should therefore be planned carefully, taking such differences
into account. Moreover, since the older population is increasing, so should the studies about how health care and
residential environments should benefit this group of users.
About studies that analyzed the impact of the health care environment on staff outcomes, positive effects of single
rooms were found, but effective modifications in operational management of the whole service seem to be crucial
for caregivers who experience the change from open bays to single rooms. Nonetheless, these effects, as well as
the effect of crowding on antidepressant treatments, need stronger evidence since they may be explained by
other confounding variables. Unit design affects also nurses walking distance and stops, and improving the
physical design and organizational layout of the medication room seems to have positive results. Some of these
aspects emerged on the qualitative study carried out by Gurses and Carayon (2009). Finally, about visitors
experience of the health care environment, it seems that their environmental needs are similar to those of patients
but that their response to spatial-physical setting is more negative, which may be justified by the fact the hospital
designers usually ignore visitors needs. Anyway, research about the availability and conditions of proper space
for visitors and the impact on relevant visitors and patient outcomes is lacking.
Future Directions
The review of the most recent studies about the effects of health care environment on users shows that this field is
growing, thus confirming the opinion of Ulrich et al. (2008), which was based on their extensive literature review on
health care evidence-based design. It also confirmed the complexity of this area of research, given the high
number of environmental variables implied and the various methods that have been used to analyze their
relationship. Because of that, some effects can still be considered inconsistent or unclear. Given this scenario, we
have to agree with other scholars that there is still a lack of more rigorous and controlled studies (Ulrich et al.,
2008; Dijkstra et al., 2006) to obtain more credible and reliable evidence that can be applied to the design of health
care settings. Thus, the field needs more studies that can disentangle the independent effect of different
environmental features, measure relevant health outcomes, account for the processes that lead environment to
affect outcomes, as well as of the possible implicated mediators and moderators, and that can consider users
characteristics and needs. The fact is that the difficulty of controlling variables represents a dangerous risk for the
usefulness of evidence-based design, and as stated by Malkin (1991), for many design questions, there is no
Page 18 of 24
References
Adams, A., Theodore, D., Goldenberg, E., McLaren, C., & McKeever, P. (2010). Kids in the atrium: Comparing
architectural intentions and childrens experiences in a pediatric hospital lobby. Social Science & Medicine, 70,
658667.
Andrade, C., Lima, L., Fornara F., & Bonaiuto, M. (2012). Users views of hospital environmental quality: Validation
of the Perceived Hospital Environment Quality Indicators (PHEQIs). Journal of Environmental Psychology, 32, 97
111.
Arneill, A., & Devlin, A. S. (2002). Perceived quality of care: The influence of the waiting room environment. Journal
of Environmental Psychology, 22, 345360.
Baker, A., Davis, R., & Silvadon, P. (1960). Psychiatric services and architecture. Geneva, Switzerland: World
Health Organization.
Barker, R. G. (1987). Prospecting environmental psychology: Oskaloosa revisited. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.),
Handbook of environmental psychology (Vol. 2, pp. 14131432). New York: Wiley.
Page 19 of 24
Page 20 of 24
Page 21 of 24
Page 22 of 24
Page 23 of 24
Page 24 of 24
Correctional Environments
Introduction
Cavernous spaces with dull gray surfaces of concrete and steel, rooms with solid metal doors or bars, floors that
can be washed down with a hose, a loud din that blends voices, alarms, TVs, loudspeakers and banging doors,
and a constant acrid smell (a mixture of sweat, food, urine, and disinfectant). Some men in colored pajamas mill
about or stare at a TV; others in uniforms watch from the other side of bars or in glass booths. Anyone who has
watched action films or prime-time video would recognize this as a prison. Actual places vary considerablysome
have cells with one or two beds while others have dormitories with stacks of bunks. Many have surfaces that are
hard, fixed, and inflexible, as above, while some use more comfortable and moveable furniture, brighter colors, and
windows to courtyards. In some, officers and inmates speak with military-like discipline, while in others interactions
are more informal and casual. Nevertheless, whether the furniture consists of concrete benches or upholstered
chairs, single rooms or large dorms, speaking through intercoms or face-to-face, a correctional setting is a place of
its own kind, not easily mistaken for any other.
What makes correctional environments so unusual is their very reason for being. There are other circumstances in
which people are detained involuntarily, though usually for brief periods or for their own health or improvement.
Prisons are unique in being settings where people are held against their will, for what may be very long periods of
time (often months or years, occasionally decades), and for purposes typically not intended for their own
betterment.
Because these environments afford extraordinarily little control to their occupants, the potential psychological and
behavioral impact of the physical environment is likely to be magnified. If crowding on a subway is bad, how much
worse in a cell; if (p. 317) isolation in a college dorm room is distressing, what about prison solitary confinement?
Page 1 of 21
Correctional Environments
Noise can be louder and more discordant as well as impossible to avoid. Many stressors may impinge at the same
time, leading to strong psychological and psychophysiological responses both for inmates and members of the
staff.
This chapter reviews issues relating to privacy, personal space and territoriality, the impact of crowding and
isolation, and ambient conditions such as noise, lighting, and view. It also discusses architectural design and layout
as it affects critical behaviors, such as violence. These are difficult settings into which to gain access for research.
Further study is needed on the nature and impact of crowding, and a thorough empirical assessment on the impact
of isolation is particularly lacking, especially in its most extreme forms.
Correctional institutions, such as prisons (institutions for sentenced individuals, often involving long-term stays)
and jails (pretrial or short-term detention), are, in Goffmans (1961) terms, total institutionsplaces that apply more
restraint and control over the life and behavior of the occupant than any other in society. As such there are
several indisputable truths. One is that the context of living in or even working in such an institution colors all
perceptions, actions, and social and power relationships. Imprisonment causes a reduction in the level of control
one has over all aspects of life, so that any environmental feature that can afford control, even something as small
as a light switch, takes on new meaning.
Another is that because of the above truth, particularly the lack of control available to occupants, the impacts of
environmental stressors are magnified in these settings (Evans & Strecker, 2004; Ruback, Carr, & Hopper, 1986).
In addition, the degree and time of exposure to environmental stressors can be greater in a prison than other
settings. Both crowding and isolation can exist to a greater degree and for longer periods of time than almost
anywhere else in society. Noise from people and equipment must be endured 24 hours a day. People can be
significantly shut off from daylight, high-intensity electric light, and access to or even view of nature. Social
intrusion may be omnipresent and fear and boredom are common.
This chapter will address environmental issues in prisons or jails as they can be understood from the perspective
of environmental psychology. It will look at the nature of specific environmental features and stressors in terms of
what is known about them and their observed or likely impact in a correctional setting. It will also address broader
issues of architectural design and corresponding management approaches as they affect behavior. In almost all
cases environmental conditions should be discussed in terms of how they affect both inmates, who have basic
human rights to humane and safe conditions, as well as members of the staff, who have the right to work in a safe
and healthful environment.
Page 2 of 21
Correctional Environments
change. This approach, which has become known as direct supervision (Nelson, 1988b; (p. 318) Wener, 2005),
proposed to bring the officer into direct and constant contact with inmates, by removing the separation of bars and
locked control stations. It used normalized design to reduce the institutional feel of the setting. Direct supervision
correctional design has been much discussed and studied, and it has had significant reported success (Wener,
2006).
Proxemics
The social ecology of a place may be viewed in terms of considerations of privacy, personal space, and
territoriality that are experienced in the context of interpersonal relations. These are central to the way the
correctional space is seen and felt.
Privacy
Altman (1975) defined privacy as a dynamic and dialectic process in which the individual struggles to match
access to self and the desired amount of contact with others with the level of contact and access allowed by the
setting. As such, privacy is a matter of regulation and control for an individual who tries to alter his or her setting to
meet changing needs. While there is great cultural variation in how this is achieved, Altman suggested that the
need for control is universal. Personal space and territoriality serve as spatial mechanisms for boundary control,
while crowding and isolation are conditions that arise when boundary control fails. Boundary control, of course, is
precisely and intentionally what inmates are missing in prisons and jails, as Foucault (1979) pointed out. For
Foucault, prisons and jails are the antithesis of privacy, and institutional design exists, in part, to remind inmates of
their diminished circumstances.
Westin (1967) described privacys functionsto promote the development of personal autonomy, provide
opportunities for emotional release, support attempts at self-evaluation, and limit and protect communication and
the various forms or levels of privacy: solitude, intimacy, anonymity, and reserve. These have obvious implications
for correctional settings. Solitude (being alone by choice), for instance, is difficult to achieve in situations where
forced contact with others or involuntary isolation are common. Inmates often desire to be alone, for sleeping,
reading, studying, thinking, or personal hygiene, but cannot, or they may be cut off from others when company is
wanted, as in early penitentiaries and modern administrative control units or maximum-security facilities.
Privacy may be necessary for emotional development by providing an opportunity for emotional release in
response to important, difficult, or troubling personal news (Altman, 1975; Pederson, 1999; Westin, 1967). When
people have to confront such intense feelings, they may seek the comfort of others in spaces that are away from
the gaze of strangers, which is an option that is generally unavailable in correctional settings. Prisoners are often
faced with bad news about a job, relationship, or court proceeding and there are few good places they can go for
an emotional outlet. The lack of such privacy options in a correctional setting may hinder an inmates ability to
accept, understand, and maturely deal with bad news.
Privacy supports thoughtful self-evaluation as part of integrating experience into meaningful patterns (Margulis,
2003, p. 412). We may need to get off the public stage to reflect and make sense of what is going on. Educational
or therapeutic programs often encourage reflection and self-evaluation in prisoners, but the lack of privacy may
inhibit their success. Opportunities for solitude in prisons or jails are uncommon and becoming even rarer as fewer
and fewer institutions provide single-bed cells.
Anonymity in a crowd can serve some of the same privacy functions (Westin, 1967), but correctional managers
typically discourage anonymity. Staff members are expected to know who and where inmates are at all times for
Page 3 of 21
Correctional Environments
accountability and security. Another privacy strategy is reservewithdrawing into oneself to create a mental
distance from others. It is often the only option remaining available to an inmate as a way to limit access and
contact. For reserve to be useful, however, that desire to maintain a distance has to be understood and respected
by others (Margulis, 2003), which may not always be the case in correctional culture.
The loss of privacy in correctional settings is especially salient around issues of personal hygiene, (p. 319)
particularly toilet and shower use. Cells that serve as both sleeping and toilet spaces have doors with open bars or
small windows. Being on view is uncomfortable and often stressful, and may be emblematic of loss of social and
spatial control (Kira, 1976). Also lost is the ability to exploit bathroom privacy norms for other activities, such as
uninterrupted reading time. There is no place to be off-stage, off-camera, and away from scrutiny. Moore (1980)
found that cell blocks with the least levels of visual privacy had greater levels of health care utilization than did
those with more visual privacy.
The ecology of a spatial behavior changes greatly when a second person moves into a cell. Normally solitary
behaviors (sitting, reading) shift from bedrooms to public places when a single room becomes a double, in jails
(Wener & Olson, 1980) as in other kinds of institutions (Wolfe & Golan, 1976; Zimring, Weitzer, & Knight, 1982).
Single cells provide options for solitary behaviors that are lost in multiple cells.
Personal Space
Personal space violations may be connected to aggressive incidents. Interpersonal distances are larger for violent
or aggressive persons (Curran, Blatchley, & Hanlon, 1978; Hildreth, Derogatis, & McCusker, 1971; Kinzel, 1970;
Roger & Schalekamp, 1976), and minimal required interpersonal distances may be a good predictor of which
inmates will engage in fighting (Walkey & Gilmour, 1984).
Studies in several kinds of settings have shown connections between personal space invasions and aggressive
behaviorin young children (ONeal, Caldwell, & Gallup, 1977), cognitively impaired nursing home residents
(Ryden, Bossenmaier, & McLachlan, 1991), dementia patients in an Alzheimer unit (Bridges-Parlet, Knopman, &
Thompson, 1994), and psychiatric inpatients (Fagan-Pryor et al., 2003). Increasing the amount of space available
on a unit for the profoundly retarded was shown to reduce aggressive incidents (Rago, Parker, & Cleland, 1978)
Territoriality
Territorial markings, as real barriers or symbolic ones, have often been related to defensive and aggressive
behavior (Ardrey, 1967; Brown, 1987), perhaps most clearly in total institutions where any possibility to exert
control takes on special meaning (Paluck & Esser; 1971). Formal or informal boundary marking can reduce
confusion and clarify rights for use and reduce the likelihood of accidental spatial intrusions that can lead to
conflict, such as described for youth correctional boot camps (Bobbitt, 1995) and non-correctional residential
settings (Abu-Ghazzeh, 2000; Brown & Altman, 1983; Zeisel et al., 2003). Adding opportunities for territorial control
can result in a significant improvement in the environment. When dormitories in a federal prison added a low
partition around otherwise open bunks, inmate scores on some measures of crowding and stress were as low as
those of inmates in single cells (Schaeffer, Baum, Paulus, & Gaes, 1988).
Institutional residents show territorial behavior that is often related to power hierarchies (Austin & Bates, 1974;
Cooley, Jewitt, & Oren, 1973; Roth, 1971; Wener & Olsen, 1980). Those high in the social hierarchy have more
success in claiming desired space and objects and intruding in others spaces (Deutsch, Esser, & Sossin, 1978;
Paluck & Esser, 1971; Paslawskyj & Ivinskis, 1980; Sundstrom & Altman, 1974). There were correlations between
turnover, dominance hierarchies, aggression, and territoriality among boys in a juvenile detention cottage
(Sundstrom & Altman, 1974). Dominance hierarchies were clear and territoriality was high with stable populations
but deteriorated with an increase in aggression when there was a great deal of population turnover.
Social Conditions
Crowding
Crowding is a perennial problem in correctional settings both in the United States and in other countries (Buckley,
2001; Cabral, 1991; Cabral & Stangenhaus, 1992; Chui, 2007; Commentary: The H. M. Northward Prison Report
Page 4 of 21
Correctional Environments
The Reception of Inmates, 2001; Hill, 2001; Shabangu, 2006; Specter, 2010; Steiner & Wooldredge, 2008)hence
the considerable amount of research that has focused on this issue.
Variations among correctional institutions and within settings over time provide natural laboratories for studying
crowding in ways that are impossible to replicate in an academic setting because of the level of density, the
pervasiveness of the experience, the time of exposure, and the involuntary nature of incarceration. Paulus (1988)
used these variations to address the impact of crowding on individual inmates. He reported that the number of
inmates per room, more than space per person, is related to measures of perceived environmental quality,
crowding, control, and stress, as well as psychophysiological measures of stress. Density was also related to use
of health services, the number of inmates seeking or getting medical services, and (p. 320) the level of reported
incidents. Ratings for dormitories improved when the spaces were larger, had single beds (vs. double bunk beds),
and included partitions. Having more inmates in a room has also been related to increased escapes (Bruehl,
Horvat, & George, 1979, cited in Paulus, 1988) and recidivism (Farrington & Nuttall, 1985).
Longitudinal studies have found that blood pressure increased when inmates moved from single rooms to
dormitories, and fell again when they moved back (DAtri, 1975). In a juvenile detention facility, blood pressure
correlated highly with density (Ray, Wandersman, Ellisor, & Huntington, 1982). Students who were leaders and
doing the best in school were the most adversely affected by density increases. Density increases were also
related to an increase in illness complaints, greater levels of hostility and expression of anger, more disruption of
treatment programs, and an increased sense of social disorganization, as measured by Mooss Social Climate
Scale.
In a metropolitan jail with relatively small changes in population, perceived crowding and sick call rates increased
as populations levels increased and fell as populations fell (Wener & Keys, 1988). Inmates in this study also
responded to the experience of change in density. Even though density levels in two living units were equal after
population was increased in one unit and lowered in the other, inmates in the unit that had seen density levels
increase showed higher sick call rates and lower environmental ratings than the other, which had seen density
levels fall. As density levels rise in correctional settings, detainees feel less safe (Roush, 1989) and view others as
more hostile (Lawrence & Andrews, 2004).
Increased institutional density has been related to increased aggressive behavior (Gaes, 1985; Nacci, Teitelbaum,
& Prather, 1977), most significantly for young inmates (Jan, 1980; Clayton & Carr, 1987; Franklin et al., 2006;
Ruback et al., 1986; Nacci et al., 1977) in studies that for the most part have used system-wide surveys of inmates.
Older inmates may be more likely to develop health problems (Toch, 1985) or withdraw under crowding pressure.
The proportion of the population that resides in dormitories may also predict assault rates (Gaes & McGuire, 1985).
Crowding also can hinder the success of supportive programs. In a study of four institutions (Jan, 1980), increased
population density was related to decreases in class attendance, graduation from school, use of programs, and the
likelihood of achieving parole, in addition to an increase in disruptive behavior.
Negative crowding effects have not always resulted from increases in prison density (Innes, 1986; Pelissier, 1991;
Porporpino & Dudley, 1984), and some have suggested that aggression may be a function of the design of the
institution and nature of the population more than of crowding per se (Ekland-Olson, 1986). In some cases
crowding may even lead to reduced misconduct, because of organizational adjustments made to deal with
conditions (Franklin et al., 2006). Suicide rates showed increases with higher density in some research (Huey &
McNulty, 2005), and the opposite in others (Wooldredge & Winfree, 1992). There is some question as to whether
inmates adapt to crowding over time. There does seem to be some adaptation, as shown in lessening of illness
complaints and clinic use (Paulus, 1988; Ostfeld, Kasl, DAtri, & Fitzgerald, 1987) and blood pressure (DAtri, 1981),
but not for measures of perceived crowding and stress (Paulus, 1988).
In a reexamination of this research, Gaes (1994) suggested that the connection between crowding and health is
difficult to determine because of the complex set of circumstances that determine outcome measures such as
illness reports, and the potential significant impacts of management responses to crowding.
Isolation
To be imprisoned means to be isolated from society, community, family, and job. In most cases, however, the
Page 5 of 21
Correctional Environments
inmate becomes part of an internal social system, an alternate community that can be socially supportive (Toch,
1992). Isolation as used here, however, refers to situations in which even that level of social contact and support is
lost in highly restrictive settings where inmates have little or no contact with others.
Recent attention has centered on the growth of so-called Supermax prisons, intended to house the most
dangerous inmates, usually in extreme levels of isolation. Researchers have had little access to study these kinds
of institutions (Pizarro & Stenius, 2004), even though it has been suggested that extreme isolation creates a kind of
social pathology that reduces inmates ability to function normally when returned to the prison population or to
society outside of prison walls (Haney, 2003). Symptoms that have been attributed to extreme isolation include
sleep disturbance, anxiety, panic, rage, loss of control, paranoia, hallucinations, anger, ruminations and (p. 321)
confused thoughts, and self-mutilationdubbed special housing unit syndrome (Haney, 2003) or Gansers
syndrome (Andersen, Sestoft, & Lillebaek, 2001; Grassian & Friedman, 1986). Distress and symptomatology seem
to increase as level of restriction gets more severe (Miller, 1994).
Inmates with mental illness are more likely to end up in isolation and may be most vulnerable to it. Inmates in
isolation have lower self-esteem (Blatier, 2000) and a range of other significant psychiatric symptoms (Benjamin &
Lux, 1975; Korn, 1988; Kupers, 2008), including self-mutilation (Jones, 1986). Shutting off these inmates from social
contact can have devastating effects (Benjamin & Lux, 1975; Cohen, 1998; Toch, 1992), as seen in the high
incidence of mental illness in isolation units (Hodgins & Cote, 1991; Nurse, Woodcock, & Ormsby, 2003). Risk of
psychiatric hospitalization increases with time in isolation (Sestoft, Andersen, & Lilleboek, 1998) and psychological
functioning can improve when transferred to normal housing (Andersen et al., 2003). Approximately one-third of all
inmate suicides in Finland took place in isolation rooms (Joukamaa, 1997). Isolated inmates use prison health care
services more than other inmates (Moore, 1980).
Not all studies found negative effects of isolation on cognitive tests (Weinberg, 1967) or mental health (Gendreau &
Bonta, 1984; Zinger, Wichmann, & Andrews, 2001), especially when the impacts of isolation are differentiated from
the harsh treatment that sometimes accompany it. Suedfeld, in particular, has advocated for the potentially
beneficial effects of isolation through restricted environmental stimulation therapy (REST) (Suedfeld, Ramirez,
Deaton, & Baker-Brown, 1982). He has argued that serious side effects are relatively rare and that most inmates
develop coping mechanisms, while many develop a more positive attitude and increased participation in programs.
In spite of Suedfelds arguments, prison isolation is most commonly considered a negative and even harmful
experience, although the conceptual explanations are not as obvious as they may seem at first glance. Some have
related prison isolation to early laboratory research on sensory deprivation (Grassian & Friedman, 1986; Haney,
2003), though conditions even in the most strict prison isolation do not bear much resemblance to the complete
elimination of sensory inputs in laboratories (Suedfeld et al., 1982). Moreover, the original sensory deprivation
studies themselves had serious methodological flaws (Orne, 1962).
These environments are, at the very least, monotonous and boring, particularly as inmates in isolation have
reduced access to programs and services, and lose whatever benefits these may provide. Boredom has been
linked to depression and hostility (Vodanovich, 2003), and the level to which inmates volunteer to be subjects in
research programs (Moser et al., 2004). Another explanation refers to the loss of privacy experienced in isolation,
where it is often the case that inmates are under constant observation by people and technology. Severe loss of
privacy itself may be a significant source of stress (Altman, 1975; Margulis, 2003; Westin, 1967).
Ultimately, though, it may be social deprivationthe inability to establish or maintain interactions and relationships
with other peoplethat is the most obvious and most damaging consequence of prison isolation. Haney (2003) has
suggested that isolated inmates suffer because they are removed from the rhythms of life. Isolated individuals are
unable to make contacts with other inmates as well as other aspects of the natural world, including access to
natural light and exterior views (discussed further below).
Social connections made within the prison environment have been cited as important mechanisms for coping with
the hardships of incarceration (Toch, 1992), and deprivation of these relationships may lead to a diminished ability
to establish normal social relations (Haney, 2003). Without social interaction inmates also lose opportunities for
reality testing, as described by social comparison theory, which suggests that we define and understand ourselves
significantly by our interactions with others (Suls, 1977) and that the meaning of ones behavior is in the response
to it by others (Burke, 1996, p. 143). Solitary confinement removes our ability to use others for that purpose,
Page 6 of 21
Correctional Environments
making reality less clear, which is a particular problem for many assigned to isolation cells whose hold on reality
may already be fragile (Arrigo & Bullock, 2008).
Physical Conditions
Noise
Research in the laboratory and other settings has demonstrated that noise can be a significant environmental
stressor (see Stansfeld, this volume). It is, therefore, deserving of attention within the prison context especially
because prison design and the many sources of sound in correctional settings make them inherently difficult
spaces for acoustics, because many of these sources are present 24 hours (p. 322) a day, and because
acoustics has not received significant attention from correctional planners.
There are several factors that make typical prison and jail settings very poor acoustically. First, the interior spaces
of living units for 50, 60, or more inmates are often very large with cavernous dayrooms. Building materials are
usually very hard and reflective of sound, with very little carpeting, wall hangings, or upholstered furniture for
sound absorption. Reverberation times longer than two seconds are common, creating uncomfortable echoing
(Rostad & Christoff, 2006). As reverberation time increases, holding decibel levels constant, sound intelligibility
drops precipitously (Anhert & Tennhardt, 2002).
There are many generators and sources of sound. The sound that comes from dozens of voices, occupying a
large open space at the same time and engaged in tasks or casual activity, can be considerable. Mechanical and
manual doors constantly open and bang closed, and intercoms, public address speakers, televisions, and radios
are ever present. On top of that, these settings have a number of mechanical sources of sound, such as fans from
heating, cooling, and ventilation systems, which can add a significant constant background hum to the space.
There are very few studies of the psychological and behavioral impacts of noise in correctional institutions, so
most of the relevant research comes from other settings. One of the most obvious of noise impacts is in the
disturbance of normal nighttime sleep (Griefahn, 2000; Tarnopolski, 1977), when there is less habituation to noise
levels than there is during the day (Tarnopolski, 1977). Repeated exposure to 50 dBA or more of noise can cause
increased heart rate and blood pressure during sleep (Stansfeld & Matheson, 2003). Noise that impairs sleep can
impact cognitive functioning, mood (Pilcher & Huffcutt; 1996), stress, and staff burnout (Topf & Dillon, 1988; Topf,
Bookman, & Arand, 1996; Topf, 2000; Topf & Thompson, 2001). In a correctional setting, partial sleep deprivation
may make aggression more likely (Ireland & Culpin, 2006).
The stressful properties of noise are related less to its loudness than to predictability and controllability (Cohen,
1980; Evans & Stecker, 2004; Glass & Singer, 1972). These findings have implications for prisons and jails, where
many of the sources of noise are, to a large extent, intermittent, unpredictable, and beyond control of inmates and
often even of staff members. Impacts of exposure to unpredictable and uncontrollable noise include reduced
motivation and frustration tolerance, interpreted by Glass and Singer (1972) as effects of learned helplessness
(Seligman, 1975), with significant behavioral, emotional, and mental health consequences. Prolonged exposure to
noise levels similar to those commonly found in prisons and jails elevates blood pressure and may affect stress
hormones, such as cortisol (Babisch, Fromme, Beyer, & Ising, 2001; Babisch, Fromme, Beyer, & Ising, 2003; Evans
& Johnson, 2000; Ising & Kruppa, 2004; Stansfeld & Matheson, 2003).
The presence of noise may also reduce the likelihood of people engaging in positive social behaviors, such as
helping, possibly because they are less likely to pay attention to their context and notice the person in need
(Jones, Chapman, & Auburn, 1981; Mathews & Canon, 1975).
High noise levels can also change the social ecology of spatial behavior (Stansfeld & Matheson, 2003). In
institutions, such as prisons and jails, people often are unable to escape from the noise, for example, by going into
another space and closing a door (Daffern, 2004), which may increase stress levels and the chances of
aggressive responses (Wener & Olsen, 1980). Stress resulting from exposure to uncontrollable noise may even be
higher in populations such as those often found in prisons, with low levels of perceived self-efficacy (Kuno,
Yazawa, & Ohira, 2003), or those who have experienced the helplessness that comes from chronic long-term
unemployment (Weiss, 1997).
Page 7 of 21
Correctional Environments
Visual Aspects of the Setting
Although windows and lighting are addressed in the standards used by American prisons and jails to assess
conditions of confinement (American Correctional Association, 2004), they are often viewed more as amenities
than critical environmental conditions. Views, including those of nature, and color are largely ignored in standards.
Lighting
Since these are 24-hour settings, the quality of electric lighting is critical for visual tasks, such as inspection and
surveillance, reading, viewing video screens, and paperwork. Natural and electrical lighting can also have
important effects on the general ambient environment, the periodicity of biological cycles (circadian rhythms), and
mood (Aris, Veitch, & Newsham, 2010; Espiritu et al., 1994; Pechacek, Andersen, & Lockley, 2008).
There is very little research on the psychological effects of lighting specifically in correctional facilities, so
extrapolation from research and other settings is necessary, as discussed in detail by a number of (p. 323)
authors (Cawthorne, 1991; Gifford, 1994; Lockley, 2009; Illuminating Engineering Society of North America, 2009;
Veitch, van den Beld, Brainard, & Roberts, 2004).
The biological impact of light depends largely on the intensity, quality, and timing of exposure (Veitch, 2002)all of
which may be issues in correctional institutions. Many prisons and jails, for example, provide very little daylight into
living areas. As organisms that evolved in daylight, we may be sensitive to its variations, including the much
greater intensity of daylight as well as qualitative differences (broader spectra, polarization, and variation by time
of day and season). People have shown a preference for daylight over electrical lights, although that may be
related to daylights higher levels of illuminance (Galasiu & Veitch, 2006, Markus, 1967).
Levels and quality of lighting in jails and prisons may also affect sleeping. Adequate sleep seems related not just to
having enough light during the day but also to enough dark at night (Burgess, Sharkey, & Eastman, 2002). Sleep
deprivation and abnormal sleep patterns may be pervasive issues for inmates, who often live in settings with
inadequate lighting during the day and too much light at night.
In addition, light exposure is important in settings where staff members must constantly rotate work shifts, as is the
case in prisons and jails. Light intensity and time of exposure may affect the likelihood of experiencing sleep
disorders with impacts on job performance, mood, and social stress (Barger, Lockley, Rajaratnam, & Landrigan,
2009).
Windows
Windows may be psychologically important design features in confined settings. In such situations windows can
provide diversion and psychological distance from others (Haines, 1988) as well as reduce perceived crowding, in
part by increasing perceived spaciousness (Desor, 1972; Schiffenbauer et al., 1977). Windows add stimulation to
stimulus-deprived situations, provide information about weather, time of day, and season, and potentially allow for
nature views.
In most settings people have a preference for being in spaces with access to window views (Stone, 1998). Inmates
have been observed to go to great lengths to spend time looking through windows with views of panoramic urban
vistas (Wener & Olsen, 1980). They enjoy views of nature and animals (West, 1986) particularly as an alternative
to the internal view and reality of the institution (Heerwagen, 1990).
Nature Views
Exposure to nature and nature views has been shown to have important effects in reducing levels of stress and
providing restoration from mental fatigue (Ulrich, 1993; Kaplan, 1995). It may also positively affect inmate health as
indicated in several studies that found significantly reduced levels of illness reports (Moore, 1981; West, 1986) and
blood pressure (Moore, 1981) for inmates who had views of nature, compared to similar inmates without such
views. West (1986) found that the positive effect of nature views was strongest where inmate turnover (which can
increase stress in an institutional situation (Sundstrom & Altman, 1974)) was highest. Use of prison gardens has
also been proposed as a way to reduce prison stress (Lindemuth, 2007).
Nature views do not have to be of real environments to have a positive impact. Simulated views (such as slides or
Page 8 of 21
Correctional Environments
murals of nature scenes) have positive effects on stress reduction and mental restoration (Heerwagen, 1990;
Ulrich, 1999). In a recent intervention by Farbstein, Farling, and Wener (2009), data were collected from
corrections officers in a busy jail intake area before and after a large nature mural was introduced on the waiting
room wall. In the post-mural period, cognitive performance (digit span backward) was significantly better and there
was improved recovery from the stress of work shifts, as measured by change in heart rate variability.
Color
There has not been a great deal of attention to the use of color in correctional settings, and where color has been
addressed as a design issue, its use has not necessarily been based on research findings. Typically colors have
been used in the hope that a particular scheme or hue might lead to a calmer or more relaxing response. For
instance, colors have been suggested for use in Canadian correctional institutions to reduce tension (Krames &
Flett, 2000), though there is not any published information on effectiveness.
At one point many detention centers, juvenile facilities, and other residential institutions in the United States were
experimenting with the use of a shade known as Baker-Miller pink to calm highly aroused residents. Schauss (1979)
had proposed that short-term exposure to this color could quickly and significantly reduce aggressive behavior,
and was supported by anecdotal reports (Johnston, 1981) and quasi-experimental studies (Caudill, 1981; Pellegrini,
Schauss, & Miller, 1981). More recent studies with (p. 324) better control have shown mixed or negative effects
(Elliot et al., 2007; Gilliam & Unruh, 1988; Gilliam, 1991; Profusek & Rainey, 1987), and some have suggested that
something like the Hawthorne effect may be an explanation for positive results (Pellegrini et al., 1981).
Page 9 of 21
Correctional Environments
the first year after opening, and remained very rare afterward. The only areas within the jails that suffered any
amounts of significant vandalism at all were those few spaces (the intake holding areas where new inmates waited
for processing) that used designs much more like traditional jails.
These case studies concluded that the success of these new and innovative jails was related to the constant
casual level of communication between staff members and inmates, as supported by the architecture; the positive
behavioral expectations promoted by the quality of the design; the level of privacy afforded by the space; and the
level of control over exposure to social and environmental stressors available to inmates. Evaluations were also
conducted at the first local jails to adopt this model and they also noted low tension levels and very safe living
conditions (Frazier, 1985; Schneiger, 1985; Sigurdson, 1985; Wener, 1985; Zimring, 1989).
In the past three decades hundreds of new correctional institutions have made use of this model of design and
management (National Institute of Corrections Information Center, 2006), mostly in the United States but with some
diffusion to other countries (Hellmayer, 2005). Over three dozen case studies, longitudinal studies, and crosssectional comparisons have addressed the level and cause of the success of direct supervision design and
management (Wener, 2006). The most consistent finding has been that direct supervision correctional institutions
were perceived as safer and less stressful and had fewer incidents of violence and other serious kinds of
misconduct. This was accomplished while costing the same or less to build and operate than traditional jails
(Nelson, 1988a; Farbstein & Wener, 1989). In none of these studies did the traditional facilities perform better, and
only a few showed differences that were small or negligible.
Page 10 of 21
Correctional Environments
The direct supervision model of correctional design and operations reduces violence by intervening in all of these
conditions. The close presence of officers increases the likelihood that staff members will be able to protect
inmates (reduce fear) by (p. 326) intervening in a conflict before it gets out of hand. They are more likely to
identify who caused a problem (consequences). Similarly, the ability of inmates to retreat to their room to avoid
conflict helps make inmates feel less at risk and less likely to resort to the kinds of response (weapons, etc.) that
increase tension throughout the living area (reduced stress). The fact that few weapons are typically found in
direct supervision jails, for instance, is probably due more to a reduced sense of need for self-protection than any
better ability to screen them out.
Further, there is greater freedom of movement and increased access to facilities within the direct supervision living
unit, and the responsiveness of staff members to inmate needs (reducing perceived scarcity) lessens the likelihood
of conflict caused by competition from resources. Living areas with a greater number of telephones and televisions
for inmates have less likelihood of conflict over their use.
Conclusion
Correctional environments exert powerful effects on inmate and staff members, but research on the degree and
causes of these impacts on psychological, behavioral, and psychophysiological variables is comparatively scant.
Moreover, some critical and potentially damaging spaces and issues are among the least studied. The inability to
conduct careful research in the high-security institutions that have the most extreme levels of isolation leaves us
speculating about the kind and degree of impact these settings have on their involuntary guests. It seems to be
more and more difficult to gain access to many institutions to collect psychological, behavioral, or
psychophysiological data. Most of the recent studies on crowding are cross-sectional studies that use broad,
system-wide data, from surveys and archival sources, rather than prospective data collection of the kind used by
Paulus (1988) and his colleagues.
Conditions in institutions can affect the individual, the group, and the organization. Crowding can lead to social
withdrawal and reduced cooperative behavior, cause stress-related effects on physical and mental health, and
lead to increased aggressiveness that can overwhelm services and programs and that can affect almost every
aspect of institutional functioning. The impact of crowding can be moderated by both physical design and
management strategies. On the other end of the spectrum, isolation can, at the very least, produce or exacerbate
social and psychological disturbances, reduce the ability of individuals to function well once they return to the
general population (and possibly to society), and increase the chances of self-harm.
Lack of privacy makes it hard for those inmates who have an interest in changing their behavior to engage in
reflection and self-evaluation. Exposure to uncontrollable noise results in reduced tolerance for frustration,
increased irritability and argumentativeness, and greater likelihood of responding aggressively to provocations.
Lack of access to nature can increase stress and irritability and decrease ability to recover from attentional
fatigue, all of which can make aggressive behavior more likely. Reduced exposure to daylight can affect mood and
health, and reduce sleep quality.
Sleep is an issue that is little discussed or studied in correctional contexts, even though it can have significant
behavioral and health effects. Sleep deprivation harms physical and mental health, mood, and behavior. There
Page 11 of 21
Correctional Environments
may be a negative relationship between the amount of sleep and aggressive behavior. Sleep can be affected by
many of the conditions we have discussed in these chaptersprivacy, crowding, lighting (and darkening), and
noise. Trying to get a good nights sleep in a crowded space when regularly exposed to others, in an environment
that is too bright and noisy, would be challenging to most people.
Physical, organizational, and social conditions that increase the likelihood that inmates will be fearful for their own
safety can trigger maladaptive responses that increase both perceived and objective risk. Approaches that use
both design and organizational innovations to reduce risk and fear have led to safer, less assaultive, and less
vandalized settings.
Future Directions
1. Further research on the impact of correctional settings on behavior is needed. The problem for
researchers is in getting into prisons to conduct studies. This is especially true for the most extreme settings,
such as Supermax institutions, where the impacts are likely to be the strongest but where gaining access for
research is most difficult.
2. With increasing numbers of inmates being placed in long-term isolation, controlled longitudinal studies are
needed to determine the level of stress, impacts on behavior and psychopathology, and long-term effects on
social adjustment within and outside the institution.
3. Research is needed about the effects of daylight and electric lighting, and views of nature on variables
such as quality of sleep, mood, cognitive performance, and aggressive behavior. (p. 327) Attention to these
environmental qualities in design offers important potential benefits for inmates and staff members.
4. Although correctional staff recognize noise levels as important, relatively little attention has been paid to
the impacts of noise or the benefits that can come from improved acoustic design in prisons and jails.
5. There has been little attention to the potential effects of design on the critical long-term outcome of
recidivism, other than one study that suggested that even brief exposure to direct supervision living units
could have positive effects (Applegate, Surette, & McCarthy, 1999).
6. The limits and robustness of direct supervision as a design and management system need further
exploration. What are the critical design and management parameters and how far can they be stretched
before the quality of the environment and staff and inmate safety suffer?
7. Violent behavior remains the defining concern for correctional managers. There is a need to better
understand how the context affects the risk of assault, such as through tests of the violence model offered
here.
Bibliography
References
Abu-Ghazzeh, T. M. (2000). Environmental messages in multiple-family housing: Territory and personalization.
Landscape Research, 25(1), 97115.
Altman, I. (1975). The environment and social behavior: Privacy, personal space, territory, crowding. Monterey,
CA: Brooks/Cole.
American Correctional Association. (2004.) Performance-based standards for adult local detention facilities (4th
ed.). Alexandria, VA: American Correctional Association.
Anderson, D. C. (1983, October 25). The editorial notebook: New Yorks new generation jail. New York Times, p.
a34.
Andersen, H. S., Sestoft, D., & Lillebaek, T. (2001). Ganser syndrome after solitary confinement in prison: A short
review and a case report. Nordic Journal of Psychiatry, 55(3), 199201.
Andersen, H. S., Sestoft, D., Lillebaek, T., Gabrielsen, G., & Hemmingsen, R. (2003). A longitudinal study of
prisoners on remand: Repeated measures of psychopathology in the initial phase of solitary versus nonsolitary
Page 12 of 21
Correctional Environments
confinement. International Journal of Law & Psychiatry, 26(2), 165177.
Anhert, W., & Tennhardt, H. (2002). Acoustics for auditoriums and concert halls. In G. Ballou (Ed.), Handbook for
sound engineers (pp. 109156). Oxford, UK: Focal Press.
Applegate, B. K., Surette, R., & McCarthy, B. H. (1999). Detention and desistance from crime: Evaluating the
influence of a new-generation jail on recidivism. Journal of Criminal Justice, 27(6), 539548.
Ardrey, R. (1967). The territorial imperative: A personal inquiry into the animal origins of property and nations.
London: Collins.
Aris, M. B. C., Veitch, J. A., & Newsham, G. R. (2010). Windows, view, and office characteristics predict physical
and psychological discomfort. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30(4),533541.
Arrigo, B. A., & Bullock, J. L. (2008). The psychological effects of solitary confinement on prisoners in Supermax
units: Reviewing what we know and recommending what should change. International Journal of Offender Therapy
and Comparative Criminology, 52(6), 622.
Austin, W. T., & Bates, F. L. (1974). Ethological indicators of dominance and territory in a human captive
population. Social Forces, 52(4), 447455.
Babisch, W., Fromme, H., Beyer, A., & Ising, H. (2001). Increased catecholamine levels in urine in subjects exposed
to road traffic noise: The role of stress hormones in noise research. Environment International, 26(78), 475481.
Babisch, W., Segal, S., Eviatar, E., Lapinsky, J., Shlamkovitch, N., Kessler, A., et al. (2003). Stress hormones in the
research on cardiovascular effects of noise. Stress, 5(18), 111.
Barger, L. K., Lockley, S. W., Rajaratnam, S. M. W., & Landrigan, C. P. (2009). Neurobehavioral, health, and safety
consequences associated with shift work in safety-sensitive professions. Current Neurology and Neuroscience
Reports, 9(2), 155164.
Baron, R. M., & Kenny, D. A. (1986). The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research:
Conceptual, strategic, and statistical considerations. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 51(6), 1173
1182.
Benjamin, T. B., & Lux, K. (1975). Constitutional and psychological implications of the use of solitary confinement:
Experience at the Maine state prison. Clearinghouse Review, 9, 8390.
Blatier, C. (2000). Locus of control, causal attributions, and self-esteem: A comparison between prisoners.
International Journal of Offender Therapy and Comparative Criminology, 44(1), 97110.
Bobbitt, T. H. (1995). Correctional boot camps: Fact or fad. Retrieved July 4, 2005, from
www.fdle.state.fl.us/FCJEI/SLP%20papers/Bobbitt.PDF.
Bridges-Parlet, S., Knopman, D., & Thompson, T. (1994). A descriptive study of physically aggressive behavior in
dementia by direct observation. Journal of the American Geriatrics Society, 42(2), 192197.
Brown, B. (1987). Territoriality. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.), Handbook of environmental psychology (Vol. 1, pp.
505531). New York: Wiley.
Brown, B., & Altman, I. (1983). Territoriality, defensible space, and residential burglary: An environmental analysis.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 3, 203220.
Bruehl, D., Horvat, G., & George, G. (1979). Population density and institutional performance in a treatment unit
at the federal correctional institution at Terminal Island, California. Paper presented at the Academy of Criminal
Justice Sciences annual meeting, Cincinnati, OH.
Buckley, S. (2001, March 22). Riots point to overcrowding in Brazils prison. Washington Post, p. A23.
(p. 328) Burgess, H. J., Sharkey, K. M., & Eastman, C. I. (2002). Bright light, dark, and melatonin can promote
Page 13 of 21
Correctional Environments
circadian adaptation in night shift workers. Sleep Medicine Reviews, 6(5), 407420.
Burke, P. J. (1996). Social identities and psychosocial stress. In H. B. Kaplan (Ed.), Psychosocial stress:
Perspectives on structure, theory, life-course, and methods (pp. 141174). San Diego, CA: Academic Press.
Cabral, M. A. (1991). Aspectos psicossociais mais relevantes de 62 historias de vida de presidiarios confinados em
carceres superpopulosos. Jornal Brasileiro de Psiquiatria, 40(10), 515520.
Cabral, M. A., & Stangenhaus, G. (1992). Analise da incidencia de doencas psicofisicas numa populacao de
presidiarios confinados em carceres superpopulosos. Jornal Brasileiro de Psiquiatria, 41(2), 6772.
Caudill, C. (1981). Pink roomA color and aggression study in a correctional environment. unpublished work,
cited in National Criminal Justice Reference Service, U.S. Department of Justice, Washington, DC.
Cawthorne, D. (1991). Buildings, lighting, and the biological clock. Cambridge, UK: Martin Centre for Architectural
and Urban Studies, University of Cambridge.
Chui, W. H. (2007). High prison population in Queensland, Australia: Its implications and public policy choices. In K.
T. Froeling (Ed.), Criminology Research Focus (pp. 213233). New York: Nova Science Publishers.
Clayton, O., & Carr, T. (1987). An empirical assessment of the effects of prison crowding upon recidivism utilizing
aggregate level data. Journal of Criminal Justice, 15, 201210.
Cohen, F. (1998). The mentally disordered inmate and the law. Kingston, NJ: Civic Research Institute.
Cohen, S. (1980). Aftereffects of stress on human performance and social behavior. Psychological Bulletin, 88,
82108.
Commentary: The H. M. Northward prison reportThe reception of inmates. (2001, July). Cayman Net News.
Cooley, D., Jewitt, B., & Oren, E. (1973). TerritorialityIts effects on the correctional environment. (No. NCJ
Number: 28207). Ottowa: Canada Solicitor General.
Curran, S. F., Blatchley, R. J., & Hanlon, T. E. (1978). The relationship between body buffer zone and violence as
assessed by subjective and objective techniques. Criminal Justice & Behavior, 5(1), 5362.
DAtri, D. (1975). Psychophysiological responses to crowding. Environment and Behavior, 7, 237250.
DAtri, D. A. (1981). Crowding in prison: The relationship between changes in housing mode and blood pressure.
Psychosomatic Medicine, 43(2), 95105.
Daffern, M., Mayer, M. M., & Martin, T. (2004). Environment contributors to aggression in two forensic psychiatric
hospitals. International Journal of Forensic Mental Health, 3(1), 105114.
Desor, J. A. P. (1972). Toward a psychological theory of crowding. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology,
21(1), 7983.
Deutsch, R. D., Esser, A. H., & Sossin, K. M. (1978). Dominance, aggression, and the functional use of space in
institutionalized female adolescents. Aggressive Behavior, 4(4), 313329.
Ekland-Olson, S. H. (1986). Crowding, social control, and prison violence: Evidence from the post-Ruiz years in
Texas. Law & Society Review, 20(3), 389421.
Elliot, A. J., Maier, M. A., Moller, A. C., Friedman, R., & Meinhardt, J. (2007). Color and psychological functioning: The
effect of red on performance attainment. Journal of Experimental Psychology: General, 136(1), 154168.
Espiritu, R. C., Kripke, D. F., Ancoli-Israel, S., Mowen, M. A., Mason, W. J., Fell, R. L., et al. (1994). Low illumination
experienced by San Diego adults: Association with atypical depressive symptoms. Biological Psychiatry, 35(6),
403407.
Evans, G. W., & Johnson, D. P. (2000). Stress and open office noise. Journal of Applied Psychology, 85, 779783.
Page 14 of 21
Correctional Environments
Evans, G. W., & Lepore, S. J. (1997). Moderating and mediating processes in environment-behavior research. In G.
T. Moore & R. Marans (Ed.), Advances in environment, behavior, and design: Toward an integration of theory,
methods, and design (Vol. 4, pp. 256286). New York: Springer.
Evans, G. W., & Stecker, R. (2004). The motivational consequences of environmental stress. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 24, 143165.
Fagan-Pryor, E. C., Haber, L. C., Dunlap, D., Nall, J. L., Stanley, G., & Wolpert, R. (2003). Patients views of causes
of aggression by patients and effective interventions. Psychiatric Services, 54, 549553.
Farbstein, J., Farling, M., & Wener, R. (2009). Effects of a simulated nature view on cognitive and psychophysiological responses of correctional officers in a jail intake area. Washington, DC: National Institute of
Corrections.
Farbstein, J., & Wener, R. E. (1989). A comparison of direct and indirect supervision correctional facilities.
Washington, DC: NICPrison Division.
Farrington, D., & Nuttall, C. (1985). Prison size, overcrowding, prison violence, and recidivism. In M. Braswell, S.
Dillingham, & R. Montgomery (Eds.), Prison violence in America (pp. 113132). Cincinnati, OH: Anderson Publishing
Co.
Foucault, M. (1979). Discipline and punishment: The birth of the prison. New York: Vintage Press.
Franklin, T. W., Franklin, C. A., & Pratt, T. C. (2006). Examining the empirical relationship between prison crowding
and inmate misconduct: A meta-analysis of conflicting research results. Journal of Criminal Justice, 34(4), 401
412.
Frazier, F. W. (1985). A postoccupancy evaluation of Contra Costa Countys main detention facility: an analysis of
the first new-generation, podular/direct supervision county jail. Unpublished Doctoral Dissertation, Golden Gate
University, San Francisco.
Gaes, G. (1985). The effects of overcrowding in prisons. Washington, DC: Federal Bureau of Prisons.
Gaes, G. (1994). Prison crowding research reexamined. Washington, DC: Federal Bureau of Prisons.
Gaes, G., & McGuire, W. J. (1985). Prison violence: The contribution of crowding versus other determinants of
prison assault rates. Journal of Research in Crime & Delinquency, 22, 4165.
Galasiu, A. D., & Veitch, J. A. E. (2006). Occupant preferences and satisfaction with the luminous environment and
control systems in daylit offices: A literature review. Energy and Buildings, 38(7), 728742.
Gendreau, P., & Bonta, J. (1984). Solitary confinement is not cruel and unusual punishment: People sometimes are.
Canadian Journal of Criminology, 26(4), 467478.
Gifford, R. (1994). Scientific evidence for claims about full-spectrum lamps: past and future. In J. A. Veitch (Ed.),
Full-spectrum lighting effects on performance, mood, and health (IRC Internal Report No. 659) (pp. 3746).
Ottowa: National Research Council of Canada, Institute for Research in Construction.
(p. 329) Gilliam, J. E. (1991). The effects of Baker-Miller pink on physiological and cognitive behavior of
emotionally disturbed and regular education students. Behavioral Disorders, 17(1), 4755.
Gilliam, J. E., & Unruh, D. (1988). The effects of Baker-Miller pink on biological, physical, and cognitive behaviors.
Journal of Orthomolecular Medicine, 5, 202206.
Glass, D., & Singer, J. (1972). Urban stress. New York: Academic Press.
Goffman, E. (1961). Asylums. New York: Anchor.
Grassian, S., & Friedman, N. (1986). Effects of sensory deprivation in psychiatric seclusion and solitary
confinement. International Journal of Law & Psychiatry, 8(1), 4965.
Page 15 of 21
Correctional Environments
Griefahn, B. (2000). Noise-induced extraaural effects. Journal of the Acoustical Society of Japan (E), 21, 307317.
Haines, R. (1988). Space station proximity operations and window design. Space Station Human Factors Research
Review, 4, 118.
Haney, C. (2003). Mental health issues in long-term solitary and Supermax confinement. Crime & Delinquency,
49(1), 124156.
Heerwagen, J. (1990). The psychological aspects of windows and window design. In K. Anthony, J. Choi, & B.
Orland (Eds.), Coming of Age: Proceedings of the 21st Annual Conference of the Environmental Design Research
Association (EDRA) (pp. 269280). Oklahoma City, OK: Environmental Deign Research Association.
Hellmayer, N. (2005). Hohensinn architektur. justizzentrum leoben, steiermark. heterotopie und humanitt. Artikel
aus der Zeitschrift: architektur aktuell, 5, 106117.
Hildreth, A. M., Derogatis, L. R., & McCusker, K. (1971). Body buffer zone and violence: A reassessment and
confirmation. American Journal of Psychiatry, 127(12), 16411645.
Hill, G. (2001). Prison crowding in Asian countries. Corrections Compendium, 26(8), 3.
Hodgins, S., & Cote, G. (1991). The mental health of penitentiary inmates in isolation. Canadian Journal of
Criminology, 33(2), 175182.
Howard, J. (1777). The state of the prisons in England and Wales. London: Routledge/Thoemmes Press.
Huey, M. P., & McNulty, T. L. (2005). Institutional conditions and prison suicide: Conditional effects of deprivation
and overcrowding. Prison Journal, 85(4), 490.
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America. (2009). Quality of the Visual Environment Committee: Light +
design: A guide to designing quality lighting for people and buildings (DG-18). New York: Illuminating Engineering
Society of North America.
Innes, C. (1986). Population density in state prisons. (Bureau of Justice Statistics Bulletin No. NCJ-103204).
Washington, DC: Bureau of Justice Statistics.
Ireland, J. L., & Culpin, V. (2006). The relationship between sleeping problems and aggression, anger, and
impulsivity in a population of juvenile and young offenders. Journal of Adolescent Health, 38(6), 649655.
Ising, H., & Kruppa, B. (2004). Health effects caused by noise: Evidence in the literature from the past 25 years.
Noise and Health, 6(22), 51.
Jan, L. (1980). Overcrowding and inmate behavior: Some preliminary findings. Criminal Justice & Behavior, 7(3),
293301.
Johnston, D. (1981). Is it merely a fad, or do pastel walls stop jail house brawls? Corrections Magazine, 7(3), 2832.
Johnston, N. B. (2000). Forms of constraint: A history of prison architecture. Urbana and Chicago: University of
Illinois Press.
Johnston, N. (2004). The worlds most influential prison: Success or failure? Prison Journal, 84(4), 20.
Jones, A. (1986). Self-mutilation in prison: A comparison of mutilators and nonmutilators. Criminal-Justice-andBehavior, 13(3), 286296.
Jones, D., Chapman, A., & Auburn, T. (1981). Noise in the environment: A social perspective. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 1(1), 4359.
Joukamaa, M. (1997). Prison suicide in Finland, 19691992. Forensic Science International, 89,(3), 167174.
Kaplan, S. (1995). The restorative benefits of nature: Toward an integrative framework. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 15, 169182.
Page 16 of 21
Correctional Environments
Kinzel, A. F. (1970). Body-buffer zone in violent prisoners. American Journal of Psychiatry, 127(1), 5964.
Kira, A. (1976). The bathroom. New York: Viking Press.
Korn, R. (1988). Follow-up report on the effects of confinement in the high security unit at Lexington. Social Justice,
15(1), 2029.
Krames, L., & Flett, G. L. (2000). Jail/holding cell design: Proposals for modification and design changes to
jail/holding cells: Psychological impact on aggressive and self destructive behaviour (No. TR-032000). Hamilton,
Ontario: Canadian Police Research Center.
Kuno, M., Yazawa, H., & Ohira, H. (2003). Learned helplessness, generalized self-efficacy, and immune function.
Japanese Journal of Psychology, 73(6), 472479.
Kupers, T. (2008). What to do with the survivors? Coping with the long-term effects of isolated confinement.
Criminal Justice and Behavior, 35(8), 1005.
Lawrence, C., & Andrews, K. (2004). The influence of perceived prison crowding on male inmates perception of
aggressive events. Aggressive Behavior, 30(4), 273283.
Lindemuth, A. L. (2007). Designing therapeutic environments for inmates and prison staff in the United States:
Precedents and contemporary applications. Journal of Mediterranean Ecology, 8, 8797.
Lockley, S. W. (2009). Circadian rhythms: Influence of light in humans. In L. R. Squire (Ed.), Encyclopedia of
Neuroscience (pp. 971988). New York: Academic Press.
Margulis, S. T. (2003). On the status and contribution of Westins and Altmans theories of privacy. Journal of Social
Issues, 59(2), 411429.
Markus, T. (1967). The significance of sunshine and view for office workers. In R. G. Hopkinson (Ed.), Sunlight in
buildings. Rotterdam, Netherlands: Boewcentrum International.
Mathews, K. E., & Canon, L. K. (1975). Environmental noise level as a determinant of helping behavior. Journal of
Personality and Social Psychology, 32(4), 571577.
Miller, H. A. (1994). Reexamining psychological distress in the current conditions of segregation. Journal of
Correctional Health Care, 1, 3951.
Moore, E. O. (1980). A prison environment: Its effect on healthcare utilization. Dissertation Abstracts International,
41(2), 437.
Moore, E. O. (1981). A Prison Environments Effect on Health Care Service Demands. Journal of Environmental
Systems, 11(1), 1734.
Morris, N., & Rothman, D. J. (Eds.). (1995). The Oxford history of the prison: The practice of punishment in
Western society. New York: Oxford University Press.
Moser, D. J., Arndt, S., Kanz, J. E., Benjamin, M. L., Bayless, J. D., Reese, R. L., et al. (2004). Coercion and informed
(p. 330) consent in research involving prisoners. Comprehensive Psychiatry, 45(1), 19.
Nacci, P. I., Teitelbaum, H. E., & Prather, J. (1977). Population density and inmate misconduct rates in the federal
prison system. Federal Probation, 41(2), 2631.
National Institute of Corrections Information Center. (2006). Direct Supervision Jails Sourcebook (3rd ed.).
Longmont, CO: National Institute of Corrections Information Center.
Nelson, W. R. (1988a). NIJ Construction Bulletin: Cost savings in new generation jails: The direct supervision
approach. Washington, DC: National Institute of Justice.
Nelson, W. R. (1988b). The origins of direct supervision: An eyewitness account. American Jail, 2(1), 814.
Page 17 of 21
Correctional Environments
Nurse, J., Woodcock, P., & Ormsby, J. (2003). Influence of environmental factors on mental health within prisons:
Focus group study. BMJ: British Medical Journal, 327(7413), 490494.
ONeal, E., Caldwell, C., & Gallup, G. G. (1977). Territorial invasion and aggression in young children.
Environmental Psychology & Nonverbal Behavior, 2(1), 1425.
Orne, M. (1962). On the social psychology of the psychological experiment. American Psychologist, 17, 776783.
Ostfeld, A. M., Kasl, S. V., DAtri, D. A., & Fitzgerald, E. F. (1987). Stress, crowding, and blood pressure in prison.
Recherche, 67, 02.
Paluck, R. J., & Esser, A. (1971). Controlled experimental modification of aggressive behavior in territories of
severely retarded boys. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 76(1), 2329.
Paslawskyj, L., & Ivinskis, A. (1980). Dominance, agonistic, and territorial behaviour in institutionalized mentally
retarded patients. Australian Journal of Developmental Disabilities, 6(1), 1724.
Paulus, P. B. (1988). Prison crowding. New York: Springer-Verlag.
Pechacek, C. S., Andersen, M., & Lockley, S. W. (2008). Preliminary method for prospective analysis of the
circadian efficacy of (day) light with applications to healthcare architecture. LEUKOSThe Journal of the
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America, 5(1), 126.
Pederson, D. (1999). Model for types of privacy by privacy functions. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 18,
397405.
Pelissier, B. (1991). The effects of a rapid increase in a prison population: A pre- and post-test study. Criminal
Justice and Behavior, 18, 427447.
Pellegrini, R. J., Schauss, A. G., & Miller, M. E. (1981). Room color and aggression in a criminal detention holding
cell: A test of the tranquilizing pink hypothesis. Journal of Orthomolecular Psychiatry, 10(3), 8.
Pilcher, J. J., & Huffcutt, A. I. (1996). Effects of sleep deprivation on performance: A meta-analysis. Sleep, 19(4),
318326.
Pizarro, J., & Stenius, V. M. K. (2004). Supermax prisons: Their rise, current practices, and effect on inmates. Prison
Journal, 84(2), 248264.
Porporpino, F. J., & Dudley, K. (1984). An analysis of the effects of overcrowding in Canadian penitentiaries.
Ottawa: Ministry of the Solicitor General of Canada.
Profusek, P. J., & Rainey, D. W. (1987). Effects of Baker-Miller pink and red on state anxiety, grip strength, and
motor precision. Perceptual & Motor Skills, 65(3), 941942.
Rago, W., Parker, R. M., & Cleland, C. C. (1978). Effect of increased space on the social behavior of
institutionalized profoundly retarded male adults. American Journal of Mental Deficiency, 82(6), 554558.
Ray, D. W., Wandersman, A., Ellisor, J., & Huntington, D. E. (1982). The effects of high density in a juvenile
correctional institution. Basic and Applied Social Psychology, 3, 95108.
Roger, D. B., & Schalekamp, E. E. (1976). Body-buffer zone and violence: A cross-cultural study. Journal of Social
Psychology, 98, 153158.
Rostad, K., & Christoff, J. P. (2006). Negating noise: Study pushes for change to noise standard. Corrections News,
12(5), 34.
Roth, L. H. (1971). Territoriality and homosexuality in a male prison population. American Journal of
Orthopsychiatry, 41(3), 510513.
Rotman, E. (1995). The failure of reform: 18651965. In N. Morris & D. J. Rothman (Eds.), The Oxford history of the
prison: The practice of punishment in Western society (pp. 169198). New York: Oxford University Press.
Page 18 of 21
Correctional Environments
Roush, D. (1989). Far from the maddening crowd: The relationship between crowding and safety in juvenile
institutions. Paper presented at the Congress of Corrections of the American Correctional Association, Baltimore,
MD.
Ruback, R. B., Carr, T. S., & Hopper, C. H. (1986). Perceived control in prison: Its relation to reported crowding,
stress, and symptoms. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 16(5), 375386.
Ryden, M. B., Bossenmaier, M., & McLachlan, C. (1991). Aggressive behavior in cognitively impaired nursing home
residents. Research in Nursing & Health, 14(2), 8795.
Schaeffer, A., Baum, A., Paulus, P. B., & Gaes, G. G. (1988). Architecturally mediated effects of social density in
prison. Environment and Behavior, 20, 319.
Schauss, A. G. (1979). Tranquilizing effect of color reduced aggressive behavior and potential violence. Journal of
Orthomolecular Psychiatry, 8(4), 218221.
Schiffenbauer, A. I., Brown, J. E., Perry, P. L., Shulack, L. K., & Zanzola, A. M. (1977). The relationship between
density and crowding: Some architectural modifiers. Environment and Behavior, 9(1), 3.
Schneiger, F. (1985). Organizational assessment of Manhattan House of Detention. New York: New York City
Department of Corrections.
Seligman, M. E. P. (1975). Helplessness: On depression, development, and death. San Francisco: WH Freeman.
Sestoft, D. M., Andersen, H. S., & Lilleboek, T. (1998). Impact of solitary confinement on hospitalization among
Danish prisoners in custody. International Journal of Law and Psychiatry, 21(1), 99108.
Shabangu, K. I. (2006). Prison overcrowding in the South African correctional services: A penological perspective.
Unpublished Thesis, University of South Africa, Pretoria.
Sigurdson, H. (1985). The Manhattan House of Detention: A study of podular direct supervision. Washington, DC:
National Institute of Corrections.
Specter, D. (2010). Everything revolves around overcrowding: The state of Californias prisons. Federal
Sentencing Reporter, 22(3), 194199.
Stansfeld, S. A., & Matheson, M. P. (2003). Noise pollution: Non-auditory effects on health. British Medical Bulletin,
68(1), 243257.
Steiner, B., & Wooldredge, J. (2008). Comparing state- versus facility-level effects on crowding in US correctional
facilities. Crime & Delinquency, 54(2), 259.
Stone, N. J. (1998). Windows and environmental cues on performance and mood. Environment and Behavior,
30(3), 306.
(p. 331) Suedfeld, P., Ramirez, C., Deaton, J., & Baker-Brown, G. (1982). Reactions and attributes of prisoners in
solitary confinement. Criminal Justice and Behavior, 9, 303340.
Suls, J. (1977). Social comparison theory and research: Overview from 1954. In J. Suls & R. I. Miller (Eds.), Social
comparison processes: Theory and empirical perspectives (pp. 119). Washington, DC: Hemisphere Publishing.
Sundstrom, E., & Altman, I. (1974). Field study of territorial behavior and dominance. Journal of Personality and
Social Psychology, 30(1), 115124.
Tarnopolski, A., & McLean, E. K. (1977). Noise as a mental health problem. Acta Psiquiatrica y Psicologica de
America Latina, 23(2), 100.
Toch, H. (1985). Warehouses for people? Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science.
Special Issue: Our Crowded Prisons, 5885.
Toch, H. (1992). Mosaic of despair: Human breakdown in prison. Washington, DC: American Psychological
Page 19 of 21
Correctional Environments
Association.
Toch, H. (2003). The contemporary relevance of early experiments with Supermax reform. Prison Journal, 83(2),
221228.
Topf, M. (2000). Hospital noise pollution: An environmental stress model to guide research and clinical
interventions. Journal of Advanced Nursing, 31(3), 520528.
Topf, M., Bookman, M., & Arand, D. (1996). Effects of critical care unit noise on the subjective quality of sleep.
Journal of Advanced Nursing, 24(3), 545551.
Topf, M. & Dillon, E. (1988). Noise-induced stress as a predictor of burnout in critical care nurses. Heart Lung,
17(5), 567574.
Topf, M. & Thompson, S. (2001). Interactive relationships between hospital patients noise-induced stress and other
stress with sleep. Heart & Lung: Journal of Acute & Critical Care, 30(4), 237.
Ulrich, R. (1993). Biophilia, biophobia, and natural landscapes. In S. Kellert & E. O. Wilson (Eds.), The biophilia
hypothesis (pp. 138172). Washington, DC: Island Press.
Ulrich, R. (1999). Effects of gardens on health outcomes: Theory and research. In C. C. Marcus & M. Barnes (Eds.),
Healing gardens: Therapeutic benefits and design recommendations, (pp. 2786). New York: John Wiley & Sons.
Veitch, J. (2002). Principles of healthy lighting: Highlights of CIE TC 611s forthcoming report. Final report. Paper
presented at the 5th International LRO Lighting Research SymposiumLight and Human Health, Orlando, FL.
Veitch, J., van den Beld, G., Brainard, G., & Roberts, J. E. (2004). Ocular lighting effects on human physiology and
behaviour. Vienna, Austria: CIEInternational Commission on Illumination.
Vodanovich, S. J. H. (2003). Psychometric measures of boredom: A review of the literature. Journal of Psychology:
Interdisciplinary & Applied, 137(6), 569595.
Walkey, F. H., & Gilmour, D. R. (1984). The relationship between interpersonal distance and violence in imprisoned
offenders. Criminal Justice & Behavior, 11(3), 331340.
Weinberg, M. M. (1967). Effects of partial sensory deprivation on involuntary subjects. Dissertation Abstracts
International, 28(5), 21712172.
Weiss, L. J. (1997). Acute and chronic stress: The effects of loss of control. (Unpublished doctoral dissertation).
Uniformed Services University of the Health Sciences, Bethesda, MD.
Wener, R. E. (1985). Environmental evaluation: Manhattan House of Detention. New York: New York City
Department of Corrections.
Wener, R. E. (2005). The invention of direct supervision. Corrections Compendium, 30(2), 47, 3234.
Wener, R. E. (2006). The effectiveness of the direct supervision system of correctional design and management: A
review of the literature. Criminal Justice & Behavior, 33, 367391.
Wener, R. E., & Keys, C. (1988). The effects of changes in jail population densities on crowding, sick call, and
spatial behavior. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 18, 852866.
Wener, R. E., & Olsen, R. (1980). Innovative correctional environments: A user assessment. Environment and
Behavior, 12(4), 478493.
West, M. J. (1986). Landscape views and the stress response in the prison environment. (Unpublished masters
thesis). University of Washington, Seattle.
Westin, A. (1967). Privacy and freedom. New York: Atheneum.
Wolfe, M., & Golan, M. B. (1976). Privacy and institutionalization. Paper presented at the 7th Annual Conference of
Page 20 of 21
Correctional Environments
the Environmental Design Research Association, Vancouver, B.C., Canada.
Wooldredge, J. D., & Winfree, L. T., Jr. (1992). An aggregate-level study of inmate suicides and deaths due to
natural causes in US jails. Journal of Research in Crime & Delinquency, 29(4), 466.
Zeisel, J., Silverstein, N. M., Hyde, J., Levkoff, S., Lawton, M. P., & Holmes, W. (2003). Environmental correlates to
behavioral health: Outcomes in Alzheimers special care units. Gerontologist, 43(5), 697711.
Zimring, C. (1989). Post-occupancy evaluation: Contra Costa County Main Detention Facility. Unpublished report.
Atlanta: Environment/Behavior Inquiry.
Zimring, C., Weitzer, W., & Knight, R. C. (1982). Opportunity for control and the designed environment: The case of
an institution for the developmentally disabled. In A. Baum & J. Singer (Eds.), Advances in environmental
psychology, Environment and Health (Vol. 4, pp. 171210). Hillside, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
Zinger, I., Wichmann, C., & Andrews, D. A. (2001). The psychological effects of 60 days in administrative
segregation. Canadian Journal of Criminology, 43(1), 4783.
Notes:
(1.) Much of the information in this chapter is adapted from Wener, R. (2012). The environmental psychology of
prisons and jails: Creating human spaces environments in secure settings. New York: Cambridge University Press.
(2.) Though most American prisons and jails are now smoke-free.
Richard E. Wener
Richard E. Wener Department of Humanities and Social Sciences Polytechnic Institute of New York University New York, NY
Page 21 of 21
Natural Landscapes
Introduction
What are the bases of human relations with natural landscapes? What are the psychological processes implied in
these relations? Natural landscapes can be defined as environmental scenes, totally or predominantly untouched
by human activity, of smaller or larger extent, that can be seen in one view from one place. By assuming this
perspective, the psychological literature on natural landscape has traditionally focused on the visual properties of
the environment, and on human responses to these properties.
Beyond the expert and experiential approaches, the former based on professionals judgments and the latter
on subjective meanings and impressions of particular persons (Zube, Sell, & Taylor, 1982), environmental
psychology has mostly analyzed individual responses to natural landscapes on a more scientific ground according
to two main perspectives. The psychophysical approach has considered human responses to natural landscapes
as a way to gain information about the properties of the landscapes that contribute to its quality; this implies a
focus on the physical properties of the landscape. A positive response by people is supposed to be associated
with the quality of the environment. This perspective is thus aimed at understanding the physical characteristics of
the environment that are more likely to elicit positive responses. The idea behind the psychophysical approach is
that a quantitative relation between the level of physical properties of the environment and the amount of human
responses can be identified. As a result, human responses can be translated into objective and reliable indexes of
quality (Daniel, 1990).
The relation between physical and subjective measures is usually investigated by recruiting (p. 333) adequate
samples of respondents who are asked to give their evaluation of several landscapes, differing in the levels of
Page 1 of 19
Natural Landscapes
physical features. Among the physical properties of the environment, degree of wilderness, level of biodiversity,
plant coverage rate, grass and shrubs rate, and amount of water have often been considered as potential features
promoting positive responses by people; among the measures of positive human response, subjective judgments
of aesthetic or visual quality and scenic beauty (Feimer, Smardon, & Craik, 1981; Daniel & Vining, 1983; Daniel,
1990) or preference (e.g., Schroeder, 1987) have been most frequently used. The Scenic Beauty Estimation (SBE)
is a traditional method developed in this respect (Daniel & Boster, 1976). Through appropriate statistical
procedures, including multiple regression analyses, SBE, considered as a subjective response, can be derived in a
prediction model as a function of various physical features of the environment, each contributing to a different
extent to overall SBE. Once this relation has been established, natural landscape quality can be objectively
assessed through the measurement of relevant physical features, and evaluations of selected observers are no
longer needed (Daniel & Vining, 1983). For example, in a study on agricultural landscapes in Spain, Arriaza,
Caas-Ortega, Caas-Madueo, and Ruiz-Aviles (2004) found that the degree of wilderness, the presence of wellpreserved man-made elements, the percentage of plant cover, the amount of water, the presence of mountains,
and the color contrast were all factors contributing to overall visual quality.
On the other hand, the psychological approach has considered human responses to natural landscapes as a way
to analyze the cognitive, affective, and behavioral processes implied in people-environment transactions. Human
responses to natural landscapes are still considered a way to gain information about the quality of the
environment, as feelings, perceptions, and behaviors may range from positive, to neutral, to negative. Differently
from the psychophysical approach, however, human responses to perceived (not objective) properties of the
landscape are analyzed. The psychological approach is thus aimed at understanding whether and how specific
perceived properties of the environment are associated with positive or negative emotional, cognitive, and
behavioral human responses. Aesthetic response (Berlyne, 1971) or preference (Herzog, 1985; Herzog & Bosley,
1992; Kaplan, 1985), approach/exploration or contemplation (Ulrich, 1993; Heerwagen & Orians, 1993), stress
reduction (Ulrich, 1983), and recovery of attentional capacities (Kaplan & Kaplan, 1989) have been mostly
analyzed as relevant positive human responses toand outcomes ofnature experience, in the cognitive,
affective, and behavioral domains.
Studies in this field have identified many perceived properties of natural landscapes influencing human responses,
such as:
visual depth or openness, which refers to the amount of unobstructed space that it is possible to see in the
landscape (Kaplan, Kaplan, & Brown, 1989; Ulrich, 1983)
the degree to which the landscape contains a focal point, which refers to the presence of one or more
dominant elements in the scene that attract the observers attention (Kaplan, 1992; Ulrich, 1983)
the smoothness of the ground surface, which suggests ease of movement (Herzog, 1985; Kaplan et al., 1989;
Ulrich, 1977)
the degree of coherence (the extent to which the elements of the environment combine to one another),
complexity (the richness and variety of elements in the environment), legibility (the ease of comprehending the
environment and of finding ones way), and mystery (the promise of new and relevant information going deeper
in the environment), the informational variables that give the observer knowledge about how the environment
is organized, what is going on, and how to manage it effectively (Kaplan, 1987)
the natural character of the landscape itself, often contrasted to predominantly man-made sceneries (Purcell,
Lamb, Mainardi, Peron, & Falchero, 1994; Ulrich, 1986).
Page 2 of 19
Natural Landscapes
complexity, novelty, and surprise. Berlynes theory suggests that aesthetic responses of pleasure for any stimuli
follow an inverted U-shape, as a function of the stimuluss arousal potential, which is determined by its collative
variables. Intermediate levels of incongruity, complexity, novelty, and surprise are thus associated with most
positive responses. Wohlwill (1976) proposed an application of Berlynes theory to the field of environmental
perception. Environmental research has thus applied this theory to the study of natural landscapes, trying to verify
whether moderate levels of collative variables were associated with preference. Results of empirical research on
natural landscapes have often been inconsistent with Berlynes (1971) model. Complexity was the collative
variable that received the most attention at the beginning. Kaplan, Kaplan, and Wendt (1972) found a positive
linear relationship between complexity and preference for natural environments, even though no environments
with extreme (very low or very high) levels of complexity were included in their study. Herzog (1987) developed an
analysis of preference for natural landscapes with reference to different categories of environment, namely,
mountains, canyons, and deserts. Among other variables, the role of complexity in predicting preference emerged,
although with specific differences among categories, and the trend of the relationship was still linear. With
reference to the other collative variables, coherence (which recalls incongruity) has consistently shown a positive
linear relationship with preference in forest landscapes (Herzog, 1984; Herzog & Kropscott, 2004), waterscapes
(Herzog, 1985), and agrarian landscapes (Strumse, 1994). Specific studies on the relationships between novelty,
surprise, and preference for natural landscapes are mostly missing. However, Wohlwill (1976) suggested that the
limited evidence supporting the inverted U-shaped relationship between levels of collative variables and
preference might depend on the choice of the natural landscapes to be evaluated in the studies, usually lacking
extreme examples of complexity, coherence, novelty, and surprise, and on other methodological shortcomings in
the manipulation of the variables.
The role of discrepancy in producing arousal, and its relations with preference for natural landscapes, was
considered from a different perspective by Purcell (1992). In his view, the experience of a landscape is not simply
related to its physical properties, but stems from past experience with similar exemplars, which contributed to the
development of general knowledge structures. Knowledge structures are cognitive representations of categories of
objects (and landscapes in this case) that share regularities. Regularities can exist at both abstract (or higher) and
specific (or lower) level. At the abstract level, natural landscapes are characterized by physical attributes such as
the scale of the scene, the degree of naturalness, distinct topographic features (e.g., landform and soil color), and
amount of water. These attributes make a natural landscape more or less typical, as the general representation of
nature includes these features. The less these attributes are present, the more atypical the landscape is in the
category of natural landscapes, and the more it becomes typical in other categories, such as residential or
industrial scenes.
At the specific level, natural landscapes are characterized by physical attributes such as tree species, branch
structure, shrub shape, and color of vegetation. These attributes make a natural landscape more or less familiar,
as people in a given geographical location are more used to experiencing specific tree species, branch structures,
shrub shapes, and colors of vegetation. According to Purcell (1992), it is the discrepancy between the specific
landscape under vision and the general knowledge structure that induces arousal, and again, moderate levels of
discrepancy are supposed to be associated with higher preference. But to express preference, at what level of
abstraction do we need to experience the discrepancy from the knowledge structure? Through a comparison
between home and outside natural landscapes, Purcell (1992) has shown that discrepancy associated with
preference is experienced at the specific level. Home and outside natural landscapes do not differ at the
abstract level, as both have examples covering the full range of typicality (i.e., from low to high level of scale,
naturalness, topography, and water). Conversely, they differ at the specific level, as home natural landscapes
have been repeatedly experienced, and are thus more familiar, while outside have not been experienced, and
are thus less familiar, in terms of tree species, branch structure, shrub shape, and color of vegetation. Indeed,
these findings showed that the less familiar outside natural landscapes were preferred, and this is consistent with
the view that preference can be related to attributes of knowledge structures at the specific level.
Within a cognitive framework, Kaplan (1987) proposed a different model of environmental preference. In his theory,
preference is guided by an information-processing mechanism, through which (p. 335) people try to make sense
of the organization of the environment. Understanding and exploration are thus major goals of people-environment
transactions, and environments supporting both processes are likely to be preferred. Understanding and
exploration can be promoted by both immediate or inferred information. Environments showing high levels of the
Page 3 of 19
Natural Landscapes
informational variables supporting understanding (i.e., coherence, immediate, and legibility, inferred) and
exploration (i.e., complexity, immediate, and mystery, inferred) are associated with higher preference. Empirical
research on natural landscapes has supported this model. Beyond coherence and complexity, discussed above,
also legibility and mystery emerged as relevant predictors of preference for natural landscapes. For example,
Herzog and Leverick (2003) and Herzog and Kropscott (2004) found that legibility is a relevant predictor of
preference in forest landscapes, and visual access plays a central role in making this setting category highly
legible. With reference to mystery, empirical research was more extensive, but more controversial, at the same
time. Mystery was found to be both positively and negatively associated with preference, depending on the
context: in urban settings, mystery is often associated with perceived danger, and thus preference decreases; in
fields and forest landscapes, mystery is positively associated with preference (Herzog & Smith, 1988; Herzog &
Miller, 1998). In natural environments, van den Berg and ter Heijne (2005) have identified close encounters with
potentially dangerous animals, forceful natural situations (windstorms, thunder, rushing rivers, etc.), overwhelming
situations (e.g., the size of a forest), and loss of orientation as factors that may turn the positive aspects of mystery
into fear. Several studies have shown that mystery is negatively correlated with preference in forest and field
settings, but when it is associated with visual access and ease of penetration and movement in the environment,
this relationship becomes positive (Herzog & Kirk, 2005; Herzog & Kropscott, 2004; Herzog & Kutzli, 2002).
Herzog and Bryce (2007) have proposed that inconsistent findings could have two explanations. First, no clear
distinction in the level of visual access in forest landscape categories was made. With very low visual access
landscapes, mystery is confused with surprise, because low visibility impedes continuity of information with what is
already available, which is a fundamental aspect of mystery. This environmental condition makes surprise possible,
but not mystery. Forest landscapes with very low levels of visual access should thus be distinguished from forest
landscapes with greater visual access as a separate category. Second, no clear distinction between mystery and
surprise was made in the definitions of mystery used by previous studies. An improved definition in this regard
should hence be used. By considering the specific distinction in forest landscape categories, as well as an
improved definition of mystery, the authors argue for a positive relation between mystery and preference for forest
landscapes in both low- and high-visual access settings, and found empirical support for their argument. Stamps
(2007) has also recently identified several environmental features playing a role in shaping the levels of
environmental mystery, such as light, visual occlusion, and, partially, visual depth.
In a meta-analysis on the role of the four informational variables in predicting preference for both natural and built
landscapes, Stamps (2004) found huge differences across the studies in the direction and power of the
relationships. The author emphasized that results have not been reproducible given the heterogeneity in the
procedures (choice of environments, materials of presentation, definitions of the variables, sampling methods,
etc.). Together with informational variables, other perceived environmental factors were found to affect preference
for natural landscapes: among the others, the role of visual depth, spaciousness (the extent to which it is possible
to wander in the setting), and smoothness (uniformity of the ground) was ascertained (Herzog, 1985, 1987; Herzog
& Kutzli, 2002; Kaplan et al., 1989).
Page 4 of 19
Natural Landscapes
open view and unprotected observation point, closed view and protected observation point, closed view and
unprotected observation point). Judgments of preference, arousal, and safety were collected. Although the
landscapes with open view were considered as safer, the effect of refuge on preference was not always
significant; males, for example, expressed more liking toward the setting with less refuge. In a study on Swedish
landscapes, Hagerhall (2000) applied a cluster analysis to study the relationships between different environmental
attributes (including prospect and refuge) and preference. It was found that perceived safety (which also
encompasses some aspects of refuge) clustered with preference, while overview (which was used to communicate
prospect) formed a different cluster. With reference to the absence of relations between overview (prospect) and
preference, the author suggested that the term used could have been misleading, as the respondents attention
would have probably been drawn to the richness, shape, and distribution of trees and bushes instead of the
openness of the view.
From a different perspective, Ulrich (1983) suggested that although all the perceived environmental variables
considered by the literature can affect preference, it is the natural character of landscapes in itself that evokes a
positive response by the observer. His perspective stems from an evolutionary model of human response to
natural environments, called the biophilia hypothesis (Kellert & Wilson, 1993; Wilson, 1984). According to the
biophilia hypothesis, human beings, who have evolved in natural environments, have developed an innate
tendency to positively respond to nature as a consequence of an adaptation process. In line with the biophilia
hypothesis, Ulrich (1983) suggested that a positive affective response to nature, as expressed in terms of liking or
preference, can have several advantages to human survival, and thus it is likely that evolution has supported such
a response. For example, preference is likely to promote approach and exploration of nature, and this brings to
knowledge of the environments, namely where it was possible to find resources for survival (e.g., food, water,
hiding places) and threats to be avoided (e.g., wild animals, ravines). In addition, Ulrich (1983) proposed that liking
and preference can promote also other activities that may have adaptive outcomes as well, for example, sustained
contemplation and nonvigilant attention. Contemplation of a likeable environment can induce positive feelings and
thoughts, and thus offer a respite from stress. Within this framework, Ulrich (1983) has put forward his stress
reduction theory (SRT) with reference to human response to natural landscapes.
The stress reduction effect of people-nature relation consistently emerged in many experimental studies, in which
psychophysical (e.g., cortical activity, heart rate, blood pressure, skin conductance) and psychological (e.g.,
affective states, such as expressed fear, anger, sadness) measures of stress were considered (Ulrich, 1979, 1981;
Ulrich et al., 1991; Hartig, Mang, & Evans 1991; Laumann, Grling, & Stormark, 2003; Hartig et al., 2003). The
general methodology of these studies, employing a pre-post design, was based on a comparison of stress
reduction for respondents in different experimental conditions, namely the (direct or simulated) exposure to natural
versus urban landscapes. Results have consistently shown that the experience of natural (vs. urban) landscapes
promotes stress reduction. For example, Ulrich et al. (1991) first showed 120 subjects a stressful movie and then
randomly assigned them to viewing a recovery video in one out of three experimental conditions (natural
landscape, urban setting with traffic, urban setting with pedestrians). The authors registered both physiological
(i.e., heart rate, muscle tension, skin conductance, and blood pressure) and psychological (i.e., self-reported
positive and negative affect) measures of stress. Physiological measures were registered throughout the
experiment, while psychological measures were collected before and after the stressful movie, and after the
recovery video. Findings from the physiological and psychological measures converged to indicate that stress
recovery was faster and more complete when subjects were exposed to the natural landscape compared to the
urban environments.
Within an evolutionary framework, Kaplan and Kaplan (1989) have put forward a different model explaining the
positive response to natural (p. 337) landscapes. Instead of considering human response to natural landscapes
with respect to stress reduction, they emphasized the adaptive outcomes of people-nature relation in terms of
effective cognitive functioning. A key concept of their attention restoration theory (ART) is directed attention.
Directed attention is a fundamental mechanism in everyday human behavior, as it allows people to focus on stimuli
that may be uninteresting in themselves, but nonetheless important to attend to. Just think about a boring text you
have to study to go through an exam. In a classical and comprehensive work, James (1892) has argued that
directed attention is voluntary and requires effort, as uninteresting stimuli can be adequately taken into account
only when potential distractions are warded off. Moving a step further, Kaplan and Kaplan (1989) have suggested
that such an inhibitory mechanism, necessary to avoid distractions, is susceptible to fatigue from repeated use. In
Page 5 of 19
Natural Landscapes
addition, the ultimate state of being mentally fatigued can be reached also when our activities are pleasant, but
require a prolonged cognitive effort.
Kaplan (1995) has discussed the negative outcomes of losing an effective cognitive functioning, in terms of inability
to select relevant information for the task at hand, difficulties to think and plan solutions for occurring problems,
and increased tendency to impulsive, not reflected, and then potentially inappropriate behaviors. To allow this
inhibitory mechanism to recover, it must go unused for some time. People then have to be exposed to stimuli that
are capable to catch their interest automatically and without mental effort, so that the use of directed attention
becomes temporarily unnecessary. These stimuli can be experienced through the use of a different mechanism,
called involuntary attention. What can be these stimuli? According to Kaplan and Kaplan (1989), stimuli that have to
do with human evolution are interesting in themselves, and thus likely to draw peoples attention through
involuntary attention. Natural landscapes are an example of those stimuli. ART hence postulates that the relation
with natural landscapes can allow people to recover an effective cognitive functioning.
Evidence of the restorative effect of nature on cognitive functioning is largely provided in the literature (Berto,
2005; Hartig et al., 1991, 2003; Laumann et al., 2003; Tennessen & Cimprich, 1995). For example, Hartig et al.
(1991) have compared the recovery of directed attention, as well as physiological restoration, in natural versus
non-natural settings, through a quasi-experimental and a true experimental field study. Wilderness backpackers,
non-wilderness vacationists, and people engaged in everyday routines were compared in the first study. Subjects
who had been cognitively fatigued and then randomly assigned to a natural walk, urban walk, or passive relaxation
in a comfortable room were compared in the second study. Baseline and pre-post treatment measures of
physiological stress and cognitive performance were administered. Taken together, the results of the two studies
showed higher stress reduction and recovery of directed attention in participants exposed to natural environments.
Tennessen and Cimprich (1995) have studied the cognitive restoration promoted by natural landscapes in a
different setting, namely dormitories for university students. Views from dormitory windows afforded different kinds
of landscape, which were categorized into four groups ranging from all natural to all built. Cognitive restoration of
university students was analyzed through both neurocognitive and subjective measures of directed attention. The
view of natural landscapes was associated with better performance on the different measures of directed attention.
Although stress recovery and attention restoration are distinct processes occurring in natural environments, they
are far from being independent. Kaplan (1995) has argued how even stress and mental fatigue can concur or the
former be the cause, or the consequence, of the latter. For example, a stressful event can lead to mobilization of
cognitive resources to deal with the harmful situation, and this can lead to exhaustion and mental fatigue.
Alternatively, the effort required by the task at hand can exhaust cognitive resources, and this can lead to both a
negative performance and a stress response. Likewise, the experience of natural landscapes can allow stress
recovery and attention restoration to mutually reinforce each other. Laumann et al. (2003) found that mentally
fatigued individuals have a better performance on a cognitive task after viewing a video of a natural landscape, as
compared to individuals who had viewed an urban video. During the video presentation, the nature group showed
a significant decrease in an autonomic stress measure (i.e., heart rate). The authors claimed that reduced stress
associated with viewing the natural landscape engendered an improvement of cognitive resources in the nature
group compared to the urban group.
In a field study, Hartig et al. (2003) studied stress recovery and cognitive restoration in two groups of subjects,
randomly assigned to a natural or an urban condition. Stress recovery was analyzed through physiological (i.e.,
blood pressure) and psychological (p. 338) (i.e., self-reported positive and negative affect) measures. Cognitive
restoration was analyzed through the performance on an attentional test. The experimental conditions included
both viewing and walking into a natural versus non-natural environment. To manipulate participants need for
restoration, half of the subjects for each experimental condition were mentally fatigued before the treatment.
Baseline, ongoing, and final measures of stress and cognitive resources levels were recorded. Physiological stress
reduction was higher in the natural versus non-natural group during both the vision and the walking phase, but
improvements rapidly dissipated after the walk. With reference to self-reported measures, positive affect increased
and negative affect decreased in the natural group at the end of the walk; the opposite pattern emerged in the
non-natural group. Both self-reported measures of stress reduction were better for the nature group in the not
fatigued condition. Performance on the attentional test improved a little in the natural group from the baseline to the
midpoint of the walk, while it declined in the non-natural group. This performance gap persisted at the end of the
walk. Overall, the authors claimed that stress reduction and cognitive restoration processes may complement one
Page 6 of 19
Natural Landscapes
another, manifesting in different positive physiological and psychological outcomes that emerge at different rates,
and persist over time to a different extent.
Can we think of natural landscapes as undifferentiated beneficial environments? If not, what kind of natural
landscapes are more likely to elicit a positive response? If an evolutionary explanation lies behind the positive
response to nature, natural environments in which human beings evolved should promote the best responses. This
perspective was exposed in the savanna hypothesis by Orians (1986). The savanna hypothesis predicts a
preference for the savanna-type landscape, in which the first steps of human evolution were likely taken. The
savanna environment provided the essential for human survival: food, trees for protection from predators, and
open views from which it was possible to see both predator and prey (prospect and refuge, in Appletons view
mentioned before). Besides open views and refuge spots, other environmental features reminiscent of savanna
habitats should be generally preferred. Acacia trees existed in the African savanna and were associated with
favorable habitats for survival (Orians, 1986). Tree form recalling acacia trees has thus been considered as a
potentially relevant factor in explaining preference for natural landscapes in several studies. Research showed
that trees with acacia-like characteristics, such as spreading canopies, rounded forms, and short trunks, are
generally preferred over other tree forms (Sommer & Summit, 1995; Summit & Sommer, 1999). In addition, the
savanna hypothesis predicts that individuals prefer trees with spreading forms because of unaware and longestablished positive associations with the habitats in which they evolved. If this hypothesis is correct, then people
from different cultures are expected to show a preference for trees with acacia-like characteristics. Cross-cultural
studies have empirically supported this hypothesis (Orians, 1986; Orians & Heerwagen, 1992; Sommer, 1997).
Results suggesting an overall preference for savanna over other biomes were indeed reported in several other
studies (Balling & Falk, 1982; Falk & Balling, 2010).
Page 7 of 19
Natural Landscapes
landscapes. Preference for natural landscapes was consistently higher, supporting evolutionary models of
preference. However, evident group differences emerged with respect to several demographic factors, above all
gender, membership in environmental groups, expertise with natural landscapes (e.g., comparing students of
landscape-related disciplines vs. psychology), and density of residential areas. Van den Berg, Vlek, and Coeterier
(1998) found that aesthetic evaluation of different natural landscapes is influenced by the different user
background as well, namely being residents, farmers, visitors, or experts. Educational level more than familiarity
emerged as a relevant factor in explaining the different user background.
Sociocultural influences on preference for natural landscapes were also analyzed through cross-cultural studies.
Kaplan and Herbert (1987) compared preference judgments for Australian forest and open-area landscapes in
three groups, namely American students, Australian students, and members of the wildflower society of Western
Australia. This allowed them to perform both a cross-cultural and a subcultural comparison. Correlations between
groups were very high, showing strong similarities between the two cultures. However, interesting differences also
emerged. Both Australian groups showed higher mean preference ratings, which can be explained through a
familiarity effect. Subcultural differences also emerged, with wildflower society members showing a higher
preference for native eucalyptus tree landscapes than imported pinewood landscapes. This difference did not
emerge for students. Herzog, Herbert, Kaplan, and Crooks (2000) included a broader sample of settings, namely
human-influenced natural landscapes, open coarse and open smooth landscapes (both with little vegetation),
agrarian landscapes, vegetation landscapes, and rivers landscapes, and examined several subcultural groupings.
American students were compared to several Australian sub-cultural groups, namely students, who were further
divided by age, and adults, who were further divided into four professional groups. The strong correlations
between preference judgments of American and Australian participants can be interpreted with reference to both
evolution and cross-cultural affinities. Similarities in expressed judgments included the lowest level of preference
for the human-influenced and the two open landscape categories. In addition, vegetation and agrarian landscapes
were significantly more preferred, and similar in preference judgments to each other. The most preferred category,
significantly above all others, was rivers for both cultural groups. Small differences also emerged, with the greatest
divergence coming from the four professional groups of Australian adults. Clear age differences were also outlined,
and age trends were very similar in the American and Australian cultures. Adults showed greater internal variability
in preference judgments across landscape categories compared to the other age groups, while correlations
reported among younger respondents were much higher. The authors interpreted this trend as the result of a
developmental sequence, in which cultural influences are presumably stronger with increasing age maturity; this,
in turn, might explain the distinctive patterns in preferences.
Cross-cultural comparisons of preference for natural landscape were also developed between very different
cultural groups. Yang and Brown (1992) compared preference for natural landscape in Western (European and
American) and Eastern participants (Korean). Beyond commonand presumably evolution-basedpositive
responses for water, dense vegetation, and rounded forms, both Western and Eastern groups showed a
preference (p. 340) for landscape styles not matching their own cultural experience. This shows the influence of
enculturation on preference judgments, but the direction of preference judgments is more in accordance with the
role of the unfamiliar experience suggested by Purcell (1992).
Falk and Balling (2010) have recently found further empirical support to their sociocultural model of landscape
preference. They compared preferences for natural landscapes representing five biomes, namely tropical rain
forest, temperate deciduous forest, temperate coniferous forest, tropical savanna, and mid-latitude desert in three
different populations in Nigeria. Results are consistent with earlier findings, showing that individuals have an innate
preference for savanna-like settings, but this preference is then modified through experience and enculturation.
What can be the social and cultural factors involved in the formation of individual responses to natural
landscapes? Socialization within specific social and cultural environments is likely to shape evolutionary bias, and
thus the role of acquired knowledge and preferences, as expressed through psychological constructs such as
values and attitudes, should manifest beyond cross-cultural regularities. These factors will be discussed more
thoroughly in the next paragraphs.
Page 8 of 19
Natural Landscapes
the social and cultural processes at the basis of peoples awareness of, beliefs on, and concern for nature and
natural environments. Typically, these studies tried to identify the main public opinions about nature and natural
resources, and the attitudes and beliefs shared across different social groups in industrialized countries (Dunlap &
Van Liere, 1978; Weigel & Weigel, 1978). Dunlap and Van Liere (1978) defined these belief systems as
worldviews or primitive belief systems, and argued that, since the mid-1970s, a new environmental paradigm
(NEP) has gradually replaced the former traditional and anti-ecological dominant social paradigm (DSP). This has
also been labeled as human exception paradigm (HEP), based on the idea that human beings, unlike other living
beings, are exempt from the constraints of nature. As these authors proposed later on, We [humans] are in the
midst of a fundamental re-evaluation of the underlying world view that has guided our relationship to the physical
environment. In particular suggestions that a more ecologically sound world view is emerging have gained
credibility in the past decades (Dunlap, Van Liere, Merting, & Jones, 2000, p. 426). The NEP Scale, which is a
specific psychometric instrument proposed by these authors originally in 1978 to measure such a new worldview,
became very popular in the ensuing years, and was used by many scholars in different countries. Its updated
version (Dunlap et al., 2000) includes the most recent orientations of the sustainable development perspective. In
the NEP Scale, this ecologically sound worldview seems mostly based on the new awareness of the following
aspects: (a) the existence of limits in the availability and use of natural resources by humans; (b) the fragility of the
so-called natural balances; and (c) the need for human activities to value natural resources for their own sake
rather than exclusively dominate on them for exclusive human purposes.
During the 1990s, other studies were also aimed at investigating the different values or ethical principles forming
the basis for pro-environmental attitudes and behaviors. For example, the importance of universal and altruistic
values, compared to individual and egoistic ones, has often been shown (e.g., Schwartz, 1994; Stern & Dietz,
1994), as well as the importance of the so-called post-materialist values (Inglehart, 1997). Other studies also
emphasized the ethical implications connected with environmental values (Katz, 1997).
A further possible distinction about human ideological positions toward nature that was proposed in this field of
research refers to the ecocentrism vs. anthropocentrism (Thompson & Barton, 1994), or biocentrism vs.
anthropocentrism (McFarlane & Boxall, 2000) dichotomies. Ecocentric or biocentric individuals should be more
willing to conserve nature for its own sake, across different contexts and situations, compared to anthropocentric
individuals, who, in contrast, should be more willing to conserve nature only when linked to any specific advantage
for human beings. Starting from the NEP-HEP and ecocentrism-anthropocentrism distinctions, Corral-Verdugo,
Carrus, Bonnes, Moser, and Sinha (2008) have recently proposed an updated conceptual framework, and a related
measuring instrument, which should more explicitly encompass the sustainable development concept put forward
by the United Nations since the publication of the so-called Brundtland Report (WCED, 1987). In particular, based
also on results of previous studies (e.g., Bechtel, Corral-Verdugo, & Pinheiro, 1999; (p. 341) Bechtel, CorralVerdugo, Asai, & Gonzlez, 2006), Corral-Verdugo et al. (2008) suggested that the elements of this dichotomy
might not necessarily be conceived as contradictory and pertaining to incompatible belief systems, at least in some
specific cultures. For example, it was found that these two belief systems were independent among US people, but
positively correlated among Brazilian, Japanese, and Mexican people (Bechtel et al., 1999, 2006; Corral-Verdugo &
Armendriz, 2000). Therefore, Corral-Verdugo et al. (2008) proposed a new measuring instrument, labeled as new
human interdependence paradigm or NHIP Scale, tapping this possible alternative worldview to the idea of
ecocentrism and anthropocentrism as incompatible positions. This new worldview, and its related measuring
instrument, should fit more closely to the main pillars of the sustainable development concept envisaged by the UN
(i.e., the functional interdependence between human development and nature conservation, on the one hand; the
temporal interdependence between well-being of current and future generations, and the quality of natural
resources, on the other hand). Indeed, Corral-Verdugo et al. (2008) empirically showed that the NHIP scale is a
better predictor of self-reported water conservation behavior, compared to the traditional NEP-HEP scale.
Attitudes Toward Urban Green Areas and Natural Landscapes in the City
Moving forward from this corpus of research on general worldviews and values toward nature and natural
environments, some studies have also tried to investigate the more specific attitudes toward the presence of green
spaces in the urban residential context. Generally speaking, one could argue that the environmental value system
endorsed by an individual could be linked to the appreciation of nature within and nearby the residential setting. In
psychological theories, values and worldviews are assumed to guide individual evaluations and choices in a broad
Page 9 of 19
Natural Landscapes
range of life domains: hence, they should be somehow related also to how residents evaluate urban and periurban green areas and landscapes; namely, to their attitudes.
But how are attitudes toward green spaces and natural landscapes in urban settings shaped in residents
experience? Despite the generalized preference for natural over built environments, highlighted by the literature
on landscape preference and psychological restoration reviewed so far, some authors have also argued that
peoples relationship with urban natural landscapes could be characterized by a certain degree of ambivalence.
Individuals asked to describe their relationship to urban green spaces often mention contrasting arguments (e.g.,
Burgess, Harrison, & Limb, 1988; Henwood & Pidgeon, 2001; Bonnes, Aiello, & Bonaiuto, 1999). Positive
experiences within urban green areas are most often reported, based on the possibility of a closer sensorial
contact with nature and positive social interactions afforded by urban green spaces. Urban green areas are
appreciated because of the possibility of touching, smelling, viewing, and hearing the basic elements of nature,
and enjoying the view of the recurring seasonal changes, as well as walking and performing physical exercise
surrounded by these elements (e.g., Burgess et al., 1988). Since urban green areas also represent a recurrent
source of variation in an otherwise predominantly built-up (and uniform) cityscape, they could also be perceived
as a pleasant scenery change within the static features of a typical urban skyline. Other motives for positive
evaluations of urban green spaces are linked to the opportunities for outdoor social interaction provided to people
of all ages, to the possibility of engaging in leisure and sport activities, and meeting friends. As already discussed
above, they can also serve as an escape and refuge from stressful demands of everyday life, so that a high
restorative power is usually ascribed to green areas by city dwellers (e.g., Hartig, 2004; Kaplan & Kaplan, 1989;
Korpela, Kytta, & Hartig, 2002; Lafortezza, Carrus, Sanesi, & Davies, 2009; Scopelliti & Giuliani, 2004).
At the same time, urban residents also report negative experiences in relation to nature in the city, albeit less
frequently. A condition for urban green spaces to be appreciated by residents is their upkeep and proper
maintenance (e.g., grass cut and trees pruned) by the local administrations. Urban green areas are considered
well maintained when they are clean, open, and accessible, well equipped with furniture for children playing
activities, and running or walking trails and benches for users in general. In these cases, green spaces can more
easily provide opportunities for social interaction, leisure, and physical activities, which, in turn, are linked to
positive evaluations (see Bonaiuto, Aiello, Perugini, Bonnes, & Ercolani, 1999; Bonnes, Aiello, & Bonaiuto, 1999;
Burgess et al., 1988). If one or several of these features are missing, residents might express dissatisfaction and
negative attitudes toward urban green areas (e.g., Bonnes, Uzzell, Carrus, & Kelay, 2007). In particular, reasons
for these negative evaluations are to be found in concerns for personal safety and fear of crime (p. 342) (e.g.,
Michael & Hull, 1994; Nasar & Fisher, 1993; Talbot & Kaplan, 1984).
A study by Bonnes et al. (1999) seems indeed to suggest that positive and negative attitudes toward urban green
areas can coexist in peoples perceptions. In this study, participants answers in terms of agreement/disagreement
with about 100 statements concerning urban green areas were factor analyzed. Findings showed that rather than
collapsing in a unique bipolar dimension, responses to statements expressing positive and negative aspects of
urban green loaded on two distinct factors, respectively. These findings were corroborated in a further study by
Carrus, Passafaro, and Bonnes (2004), where the bidimensional structure of attitudes toward urban green spaces
was tested through confirmatory factor analyses. Findings in this case showed that positive and negative attitudes
toward urban green correlate only moderately with each other, and correlate differently with demographic and
individual difference factors (e.g., ethnocentrism and authoritarianism).
More generally, all these findings suggest the possibility of a certain degree of ambivalence in attitudes toward
natural landscapes in urban residential settings. If this is true, ambivalence toward urban green areas should be
reflected in lower correlations with some of the variables mentioned before, such as ecocentric versus
anthropocentric worldviews, or with behavioral tendencies toward urban natural landscapes (e.g., the frequency of
use of urban and peri-urban green areas). In fact, it is likely that those individuals with a more ecocentric view of
the natural world, or endorsing more biospheric values (i.e., those who appreciate nature for its own sake), will
show a more clear and unambiguous appreciation of nature in the city. Conversely, it is likely that those with a
more anthropocentric view of nature (i.e., appreciating nature only for its contribution to the quality of human life)
and those endorsing more egoistic and conservative values (see also Stern, Dietz, & Guagnano, 1998) will
perceive also the discomforts or problems (and not only the advantages) connected to the presence of nature in
the city. Therefore, a greater ambivalence in attitudes toward urban green areas (as well as a less frequent use of
them) should characterize the latter, compared to the former. A recent work by Bonnes, Passafaro, and Carrus
Page 10 of 19
Natural Landscapes
(2011) found support for these arguments.
In sum, findings of research on environmental worldviews, values, and attitudes suggest that more general
orientations toward nature could be reflected in the subjective appreciation (or devaluation) of urban natural
landscapes. At the same time, a subjective appreciation (or devaluation) may be influenced by the capacity of
urban green spaces to fulfill specific residential needs, in addition to the overall system of worldviews and values
endorsed by the individual. These might account for the fact that a general appreciation for the presence of green
in the city is frequent among the majority of people, either because of the values endorsed or because of the
functional importance of these areas for the residents life, or both.
Page 11 of 19
Natural Landscapes
also found results that are compatible with these more recent field studies (see Brewer & Schneider, 1990).
Conclusions
In this chapter we have reviewed the methodological, theoretical, and empirical literature on the relationships
between people and natural landscapes. We first discussed the different perspectives developed in environmental
psychology and related disciplines to study human responses to natural landscapes, and then focused on a more
psychological approach to this research theme. Environmental psychology has studied human responses to
natural landscapes mainly in terms of preference and positive reactions to perceived environmental properties of
nature. Different theoretical models, such as prospect and refuge, stress reduction theory, attention restoration
theory, and the savanna hypothesis, have discussed these responses within an evolutionary perspective.
Empirical studies have consistently supported these models. Finally, human responses to natural landscapes have
been considered within a more comprehensive framework, in which evolution and sociocultural processes combine
with each other. What evolution disposes is shaped by peoples experience of their sociocultural context, resulting
in distinctive environmental worldviews, values, and attitudes toward specific everyday natural landscapes. Recent
studies on attitudes toward natural landscapes have thus shown that they can include both positive and negative
dimensions. A further relevant aspect influencing attitudes and related behaviors toward natural landscapes has to
do with group and community inclusion, as shown in the studies on the use of natural resources within the
theoretical framework of social dilemmas.
Future Directions
The study of peoples relations with natural landscapes has been developed along different directions, but a
number of relevant issues are still to be adequately addressed.
First, beyond a general positive response to natural landscapes, the ways people perceive, evaluate, and develop
transactions with different categories of natural landscapes is far from being completely understood. The studies
on preferences for various natural settings (e.g., Falk & Balling, 2010; Herzog, 1984, 1987) have started
addressing this question, but several issues still remain unresolved. Just to give an example, the role of natural
elements of the landscape at the microlevel of analysis has been addressed only to some extent. Findings on
preference for trees with spreading canopies, rounded shapes, and short trunks (Sommer & Summit, 1995; Summit
& Sommer, 1999), reminiscent of (p. 344) the natural landscapes of human evolution, presumably tackle only one
aspect of this problem. What can be the role of other natural elements in shaping the overall response to a natural
landscape? An interesting analysis in this regard has been recently proposed by Nordh, Hartig, Hagerhall, and Fry
(2009), who considered the effect of grass, ground vegetation, flowering plants, shrubs, and water in natural
landscapes on psychological restoration. Further research in this direction is undoubtedly needed.
Second, human responses to seasonal changes of natural landscapes have not been empirically studied yet.
Within an evolutionary perspective, one may hypothesize a better response to natural landscapes when
environmental conditions recall to the mind positive elements for survival (e.g., the presence of a flourishing nature
in spring and summer vs. the absence of foliage in fall and winter). What can be the role of sociocultural processes
in this respect? And what can be the interplay between cross-cultural regularities and cultural peculiarities?
Third, exposure to green areas and natural landscapes can also affect health (de Vries, Verheij, Groenewegen, &
Spreeuwenberg, 2003; Maas, Verheij, Groenewegen, de Vries, & Spreeuwenberg, 2006; Maller, Townsend, Pryor,
Brown, & Leger, 2006; Mitchell & Popham, 2008). Among the psychological mechanism implied, the literature has
identified the role of perceived social safety (Maas et al., 2009), social contact (Maas, Van Dillen, Verheij, &
Groenewegen, 2009) and physical activity (Bedimo-Rung, Mowen, & Cohen, 2005; Cohen et al., 2007). What can
be the role of different activities in natural environments in promoting health and well-being? In an exploratory
study, Scopelliti et al. (2012) provided preliminary results in this regard, showing that the more the activities
promote personal involvement in the natural environment, the better are the outcomes in terms of individual wellbeing. Future research should be addressed to confirm these findings.
A more comprehensive understanding of theseand presumably also otherissues would be highly relevant also
for practical implications, as the design and management of natural landscapes could be better oriented toward the
Page 12 of 19
Natural Landscapes
promotion of peoples health and well-being.
References
Appleton, J. (1975). The experience of landscape. London: Wiley.
Arriaza, M., Caas-Ortega, J. F., Caas-Madueo, J. A., & Ruiz-Aviles, P. (2004). Assessing the visual quality of rural
landscapes. Landscape and Urban Planning, 69(1), 115125.
Balling, J. D., & Falk, J. H. (1982). Development of visual preferences for natural landscapes. Environment and
Behavior, 14(1), 528.
Bechtel, R. B., Corral-Verdugo, V., Asai, M., & Gonzlez, A. (2006). A cross-cultural study of environmental belief
structures in USA, Japan, Mexico, and Peru. International Journal of Psychology, 41(2), 145151.
Bechtel, R. B., Corral-Verdugo, V., & Pinheiro, J. Q. (1999). Environmental belief systems: United States, Brazil, and
Mexico. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology, 30(1), 122128.
Bedimo-Rung, A. L., Mowen, A. J., & Cohen, D. A. (2005). The significance of parks to physical activity and public
health. American Journal of Preventive Medicine, 28(2S2), 159168.
Berlyne, D. E. (1971). Aesthetic and psychology. New York: Meredith.
Berto, R. (2005). Exposure to restorative environments helps restore attentional capacity. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 25(3), 249259.
Bonaiuto, M., Aiello, A., Perugini, M., Bonnes, M., & Ercolani, A. P. (1999). Multidimensional perception of residential
environmental quality and neighbourhood attachment in the urban environment. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 19(4), 331352.
Bonaiuto, M., Carrus, G., Martorella, H., & Bonnes, M. (2002). Local identity processes and environmental attitudes
in land use changes: The case of natural protected areas. Journal of Economic Psychology, 23(5), 631653.
Bonnes, M., Aiello, A., & Bonaiuto, M. (1999). Les espaces verts de la ville dans les pratiques et les reprsentations
des habitants. Villes en Parallle, 28/29, 176192.
Bonnes, M., Passafaro, P., & Carrus, G. (2011). The ambivalence of attitudes toward urban green areas: Between
pro-environmental worldviews and daily residential experience. Environment and Behavior, 43(2), 207232.
Bonnes, M., Uzzell, D., Carrus, G., & Kelay, T. (2007). Inhabitants versus experts assessment of environmental
quality for urban sustainability. Journal of Social Issues, 63(1), 5978.
Brewer, M. B., & Schneider, S. K. (1990). Social identity and social dilemmas: A double-edged sword. In D. Abrams
& M. A. Hogg (Eds.), Social identity theory: Constructive and critical advances (pp. 169184). Hemel Hempstead,
UK: Harvester Wheatsheaf.
Bronfenbrenner, H. (1979). The ecology of human development. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Burgess, J., Harrison, C. M., & Limb, M. (1988). People, parks, and the urban green: A study of popular meanings
and values for open spaces in the city. Urban Studies, 25(6), 455473.
Carrus, G., Bonaiuto, M., & Bonnes, M. (2005). Environmental concern, regional identity, and support for protected
areas in Italy. Environment and Behavior, 37(2), 237257.
Carrus, G., Passafaro, P., & Bonnes, M. (2004). Ambientalismo, etnocentrismo ed autoritarismo: Una scala di
atteggiamento verso il verde urbano [Environmentalism, ethnocentrism, and authoritarianism: An attitude toward
urban green scale]. Bollettino di Psicologia Applicata, 242(1), 312.
Cohen, D. A., McKenzie, T. L., Sehgal, A., Williamson, S., Golinelli, D., & Lurie, N. (2007). Contribution of public
Page 13 of 19
Natural Landscapes
parks to physical activity. American Journal of Public Health, 97(3), 509514.
Corral-Verdugo, V., & Armendriz, L. I. (2000). The new environmental paradigm in a Mexican community.
Journal of Environmental Education, 31(1), 2531.
(p. 345) Corral-Verdugo, V., Carrus, G., Bonnes, M., Moser, G., & Sinha, J. (2008). Environmental beliefs and
endorsement of sustainable development principles in water conservation: Towards a new human
interdependence paradigm scale. Environment and Behavior, 40(5), 703725.
Daniel, T. C. (1990). Measuring the quality of the natural environment: A psychophysical approach. American
Psychologist, 45(5), 633637.
Daniel, T. C., & Boster, R. S. (1976). Measuring landscape aesthetics: The scenic beauty estimation method.
(USDA Forest Service Research Paper RM-167). Fort Collins, CO: Rocky Mountain and Range Experiment Station.
Daniel, T. C., & Vining, J. (1983). Methodological issues in the assessment of landscape quality. In I. Altman & J. F.
Wohlwill (Eds.), Behavior and the natural environment (pp. 3984). New York: Plenum.
Dawes, R. M., & Messick, D. M. (2000). Social dilemmas. International Journal of Psychology, 35(2), 111116.
de Vries, S., Verheij, R. A., Groenewegen, P. P., & Spreeuwenberg, P. (2003). Natural environmentshealthy
environments? An exploratory analysis of the relationship between greenspace and health. Environment and
Planning A, 35(10), 17171731.
Dunlap, R. E., & Van Liere, K. D. (1978). The new environmental paradigm: A proposed measuring instrument
and preliminary results. Journal of Environmental Education, 9(1), 1019.
Dunlap, R. E., Van Liere, K. D., Merting, A. G., & Jones, R. E. (2000). New trends in measuring environmental
attitudes: Measuring endorsement of the new ecological paradigm: A revised NEP scale. Journal of Social Issues,
56(3), 425442.
Falk, J. H., & Balling, J. D. (2010). Evolutionary influence on human landscape preference. Environment and
Behavior, 42(4), 479493.
Feimer, N. R., Smardon, R. C., & Craik, K. H. (1981). Evaluating the effectiveness of observer-based visual resource
and impact assessment methods. Landscape Research, 6(1), 1216.
Hagerhall, C. (2000). Clustering predictors of landscape preference in the traditional Swedish cultural landscape:
Prospect-refuge, mystery, age, and management. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 20(1), 8390.
Hammitt, W. E., & Ruddell, E. J. (1987). Prospect refuge theory: A psychological orientation for edge effect in
recreation environments. Journal of Leisure Research, 19(4), 249260.
Hardin, G. J. (1968). The tragedy of the commons. Science, 162, 12431248.
Hartig, T. (2004). Restorative environments. In C. Spielberger (Ed.), Encyclopedia of applied psychology (Vol. 3,
pp. 273278). San Diego, CA: Academic Press.
Hartig, T., Evans, G. W., Jamner, L. D., Davis, D. S., & Grling, T. (2003). Tracking restoration in natural and urban
field settings. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 23(2), 109123.
Hartig, T., Mang, M., Evans, G. W. (1991). Restorative effects of natural environment experiences. Environment
and Behavior, 23(1), 326.
Heerwagen, J. H., & Orians, G. H. (1993). Human, habitats, and aesthetics. In S. R. Kellert & E. O. Wilson (Eds.), The
biophilia hypothesis (pp. 138172). Washington, DC: Island Press.
Henwood, K., & Pidgeon, N. (2001). Talk about woods and trees: Threat of urbanization, stability, and biodiversity.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 21(2), 125147.
Herzog, T. R. (1984). A cognitive analysis of preference for field-and-forest environments. Landscape Research,
Page 14 of 19
Natural Landscapes
9(1), 1016.
Herzog, T. R. (1985). A cognitive analysis of preference for waterscapes. Journal of Environmental Psychology,
5(3), 225241.
Herzog, T. R. (1987). A cognitive analysis of preference for natural environments: Mountains, canyons, and
deserts. Landscape Research, 6(1), 140152.
Herzog, T. R., & Bosley, P. J. (1992). Tranquillity and preference as affective qualities of natural environments.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 12(2), 115127.
Herzog, T. R., & Bryce, A. G. (2007). Mystery and preference in within-forest settings. Environment and Behavior,
39(6), 779796.
Herzog, T. R., Herbert, E. J., Kaplan, R., & Crooks, C. L. (2000). Cultural and developmental comparisons of
landscape perceptions and preferences. Environment and Behavior, 32(3), 323346.
Herzog, T. R., & Kirk, K. M. (2005). Pathway curvature and border visibility as predictors of preference and danger
in forest settings. Environment and Behavior, 37(5), 620639.
Herzog, T. R., & Kropscott, L. S. (2004). Legibility, mystery, and visual access as predictors of preference and
perceived danger in forest settings without pathways. Environment and Behavior, 36(5), 659677.
Herzog, T. R., & Kutzli, G. E. (2002). Preference and perceived danger in field/forest settings. Environment and
Behavior, 34(6), 819835.
Herzog, T. R., & Leverich, O. L. (2003). Searching for legibility. Environment and Behavior, 35(4), 459477.
Herzog, T. R., & Miller, E. J. (1998). The role of mystery in perceived danger and environmental preference.
Environment and Behavior, 30(4), 429449.
Herzog, T. R., & Smith, G. A. (1988). Danger, mystery, and environmental preference. Environment and Behavior,
20(3), 320344.
Inglehart, R. (1997). Modernization and postmodernization: Cultural economic and political change in 43
societies. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
James, W. (1892). Psychology: The briefer course. New York: Holt.
Kaplan, R. (1985). The analysis of perception via preference: A strategy for studying how the environment is
experienced. Landscape Planning, 12(2), 161176.
Kaplan, R., & Herbert. E. J. (1987). Cultural and sub-cultural comparisons in preferences for natural settings.
Landscape and Urban Planning, 14, 281293.
Kaplan, R., & Kaplan, S. (1989). The experience of nature: A psychological perspective. New York: Cambridge
University Press.
Kaplan, R., Kaplan, S., & Brown, T. (1989). Environmental preference: A comparison of four domains of predictors.
Environment and Behavior, 21(5), 509530.
Kaplan, R., Kaplan, S., & Wendt, J. S. (1972). Rated preference and complexity for natural and urban visual
material. Perception and Psychophysics, 12(4), 354356.
Kaplan, S. (1987). Aesthetics, affect, and cognition: Environmental preference from an evolutionary perspective.
Environment and Behavior, 19(1), 332.
Kaplan, S. (1992). Environmental preference in a knowledge-seeking, knowledge-using organism. In J. Barkow, L.
Cosmides, & J. Tooby (Eds.), The adapted mind: Evolutionary psychology and the generation of culture (pp. 581
600). Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press.
Page 15 of 19
Natural Landscapes
(p. 346) Kaplan, S. (1995). The restorative benefit of nature: Toward an integrative framework. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 15(3), 169182.
Katz, E. (1997). Nature as subject: Human obligation and natural community. London: Rowman & Littlefield
Publishers.
Kellert, S. R., & Wilson, E. O. (1993). The biophilia hypothesis. Washington, DC: Island Press.
Korpela, K., Kytta, M., & Hartig, T. (2002). Restorative experiences, self-regulation, and childrens place
preferences. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 22(4), 387398.
Lafortezza, R., Carrus, G., Sanesi, G., & Davies, C. (2009). Benefits and well-being perceived by people visiting
green spaces in periods of heat stress. Urban Forestry & Urban Greening, 8(2), 97108.
Laumann, K., Grling, T., & Stormark, K. M. (2003). Selective attention and heart rate responses to natural and
urban environments. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 23(2), 125134.
Lyons, E. (1983). Demographic correlates of landscape preference. Environment and Behavior, 15(4), 487511.
Maas, J., Spreeuwenberg, P., Van Winsum-Westra, M., Verheij, R. A., de Vries, S., & Groenewegen, P. P. (2009). Is
green space in the living environment associated with peoples feelings of social safety? Environment and
Planning A, 41(7), 17631777.
Maas, J., van Dillen, S. M. E., Verheij, R. A., & Groenewegen, P. P. (2009). Social contact as a possible mechanism
behind the relation between green space and health. Health and Place, 15(2), 586595.
Maas, J., Verheij, R. A., Groenewegen, P. P., de Vries, S., & Spreeuwenberg, P. (2006). Green space, urbanity, and
health: How strong is the relation? Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 60(7), 587592.
Maller, C., Townsend, M., Pryor, A., Brown, P., & St. Leger, L. (2006). Healthy nature healthy people: Contact with
nature as an upstream health promotion intervention for populations. Health Promotion International, 21(1), 4554.
McFarlane, B. L., & Boxall, P. C. (2000). Factors influencing forest values and attitudes of two stake holder groups:
The case of the Foothills Model Forest, Alberta, Canada. Society and Natural Resources, 13(7), 649661.
Michael, S. N., & Hull, R. B. (1994). Effects of vegetation on crime in urban parks. Blacksburg: Virginia Polytechnic
Institute and State University, College of Forestry and Wildlife Resources, Department of Forestry.
Mitchell, R., & Popham, F. (2008). Effect of exposure to natural environment on health inequalities: An observational
population study. The Lancet, 372(9650), 16551660.
Nasar, J. L., & Fisher, B. S. (1993). Hot spots of fear and crime: A multi-method investigation. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 13(2), 187206.
Nasar, J. L., Julian, D., Buchman, S., Humphreys, D., and Mrohaly, M. (1983). The emotional quality of scenes and
observation points: A look at prospect and refuge. Landscape Planning, 10(4), 355361.
Nordh, H., Hartig, T., Hagerhall, G. M., & Fry, G. (2009). Components of small urban parks that predict the possibility
for restoration. Urban Forestry & Urban Greening, 8(4), 225235.
Olson, M., Jr. (1965). The logic of collective action. New York: Schocken.
Orians, G. H. (1986). An ecological and evolutionary approach to landscape aesthetics. In E. C. Penning-Rowsell &
D. Lowenthal (Eds.), Landscape meanings and values (pp. 322). London: Allen and Unwin.
Orians, G. H., & Heerwagen, J. H. (1992). Evolved responses to landscapes. In J. H. Barkow, L. Cosmides, & J.
Tooby (Eds.), The adapted mind: Evolutionary psychology and the generation of culture (pp. 555579). New York:
Oxford University Press.
Purcell, A. T. (1992). Abstract and specific physical attributes and the experience of landscape. Journal of
Environmental Management, 34(3), 159177.
Page 16 of 19
Natural Landscapes
Purcell, A. T., Lamb, R. J., Mainardi Peron, E., & Falchero, S. (1994). Preference or preference for landscape. Journal
of Environmental Psychology, 14(3), 195209.
Schroeder, H. W. (1987). Dimensions of variation in urban park preference: A psychophysical analysis. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 7(2), 123141.
Schwartz, S. H. (1994). Are there universal aspects in the structure and contents of human values? Journal of
Social Issues, 50(1), 1946.
Scopelliti, M., Carrus, G., Cini, F., Mastandrea, S., Ferrini, F.,Semenzato, P. (2012). Biodiversity, perceived
restorativeness, and benefits of nature: A study on the psychological processes and outcomes of on-site
experiences in urban and peri-urban green areas in Italy. In S. Kabisch, A. Kunath, P. Schweizer-Ries, & A.
Steinfuhrer (Eds.), Vulnerability, risks, and complexity. Impacts of global change on human habitatsAdvances in
people-environment studies (Vol. 3, pp. 255269) (Vol. 3). Gttingen, Germany: Hogrefe.
Scopelliti, M., & Giuliani, M. V. (2004). Choosing restorative environments across the lifespan: A matter of place
experience. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 24(4), 423437.
Sommer, R. (1997). Further cross-national studies of tree form preferences. Ecological Psychology, 9(2), 153160.
Sommer, R., & Summit, J. (1995). An exploratory study of preferred tree form. Environment and Behavior, 27(4),
540557.
Stamps, A. E. (2004). Mystery, complexity, legibility, and coherence: A meta-analysis. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 24(1), 116.
Stamps, A. E. (2007). Mystery of environmental mystery: Effects of light, occlusion, and depth of view. Environment
and Behavior, 39(2), 165197.
Stern, P., & Dietz, T. (1994). The value basis of environmental concern. Journal of Social Issues, 50(3), 6584.
Stern, P. C., Dietz, T., & Guagnano, G. A. (1998). A brief inventory of values. Educational and Psychological
Measurement, 58(6), 9841001.
Stoll-Kleemann, S. (2001). Barriers to nature conservation in Germany: A model explaining opposition to protected
areas. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 21(4), 369385.
Strumse, E. (1994). Perceptual dimensions in the visual preferences for agrarian landscapes in western Norway.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 14(3), 281292.
Strumse, E. (1996). Demographic differences in the visual preference for agrarian landscapes in western Norway.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 16(1), 1731.
Summit, J., & Sommer, J. (1999). Further studies of preferred tree shapes. Environment and Behavior, 31(4), 550
576.
Talbot, J., & Kaplan, R. (1984). Needs and fears: The response to trees and nature in the inner city. Journal of
Arboriculture, 10(8), 222228.
Tennessen, C. M., & Cimprich, B. (1995). Views to nature: Effects on attention. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 15(1), 7785.
(p. 347) Thompson, S. C. G., & Barton, M. A. (1994). Ecocentric and anthropocentric attitudes towards the
environment. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 14(2), 149158.
Ulrich, R. S. (1977). Visual landscape preference: A model and application. Man-Environment Systems, 7(5), 279
293.
Ulrich, R. S. (1979). Visual landscapes and psychological well-being. Landscape Research, 4(1), 1723.
Ulrich, R. S. (1981). Natural versus urban scenes: Some psychophysiological effects. Environment and Behavior,
Page 17 of 19
Natural Landscapes
13(5), 523556.
Ulrich, R. S. (1983). Aesthetic and affective response to natural environment. In I. Altman & J. F. Wohwill (Eds.),
Behavior and the natural environment (Vol. 6, pp. 85125). New York: Plenum.
Ulrich, R. S. (1986). Human responses to vegetation and landscapes. Landscape and Urban Planning, 13(1), 29
44.
Ulrich, R. S. (1993). Biophilia, biophobia, and natural landscapes. In S. R. Kellert & E. O. Wilson (Eds.), The biophilia
hypothesis (pp. 73137). Washington, DC: Island Press.
Ulrich, R. S., Simons, R. F., Losito, B. D., Fiorito, E., Miles, M. A., & Zelson, M. (1991). Stress recovery during
exposure to natural and urban environments. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 11(2), 201230.
van den Berg, A. E., & ter Heijne, M. (2005). Fear versus fascination: An exploration of emotional responses to
natural threats. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 25(3), 261272.
van den Berg, A. E., Vlek, C. A. J., & Coeterier, J. F. (1998). Group differences in the aesthetic evaluation of nature
development plans: A multilevel approach. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 18(2), 141157.
Van Vugt, M., Biel, A., Snyder, M., & Tyler, T. (2000). Perspective on cooperation in modern society: Helping the
self, the community, and society. In M. Van Vugt, M. Snyder, T. R. Tyler, & A. Biel (Eds.), Cooperation in modern
society: Promoting the welfare of communities, states, and organizations (pp. 324). London: Routledge.
Vygotsky, L. S. (1978). Mind in society: The development of higher psychological processes. Cambridge, MA:
Harvard University Press.
WCED (World Commission on Environment and Development). (1987). Our common future. Oxford, UK: Oxford
University Press.
Weigel, R. H., & Weigel, J. (1978). Environmental concern: The development of a measure. Environment and
Behavior, 10(1), 315.
West, P. C., & Brechin, S. R. (1991). Resident peoples and national parks: Social dilemmas and strategies in
international conservation. Tucson: University of Arizona Press.
Wilson, E. O. (1984). Biophilia. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
Wohlwill, J. F. (1976). Environmental aesthetics: The environment as a source of affect. In I. Altman & J. F. Wohlwill
(Eds.), Human behavior and environment (Vol. 1, pp. 3786). New York: Plenum.
Woodcock, D. M. (1984). A functionalist approach to landscape preference. Landscape Research, 9(2), 2427.
Yang, B., & Brown, T. J. (1992). A cross-cultural comparison of preference for landscape styles and landscape
elements. Environment and Behavior, 24(4), 471507.
Zube, E. H., Pitt, D. G., & Evans, G. W. (1983). A lifespan developmental study of landscape assessment. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 3(2), 115128.
Zube, E. H., Sell, J. L., & Taylor, J. G. (1982). Landscape perception: Research, application, and theory. Landscape
Planning, 9(1), 133.
Massimiliano Scopelliti
Massimiliano Scopelliti LUMSA University Centre for Inter-University Research in Environmental Psychology Rome, Italy
Giuseppe Carrus
Giuseppe Carrus Department of Cultural and Educational Studies, University of Roma Tre Centre for Inter-University Research in
Environmental Psychology Rome, Italy
Mirilia Bonnes
Page 18 of 19
Natural Landscapes
Mirilia Bonnes Department of Social and Developmental Psychology Sapienza University of Rome Centre for Inter-University
Research in Environmental Psychology Rome, Italy
Page 19 of 19
Introduction
Shortly after a severe storm damaged his ship, and with illness and depression striking him and his crew, the
French Antarctic explorer Jean-Baptiste Charcot wrote, I re-read my diary on Le Fran ais, written during a period
quite as agonizing as this. I light on a passage where I assert that, if ever I return to France, I will embark no more
on such adventures. A few weeks after my return, I was thinking of nothing but the organization of a new
Expedition, and three years later, I started off again! (Charcot, 1911; quoted in Rosove, 2000, p. 171).
There have been hundreds of books, articles, films, and TV shows describing the horrors experienced by survivors
of genocide, only implicitly recognizing their eventual ability to recover from psychological as well as physical
trauma. A widely read book symbolizes a growing counterpoint to this negativity: Against All Odds: Holocaust
Survivors and the Successful Lives They Made in America (Helmreich, 1992). It presents interviews and histories
of people who built healthy, happy, and productive lives after surviving the 20th centurysand in some ways
historysworst episode of persecution and genocide.
Aron Lee Ralston, an American mountain climber, had his arm trapped under a boulder in May 2003. To free
himself, he eventually broke the bone in his forearm and amputated the lower arm with a small knife. He then had to
rappel down a 65-foot cliff and hike eight miles to his truck. He continues to engage in mountain climbing and other
demanding outdoor sports. The public fascination with his courage and toughness has led to a book, a full-length
movie project, and a new career as a public speaker (see Ralston, 2004).
In August 2010, 33 miners were trapped 2,300 feet underground in a Chilean cave-in. When their survival was
discovered, about two weeks later, their families, politicians, and international media (p. 349) converged on the
site. Chilean and international equipment and experts bored a hole, first to send supplies down to the refuge and,
69 days later, to hoist the miners, one at a time, to the surface. A deluge of newspaper and television stories
Page 1 of 27
Page 2 of 27
Page 3 of 27
Page 4 of 27
Page 5 of 27
Human-Made
Recreational
Mountaineering
Solo circumnavigation
Occupational
Antarctic stations
Space stations
Traumatic
Natural disasters
Ethnopolitical violence
Page 6 of 27
Psychological Effects
The challenge of the high mountains is both physical and psychological. A reasonable level of physical fitness is
necessary for the arduous climb and descent with packs of equipment, spare clothing, oxygen bottles, and so on
(although fitness is no protection against AMS). In recent years, there has been an explosion of less fit and less
experienced climbers attempting the highest (and highest profile) mountains, such as Everest, many essentially
being carried by their sherpa porters (Kodas, 2008).
Psychologically, two contradictory tendencies affect success or failure on the mountain. On the one hand, the
motivation and positive experiences of the expedition urge the climber on. Achievement motivation is satisfied by
the pride of reaching the summit, perhaps a personal best or being the first to pioneer on a new mountain or a
new route. Meeting the challenge of foreseeing, planning for, and successfully overcoming difficulty and danger is
an opportunity to exercise coping self-efficacy. Thrill-seeking is fulfilled by the beauty of the mountain scenery and
the fascination of carrying out the project in an exotic culture, a novel place, and with new people. Those who
relish positive social interaction have the pleasure of sharing the experience with a group of cooperative,
competent teammates and with other, friendly teams (although, cf. Kodas, 2008). The process of doing all this, and
doing it successfully, provides enjoyment of both process and goal (telic and paratelic, Apter, 2007) and may
generate both flow and peak experiences (Csikszentmihalyi, 1990). Afterward, the satisfaction of having done it
can provide a life-long positive memory (Wickens, Keller, & Shaw, 2012). Maurice Herzog (1953), who was so
frostbitten on Annapurna that he had to be carried off the mountain and lost several fingers and toes (as did other
Page 7 of 27
Psychological Effects
Members of the early expeditions suffered from storms and ice that immobilized and sometimes crushed their ships,
and from scurvy, food poisoning, starvation, frostbite, and accidents that disabled them physically as well as
affecting them psychologically. Many died. But even under the most harrowing circumstances, explorers described
the beauty and grandeur of the environment, periods of stimulation and relaxation, increased sensitivity, and
feelings of personal growth and self-insightas did their Arctic counterparts (Mocellin & Suedfeld, 1991).
Most of the early expeditionary crews included at least one person who exhibited serious psychological
maladjustment during the trip. Explorers were among the first to record the symptoms of what would later be
labeled as winter-over syndrome: spells of anxiety, occasional symptoms of depression, reduced motivation, sleep
disturbance, and decline in hygiene (almost inescapable, given the circumstances). Many also mentioned
Page 8 of 27
Page 9 of 27
Page 10 of 27
Page 11 of 27
Page 12 of 27
Page 13 of 27
Page 14 of 27
Psychological Effects
Most of the relevant literature focuses on symptoms of traumatic and post-traumatic stress. It is roughly divided
between large-scale statistical analyses of the frequency, nature, and severity of symptoms often subdivided by
demographic and geographic categories, and clinical studies of what kind of psychological support and counseling
should be provided to the survivors. There has been insufficient psychological research on individual survivors to
identify the extent to which reactions to disaster are uniform across different types of disasters (e.g., floods,
earthquakes) and levels of exposure to the trauma (e.g., number of casualties, area of impact, personal
experiences of injury or loss). Briere and Elliott (2000) reported that exposure severityespecially physical injury,
fear of death, and loss of (p. 362) propertywere better predictors of trauma symptoms in the aftermath of
disaster than the type of disaster.
Other relevant variables are the level, type, timing, and duration of support that individuals and groups receive
from each other, from charitable organizations, and from governments. Whether the individual is relocated after the
disaster or is able to return home has an effect, with relocation apparently leading to more depression and general
symptoms of stress (e.g., Najarian et al., 2001).
Frequently noted symptoms cover the whole range of stress and trauma syndromes, including PTSD, but the
prevalence of specific symptoms varies widely. The so-called disaster syndrome has four phases: behavior during
the disaster, optimism as recovery begins, disappointment and resentment about losses and the recovery process,
and reconstruction of normal life. The syndrome is related to PTSD, generalized anxiety, and clinical depression
(Shore et al., 1986).
In general, it seems that the level of serious psychiatric impairment is not very high, although there are
contradictory reports. The same is true of the course of recovery. One reviewer concluded that diagnosable
pathology is the exception rather than the rule, and rarely affects more than 25% of the survivors by just one
year after the event (Green, 1995, p. 309). Another study found that most symptoms decrease in less than two
years after the disaster (Solomon & Green, 1992). Ohta et al. (2003) reported that during 44 post-evacuation
months after a volcanic eruption in Japan, the course of recovery was uneven across symptoms. Although selfrated anxiety, tension, insomnia, lack of energy, and social dysfunction decreased significantly, depression was
only beginning to lessen at 44 months and interpersonal dysfunction had not abated.
Most studies in this literature are post hoc, because pre-disaster measures are rarely available on the individual
level. One exception is an interview study of psychological symptoms among residents of Iowa. In 1993, a year
after the data collection, the area suffered a massive flood. The residents were re-interviewed one to three months
after the flood had abated (Ginexi et al., 2000). Only a small rise in depressive symptoms was found.
Another major topic is the analysis of risk factors (McFarlane, 1989). Green (1995) and many other authors
identified exposure to danger as one of the most reliable predictors of post-disaster symptoms. The closer the
person was to the event geographically or psychologically (e.g., proximity to the focus of the disaster, being
injured, losing close relatives or friends, witnessing deaths or injuries, losing economic resources such as a house,
etc.), the higher the risk of trauma symptoms.
Demographic factors also play a role, although that role is not always clear and may interact with risk and type of
disaster. There are mixed results for gender, but in Greens as in other studies, there is some evidence that women
and girls are more likely to experience symptoms after surviving a natural disaster.
People across the entire life span are at risk of psychological symptoms to some extent, but their reactions differ by
age and interactive variables. For example, childrens PTSD is affected by the social support they receive during
and after the event. In one study of children in an early-morning 6.9 magnitude earthquake, 30% reported that they
Page 15 of 27
Page 16 of 27
Page 17 of 27
Page 18 of 27
Psychological Effects
This history, and photos and films of the liberation of the camps, shocked the world. The psychiatrists and clinical
psychologists who produced the earliest wave of behavioral science writing about the victims of the Shoah were
influenced by their own traumatized reactions when the facts of the genocide became public, exacerbated and
made more vivid by the patients accounts. Soon, a set of general symptoms affecting survivors was labeled as
concentration camp syndrome (or KZ syndrome, from the German abbreviation of Konzentrationslager),
survivor syndrome, or persecution syndrome. The symptoms were the precursors of what we now know as
PTSD: episodes of generalized anxiety and anger, depression, psychosomatic and sexual dysfunction, anhedonia,
insomnia and nightmares, memory flashbacks, hypervigilance, intrusive ideation, and emotional withdrawal, plus
survivor guilt, deriving from having survived when so many others had died (Krystal, 1968).
Most psychologists and psychiatrists were convinced that the trauma of the Holocaust experience, particularly that
of concentration camp survivors (there was much less attention to hidden adults and children), had irretrievably
damaged them. They would never be able to enjoy life, to pursue successful careers, or establish warm
interpersonal bonds (see, e.g., Garland, 1993). Professionals who examined the few children who survived the
camps were appalled: a homogeneous mass, with no hair, (p. 366) faces swollen from hunger and uniform
clothes; a group with an apathetic, unconcerned and indifferent attitude, with no laughter or even a smile, and a
marked aggressiveness towards the personnel; mistrust and suspicion (Hemmendinger, 1981). The prognosis was
dismal.
This focus on pathogenesis carried over into later writings about the second generation, the survivors children,
who were often described as suffering from intergenerational transmission of trauma (e.g., Williams-Keeler et al.,
1998). Survivor parents supposedly transmitted their own traumas to their children, making them averse to doing
anything to disappoint or oppose their parents. The younger generation learned to feel the parents grief at the
murder of family membersespecially of members of a dead first family, who were sometimes presented as
idealized role models. Members of the second generation felt anxious and guilty when they failed to live up to the
parents expectations, or when they complained about anything, because all their problems were trivial compared
to what their parents had gone through. Many were haunted by the horrors they imagined their parents to have
experienced, which were sometimes worse than the actual histories of parents who (like many survivors) shied
away from talking about the Holocaust. Some observers (e.g., Garland, 1993) have asserted that the trauma is
transmitted even to the grandchildren; one wonders how many generations it might take to disappear.
The dire predictions certainly came true for some survivors, across all age ranges. But although the literature was
for decades dominated by descriptions of the personal and familial damage done to, and unwittingly by, the
survivors, some discordant observations began to emerge, an early warning to the doomsayers being sounded by
Weinfeld, Sigal, and Eaton (1981). A major cause was the incorporation of community-based samples in the
research, instead of limiting the subject population to clinical patients and counselees. With more representative
groups, therapists and interviewers realized that the long-term effects of the Holocaust were variable, and that in
general survivors and their children managed to overcome their trauma (Sigal & Weinfeld, 1989). Even among
survivors who presented with symptoms, these were often mild and stimulated by recent acts of anti-Semitism
(Eaton, Sigal, & Weinfeld, 1982). In an influential book, Helmreich (1992) reported interviews with several hundred
survivors living in the United States. He found that they were very resilient, had succeeded in building happy and
successful personal and professional lives, and had passed their positive traits down to their children.
Similar findings emerged from a series of studies that began in 1994, using quantitative content analyses of
interviews and self-report instruments with Holocaust survivors participating in oral history projects and survivor
gatherings (summarized in Suedfeld, 2002). The results showed a range of mostly positive outcomes. The
interviews were scored for a variety of factors; the scores were then compared by age, gender, and Holocaust
experiences as well as across the parts of the narrative dealing with the period before, during, or after the
Holocaust.
The coping strategies described in the survivors reminiscences showed predominantly active attempts at solving
or escaping from problems rather than emotion-oriented amelioration. Integrative complexity scores (a measure of
flexible, open-minded decision-making) were high, with a decline when the Nazi program first affected thema
Page 19 of 27
Page 20 of 27
References
Antonovsky, A. (1987). Unraveling the mystery of health: How people manage stress and stay well. San
Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
Apter, M. (2007). Danger: Our quest for excitement. Oxford, UK: Oneworld Press.
Azar, B. (2011). Positive psychology advances, with growing pains. Monitor on Psychology, 42(4), 3236.
Ball, J. R., & Evans, C. H. (Eds.). (2001). Safe passage: Astronaut care for exploration missions. Washington, DC:
National Academies Press.
Banister, J. (1984). Chinas changing population. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
Baum, A., Fleming, R., & Davidson, L. M. (1983). Natural disaster and technological catastrophe. Environment and
Behavior, 15, 333354.
Bechtel, R. B., & Berning, A. (1991). The third-quarter phenomenon: Do people experience discomfort after stress
has passed? In A. A. Harrison, Y. A. Clearwater, & C. P. McKay (Eds.), From Antarctica to outer space: Life in
isolation and confinement (pp. 261265). New York: Springer-Verlag.
Benight, C. C., Swift, E., Sanger, J., Smith, A., & Zeppelin, D. (1999). Coping self-efficacy as a mediator of distress
following a natural disaster. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 29, 24432464.
Blair, S. (1986). Untitled presentation. Tenth Psychology in the Department of Defense Symposium, Colorado
Springs. Cited in Stuster, 1996, p. 260.
Brandt, A. (2004). South Pole: A narrative history of the exploration of Antarctica. Washington, DC: National
Geographic Society.
Brcic, J. (2011, April). Leaders in space: Mission commanders and crew at the International Space Station.
Presented at 18th IAA Humans in Space Symposium, Houston, TX.
Page 21 of 27
Page 22 of 27
Page 23 of 27
Page 24 of 27
Page 25 of 27
Page 26 of 27
Page 27 of 27
Noise
Introduction
Environmental noise is increasingly pervasive. This is largely noise from transport, industrial construction, and
leisure activities. Although the sound level of overflights from individual aircraft has diminished in recent years,
there are more aircraft and the same might be said for cars. Thus, although the sound intensity of many common
noise sources has diminished, there is still disturbance from noise that may occupy more of the 24-hour period.
One of the most telling changes has been that although in the United Kingdom there was a diminution of daytime
ambient noise levels during the 1990s, the nighttime quiet period has decreased, with noise levels rising earlier in
the day and continuing later into the night (Ling, Skinner, Grimwood, & Raw, 2002). Traditionally quiet rural areas
are also more under threat from noise and population growth, and industrialization in many areas of the world is
accompanied by higher noise levels.
Thus it is an important public health question to ask: Does noise exposure affect health and especially mental
health? This chapter will deal with the effects of environmental noise on various indices of mental health, sleep
disturbance, cognitive performance, and more general emotional responses such as annoyance.
Definition of Noise
Noise is generally defined as unwanted sound. It is often thought of as a nuisance interfering in activities and
disrupting communication. It can be classed as a type of environmental stressor. The concept of noise involves
both a significant psychological component (unwanted) as well as a physical component (perceived by the ear
and then transmitted by the auditory nerve to the temporal lobe in the brain) (Bell, Greene, Fisher, & Baum, 1996). It
is possible for sound to be harmful for health without subjective perception of the sound (for instance, (p. 376)
sound exposure during sleep), although usually most of its adverse effects are mediated through the perceived
unpleasant quality of the sound. Recurrent or persistent exposure to ambient noise is likely to be more damaging
Page 1 of 19
Noise
for health than single noise events because of the development of chronic stress responses that may represent a
failure of adaptation (Bell et al., 1996).
Physically, sound is perceived by rapidly changing air pressure at the eardrum. The description of sound is
typically characterized by intensity or sound pressure level (measured in decibels, or dB), frequency (pitch),
periodicity (continuous or intermittent), and duration (acute or chronic). Other characteristics, which are not
related to its physical components, are also important in determining the interpretation of perceived sound. These
include the predictability of noise; episodes (random or fixed interval); attitudes to the noise source; the meaning
of the noise; and the degree of personal control over it. There has been less research examining the effects of
sound frequency on health than examining the effects of sound intensity on health. Intermittent, higher-frequency,
short-duration, intense sounds create greater disturbance and probably have greater effects on health than do
continuous, low-frequency, long-duration, and low-intensity sounds (Baker & Holding, 1993). It is difficult to isolate
the effect of particular sound frequencies on health because most noises are a mixture of frequencies, but special
attention has turned to the effects of persistent low-frequency noise that may elicit feelings of annoyance and
helplessness (Berglund, Hassmen, & Job, 1996).
Page 2 of 19
Noise
have been found to be more frequent in noisy rather than quiet industries. However, the findings from these
industrial studies are difficult to interpret because noisy industries very often have other physical and psychosocial
problems that may be additional causes for illness and absenteeism. An important issue in studies of noise and
health is that of selection into and out of noisy environments. Jobs in noisy areas may be less desirable and more
difficult to fill, and hence may be selectively filled with individuals who have higher rates of health problems that
have prevented them from attaining better jobs and who thus may report more symptoms irrespective of noise in
the workplace. On the other hand, selection of personnel for jobs in highnoise exposure areas that are also
dangerous, demanding toughness and resilience, may preferentially select for people who are not bothered by
noise. An example of this is the few symptoms that were found among men working on aircraft carriers in highnoise conditions (Davis, 1958). Additionally, some studies have shown that the increase in symptoms with noise
level was found only for those who were highly annoyed (Melamed, Luz, & Green, 1992).
In very many of these symptom studies, it is possible that there is a bias toward overreporting symptoms when the
question asks explicitly does noise cause the specific symptom. Barker & Tarnopolsky (1978) have shown that
questions that contain an explicit link between a noise and symptoms result in higher rates of symptom reporting
than when the same question is asked without it being linked to noise exposure. Community surveys using the
former type of question found high percentages of people reported headaches, restless nights, and being
tense and edgy in high-noise areas (Kokokusha, 1973; Finke et al., 1974; hrstrm, 1989). However, a study
around three Swiss airports (Grandjean et al., 1973) that did not mention that it was related to aircraft noise did not
find any association between the level of exposure to this noise and symptoms.
In the West London survey, tinnitus, burns, cuts, and minor accidents, ear problems, and skin troubles
were all more common in areas of high noise exposure (Tarnopolsky, Watkins, & Hand, 1980). However, apart from
ear problems and tinnitus, 20 out of 23 chronic symptoms were more common in low-noise environments. It
may be that lownoise exposure environments in this study, in deprived inner-city areas in London, were also
areas with poorer health, irrespective of noise exposure. This raises the difficult issue of adjusting for other
environmental exposures and social disadvantage that may be related to noise where they may to act as a
confounding factor in studies of noise and health. At the same time, it seems plausible that people with existing
illness might not move into highly noise-exposed areas or be less tolerant of noise and try to move out of such
areas. However, the evidence on mobility related to noise exposure is thin and it may be that these objections are
more theoretical than actual.
Page 3 of 19
Noise
positive relation between level of exposure to aircraft noise and admission rates. Hospital admission is likely to be
determined by many other factors more potent than noise. This is particularly the case now when acute psychiatric
hospital beds have been reduced in number and, at least in the United Kingdom, are almost confined to those with
severe psychosis in which noise is very unlikely to be a causal factor.
Page 4 of 19
Noise
and the prevalence of psychiatric morbidity either for GHQ scores or for estimated numbers of psychiatric cases
using various indices of noise exposure. However, as in the pilot study there was an association between noise
and psychiatric morbidity in two subgroups: those who finished full-time education at age 19 years + and
professionals. These two categories, which had a strong association with each other, were combined and then
showed a significant association between noise and psychiatric morbidity measured by the GHQ. Their overall
conclusion was that their results show so far that noise per se in the community at large, does not seem to be a
frequent, severe, pathogenic factor in causing mental illness but that it is associated with symptomatic response in
selected subgroups of the population (Tarnopolsky & Morton-Williams, 1980, p. 73). It seems possible that these
subgroups may represent people whose non-manual work or leisure activities involve complex cognitive tasks
such as reading and writing or involve extended concentration that might be interfered with by noise, but this is
speculation.
There have been criticisms of this cross-sectional study as being a study of noise survivors where members of
the population who are most susceptible to noise effects have either moved away or avoided living in the area.
In a further study the association between noise and psychiatric disorder was examined in a population unlikely to
have been selected by noise exposure. The Caerphilly Collaborative Heart Disease Study looked at the association
between road traffic noise exposure and psychological distress in people from the small town of Caerphilly, South
Wales (Stansfeld, Sharp, Gallacher, & Babisch 1993). In the cross-sectional results, the initial level of road traffic
noise based on traffic noise maps was not associated with minor psychological distress, again measured by the
GHQ with adjustment for socio-demographic factors (Stansfeld et al., 1993). In further longitudinal analyses, road
traffic noise was not associated with psychological distress after adjustment for socio-demographic factors and
baseline psychological distress, although there was a small nonlinear association of noise with increased anxiety
scores (Stansfeld et al., 1996). A more recent Sardinian study compared subjects living close to an airport with
control subjects living in other areas matched by sex, age, and employment status. This showed that exposed
subjects had a higher frequency of diagnosis for generalized anxiety disorder and anxiety disorder not
otherwise specified. This is one of the first studies finding an association between aircraft noise exposure and
psychiatric diagnoses as opposed to psychiatric symptoms (Hardoy et al., 2005). The disadvantage of this study is
that it did not measure noise levels but used distance from the airport as a proxy measure of noise exposure, but it
is interesting and needs replication.
Causal associations are supported by evidence of dose-response or exposure-effect associations, where
increases in the exposure are matched with increases in the outcome. For example, the degree of mental health
disturbance might increase with the intensity and duration of noise exposure. Exposure to higher levels of military
aircraft noise around the busy Kadena military airport in Japan was related in an exposure-effect association to
depressiveness and nervousness measured by questionnaire, using the Todai Health Index, based on the
Cornell Medical Index (Ito et al., 1994; Hiramatsu et al., 1997). Clear exposure effect relationships were not found
between scale scores and noise exposure, as expressed in five-unit steps. However, a significant difference was
evident between the highest noise-exposure group and lower exposure groups, indicating a threshold effect rather
than a linear relationship. A further Japanese study of 5,963 inhabitants around two air bases in Okinawa also found
that those exposed to noise levels of 70 dB(A) Ldn or above had higher rates of mental instability and
depressiveness (Hiramatsu et al., 2000). A similar survey, on 6,486 respondents, found exposure-effect
associations between aircraft noise exposure, nervousness, and mental health (Miyakita et al., 1998). These are
important studies because of the opportunity to examine the effect of high noise exposure levels and the
probability that out-migration of vulnerable persons from noisy areas biasing the sample was small. However, these
studies have been criticized because noise measurements were assessed about 18 years before the health
measurements and thus may not accurately represent noise exposure at the time the health outcomes were
measured.
Secondary analysis of a large British road traffic noise study found that the noise level in dB(A) exceeded for 10%
of the time (a measure of peak (p. 380) noise level) was weakly associated with a five-item mental health
symptoms scale adjusting for age, gender, income, and length of residence (Halpern, 1995). The results would be
more convincing of mental health effects if the scale items were all related to mental health but they also included
items on asthma, undue irritability, and sleeplessness. Noise is only one aspect of traffic stress and it may be
difficult to separate the effects of noise from other hazardous aspects of road traffic. Traffic stress, comprising
traffic, auto maintenance, and accidents, was cross-sectionally associated with depressive symptoms in a
Page 5 of 19
Noise
Chinese-American sample in Los Angeles, adjusting for individual social class and neighborhood poverty (Gee &
Takeuchi, 2004). The effects of traffic noise on depression were worse in areas with more vehicle use.
The Japanese military aircraft studies mentioned above suggest more mental health effects at high levels of noise
exposure. This was similar to the results of a community study of 366 Japanese women that found that road traffic
noise has effects on depression, fatigue, and irritability only above a threshold of 70 dB(A) (Yoshida et al., 1997).
However, it is difficult to be confident of the results of these analyses, as they were not adjusted for age or social
deprivation. A road traffic noise study in Belgrade also showed mental health effects at high noise levels: 253
residents exposed to road traffic noise levels of > 65dB(A) experienced significantly more fatigue, depression,
nervousness, and headaches, compared with residents exposed to < 55dB(A) (Belojevic & Jakovljevic, 1997).
There was good matching between high- and low-noise exposure areas for age, gender, employment, and
subjective noise sensitivity in this study. Overall, environmental noise seems to be linked to the report of
psychological symptoms, rather than to clinical psychiatric disorder. However, there may be a link to psychiatric
disorder at much higher noise levels and there is a need for further studies using standardized interview measures
of psychiatric disorder.
Page 6 of 19
Noise
from around Munich, after the inauguration of the new airport, the newly noise-exposed communities demonstrated
a significant decline in self-reported quality of life, measured on the Kindl scale, after being exposed to the
increased aircraft noise for 18 months, compared with a control sample (Evans, Bullinger, & Hygge, 1998).
It is possible that the effects of noise exposure on mental health outcomes are moderated by other factors. For
example, in a more recent study, child self-reported mental health on a standard scale and teacher ratings of
classroom adjustment in response to motorway, road, and rail noise were studied in a large sample of 8- to 11year-old Austrian primary-school children. Noise exposure was significantly associated with classroom adjustment
scores but, intriguingly, child self-reported mental ill health was impaired in noisy settings only for children who
were postulated to be biologically vulnerable because of low birth weight and preterm birth (Lercher, Evans, Meis,
& Kofler, 2002). In a similar vein, it could be that noise exposure creates additional problems for children already
experiencing mental health difficulties. For example, Nurmi and von Wright (1983) found that noise during learning
impaired the subsequent recall performance of children with high neuroticism scores and with a high score on
state-anxiety.
Overall the evidence that environmental noise affects childrens mental health is weak and inconsistent, although
the evidence is stronger for milder conditions such as impairment of well-being. The studies presented suggest that
noise does not lead to psychiatric disorder in children but it may affect their sense of well-being.
Page 7 of 19
Noise
activation of these biological responses could have long-term effects on health, although some scientists argue
that these physiological changes in response to noise are within the normal range of such responses to
environmental triggers and simply indicate the usual physiological responses to external stimuli. Second, sleep
disturbance can impact well-being, causing low mood, annoyance, irritation, fatigue, and impaired task
performance (HCN, 2004; hrstrm, 1982). Third, noise exposure at night predicts insomnia (Kageyama et al.,
1997), which in turn may be a precipitant of psychiatric disorder (Ohayon & Roth, 2003), including depression
(Riemann, Berger, & Voderholzer, 2001; Roberts, Roberts, & Chen, 2002).
Generally, the degree of sleep disturbance experienced is proportional to the amount of noise experienced, in
terms of an increased rate of changes in sleep stages and in the number of awakenings. The probability of
awakening increases with the number of noise stimuli in the night up to a threshold beyond which further exposure
does not increase the likelihood of waking. The maximum sound level of individual noises at night may be more
important for awakening than the energy-averaged sound level over the night, though they are both quite highly
correlated. It has been suggested that continuous noise exposure is likely to interrupt REM sleep, while intermittent
noise is likely to interfere with slow wave sleep (Passchier-Vermeer et al., 2002). Studies on noise abatement show
that by reducing the indoor noise level, the amount of both REM and slow-wave sleep can be increased (Vallet,
Gagneux, & Clairet, 1983).
Evidence for an effect of noise exposure on sleep disturbance is generally stronger from laboratory studies than
from field studies. However, comparison between the findings of laboratory and field studies can be limited, as
laboratory studies tend to involve individuals who are not chronically exposed to noise, whereas individuals who
are chronically exposed to noise may exhibit habituation. Habituation to environmental noise occurs with an
increased number of sound exposures, both per night and across nights. A noteworthy recent laboratory study
tried to simulate the effect of aircraft noise exposure on sleep for 128 subjects over a 13-night period (Basner &
Samel, 2005). Prior to the experiment, the subjects spent a noise-free adaptation night in the laboratory, as sleep is
initially affected by the laboratory setting. The experiment showed a prominent first-night exposure effect of noise
on sleep disturbance, which wore off by the second night, which was interpreted as indicating habituation to noise
exposure. On the subsequent nights no significant change in sleep structure was observed if the number of noise
events and maximum sound pressure level did not exceed 4*80dB, 8*70dB, 16*60dB, 32*55dB, and 64*45dB.
While this is methodologically one of the strongest studies of aircraft noise effects on sleep to date, this study is still
limited by having examined short-term exposure to aircraft noise, and conclusions cannot be drawn from this study
about the long-term effects of exposure to aircraft noise on sleep structure (Basner & Samel, 2005).
A majority of community studies of noise exposure, examining individuals in their homes exposed to their usual
noise exposures at night, have found evidence for a direct effect of noise on sleep disturbance. However, recent
reviews, assessing the strength of the evidence, came to different conclusions. A synthesis of field studies
concluded that there was satisfactory evidence that nighttime noise exposure was causing direct biological
responses, at approximately 40dB SEL (sound exposure level), as well as affecting well-being and quality of sleep
(HCN, 2004). This report found that evidence was weaker for an effect of nighttime noise on social interaction, task
performance, specific disease symptoms, or fatal accidents at work. Similarly, a meta-analysis of 24 field studies,
including data from almost 23,000 individuals exposed to nighttime noise levels ranging from 45 to 65dBA, found
that aircraft noise was associated with greater self-reported sleep disturbance than road traffic, and road traffic
noise with greater disturbance than railway noise (Miedema & Vos, 2007).
In contrast, a recent review focusing on aircraft noise exposure concluded that the evidence for noise-induced
sleep disturbance differs considerably (Michaud et al., 2007). This review of five studies found little evidence for an
effect of outdoor noise on sleep disturbance, while it did find that indoor noise was associated more closely with
(p. 383) sleep outcomes. However, there was evidence from several of the studies reviewed that a greater
number of awakenings occur that are either spontaneous or attributable to other noise in the home, than are
attributable to aircraft noise (Michaud et al., 2007).
The equivocal conclusions of these reviews may be because they are comparing studies that examine a range of
outcomes, from more objective measures of sleep disturbance, such as polysomnography (PGS) and wristactimetry, which measures sleep disturbance based on body movements, to subjective measures, such as selfreported sleep disturbance. Evidence of noise effects may be stronger for subjectively assessed sleep disturbance
than for objectively assessed sleep disturbance. For example, an earlier UK study around Gatwick and Heathrow
Page 8 of 19
Noise
airports found that the relative proportion of total sleep disturbance attributable to noise, but not the level of total
sleep disturbance, was increased in noisy areas. This was suggestive of a symptom reporting or attribution effect,
rather than a real noise effect. The measurement of sleep disturbance is challenging for this research field, as no
one physical or psychological measure is accurate or reliable. The equivocal conclusion may also reflect different
exposure assessments: some studies use external noise exposure, while others measure noise exposure in the
bedroom (Miedema & Vos, 2007).
In conclusion, there is evidence that night noise can disturb sleep and affect well-being. However, the field still
lacks longitudinal evidence, which would enable the causal association between nighttime noise exposure and the
long-term health implications of biological responses and impaired well-being to be examined.
Page 9 of 19
Noise
to other aspects of the environment (Broadbent, 1972; Weinstein, 1978; Thomas & Jones, 1982; Stansfeld, Clark,
Jenkins, & Tarnopolsky, 1985). This raises the question as to whether noise-sensitive individuals are simply those
who complain more about their environment. There is an association between noise sensitivity and neuroticism
(Thomas & Jones, 1982; hrstrm, Bjorkman, & Rylander, 1988; Jelinkova, 1998; Belojevic & Jakovljevic, 1997;
Smith, 2003), although it has not been found in all studies (Broadbent, 1972). Weinstein (1980) hypothesized that
noise sensitivity is part of a criticaluncritical dimension, showing the same association as noise sensitivity to
measures of noise, privacy, air pollution, and neighborhood reactions. In his view the most critical subjects are not
uniformly negative about their environment, but more discriminating than the uncritical group, who comment
uniformly on their environment.
Noise sensitivity has also been related to current psychiatric disorder (Bennett, 1945; Tarnopolsky & MortonWilliams, 1980; Iwata, 1984). Stansfeld et al. (1985) found that high noise sensitivity was associated with phobic
disorders and neurotic depression, measured by the Present State Examination (Wing, Cooper, & Sartorius, 1974).
Similar to this association with phobic symptoms, noise sensitivity has also been linked to a coping style based on
avoidance, which may have adverse health consequences (Pulles, Biesiot, & Stewart, 1990) and a tendency to
report health complaints rather than take a more active coping approach to noise (Lercher & Kofler, 1996). Noise
sensitivity may be partly secondary to psychiatric disorder: depressed patients followed up over four months
became less noise-sensitive as they recovered (Stansfeld, 1992). Objective psychophysiological laboratory
investigation of reactions to noise in a subsample of depressed patients found that noise-sensitive people tended
to have higher levels of tonic physiological arousal, more phobic and defense/startle responses, and slower
habituation to noise (Stansfeld, 1992). Thus, noise-sensitive people attend more to noises, discriminate more
between noises, find noises more threatening and out of their control, and adapt to noises more slowly than people
who are less sensitive. Noise sensitivity may be an indicator of vulnerability to minor psychiatric disorder, although
not necessarily psychiatric disorder caused by noise (Stansfeld, 1992).
In the analysis of a subset of noise-sensitive women, compared with less noise-sensitive women in the West
London survey, aircraft noise exposure did not predict psychiatric disorder in the sensitive women (Stansfeld et al.,
1985). In the Caerphilly study, noise sensitivity predicted psychological distress at follow-up after adjusting for
baseline psychological distress, but did not interact with the noise level, suggesting that noise sensitivity does not
specifically moderate the effect of noise on psychological distress (Stansfeld et al., 1993). However, in further
analyses, a statistically significant association between road traffic noise exposure and psychological distress,
measured by the General Health Questionnaire, was found in noise-sensitive men but not in men of low noise
sensitivity (Stansfeld, Matsui, Gallacher, & Babisch, 2002). In the original analyses, after adjusting for trait anxiety
at baseline, the effect of noise sensitivity was no longer statistically significant, suggesting that much of the
association between noise sensitivity and psychological distress may be accounted for by the confounding
association with trait anxiety. Constitutionally anxious people may be both more aware of threatening aspects of
their environment and more prone to future psychiatric disorder.
In a UK community study, associations were examined between noise exposure, noise sensitivity, subjective
symptoms, and sleep disturbance in a random sample of 543 adults (Smith, Hayward, & Rich, 2000). Perceived
noise exposure was related to subjective health, but this association became nonsignificant after adjustment for
negative affectivity. In a similar way, adjustment for negative affectivity eliminated the association between noise
sensitivity and subjective health. Negative affectivity is strongly associated with neuroticism and it is likely they are
both tapping the same underlying trait. Thus, it was suggested that noise sensitivity was merely a proxy measure of
negative affectivity or neuroticism.
Page 10 of 19
Noise
conceptualized as fitting the stress-diathesis model, in which noise exposure increases arousal, and chronic
exposure leads to chronic physiological change and subsequent health effects (McEwen, 1998). It is not clear,
though, whether this model is a complete explanation for mental health effects.
Individuals perception of their degree of control over noise may also influence whether it impairs memory (Willner
& Neiva, 1986), while perception of lack of control over environmental conditions may be an important mediator of
health effects. Further, active coping with noise may be sufficient to mitigate any ill effects (Van Kamp, 1990).
Perception of control is also related to better health in other domains, such as the workplace. A more sophisticated
model of the effects of noise on health (Biesiot, Pulles, & Stewart, 1989; Passchier-Vermeer, 1993) incorporates the
interaction between the person and their environment. In this model, the person readjusts his or her behavior in
noisy conditions to reduce exposure. An important addition is the inclusion of both the appraisal of noise (in terms
of danger, loss of quality, meaning of the noise, challenges for environmental control, etc.) and coping (the ability
to alter behavior to deal with the stressor). This model emphasizes that dealing with noise is an active, not a
passive process. It is possible that adaptation to noise is achieved only with a cost to health. For example, Evans et
al. (2000) found that maintaining task performance in noisy offices was associated with additional physiological
effort and hormonal response.
Neuroimaging studies may also provide information on the mechanisms of the effects of noise on mental health
because they are increasingly revealing the localization of brain responses to environmental stimuli. This is
complicated in studies of sound because MRI scanners are traditionally very noisy and this may bias the response
to specific stimuli. However, there is considerable scope for a better understanding of the mechanisms of noise
effects on psychiatric disorder through understanding which brain areas are involved in perceptions of adverse
sound. Studies of acute noise exposure (100110dB, wide band frequency for 30 minutes) in rhesus monkeys
showed impaired performance of a spatial memory task dependent on the prefrontal cortex (Arnsten & GoldmanRakic, 1998). No deficits were found in noise-exposed monkeys for a visual pattern discrimination task, which might
be expected if this effect was due to decreased motivation or motor performance. The authors concluded that
acute mild noise stress produces deficits resembling prefrontal cortex lesions, and that this implied a reversion in
stressful situations to more instinctual behavior regulated by subcortical rather than higher structures. This may
have survival value, but may be maladaptive in human society where higher functions are necessary for
behavioral regulation. Treatment with clonidine and naloxone, which decrease stress-induced dopamine release,
reduced these noise-induced effects on the prefrontal cortex in the rhesus monkeys, suggesting that noise stress
elicits excessive dopamine release, which may be responsible for these deficits.
Another mechanism through which noise may influence mental health is through its effects on social behavior. This
has not been extensively researched but there are interesting experimental case studies indicating that people are
less helpful to people exhibiting disabled behavior in the street if they are also simultaneously exposed to noise
(Page, 1977). Noise may affect social performance: (1) as a stressor causing unwanted aversive changes in
affective state; (2) by masking speech and impairing communication; and (3) by distracting attention from relevant
cues in the immediate social environment (Jones, Chapman, & Auburn, 1981). It may be that people whose
performance strategies are already limited for other reasons (e.g., through high anxiety) and who are faced with
multiple tasks may be more vulnerable to the masking and distracting effects of noise.
Conclusions
The evidence for the effects of environmental noise on health is strongest for annoyance, sleep, hypertension, and
performance with effects on cognitive performance in children (Stansfeld, Haines, & Brown, 2000; Babisch, 2006).
The effects of noise are strongest for those outcomes that can be classified under well-being or quality of life
rather than illness. What they lack in severity is made up for in numbers of people affected, as these responses are
very widespread. Current evidence does seem to suggest that environmental noise exposure, especially at higher
levels, is related to mental health symptoms and possibly raised anxiety and consumption of sedative medication,
but there is little evidence that it has more serious effects although this may partly be due to a lack of sufficiently
methodologically robust studies to test this possibility. Existing studies may be confounded either by prior selection
of subjects out of (or into) noisy areas as a result of noise exposure, or by confounding between noise exposure,
socioeconomic deprivation, and psychiatric disorder. It is also possible that people underestimate or minimize the
effects of noise on health through optimism bias (Hatfield & Job, 1998) and that this may be particularly protective
Page 11 of 19
Noise
for mental health.
It is also difficult to identify the pathways through which noise exposure affects mental health. Part of the problem is
that the interaction between people, noise, and ill health is a complex one. Humans are not usually passive
recipients of noise exposure and can develop coping strategies to reduce its impact. Perception of control over the
noise source may reduce the perceived threat of noise and the belief that it can be harmful. It may also be that
noise is more harmful to health in situations where several stressors interact.
Future Directions
Undoubtedly, there is a need for further research, including better measurement of noise exposure and health
outcomes. Ideally, there should be longitudinal studies investigating the association between environmental noise
and psychiatric disorder. Careful assessment of socioeconomic differences between areas of high and low
exposure is also needed. In many studies, it is not clear whether noise effects on health are a component part of
the effects of social disadvantage on health or whether the effects of noise on health are confounded by social
disadvantage, in which case noise exposure is merely an indicator of social disadvantage, and is not on the causal
pathway.
Field studies suggest that the effects of multiple stressors have greater combined effects than simply summing
individual stressors (Rutter, 1979). It might be the case that noise will show more effects on health in individuals
already exposed to other stressors. These might include other physical stressors (e.g., air pollution, poor housing
conditions), psychosocial stressors (e.g., crowding, social isolation, fear of crime, lack of control over the
environment), and adverse material conditions (low income, unemployment). There may be either additive or
multiplicative interactions with noise exposure. So far, few studies have attempted to examine the effects of
multiple environmental stressors (Cohen, Evans, Stokols, & Kranz, 1976). This needs to be combined with
measurement of the appraisal of noise sources and evaluation of coping mechanisms (Lercher & Kofler, 1996). It
would also be interesting to combine mental health measures and hormonal measures to assess psychological and
physiological responses to stress concurrently. Ultimately, evidence of the mental health effects of noise exposure
will be more persuasive if accompanied by measurable physiological changes.
Bibliography
References
Abey-Wickrama, I., ABrook, M. F., Gattoni, F. E., & Herridge, C. F. (1969). Mental-hospital admissions and aircraft
noise. The Lancet, 2, 12751277.
Anderson, C. M. B. (1971). The measurement of attitude to noise and noises. (Rep. No. Ac 52). Teddington, UK:
National Physical Laboratory Acoustics Report.
Arnsten, A. F., & Goldman-Rakic, P. S. (1998). Noise stress impairs prefrontal cortical cognitive function in
monkeys: Evidence for a hyperdopaminergic mechanism. Archives of General Psychiatry, 55, 362368.
Babisch, W. (2006). Transportation noise and cardiovascular risk: Updated review and synthesis of epidemiological
studies indicate that the evidence has increased. Noise & Health, 8, 129.
Babisch, W., Beule, B., Schust, M., Kersten, N., & Ising, H. (2005). Traffic noise and risk of myocardial infarction.
Epidemiology, 16, 3340.
Babisch, W., Fromme, H., Beyer, A., & Ising, H. (2001). Increased catecholamine levels in urine in subjects exposed
to road traffic noise: The role of stress hormones in noise research. Environment International, 26, 475481.
Baker, M. A., & Holding, D. H. (1993). The effects of noise and speech on cognitive task performance. Journal of
General Psychology, 120, 339355.
Barker, S. M., & Tarnopolsky, A. (1978). Assessing bias in surveys of symptoms attributed to noise. Journal of
Page 12 of 19
Noise
Sound and Vibration, 59, 349354.
Basner, M., & Samel, A. (2005). Effects of nocturnal aircraft noise on sleep structure. Somnologie, 9, 8495.
Bell, P. A., Fusco, M. E. (1989). Heat and violence in the Dallas field data: Linearity, curvilinearity, and
heteroscedasticity. Journal of Applied Psychology, 19, 14791482.
Bell, P. A., Greene, T. C., Fisher, J. D., & Baum, A. (1996). Environmental psychology (4th ed.). Fort Worth, TX:
Harcourt Brace & Co.
Belojevic, G., & Jakovljevic, B. (1997). Subjective reactions to traffic noise with regard to some personality traits.
Environment International, 23, 221226.
(p. 387) Bennett, E. (1945). Some tests for the discrimination of neurotic from normal subjects. British Journal of
Medical Psychology, 20, 271277.
Berglund, B., Hassmen, P., & Job, R. F. (1996). Sources and effects of low-frequency noise. Journal of the
Acoustical Society of America, 99, 29853002.
Biesiot, W., Pulles, M. P. J., & Stewart, R. E. (1989). Environmental noise and health. (Rep. No. GA-DR-0303).
Leidschendam, Netherlands: VROM.
Black, D. A., Black, J. A., Issarayangyun, T., & Samuels, S. E. (2007). Aircraft noise exposure and residents stress
and hypertension: A public health perspective for airport environmental management. Journal of Air Transport
Management, 13, 264276.
Broadbent, D. E. (1953). Noise, paced performance, and vigilance tasks. British Journal of Psychology, 44, 295
303.
Broadbent, D. E. (1972). Individual differences in annoyance by noise. Sound, 6, 5661.
Cameron, P., Zaks, J., & Robertson, D. (1972). Sound pollution, noise pollution, and health: Community parameters.
Journal of Applied Psychology, 56, 6774.
Chowns, R. H. (1970). Mental-hospital admissions and aircraft noise. The Lancet, 1, 467.
Clark, C., Martin, R., van Kempen, E., Alfred, T., Head, J., Davies, H. W., et al. (2006). Exposure-effect relations
between aircraft and road traffic noise exposure at school and reading comprehension: The RANCH project.
American Journal of Epidemiology, 163, 2737.
Cohen, A. (1976). The influence of a company hearing conservation program on extra-auditory problems in
workmen. Journal of Public Safety, 8, 146161.
Cohen, S., Evans, G. W., Stokols, D., & Kranz, D. (1976). Behavior, health, and environmental stress. New York:
Plenum.
Cohen, S., & Spacapan, S. (1978). The after effects of stress: An attentional interpretation. Environmental
Psychology and Non-verbal Behaviour, 3, 4357.
Cohen, S., & Weinstein, N. (1981). Non-auditory effects of noise on behaviour and health. Journal of Social Issues,
37, 3670.
Corbett, B., & Stanczak, D. E. (1999). Neuropsychological performance of adults evidencing attention-deficit
hyperactivity disorder. Archives of Clinical Neuropsychology, 14, 373387.
Davis, H. (1958). Project Anehin. (Rep. No. 7). Pensacola, FL: USN School of Aviation Medicine.
Dratva, J., Zemp, E., Dietrich D.F., Bridevaux, P. O., Rochat, T., Schindler, C., et al. (2010). Impact of road traffic
noise annoyance on health-related quality of life: Results from a population-based study. Quality of Life Research,
19, 3746.
Page 13 of 19
Noise
Evans, G. W., Bullinger, M., & Hygge, S. (1998). Chronic noise exposure and psychological response: A
prospective study of children living under environmental stress. Psychological Science, 9, 7577.
Evans, G. W., Hygge, S., & Bullinger, M. (1995). Chronic noise and psychological stress. Psychological Science, 6,
333338.
Evans, G. W., & Johnson, D. (2000). Stress and open-office noise. Journal of Applied Psychology, 85, 779783.
Evans, G. W., & Tafalla, R. (1987). Measurement of environmental annoyance. In H. S. Koelaga (Ed.),
Developments in toxicology and environmental science (pp. 1125). Amsterdam, Netherlands: Elsevier.
Fields, J. M. (1984). The effect of numbers of noise events on peoples reactions to noise: An analysis of existing
survey data. Journal of Acoustic Society of America, 75, 447467.
Finke, H. O., Guski, R., Martin, R., Rohrmann, B., Schumer, R., & Schumer-Kohrs, A. (1974). Effects of aircraft noise
on man. Proceedings of the Symposium on Noise in Transportation, Section III, paper 1, Southampton, UK.
Floud, S., Vigna-Taglianti, F., Hansell, A., Blangiardo, M., Houthuijs, D., Breugelmans, O., et al. (2011). Medication
use in relation to noise from aircraft and road traffic in six European countries: Results of the HYENA study.
Occupational and Environmental Medicine 68(7), 518524.
Franssen, E. A., van Wiechen, C. M., Nagelkerke, N. J., & Lebret, E. (2004). Aircraft noise around a large
international airport and its impact on general health and medication use. Occupational and Environmental
Medicine, 61, 405413.
Frerichs, R. R., Beeman, B. L., & Coulson, A. H. (1980). Los Angeles Airport noise and mortalityFaulty analysis and
public policy. American Journal of Public Health, 3, 357362.
Gattoni, F., & Tarnopolsky, A. (1973). Aircraft noise and psychiatric morbidity. Psychological Medicine, 3, 516520.
Gee, G. C., & Takeuchi, D. T. (2004). Traffic stress, vehicular burden and well-being: a multilevel analysis. Social
Science and Medicine, 59, 405414.
Goldberg, D. P. (1972). The detection of psychiatric illness by questionnaire. London: Oxford University Press.
Goldberg, D. P., Cooper, B., Eastwood, M. R., Kedward, H. B., & Shepherd, M. (1970). A standardized psychiatric
interview for use in community surveys. British Journal of Preventive and Social Medicine, 24, 1823.
Goodman, R. (1997). The strengths and difficulties questionnaire: A research note. Journal of Child Psychology
and Psychiatry, 38, 581586.
Grandjean, E., Graf, P., Cauber, A., Meier, H., & Mller, R. (1973). A survey of aircraft noise in Switzerland. (Rep.
No. 500: 1973008). Washington, DC: US Environmental Protection Agency Publications.
Gray, L. C., Breier, J. I., Foorman, B. R., & Fletcher, J. M. (2002). Continuum of impulsiveness caused by auditory
masking. International Journal of Pediatric Otorhinolaryngology, 66, 265272.
Griffiths, I. D., & Langdon, F. J. (1968). Subjective response to road traffic noise. Journal of Sound and Vibration, 8,
1632.
Gunn, W. J. (1987). The importance of the measurement of annoyance in prediction of effects of aircraft noise on
the health and well-being of noise exposed communities. In H. S. Koelaga (Ed.), Developments in toxicology and
environmental science (pp. 237255). Amsterdam, Netherlands: Elsevier.
Haines, M. M., Stansfeld, S. A., Job, R. F., Berglund, B., & Head, J. (2001a). Chronic aircraft noise exposure, stress
responses, mental health, and cognitive performance in school children. Psychological Medicine, 31, 265277.
Haines, M. M., Stansfeld, S. A., Job, R. F., Berglund, B., & Head, J. (2001b). A follow-up study of the effects of
chronic aircraft noise exposure on child stress responses and cognition. International Journal of Epidemiology,
30(4), 839845.
Page 14 of 19
Noise
Hall, F. L., Taylor, S. M., & Birnie, S. E. (1985). Activity interference and noise annoyance. Journal of Sound and
Vibration, 103, 237252.
Halpern, D. (1995). Mental health and the built environment. London: Taylor and Francis.
Hardoy, M. C., Carta, M. G., Marci, A. R., Carbone, F., Cadeddu, M., Kovess, V., et al. (2005). Exposure to aircraft
noise and risk of psychiatric disorders: The Elmas surveyAircraft noise and psychiatric disorders. Social
Psychiatry and Psychiatric Epidemiology, 40, 2426.
(p. 388) Hatfield, J., & Job, R. F. S. (1998). Evidence of optimism bias regarding the health effects of exposure to
noise. In N. L. Carter & R. F. S Job (Eds.), Noise effects: Proceedings of the 7th International Congress on Noise as
a Public Health Problem (pp. 251254). Sydney, Australia: Noise Effects 98.
Health Council of the Netherlands. (2004). The influence of night-time noise on sleep and health. (Rep. No.
publication no. 2004/14E). The Hague: Health Council of the Netherlands.
Hiramatsu, K., Minoura, T., Matsui, T., Miyakita, T., Osada, Y., & Yamamoto, T. (2000). An analysis of the general
health questionnaire survey around airports in terms of annoyance reaction. In Proceedings Internoise 2000, Nice,
France, CD.
Hiramatsu, K., Yamamoto, T., Taira, K., Ito, A., & Nakasone, T. (1997). A survey on health effects due to aircraft
noise on residents living around Kadena airport in the Ryukyus. Journal of Sound and Vibration, 205, 451460.
Hygge, S., Evans, G. W., & Bullinger, M. (2002). A prospective study of some effects of aircraft noise on cognitive
performance in school children. Psychological Science, 13, 469474.
Ito, A., Hiramatsu, K., Taira, K., Nakasone, T., & Yamamoto, T. (1994). Health effects on the residents due to aircraft
noise around Kadena US Airbase in the Ryukyus. In Proceedings of Internoise 94 (pp. 247250). Yokohama, Japan.
Iwata, O. (1984). The relationship of noise sensitivity to health and personality. Japanese Psychological Research,
26, 7581.
Jansen, G. (1961). Adverse effects of noise on iron and steel workers. Stahl und Eisen, 81, 217220.
Jarup, L., Babisch, W., Houthuijs, D., Pershagen, G., Katsouyanni, K., Cadum, E., et al. (2008). Hypertension and
exposure to noise near airports: The HYENA study. Environmental Health Perspectives, 16, 329333.
Jelinkova, A. (1998). Coping with noise in noise sensitive subjects. In B. Berglund (Ed.), Noise as a public health
problem (Noise 88, Vol 3 ed., pp. 2730). Stockholm: Swedish Council for Building Research.
Jenkins, L., Tarnopolsky, A., & Hand, D. (1981). Psychiatric admissions and aircraft noise from London Airport:
Four-year, three-hospitals study. Psychological Medicine, 11, 765782.
Jenkins, L. M., Tarnopolsky, A., Hand, D. J., & Barker, S. M. (1979). Comparison of three studies of aircraft noise and
psychiatric hospital admissions conducted in the same area. Psychological Medicine, 9, 681693.
Job, R. F. S. (1988). Community response to noise: A review of factors influencing the relationship between noise
exposure and reaction. Journal of Acoustical Society of America, 83, 9911001.
Jones, D. M., Chapman, A. J., & Auburn, T. C. (1981). Noise in the environment: A social perspective. Journal of
Applied Psychology, 1, 4359.
Kageyama, T., Kabuto, M., Nitta, H., Kurokawa, Y., Taira, K., Suzuki, S., et al. (1997). A population study on risk
factors for insomnia among adult Japanese women: A possible effect of road traffic volume. Sleep, 20, 963971.
Klitzman, S., & Stellman, J. M. (1989). The impact of the physical environment on the psychological well-being of
office workers. Social Science and Medicine, 29, 733742.
Knipschild, P., & Oudshoorn, N. (1977). VII medical effects of aircraft noise: Drug survey. International Archives of
Occupational and Environmental Health, 40, 97100.
Page 15 of 19
Noise
Kokokusha, D. (1973). Report of investigation of living environment around Osaka International Airport. Aircraft
Nuisance Prevention Association.
Kryter, K. D. (1990). Aircraft noise and social factors in psychiatric hospital admission rates: A re-examination of
some data. Psychological Medicine, 20, 395411.
Lercher, P. (1996). Environmental noise and health: An integrated research perspective. Environment
International, 22, 117129.
Lercher, P., Evans, G. W., Meis, M., & Kofler, W. W. (2002). Ambient neighbourhood noise and childrens mental
health. Occupational and Environmental Medicine, 59, 380386.
Lercher, P., & Kofler, W. W. (1996). Behavioral and health responses associated with road traffic noise exposure
along alpine through-traffic routes. Science of the Total Environment, 189/190, 8589.
Ling, M., Skinner, C., Grimwood, C., & Raw, G. (2002). The 1999/2000 National Survey of Attitudes to
Environmental NoiseVolume 2: Trends in England and Wales. BRE Report 205216f.
Loeb, M. (1986). Noise and human efficiency. Chichester, UK: Wiley.
McEwen, B. S. (1998). Stress, adaptation, and disease. Allostasis and allostatic load. Annals of the New York
Academy of Sciences, 840, 3344.
Meecham, W. C., & Smith, H. G. (1977). Effects of jet aircraft noise on mental hospital admissions. British Journal of
Audiology, 11, 8185.
Melamed, S., Luz, J., & Green, M. S. (1992). Noise exposure, noise annoyance, and their relation to psychological
distress, accident, and sickness absence among blue-collar workersThe Cordis Study. Israel Journal of Medical
Sciences, 28, 629635.
Melamed, S., Najenson, T., Luz, J., Jucha, E., & Green, M. (1988). Noise annoyance, industrial noise exposure, and
psychological stress symptoms among male and female workers. In B. Berglund (Ed.), Noise 88 (pp. 315320).
Swedish Council for Building Research, Stockholm, Sweden.
Michaud, D. S., Fidell, S., Pearsons, K., Campbell, K. C., & Keith, S. E. (2007). Review of field studies of aircraft
noise-induced sleep disturbance. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America, 121, 3241.
Miedema, H. M., & Vos, H. (1998). Exposure-response relationships for transportation noise. Journal of Acoustic
Society of America, 104, 34323445.
Miedema, H. M. E., Passchier-Vermeer, W., & Vos, H. (2003). Elements for a position paper on night-time
transportation noise and sleep disturbance. Delft, Netherlands: TNO-INRO.
Miedema, H. M. E., & Vos, H. (2007). Associations between self-reported sleep disturbance and environmental
noise based on reanalyses of pooled data from 24 studies. Behavioral Sleep Medicine, 5(1), 120.
Miyakita, T., Matsui, T., Ito, A., Tokuyama, T., Hiramatsu, K., Osada, Y., et al. (1998). Population-based questionnaire
survey on health effects of aircraft noise on residents living around US airfields in the Ryukyus. Part 1: An analysis
of 12 scale scores. In Fourth Japanese-Swedish Noise Symposium on Medical Effects.
Muzet, A., & Eberhart, J. (1980). Habituation of heart rate and finger pulse responses to noise in sleep. In J. V.
Tobias, G. Jansen, & W. D. Ward (Eds.), Noise as a Public Health Problem. Rockville, MD: ASHA.
Nurmi, J. E., & von Wright, J. (1983). Interactive effects of noise, neuroticism, and state-anxiety in the learning and
recall of a textbook passage. Human Learning, 2, 119125.
(p. 389) Ohayon, M. M., & Roth, T. (2003). Place of chronic insomnia in the course of depressive and anxiety
disorders. Journal of Psychiatric Research, 37, 915.
hrstrm, E. (1982). On the effects of noise with special reference to subjective evaluation and regularity.
Page 16 of 19
Noise
Gteborg, Sweden: Department of Environmental Hygiene.
hrstrm, E. (1989). Sleep disturbance, psychosocial and medical symptomsA pilot survey among persons
exposed to high levels of road traffic noise. Journal of Sound and Vibration, 133, 117128.
hrstrm, E. (1993). Long-term effects in terms of psychosocial wellbeing, annoyance, and sleep disturbance in
areas exposed to high levels of road traffic noise. (Rep. No. A93/02E). The Hague: Health Council of the
Netherlands.
hrstrm, E., Bjorkman, M., & Rylander, R. (1988). Noise annoyance with regard to neurophysiological sensitivity,
subjective noise sensitivity, and personality variables. Psychological Medicine, 18, 605613.
Page, R. A. (1977) Noise and helping behavior. Environment and Behavior, 9, 311334.
Passchier-Vermeer, W. (1993). Noise and health. Leiden, Netherlands: TNO Institute of Preventive Health.
Passchier-Vermeer, W., Vos, H., Steenbekkers, J. H. M., van der Ploeg, F. D., & Groothmis-Oudshoorn, K. (2002).
Sleep disturbance and aircraft noise: Exposure-effect relationships. (Rep. No. 2002.027). Leiden, Netherlands:
TNO-PG.
Pillsbury, H. C., Grose, J. H., Coleman, W. L., Conners, C. K., & Hall, J. W. (1995). Binaural function in children with
attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder. Archives of OtolaryngologyHead and Neck Surgery, 121, 13451350.
Poustka, F., Eckermann, P., & Schmeck, K. (1992). Effect of aircraft noise and psychosocial stressors on mental
disturbances of children and adolescents: An epidemiological study in Westphalia. In H. Remschmidt & M. H.
Schmidt (Eds.), Developmental psychopathology Gttingen, Germany: Hogrefe & Huber.
Pulles, T., Biesiot, W., & Stewart, R. (1990). Adverse effects of environmental noise on health: An interdisciplinary
approach. Environment International, 16, 437445.
Reijneveld, S. A. (1994). The impact of the Amsterdam aircraft disaster on reported annoyance by aircraft noise
and on psychiatric disorders. International Journal of Epidemiology, 23, 333340.
Riccio, C. A., Cohen, M. J., Hynd, G. W., & Keith, R. W. (1996). Validity of the Auditory Continuous Performance Test
in differentiating central processing auditory disorders with and without ADHD. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 29,
561566.
Riemann, D., Berger, M., & Voderholzer, U. (2001). Sleep and depressionResults from psychobiological studies:
An overview. Biological Psychology, 57, 67103.
Roberts, R. E., Roberts, C. R., & Chen, I. G. (2002). Impact of insomnia on future functioning of adolescents. Journal
of Psychosomatic Research, 53, 561569.
Rutter, M. L. (1979). Primary prevention of psychopathology. In M. M. Kent & J. E. Rolf (Eds.), Primary prevention of
psychopathology (pp. 610625). Hanover, NH: University Press of New England.
Schreckenberg, D., Meis, M., Kahl, C., Peschel, C., & Eikmann, T. (2010). Aircraft noise and quality of life around
Frankfurt Airport. International Journal of Environmental Research and Public Health, 7, 33823405.
Schultz, T. J. (1978). Synthesis of social surveys on noise annoyance. Journal of Acoustic Society of America, 64,
377405.
Selander, J., Bluhm, G., Theorell, T., Pershagen, G., Babisch, W., Seiffert, I., et al. (2009). Exposure to aircraft noise
and saliva cortisol in six European countries. Environmental Health Perspectives, 117, 17131717.
Smith, A. (2003). The concept of noise sensitivity: Implications for noise control. Noise & Health, 5, 5759.
Smith, A., Hayward, S., & Rich, N. (2000, August 2731). Perceptions of aircraft noise exposure, noise sensitivity,
sleep disturbance and health: Results from the Bristol noise, sleep, and health study. In Internoise 2000.
Proceedings of the 29th International Congress on Noise Control Engineering (Vol. 2, pp. 14). Societe Francaise
Page 17 of 19
Noise
Dacoustique, Paris, France.
Smith, A. P., & Broadbent, D. E. (1981). Noise and levels of processing. Acta Psychologica, 47, 129.
Smith, A. P., & Broadbent, D. E. (1992). Non-auditory effects of noise at work: A review of the literature. (Rep. No.
30). London: HMSO.
Stansfeld, S. A. (1992). Noise, noise sensitivity, and psychiatric disorder: Epidemiological and psychophysiological
studies. In Psychological Medicine Monograph Supplement 22 Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
Stansfeld, S. A., Berglund, B., Clark, C., Lopez-Barrio, I., Fischer, P., Ohrstrom, E., et al. (2005). Aircraft and road
traffic noise and childrens cognition and health: A cross-national study. The Lancet, 365, 19421949.
Stansfeld, S. A., Clark, C. R., Jenkins, L. M., & Tarnopolsky, A. (1985). Sensitivity to noise in a community sample: I.
Measurement of psychiatric disorder and personality. Psychological Medicine, 15, 243254.
Stansfeld, S. A., Gallacher, J., Babisch, W., & Shipley, M. (1996). Road traffic noise and psychiatric disorder:
Prospective findings from the Caerphilly Study. British Medical Journal, 313, 266267.
Stansfeld, S. A., Haines, M. M., Berry, B., & Burr, M. (2009). Reduction of road traffic noise and mental health: An
intervention study. Noise & Health, 11, 169175.
Stansfeld, S. A., Haines, M., & Brown, B. (2000). Noise and health in the urban environment. Reviews on
Environmental Health, 15, 4382.
Stansfeld, S. A., Matsui, R., Gallacher, J. E. J., & Babisch, W. (2002). Longitudinal effects of noise, noise sensitivity
and psychosocial factors on mens psychological distress. Epidemiology, 13, S90.
Stansfeld, S. A., Sharp, D. S., Gallacher, J., & Babisch, W. (1993). Road traffic noise, noise sensitivity, and
psychological disorder. Psychological Medicine, 23, 977985.
Sucker, K., Both, R., Winneke, G. (2009). Review of adverse health effects of odours in field studies. Water Science
and Technology, 59, 12811289.
Tarnopolsky, A., Barker, S. M., Wiggins, R. D., & McLean, E. K. (1978). The effect of aircraft noise on the mental
health of a community sample: A pilot study. Psychological Medicine, 8, 219233.
Tarnopolsky, A., & Morton-Williams, J. (1980). Aircraft noise and prevalence of psychiatric disorders, research
report. London: Social and Community Planning Research.
Tarnopolsky, A., Watkins, G., & Hand, D. J. (1980). Aircraft noise and mental health: I. Prevalence of individual
symptoms. Psychological Medicine, 10, 683698.
Taylor, S. M. (1984). A path model of aircraft noise annoyance. Journal of Sound and Vibration, 96, 243260.
Thomas, J. R., & Jones, D. M. (1982). Individual differences in noise annoyance and the uncomfortable loudness
level. Journal of Sound and Vibration, 82(2), 289304.
(p. 390) Vallet, M., Gagneux, J., & Clairet, J. M. (1983). Heart rate reactivity to aircraft noise after a long-term
exposure. In G. Rossi (Ed.), Noise as a public health problem (pp. 965975). Milan, Italy: Centro Recherche e
Studio Amplifon.
Van Kamp, I. (1990). Coping with noise and its health consequences. Groningen: Styx and PP.
van Kempen, E. E., Kruize, H., Boshuizen, H. C., Ameling, C. B., Staatsen, B. A., & de Hollander, A. E. (2002). The
association between noise exposure and blood pressure and ischemic heart disease: A meta-analysis.
Environmental Health Perspectives, 110, 307317.
Ware, J. E., Jr., & Sherbourne, C. D. (1992). The MOS 36-item short-form health survey (SF-36). I. Conceptual
framework and item selection. Medical Care, 30, 473483.
Page 18 of 19
Noise
Watkins, G., Tarnopolsky, A., & Jenkins, L. M. (1981). Aircraft noise and mental health: II. Use of medicines and
health care services. Psychological Medicine, 11, 155168.
Weinstein, N. D. (1978). Individual differences in reactions to noise: A longitudinal study in a college dormitory.
Journal of Applied Psychology, 63, 458466.
Weinstein, N. D. (1980). Individual differences in critical tendencies and noise annoyance. Journal of Sound and
Vibration, 68, 241248.
Willner, P., & Neiva, J. (1986). Brief exposure to uncontrollable but not to controllable noise biases the retrieval of
information from memory. British Journal of Clinical Psychology, 25 (Part 2), 93100.
Wing, J. K., Cooper, J. E., & Sartorius, N. (1974). The measurement and classification of psychiatric symptoms
London: Cambridge University Press.
Yoshida, T., Osada, Y., Kawaguchi, T., Hoshiyama, Y., Yoshida, K., & Yamamoto, K. (1997). Effects of road traffic
noise on inhabitants of Tokyo. Journal of Sound and Vibration, 205, 517522.
Stephen A. Stansfeld
Stephen A. Stansfeld Centre for Psychiatry Wolfson Institute of Preventive Medicine Barts and the London School of Medicine and
Dentistry London, UK
Charlotte Clark
Charlotte Clark Centre for Psychiatry Wolfson Institute of Preventive Medicine Barts and the London School of Medicine and
Dentistry London, UK
Rosanna Crombie
Rosanna Crombie Centre for Psychiatry Wolfson Institute of Preventive Medicine Barts and the London School of Medicine and
Dentistry London, UK
Page 19 of 19
Introduction
According to widespread belief, disaster victims typically act irrationally by fleeing in panic when disasters threaten
(Drabek, 1999; Tierney, Lindell, & Perry, 2001). Following impact, they are thought to be incapable of protecting
themselves or others, so a few exceptional individuals must step forward to lead the masses of frightened and
passive victims to safety (Wenger, James, & Faupel, 1980). This rather bleak view of human nature is propagated
by the mass mediasometimes in movies, other times in (second- or third-hand) hearsay passed on by reporters,
and occasionally by disaster victims themselves (Fischer, 2008). These disaster myths are not just erroneous; they
can hamper the effectiveness of emergency planning by misdirecting the allocation of resources and the
dissemination of information (Tierney et al., 2001). For example, expectations of panic often become authorities
justification for giving the public incomplete information about an environmental threat or withholding all information.
Such attempts at information management are particularly troubling because people are more reluctant to comply
with recommended protective actions when they are provided with inadequate warning messages. To manage
emergencies effectively, public authorities, the news media, and the public need accurate information about how
people respond during disasters.
This chapter addresses that need by focusing on peoples behavioral responses to rapid onset environmental
threats. The focus on behavioral response means problem-focused coping (Lazarus & Folkman, 1984), rather than
psychological impacts (p. 392) (see Norris et al., 2002; Norris, Friedman, & Watson, 2002). The focus on rapid
onset (seconds to weeks) excludes phenomena such as drought, desertification, and global climate change that
evolve over years to centuries. The emphasis on environmental threats focuses on geophysical, meteorological,
Page 1 of 28
The next section addresses immediate disaster response, beginning with events having instantaneous onset
Page 2 of 28
Earthquakes
There is no technology available that provides forewarning of local earthquakes, so ambiguous environmental
cues such as rumbling noise or ground shaking are typically the only indications of the need for initiating protective
action. The sudden onset of ambiguous environmental cues is a central theme in Alexanders (1990) report of his
own experience in the November 23, 1980, Naples earthquake and oral histories of 18 students from a local
technical institute. Most of the students had no previous experience with earthquakes, so they relied on older
relatives and companions to interpret the shaking for them. Many of those who were indoors tried to escape as
soon as the shaking subsided. One student reported a stampede for the exits from a theater and Alexander himself
observed people engaged in apparently aimless running from place to place in a major piazza. Others left their
homes to search for friends and relatives and many sought safety in the homes of relatives outside the impact
area.
Arnold, Durkin, Eisner, and Whitaker (1982) reported a high level of adaptive response by occupants of an office
building during the 1979 Imperial Valley, California earthquake. Most peoples first reaction to the shaking was to
get under a desk (36%) or stand in a doorway (15%), but many others stayed where they were (37%) and a few
went to the main corridor (3%) or left the building immediately (2%). When the shaking stopped, 56% left the
building immediately and, although there was crowding at the stairwells, there was no stampede. Most respondents
attributed their decision to evacuate to their own assessment of the situation (50%), but others mentioned
recommendations by coworkers (26%) or floor monitors (25%), or observations of others leaving (16%).
Ohta and Ohashis (1985) report of data from six Japanese earthquakes categorized earthquake response into
three time periods: during the shaking, during the approximately 10 minutes immediately after the shaking stopped,
and the days to weeks after the earthquake. They plotted the percentage of respondents reporting different
psychological and behavioral reactions as a function of seismic intensity, concluding that psychological reactions
increased and behavioral performance decreased exponentially with shaking intensity. The three major activities in
all six earthquakes were escaping from danger, obtaining information about the situation, and resuming normal
activities. The researchers developed a behavioral typology similar in purpose to that of Canter, Breaux, and Sime
(1980) and used it to analyze housewives behavior during one earthquake. Most of the womens behavior was
significantly influenced by the activities in which they were engaged at the onset of the temblor, as well as their
environmental and social (p. 394) context. For example, those who were preparing dinner focused on turning off
the gas burners to prevent fires and those with small children went to protect them before taking further action.
Goltz, Russell, and Bourques (1992) study of the Whittier Narrows, California earthquake revealed that about 40%
of the people in buildings at the time took cover in a doorway, in a hall, or under furniture. However, 20% remained
where they were when the shaking started or left the building (9% of those at home and 20% of those at work).
Forty-six percent of those in cars pulled over and stopped but 43% continued driving. The researchers reported
that individual differences in response were associated with a number of variables; females and those who were
more fearful of the earthquake were more likely to take cover. Moreover, the presence of other adults inhibited
protective action whereas the presence of children enhanced it. Higher education, higher income, earthquake
preparedness, and earthquake experience combined with level of fear to enhance the levels of taking cover.
Bourque, Russell, and Goltz (1993) elaborated on these findings in their study of the Loma Prieta earthquake in
California. Seventy-two percent of their respondents froze in place or sought protection, but responses were
contingent upon location. Many of those at home had children, so the typical response (42%) in that location was
to try to protect them. Bourque et al. reported that only 6% of those in buildings went outside and those in cars
Page 3 of 28
Tornadoes
Unlike earthquakes, tornadoes can frequently be detected and warnings disseminated before impact. However,
there are times when tornadoes are either not detected or the warning system is unable to (p. 395) provide
sufficient forewarning before impact. For example, Carter, Millson, and Allen (1989) described the impact of a
tornado in a community where most respondents had access to television (51%), radio (85%), or telephone (64%),
and many (45%) had monitored radio or television during the hour before the tornado struck but the storm
disrupted electric power so people were unable to receive warnings from these media. Thus, 25% of the
respondents reported no forewarning, 66% reported less than one minute, and the remainder reported less than
five minutes. Only 10% of the respondents had tornado experience but 75% knew the recommended locations for
sheltering. Despite this knowledge, only 27% sheltered in one of these locations and only 22% hid under
something or covered themselves with a mattress.
In other cases, the barrier to warning dissemination is linguistic rather than technological. Aguirre (1988) reported a
tornado in a primarily Hispanic community. Fifteen minutes after the National Weather Service (NWS) issued a
tornado warning, local English-language TV stations and a local radio station transmitted warnings but the popular
Spanish-language cable TV channel (Univision) did not. The tornado struck 35 to 40 minutes after the NWS warning
and 20 minutes after the first radio/TV broadcasts, but most people received warnings only a few minutes before
impact, so they remained in the structures where they were located. Aguirre argued that residents preference for
Spanish-language programming, an inadequate translation of the English word warning into the Spanish word
aviso (which does not carry the same sense of urgency), and the location of many people in the community
Page 4 of 28
Page 5 of 28
Hurricanes
Like tornadoes, hurricanes can have high wind speeds, but their hydrological threats from storm surge and inland
flooding make evacuation necessary and their days of forewarning make evacuation feasible. However,
uncertainty about a hurricanes track, combined with its great size (some hurricanes are 300 miles in diameter),
means that hundreds of miles of coastline are at risk. Uncertainties about hurricane landfall, intensity, and size are
compounded by the 30 to 40 hours that some coastal cities need to evacuate. Thus, local authorities must make
evacuation decisions so far in advance of landfall that the chance of being struck is less than 25% (Lindell &
Prater, 2007a).
Evacuation Decisions
Page 6 of 28
Response-Time Distributions
Baker (2000) summarized the results of his extensive series of hurricane evacuation studies as indicating that it is
rare for more than 15% of evacuees to leave before local officials issue a warning, that people prefer to leave
during daylight hours, and that residents of inland areas leave later than those closer to the coast. Most recent
studies are consistent with these conclusions. For example, Dow and Cutter (2002) reported that 5% of their
respondents evacuated before an evacuation order was issued, 61% left on the day of the evacuation order, and
31% evacuated the day after the evacuation order. However, other studies have reported early evacuation rates
can be as high as two-thirds of the risk area population for Category 5 hurricanes (Lindell, Lu, & Prater, 2005;
Lindell & Prater, 2008).
Other researchers have reported cumulative departure time distributions as part of their efforts to predict the timing
of individual households departures (Dixit, Pande, Radwan, & Abdel-Aty, 2008; Fu & Wilmot, 2004, 2006; Fu,
Wilmot, Zhang, & Baker, 2007; Wilmot & Mei, 2004). The major reason for assessing these distributions is to
provide empirically based trip generation time distributions as alternatives to the assumed trip generation time
distributions that Lindell and Perry (1992) and Lindell and Prater (2007b) criticized as inadequate input to
mathematical evacuation models. Although it might seem that the variables predicting the decision to evacuate
would also predict departure timing, the available evidence indicates that this assumption is incorrect. Lindell et al.
(2005) found that 13 of 19 variables significantly predicted evacuation decision but only one variable (reliance on
information from local authorities) significantly predicted departure timing. Similarly, Huang et al. (in press) found
that 12 of 16 variables significantly predicted evacuation decision but only four variables significantly predicted
departure timing and all four of those had correlations of r .10.
(p. 398) Warning-Time Distributions
There have been some significant advances in estimating warning time distributions since the first studies reported
data from four floods and the eruption of Mount St. Helens (Lindell & Perry, 1987) and two hazardous materials
accidents (Sorensen & Rogers, 1989). Rogers and Sorensen (1988) proposed a model of warnings as a process
comprising two components: (1) the official (broadcast) component and (2) the informal (contagion)
component. Unlike an official warning network, which is organized and planned in advance, an informal warning
network emerges during the incident from proximity (neighbors), kin (relatives), and other social ties (friends and
coworkers). Informal warning networks can account for a significant proportion of all first warnings (Drabek, 1986;
Lindell & Perry, 1987). Sorenson (1991) attempted to identify predictors of household warning reception times in
the Nanticoke Pennsylvania chemical incident (1987) but there does not seem to have been any subsequent
research on this topic.
Page 7 of 28
Threat Perceptions
Evacuation is significantly affected by perceptions of hurricane threat, which can be divided into three categories:
perceptions of storm characteristics, expected community impacts, and expected personal impacts. The National
Hurricane Center and news media provide continuing information about an approaching storms characteristics, so
a storms size (Whitehead et al., 2000), intensity (Lindell & Prater, 2008; Whitehead, 2005; Whitehead et al., 2000),
and predicted landfall location (Dow & Cutter, 2000; Lindell & Prater, 2008) are important predictors of evacuation.
Storm characteristics provide people with the information needed to draw inferences about the impacts on their
communities, but it is important to distinguish between expected community impacts and expected personal
impacts because peoples optimistic bias (Weinstein, 1989) or comparative optimism (Klar & Ayal, 2004) may lead
them to believe that they will escape the community impacts. That is, people are unlikely to respond unless they
personalize the risk (Mileti & Sorensen, 1989). Consistent with this distinction, hurricane research indicates that
people are much more likely to evacuate if they believe their home site is likely to be damaged by wind or storm
Page 8 of 28
Protective-Action Perceptions
Data on perceptions of protective actions are relatively sparse. However, some people have concerns about being
involved in a traffic accident during a mass evacuation or the costs of gas, food, and lodging while away from
home (Baker, 1991; Lindell et al., 2005; Whitehead, 2003). Nonetheless, Gladwin et al. (2001) argued that
evacuation expenses and traffic accidents were not the factors that concerned people most. Instead, they
concluded that people consider whether there is a specific evacuation destination that will accept all household
membersincluding any disabled members (Van Willigen, Edwards, Edwards, & Hessee, 2002) or pets (Heath,
Kass, Beck, & Glickman, 2001), whether they have enough cash or credit to stay in commercial facilities if
accommodations with friends or relatives are unavailable, and whether evacuation routes have adequate capacity
to avoid traffic jams (Huang et al., in press; Lindell & Prater, 2008).
Hazard Proximity
Coastal proximity is an important indicator of a homes elevation above mean sea level (which generally increases
with distance from the coast). Thus, coastal proximity is an indicator of danger and a predictor of evacuation
(Baker, 1991). In particular, barrier islands or open coastlines with elevations less than 3 meters (10 feet) above
mean sea level are high-risk sites, having evacuation rates of (p. 400) about 83%. Low-risk sites are located on
the relatively protected mainland, over 3.55 m (1520 ft) in elevation and generally had evacuation rates of about
37% (Baker, 1991). Other researchers have found that households living close to coastal rivers and lakes are also
likely to evacuate (Gladwin & Peacock, 1997; Lindell et al., 2005; Wilmot & Mei, 2004). Misjudgments of coastal
proximity appear to influence warning compliance and unnecessary (shadow) evacuation because many people
misinterpret risk-area maps and thus are unable to determine whether an evacuation warning applies to them
(Arlikatti et al., 2006; Zhang et al., 2004).
Demographic Characteristics
Many studies report a significant relation of female gender to hurricane evacuation (Bateman & Edwards, 2002;
Fothergill, 1996; Gladwin et al., 2001; Lindell et al., 2005; Riad et al., 1999; Whitehead, 2005; Whitehead et al.,
2000). However, Bakers (1991) review concluded that the results for other demographic characteristics are
mixed, which is consistent with more recent studies (Fothergill, Maestes & Darlington, 1999; Fothergill & Peek,
2004; Lindell & Perry, 2004; Phillips & Morrow, 2007) and the warning response literature more generally
Page 9 of 28
Evacuation Reentry
Stallings (1991) contrasted the process of reentry into one community affected by a flood with four communities
affected by toxic or radiological threats. He noted that in the latter cases, evacuees are likely to believe that the
evacuation zone is more dangerous than authorities assessments indicate. Interestingly, Dash and Morrows
(2001) study of reentry to the Florida Keys after Hurricane Georges found the reverse effect; evacuees were
frustrated that authorities considered the Overseas Highway to be unsafe and delayed access for up to two days.
More recently, Siebeneck and Covas (2008) study of evacuees compliance with the Hurricane Rita return-entry
plan found that only 54% of evacuees received information about the date they would be allowed to return home
and only 20% were aware of a state Department of Transportation plan indicating the sequence of reentry dates
Page 10 of 28
Summary
The literature on behavioral response to hurricanes, which is more voluminous than that on earthquakes and
tornadoes, further confirms the diversity of event, person, and situational contexts as well as the importance of
these contexts in determining peoples responses. Because hurricanes consistently have many days of
forewarning, there appear to have been no concerns expressed about widespread panic. However, there is
concern that some people fail to comply with the recommendations to evacuate (Baker, 1991; Dash & Gladwin,
2007) and, conversely, some high rates of evacuation from inland locations that authorities consider to be safe
(Stein et al., 2010). The availability of technology for detecting hurricanes and disseminating warnings is extremely
important because it is usually too late to evacuate by the time environmental cues are available. Although
hurricanes substantial forewarning makes it likely that almost all of those at risk know about the threat, hurricane
warnings share the limitations of tornado warnings: predictions of hurricane landfall location and intensity are
uncertain. The wording of hurricane warnings has a significant effect on the likelihood that people will attempt to
confirm an initial warning by other meansin this case, looking for businesses closing and neighbors evacuating.
Hurricane evacuations can experience major problems when a large area is affected, because most people wait
until local authorities issue a warning, so the number of evacuating vehicles can substantially exceed the capacity
of the evacuation route system and cause evacuation trips to take 510 times as long as normal (Lindell et al.,
2011). As is the case with tornadoes, weather forecasters have expressed concern that repeated false alarms
over time will cause people to disregard future warnings. However, the available evidence suggests that this
concern is overstatedquite possibly because even the most hurricane-prone areas receive warnings much less
frequently than the most tornado-prone areas (Baker, 1991; Dow & Cutter, 1999, 2000). Hurricane evacuation
research has progressed to the point of examining response time distributions and the variables that determine
response time but there has been limited progress in this area to date. In addition, research is beginning to
examine evacuation logistics (Lindell et al., 2011) and the return-entry process much more systematically
(Siebeneck & Cova, 2008).
There has been no research on peoples emotional reactions to hurricane warnings, probably because of the
comparatively lower sense of urgency in most hurricane evacuations. Research on the effects of event
characteristics on hurricane evacuation is limited because this requires meta-analysis across studies (although
see Baker, 1991, for an example). Most hurricane studies have addressed peoples demographic characteristics
and some have addressed physical disabilities (Van Willigen et al., 2002) and other impediments such as pet
ownership (Heath et al., 2001). There has been limited study of peoples technological (e.g., vehicle access, Kang
et al., 2007; Lindell et al., 2011) and temporal context (morning departures are most common, Baker, 1991; Lindell
& Prater, 2008), but there has been little study of the economic and political components of their response context.
In general, hurricane response is better understood than earthquake and tornado response, but much more
research is needed to develop a more complete scientific understanding of peoples evacuation decision timing,
evacuation logistics, and the return-entry process.
Types of Actions
Pre-impact hazard adjustmentsthose actions that intentionally or unintentionally reduce risk from extreme
events in the natural environment (Lindell et al., 1997, p. 328)are commonly categorized as hazard mitigation,
emergency preparedness, and recovery preparedness (CDRSS, 2006; Lindell et al., 2006). However, empirical
research has found that household hazard adjustments do not match these categories. For example, Russell,
Goltz, and Bourque (1995) defined hazard adjustments in terms of three factorsbasic survival, planning, and
hazard mitigationwhereas Norris, Smith, and Kaniasty (1999) classified items into advance planning, basic
supplies, and hazard alertness and Lindell, Arlikatti, and Prater (2009) identified two factorsdirect action and
capacity building. Other studies have focused on individual hazard adjustments such as hazard insurance
(Blanchard-Boehm, Berry, & Showalter, 2001; Palm, 1995) or hurricane shutters (Peacock, 2003). Finally, some
studies simply asked whether the respondents had done anything about their hazard vulnerability (Blanchard-
Page 11 of 28
Page 12 of 28
Stakeholder Characteristics
The adoption of hazard adjustments takes place in a social context involving many different stakeholders, which
Drabek (1986) categorized as authorities, news media, and peers. Interrelationships among these stakeholders
can be defined by their reward, coercive, legitimate, referent, expert, and information power over each others
actions (French & Raven, 1959; Raven, 1965). Reward and coercive power require continuing surveillance to
ensure that rewards are received only for compliance and that punishment will follow noncompliance (Raven,
1993). Although it is possible for government to provide incentives for household hazard adjustment adoption (Ge,
Peacock, & Lindell, 2011), this is not common, so most households adopt hazard adjustments voluntarily.
Consequently, there is a need to examine the effects of the other bases of power.
French and Ravens conception of expert (i.e., understanding of cause-and-effect relationships in the
environment) and information (i.e., knowledge about states of the environment) power suggests assessing
perceptions of stakeholders hazard knowledge. Moreover, French and Ravens conception of referent power is
defined by a persons sense of shared identity with another (Eagly & Chaiken, 1993), which is related to trust in
that personespecially their willingness to communicate information accurately. Finally, French and Raven (1959)
defined legitimate power by the rights and responsibilities associated with each role in a social network that, in the
hazards context, can be interpreted as perceived protection responsibility.
The proposition that perception of personal protection responsibility leads to a higher level of hazard adjustment
adoption is supported by findings on preparedness for tornadoes (Mulilis & Duval, 1997; Mulilis, Duval, & Rogers,
2003); earthquakes (Arlikatti et al., 2007; Lindell & Whitney, 2000); wildfires, earthquakes, and volcanoes (Perry &
Lindell, 2008); and earthquakes and hurricanes (Basolo et al., 2009), although the latter study found a statistically
significant effect only for development of family hurricane plans. Moreover, Laska (1990) reported a nonsignificant
correlation of personal protection responsibility with a flood hazard coping scale.
Lindell and Whitney (2000) reported that hazard adjustment adoption was significantly related to family and
personal earthquake knowledge in addition to personal protection responsibility. Similarly, Arlikatti et al. (2007)
found that local officials, employers, peers, and family/self seismic knowledge were correlated with hazard
adjustment adoption, as were employer, peer, and family trust, and employer, peer, and family/self protection
responsibility.
Arlikatti et al. (2007) also examined whether perceived stakeholder characteristics are directly or indirectly related
to households adoption of seismic hazard adjustments. A direct effect occurs if a stakeholder characteristic
influences hazard adjustment adoption through what is described by Fishbein and Ajzen (1975) as the effect of the
subjective norm, by Petty and Cacioppo (1986) as the peripheral route to persuasion, and by Chaiken (1987) as
heuristic processing. An indirect effect occurs if perceived stakeholder characteristics change peoples risk
perceptions and this change, in turn, affects their adoption of hazard adjustments. Arlikatti et al. (2007) reported
that perceived stakeholder characteristics appears to affect hazard adjustment adoption both directly (via the
peripheral route) and indirectly (via the central route).
Page 13 of 28
Hazard Education
One goal of hazard education programs is to provide risk-area residents with vicarious experience that substitutes
for personal experience (i.e., casualties and damage) in promoting the adoption of hazard adjustments. However,
few studies have evaluated the effects of risk communication programs for natural hazards (Lindell et al., 1997),
and most of those have focused on earthquake hazard. For instance, Faupel et al. (1992) found modest effects of
disaster education on disaster planning and preparedness. Mileti and Fitzpatrick (1992, 1993) and Mileti and
Darlington (1997) reported that earthquake risk communication programs (p. 405) in California had affected
residents risk perceptions. In turn, elevated risk perceptions resulted in increased information-seeking behaviors,
especially when people had received multiple risk information messages and knew others who had engaged in
protective behavior. Similarly, Karanci, Aksit, and Dirik (2005) conducted hazard awareness training that
significantly affected participants expectations of a disaster in their community, as well as disaster worry,
expected loss, the feasibility of mitigation, efficacy of disaster preparedness, and whether they had implemented
any preparedness actions. Preparedness was higher among males, those with higher levels of education, renters,
and those with higher levels of disaster worry.
Mulilis and Lippa (1990) conducted a field experiment in which they constructed earthquake awareness brochures
that systematically varied information about an earthquakes probability of occurrence, its severity, the efficacy of
Page 14 of 28
Page 15 of 28
Hazard Proximity
There is mixed evidence regarding the correlations of hazard proximity with hazard adjustment. Farley, Barlow,
Finkelstein, and Riley (1993) reported that adoption of adjustments was correlated with proximity to the Central
United States New Madrid earthquake fault and Lindell and Hwang (2008) found that proximity to inland flood and
coastal hurricane hazards was significantly related to the adoption of both flood and wind adjustments. More
recently, Peacock (2003) found that both hurricane shutter installation and envelope protection were significantly
related to location in a coastal county but not location in an evacuation zone. With respect to hazard proximity and
insurance purchases, Montz (1982), Gares (2002), and Lindell and Hwang (2008) reported significant correlations
but Palm, Hodgson, Blanchard, and Lyons (1990) and Mileti and Darlington (1997) found no association of hazard
adjustment adoption with proximity to an earthquake fault.
Demographic Characteristics
As is the case for immediate disaster response actions, there are mixed findings on the relationships of
demographic variables with hazard adjustment adoption (Lindell, in press). Gender has a roughly equal number of
positive and nonsignificant results, education and income have more nonsignificant than positive results, and age
and ethnicity have more nonsignificant results than positive results and even some negative correlations. Marital
status, children in the home, andespeciallyhomeownership and community tenure have too few results to even
classify reliably.
Conclusions
Past research on hazards and disasters has documented that people respond adaptively, not in panic or shock, to
different types of disasters. In addition, researchers have identified many variables that influence peoples disaster
responses. These include warnings, environmental cues, and social cues that, in turn, influence peoples core
perceptions of the situationperceptions of the threat, stakeholders, and alternative protective actions. Research
has also documented the effects of hazard proximity and hazard experience on disaster response and hazard
adjustment adoption and is beginning to provide evidence that these effects are mediated by the core perceptions.
Research on hurricane response is beginning to expand beyond the immediate protective-action decision to
examine the timing of responses such as evacuation preparation, the logistics of evacuation to a safe location, and
the process of reentry to evacuated areas after authorities announce it is safe to return.
Studies have consistently shown that there is only a modest level of household hazard adjustment but have found
that the variables affecting hazard adjustment are similar to those affecting immediate disaster response. These
include hazard education, hazard experience, and hazard proximity that, in turn, influence peoples core
perceptions of the situationperceptions of the threat, stakeholders, and alternative protective actions. Research
continues to show that demographic variables are inconsistent predictors of disaster response and hazard
adjustment but some demographic variables do have consistent correlations with antecedents of these behaviors.
The most reliable of these correlations is between female gender and risk perception.
One weakness of research on both (p. 407) disaster warnings and hazard education programs has been a failure
to develop and measure specific characteristics of disaster warning messages and hazard education programs.
Proposed characteristics have included message specificity, consistency, certainty, clarity, accuracy, and
sufficiency (Mileti & Peek, 2000; Mileti & Sorensen, 1987) and message comprehension, agreement, dose-response
consistency, hazard-response consistency, uniformity, audience evaluation, and types of communication failures
(Weinstein & Sandman, 1993). However, there are few studies in which specific messages or entire hazard
education programs have used these or other measures and sought to correlate them with peoples perceptions of
the threat, stakeholders, or alternative protective actions.
Future Directions
Page 16 of 28
Theoretical Directions
Typologies of Disaster Response and Hazard Adjustment Behaviors
Most research on earthquake and tornadoes has focused on characterizing the frequency with which people
engage in different disaster responses, but the types of responses that have been reported vary from one study to
another. Consequently, there is a need to develop a behavior typology that lists all of the behaviors that have been
reported for each hazard. Such a typology not only would facilitate comparisons across studies within a given
hazard, but also would facilitate comparisons across hazards. Similarly, there is a need to adopt a consistent
typology of pre-impact hazard adjustments, develop standardized scales for measuring these adjustments, and
assess the psychometric adequacy of these scales (e.g., Mulilis & Lippa, 1990). Future studies also should
systematically develop and test scales measuring information-seeking activities (Mileti & Darlington, 1997; Mileti &
Fitzpatrick, 1993). These information-seeking scales should distinguish between information about a hazard and
information about hazard adjustments.
Page 17 of 28
Methodological Directions
The vast majority of empirical studies on disaster response and hazard adjustment adoption have been conducted
in developed counties, although there are some exceptions such as research on indigenous knowledge that have
frequently been reported in (p. 409) the Journal of Volcanology and Geothermal Research. Moreover, there is a
need for additional studies of disaster response and hazard adjustment adoption by ethnic minorities (Eisenman,
Glik, Maranon, & Gonzales, 2009) and those with physical and mental disabilities (Rahimi, 1993).
Page 18 of 28
Acknowledgments
This work was supported by the National Science Foundation under Grants SES0527699, SES-0838654, CMM0826401, CMM-1138612, and CMM-1129998. None of the conclusions expressed here necessarily reflects views
other than those of the author.
Bibliography
References
Aguirre, B. E. (1988). The lack of warnings before the Saragosa tornado. International Journal of Mass
Emergencies and Disasters, 6, 6574. Retrieved from www.ijmed.org.
Alexander, D. (1990). Behavior during earthquakes: A southern Italian example. International Journal of Mass
Emergencies and Disasters, 8, 529. Retrieved from www.ijmed.org.
Arlikatti, S., Lindell, M. K., & Prater, C. S. (2007). Perceived stakeholder role relationships and adoption of seismic
hazard adjustments. International Journal of Mass Emergencies and Disasters, 25, 218256. Retrieved from
www.ijmed.org.
Arlikatti, S., Lindell, M. K., Prater, C. S., & Zhang, Y. (2006). Risk area accuracy and hurricane evacuation
expectations of coastal residents. Environment and Behavior, 38, 226247.
Arnold, C., Durkin, M., Eisner, R., & Whitaker, D. (1982). Occupant behavior in a six-story office building following
severe earthquake damage. Disasters, 6, 207214.
Baker, E. J. (1991). Hurricane evacuation behavior. International Journal of Mass Emergencies and Disasters, 9,
287310. Retrieved from www.ijmed.org.
Baker, E. J. (2000). Hurricane evacuation in the United States. In R. Pielke Jr., & R. Pielke Sr. (Eds.), Storms (Vol. 1,
pp. 308319). London: Routledge.
Balluz, L., Schieve, L., Holmes, T., Kiezak, S., & Malilay, J. (2000). Predictors for persons response to a tornado
warning: Arkansas, 1 March 1997. Disasters, 24, 7177.
Barton, A. (1969). Communities in disaster. New York: Doubleday.
Page 19 of 28
Page 20 of 28
Page 21 of 28
Page 22 of 28
Page 23 of 28
Page 24 of 28
Page 25 of 28
Page 26 of 28
Page 27 of 28
Page 28 of 28
Introduction
In April 2011, Benjamin Chavis Jr. (2011) proposed a Black American Earth Day:
A Black American Earth Day should be a day of solidarity with all people, but in particular with other
people of color, who like Black Americans are disproportionately exposed to environmental injustices and
life-threatening pollutions and toxic hazards. These dangerous problems are local, statewide, regional,
national and international. In Harlem, South Central Los Angeles, Southside Chicago, Houston, Philadelphia,
Detroit, Cleveland, St. Louis, New Orleans, and in just about every other place in America where we reside,
we find ourselves disproportionately with high rates of asthma and other respiratory diseases, multiple
forms of cancer, and other sicknesses that are directly related to harmful exposure to environmental
hazards in the air that we breathe, as well as in the water and food that we consume.
Chavis, credited with coining the term environmental racism, cowrote a landmark study commissioned by the
United Church of Christ a quarter century before that documented the disproportionate siting of waste facilities in
communities of color (Chavis & Lee, 1987). The study emerged from increasing concern about landfill sitings
adjacent to black communities. In late 1970s two communities, one Texas and one in North Carolina, mounted
challenges to these decisions (Bullard, 1983; Bullard & Johnson, 2000; US General Accounting Office, 1983; also
see Cole & Foster, 2001).
In psychology, environmentalism is often associated with the protection of of the natural world (e.g., native forests,
endangered animals and plants, and threatened ecosystems) (e.g., Opotow & Clayton, 1994), but another focus
concerns environmental costs of modern technology (Oskamp, 2000; Zelezny & Schultz, 2000) and asks who
bears these costs. This line of research, called environmental (p. 415) racism, injustice, inequality, or inequity,
Page 1 of 16
Environmental Degradation
Page 2 of 16
Page 3 of 16
Environmental Racism
Laura Pulido (2000) describes environmental racism from a structural and geographic perspective and argues that
environmental racism is the product of relationships between distinct places, including industrial zones, affluent
suburbs, working-class suburbs, and downtown areas, all of which are racialized (p. 13). Rather than view racism
as a specific malicious act, Pulido situates racism within structural factors that perpetuate environmental
Page 4 of 16
Page 5 of 16
Page 6 of 16
Page 7 of 16
Page 8 of 16
Considerations of Fairness
Extending fairness to others is a core goal of activist environmental collaboratives. In these cases, considerations
of fairness concerns justice, rights, respect, entitlement, and deserving. Environmentally burdened communites
and their allies speak of unfairness as lack of protection from harm, lack of parity with other communities, and lack
of access to environmental and health data. The sense that fairness was violated is important because it is
Page 9 of 16
Allocation of Resources
Collaborative efforts to foster environmental justice begins with resources. In these seven cases key resources
included law, empirical data, education, and partnerships. Environmental coalitions utilized extant law to challenge
polluting practices and to advocate for new laws that would protect people and places. Making the case that
fairness has been violated depends on marshaling and disseminating evidence. These cases indicate that doing so
is a key activity of environmental justice collaborations. To support their advocacy work, coalitions collected data
from individuals (e.g., blood levels of lead), (p. 423) environmental assessments of homes, mapping of polluted
sites in the region, and measurements of pollutants in commons (e.g., air quality). They also utilized existing
environmental and health data. Data then served as the basis for educational and advocacy efforts and were
disseminated to the community, to decision makers, and to the public via the media. Education was also a key
resource because it broadened community knowledge of health risks associated with environmental pollution,
garnering support for advocacy. Educational programs included experiential learning (e.g., theatrical
improvisation) and community lectures by health experts. High school students who collected data on air quality in
Harlem contributed information to the project as well as fostered their own learning.
Minkler et al. (2008) noted that partnerships among groups were a key resource for change, but Mix (2011) warned
of the potential for conflict as stakeholders within collaborations compete for resources. Mix observed that
coalition-building and coordinated action can be labor-intensive, but coordinated action can also be efficient when
resouces are shared. Cooperation, therefore, is a key resource in these coalitions that connect people across
occupations and socioeconomic backgrounds. Cooperation can benefit from and be challenged by the ways that
partners differ from each other (e.g., socioeconomic status, education level, and environmental exposure; cf.,
Minkler et al., 2008). The efficacy of coalitions clearly depended on their ability to cooperate. As Deutsch (1973)
describes, cooperation is fostered by an emphasis on harmony, mutual interests, similarities, trust, honest
communication, and norms that favor power sharing and persuasion over coercion. These characteristics of
cooperation suggest that moral inclusion begins as a stance toward others within a collaboration and can then
ripple out into the proximate and distal parties in the larger society.
Willingness to Sacrifice
Willingness to sacrifice in these seven cases focused on concrete and psychological costs of change, including
cleaning up and retrofitting facilities with newer, cleaner technology. In her discussion of white privilege, Pulido
(2000) argued that white privilege was asserted in an unwillingness to endure the inconvenience to foster equality.
This suggests that the willingness to share and sacrifice to foster others well-being is a key component of moral
inclusion at the individual and collective levels. Redistributing the costs of pollution so that they do not fall on one
sector of society inevitably requires a reallocation of resources as well as change in the structures that distribute
disadvantage and privilege.
Willingness to sacrifice is akin to, willingness to proenvironmental commitments, identified as a core variable by
Leo Montada and Elisabeth Kals (2000) in their model of proenviromnental commitment. Willingness to make
proenvironmental commitments, they argued, can be achieved through a variety of actions ranging from personal
renunciations, to political protest against others polluting activities, and to public claims for prohibitive laws (p.
169). Their research indicated that the willingness to foster the well-being of other people and the natural world is
key to proenvironmental change (also see Liu & Silbey, 2011). Thus, the willing to act on behalf of others, even
when it entails sacrifice is an important component of moral inclusion.
Page 10 of 16
Page 11 of 16
References
Bleser, C. K. R. (1969). The promised land: The history of the South Carolina Land Commission, 18691890.
Columbia: University of South Carolina Press.
Blumenthal, R. (2006, Jul 9). Texas lawsuit includes a mix of race and water. New York Times, Sect. 1, p. 10.
Browne-Marshall, G. J. (2007). Race, law, and American society: 1607present. New York: Routledge.
Bullard, R. D. (2005/2006, Winter). All transit is not created equal. Race, Poverty, and the Environment, 12(1), 9
12.
Bullard, R. D. (2011, June 1). Book review: Sacrifice zones: The front lines of toxic chemical exposure in the
United States. Environmental Health Perspectives, 116, 226. Retrieved from
http://ehp03.niehs.nih.gov/article/fetchArticle.action?
articleURI=info%3Adoi%2F10.1289%2Fehp.119-a266.
Bullard, R. D. (1983). Solid waste sites and the black Houston community. Sociological Inquiry, 53(2/3), 274288.
Bullard, R. D., & Johnson, G. S. (2000). Environmental justice: Grassroots activism and its impact on public policy
decision making. Journal of Social Issues, 56, 555578.
Bullard, R. D., Mohai, P., Saha, R., & Wright, B. (2007, March). Toxic wastes and race at twenty, 19972007.
Cleveland, OH: United Church of Christ.
Chang, V., & Opotow, S. (2009). Conservation values, environmental identity, and moral inclusion in the Kunene
Region, Namibia: A comparative study. Beliefs and Values, 1(1), 7989.
Chavis, B. F., Jr. (2011, April 21). A Black American Earth Day. Washington Informer, 21, 37.
Page 12 of 16
Evans, B. (2010, November 8). Letter to Ms. Gwendolyn Keyes Fleming, EPA, Region 4 Administrator. Retrieved from
www.ejrc.cau.edu/StatementsEPA2010/Perry%20County,%20AL/Evans%20letter%20to%20epa%20chief%20nov%2
Executive Order 12898 (1994, February 16). Federal Register, 59(32), 7629. Retrieved from
www.archives.gov/federal-register/executive-orders/pdf/12898.pdf.
Fine, M., & Ruglis, J. (2009, April). Circuits and consequences of dispossession: The racialized realignment of the
public sphere for U.S. youth. Transforming Anthropology, 17(1), 2033.
Foa, U. G., & Foa, E. B. (1974). Societal structures of the mind. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas.
Foner, E. (1990). A short history of Reconstruction, 18631877. New York: Harper & Row.
Freudenberg, N. (2004). Community capacity for environmental health promotion: Determinants and implications for
practice. Health Education & behavior, 31(4), 472490.
Frundt, H. J. (2009). Fair bananas! Farmers, workers, and consumers strive to change an industry. Tucson:
University of Arizona Press.
Gates, H. L., Jr. (2007, November 18). Forty acres and a gap in wealth. New York Times, The Week in Review, p.
14.
Harris, G. (2005). Book review, Garbage Wars: The struggle for environmental justice in Chicago. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 25(2), 245247.
Harvey, D. (2004). Conversations with David Harvey: A geographers perspective on the New American
Imperialism. Berkeley: University of California, Institute of International Studies. Retrieved from
http://globetrotter.berkeley.edu/people4/Harvey/harvey-con0.html.
Herbert, B. (2006, October 2). Poisoned on Eno Road. New York Times (1923Current File), pp. A19. Retrieved from
http://ezproxy.cul.columbia.edu/login?url=http://search.proquest.com/docview/93129508?
accountid=10226.
Kegler, M., & Malcoe, L. H. (2004). Results from a lay-health advisor intervention to prevent lead poisoning among
rural native American children. American Journal of Health Promotion, 94(10), 17301735.
Kinney, P. L., Aggarwal, M., Northridge, M. E., Janssen, N. A. H., & Shepard, P. (2000). Airborne concentrations of
PM2.5 and diesel exhaust particles on Harlem sidewalks: A community based pilot study. Environmental Health
Page 13 of 16
Page 14 of 16
Page 15 of 16
Page 16 of 16
Introduction
We live in an increasingly urbanized and fast-paced world, dominated by rapid advances in technology that seem
to move us further and further from the natural systems that sustain us. The philosophy of ecopsychology,
introduced almost 20 years ago by Roszak, Gomes, and Kanner (1995), suggests that this growing separation from
nature is the driving force behind a multitude of physical, psychological, and emotional ailments pervasive in
modern-day society. The first step in helping us reestablish our relationship to nature, and to help unlock what has
been referred to as our ecological identity, is to develop a deeper awareness of our interdependence with
nature. This need to reestablish our connection to nature has been discussed for hundreds of years by the likes of
John Muir, in his famous essays on the Sierra and the value of parks to mental and spiritual well-being. Paul
Shepard (1982) posited that our whole society may have indeed gone mad due to our separation from nature, and
addressed the consequences of this separation in stating that modern humans seem to have a readiness to strike
back at a natural world that we dimly perceive as having failed us (p. 23). When Richard Louv (2003) published
his now famous book Last Child in the Woods, an alarm was again sounded and an international movement began
to save our children from nature deficit disorder.
A practical and instrumental effort in the process of reconnecting our minds, bodies, and spirits to the natural world
are the intentional programs and practices that utilize nature for therapeutic purposes. The very idea of a
therapeutic use of nature implies a dualistic way of thinking that is inherently problematic. The dualism is manifest
by implying (p. 429) that as one begins to enter into and use nature, he or she invariably leaves community,
culture, and place behind. Indeed, the archetypal heroes journey posed by Campbell (1968) involves the hero
receiving a call to adventure, a calling that takes her into a strange and wonderful other world. This mysterious,
Page 1 of 20
History
The movement to view natural landscapes in the United States as beneficial as opposed to adversarial to
humankind emerged in the late 19th Century with the publication of the Significance of the American Frontier by
Fredrick Jackson Turner (see Nash, 1982). Writers and philosophers such as Henry David Thoreau and John Muir
awoke the American conscience to the therapeutic value that wilderness afforded, especially juxtaposed to the
steady advance of the industrial revolution during this period. Consequently, several programs and movements
emerged during this time period reflecting this awakening that when integrated, form the theoretical and practical
foundations of the current therapeutic use of nature by individuals, programs, organizations, and institutions. They
are: (a) early camping and therapeutic camping approaches developed in the late 1800s and early 1900s; (b)
early wilderness experience and rites of passage programs, such as Outward Bound, which emerged in the 1960s;
(c) early primitive skill programs developed by Larry Dean Olsen in the late 1960s; and (d) early adjudicated
programs that worked with juvenile delinquents and were an alternative to traditional incarceration.
The seminal work on the origins of the therapeutic camping movement written by Will White in Chapter 2 of the text
Adventure Therapy (in Gass, Gillis, & Russell, 2012) provides an in-depth exploration of this rich history. The
earliest forms of the therapeutic use of nature are found in the organized camping movement that originated in the
late 1800s in the eastern United States. The first summer camps were developed by educators from boarding
schools looking for unique ways to fill the summer months of primarily upper-class youth from Boston and New York
City. McNeil (1957) described the evolution of the therapeutic camping movement as a direct reaction to the
physical and moral declines of youth growing up during the industrial revolution. The Gunnery School (1861) and
Camp Chocorua (1881) are widely believed to be the first camps in the United States that had an intentional
therapeutic component for youth (White, 2010). Frederick Gunn established the Gunnery School, which involved
outdoor living in a camp setting, to develop character and re-create the romanticized view of a soldiers life [the
camp originated during the Civil War] of camping under the stars (Eells, 1986, p. 5). In August 1861, Gunn and his
wife took the whole school on a two-week hiking and camping trip. Camp Chocorua was founded to help the male
campers develop independence and responsibility and get away from the cultural comforts of growing up in an
upper class household (Eells, 1986, p.7). The campers cooked all of their own meals over an open fire and learned
basic outdoor skills, including basic camp skills, swimming, and canoeing. With these camps as the foundation, the
late 19th century saw an explosion of camps for youth in the United States and around the world. These early
camps helped form the foundation of the first modern-day camps designed specifically to address behaviorally and
emotionally challenged youth.
An interesting and accidental discovery by staff at a mental health hospital in New York also occurred during the
early part of the 20th century. As portrayed by Caplan (1974), staff at the Manhattan State Hospital East had to
quarantine 40 mental health patients during the summer because of fear that tuberculosis would spread throughout
the hospital. Due to a lack of space, patients were placed in tents by a nearby river and assumed their normal
routines. The hospital staff noticed significant improvements in both their medical condition and their mental health
symptoms. The experiment was (p. 430) so successful that administrators began to move the other nontuberculosis patients into the tents to reap the benefits of this remarkable discovery. Many patients were
discharged from the hospital as they were pronounced cured of their insanity. When fall arrived, patients were
moved back inside, at which time staff noted a marked deterioration of their symptoms and well-being. A small
Page 2 of 20
Page 3 of 20
Page 4 of 20
Page 5 of 20
Table 22.1 Factors Reasoned to Compose the Concurrent Model of Wilderness Experience
Category
Time of
Peak
Intensity
Proposition
Nature
Beginning
Active Self
MiddleLate
Social
Group
Late
Activity
Reflection
Variable
aid direct and indirect transfer of learning back to participants daily lives. These four therapeutic factors can be
viewed as interrelated and mutually influential, present throughout the experience and varying in intensity
according to the temporal progression of the trip.
Nature
This construct refers to the inherent characteristics of natural areas, including wilderness, that promote the health
and well-being of individuals through simply being in nature. The term wilderness is inherently ethnocentric and
is in essence a social construction first defined by scholars of European descent. For example, Oelschlaeger
(1991) suggested that the concept of wilderness is often defined using dialectic method, in that its very definition is
juxtaposed to civilization, which is characterized as an overpopulated, industrialized, anxiety-ridden, polluted and
often violent world (p. 5). Indeed, our disconnection to the natural world produces the very symptoms that
returning to nature alleviates, be they anxiety or depression. Therefore, the nature factor of the model is reasoned
to act independently to produce physical, psychological, and emotional benefits to individuals. Though wilderness
has long been supposed to induce positive psychological effects (Greenway, 1995), research in the past two
decades has attempted to provide an empirical foundation to arguments that have for the most part been
philosophical and theoretical. Attention restoration theory, developed by Kaplan and Kaplan (1989) and colleagues
at the University of Michigan, elucidates several factors that support how and why nature is psychologically and
physically restorative. Our constant connection to technology and our fast-paced urbanized lives all contribute to
prolonged mental fatigue, which produces a variety of other psychological symptoms, including anxiety,
depression, and frustration, that many psychologists agree cannot be solely attributed to intrapsychic and
intrafamilial dynamics (Chalquist, 2009).
The constructs supporting attention restoration theory that Kaplan and Kaplan (1989) specified that are related to
the nature construct are the notions of being away and of soft fascination. Being away suggests that when we are
distanced physically and psychologically from our daily lives, and thus sources of stress, our psyche is allowed to
recover from the cognitive overload. Kaplan and Kaplan claimed that natural settings provide one of the best
opportunities for being away, as they are dissimilar from our stressful daily environments. Considerable evidence
exists that wilderness experiences produce restorative effects (see Kaplan, 1995; Chalquist, 2009; Thompson,
2009, for excellent theoretical and empirical support of this notion). Research has also shown that people
Page 6 of 20
Active Self
The active self (AS) factor of the framework consists of therapeutic variables arising solely from personal
interaction with the natural environment. In other words, this factor exemplifies those variables that contribute to
the change process and arise from acting in and through the environment. The two main constituents reasoned to
compose the AS factor are (a) physical fitness and physical well-being, and (b) tasks associated with wilderness
living. The first construct, physical fitness and well-being, borrows heavily from health psychology and related
fields, disciplines that have long observed that physical health is related to mental health. Studies have
consistently shown that routine physical exercise is associated with healthier self-images in both adults and
adolescents (Boyd & Hrycaiko, 1997; DiLorenzo et al., 1999; Kirkcaldy, 2002; Van de Vliet, 1999). Such
observations have also been made in wilderness-based literature, suggesting that wilderness and adventure-type
activities may indeed provide measurable physiological benefits (Bunting et al., 2000; Knopf, 1983). During the
wilderness experience, participants are eating nutritious foods on a scheduled basis and exercising regularly. In
many programs, participants are hiking 8 to 12 miles per day and are allotted about 3,000 to 5,000 calories daily.
Hiking, gathering food and firewood, and setting up shelter are all examples of the physical activities that must be
performed within the wilderness. As participants continue these activities, greater control is gained over physical
functioning, and research has shown that individuals facilitate the integration of these experiences and feelings
because wilderness experiences encourage introspection, which results in a more coherent sense of (p. 435)
Page 7 of 20
Social Group
Social learning theory (SLT) forms the basis of the social group factor. The main premise of social learning theory
(Bandura, 1977) or social cognitive theory, as it is referred to today (Bandura, 1986), is that many of our behaviors
originate through watching others, a principle referred to as observational learning. Wilderness experiences
involve intense small-group environments where each individual is personally responsible for the success of the
group while also relying on other members of the group to thrive. Because of this, the communal living environment
provides a unique platform for social learning interactions to occur. Research suggests that being in wilderness
settings contributes to the dissolution of status barriers, thus enhancing candid interactions and sharing among
group members (Hendee & Brown, 1987). The mechanism promoting this genuine interaction social learning
processes derives from the necessities associated with wilderness living. During day-to-day activities,
participants need to work together to get tasks accomplished, from cooking dinner to setting up tarps to conducting
process groups. These task-oriented goals facilitate social learning by encouraging communication among parties
and sharing learned knowledge. Students often have to collaborate on jobs to meet basic needs. Performance of
these activities leads observational learning and, at the same time, mutual collaboration is promoted. In this way,
communication between all participants even those who may be at odds with each other is facilitated.
In addition to member-to-member interactions, SLT principles also underlie the dynamics of leader-to-member
interactions. Wilderness program leaders are selected on the basis of their quality characteristics, such as clear
focus in life, desire to enhance self-growth and knowledge, and ability to communicate well and with a wide variety
of people (Priest & Gass, 1997). Leaders embody many of the abilities and attributes that young people view as
desirable and are often perceived as being role models (Cooley, 1998). Leaders, then, have skill sets and abilities
attractive to adolescents, and are close enough to students ages for students to be able to identify with them.
Studies assessing SLT show that people are more likely to emulate behavior when the initiator of the behavior is
viewed as being similar to the observer and having desirable qualities (Bandura, 1986). Naturally, the behavior that
leaders strive to model is positive; they encourage appropriate exploration of personal issues, demonstrate
stewardship, and show respect for students and fellow group leaders. Thus, wilderness experiences provide an
environment where participants can identify with positive role models who are purposively demonstrating healthy
social skills and fostering empathetic communication.
Activity Reflection
Page 8 of 20
Conclusion
The model attempts to provide an overview of what is believed to be occurring in most wilderness experiences
most of the time. It is an attempt to describe an eclectic and dynamic environment and experience in a way that is
cogent and testable. Though there are certainly other factors not included in the model, the ones outlined here are
those that are unique to, or especially active in, group-based nature experiences. The theoretical framework can
be used to increase our understanding of how people experience nature in general, and how programs may use
nature and wilderness experiences in particular. It is hoped that the model can aid in the development of a
common language and understanding among those interested in the therapeutic use of nature. Future research
using this model could test the theoretical constructs (Kerlinger & Lee, 2000) through the use of existing
measurement tools associated with each construct (e.g., attention restoration theory, self-efficacy, group
therapeutic alliance) or through qualitative analysis, which could involve observation or individual and groupbased interviews to explore how these factors relate to individual and group experience.
Page 9 of 20
Education
The aim of educational WEPs is the acquisition of knowledge, skills, and experiences to change behavior, and to
increase and enhance understanding, enjoyment, appreciation and/or preservation or protection of wilderness.
Educational WEPs may have academic, vocational, research, or personal educational interest (learning for the
sake of learning) purposes. For example, an education WEP may teach leadership skills, be included in academic
degree programs, or encompass field research and field-based data collection efforts that span several weeks in
backcountry environments.
Healing
WEPs with a primary aim of healing are designed to provide therapy, assistance, or recovery for participants
suffering from addiction, abuse, illness, and/or socially unacceptable behavior. Illness could be mental, physical,
and/or emotional. One such healing program is Catherine Freer Wilderness Therapy Expedition, where students
learn to recognize and deal with their behavioral and emotional problems throughout the trek. Their therapists and
wilderness guides help students confront their denials and manipulations, see their behavioral problems from an
objective perspective, and work to change their attitudes and ways of handling interpersonal issues and
relationships in their lives.
Personal Growth
The primary aim of personal growth WEPs is the expanded fulfillment of participants capabilities and potential.
These programs focus on participant empowerment, spiritual renewal, increasing motivation, self-esteem, selfawareness, self-confidence, teamwork, problem-solving, and/or social skills. The most well-known personal growth
WEP is Outward Bound, founded in Wales by the innovative German educator Kurt Hahn, reviewed earlier.
Page 10 of 20
Program Models
A total of 124 programs were identified as meeting the criteria of a wilderness therapy program, and 65 responded
to a survey asking them to describe their treatment services and organizational structure. Table 22.2, which
includes associated definitions, shows that expedition (35.4%) and residential (26.2%) programs were the most
represented program models. The integrated expedition program was the third most represented model, with 11
programs identifying themselves as offering shorter, rotational wilderness expeditions of up to five to seven days,
supplemented with two to three days of residential and school-based curricula. Three programs (5%) were
operating in Canadian provinces.
The majority of programs were private nonprofit (40%) organizations, with approximately one-third being private
corporate (33.8%). Only five programs (8%) were operated by the government, which were all in the correctional
domain working with adjudicated youth, while two indicated other types of organizational sponsorships.
Page 11 of 20
Table 22.2 Frequency and Percentage of Programs Who Self-Reported Reflecting One of Seven OBH Models,
Including Respective Definitions
Frequency
Base Camp Outdoor base camp supplemented by wilderness expeditions
Percent
13.8
23
35.4
17
26.2
3.1
3.1
11
Multiple
Total
65
16.9
1.5
100.0
(p. 439)
Table 22.3 Type of Family Involvement and Its Significance to Programming
Question
Significant N (%)
Insignificant N (%)
Average Importance
Family Sessions
53 (84.1%)
10 (15.9%)
3.19
50 (79.4%)
13 (20.6%)
2.97
45 (71.4%)
18 (28.6%)
2.81
43 (68.3%)
20 (31.7%)
2.56
Parent Seminars
31 (50.8%)
32 (49.2%)
1.98
24 (38.1%)
39 (61.9%%)
1.51
Page 12 of 20
Page 13 of 20
On October 10, 2007, Kutz & OConnell (2007) in the GAO report (GAO-08146T) Residential Treatment Programs:
Concerns Regarding Abuse and Death in Certain Programs for Troubled Youth, examined 10 closed cases where
a teenager had died while enrolled in a private residential treatment program. Specifically, the report found that
untrained staff, the lack of adequate nourishment, and reckless or negligent operating practices were the primary
causes of the tragic incidents. The screening, training, and hiring of field staff, or wilderness leaders, is a critical
issue and requires attention to better determine how best to train leaders who spend the majority of their time living
and traveling with clients in remote backcountry environments. More troubling is the reference in the report of
tough love practices, as it suggests a philosophical approach that appears to be contradictory to existing state
standards of best practice as well as previous research and evaluation on wilderness therapy program practice. In
examining the Utah state standards (2007) as a benchmark, wilderness therapy programs are required to provide:
(a) six quarts of water per day for each client, (b) a detailed menu of food preparation that must equal 3,000
calories per day, (c) fruits and vegetables at least twice a week, and (d) daily offered multiple vitamin supplements,
and food shall not be withheld from a consumer for any reason (R5018-8, p. 8). There are also provisions for
calorific increases as energy expenditure increases.
Russell (2006) empirically examined wilderness therapy program guiding principles and concluded that in direct
contrast to boot camps, consequences of client actions while on the trail were not met with harsh and cruel
punishment in the form of marathon hikes and food deprivation, but are facilitated through natural consequences
and often mediated in a group context (p. 63). These findings, as well as others consistently reported in the
literature (see Clark, 2003; Edgmon, 2002; Hagan, 2003; Lambie, 2000; McNamara, 2002), do not report practice
consistent with withholding food from clients, especially to the point of serious illness, injury, or death. It is also
clear to note that those programs that do utilize these practices are in violation of basic standards of practice, and
Page 14 of 20
Conclusion
In addition to wilderness experience programs and wilderness therapy, other therapeutic uses of nature exist and
seem to be continually emerging. One example is that of programs that take paying customers into the wilderness
to fast and engage in solo activities for several days to gain clarity on their lives (Foster, 1998). The Wilderness
Guides Council (2011) involves hundreds of wilderness guides and seeks to reconstitute in a modern framework
ancient rites of passage experiences for young and old clients. Another example is the integration of Outward
Bound experiences to treat and support veterans returning from service who exhibit signs of post-traumatic stress
disorder (Ewert et al. 2010). Finally, young adult cancer survivors are experiencing nature through river trips and
other adventure excursions that include multi-day river trips that focus on recovery, resiliency, and rebuilding lives
torn apart by cancer (Survive to Thrive, 2010).
The therapeutic use of nature inspires a paradox. Our disconnection from nature and natural processes is
seemingly spiraling out of control as technology continues its steady march toward infiltrating every aspect of our
lives. As this process (p. 442) continues to unfold, the need to uncover and reconnect with our ecological
identity will be paramount. It is indeed unfortunate that the wilderness-based experiences are being primarily
employed as a treatment and intervention for youth rather than as a rites of passage, as they were used for
centuries by myriad cultures the world over. It may be that by using these experiences as a celebration of the
transition from youth to adulthood as opposed to a treatment, the journeys associated with wilderness experiences
would be therapeutic instead of therapy. Spending time in nature to harness its therapeutic benefits could be used
as an important rite-of-passage experience for any individual involved in a transition, especially youth. The more
we need and use nature to heal us, the more we impact these natural wonders. The very factors that make nature
therapeutic, including its extent, its opportunities for solitude, and its ability to inspire awe and wonder, will need to
be watched over with great care. If not, we risk losing a source for healing that has defined and been part of our
human consciousness for millions of years.
Future Directions
What has the historical use of nature for therapeutic purposes taught us about our modern-day programs?
How important will nature be for youth who are growing up in an increasingly technological world?
How do we reconcile the paradox that as we continue to use nature therapeutically, we may be effectively
altering the very factors that make it therapeutic?
Is there a proxy environment that can mimic the therapeutic benefits of spending time in nature?
What are best practices for wilderness therapy programs?
What outcomes may be realized from these wilderness therapy programs that are less likely to occur in more
formal treatment programs?
Page 15 of 20
Should we restore rite-of-passage experiences in nature for youth to celebrate transition into adulthood?
What other likely trends in programming will emerge in the therapeutic use of nature?
Bibliography
References
Amel, E. L., Manning, C. M., & Scott, B. A. (2009). Mindfulness and sustainable behavior: Pondering attention and
awareness as means for being green. Ecopsychology, 1(1), 1425.
Bacon, S. (1983). The conscious use of metaphor in Outward Bound. Denver: Colorado Outward Bound Press.
Bacon, S. B., & Kimball, R. (1989). The wilderness challenge model. In R. D. Lyman & S. Prentice-Dunn (Eds.),
Residential and inpatient treatment of children and adolescents (pp. 115144). New York: Plenum Press.
Bandura, A. (1977). Self-efficacy: Toward a unifying theory for behavioral change. Psychological Review, 84, 191
215.
Bandura, A. (1986). Social foundations of thought and action: A social cognitive theory. Upper Saddle River, NJ:
Prentice-Hall.
Boyd, K. R., & Hrycaiko, D. W. (1997). The effect of a physical activity intervention package on the self-esteem of
pre-adolescent and adolescent females. Adolescence, 32(127), 693708.
Bunting, C. J., Tolson, H., Kuhn, C., Suarez, E., & Williams, R. B. (2000). Physiological stress response of the
neuroendocrine system during outdoor adventure tasks. Journal of Leisure Research, 32(2), 191207.
Burton, L. M. (1981). A critical analysis and review of the research on Outward Bound and related programs.
Dissertation Abstracts International, 47/04B (University Microfilms No. AAC812247).
Kutz, J. D., & OConnell, A. (2007). Concerns regarding abuse and death in certain programs for troubled youth.
U.S. Government Accounting Office, # GAO-08146T. Report and Testimony to the Committee on Education and
Labor, House of Representatives, October 10, 2007
Campbell, J. (1968). The hero with a thousand faces. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
Caplan, R. (1974). Early forms of camping in American mental hospitals. In T. Lowry (Ed.), Camping therapy: Its
uses in psychiatry and rehabilitation (pp. 812). Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas.
Catton, W. R. (1969). Motivations of wilderness users. Pulp and Paper Magazine of Canada, December 19, 1226.
Chalquist, C. (2009). A look at the ecotherapy research evidence. Ecopsychology, 1(2), 6474. doi:
10.1089/eco.2009.0003
Clark. (2003). The effects of wilderness therapy on the perceived psychosocial stressors, defense styles,
dysfunctional personality patterns, clinical syndromes, and maladaptive behaviors of troubled adolescents.
(Dissertation), George Fox University, Newburg, OR.
Cooley, R. (1998). Wilderness therapy can help troubled teens. International Journal of Wilderness, 4(3), 1822.
Council on Accreditation (COA). (2007). Policy and procedures manual. Retrieved from
www.coanet.org/Files/P&PManualpriv.pdf.
Davidson, R. (1998). The transtheoretical model: A critical overview. In W. Miller & N. Heather (Eds.), Treating
addictive behaviors (2nd ed., pp. 2538). New York: Plenum.
Davis-Berman, J., & Berman, D. S. (1994a). Therapeutic wilderness programs: A national survey. Journal of
Experiential Education, 17(2), 4953.
Page 16 of 20
Page 17 of 20
Page 18 of 20
Page 19 of 20
Notes:
(1.) The author of this publication was a research assistant, research associate, and the associate director of the
Wilderness Research Center from 1995 to 2003 and was involved in much of the research and report writing on a
major research agenda examining the use of wilderness for personal growth, education, and therapy.
Keith C. Russell
Keith C. Russell Department of Physical Education, Health and Recreation Western Washington University Bellingham, WA
Page 20 of 20
Restorative Environments
Introduction
Restorative environments have become a very important topic in environmental psychology. Books, the main
journals, and the conferences of the discipline all increasingly report on research about restorative environments.1
This chapter tries to take stock of what has happened in this area. We will start with a description of the main
theories that have been developed, after providing a context of theories that have preceded these or bear
important relationships. We pay explicit attention to the similarities and differences of the theories. Then we look at
environments where restorative experiences tend to take place, with an important but not exclusive role for natural
environments. Other outdoor and indoor environments will be discussed that may provide opportunities for
restoration. Where, and depending on what circumstances, environments provide restoration is the leading
question. In this review of environments for restoration we will encounter questions regarding theoretical,
conceptual, and methodological issues that will be addressed in the next paragraphs. Specifically we will look at
the concept of perceived restorativeness, its psycho-environmental characteristics, and the instruments
developed to measure restorative quality. We then will pay attention to new ways of analyzing the visual
experience of environments that attempt to explain their restorative quality and to the social aspects of restoration.
The final paragraph will be on priorities for future research, and potential applications that are promising and so far
untested.
Page 1 of 18
Restorative Environments
recreation research provide a backdrop (p. 446) for the specific theories on restoration as we know them.
Relevant earlier work in leisure research speaks about the different motivations for leisure, making distinctions
between leisure that is intrinsic, that is, chosen for the activity itself, and leisure in which compensation is sought
for earlier experiences: fatigue from work, overstimulation, and other states (see, e.g., Manfredo, Driver, & Tarrant,
1996; Witt & Bishop, 2009). Kelly (1978) provided an estimate of the relative importance of these different
motivations, suggesting that 30% of leisure behavior is chosen to recover from earlier experiences. When
evaluating this estimate, one should bear in mind that a figure like this takes into account only the leisure that
stands apart from behavior in other life domains, such as work and the household, and does not take into account
experiences of micro-restoration, the short breaks that periodically take place while engaged in other activities. In
all it shows that restoration is a societally important phenomenon.
A second group of theories that bear importance to the concept of restorative environments comes from earlier
work in experimental aesthetics and environmental psychology. Very influential is the work by Berlyne (e.g., 1960,
1974) on the relation between stimulus characteristics and pleasure. Berlyne stated that the experience of
pleasure is derived from the arousal potential of stimulation and this relationship has the shape of an inverted U: an
intermediate degree of arousal potential creates the strongest experience of pleasure. Berlyne distinguished three
characteristics of stimulation: psychophysical, collative and categorical2 characteristics that are each capable of
creating the inverted-U relationship with pleasure. The psychophysical dimension refers to intensity of stimulation:
the loudness of sounds, the brightness of light. Collative properties of stimulation refer to the spatial or temporal
distribution of perceptual elements: complexity and incongruity as spatial, and novelty and newness as temporal
collative properties of stimulation. Thirdly, characteristics signifying the environmental category refer to the inborn
or learned value of stimuli for survival.
Important for the present discussion is the application of the theory to the experience of urban and natural
environments. Wohlwill (1983) used Berlynes framework to describe why nature is generally appreciated: he
stated that the lower arousal potential of nature, compared to that of urban environments, is caused by lower
psychophysical intensity of stimulationlower sound levels, colors that are less intenseand lower complexity
less contrast, more continuity, more gradual transitions in shapes and succession of stimuli, and slower movement.
Apart from these stimulus characteristics that favor relaxation, Wohlwill mentioned that natural environments may
have high value as a category. Given that the human species lived in natural environments for most of its
evolution, it seems likely that people have a preference for environments that appear to have good characteristics
for survival. A final distinction between urban and natural environments points explicitly at the social
characteristics of the two environments: due to the relative absence of other human beings, a natural environment
is characterized by the absence of feedback, or inferred feedback, the feeling of not being evaluated by other
people, which allows for relaxation. The notion of evolutionary influences on the appreciation and restorative
qualities is an issue that we encounter in currently viable theories of psychological restoration, described in the
next paragraph.
Current Theories on Psychological Restoration: Attention Restoration Theory and Ulrichs PsychoEvolutionary Framework
There is a narrow choice of theories that have been developed to understand processes of psychological
restoration in which the sociophysical environment plays a pivotal role. In fact only two are generally used. The
first is attention restoration theory (Kaplan & Kaplan, 1989; Kaplan, 1995). The second is the psycho-evolutionary
model developed by Ulrich (1983, 1991).
Page 2 of 18
Restorative Environments
concept. Building on the classical work of William James (1892), ART proposes that attention has two modes,
voluntary or (p. 447) directed, and involuntary or spontaneous. Directed attention implies that the individual
concentrates on a task, situation, or behavior and wards off other stimulation competing for attention. This enables
him/her to succeed at the task at hand. Directed attention is a scarce resource. Similar to other energy models of
psychological functioning (Baumeister, 2002), ART assumes that the capacity to direct attention diminishes with
use, because it requires effort to inhibit distractions in order to direct attention. As the capacity to direct attention
diminishes, a person may commit errors on tasks, show less sensitivity to others, become irritable or impulsive, and
otherwise show signs of attentional fatigue. Entering a situation that does not require directed attention permits a
fatigued person to rest the inhibitory mechanism on which directed attention depends, and this allows for
restoration of the capacity to direct attention. This would be reflected in more effective functioning, sometimes with
enhanced subjective well-being (Hammitt, 2004; Hartig, 2007).
Page 3 of 18
Restorative Environments
landscape elements, such as trees, plains, mountains, water; presence or absence of a focal point; degree of
depth in the scene; surface texture; a deflected vista; and (p. 448) the absence of threat. The affect has a clear
physiological basis: after exposure to simulations of natural environments or urban environments following a
stressor, measures employed to assess physiological changes report effects in the sympathetic and
parasympathetic nervous system indicative of recovery of stress that are faster for natural environments (Ulrich,
Dimberg, & Driver, 1990; Ulrich et al., 1991). This initial affective response may lead to further scrutiny of its
implications for well-being, and drive behavior.
Ulrich (1983) argued that natural environments with the characteristics that lead to high preference can bring
about psycho-physiological changes that increase well-being, especially for stressed or anxious individuals,
meaning that these environments have restoration potential. This initial version of a tentative perspective (p.
116) of psycho-physiological restoration is followed by theoretical and empirical papers, that elaborate this notion
of the restorative power of natural landscapes. It is placed in the context of an evolutionary perspective (Ulrich,
1993), on the argument that for the survival of the human race it has been beneficial to be attracted to natural
landscapes that seem fertile, and therefore promise food and water, have depth, allow locomotion, and are absent
of danger. Empirical papers demonstrate that post-operative recovery proceeds faster and more easily for patients
who have a view of nature compared to patients who have a view of a brick wall (1984 ), that mildly stressed
student participants show more beneficial changes in anxiety and positive affect after viewing slides of natural
compared to urban settings (Ulrich, 1979), and that physiological indices also point at beneficial changes after
viewing nature scenes relative to viewing urban scenes (Ulrich, 1981), especially after having been severely
stressed (Ulrich et al., 1991; Van den Berg, Koole, & Van der Wulp, 2003). Effects of nature are discerned in
different settings that are in line with these findings: effects of nature posters in offices (Kweon, Ulrich, Walker, &
Tassinary, 2008), roadside vegetation for automobile drivers (Parsons et al., 1998), and hospital waiting rooms
(Ulrich, Simons, & Miles, 2006).
Looking At Similarities
We note two related issues: the emphasis on a possible evolutionary basis for nature as a restorative environment,
and the kind of natural environments that seem to be highly restorative.
An Evolutionary Basis
Both theories are proponents of the biophilia hypothesis, the idea that love of nature is in our genes (Wilson &
Kellert, 1993). This is described in several publications by both leading authors.
Ulrich (1993) argued that the human species survived through learning which natural settings and elements
were favorable and which were not. Biophilia and biophobia are therefore expressions of the same dependence
of people on nature. Those natural settings that were favorable for survival are the ones that receive high
preference ratings in contemporary research. That seems especially true for savanna-like settings or settings
with calm water bodies. The contrast in preference scores with those of urban environments is, according to
this perspective, due to the fact that urban environments do not exhibit the characteristics that, during
evolution, suggested the satisfaction of basic needs of food, shelter, and protection from threatening species.
The perspective of restoration after having been exposed to stressful circumstances is seen by Ulrich (1993, p.
108) as an extension of preference in ordinary circumstances, because people who are under stress benefit
even more from the characteristics of these highly favored natural environments. These are thought to be
adaptive because quick recovery will bring a person back to a state in which he can defend himself and, in
general, be more alert and energetic. From a different line of research comes the finding that positive mood
change, as brought about by exposure to unthreatening natural environments, enhances creativity and higher
order problem-solving, which Ulrich (1993) also considered important for survival.
The framework of ART is also strongly based on the evolutionary significance of nature as the environment
Page 4 of 18
Restorative Environments
that leads to restoration. Kaplan (1995) argued that environmental qualities that determine restoration refer to
the qualities that originally favored survival and that may explain why natural environments and processes
have high restorative value. In earlier phases of evolution it was beneficial for survival to be vigilant and led by
fascination, (p. 449) not focus intensely and for a long time on one specific phenomenon, because the wild
environment would make such a person vulnerable for surprises. In Kaplans words (1995 , p. 170), It is only in
the modern world that the split between the important and the interesting has become extreme.
Integration
Integrating attention restoration theory and Ulrichs psycho-evolutionary approach is done both at a theoretical
level as in a pragmatic sense in many studies applying the theories to assess restorative effects of different
environments. On a theoretical level Kaplan (1995) made clear that attention fatigue and stress are different
phenomena that may however appear simultaneously or in close succession. He mentioned three ways in which
the two may be related. One possibility is that attention fatigue impairs performance, which may give rise to stress;
a second possibility is that a stressful situation may cause a decrease in attentional capacity due to the effort to
keep stress under control, for example, when a person experiences pain that puts demands on inhibitory control to
drive safely. A third option is the actual co-occurrence of stress and attentional fatigue when an aversive stimulus,
for example, listening to the description of a traumatic experience (Kaplan, 1995, p. 178), both causes stress and
demands attention. On an empirical level researchers, not wanting to miss possible effects of the situations they
study, include both affective and cognitive measures to study the effects of antecedent conditions and potential
restorative conditions (e.g., Berman, Jonides, & Kaplan, 2008; Johansson, Hartig, & Staats, 2011).
Page 5 of 18
Restorative Environments
the majority of studies have been executed to see what natural environments can do to restore whatever human
capability needs restoration, it does not necessarily only appear in nature. Moreover, there are so many ways that
nature has been presented in the extant research that a further distinction of nature presentations seems relevant.
Below we organize the work in two main categories: the first is different manifestations of nature, and the second
consists of other environments.
(p. 450)
Nature as a Restorer
In the literature we find research in the following categories: wild nature, managed nature, urban nature, flowers,
and water, and these can be experienced in reality, or be represented through media such as video, photographs,
virtual reality, imagination, and even soundscapes. We will shortly discuss findings from these environmental
categories,
Wild Nature
The first study that provided the ideas for restorative environments and attention fatigue took place in relatively
wild areas. The participants in the Outdoor Survival Program experienced wilderness circumstances for more than
a week and eventually felt better because of that, providing the inspiration for ART (Kaplan & Talbot, 1983; Talbot
& Kaplan, 1986). Experiences of this duration have rarely been investigated systematically from a restoration
perspective. Hartig et al. (1991, Study One) is the exception in that this study also looked at recreationists who
spent a considerable amount of time in nature and afterward improved their performance on a cognitive, attentiondemanding task. A recent study looking at restorative effects in a wilderness area corroborated findings regarding
both stress reduction and mental rejuvenation (Cole & Hall, 2010). This seems to support the idea that wilderness is
a restorative environment but the self-selection of participants in these studies raises questions about the
generality of these long-term findings.
Wilderness appears to raise other sentiments as well, such as fear and disgust (Bixler & Floyd, 1997), making
people apprehensive of going to wild lands. Fear for wild nature can have many sources, such as getting lost,
confrontation with wild animals or people with bad intentions, bad weather, and insects and snakes, and these
fears are quite common. Andrews and Gatersleben (2010), applying prospect-refuge theory (Appleton, 1975),
showed that one source of fear is the spatial organization of the landscape in that low levels of prospect, refuge,
and escape increase fear. Herzog and Rector (2009) showed that a person ominously present in the setting
destroys the restorative qualities that were originally present. Koole and Van den Berg (2005) showed how wild
landscapes are more associated with thoughts of death than cultivated landscapes and that preference ratings of
wilderness decrease when mortality is made salient, contrary to the preference scores of rural and urban
landscapes.
Although the last three studies report findings in terms of preference or perceived restorativeness, it seems likely
that landscapes that evoke fear and thoughts of death will not be restorative. It might be hypothesized that, for
wilderness environments, situational and personal characteristics may be responsible for differences in restorative
effects, more so than for other natural environments. Familiarity, acquired through long-term exposure (Talbot &
Kaplan, 1984), or through childhood experience (Chen-Hsuan Cheng & Monroe, 2012), need for structure (Van den
Berg & Winsum-Westra, 2010), or specific professional expertise qualify as factors that may explain the difference.
Given its selective appeal, it is therefore possible that the results of simulation studies are less predictive for
wilderness environments than for other environments.
Managed Nature
Landscapes that are experienced as natural, because they predominantly consist of natural elements but are
clearly designed and maintained for human purposes, are evaluated differently than wild, unmanaged nature.
Under the heading of managed nature, several subcategories exist, notably areas that are protected, properly
maintained, and usually made accessible by the creation of paths and signage: recreation areas, containing
spaces and facilities designed for play and picnicking, and rural areas whose primary function is agricultural.
Because the transition from managed natural areas outside town to urban parks is a gradual one, they are also
included in this paragraph. A number of studies that looked at activities, walking mostly, in natural areas report that
these experiences have restorative effects (e.g., Berman et al., 2008; Hartig et al., 1991, Study 2; Hartig et al.,
Page 6 of 18
Restorative Environments
2003; Hull & Michael, 1995; Johanson, Hartig, & Staats, 2011). A study comparing the effects of walks through
parks that were tended or wild, due to different degrees of maintenance (Martens, Gutscher, & Bauer, 2011),
showed that the tended park walk more strongly increased positive affect and decreased negative affect
compared to a wild park. The authors explanation of the stronger effect of tended nature walk mentioned, among
others, sadness because of the deadwood in the wild forest walk, an explanation that might be related to the
mortality salience explanation offered by Koole et al. (2005).
Other studies looked at views on nature, in realistic situations, or as simulations of nature. Views of nature have
been studied as roadside views from a car, views from home, and views from a hospital room. In a study by
Cackowski and Nasar (2003), the view on surroundings from a car interior were (p. 451) simulated and changes
in anger and frustration were measured after induction of a stress-inducing task. Frustration appeared to decrease
more after exposure to more natural views as compared to more built views as measured by the time participants
were willing to spend at trying to solve unsolvable anagrams. Another study on roadside environments using video
simulations (Parsons et al., 1998) found that the more natural-looking environments, a golf course and a forest,
reduced stress more, and led to better performance on an attention-demanding post-test than roadsides showing
urban or mixed (natural-urban) scenes. Interestingly, the golf course seemed to give the best results overall, in line
with a (hypothesized) preference for managed natural environments. Views that were actually from a window in
ones home or simulated as such have been investigated for their effects. The benefits of experiencing nature from
real windows was investigated by Tennessen and Cimprich (1995), who found that students with a more natural
view from their dormitory room were better at attention-demanding tasks as compared to those looking out at a built
environment.
Kaplan (2001) demonstrated that different measures of well-being were related to the naturalness of the immediate
surroundings. Even when controlling for variability of activities performed outside, a factor not included in the
Tennessen and Cimprich study, relationships existed between naturalness and two measures of well-being. A
research program that focused on effects of the immediate surroundings of high-rise apartments in Chicago found
that vicinity of nature increased attention span and reduced aggression (Kuo, 2001; Kuo & Sullivan, 2001; Taylor,
Kuo, & Sullivan, 2002). These studies benefitted from random allocation of the apartments to residents, creating a
true experimental design in a real-life research situation where residents lived in apartments that were identical
apart from the amount of green surrounding the apartment buildings. Simulations of views have been investigated
many times. Some noteworthy examples are studies looking at changes in affect after a stress induction (Ulrich et
al., 1991, Van den Berg et al., 2003), attentional performance (Berto, 2005), and studies looking at preference for
natural versus urban environments after a mental fatigue induction (Hartig & Staats, 2006; Staats & Hartig, 2004).
The studies looking at affect change after exposure to a stressor consistently report that affect improves more
when participants are exposed to nature views as compared to urban views. An elaborate study showed that
physiological changes (heart period, pulse transit time, skin conductance) were congruent with the self-report
affect measures (Ulrich et al., 1991). No behavioral instructions were given to participants, other than to relax
(Ulrich et al., 1991, p. 212). Studies of affect change that also incorporate physiological measures and that look at
the effectiveness of different presentation media consistently find that both self-report and physiological measures
indicating relaxation follow similar patterns when natural stimuli are experienced in the field or mediated (Kjellgren
& Buhrkall, 2010). Different degrees of immersion (De Kort, Meinders, Sponselee, & IJsselsteijn, 2006) may provide
different intensities of the recovery process. In the studies looking at preference for natural versus urban
environments after a mental fatigue induction, participants were instructed to imagine themselves walking for an
hour through the urban or natural environment simulated by a series of slides. On all of the scenes a path was
visible, making clear that it was relatively tended nature that was shown. The main outcome of the studies is that
the preference for natural environments over urban environments increases when mentally fatigued. This effect
was originally found in scenario studies (Staats, Kieviet, & Hartig, 2003; Staats & Hartig, 2004) but proved to exist
in a study with a real fatigue induction (Hartig & Staats, 2006). The studies show that the sensitivity for
environmental characteristics that can reduce mental fatigue is reflected in the overall preference for an
environment.
Studies of views on natural or other scenes from settings other than the home or a laboratory situation have one
major predecessor, the seminal study by Ulrich (1984) of views from hospital rooms. In an archival study of
patients recovering from gallbladder surgery, Ulrich found major differences as a function of the window view these
patients had in their recovery rooms. Patients looking out at trees had shorter recovery time, used less painkillers
Page 7 of 18
Restorative Environments
and anti-anxiety drugs, and were in better moods as reported by nurses, than patients looking out at a brick wall.
The strength of the effect and the potential importance of these findings, both for medical and for economic
reasons, have been major drivers of research on restorative environments in general and currently for healing
environments and hospital design in particular (e.g., Largo-Wight, 2011; Ulrich, 2006).
A somewhat neglected topic in restorative environment research is the effect of water completely or partly
occupying the scene investigated for (p. 452) restorative effects. Only a couple of studies have paid systematic
attention to the presence of water in scenes intended to effect restoration or at least assess the degree of
perceived restorativeness. White et al. (2010) compared scenes that consisted of built, green, and water elements
in fixed proportions and found that different measures, including perceived restorativeness, increased when the
proportion of water in the scene increased. Interesting, and in line with a second study that looked at water
elements (Karmanov & Hamel, 2008), is that urban scenes with water elements scored almost as well on change in
affect indicative of restoration as green scenes, potentially qualifying outcomes of the earlier studies that so
uniformly showed that nature has superior restorative qualities. This issue is clearly not resolved yet.
Other Environments
Baum (1991, in Hull & Michael, 1995, p. 2) stated, It is likely that recreation opportunities which are readily
available in our everyday environment provide more benefits than relaxing or recreation in the [natural setting].
This is a simple yet important observation, emphasizing that most leisure behavior takes place in and around the
home, possibly in the workplace, and often in the context and short intervals that obligatory activities allow. That in
itself is enough reason to look at what other settings can provide. And ironically, Ulrichs (1984) most influential
paper on views from hospital rooms ends with the statement that future research should look at what other types of
views (than of trees or a brick wall) may accomplish: Perhaps to a chronically understimulated patient, a built view
such as a lively street might be more stimulating and hence more therapeutic than any natural views (p. 421).
Understimulation seems a somewhat forgotten phenomenon in restoration research, while it is undoubtedly a
potential stress factor and a state that people are motivated to escape from, just as the overstimulation processes
leading to stress and mental fatigue. So there are different reasons to look at restorative effects of other
environments, springing both from the need for restoration that is easily available, and from the need for other
environments than what the low-stimulation natural environment generally offers. These two conditions together
open up a huge number of possible situations that have been investigated for their restorative effects, mentioned
as such or in other terms. Discussed here is a number with obvious importance in daily life that explicitly used the
restorative framework: the home, workplace, museums, houses of worship, hospitals, andalthough stemming from
a different kind of categorizationfavorite places.
Home
The home is probably the place that qualifies most prominently as a restorative environment. However, there are
several obstacles reported in the literature. One is that the home also is a location for regular paid and unpaid work
(e.g., Ahrentzen, 1990; Hartig, Johansson, & Kylin, 2003). As such, the home is a place that can be strongly
associated with chores, unfinished tasks, and maintenance demands (Saxby & Repetti, 2010). If so, being at home
is ambiguous for restoration. This ambiguity can be resolved in research by specifying spatial, social, behavioral,
and temporal circumstances within the home that are conducive or not conducive to restoration (Ahrentzen, 1990;
Repetti, 1989). Repetti, for example, showed that air traffic controllers more effectively buffered the effects of
stress at the workplace when their spouses allowed them to withdraw socially at home. A similar finding (Staats,
Van Gemerden, & Hartig, 2010) is that mentally fatigued people considered performing undemanding leisure
activities at home more attractive while alone than with a good friend compared to people who were rested.
Another explanation for the home not always being restorative is that the home environment tends to become
dominated by media-oriented activities that reduce privacy and calm (Ward Thompson, 2002). Privacy, beneficial
for restoration, is in turn also influenced by spatial characteristics of the home (see, e.g., Evans, 1996).
Workplace
The workplace can have restorative characteristics that alleviate the demands imposed by the work itself.
Restorative potential may not only reduce stress and improve well-being, it may even directly improve the quality
of the work done, given its potential effect on cognitive capabilities. Research that explicitly mentions restorative
Page 8 of 18
Restorative Environments
aspects of the workplace has mainly looked at natural elements: window views with and without nature,
alternatives for views like photographs and paintings, and indoor plants. Views of nature from office windows have
been compared with other views (Shin, 2007) and appeared to have beneficial effects on stress reduction and job
satisfaction. Bringslimark, Hartig, and Patil (2011) have compared offices with and without windows and found that
offices workers without windows brought plants and pictures of nature (p. 453) into the office much more often
than workers with windows, while controlling for office decorations that were meant for personalization and
controlling for type of office. This seems to point to a need for contact with nature that indoor plants can satisfy to
some extent. This need may stem from the need for restoration (Bringslimark, Hartig, & Patil, 2009), as also
suggested by an experiment that showed that participants in offices with plants improved their performance on an
attention-demanding task over trials while participants in the same office without plants did not (Raanaas et al.,
2011).
Favorite Places
Unlike the previous categories described above, favorite places are not defined physically or functionally, but
places evaluatively different from others. A substantial body of research by Korpela and colleagues goes into the
character of the places that are selected and described as favorite. Favorite places are important for selfregulation and reflect place identity (Korpela & Hartig, 1996). Natural places are overrepresented among favorite
places, and a prominent finding in qualitative results of research is that restorative experiences are an important
part of the value attached to these places (Korpela, Hartig, Kaiser, & Fhrer, 2001). Favorite places may also
enhance experienced health and subjective well-being (Korpela & Ylen, 2007, 2009).
Page 9 of 18
Restorative Environments
Specific Concepts of Interest
Restorative environment research touches many areas of psychology. Its concepts, applications, and links with
related disciplines raise many questions but also offer many new possibilities. A few of these will be discussed in
this paragraph. We will look at perceived restorativeness, the four psycho-environmental determinants of
restorative experiences in ART, some visual characteristics of scenes (p. 454) that may relate to restoration and
to social aspects of restoration.
Perceived Restorativeness
This quality of an environment is the estimation that an individual who is fatigued or stressed will experience
restoration in that environment. This concept is heavily used in research: the experience is considered so
important that an estimate of restorativeness is the dependent variable in many empirical studies. An issue that is
being debated regarding the ratings of restorativeness is whether it is possible to give a valid assessment of this
quality by persons who are not in the environment and who may not be in need of restoration. This is common
practice. The validity of ratings of restorativeness by persons who rely on memory, on verbal descriptions, or on
visual simulations is a question similar to questions raised earlier in the literature, in particular with regard to
preference ratings. The main outcome of research addressing this question is that preference ratings of visual
simulationsstatic or dynamicare strongly (r > .80) correlated with on-site evaluations and with each other
(Stamps, 1990, 2010).
This issue has not been taken up for restorativeness ratings; however, in my own research (Staats et al., 2003,
2010; Staats & Hartig, 2004) perceived likelihood of restoration was not influenced by manipulations that other
dependent variables proved sensitive to. In these studies on mundane leisure situations, participants were asked
whether they had difficulties assessing these characteristics, or difficulties imagining themselves in the situations
depicted. Neither proved to be the case. Another study (Hartig & Staats, 2006) showed that likelihood of
restorativeness ratings for a walk in a forest or an urban setting differed for people attentionally fatigued or not
fatigued: fatigued people rated restoration more likely on a forest walk compared to non-fatigued people, and the
opposite held for the urban walk. So, there may not yet be a definitive answer to this question. The question is
empirical and important, especially given the interest in restorativeness as a characteristic of environments, or
situations more generally, and reflected in the efforts spent to develop measures of restorativeness that provide a
detailed assessment of characteristics that together constitute restorativeness. The most widely used measure is
the Perceived Restorativeness Scale (PRS), developed by Hartig and colleagues (Hartig, Korpela, Evans, & Grling,
1996). This scale has also been the basis for slightly different (Laumann, Grling, & Stormark, 2001) and shortened
versions (Herzog, Maguire, & Nebel, 2003), and versions for children (Bagot, Kuo, & Allen, 2007; see also Collado
& Corraliza, 2011) and zoo attractions (Pals, Steg, Siero, & van der Zee, 2009).
The PRS and any of the other scales are based on the characteristics of a restorative environment as developed
by Kaplan (1995). The scales provide ratings on being away, extent, fascination, and compatibility. Subdimensions
are proposed a priori or found in the factor structure: extent is subdivided in coherence and scope (Hartig et al.
1997; Kaplan, 1995), being away is split into a physical and psychological component (Laumann et al., 2001),
novelty is distinguished (Pals et al., 2009), and compatibility is split in four (Kaplan, 2001) or even six
subdimensions (Herzog et al., 2010). Despite all these distinctions, correlations among the a priori concepts are
high in every study and outcomes of factor analytic procedures suggest that a two-factor or even a one-factor
solution would be the most appropriate interpretation.
This creates the danger that research on the restorative quality of different environments, obtaining findings for
each of the dimensions, essentially shows the same effect on every dimension. On the other hand there is
evidence for the restorative function of compatibility (Herzog, Hayes, Applin, & Weatherly, 2010), for the match
between fascination and effortless processing (Berto, Baroni, Zainaghi, & Bettella, 2010) and for differential effects
of some of the dimensions (Hug et al., 2009). We conclude that explanatory potential for the original concepts and
for the concepts stemming from these are mixed, and that the proliferation of concepts seems to stand in the way
of the need for a general, parsimonious scale of which the components are valid, independent, and sufficient.
Ward and Russell (1981) already pointed out that concepts that reflect environmental meaning can be related
because there is semantic similarity, empirical association, or a cause-and-effect structure. More reflection on the
interrelations of the concepts will be useful.
Page 10 of 18
Restorative Environments
Fluency and Fractals
Explanations for the restorative quality of nature that start from different concepts, and are somewhat opposed to
the evolutionary-like explanation of the main theories, are being developed. Two of these are fluency and fractals.
Ideas about the fluency of visual stimulation hold that restoration may come from the subjective experience of the
ease with which a certain stimulus organization is perceived (Joye & Van den Berg, 2011). The theory of (p. 455)
fractals is more formal, stating that natural elements are characterized by the recurring of similar shapes at
different scale levels. This recurring pattern is related to judgments of naturalness, which in turn is predictive of
preference (Hagerhall, Purcell, & Taylor, 2004). Both related approaches are in their early stages of theory
development, but they also relate to older theories on environmental aesthetics that emphasize order, visual
richness, coherence, and complexity (see, e.g., Wohlwill, 1976).
Page 11 of 18
Restorative Environments
contribute to patients health and well-being, by applying insights from restorative environments research. But it is
not only in the clinical practice that insights from restorative environments research can be put to use. People in
everyday environments, from the home to the city center, from allotment gardens to natural parks, can benefit from
the increased effort and creativity that we invest in our research.
Acknowledgements
I thank Silvia Collado and Terry Hartig for their valuable comments on earlier versions of this chapter.
References
Ahrentzen, S. B. (1990). Managing conflict by managing boundaries: How professional home workers cope with
multiple roles at home. Environment and Behavior, 22, 723752.
Andrews, M., & Gatersleben, B. (2010). Variations in perceptions of danger, fear, and preference in a simulated
natural environment. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30, 473481.
Appleton, J. (1975). The experience of place. London: Wiley.
Bagot, K., Kuo, F., & Allen, F. (2007). Amendments to the Perceived Restorative Components Scale for Children
(PRCS-C II). Children, Youth, and Environments, 17, 124127.
Baumeister, R. F. (2002). Ego depletion and self-control failure: An energy model of the selfs executive function.
Self and Identity, 1, 129136.
Baumeister, R. F., Faber, J. E., & Wallace, H. M. (1999). Coping and ego-depletion: Recovery after the coping
process. In C. R. Snyder (Ed.), Coping: The psychology of what works (pp. 5069). Oxford, UK: Oxford University
Press.
Berlyne, D. E., (1960). Conflict, arousal, and curiosity. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Berlyne, D. E. (1974). Studies in the new experimental aesthetics: Steps toward an objective psychology of
aesthetic appreciation. New York: Hemisphere.
Berman, M. G., Jonides, J., & Kaplan, S. (2008). The cognitive benefits of interacting with nature. Psychological
Science, 19, 12071212.
Berto, R. (2005). Exposure to natural environments helps restore attentional capacity. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 25, 249259.
Berto, R., Baroni, M. R., Zainaghi, A., & Bettella, S. (2010). An exploratory study of the effect of high and low
fascination environments on attentional fatigue. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30, 494500.
Bixler, R. D., & Floyd, M. R. (1997). Nature is scary, disgusting, and uncomfortable. Environment and Behavior, 29,
443467.
Bourdieu, P. (1984). Distinction: A social critique on the judgment of taste. (R. Nice, Trans.). London: Routledge.
(Original work published in 1979).
Bringslimark, T., Hartig, T., & Patil, G. G. (2009). The psychological benefits of indoor plants: A critical review of the
experimental literature. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 29, 422433.
Bringslimark, T., Hartig, T., & Patil, G. G. (2011). Adaptation to windowlessness: Do office workers compensate for a
lack of visual access to the outdoors? Environment and Behavior, 43, 469487.
Cackowski, J. M., & Nasar, J. L. (2003). The restorative effects of roadside vegetation: Implications for automobile
driver anger and frustration. Environment and Behavior, 35, 736751.
Page 12 of 18
Restorative Environments
Chen-Hsuan Cheng, J., & Monroe, M. C. (2012). Connection to nature: Childrens affective attitude toward nature.
Environment and Behavior, 44, 3149.
Cimprich, B. (1993). Development of an intervention to restore attention in cancer patients. Cancer Nursing, 16,
8392.
Cole, D. N., & Hall, T. E. (2010). Experiencing the restorative components of wilderness environments: Does
congestion interfere and does length of exposure matter? Environment and Behavior, 42, 806823.
Collado, S., & Corraliza, J. A. (2011). Childrens Perceived Restoration and pro-environmental beliefs. Journal of
Asian Behavioral Studies, 1(2), 112.
De Kort, Y. A. W., Meinders, A. L., Sponselee, A. A. G., & IJsselsteijn, W. A. (2006). Whats wrong with virtual trees?
Restoring from stress in a mediated environment. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 26, 309320.
Dijkstra, K., Pieterse, M. E., & Pruyn, A. T. H. (2006). Physical environmental stimuli that turn healthcare facilities into
healing environments through psychologically mediated effects: Systematic review. Journal of Advanced Nursing,
56, 166181.
Dijkstra, K., Pieterse, M. E., & Pruyn, A. T. H. (2008). Stress-reducing effects of indoor plants in the built healthcare
environment: The mediating role of perceived attractiveness. Preventive Medicine, 47, 279283.
Eisen, S. L., Ulrich, R. S., Shepley, M. M., Varni, J. W., & Sherman, S. (2008). The stress-reducing effects of art in
pediatric health care: Art preferences of healthy children and hospitalized children. Journal of Child Health Care,
12, 173190.
Evans, G. W., Lepore, S. J., & Schroeder, A. (1996). The role of interior design elements in human responses to
crowding. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 70, 4146.
Hagerhall, C. M., Purcell, T., & Taylor, R. (2004). Fractal dimensions of landscape silhouette outlines as a predictor
of landscape preference. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 24, 247255.
Hammitt, W. E. (2004). A restorative definition for outdoor recreation. In K. Bricker (Ed.), Proceedings of the 2004
Northeastern Recreation Research Symposium (General Technical Report NE-326, pp. 15). Newtown Square, PA:
USDA Forest Service Northeastern Experiment Station.
Hartig, T. (2001). Restorative environments. Guest editors introduction. Environment and Behavior, 33, 475479.
Hartig, T. (2007). Three steps to understanding restorative environments as health resources. In C. Ward
Thompson & P. Travlou (Eds.), Open space: People space (pp. 163179). London: Taylor and Francis.
Hartig, T., & Cooper Marcus, C. (2006). Healing gardensPlaces for nature in health care. Lancet, 368, S36S37.
Hartig, T., Evans, G. W., Jamner, L. D., Davis, D. S., & Grling, T. (2003). Tracking restoration in natural and urban
field settings. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 23, 109123.
Hartig, T., Johansson, G., & Kylin, C. (2003). Residence in the social ecology of stress and restoration. Journal of
Social Issues, 59, 611636.
Hartig, T., Korpela, K., Evans, G. E., Grling, T. (1996). A measure of restorative quality in environments.
Scandinavian Housing and Planning Research, 14, 175194.
Hartig, T., Mang, M., Evans, G. W. (1991). Restorative effects of natural environment experience. Environment and
Behavior, 23, 326.
Hartig, T., & Staats, H. (2003). Guest editors introduction: Restorative environments. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 23, 103107.
(p. 457) Hartig, T., & Staats, H. (2006). The need for psychological restoration as a determinant of environmental
preferences. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 26, 215226.
Page 13 of 18
Restorative Environments
Herzog, T. R., Black, A. M., Fountaine, K. A., & Knotts, D. J. (1997). Reflection and attentional recovery as two
distinctive benefits of restorative environments. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 17, 165170.
Herzog, T. R., Hayes, L. J., Applin, R. C., & Weatherly, A. M. (2011). Incompatibility and mental fatigue. Environment
and Behavior, 43, 827847.
Herzog, T. R., Maguire, N., & Nebel, M. B. (2003). Assessing the restorative components of environments. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 23, 159170.
Herzog, T. R., Ouellette, P., Rolens, J. R., & Koenig, A. M. (2010). Houses of worship as restorative environments.
Environment and Behavior, 42, 395419.
Herzog, T. R., & Rector, A. E. (2009). Perceived danger and judged likelihood of restoration. Environment and
Behavior, 41, 387401.
Hood, M. G. (1993). Comfort and caring: Two essential environmental factors. Environment and Behavior, 25, 710
724.
Hug, S. M., Hartig, T., Hansmann, R., Seeland, K., & Hornung, R. (2009). Restorative qualities of indoor and outdoor
exercise settings as predictors of exercise frequency. Health & Place, 15, 971980.
Hull, R. B., & Michael, S. E. (1995). Nature-based recreation, mood change, and stress restoration. Leisure
Sciences, 17, 114.
James, W. (1892). Psychology: The briefer course. New York: Holt.
Johansson, M., Hartig, T., & Staats, H. (2011). Psychological effects of walking: Moderation by company and
outdoor environment. Applied Psychology: Health and Well-Being, 3, 261280.
Joye, Y., & Van den Berg, A. E. (2011). Is love for green in our genes? A critical analysis of evolutionary
assumptions in restorative environments research. Urban Forestry & Urban Greening, 10, 261268.
Kaplan, R. (2001). The nature of the view from home: Psychological benefits. Environment and Behavior, 33, 507
542.
Kaplan, R., & Kaplan, S. (1989. The experience of nature: A psychological perspective. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
Kaplan, S. (1987). Aesthetics, affect, and cognition: Environmental preference from an evolutionary perspective.
Environment and Behavior, 19, 32.
Kaplan, S. (1995). The restorative benefits of nature: Toward an integrative framework. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 15, 169182.
Kaplan, S. (2001). Meditation, restoration, and the management of mental fatigue. Environment and Behavior, 33,
480506.
Kaplan, S., Bardwell, L. V., & Slakter, D. B. (1993). The museum as a restorative environment. Environment and
Behavior, 25, 725742.
Kaplan, S., & Berman, M. G. (2010). Directed attention as a common resource for executive functioning and selfregulation. Perspectives on Psychological Science, 5, 4357.
Kaplan, S., & Talbot, J. F. (1983). Psychological benefits of a wilderness experience. In I. Altman & J. F. Wohlwill
(Eds.), Human behavior and environment: Advances in theory and research. Vol. 9: Behavior and the natural
environment (pp. 163203). New York: Plenum.
Karmanov, D., & Hamel, R. (2008). Assessing the restorative potential of contemporary urban environment(s):
Beyond the nature versus urban dichotomy. Landscape and Urban Planning, 86, 115125.
Kelly, J. R. (1978). A revised paradigm of leisure choices. Leisure Sciences, 1, 345363.
Page 14 of 18
Restorative Environments
Kjellgren, A., & Buhrkall, H. (2010). A comparison of the restorative effect of a natural environment with that of a
simulated natural environment. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30, 464472.
Koole, S. L. & Van den Berg, A. E. (2005). Lost in the wilderness: Terror management, action orientation, and nature
evaluation. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 88, 10141028.
Korpela, K., & Hartig, T. (1996). Restorative qualities of favorite places. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 16,
221233.
Korpela, K. M., Hartig, T., Kaiser, F. G., & Fhrer, U. (2001). Restorative experience and self-regulation in favorite
places. Environment and Behavior, 33, 572589.
Korpela, K. M., & Ylen, M. P. (2007). Perceived health is associated with visiting natural favorite places in the
vicinity. Health & Place, 13, 138151.
Korpela, K. M., & Ylen, M. P. (2009). Effectiveness of favorite-place prescriptions: A field experiment. American
Journal of Preventive Medicine, 36, 435438.
Kuo, F. E. (2001).Coping with poverty: Impacts of environment and attention in the inner city. Environment and
Behavior, 33, 534.
Kuo, F. E., & Sullivan, W. C. (2001). Aggression and violence in the inner city: Effects of environment via mental
fatigue. Environment and Behavior, 33, 543571.
Kweon, B. S., Ulrich, R. S., Walker, V. D., & Tassinary, L. G. (2008). Anger and stress: The role of landscape
posters in an office setting. Environment and Behavior, 40, 355381.
Largo-Wight, E. (2011). Cultivating healthy places and communities: Evidence-based nature contact
recommendations. International Journal of Environmental Health Research, 21, 4161.
Laumann, K., Grling, T., & Stormark, K. M. (2001). Rating scales measures of restorative environments. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 21, 3144.
Lederbogen, F., Kirsch, P., Haddad, L., Streit, F., Tost, H., Meyer-Lindenberg, A. (2011). City living and urban
upbringing affect neural social stress processing in humans. Nature, 474, 498501.
Lee, J., Park, B-J., Tsunetsugu, Y., Ohira, T., Kagawa, T., & Miyazaki, Y. (2011). Effect of forest bathing on
physiological and psychological responses in young Japanese male subjects. Public Health, 125, 93100.
Lofland, L. H. (1998). The public realm: Exploring the citys quintessential social territory. New York: Walter de
Gruyter.
Maas, J., Verheij, R. A., De Vries, S., Spreeuwenberg, P., Schellevis, F. G., & Groenewegen, P. P. (2009). Morbidity is
related to a green living environment. Journal of Epidemiology and Community Health, 63, 967973.
Manfredo, M. J., Driver, B. L., & Tarrant, M. E. (1996). Measuring leisure motivation: A meta-analysis of the
recreation experience preference scales. Journal of Leisure Research, 28, 188213.
Martens, D., Gutscher, H., & Bauer, N. (2011). Walking in wild and tended urban forests: The impact on
psychological well-being. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 31, 364.
Milgram, S. (1970). The experience of living in cities. Science, 167, 14611468.
Ouelette, P., Kaplan, R., & Kaplan, S. (2005). The monastery as a restorative environment. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 25, 175188.
(p. 458) Pals, R., Steg, L., Siero, F. W., & van der Zee, K. I. (2009). Development of PRCQ: A measure of
perceived restorative characteristics of zoo attractions. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 29, 441449.
Parsons, R., Tassinary, L. G., Ulrich, R. S., Hebl, M. R., & Grossman-Alexander, M. (1998). The view from the road:
Implications for stress recovery and immunization. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 18, 113140.
Page 15 of 18
Restorative Environments
Raanaas, R. K., Evensen, K. H., Rich, D., Sjostrom, G., & Patil, G. (2011). Benefits of indoor plants in an office
setting. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 31, 99105.
Raanaas, R. K., Patil, G. G., & Hartig, T. (2010). Effects of an indoor foliage plant intervention on patient well-being
during a residential rehabilitation program. HortScience, 45, 387392.
Repetti, R. L. (1989). The effects of daily workload on subsequent behavior during marital interaction: The roles of
social withdrawal and spouse support. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 57, 651659.
Russell, J. A., & Ward, L. M. (1981). On the psychology of environmental meaning: Reply to Daniel and Ittelson.
Journal of Experimental Psychology: General, 110, 163168.
Saxby, D. E., & Repetti, R. (2010). No place like home: Home tours correlate with daily patterns of mood and
cortisol. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 36, 7181.
Shin, W. S. (2007). The influence of forest view through a window on job satisfaction and job stress. Scandinavian
Journal of Forest Research, 22, 248253.
Staats, H., & Hartig, T. (2004). Alone or with a friend: A social context for psychological restoration and
environmental preference. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 24, 199211.
Staats, H., Kieviet, A., & Hartig, T. (2003). Where to recover from attentional fatigue: An expectancy-value analysis
of environmental preference. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 23, 147157.
Staats, H., Van Gemerden, E., & Hartig, T. (2010). Preference for restorative situations: Interactive effects of
attentional state, activity-in-environment, and social context. Leisure Sciences, 32, 401417.
Stamps, A. E. (1990). Use of photographs to simulate environments: A meta-analysis. Perceptual and Motor Skills,
71, 907913.
Stamps, A. E. (2010). Use of static and dynamic media to simulate environments: A meta-analysis. Perceptual and
Motor Skills, 111, 355364.
Tae-Hoon, K., Gwang-Woo, J., Han-Su, B., Gwang-Won, K., Thirunavukkarasu, S., Jin-Kyu, S. (2010). Human brain
activation in response to visual stimulation with rural and urban scenery pictures: A functional magnetic resonance
imaging study. Science of the Total Environment, 408, 26002607.
Talbot, J. F., & Kaplan, S. (1986). Perspectives on wilderness: Re-examining the values of extended wilderness
experience. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 6, 177188.
Taylor, A. F., Kuo, F. E., & Sullivan, W. C. (2002). Views of nature and self-discipline: Evidence from inner-city
children. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 22, 4963.
Tennessen, T. M., & Cimprich, B. (1995). Views to nature: Effects on attention. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 15, 7785.
Ulrich, R. S. (1979). Visual landscapes and psychological well-being. Landscape Research, 4, 1723.
Ulrich, R. S. (1981). Natural versus urban scenes: Some psychophysiological effects. Environment and Behavior,
13, 523556.
Ulrich, R. S. (1983). Aesthetic and affective response to natural environments. In I. Altman & J. F. Wohlwill (Eds.),
Human behavior and environment. Advances in theory and research. Vol. 9: Behavior and the natural
environment (pp. 85125). New York: Plenum.
Ulrich, R. S. (1984). View through a window may influence recovery from surgery. Science, 224, 420421.
Ulrich, R. S. (1993). Biophilia, biophobia, and natural landscapes. In S. R. Kellert & E. O. Wilson (Eds.), The biophilia
hypothesis. Washington, DC: Island Press.
Ulrich, R. S. (2006). Evidence-based health-care architecture. Lancet, 368, S38S39.
Page 16 of 18
Restorative Environments
Ulrich, R. S., Dimberg, U., & Driver, B. L. (1990). Psychophysiological indicators of leisure consequences. Journal of
Leisure Research, 22, 154166.
Ulrich, R. S., Simons, R. F., Losito, B. D., Fiorito, E., Miles, M. A., Zelson, M. (1991). Stress recovery during exposure
to natural and urban environments. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 11, 201230.
Ulrich, R. S., Simons, R. F., & Miles, M. A. (2006). Effects of environmental simulations and television on blood donor
stress. Journal of Architectural and Planning Research, 20, 3847.
Van den Berg, A. E., Koole, S. L., & Van der Wulp, N. Y. (2003). Environmental preference and restoration: (How)
are they related? Journal of Environmental Psychology, 23, 135146.
Van den Berg, A. E., & Winsum-Westra, M. (2010). Manicured, romantic, or wild? The relation between need for
structure and preferences for garden styles. Urban Forestry & Urban Greening, 9, 179186.
Ward Thompson, C. (2002). Urban open spaces in the 21st century. Landscape and Urban Planning, 60, 5972.
White, M., Smith, A., Humphryes, K., Pahl, S., Snelling, D., & Depledge, M. (2010). Blue space: The importance of
water for preference, affect, and restorativeness ratings of natural and built scenes. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 30, 482493.
Whitehouse, S, Varni,. J. W., Seid, M., Cooper-Marcus, C., Ensberg, M. J., Jacobs, J. R., Mehlenbeck, R. S. (2001).
Evaluating a childrens hospital garden environment: Utilization and consumer satisfaction. Journal of
Environmental Psychology, 21, 301314.
Wilson, S. R., & Kellert, E. O. (1993). The biophilia hypothesis. Washington, DC: Island Press.
Witt, P. A., & Bishop, D. W. (2009). Situational antecedents to leisure behavior. Journal of Leisure Research, 41,
337350.
Wohlwill, J. F. (1976). Environmental aesthetics; the environment as a source of affect. In I. Altman & J. F. Wohlwill
(Eds.), Human behavior and the environment. Advances in theory and research (Vol. 1, pp. 3786). New York:
Plenum.
Wohlwill, J. F. (1983). The concept of nature: A psychologists view. In I. Altman & J. F. Wohlwill (Eds.), Human
behavior and environment. Advances in theory and research. Vol. 6: Behavior and the natural environment (pp.
537). New York: Plenum.
Notes:
(1.) Recently, the 9th Biennial Conference on Environmental Psychology, September 2628, 2011, in Eindhoven,
The Netherlands, had 6 complete sessions involving 30 papers, 12.5% of all contributions, on restorative
environments. Also, both Environment and Behavior (Hartig, 2001) and the Journal of Environmental Psychology
(Hartig & Staats, 2003) published special issues on restorative environment research.
(2.) The original term used by Berlyne is not categorical but ecological. Because of the different meaning of
ecological in common use, we choose to use a different term that more intuitively grasps the content of the
concept.
Henk Staats
Henk Staats Instituut Psychologie, Sociale en Organisatiepsychologie Leiden University Leiden, The Netherlands
Page 17 of 18
Introduction
Consider a common US rite of passage. A family lives in town in a small duplex with one bathroom, limited kitchen
storage, a one-car garage, and a tiny backyard. The parents save for the American dream of a larger, freestanding
house in the suburbs. Federal tax incentives enable a new home purchase on the suburban fringe, where land is
cheaper, making larger homes more affordable. The children have their own bedrooms and bathrooms, the kitchen
has plenty of storage space, and the backyard is big enough for play and parties. What is less salient in this
American dream scenario is that the residential choice sets off a cascade of other choices outside of the familys
awareness. They will need to purchase private cars for all driving-age family members who need to leave the
neighborhood. Work commutes are time-consuming and stressful, perhaps causing late-arriving parents to give up
their traditional after-work dog walk. The children, who used to walk to the park to meet friends, now have no park
and enlist parents to drive them to more distant planned events, such as soccer games. Parental chauffeur duties
often preclude home-cooked dinner in favor of the quick take-out options from the drive-through fast food
restaurant. Frequent trips to small local grocers give way to infrequent trips to the more distant mega-grocer. The
family buys a larger car for bulk-buy shopping trips and carpooling children to distant events. They buy groceries
for longer shelf life and can store larger amountsthe two-pack refined-flour bread with preservatives, not the
single whole-grain loaf they formerly picked up on the walk home from the transit stop. Over (p. 460) the years,
the family gradually gains weight and gets insufficient physical activity. This fictional family has adopted habits
typical of those in millions of families in the United States and elsewhere. Their subtle alterations in the pattern of
family living carry implications for overall health for the family, society, and the planet.
Page 1 of 31
Page 2 of 31
New Focus: Developing Multiple Supports to Encourage Healthy Weight and Physical Activity
Given the above evidence of the limited effectiveness of diet and exercise programs and increasing sedentariness,
it may be easier to avoid weight and sedentariness problems with two interrelated approaches: healthier behaviors
supported by healthier contexts. First, healthier everyday physical activity and eating behaviors might prevent
overweight and obesity. Calculations suggest that expending or avoiding about 100 calories or per day
achievable by walking 2,000 more steps per day or drinking 8 fewer ounces of sweetened soda a daywould
prevent 90% of US adults from gaining the typical 12 pounds per year that, over time, can result in obesity
(Catenacci et al., 2009). Walking is a particularly healthy way to achieve this goal, given that a recent review
relates walking to lower risk of heart disease and stroke (Boone-Heinonen, Evenson, Taber, & Gordon-Larsen,
2009); even another hour of weekly walking relates to reduced cardiovascular disease risk (Oguma & ShinodaTagawa, 2004). Fewer studies link walking to obesity, but some studies show more walking is associated with
healthier BMI both cross-sectionally (Dunton et al., 2009) and over 15 years (Gordon-Larsen et al., 2009). Thus,
emphasizing prevention through fundamental but simple changes in daily life may be more effective in the long run
than individually focused weight loss programs, although research on this new prevention approach is sparse.
Second, healthier physical activity and eating choices can be encouraged with multiple physical, social, and policy
supports at varied levels of scale. This shifts the search for causes of obesity and inactivity from an exclusive
focus on individual biological or psychological causes to broader patterns of support that can be embedded in
society, settings, and daily lives. At both micro- and macro-levels of environments, multiple influencesmany out
of awarenesshave converged to create obesogenic environments (Swinburn, Egger, & Raza, 1999;
Townshend & Lake, 2009). Researchers from environmental psychology, planning, health, and other fields can
work with policy makers and program directors to consider how to reconfigure environments to make healthier
choices easier and more natural.
Page 3 of 31
Environmental Supports for Physical Activity: Macro, Micro, and Perceptual Levels
Environment and Behavior: Selection or Causation
Prior to summarizing research results, it is important to discuss the methodological challenges in this area of
Page 4 of 31
Page 5 of 31
Page 6 of 31
Page 7 of 31
Accessibility Features
This measure in the IMI includes features that contribute to ease of pedestrian access to destinations, such as the
presence and completeness of sidewalks or bike paths (Day, Boarnet, Alfonzo, & Forsyth, 2006). Accessibility also
includes density, measured by density of residential units on the block, and diversity, the number of distinct
destinations possible on the block, such as a school or post office. Accessibility likely requires a complex blend of
features along routes, including well-used origins and destinations, which are often provided by density and
diversity, and good and convenient pathways between the two, which are supported by street connectivity and
pedestrian infrastructure. For example, an apartment complex (density) across a busy arterial from a shopping
center (diversity) provides poor pedestrian accessibility despite high density and diversity. Currently, research has
not tested for the presence of such threshold effects for required combinations of walkability features, although
they are recognized anecdotally as important (Calthorpe, 1993).
Accessibility has been related to reported walking or active travel for a range of specific features. For example,
provision of pedestrian infrastructure such as sidewalks relates to physical activity (Kitamura, Mokhtarian, & Laidet,
1997; Lin & Moudon, 2010; Shay et al., 2009). Similarly, countries with environments that provide more bike paths
and cycling infrastructure have 4 to 29 times the cycling trips as the United States (Pucher & Dijkstra, 2003).
Walking or physical activity also relates to various measures of density (Besser & Dannenberg, 2005; Gauvin et
al., 2005) and land use diversity (Badland & Schofield, 2006; Plaut, 2005) or destinations (Badland & Schofield,
2006; Lin & Moudon, 2010), such as parks (Kaczynski & Henderson, 2007). Diversity and density on ones block
was related to whether a resident would walk to a new light rail stop in the neighborhood (Werner et al., 2010).
Similarly, proximity to bus stops also relates to more walking (Targa & Clifton, 2005).
However, when examining correlations between accelerometer-measured physical activity and accessibility
features, results are mixed. Good sidewalk conditions (present, wide, and well-connected) and crossing aids (stop
signs and lights, pedestrian signs and islands) were associated with more accelerometer-measured steps per day
in Montgomery County, Maryland (Shay et al., 2009). However, Boarnet et al. (in press) found a number of mixed or
counterintuitive relationships in Minneapolis, Minnesota. For example, features that should be related to higher
levels of accessibility and physical activity (colored painted crosswalk lines, pedestrian-activated crosswalk
signals, and bike paths near residents homes) were actually related to lower intensity physical activity as
measured by accelerometry. Similarly, trained observers counted more people walking in areas that had sidewalk
defects (Suminski et al., 2008). Such contradictory results suggest it will be useful to complement accelerometer
measures of (p. 467) activity with GPS measures of where the activity takes place to allow closer examination of
environmental features.
In terms of micro-accessibility features that encourage activity, one particular way in which density supports
activity is that it often includes multistory buildings with stairs. Stairs can offer another opportunity for everyday
physical activity. Consistent with this idea, European evidence shows that men (but not women) living above the
third floor have 0.88 lower BMIs than men living on the first floor (Shenassa, Frye, Braubach, & Daskalakis, 2008).
Lab evidence shows that even short two-minute bouts of stair climbing done regularly will improve cardiovascular
health (Boreham et al., 2005). Results such as these have prompted many health campaigns to encourage stair
use over elevator/escalator use; although benefits are small, combining these with other daily small increases in
physical activity may yield healthy results (Dolan et al., 2006). According to a systematic CDC review, evidence
supports the official recommendation to increase physical activity by providing more everyday physical activity
opportunities (Kahn et al., 2002).
Page 8 of 31
Page 9 of 31
Pleasurability Features
Pleasurability features include greenery, nice views, interesting storefronts, and the like, which are implicitly linked
to enjoyable human experience of places. Currently a lot of attention is paid to the health and psychological
benefits of exposure to nature (see Wells, this volume), so views of trees, green spaces, and natural vistas have
been proposed to support walking. One European study has shown that those with more greenery in their
neighborhoods are three times as likely to be physically active and 40% less likely to be overweight or obese
(Ellaway et al., 2005); an Australian study shows that visually interesting features including beaches relate to more
physical activity (Humpel et al., 2004). Other studies show more complex results. In the United States, more
neighborhood greenery did not relate to more physical activity, but did relate to lower BMI when greenery was
present and neighborhood destinations were accessible (Tilt, Unfried, & Roca, 2007).
Other studies focus on a broad range of aesthetic features. When shown a variety of street images for choosing
walking routes, streets with people, awnings, and plantings are related to stated preferences for walking along
those routes (Zacharias, 2001). Lab studies of individuals running on treadmills showed better moods and healthier
blood pressures when viewing pleasant scenes rather than unpleasant scenes (Pretty, Peacock, Sellens, & Griffin,
2005).
Field studies, however, often show that walking or physical activity is relatively unrelated to the aesthetics of the
near home environment, including studies in Minneapolis, Minnesota (Boarnet et al., in press; Dolan et al., 2006),
and Perth, Australia (Giles-Corti & Donovan, 2002a). The Perth finding is difficult to interpret, however, because it
does not involve a pure measure of aesthetics. The composite measure combined tree coverage, a traditional
measure of aesthetics, with street form, a measure of accessibility. The Perth study considered cul-de-sacs to
provide better aesthetics, although more recent research has suggested that low-traffic and poorly connected
streets such as cul-de-sacs actually relate to less walking (Ewing & Cervero, 2010). Future studies should examine
conditions where good aesthetics do not reduce accessibility.
The distinction between walking for leisure or transportation, which differentially relates to the environmental
walkability features discussed by Saelens and Handy, may help explain the mixed results for walking and
aesthetics. For example, aesthetics have been found to be unrelated to both walking to work (Craig, Brownson,
Cragg, & Dunn, 2002a) and transportation walking (Hoehner et al., 2005). (p. 469) Another study also found that
more walking was observed in areas with more automotive traffic, sidewalk defects, graffiti, and litter and less
desirable property aesthetics (Suminski et al., 2008). However, aesthetics have been found to relate to recreational
walking (Hoehner et al., 2005). These conflicting results suggest that people may choose attractive areas when
walking for pleasure but that attractiveness features, just like crime cues reviewed earlier, are not so important
when people need to get to a particular destination.
Page 10 of 31
Perceived Environments
Humans perceive environments in ways that relate to their goals and biases, not by simply registering objective
features. Perceptions of accessibility, traffic safety, crime safety, and pleasurability may factor in to decisions to
walk. The Neighborhood Environment Walkability Scale (NEWS) has often been used to measure the perceptual
counterparts of the rated micro-environmental supports for walking. Generally, perceived walkability as assessed
by the NEWS relates to self-reported (Cerin, Saelens, Sallis, & Frank, 2006) and objective (Atkinson et al., 2005)
physical activity measures. Suggested subscales within the NEWS have not been confirmed through factor
analyses, but the individual items appear to measure perceptions related to walkability (Cerin et al., 2009). NEWS
perceptions are sometimes related to objectively rated physical environments (Leslie et al., 2005), although several
studies suggest that both perceived and objective measures add to our understanding and explain unique
variance (Kondo et al., 2009; for grocers, Lin & Moudon, 2010; McGinn et al., 2007).
Perceived Accessibility
Some research has found that perceived access to good walking conditions in the neighborhood converge with the
macro-environmental supports of density, diverse destinations, and pedestrian-friendly design to support activity
(Leslie et al., 2005). Consistent with physical evidence of accessibility, walking has related to the perceived access
to sidewalks (Giles-Corti & Donovan, 2002b) and perceived convenience of walking in the neighborhood (Ball,
Bauman, Leslie, & Owen, 2001). An 11-country study showed that perceived accessibility of sidewalks, transit
stops, shops, bike facilities, and low-cost recreational facilities was related to more physical activity (Sallis et al.,
2009).
Other research compares physical features with residents perceptions of these features and relates these to
physical activity. One study found good relationships between objective measures of diverse land uses, such as
parks, transit stops, and schools and perceptions of their existence within walking distance; these results were
stronger for more physically active individuals, suggesting that those active in the neighborhood were more
accurate in their perceptions of what was in the neighborhood (Adams et al., 2009). Another study showed that
adults living in objectively walkable neighborhoods, but who perceived them to be less walkable than did their
neighbors, were more overweight and walked less in the neighborhood (Gebel, Bauman, & Owen, 2009). Yet
another study found weak relationships between perceived and objective availability of physical activity places
near home, suggesting that both are important to include in future research (Ball et al., 2008).
Page 11 of 31
Perceived Pleasurability
Perceived pleasantness or neighborhood aesthetics are related to more physical activity (Ball et al., 2001;
Brownson et al., 2001; Giles-Corti & Donovan, 2002b; King et al., 2006; McCormack et al., 2004) or more
transportation-related physical activity (Troped et al., 2003). Related research shows obesity is related to poor
aesthetics (Boehmer et al., 2007).
Features of pleasing aesthetics that are related to activity can include more complex scenery (Craig, Brownson,
Cragg, & Dunn, 2002). An Australian study found that higher income neighborhood residents walked more for
transportation than residents from lower income neighborhoods and this relationship was mediated by high-income
neighborhood residents perceiving better aesthetics and greenery (Cerin, Leslie, & Owen, 2009). In an
experimental study of guided walks in low- and high-walkability city areas, participants noted that features such as
trees and flowers felt inviting, which suggests that the environments are not just pretty but seen as appropriate
places to go and to see others enjoying the environment (Duvall, 2011).
Page 12 of 31
Summary
In sum, early research that related physical environment features with physical activity focused on the macrolevel,
with GIS and census evidence of high population density, high diversity, and walkable design being related to
leisure and transportation walking. This work has recently been complemented by a small but growing number of
studies with microlevel measures of these same qualities and by survey measures of perceptions of walkability.
Within each of these, we reviewed studies on accessibility (density, diverse destinations, and pedestrian-friendly
design), crime safety, traffic safety, and pleasurability (green spaces, architecture, decor). Despite great variety in
measures of the environment and measures of physical activity (sometimes health or obesity measures, sometimes
leisure walking, transportation walking or other physical activity), research generally supports the idea that
objectively assessed micro-environmental and perceived features of the environment are related to physical
activity. In every subcategory, there were studies that both supported and failed to support relationships between
environmental characteristics and physical activity. The strongest relationships tended to be between physical
activity and accessibility (possibly because infrastructure is essential for walking and biking), and between
physical activity and social relationships as well as with pleasurability. Relations between physical activity and
crime safety or traffic safety were obtained, though not so consistently, possibly because people learn how to
negotiate their sometimes unsafe walking routes. A distinction that may prove useful to retain is the one between
walking for pleasure and walking for instrumental purposes, such as shopping or transit use. In the next section we
examine the relationship between food environments and healthy eating.
Food Environments
Environmental and conservation psychologists often focus on food choices as embedded within the larger context
of concerns about ecology and nature, and tend not to address overeating. Studies have described how shoppers
at cooperative grocers are motivated by low prices and healthy food (Sommer, 1998), and home gardeners are
motivated more by time spent outdoors, observing nature, and relaxation than by the concern for healthy food
(Clayton, 2007). Other studies focus on how micro-setting qualities relate to food choices, such as how we select
restaurants from their facades (Cherulnik, 1991), how classical music increases our restaurant spending (North,
Shilcock, & Hargreaves, 2003), or how well-placed signs speed up fast-food line orders (Foster et al., 1988).
The study of how food environments might relate to healthy or unhealthy food choices is a relatively new and fastgrowing area of research. One review suggests there is less consistency for the food environmentto-obesity
relationship than for the physical activityto-obesity relationship (Black & Macinko, 2008). This may reflect a
variety of differences between the two fields. First, while physical activity can be objectively measured with
pedometers, there is no pedometer to measure food consumption, and self-reports are often unreliable (Long et al.,
2009). Second, although in the United States it is common to achieve physical activity in certain places, such as
neighborhoods, gyms, and playgrounds, there is not comparable academic understanding of the geography of
food consumption. Food is ubiquitous. It is (p. 472) eaten several times a day in an increasing number of settings
(Wansink & Sobal, 2007). Even public schools install vending machines that carry highly caloric food and gas
stations offer hot food. Finally, people engage in few unhealthy physical activities but exploit plenty of unhealthy
food choices. Under this combination of circumstances, it is difficult to track food-related settings, choices within
those settings, and consumption. Recent studies test novel measurement methods, such as cell phone
photographs of food consumed in field settings (Martin et al., 2008); future development of this research to track
both exposure to food opportunities and food consumption choices is needed. As with supports for walking, both
macro- and micro-aspects of food environments are important, as discussed below.
MacroFood Environments
In the United States, post-1950 practices drastically changed food availability and salience. Governmental
subsidies for farms concentrated production of a few crops, such as corn and soybeans, grown in large
monoculture fields, treated with petrochemicals, which may prove unsustainable. Government policies do not
support organic production of a variety of healthy foods, such as fruits and vegetables. Indeed, one calculation
Page 13 of 31
Page 14 of 31
Page 15 of 31
Conclusion
Our review has shown the importance of macro- and micro-physical environmental supports and barriers to
healthy eating and activity. Macro-environments, from the layout of streets to the provision of food outlets in a
community, make healthier choices more or less difficult. Micro-environmental cues, from trees shading ones walk
to the plate size at the dinner table, also have subtle effects on everyday behaviors, such as walking and eating.
Finally, the perception of environmental supports for activity and eating plays a distinct role in explaining our eating
and activity, demonstrating that perceptions have influences beyond those accounted for by objective measures
of the environment. In addition, the research shows that humans have a tendency to be influenced by
environmental supports and cues but often refuse to acknowledge those influences, whether the influences relate
to more physical activity (Kondo et al., 2009; McGinn et al., 2007) or more food consumption (Wansink, 2010).
Thus future studies can benefit by attending to all three types of social and environmental supports for healthy
behavior and by recognizing that people often deny environmental influences.
Our review also demonstrates the utility of a transactional model, which assumes that relationships between
environments and behaviors of eating and physical activity are multilevel, with influences at a variety of levels of
scale. Consistent with a transactional view, the chapter has underscored the importance of tracking changes over
time in understanding how US residents have become less active and more overweight. Further, because the
influences are multiple and embedded within various sectors of society, reversing unhealthy behaviors requires
understanding where those unhealthy behaviors occur and how to change those settings.
In sum, this review has shown that from the scale of the plate to the scale of the community, over the past 50 years
our physical environment has enabled us to eat more and walk less. This combination is consistent with the
observed increase in obesity and decrease of physical activity. These trends are so strong and alarming that they
have led to the controversial calculation that obesity-related health problems will end the 200 years of life span
increases seen in the United States (Olshansky et al., 2005). The United States has succeeded in other great public
health challenges, such as reducing tobacco use, by reducing the attractiveness of tobacco by altering how it is
treated physically, socially, and economically, and legally across a wide variety of settings (Green et al., 2006).
Thus it is possible the United States will succeed in a similarly holistic focus on creating healthier eating and
physical activity supports. Future growth projections make the challenge of creating health-supportive
environments an urgent one. Nationally, about half the homes and businesses needed by 2030 have not yet been
built (Nelson, 2004). If these new places are designed to encourage physical activity and healthy eating, they will
benefit both planetary and personal health.
Page 16 of 31
Page 17 of 31
Page 18 of 31
References
Adams, M., Ryan, S., Kerr, J., Sallis, J., Patrick, K., Frank, L., et al. (2009). Validation of the Neighborhood
Environment Walkability Scale (NEWS) items using geographic information systems. Journal of Physical Activity
and Health, 6, S113.
Agrawal, A., Schlossberg, M., & Irvin, K. (2008). How far, by which route, and why? A spatial analysis of pedestrian
preference. Journal of Urban Design, 13(1), 8198.
Ainsworth, B. E. (2002). The Compendium of Physical Activities Tracking Guide. Prevention Research Center,
Norman J. Arnold School of Public Health, University of South Carolina. Retrieved from
http://prevention.sph.sc.edu/tools/docs/documents_compendium.pdf.
Atkinson, J. L., Sallis, J. F., Saelens, B. E., Cain, K. L., & Black, J. B. (2005). The association of neighborhood design
and recreational environments with physical activity. American Journal of Health Promotion, 19(4), 304309.
Badland, H., & Schofield, G. (2006). Perceptions of replacing car journeys with non-motorized travel: Exploring
relationships in a cross-sectional adult population sample. Preventive Medicine, 43(3), 222225.
Ball, K., Bauman, A., Leslie, E., & Owen, N. (2001). Perceived environmental aesthetics and convenience and
company are associated with walking for exercise among Australian adults. Preventive Medicine, 33(5), 434440.
Ball, K., Cleland, V. J., Timperio, A. F., Salmon, J., Giles-Corti, B., & Crawford, D. A. (2010). Love thy neighbour?
Associations of social capital and crime with physical activity amongst women. Social Science and Medicine, 71(4),
807814.
Ball, K., Jeffery, R. W., Crawford, D. A., Roberts, R. J., Salmon, J., & Timperio, A. F. (2008). Mismatch between
perceived and objective measures of physical activity environments. Preventive Medicine, 47(3), 294298.
(p. 478) Bamberg, S. (2006). Is a residential relocation a good opportunity to change peoples travel behavior?
Results from a theory-driven intervention study. Environment and Behavior, 38(6), 820840.
Bassett, D. R., Schneider, P. L., & Huntington, G. E. (2004). Physical activity in an Old Order Amish community.
Medicine and Science in Sports and Exercise, 36(1), 7985.
Been, V. (2010). Building environmentally sustainable communities: A framework for inclusivity. Washington,
DC: Urban Institute.
Besser, L. M., & Dannenberg, A. L. (2005). Walking to public transit: Steps to help meet physical activity
recommendations. American Journal of Preventive Medicine, 29(4), 273280.
Page 19 of 31
Page 20 of 31
Page 21 of 31
Page 22 of 31
Page 23 of 31
Page 24 of 31
Page 25 of 31
Page 26 of 31
Page 27 of 31
Page 28 of 31
Page 29 of 31
Carol M. Werner
Carol M. Werner Department of Psychology University of Utah Salt Lake City, UT
Page 30 of 31
Introduction
It just seemed I understood sort of my place in the universe and that I am connected intimately to
everything around me. And this whole sense of self and worry and anxiety related to being separate is
really an illusion because there is no distinction. Theres just sort of, I am part of everything and theres no
need to be concerned about. So, thats basically a description of this life-altering epiphany.
Participant interview (Merrick, 2008)
Experiencing an epiphany, an aha moment, or a moment of intense clarity seems to be common to many people,
though occurring only infrequently for each individual. One can observe anecdotal and empirical evidence of
epiphany-like experiences in both ancient and modern writing on the subject. From religious texts, such as the
Bibles description of the conversion of Paul on the road to Damascus (as described in Keltner & Haidt, 2003), to
more modern stories, such as Ballards (2011) collection of over 50 epiphany stories from people of various
backgrounds, it is obvious that many people have experienced epiphanies and that these experiences have
changed their lives in very meaningful ways (see also Jauregui, 2007; Miller & Cde Baca, 2001).
Environmental epiphanies, that is, epiphanies that involve the human-nature relationship, probably occur even
more rarely. However, in our experience talking with members of the public, professionals, and academic groups,
most people have an immediate grasp of what it means to experience an environmental epiphany. We dont know
the exact frequency with which humans have epiphanies or environmental epiphanies, but we know anecdotally
that these experiences have left marked impressions and resulted in drastic behavioral shifts. (p. 486) Study of
Page 1 of 27
Page 2 of 27
Participants
Participants self-selected in response to posters and advertisements soliciting experiences of environmental
epiphanies. The sample comprised 34 adults from three geographical locations. Six were from a small semi-urban
community in the Southeastern United States; 12 were from a midsized Midwestern US college town; and 16 were
from a large metropolitan US urban area. The mean age of participants was 42 with a range from 19 to 72. Female
participants were 65% of the sample, while males were 35%. Participants were mostly white (88%), with Asian (6%)
and Hispanic (6%) populations represented. All participants had completed at least some college-level education,
with 41% having earned a college degree and 35% having earned an advanced degree.
Procedures
Merrick interviewed all participants using a semi-structured interview protocol. This protocol was a derivation of the
protocol used by Miller & Cde Baca (2001) in their study of insights and epiphanies and was used by permission.
Items involving the environmental and place-based elements of epiphanies were added to the existing protocol for
the purposes of this study. Participants answered items within the following categories: epiphany description, time,
beginning, experience, ending/aftereffects, general perspectives, other environmental epiphanies, and conclusion.
Merrick conducted and audio recorded all interviews in private settings, most of which were conference rooms at
academic or public facilities. The entire interview process lasted anywhere from 30 minutes to two hours, with most
lasting roughly one hour.
We transcribed each interview (N = 34) verbatim and initially reviewed each conversation as its own unit of
analysis. We assigned a descriptive title to each environmental epiphany to assist in referring to the stories
throughout the analysis and reporting process. All components of the interviews were entered into the QSR N6
qualitative data software program, with the categorical items (hand recorded at the time of the interviews) entered
into SPSS (Statistical Package for the Social Sciences) as well.
We used the process of content analysis to understand and interpret the results of these interviews. This process
involved both independent and collaborative systematic and repeated reviewing of the transcripts by both
investigators. Throughout this process, we identified emerging, repeated, and meaningful themes within and across
participant transcripts. We used the grounded theory method of analysis, which gives importance to the issues and
themes that the participants value instead of applying preexisting themes that might reflect our own ideas of
important content. Although this is a subjective undertaking, care was taken to ensure that our interpretations of
the transcripts were valid and consistent. One additional external coder (in addition to the two authors) reviewed
the relevant portions of the transcripts, and a coding scheme that reflected our collective interpretations was
devised. We made an effort to incorporate participants own language as much as possible into our coding
scheme, while maintaining the meaningfulness and personal nature of many of these stories.
Theoretical Foundations
Page 3 of 27
Page 4 of 27
Page 5 of 27
Applications
Environmental management is one significant example of where the findings of environmental epiphany research
could be integrated into practical applications. The role of emotion in environmental management and decisionmaking has been explored by Vining and her colleagues (Vining, 1987, 1992a; Vining & Schroeder, 1989a, 1989b;
Vining & Tyler, 1999; Kennedy & Vining, 2007). Vinings (1992a) findings indicated that land managers not only
Page 6 of 27
Review of Literature
Page 7 of 27
Page 8 of 27
Page 9 of 27
Page 10 of 27
Page 11 of 27
Page 12 of 27
Page 13 of 27
The methodology for our study of environmental epiphanies can be found in the introductory section of this
chapter. We outline some of our main findings below.
Descriptive Results
Participants average age at the time of the environmental epiphany was 32 with a range of 3 to 67. The 10-year
gap between the mean age at the time of the epiphany (32) and the mean age at the time of the interview (42)
suggests that these experiences were memorable and had long-lasting impressions. Although the age range is
wide, almost half of the experiences occurred in the teens and 20s. A little over 32% of epiphanies were reported
during the 30s and 40s, while almost 15% occurred in the 50s and 60s.
Environmental epiphanies were reported to occur at all times of day, with 29.4% of participants reporting their
epiphanies lasted as long as they were in their epiphany environment or engaged in their epiphany activity.
Outside of these enduring epiphanies, the most frequent time of day that epiphanies occurred was in the morning
(23.5%), with 11.8% occurring in the afternoon, 8.8% occurring in the evening, and only one occurring at night.
Several participants (11.8%) reported their experiences as occurring in the daytime, with no more specific memory
of the time of day. Over half (52.9%) occurred in the summer, with the next most frequent time of year being the fall
at 20.6%.
It was very difficult for participants to articulate the duration of their experiences. The most frequently reported
situation (29.4%) was one in which the epiphany lasted as long as the participant was in the epiphany place or
engaged in the particular activity that elicited the epiphany. However, a third of epiphany experiences (32.3%)
lasted five minutes or less. The duration of experiences ranged from a fleeting moment, often referred to as an
aha moment, to longer than an hour.
A majority of participants (73.5%) were in locations or engaged in activities that were unusual for them, with 26.5%
of participants reporting that they were engaged in routine activities or located in routine environments. Most
participants (70.6%) were not attempting to have an experience such as an environmental epiphany. However,
26.5% said that they were making an attempt to have this type of experience. Over half of participants (61.8%)
reported that the onset of their experience was sudden and nearly three-quarters of participants were surprised by
their experience. Participants descriptions of the ending of their experiences were almost exactly the opposite of
the onset of their experiences in terms of suddenness. The majority (61.8%) of participants reported experiencing
a gradual ending, while 38.2% reported a sudden ending. The role of others was significant in 41.1% of the stories,
but the majority of participants (58.8%) reported having a solitary experience.
Page 14 of 27
Epiphany Types
One main result of the content analysis of participants epiphany descriptions was the development of a typology
of environmental epiphanies, which included five discrete types of environmental epiphanies: aesthetic,
intellectual, realization, awakening, and connectedness. The aesthetic experiences were characterized by vivid
and awestruck (p. 499) descriptions of place in which participants were recognizing the beauty and aesthetic
value of nature and natural places, as the following quotation illustrates:
So, it was almostI felt like I wasin fact, I wrote down in my journalgoing through a sculpture garden
out herethe natural creativity of those [referring to glaciers]. There was a perfect little circle in one of
them. How do you explain that? We were just surrounded by them and then the snow-covered peaks and
the dark green of the forest coming right down to the water made it just a magical trip.
Intellectual epiphanies were experiences in which participants were exposed to new information (in these cases,
readings) that allowed them to adjust the way they viewed nature and their relationship with nature.
And it was just the most eye-opening life-changing book that Ive ever read. It justto realize that there
were pesticides being used that would persist on the earth for way beyond my lifetime and do horrible
things, killing indiscriminately.
Realization epiphanies were the most frequent in this data set. They were characterized are the realization of a
concept to which participants had been previously exposed. Many participants described these experiences as
the difference between knowing something and realizing something, two qualitatively different concepts to
participants. Realization epiphanies included stories that described a new awareness, an awareness of a different
option(s), a change in perspective, and overcoming the challenges of nature, as the following quotation illustrates.
This particular participant was discussing the challenge of climbing a mountain in Alaska:
And then that, just that feeling of satisfaction when you get the top. And that for sure propelled my feelings
for the rest of it and just kept adding on. And by the end, it was like, this is nothing, lets climb something
higher.
A slightly different and more intense type of epiphany was an awakening experience, in which participants
described feelings of an awakening, clarity, new vividness, a shift of consciousness, an awareness of the way
things should be, and nature as therapeutic and restorative. Many of these experiences were defined as lifechanging, life-affirming, or turning points.
And we were just miles and miles away, but I could see the Acropolis, just crystal clear and there was like a
beam of light coming down on it. And this experience really had nothing to do with the Acropolis; it had to
do with the quality of the light and the air. And I was just so overcome, you know, I was crying. And I just
Page 15 of 27
Emotions
Most participants (85.2%) reported having positive emotions during their epiphanies, while only 20.5% reported
having negative emotions. There were fewer positive emotions reported by intellectual participants than the other
types. Aesthetic, realization, and connectedness participants reported the highest levels of positive emotions. The
most frequently reported positive emotion was enjoyment and appreciation of beauty. The emotions of
awe/fascination and peacefulness were also frequently reported.
I was just so happy and I guess it made me realize that without areas like that.I mean, I had always had a
respect for nature.
Negative emotions were not experienced by aesthetic and intellectual participants and had lower incidences than
positive emotions within the remaining epiphany types. Most participants who described experiencing negative
emotions described them in comparison to the largely positive emotions that they experienced during the actual
epiphany. The most frequently occurring negative emotions were being upset, sadness, or trauma.
Many participants (65%) described their emotional state throughout their epiphany stories. Aesthetic and
awakening participants discussed an emotional context more than participants who experienced other primary
types of epiphanies. In this category, participants most frequently discussed being in a state of psychological
distress before their epiphany occurred. Thirty-eight percent of participants described being in a state of
psychological distress related to mortality issues, separation issues, or negative life circumstances before the
epiphany occurred. In addition, about one-fifth of participants described experiencing an emotional release or
outpouring of emotion during the actual epiphany experience. A couple of participants discussed the magical
Page 16 of 27
Travel
Two-thirds of participants described some type of journey or travel related to their epiphanies. Subcategories within
this coding category included being away, separation from the everyday, escape, novel experience, novel places,
adventure, and experiencing different cultures. About half of the participants who discussed travel spoke in terms
of experiencing a novel place or activity, such as in the following quotation:
Ive always been interested in nature and just being outdoors since I was younger, but I think that the point
when I really had an epiphany about itI think I was 16 and I was in Alaska on a backpacking trip.
Physical Activities
During the course of describing their environmental epiphanies, most participants described their physical (bodily)
activities or sensations, generally in regard to activities in which they were engaged at the time of the epiphany.
About 70% of participants reported participating in recreational activities at some point surroundings their
experiences. Two-thirds of the participants who discussed recreational activities were walking, hiking, or jogging;
30% were camping. Realization and awakening participants tended to be more likely to engage in recreational
activities surrounding their environmental epiphanies.
Objects of Interest
Many participants experiences centered on one or more objects of interest. These objects seemed to serve as
focal points, objects that were fascinating or inspiring to participants, or objects that propelled the experience in
some manner. These objects included nature objects (e.g., the sun, trees, water, mountains, glaciers), non-human
living beings (animals, insects), built objects, and celestial objects (see Merrick, 2008, for an exhaustive list). Over
80% of participants described objects of interest that we categorized as objects within nature.
Page 17 of 27
Page 18 of 27
Page 19 of 27
Some of the most important findings of this study were not reflected in the data analyses. One such finding was the
widespread response we received during the recruitment phase of this project. At one point, over 100 people were
on a waiting list to be interviewed about their environmental epiphanies. These people were from various
backgrounds, lived in two different American states, encompassed a wide range of ages, and were engaged in a
variety of professional activities. This suggests that the environmental epiphany phenomenon is relatively
widespread (at least in our recruitment populations). Our experience with this study, which is the first of its kind to
our knowledge, is that people immediately understand the concept and are grateful that researchers are interested
in a topic that is so personal and meaningful to them.
We also found that people were eager to share their epiphany stories. Many of the participants of this study
reported the feeling of elation and relief that they could finally share their environmental epiphany with someone.
Several participants communicated that they had been uncomfortable sharing their stories with others because of
the fear of rejection or negative reactions to airy fairy stories, filled with magic, wonderment, and serendipity.
Participants also requested that we consider hosting focus groups so that they could share their experiences with
others, as well as gain insights from other epiphany stories. Most important, participants expressed the desire for
their epiphanies to be taken seriously and given some validity.
Page 20 of 27
Page 21 of 27
Page 22 of 27
Page 23 of 27
Concluding Statements
Evidence from our development of this concept, our review of the literature, and our empirical study indicates that
environmental epiphanies may be universally understood, widespread, positive experiences with permanent
consequences. These experiences have been described as life-changing, turning points, and highly significant
and meaningful to those who encountered them. The changes experienced from environmental epiphanies
permeated all aspects of life, including relationships, spirituality, career choice, and environmentally responsible
behavior.
Implications from research concerning epiphany-like experiences can serve to inform environmental educators,
conservation psychologists, and land managers. Those interested in recreation, tourism, and environmental design
can also benefit from the insights gained from studying this phenomenon.
Given that environmental epiphanies may be a common type of life experience, it is essential that future research
be conducted to explore the phenomenon in greater detail, on a larger scale, and with more diverse populations.
The study of epiphany-like experiences, especially in relation to the human-nature relationship, is essential in our
understanding of the complex environmental dilemmas that we presently face.
Author note: We are equal coauthors and both participated materially in all phases of the research that is reported
here.
Acknowledgments
This study was funded by the USDA Forest Service Northern Research Station and we are very grateful for their
support. We would also like to express our gratitude to all of the participants of this study as well as our research
assistant for this project, Shannon OLaughlin. Finally, we thank Susan Clayton, the editor of this volume, for her
thoughtful suggestions throughout the writing of this chapter.
References
Ballard, E. (2011). Epiphany: True stories of sudden insight to inspire, encourage, and transform. New York:
Harmony Books.
Bott, S., Cantrill, J. G., & Myers, O. E., Jr. (2003). Place and the promise of conservation psychology. Human
Ecology Review, 10, 100112.
Brandenburg, A. M., & Carroll, M. S. (1995). Your place or mine? The effect of place creation on environmental
values and landscape meaning. Society and Natural Resources, 8, 381398.
Cantrill, J. G., & Senecah, S. L. (2001). Using the sense of self-in-place construct in the context of environmental
policy-making and landscape planning. Environmental Science & Policy, 4, 185203.
Chenoweth, R. E., & Gobster, P. H. (1990). The nature and ecology of aesthetic experiences in the landscape.
Landscape Journal, 9, 18.
Clayton, S. (2003). Environmental identity: A conceptual and an operational definition. In S. Clayton and S. Opotow
(Eds.), Identity and the natural environment (pp. 4565). Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Page 24 of 27
Page 25 of 27
Page 26 of 27
Melinda S. Merrick
Melinda S. Merrick Department of Geography and Environmental Studies Northeastern Illinois University Chicago, IL
Page 27 of 27
Introduction
The enjoyment of scenery employs the mind without fatigue and yet exercises it; tranquilizes it and yet
enlivens it; and thus, through the influence of the mind over the body gives the effect of refreshing rest
and reinvigoration to the whole system. (Olmsted, 1865/1952, p. 21)
For centuries, poets, planners, landscape architects, writers, and physicians have touted the salugenic virtues of
the natural environment. From Thoreau to Wordsworth to Olmsted, the rejuvenating properties of nature have been
praised. The prominence of gardens in hospitals of the 1800s offers further evidence of early beliefs that nature
proffered health benefits (Nightingale, 1860/1996). The importance of nature in residential settings, specifically, has
been a focus in a variety of poetic writings as well as practical proposals. For example, in the 1800s urban planner
Ebenezer Howard proposed garden cities as an alternative to the crowded and unhealthy city, and as a place
where residences would be surrounded by forests, parks, and farmland. In recent decades, empirical evidence has
begun to support the notion that the natural environment has a positive effect on human health (Frumkin, 2001;
Wells & Donofrio, 2011).
In this chapter, we review the evidence linking the natural environment to human health and well-being, with
specific focus on the residential environment. Although an exhaustive review is not possible in the space provided,
we attempt to present an overview of the evidence, focusing on five outcome variables or facets of human health
that have been linked to nature exposure: (1) general physical health, including physiological stress; (2) cognitive
functioning; (3) psychological or mental health; (4) social interaction; and (5) physical activity and obesity. In this
chapter, we do not address environmental preference (for review, see Kaplan & Kaplan, 1989) or the
environmental education literature (for review, see Rickinson, 2001); and, in large part, we do not address
evidence of the benefits of nature within health care settings, workplaces, schools, and other contexts. We do,
however, draw examples from laboratory studies and from these other (p. 510) settings to illustrate the relevance
to the residential environment. We review the empirical evidence as well as key theories and conclude with
suggestions for future research directions.
Page 1 of 18
In recent years, as more integration has occurred between environmental psychology research and other fields,
Page 2 of 18
Page 3 of 18
Page 4 of 18
Page 5 of 18
Page 6 of 18
Page 7 of 18
Page 8 of 18
Conclusion
Page 9 of 18
Dose-Response Relationships
Figure 27.1 Dose-Response Relations: How Much Nature Yields What Health Outcome?
One of the remaining issues in the study of natures relation to health concerns the amount or dose of nature
required to yield beneficial effects (e.g., Barton & Pretty, 2010) (see Figure 27.1). For example, how proximate must
a residence be to a park or open space for there to be a likely and significant association with physical activity
rates among residents? Similarly, how long or how much nature exposure is needed to enhance cognitive
functioning and recover from directed attention fatigue? Some studies suggest that window views of nature have a
potent influence (e.g., Tennessen & Cimprich, 1995); however, it is not clear whether window view might, in some
cases, be a proxy for the outdoor environment that residents not only view, but also spend time in. Future studies
might assess whether views of nature versus time spent in nature have an impact, and similarly how much time and
what level of engagement yields what outcome. Answers to such questions are important both theoretically and
Page 10 of 18
Moderators
Figure 27.2 Moderators Influence the Strength of the Relation Between Nature and Health
Moderators, or effect modifiers, can affect the strength or character of the association between nature and
health (Baron & Kenny, 1986). Moderators, might address issues of when there is an effect, in what context
(where) there is an effect, for whom, or under what circumstances is there an effect (see Figure 27.2). Moderators
are also known as interaction effectswhen two independent variables interact to affect the dependent variable.
Moderators are relevant to the study of nature-health linkages in two general ways. First, the influence of nature on
health outcomes may differ according to individuals age, gender, location, SES, or other factors. Thus, it is critical
to note, following the discussion of dose-response relations, that while we are interested in the question of how
(and how much) nature is needed to affect health outcomes, there may not be one-size-fits-all effects or
prescriptions. The association between nature and health may not be the same for young versus old; rich versus
poor; male versus female; or in winter versus summer. Additional empirical study of moderating variables will
enable a more refined understanding of the conditions and circumstances under which nature most effectively
enhances health.
Figure 27.3 Nature Exposure as a Moderator Between Stress or Adversity and Health
A second way to conceptualize moderators in relation to nature-health associations concerns nature exposure as
the moderator (see Figure 27.3). In this case, nature may buffer or mitigate the impact of stress, adversity, or risk
factors on health and function. A few studies have examined the role of nature as a buffer. For example, Mitchell
and Popham (2008) found that in a large sample from the English population, exposure to green space moderated
the relation between poverty and health (specifically mortality from all causes and circulatory disease). Incomerelated inequalities were less pronounced among residents with more nature exposure. Wells and Evans (2003)
found that access to nature moderated the effect of stressful life events on the psychological well-being and global
self-worth of rural youth. Children with more nearby nature were less detrimentally affected by stressors. These
studies examining nature as a moderator or an effect modifier illustrate that views of and access to nature in the
residential environment may function as a resilience resource (Wells, 2012), reducing the detrimental impact of
environmental or social risk factors (Luthar & Cicchetti, 2000).
The examination of moderators (or effect modifiers) is an important facet of future studies examining the linkages
between the natural environment and health. The inclusion of moderators (i.e., interaction effects) can be
considered as strategies to elucidate both how third variables affect the nature-health relation and how exposure
to nature might moderate the relation between other environmental characteristics (e.g., stressors) and health
outcomes.
Page 11 of 18
Figure 27.4 Mediators are Intervening, Explanatory Mechanisms Linking Nature and Health
As growing evidence links residential nature with health outcomes, greater understanding can be reached through
the investigation of mediating mechanisms. Mediators are intervening causal variables that explain why or how one
variable affects another and provide insight concerning the mechanism or pathway (Baron & Kenny, 1986) (see
Figure 27.4). For example, Sugiyama and colleagues (2008) found that recreational walking mediated the relation
between perceived neighborhood greenness and mental health. In her study of women living in poverty, Kuo
(2001) documented that the linkage between proximity to green space and effective functioning was mediated by
reduced mental fatigue. In addition to enhancing our theoretical understanding of how nature affects health,
mediation studies are also very practical. Elucidation of causal mechanisms suggests leverage points that policy or
intervention strategies might also target (p. 520) (in addition to the independent variable) to affect changes in
human health and well-being. For example, if physical activity is one pathway through which proximity to
residential nature affects physical health, then intervention strategies might be multi-pronged, aimed at increasing
nearby nature and directly promoting physical activity.
References
Baron, R. M., & Kenny, D. A. (1986). The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psychological research:
Conceptual strategic and statistical consideration. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 51(6), 1173
1182.
Barton, J., & Pretty, J. N. (2010). What is the best dose of nature and green exercise for improving mental health? A
multi-study analysis. Environmental Science & Technology, 44, 39473955.
Bedimo-Rung, A. L., Mowen, A. J., & Cohen, D. A. (2005). The significance of parks to physical activity and public
health. American Journal of Preventive Medicine, 28(2S2), 159168.
Bell, A. C., & Dyment, J. E. (2008). Grounds for health: The intersection of green school grounds and healthpromoting schools. Environmental Education Research, 14(1), 7790.
Bell, J. F., Wilson, J. S., & Liu, G. C. (2008). Neighborhood greenness and 2-year change in body mass index of
children and youth. American Journal of Preventive Medicine, 35(6), 547553.
Berman, M., Jonides, J., & Kaplan, S. (2008). The cognitive benefits of interacting with nature. Association for
Psychological Science, 19(12), 12071212.
Berto, R. (2005). Exposure to restorative environments helps restore attentional capacity. Journal of Environmental
Psychology, 25, 249259.
Bodin, M., & Hartig, T. (2003). Does the outdoor environment matter for psychological restoration gained through
running? Psychology of Sport and Exercise, 2003(4), 141153.
Page 12 of 18
Page 13 of 18
Page 14 of 18
Page 15 of 18
Page 16 of 18
Page 17 of 18
Kimberly A. Rollings
Kimberly A. Rollings Department of Design and Environmental Analysis Cornell University Ithaca, NY
Page 18 of 18
Page 1 of 32
Page 2 of 32
Figure 28.1, Factors Associated with Action for the Environment, synthesizes the results of studies with both child
and adult samples that identify factors that predict pro-environmental behaviors (adapted from Chawla, 2009).
Influences on action include two forms of knowledge: direct experience through immersion in the natural world or
learning how to protect it through trial and error; and secondhand information about environmental issues and
problem-solving from sources such as books, films, or other peoples instruction and stories. The figure also shows
that a sense of efficacy to achieve valued goals is crucial, which people gain when they discover that they can
have an impact on the world, working either alone or in groups. Just as positive experiences in nature feed a
motivation to protect the natural world, satisfying experiences in the course of taking action fuel engagement.
People are drawn to act because they come to care for intrinsic qualities of nature, particular places, or the wellbeing of people who are affected by the environment, (p. 529) because they internalize social norms of
environmental responsibility, and because they develop an identity of connection to nature.
As a framework for understanding the associations that Figure 28.1 summarizes, this review is guided by principles
of ecological psychology (Heft, 2001, this volume) and social learning theory (Bandura, 1997) related to the
development of agency and motivation. The ecological psychology of James Gibson (1979), Eleanor Gibson and
Anne Pick (2000), and Edward Reed (1996a, 1996b) is a particularly well-suited foundation for the study of
childrens developing relations with the environment, as it directs attention to the qualities of places that children
encounter and the social contexts of their experiences. Grounded in the evolutionary theory of Darwin, it is
consistent with underlying principles of the Tbilisi Declaration and Agenda 21: that human beings depend on wellfunctioning ecosystems for survival; that they can discover the environments resources and limits through direct
perception as well as instruction; and that they can adaptively adjust their behavior. Its concept of affordances
(the potentials for action that the environment provides a living creature relative to its capabilities), as well as a
belief in intrinsic value and meaning in the environment, can be applied to childrens encounters with nature and
help explain why people who take action on the environments behalf often have an early history of free play and
exploration in nature (Chawla, 2007).
Although ecological psychology emphasizes how children learn from direct experiences of the world, Reed
(1996a) described how these encounters are influenced from infancy by other people. A key mechanism is joint
attention, when children turn their attention to features of the world that other people are noticing, and later begin
to control attention themselves by pointing and naming things. In the process children learn what people around
them consider worth noticing and how they appraise it, and they find their own spontaneous interests either
encouraged, reprimanded, or ignored. Thus a nearby natural area can be a place of fascination that a family
explores and appreciates together, a scary place that children are forbidden to enter, or something barely noticed
as children ride by in the family car.
These principles are consistent with the social learning theory of Bandura (1997), who marshals evidence to the
effect that people develop a sense of efficacy most effectively when they have opportunities to practice action to
achieve valued goals, they experience for themselves how the world responds to their efforts, and they taste at
least some measure of success. One reason why play in nature may figure so prominently in the memories of
people who show care for the environment is that natural areas are places where children can set challenges at
levels they choose for themselves and enjoy the effects of their actions: new vistas, for example, as they climb
Page 3 of 32
Page 4 of 32
Page 5 of 32
Page 6 of 32
Page 7 of 32
Page 8 of 32
Page 9 of 32
Page 10 of 32
Page 11 of 32
Classroom-Based Curricula
What distinguishes the studies described in this section is that students work through a predetermined curriculum
that is delivered primarily within school wallsalthough in successful programs associated with increases in proenvironmental behavior, in-class instruction is combined with activities that extend beyond the classroom. A water
conservation unit evaluated by Aird and Tomera (1977), for example, gave sixth-grade students two weeks of
Page 12 of 32
Page 13 of 32
Page 14 of 32
Place-Based Education
Place-based education makes the walls between a school and its community permeable by using the local
community and environment as an integrating context to teach subjects across the curriculum (Powers, 2004;
Sobel, 2005). The school invites resource people from the community into classrooms and sends students out to
work on local issues. It is not a new idea: Dewey (1938) recommended experiential learning and many progressive
schools have practiced it. Since a 40-school study by Lieberman and Hoody (1998) demonstrated that placebased education increases student engagement in learning, raises student grades and scores on standardized
tests, and improves attendance and behavior, there has been a resurgence of interest in this approach. The IIAT
curriculum has elements of place-based education when it involves students in investigating local issues, but as a
movement, place-based education goes beyond single classrooms and subjects to involve whole schools in the
interdisciplinary study of local environments and in projects to improve the school itself or the community.
According to a qualitative evaluation of the Jaegerpris Project in Denmark, a form of place-based education that
created school-community partnerships to solve local environmental problems, students identified three aspects of
this approach as most important: authenticity, as it involves real issues; their participation in forming action plans
and making decisions; and their ability to take meaningful actions (Jensen, Kofoed, Uhrenholdt, & Vognsen, 1995).
In his portrait of a high school in Oregon where students learn by creating and implementing action plans related to
five domains of sustainability, Smith (2011) observed that this approach cultivates a sense of community, care for
individuals and the environment, and students confidence that they can make a positive difference in the world.
Implemented in this way, place-based education exemplifies learning through as well as from action (McLaren &
Hammond, 2005).
Duffin, Powers, Tremblay, and PEER Associates (2004 ) examined outcomes for schools across New England that
belonged to a Place-based Education Evaluation Collaborative (PEEC). Students engaged in activities such as
community mapping, creating sustainable schools, studying local forests, and improving local environments. The
evaluation was guided by a dose response measurement strategy on the premise that the more that schools
trained teachers in this approach and offered place-based activities to students, the greater the impacts would be.
As predicted, there was a positive correlation between teachers level of training and engagement and student
outcomes, including civic engagement and stewardship behaviors. Students with more engaged teachers were
more likely to say that in the past two months they had done something to take care of their neighborhood or
community, either with classmates or on their own time. Duffin et al. (2004) (p. 542) also found that there appears
to be a tipping point when place-based learning becomes integrated into the school culture and new teachers
adopt it as the school norm. (Survey sample sizes, with some variation per question, were approximately 300 for
teachers and 1,400 for students.)
A need for time to embed place-based learning in school practices may partly explain the limited outcomes
associated with the first year of the introduction of a Green Schools project in western Quebec (Legault & Pelletier,
2000). Schools that joined the project integrated ecological topics across subject areas and involved students in
initiatives such as recycling, composting, and energy conservation on the school site. In pre- and post-test
comparisons between 85 sixth-grade students in Green Schools versus 99 students in classes that lacked any
formal ecological program, students in Green Schools were significantly less likely to say that they engaged in
ecological behaviors for extrinsic motives, but otherwise they did not report more pro-environmental behaviors.
The Green Schools and PEEC evaluations reflect different goals and measures. Like studies of classroom-based
curricula and the IIAT approach that came before them, Legault and Pelletier (2000) surveyed students
Page 15 of 32
Page 16 of 32
Page 17 of 32
Page 18 of 32
Page 19 of 32
Page 20 of 32
Page 21 of 32
Page 22 of 32
Page 23 of 32
References
Page 24 of 32
Page 25 of 32
Page 26 of 32
Page 27 of 32
Page 28 of 32
Page 29 of 32
Page 30 of 32
Page 31 of 32
Victoria Derr
Victoria Derr College of Architecture and Planning University of Colorado Boulder, CO
Page 32 of 32
Introduction
Humans stand at the tipping point, brought about by our unsustainable use of natural resources. While human
activity has always affected the local natural environment, these effects are magnified by the number of people
living on the planet, and by the technology used to support our lifestyles.
Fortunately, people can change. Behavior can change. Technology can change. Given the link between
environmental problems and human behavior, any solution will require that people do things differently. While
solutions will take a variety of pathwaysfrom political, technological, community-based programs, or individual
choicesany solution to environmental problems will require changes in behavior (Midden, Kaiser, & McCalley,
2007).
This chapter summarizes the theories and research findings from more than 40 years of work on pro-environmental
behavior. Our aim in this chapter is not to advocate for a specific approach, but rather to provide a broad overview
of the various approaches, theoretical foundations, and limitations. We begin by making a case for the importance
of a behavioral perspective in understanding and solving environmental problems. While this is probably not an
issue for most readers of this volume, it is certainly a major issue outside of psychology (Kazdin, 2009). Following
this brief introduction, we then proceed to summarize the major approaches that have been used to understand
and promote pro-environmental behavior. In organizing these models, we differentiate between approaches that
focus on the person, and those that focus on the context.
Page 1 of 31
An Impact-Oriented Approach
Two dominant approaches have been used to study pro-environmental behavior: one focused on impact, and a
second focused on intention (Stern, 2000b). On the one hand, pro-environmental behavior can be approached
from an impact orientation perspective (Steg & Vlek, 2009). From this perspective, the term pro-environmental
refers to behaviors that contribute to the sustainability of the natural environment. For example, pro-environmental
behavior can include conservation of resources such as water or energy, or reductions in pollution. The definition
emphasizes the outcome of the behavior, rather than the motivation behind it. From this perspective, a persons
intentions can often deviate from reality, and while a person may aim to engage in a pro-environmental behavior,
they often fail to engage in actions that have an environmentally significant consequence (Whitmarsh, 2009).
The impact-oriented approach makes no assumptions about underlying motivations, such that a person can
engage in a pro-environmental behavior for non-environmental reasons. In addition, the approach is relative, in
that these are behaviors that contribute to environmental protection. As pointed out above, there is no absolute
standard for determining whether a behavior has a large or small environmental impact, so the emphasis for
Page 2 of 31
Category*
Potential emissions
reduction (MtC)
Behavioral
plasticity (%)
RAER
(MtC)
RAER
(%I/H)
Weatherization
25.2
90
21.2
3.39
HVAC equipment
12.2
80
10.7
1.72
Low-flow
showerheads
1.4
80
1.1
0.18
Efficient water
heater
6.7
80
5.4
0.86
Appliances
14.7
80
11.7
1.87
Low-rollingresistance tires
7.4
80
6.5
1.05
Fuel-efficient
vehicle
56.3
50
31.4
5.02
8.7
30
3.7
0.59
Tune up AC
3.0
30
1.4
0.22
Routine auto
maintenance
8.6
30
4.1
0.66
Laundry
temperature
0.5
35
0.2
0.04
Water heater
temperature
2.9
35
1.0
0.17
Standby electricity
9.2
35
3.2
0.52
Thermostat
setbacks
10.1
35
4.5
0.71
Line drying
6.0
35
2.2
0.35
Driving behavior
24.1
25
7.7
1.23
Carpooling and
trip-chaining
36.1
15
6.4
1.02
123
20
Totals
233
Page 3 of 31
Intention-Orientation
The second approach for studying pro-environmental behavior has taken an intention-orientation, and thereby
defined it as the degree to which the person wants to produce a positive environmental outcome (Kaiser, 1998).
From this perspective, what is important is the underlying motivational basis for a persons actions (Kaiser &
Wilson, 2000, 2004). In their goal-directed theory of behavior, Kaiser et al., (2007) suggested that proenvironmental behaviors can be arrayed along a single motivational dimension, ranging from easy to difficult. At
the core is a persons motivation to protect the natural environment, which can be deduced from his or her actions
(Kaiser et al., 2010). The more strongly motivated the person is to protect the environment, the more (p. 559)
barriers he or she will overcome in an attempt to achieve this goal. A pro-environmental behavior is thus defined
from this perspective as: a behavior intended to contribute toward the sustainability of the natural environment.
Page 4 of 31
Information Campaigns
From the earliest days of the environmental movement, environmental psychologists have been skeptical that
factual information would be sufficient to change behavior. Indeed, evidence from 40 years of research has clearly
Page 6 of 31
Page 7 of 31
Prompts
Prompting is an antecedent approach. Antecedent approaches like prompts occur before the behavior. Prompts
can be printed, verbal, or auditory messages that designate desirable behaviors. Examples would include a
message to Please turn out the lights posted on an office door, Only rain in the drain stenciled on a city storm
water drain, or Recycle your bottles posted near a trash can in a food court.
Prompts have been used effectively across a number of environmental domains, including energy conservation
(Oceja & Berenguer, 2009; Winett, 1978), litter prevention (Durdan, Reeder, & Hecht, 1985; de Kort, McCalley, &
Midden, 2008), and recycling (Austin et al., 1993). In summarizing the studies on prompts, Geller (1982) suggested
that prompts are most effective when the behavior is relatively simple, clearly defined, and placed in close
proximity to where the behavior will occur. There is also some evidence to suggest that prompts should be worded
positivelyfor example, Recyclables here rather than the negative Dont litter. In addition, politely worded
prompts tend to produce better responses than do direct or commanding prompts. Further, work by Werner et al.,
(1998) suggests that prompts should work to activate an existing schema for a desirable behavior or override a
schema for an undesirable behavior.
Page 8 of 31
Contingencies
Whereas prompting is an antecedent strategy to changing behavior, contingencies occur after the behavior.
Contingencies can be based on a specific action or tied to an outcome, and they involve administering a
consequence to the individualeither a reward or a punishment. In the environmental arena, punishments include
various forms of disincentives and penalties, such as fines for littering, large cost increases for electricity use
above (p. 563)
Table 29.3 Four Types of Consequence Strategies in Behavior Analysis
Nature of Consequence
Apply
Action with
Consequence
Remove
Pleasant
Unpleasant
Negative Reinforcement
Negative Punishment
Three-month suspension of
license for driving 80 mph
(response based)
Page 9 of 31
The efficacy of behavior analysis (and especially contingency strategies) at promoting pro-environmental behavior
has been well documented, and readers are referred to other more comprehensive reviews of this material (Dwyer
et al., 1993; Geller, 1987, 2002; Lehman & Geller, 2004; Porter et al., 1995). The research shows that offering a
reward following a desired behavior generally increases its frequency. Providing a punishment following a behavior
generally decreases its frequency. We highlight three examples below to illustrate the point.
1. Gasoline prices. In the United States, the cost of gasoline is relatively cheap. Compared to Europe, gas prices
generally run about 50% less in the United States; as a result, Americans drive more compared to, for example,
their British counterparts (7,753 average miles per year, compared with 3,406 miles per year; OBrien & Zoumbaris,
1993). In 2003, the average retail price for a gallon of gasoline in the United States was $1.50 (about 40 cents per
liter). But during 2007, gasoline prices rose dramatically to exceed $3/gallon on a national average (in some states,
such as California, the price exceeded $5/gallon). Unlike the shortages in the 1970s, the crisis in 2007 was one
of cost and not of availability. Gasoline was in plentiful supply, but the uncertainty introduced by international
conflicts and political discourse resulted in skyrocketing prices.
The behavioral response to the increasing price was clear. Consistent with behavior analysis, the changing
contingency resulted in reductions in consumption. The average number of miles driven by motorists decreased;
motorists made fewer trips by car; carpooling and ride sharing increased, as did use of mass transit; and
purchasing patterns shifted toward more fuel-efficient vehicles (Congressional Budget Office, 2008).
2. Bottle bills. In many countries around the world, there is an added charge attached to the purchase of
beverage containers. These deposits are then refunded to the customer upon return of the container, thereby
providing a contingency for the behavior. (p. 564) While such bottle bills are politically contentious, the
behavioral research is clearin areas with a bottle bill, recycling rates are higher and littering rates are lower
(Institute for Applied Research, 1980; Levitt & Leventhal, 1986; Shireman, 1993). In some instances, the return rate
for bottles in locations with a deposit exceeds 90% (R3 Consulting Group, 2009).
3. Variable fees improve efficiency of trash collection. Trash collection is an important service offered to
residents. But often there is little incentive to reduce the amount of refuse that is put out for collection. The cost is
fixed, regardless of the volume. A promising alternative can be found in pay-as-you-throw programs, whereby
recycling is collected for free, but trash is charged by the volume or weight. In one such program, the City of
Seattle introduced a program whereby residents were charged per can that was placed out for collection
(recycling was collected for free). The results showed that in the ensuing years, the amount of trash collected
decreased dramatically, while the amount of recyclables increased. Prior to the start of the program, the average
household used 3.5 cans of trash per week; after several years with the program in place, the average had
dropped to only 1 can per household (Cuthbert, 1994; Shireman, 1993).
Limitations. Given the clear results for the efficacy of behavior analysis to promote pro-environmental behavior,
the reader might wonder why such strategies are not used more extensively. In this short section, we summarize
some of the limitations with the approach. Our focus is on direct financial incentives, both response-contingent and
outcome-contingent, although similar critiques have been leveled at other forms of contingencies (Deci, Koestner,
& Ryan, 1999).
1. Cost. One of the most apparent limitations with the behavior analytic approach is cost. While the approach can
clearly provide large-scale changes in behavior, the funds required to monitor and then incentivize these changes
are often prohibitive. As an example, consider the case of residential energy-efficiency programs. There is
abundant evidence that homes in the United States and worldwide could be much more energy efficient. Oftentimes
simple one-time actions, such as adding extra attic insulation or installing more efficient water heaters, can
produce large aggregated reduction in residential energy use. But for a variety of reasons, home owners are
reluctant to make these investments (Stern & Aronson, 1984).
An example of a very effective, but costly, program can be found in the Hood River project (Hirst, 1987, 1988). The
program involved two steps: a home energy audit, which resulted in a series of recommended retrofit actions,
coupled with direct financial incentives up to $4,000 per household to complete the work. Whereas typical
residential retrofit programs have participation rates below 10%, the Hood River project was able to motivate 85%
of residents within a geographic region to complete one or more major home-retrofit activities. The authors
Page 10 of 31
Page 11 of 31
Public Commitments
A number of studies have tested public commitments as a strategy for promoting pro-environmental behavior
(DeLeon & Faqua, 1995; Mathies, Klckner, & Preissner, 2006; Katzev & Wang, 1994). To illustrate, Wang and
Katzev (1990) obtained a written commitment to recycle paper from residents in a retirement home. The
commitment read:
We, the residents of the 2nd floor, are willing to participate in the paper recycling project sponsored by the
Reed College Environmental Group. It is understood that any recyclable paper can be placed in the
RECYCLE garbage can. We commit ourselves to participating in this recycling project for the next four
weeks. (p. 267)
Results showed a 47% increase in the amount of material recycled in the four weeks following the commitment, and
the increase persisted across an additional four-week follow-up.
In a second study, Katzev and Wang (1994) extended the approach to students living in a campus dormitory.
Using a similar pledge, the students signed a commitment form stating, We commit ourselves to participating in this
recycling project for the next 4 weeks. The forms were signed either individually or in a group context during the
monthly hall meeting, and the recycling volumes were compared to a control group (information only) and an
incentive group (coupons from local businesses in exchange for participation). During the four-week intervention
phase, participants in all three treatment groups recycled more frequently and more material than participants in
the control condition. However, during a four-week follow-up phase after the treatment was discontinued, (p. 566)
participation rates and recycling volume dropped for the incentive condition and the group commitment condition,
although the rates remained higher than the control (see also Burn & Oskamp, 1986).
Similar evidence comes from a study by Matthies et al., (2006). The behavioral focus was on transportation mode,
and the researchers tested the efficacy of a commitment intervention at promoting bicycling and mass transit use.
In the commitment condition residents were asked to sign a pledge to engage in specific actions. Although
residents had a choice in which actions they selected, all were related to climate-saving activitiesfor example, I
commit to use public transportation at least one time during the next two weeks for my regular trip. The
intervention began with a series of telephone interviews to assess attitudes and beliefs, followed by a free ticket to
use the transit system, and then in the third phase a request for a commitment. Results showed that the
commitment was effective at changing transit mode, but the impact was particularly strong for participants who had
previously indicated during the interview that they felt a personal moral obligation to engage in climate-saving
activities (see also Menses & Palacio, 2007).
Another remaining question is a persons willingness to make a commitment. In the studies cited above,
commitments were shown to produce an aggregated effect, and most participants were willing to make the
commitment. But what about individuals who choose not to make the commitment? And what variables predict
willingness to commit? Some initial data on this topic were provided by Lokhorst, van Dijk, and Staats (2009). Their
results showed that willingness to commit is a function of dispositional and situational factors. In two studies, they
found that individuals who are more trusting (dispositionally) showed the strongest tendency to make a
commitment, but only when there was little social support for the initiative. When there was high social support, less
trusting individuals showed the strongest tendency to commit.
Taken together, the results suggest that making a commitment to engage in a behavior increases the likelihood of
doing it. However, ambiguities remain around the nature of the commitment (private versus public), the durability of
the behavior change, and the requisite boundary conditions that can enhance or detract from the effect.
Social Norms
Page 12 of 31
Social Dilemmas
A social dilemma is a situation in which the interests of the individual are at odds with the interests of the group. For
each individual, acting in ways that maximize their personal interest has a detrimental effect on the group (for a
review, see Kramer, Tenbrunsel, & Bazerman, 2010). Consider the case of cigarette butt disposal for a smoker in
an outdoor public location. For the individual, it is often easiest not to use an ashtray. The effort, cognitive
resources, and time required to find an ashtray for proper disposal are typically more extensive than simply
throwing the butt on the ground. But not properly disposing has harmful effects on the environment, and in
aggregate, has deleterious consequences for the group. In a social dilemmas framework, acting in the best interest
of the collective is termed cooperation and acting in ones personal interest is termed defection (Gibson &
Murnighan, 2010; Komorita & Parks, 1996).
Page 13 of 31
Psychological research on social dilemmas has explored a number of variables that predict whether a person will
choose to cooperate. These include personal qualities such as moral integrity, values, and social value orientation
(Kramer et al., 1986; Van Lange, 1999). Research has also identified strategic responses that can lead to
cooperation, and for example, individuals are more likely to cooperate after others who are harvesting from the
pool first choose (p. 568) to cooperate. And finally, social dilemmas research has explored structural solutions
that can facilitate cooperation, including privatization, establishing a managing authority, incentivizing
conservation, and punishments for overharvesting (Dawes & Messick, 2000; Gifford, 2008; Jost & Kay, 2010).
While social dilemmas provide a useful framework for understanding pro-environmental behavior, very few studies
have used the framework to promote behavior change in a real-world context. In summarizing the existing
research, Van Vugt (2009) offered guidance for behavior change interventions utilizing a commons dilemmas
framework. He suggested four important considerations, with each based on a core motivation: information,
identity, institutions, and incentives (see Table 29.4).
Information. One of the persistent features of a commons dilemma is uncertainty. The size of the shared
resource and the level of consumption by others within the group are often unknown. Thus, providing
individuals with accurate information can play an important role in promoting pro-environmental behavior. For
example, Van Vugt and Samuelson (1999) found that during a water shortage, individuals who believed that the
problem was caused by overconsumption were less likely to conserve than individuals who attributed the water
shortage to weather.
Identity. Individuals who feel a stronger connection to and identity with their group are more likely to engage
in cooperative behaviors, and there is even evidence that high-identifying group members will attempt to
compensate for overconsumption by other group members (Brewer & Kramer, 1986). In a recent example,
Sanna et al., (2009) showed that when primed to think about superordinate collective identities, participants
cooperated in a commons dilemma (harvesting fish) more often than did participants primed to think about selfinterest.
Trust in institutions. In commons dilemmas, overconsumption is often the result of unrestricted harvesting
by individuals. But in many instances, governmental, corporate, or community groups can serve to buffer
individual actions by imposing rules and limits. But a key element in the effectiveness of these institutions is their
perceived trustworthiness. The extent to which an individual has confidence in the institutional controls plays an
important role in his or her decisions to cooperate. Particularly relevant are perceptions of fairness, credibility,
and enforcement.
Incentives. Commons dilemmas result from individuals pursuing their personal interests, to the detriment of
the group. But through the use of incentives, it is often possible to align personal and collective interests. For
example, offering rebates for energy-efficient products, or subsidies for installing solar panels can motivate
individuals to take actions that benefit the group (Dietz et al., 2003). Data from Van Vugt and Samuelson (1999)
showed that during a water shortage, households with individual meters who were financially
Page 14 of 31
Table 29.4 Four Is: Core Motives and Foci of Interventions for Successful Commons Resource Management
and Potential Constraints
Focus of
Intervention
Core Motive
Description
Aim of intervention
Potential constraint
Information
Understanding
The need to
understand the
physical and social
environment
Reducing
environmental and
social uncertainty
Global environmental
problems are inherently
uncertain.
Identity
Belonging
Improving and
broadening ones
sense of community
Resource competition
between communities
increases overuse.
Institutions
Trusting
Increasing
acceptance of
commons rules and
institutions
Incentives
SelfEnhancing
Punishing overuse
and rewarding
responsible use
Economic incentives
undermine intrinsic
motivations to
conserve.
Page 15 of 31
Page 16 of 31
Environmental Education
Another biospheric approach to promoting pro-environmental behavior emphasizes the importance of education.
Importantly, environmental education is more than just presenting factual information about what to do or how to do
it (see previous section on the limitation of the knowledge-deficit approach to promoting behavior change). At a
general level, environmental education refers to formal and informal learning activities designed to teach
individuals about ecosystems and natural environments, the connection between human activities and natural
processes, and ultimately to encourage individuals to engage in pro-environmental behaviors (Palmer, 1998).
While there has been some disagreement about the relative emphasis on knowledge versus lifestyle choices, the
focus on promoting new patterns of behavior has been central to environmental education from its inception
(Bogner, 1998; Heimlich & Ardoin, 2008; UNESCO, 1978). Over the past 30 years, environmental education has
developed into its own field, with involvement from educators, biologists, policy makers, and social scientists.
Environmental education involves both formal and informal learning. Formal environments are primarily classrooms,
and there are a number of widely used curricular modules and materials developed for different age groups. In
fact, environmental education is an officially recognized curricular theme in many countries around the world, with
(p. 571) clearly explicated learning objectives (Palmer & Neal, 1994). In addition to classroom-based curricular
activities, environmental educational activities can also take place outside of the classroom in informal learning
environments, often as an extension to a recreational activity. Examples would include national parks, exhibits and
activities at zoos, aquariums, or museums, and even movies or media campaigns. As an illustration of such
informal learning environments, Bogner (1999, 2002) has shown how programs offered at national parks or field
centers can affect knowledge and attitudes among visitors.
The field of environmental education has grown steadily over the past 30 years, and the area is characterized by a
wide range of approaches and research methodologies. Yet reviews of the research consistently find that
educational activities can impact pro-environmental behavior (Leeming, Dwyer, Porter, & Cobern, 1993; Zelezny,
1999). In their review and synthesis of existing studies, Hart and Nolan (1999) concluded that:
The most obvious conclusion that emerges from these quantitative studies of environmental knowledge,
attitudes, and behaviour is a change toward more positive environmental attitudes among people of all
ages after exposure to some form, almost any form, of environment-related or even in-class environmental
education experience whether short or longer term. (p. 7)
In her meta-analysis examining the impact of environmental education activities on pro-environmental behavior,
Zelezny (1999) reported that both classroom-based activities and educational activities conducted in
nontraditional environments affected subsequent behavior. The effects were stronger for classroom-based
activities, and for interventions with younger participants.
Page 17 of 31
Page 18 of 31
Practical Considerations
In the preceding sections, we have summarized the research findings across a range of different approaches to
promoting pro-environmental behavior. In this final section, we take a more applied perspective and discuss
several practical considerations related to these behavior-change strategies.
Page 19 of 31
Page 20 of 31
Rebound Effects
New technologies offer exciting possibilities for promoting conservation. More efficient devices offer equal or
enhanced performance while using fewer natural resources. For example, CFC and LED lightbulbs use less energy
than traditional incandescent bulbs, while providing comparable lighting performance. Given this increased
efficiency, if a homeowner replaced all of the 100-watt lightbulbs in his home with 15-watt CFC bulbs, we would
expect an 85% reduction in energy used for lighting. Unfortunately, this rarely happens, and the realized energy
savings often fall short of projected technical estimates (Sorrell, 2007). In economics, this effect is referred to as
the Jevons paradox, named after the 19th-century scholar who first reported this effect in an analysis of coal
consumption during the industrial revolution in England. Jevons noted that as industries developed more efficient
ways to use coal, the demand increased rather than decreased (see also Alcott, 2008, and Madlener & Alcott,
2008).
In an individual-level analysis (as compared to an economic perspective), psychologists refer to this as a rebound
effect. The discrepancy between the projected and actual resource savings occurs because of changes in
behavioral patterns. In many instances, the individual realizes the added savings that result from the more efficient
technology and subsequently compensates by using it more often. A person who realizes that the CFC bulb is
using less energy might be less likely to turn it off when leaving a room. This direct rebound effect accounts for a
substantial portion of the discrepancy between projected and realized savings. Sorrell (2007) estimated
approximately 1030% in direct rebound effects, although the effect size varies across behavioral domain. In
addition, an indirect rebound effect has also been documented, whereby an individual engages in a more harmful
action in one domain after engaging in a pro-environmental behavior in another (cf., Mazar & Zhong, 2010). These
indirect rebound effects are also referred to as negative spillover (see below).
Behavioral Spillover?
In recent years, environmental psychologists have begun to examine spillover. That is, does engaging in one proenvironmental behavior increase the (p. 575) probability that the person will engage in similar behaviors? For
example, if we can persuade a person to install CFC lightbulbs, will that person then be more likely to engage in
other behaviors, such as purchasing energy-efficient appliances or even recycling? This research question builds
on the broader social psychological phenomenon of the foot-in-the-door effect (Burger, 1999). The data available
to date are mixed.
In a series of analyses, Thgersen (1999) and Thgersen and lander (2003) explored the possibility of behavioral
spillover. In the 2003 study, data are reported from a sample of 300 consumers measured annually over three
years. The design allowed the researchers to examine patterns of behavior over time and, using a cross-lagged
panel design, to test directly for behavioral spillover. The results provide some evidence for spillover, but also
suggest a more complicated pattern. First, their results show that three classes of behavior (recycling, buying
organic, and using public transit) remained relatively stable over time. However, with regard to spillover, the data
show evidence for both positive and negative spillover. That is, in some cases, engaging in a pro-environmental
behavior led to subsequent decreases in other pro-environmental behaviors. Finally, their analyses also show
evidence for moderated effects, such that individuals who are high in environmental values (operationalized with
Schwartzs measure of universalism) exhibited a greater likelihood of positive spillover, while participants with low
universalism tended to exhibit more evidence for negative spillover.
Several recent studies have explored negative spillover effects in more detail. Merritt, Effron, and Monin (2010)
described the process of moral self-licensing, whereby engaging in a virtuous behavior affords an individual more
latitude to engage in undesirable behaviors. For example, Effron, Cameron, and Monin (2009) showed that after
expressing support for presidential candidate Barack Obama, individuals were more likely to make discriminatory
Page 21 of 31
Conclusions
Research on pro-environmental behavior has a long history in environmental psychology. Across 40 years of
research and hundreds of empirical studies, one finding is clear: behavior can be changed. This chapter
summarizes these research findings, organized around behavior change strategies that target the person and
those that target the context. In organizing the research, the chapter categorizes these studies into egoistic,
social-altruistic, and biospheric approaches. The chapter also highlights the importance of contextual-level
variables in promoting pro-environmental behavior, and summarizes several lines of work in this vein. Finally, we
conclude with a discussion of practical considerations, including which behaviors to target, spillover, and the
potential for rebound effects.
Psychological research on pro-environmental behavior has uncovered a number of effective strategies for
promoting behavior change. As environmental issues continue to attract public and political attention, we foresee
many opportunities for psychological research to inform efforts to promote change. Rather than lamenting the fact
that human activity is causing environmental problems, or focusing exclusively on theoretical models that can
document or describe behavioral pattern, research by environmental psychologists offers a positive message.
Drawing on a solid empirical foundation, environmental psychologists can offer behavioral solutions for change.
While personal, societal, and global shifts toward more sustainable behavior patterns will certainly require changes
at multiple levels, psychologists have an important perspective to offer, and an important role to play in promoting
change.
References
Abrahamse, W., Steg, L., Vlek, C., & Rothengatter, J. A. (2005). A review of intervention studies aimed at household
energy conservation. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 25, 273291.
Alcott, B. (2008). Historical overview of the Jevons paradox in the literature. In J. Polimeni, K. Mayumi, M. Giampietro,
& B. Alcott (Eds.), The Jevons paradox and the myth of resource efficiency improvements (pp. 778). London:
Earthscan.
Altman, I., & Rogoff, B. (1987). World views in psychology: Trait, interactional, organismic, and transactional
perspectives. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.), Handbook of environmental psychology (Vol. 1, pp. 740). New York:
Wiley.
(p. 576) Anderson, R., Manoogian, S., & Reznick, S. (1976). The undermining and enhancing of intrinsic
motivation in preschool children. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 34, 915922.
Antonson, H., Mardh, S., Wiklund, M., & Blomqvist, G. (2009). Effect of surrounding landscape on driving behaviour:
A driving simulator study. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 29, 493502.
Austin, J., Hatfield, D. B., Grindle, A. C., & Bailey, J. S. (1993). Recycling in office environments: The effects of
specific, informative cues. Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 26, 247253.
Bamberg, S., Hunecke, M., & Blbaum, A. (2007). Social context, personal norms, and the use of public
transportation: Two field studies. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 27, 190203.
Page 22 of 31
Page 23 of 31
Page 24 of 31
Page 25 of 31
Page 26 of 31
Page 27 of 31
(p. 579) Opinion Dynamics Corporation. (2008). 20062008 statewide marketing and outreach process
evaluation: Final report. California Public Utilities Commission. Retrieved from
http://www.calmac.org/publications/ODC_Statewide_Marketing_and_Outreach_Process_Evaluation_and_Appendice
Opinion Dynamics Corporation. (2010). PY20062008 indirect impact evaluation of the statewide marketing and
outreach programs. Report for the California Public Utilities Commission. Retrieved from
http://www.energydataweb.com/cpuc/home.aspx.
Osbaldiston, R., & Schott, J. (2012). Environmental sustainability and behavioral science: Meta-analysis of proenvironmental behavior. Environment and Behavior, 44, 257299.
Oskamp, S. (2000). A sustainable future for humanity? How can psychology help? American Psychologist, 55, 496
508.
Oskamp, S., Zelezny, L., Schultz, P. W., Hurin, S., & Burkhardt, R., (1996). Commingled versus separated recycling:
Does sorting matter? Environment and Behavior, 28, 7391.
Palmer, J. (1998). Environmental education in the 21st century: Theory, practice, progress, and promise. New
York: Routledge.
Palmer, J., & Neal, P. (1994). The handbook of environmental education. New York: Routledge.
Porter, B. E., Keeming, F. C., & Dwyer, W. O. (1995). Sold waste recovery: A review of behavioral programs to
increase recycling. Environment and Behavior, 27, 122183.
R3 Consulting Group. (2009). Evaluating end-of-life beverage container management systems for California: Final
report. California Department of Conservation. Retrieved from
http://www.bottlebill.org/assets/pdfs/pubs/2009-BeverageSystemsCalifornia.pdf.
Saelens, B. E., Sallis, J. F., Black, J. B., & Chen, D. (2003). Neighborhood-based differences in physical activity: An
environment scale evaluation. American Journal of Public Health, 93, 15521558.
Sanna, L., Chang, E., Parks, C., & Kennedy, L. (2009). Construing collective concerns: Increasing cooperation by
broadening construals in social dilemmas. Psychological Science, 20, 13191321.
Page 28 of 31
Page 29 of 31
Page 30 of 31
Florian G. Kaiser
Florian G. Kaiser Department of Social Psychology Otto-von-Guericke University Magdeburg, Germany
Page 31 of 31
Introduction
Freshwater is one of the most precious and limited resources for humankind, and its integrity is seriously
endangered by a series of human factors, namely water overconsumption and contamination. Thus, in the past few
decades, issues related to the quantity and quality of freshwater resources have been a focus of political action,
scientific research, and public opinion (Carrus et al., 2010). Human use and a number of psychological processes
related to freshwater are among the main priorities in the current environmental agenda. This agenda includes
biophysical and human-social sciences activities as well as political action. According to experts, the depletion of
water resources is one of the most serious changes affecting our global environment (Brown & Flavin, 1999;
Rosegrant, Cai, & Cline, 2003). Currently about 1.4 billion people in the world do not have free access to
freshwater. According to the previsions of intergovernmental bodies, the entire world population in 2025 will be
over 8 billion, and 3 billion will be without available freshwater (UNESCO-WWAP, 2003). Humans consume more
than half of the worlds available freshwater, affecting the availability of the resource for wildlife and the integrity of
ecosystems everywhere (Prasanna, 2010). The gravity and complexity of this environmental problem require the
participation of all scientific disciplines, psychology included. Environmental psychology has dealt with issues
concerning water problems for several decades and, though no ultimate solution has been offered, we now
possess a clearer view of the psychological processes involved in water overconsumption and contamination that
have caused those environmental problems. With such information, interventional (p. 582) strategies intended at
changing nonsustainable water consumption practices can be developed and implemented.
Page 1 of 20
Overview
The second part of this chapter describes the situation of freshwater throughout the world, emphasizing the
challenges faced by the most water-deprived regions of the planet, as well as their perspective for the short and
long terms. In this part, the two most serious water problems are mentionedfreshwater depletion and
contaminationand the main human sources of these problems are also described.
In the following section, the psychological antecedents of freshwater depletion and contamination are discussed.
These include individual dispositional variables, as well as contextual (physical and social) factors. Briefly, the
section reviews a series of psychological and social theories that might explain why people overconsume and
contaminate water.
Subsequently, we define water conservation as a series of deliberate actions resulting in the conservation of such
a natural resource. This conservation implies a reduced consumption and the maintenance of freshwater
availability for further use (i.e., a noncontaminating consumption). A description of water conservationist behaviors
is included and the use of research instruments assessing these behaviors is discussed.
Then a section that deals with the personal and contextual antecedents of freshwater conservation and with the
psychological consequences of such conservation is presented. Although there is no research specifically
oriented toward studying the psychological consequences of water conservation, a series of reports dealing with
general ecological behaviors (freshwater conservation included) reveals that conservationist people are more
likely to experience positive psychological states. These reports are discussed.
The final sections integrate all the previous information. An explanatory model of water conservation, including its
contextual and psychological determinants, the behaviors defining freshwater conservation, and its positive
psychological consequences, is outlined. Next, prospective research lines on water conservation are discussed,
by mentioning what is necessary to investigate and what possible outcomes from such research might result in
terms of new knowledge and interventional strategies to effectively deal with water problems.
A Thirsty World
Freshwater scarcity is a crude reality in several regions of the planet. According to Gardner (2009), water
scarcity has diverse meanings. Physical water scarcity means that available water is insufficient to meet demand.
Page 2 of 20
Page 3 of 20
Contextual Factors
Facilitating conditions of physical, demographic, and normative nature exist that promote water overconsumption.
One of the most important contextual factors influencing water consumption is the size of the household, which of
course correlates with economic income. Affluent households consume much more water than low-income
households, regardless of family size and other demographic controls (Corral-Verdugo, 2002; Vickers, 2001).
Richer families also save less water when asked to conserve (De Oliver, 1999). According to Harlan, Yabiku,
Larsen, and Brazel (2009), excessive consumption by high-class residential users is very likely to increase class
inequality in basic human needs and access to a healthy environment. These authors claimed that the size of the
house is the most important intervening mechanism between household income and domestic water consumption,
which, they suggested, is associated with the number and size of water-intensive possessions in residences.
Larger households contain more indoor water amenities (spas, fountains, aquariums, and icemakers) and more
plumbing that is susceptible to leakage, and are more likely to engage in a careless use of water. In those homes
there are also more guests and entertainment, as well as more to clean and less concern for the water bill.
Although richer people are more educated than the poor, and education positively impacts environmentally friendly
attitudes (Guerin, Crete, & Mercier, 2001), these environmental attitudes are not always closely linked to water
conservation behavior (Gregory & Di Leo, 2003); besides, affluent individuals consume more goods and services
(Harlan et al., 2009).
Aitken, McMahon, Wearing, and Finlayson (1994), in Australia, found that water consumption mainly depends on
family size and the value of the household. In fact, Tinker, Bame, Burt, and Speed (2005), in the United States,
found that the appraised value of the household positively correlated with water consumption more than any other
socioeconomic variable. Families with larger number of members, and those living in more expensive households,
waste more water. Hanke and de Mare (1982) also reported those results in Sweden. In addition, Syme, Thomas,
and Salerian (1983) found that the value of home owners private gardens, the perception of such a value, and
economic income were important predictors of water consumption.
Page 4 of 20
Page 5 of 20
Page 6 of 20
Self-Reports
Questionnaires and interviews are two types of self-reports commonly used to obtain information regarding the
intensity or frequency of freshwater consumption behaviors. People express whether they engage in water-waste
behaviors (Kaiser, 1998; Middlestadt et al., 2001) and whether their consumption is excessive, moderate, or low, or
very frequent or infrequent (Bustos, 2004; Vaske & Kobrin, 2001); they can also indicate, by using numbers, how
many times they get involved in water consumption actions during a specific interval (Corral-Verdugo & Fras,
2006). Self-reports of freshwater use have a number of advantages over alternative assessment methods: they are
reliable and easy to administer, and allow gathering wide information with regard to environmental practices. A
disadvantage is their limited validity; Corral-Verdugo (2000) found low and nonsignificant correlations between
water conservation self-reports and the conservation registered through direct observations, as well as very low
correlations between the self-reports and water consumption recorded in water meters.
Page 7 of 20
Archival Analysis
It is possible to obtain relevant data for psycho-environmental research through the analysis of files containing
historical recordings of individual or collective behaviors. Information regarding the affiliation of people with
ecologist groups, or the record of products or natural resources consumptionwater includedof a social group
may be obtained. In regard to our topic, De Oliver (1999) studied the records of water consumption of San Antonio,
Texas, and Harlan et al. (2009) obtained records of consumption in a specific area of Phoenix, Arizona, which
allowed them to estimate residential consumption. As in the case of water billings, the measures these authors
utilized were valid for estimating group consumption. Yet, this validity decreases when attempts to calculate
individual behavior are made, since those archives refer to household water use.
Direct Observations
The validity of direct observations of behavior is acknowledged by psychological researchers (Bechtel, 1990).
Using this method, pro- or anti-environmental actions resulting in water waste or conservation may be recorded.
The first step implies the selection of the target behaviors. For instance, it can be decided to investigate behaviors
such as washing cars, watering plants, or washing clothes. Later, a recording sheet is designed in which the
observations will be annotated, and finally those observations and recordings are conducted. Corral-Verdugo
(2002) and Corral-Verdugo et al. (2003) reported examples of the use of this technique. Its validity is one of its
advantages; the difficulty of conducting the observation as well as the reactivity that may produce (when a
participant is aware of being observed) and a possible violation of the participants privacy are disadvantages
(Bechtel, 1990).
Page 8 of 20
According to Berk et al. (1980), at least five personal belief factors exist that enhance conservation and
consequently reduce the demand for water: (1) a belief that a water shortage exists and constitutes a problem for
a group with which an individual identifies; (2) a moral commitment to produce fair contributions to group welfare;
(3) a belief in the efficacy of personal efforts to achieve a collective solution; (4) a belief that the personal cost of
inconvenience resulting from conservation efforts will not be great; and (5) a belief that others in the relevant
group will also conserve. Dziegielewski (1994) confirmed that the belief in the seriousness of a water shortage is a
predictor of household water conservation. Similarly, Bruvold (1979) reported that perceived seriousness of a
drought predicted both per capita water consumption and water conservation behaviors.
Pro-ecological beliefs may also be significant determinants of freshwater conservation. In their paper, CorralVerdugo, Bechtel, and Fraijo (2003) reported that the general environmental beliefs of the new environmental
paradigm (Dunlap & Van Liere, 1978) had a positive effect on specific beliefs regarding water, which conceive it as
a valuable, exhaustible resource that requires conservation. Such specific beliefs, in turn, positively and directly
influenced water conservation. Fraijo et al. (2010), in studying Mexican children, found that those specific water
beliefs are a component of a pro-environmental competency of water conservation, while Martinportugus, Canto,
Garca and Hidalgo (2002) reported an effect of water beliefs on water conservation in Spanish teenagers. In
recent reports, Corral-Verdugo et al. (2008) and Carrus et al. (2010) found that general beliefs of a new human
interdependence paradigm (i.e., the idea that the physical environment might be preserved by humans and that
people need nature in order to survive) directly predict the self-report of water conservation.
In regard to perceptual factors, Hirose and Kitada (1987), in Japan, found that the perceived efficacy of
governmental water conservation (i.e., how much individuals believe that their government conserves water)
becomes a determinant of residential water conservation in a drought situation. Dziegielewskis (1994) findings
suggest that the perception that conservation measures are equitable predicts the support of household water
conservation. Also, the trust people confer upon their authorities leads them to accept measures of water
conservation, such as the installation of water-recycling plants (Bridgeman, 2004).
Behavioral Intentions
Most environmental psychologists consider conservationist behaviors to be deliberative responses. Stern (2000),
for instance, defined environmentalism in behavioral terms as the propensity to take actions with proenvironmental intent (p. 411). This means that water conservation actions should be guided by intentions to act,
to be considered pro-environmental. The theory of planned behavior (TPB) is the explanatory model that best
incorporates the deliberative component of conservationism. In short, the TPB posits that the immediate antecedent
of behavior is intention to act, which in turn is predicted by an attitude toward the given behavior (ACT), subjective
norm (SN), and perceived behavioral control (PBC). According to the TPB, attitudes are an individuals overall
evaluation of a given behavior and subjective norms as a persons belief about whether significant people (friends,
neighbors, or relatives) think he or she should engage in the specified behavior. PBC measures an individuals
perception of how easy or difficult a given behavior is to perform (Ajzen, 1991).
Trumbo and OKeefe (2001) used the TPB to predict water conservation intention and behavior in three US
Page 9 of 20
Situational Factors
Physical situations may be powerful inductors or facilitators of pro-environmental behaviors. For instance, living in
an environment with temperate weather makes easier the adoption of water conservation practices, as opposed to
living in a hot climate, which requires a more intensive consumption of the liquid to survive (Harlan et al., 2009). A
limited availability of water is also a significant inducer of water-saving behaviors. In Mexico, Corral-Verdugo (2002)
investigated the effect of a reduced supply of water on its consumption. His findings suggest that water scarcity is
one of the most important situational factors positively influencing the conservationist effort.
Having access to water-saving technologies also works in the effort of conserving the liquid. In the United States,
Geller, Erickson, and Buttram (1983) found that the use of water-saving devices was significantly effective as a
strategy for reducing the liquids consumption. Harlan et al. (2009) suggested that it is easier to require developers
to install water-saving technologies in new homes than to enforce new regulations on homeowners. The
technologies they mention include smart irrigation and gray-water recycling systems, community pools or smaller
pools, and pool covers.
Normative situational factors such as social norms and legal regulations may also induce water conservation, in
addition to the physical situations above mentioned. Harlan et al. (2009) indicated that cash or tax incentives to
convert yards to drier landscapes, purchase water-saving technologies, or reduce water usage are likely to work
Page 10 of 20
Behavioral Interventions
Kantola, Syme, and Nesdale (1983) used behavioral intention as an indirect measure of water conservation. They
found that those people who had seen a persuasive film about water conservation produced conservation
intentions superior to those of a control group that did not see the film.
Thompson and Stoutmeyer (1991) combined educational information with commitment and (p. 591) found that a
message focusing on the long-term environmental consequences of water conservation was a better strategy in
promoting a decreased water consumption than a message that stressed only the economic benefits that could
result from conservation. Southwell (2001) taught water conservation lessons to a group of students and measured
their impact on water conservation at home, with positive results. Fraijo et al. (2010) also used environmental
education to promote water conservation in children. They found that a 40-hour educational program resulted in a
decreased consumption of the liquid, as well as in increased conservationist motivation, skills, and beliefs.
Prompts and feedback are also used as strategies to promote freshwater conservation. Prompts including signs
reading Turn off tap when not in use can be effective in reducing water consumption, as McKenzie-Mohr (1999)
suggested and Aronson (1982) demonstrated three decades ago. To be more effective, these signs should be
obtrusive, although people consider them annoying, as Aronsons (1982) study suggested. Feedback has been
shown to produce sustained behavior change across a range of conservation behaviors. A study conducted in
Australia (Geller, Winett, & Everett, 1982) found that water consumption decreased around 30% as a consequence
of daily feedback on water use and a rebate proportionate to demand reduction.
Punishmentin the form of finesof excessive water consumption also decreases the waste of this resource, as
Agras et al. (1980) found in their quasi-experiment in California. Positive reinforcements such as jackpots could
also be employed to reward water conservation, as Pryor (1999) has established.
Based on these results, Foxall (1995) recommended a combination of three behavioral interventions aimed at
reducing water consumption: (1) punishment, especially in the form of fines for excessive consumption or
contamination; (2) metering, to provide an association between behavior and its contingencies as well as
consumption feedback; and (3) closing the setting by reducing the range of times and places during which water
can be consumed.
Page 11 of 20
Conclusion
As in other areas of conservation psychology, a growing body of research indicates that, depending upon the
circumstances and their personal history, people might be compelled to either waste or conserve freshwater.
Economic affluence, human development levels, water accessibility, extreme weather, social-status values,
egoistic and antisocial tendencies, present time-orientation, indifference toward the state of water, and
suspiciousness regarding others waste of water are among the most important factors promoting water
overconsumption and contamination. Alternatively, awareness and knowledge of water problems and solutions,
pro-environmental skills and competency, pro-ecological beliefs, perceptions of equity, trust of authorities,
intentions to conserve water, personal environmental norms, environmental and self-transcendence values, and
future-time orientation are psychological dispositional variables that induce freshwater conservation. Temperate
weather, water scarcity, access to water-saving technologies, water prices, social norms, and legal regulations are
situational factors that also promote the conservation of that natural resource, as do a series of behavioral
interventions, including environmental education and water conservation campaigns.
These results suggest actions and human-group targets to consider when implementing interventional programs.
Page 12 of 20
Future Directions
Most psycho-environmental studies on freshwater conservation are aimed at studying residential uses of water.
Although this is an importantand growingtype of consumption, there are other areas to pay attention to, since
their effects on water depletion and contamination are fundamental. More investigation of the psychological
determinants and consequences of water waste in the agricultural, livestock farming, and industrial sectors is
needed, since these sectors represent more than 90% of water consumption. Their impact on human and natural
ecosystems is huge. A study by Carlos (2004), for instance, showed that almost 80% of the variance in family and
social problems of an agricultural community was explained by only two factors: agriculture mono-cultivation and
wasteful irrigation systems. The study of the psychological factors that inhibit water contamination is also
necessary, since most research is devoted to analyzing variables related to avoiding water depletion. This should
lead to studying the situational and psychological antecedents of water conservation in agricultural, industrial, and
livestock farming activities, as well as the consequences that might maintain a sustainable use of water in these
sectors.
Figure 30.1attempts to integrate the (known and to-investigate) factors that promote freshwater conservation. The
factors on the left represent the physical and normative situations that induce a responsible and noncontaminating
use of the liquid. These factors exert their influence on water conservation through the development of
dispositional and perceptual variables. The mediator role of perceptions is understandable since one necessarily
must perceive situations to be affected by them (Gaspar de Carvalho, Palma, & Corral-Verdugo, 2010). The
availability of (both physical and social) conditions facilitating water conservation makes possible the acquisition of
conservationist knowledge, skills, values, norms, and the development of pro-ecological beliefs and intentions to
conserve freshwater (Corral-Verdugo, 2002). Being exposed to propitiating situations also results in the display of
Page 13 of 20
In addition, the relationship between some of the dispositional factors included in the model and water conservation
has not been investigated or has been studied but not intensively. Research regarding the effect of emotions
toward nature on water consumption, the influence of environmental values on the conservation of the liquid, and
the impact of altruistic, frugal, and equitable tendencies on water-saving behaviors is not found in the literature or
has been barely considered. Also, most studies are nonexperimental, to the detriment of interventional or
experimental strategies, which guarantee higher levels of internal validity (i.e., certitude of a causal relationship (p.
594) between water conservation and its determinants), thus, more experimental studies are needed.
Although the model of Figure 30.1 intends to be integrative, its contents are not necessarily theoretically driven by
a particular explanatory framework. It includes pieces of behaviorism, evolutionary psychology, social-norms
theory, and the theories of affordance and commons dilemma, which have attempted to explain why people
conserve natural resources, with varying degrees of success. Yet, few of those theories have devoted their
attention to specifically addressing why some people are conservationists in their uses of freshwater. This means
that more theorization in this area is required, and such theorization should lead to the design of research models
and implementation.
Freshwater conservation is crucial for the survival of our species and other forms of life on earth. Since
environmental psychology comprises the study of the reciprocal relation between human behavior and the sociophysical environment, this scientific area is specially committed to provide information regarding the factors that
facilitate a responsible use of freshwater. Thus, a special and continued effort in conducting nonexperimental and
interventional studies on water conservation should be manifested by environmental psychologists in the close
future. Understanding the psychological and contextual factors that underlie water conservation would
undoubtedly be helpful in guaranteeing the endurance of life as we know it on this planet.
References
Agras, W., Jacob, R., & Ledebeck, M. (1980). The California drought: A quasi-experimental analysis of social policy.
Journal of Applied Behavior Analysis, 13, 561570.
Page 14 of 20
Page 15 of 20
Page 16 of 20
Page 17 of 20
Page 18 of 20
Page 19 of 20
Martha Fras-Armenta
Martha Fras-Armenta, Division de Ciencias Sociales, University of Sonora at Hermosillo, Los Portales Hermosillo, Mexico
Csar O. Tapia-Fonllem
Csar O. Tapia-Fonllem, Division de Ciencias Sociales, University of Sonora at Hermosillo, Los Portales Hermosillo, Mexico
Blanca S. Fraijo-Sing
Blanca S. Fraijo-Sing Division de Ciencias Sociales University of Sonora at Hermosillo Los Portales Hermosillo, Mexico
Page 20 of 20
Introduction
The past 40 years have witnessed a quiet revolution in the way environmental policy conflicts and local disputes
are handled in the United States. New attitudes and beliefs have emerged in American society since the early
1970s about the value of public participation and collaboration in ecosystem management (Koontz & Thomas,
2006; Sabatier, Weible, & Ficker, 2005; Wondolleck & Yaffee, 2000; Yaffee et al., 1996). There has been a steady
progression in the practice of environmental dispute resolution (e.g., Bacow & Wheeler, 1984; Bingham, 1986;
Dukes, 1996; OLeary, 1995; Susskind & Ozawa, 1983), from the first documented use of mediation over
construction of a flood-control dam in the Snoqualmie River valley of Washington state (Cormick & McCarthy, 1974)
to the consensus-based environmental conflict resolution (ECR) processes used today (e.g., Beierle & Cayford,
2002; Dukes, 2004; Emerson, Nabatchi, OLeary, & Stephens, 2003; Susskind, McKearnan, & Thomas-Larmer,
1999).
DEstree, Dukes, and Navarrete-Romero (2002) introduced the history of the ECR field and existing theory and
research on downstream conflict resolution methods, such as mediation and other quasi-judicial processes
(Emerson et al., 2003). Our focus in this chapter is on recent developments in public conflict resolution (Dukes,
1996) involving the use of collaborative processes in upstream conflict situations (Emerson et al., 2003): those in
which environmental policies are discussed and debated by members of diverse stakeholder groups (e.g.,
government agencies, commercial and business interests, community citizen groups, environmental groups).1 We
believe there are promising research (p. 599) opportunities in this arena for environmental psychologists and
researchers from allied disciplines. One major goal of this review is to shine a light on where those research
problems and questions reside.
Page 1 of 35
Page 2 of 35
Page 3 of 35
The IAD framework predicts that actors will weigh the costs and benefits of possible future actions and choose to
collaborate with other actors to establish rules and governance institutions when long-term benefits of cooperation
exceed short-term rewards for noncooperative behavior. According to Sabatier, Leach et al. (2005), the IAD
framework predicts that collaborative partnerships are more likely to form under the following situational conditions:
(1) environmental problems are diverse and diffused geographically (e.g., nonpoint source pollution); (2)
environmental problems are severe (p. 602) (or perceived severe by most actors); (3) scientific knowledge about
environmental problems is extensive; (4) existing institutions are not taking action to deal with environmental
problems; (5) community has high existing levels of human and social capital; and (6) community consists of
stakeholders with low discount rates (i.e., preference for short-term costs in exchange for long-term benefits).
Another important theoretical insight of the IAD framework is that the emergence of governance institutions to
manage natural resources operates at multiple levels of analysis (Ostrom, 2007). The three levels of analysis are
constitutional choice, collective choice, and operational choice. Sabatier, Leach et al. (2005) suggested that
collaborative partnerships actually function at the collective choice level, while the management plans and actions
implemented by these collaborative institutions represent operational rules governing how resources are managed
in a specific watershed.
Page 4 of 35
Page 5 of 35
(p. 603) The ACF focus is the analysis of belief systems of different advocacy coalition members and how these
beliefs change through collaborative processes of discussion, deliberation, and negotiation (Sabatier, Leach et al.,
2005). These beliefs are categorized into three types: (1) deep core beliefs, (2) policy core beliefs, and (3)
secondary beliefs. Deep core beliefs (e.g., liberal-conservative) refer to general views of human nature, the role of
government versus markets, and the relative importance of core values, such as liberty and equality. Policy core
beliefs represent the application of deep core beliefs to issues within a specific policy subsystem. Secondary
beliefs are more limited in scope, such as the severity and causes of environmental problems in a particular
geographic area, specific rules and budgetary program constraints, or rules for public participation dictated by
state or federal legislation. The ACF presumes that both deep core and policy core beliefs are most resistant to
change, while secondary beliefs may change from policy-related learning in collaborative institutions (Sabatier,
Leach et al., 2005).
The ACF assumes that formidable barriers to cooperation exist, such as resistance of deep core and core policy
beliefs to change within advocacy coalitions due to the perceptual filtering of information that perpetuates these
beliefs (Sabatier & Weible, 2007). A devil shift is assumed to motivate actors within advocacy coalitions to view
members of opposing groups as more powerful, more evil, and less trustworthy (Sabatier, Hunter, & McLaughlin,
1987). This phenomenon is closely linked to the ingroup-outgroup bias (Brewer, 1979), documented extensively in
social psychology research on intergroup relations (e.g., Sherif et al., 1961; Tajfel & Turner, 1979).
Sabatier and Weible (2007) incorporated concepts from alternative dispute resolution (Carpenter & Kennedy,
1988) concerning conditions under which negotiated agreements are more likely to emerge. Hypotheses are
proposed by Sabatier and Weible (2007) about the facilitative effects of full representation of relevant stakeholders
at group meetings, the common experience of a hurting stalemate, neutral and skilled leadership by respected
professionals, use of consensus decision rules, development of trust among stakeholders, extended commitment of
stakeholders over time to the collaborative process, and low BATNAs (best alternative to negotiated agreement;
Fisher & Ury, 1981) for advocacy coalitions in conflict. The ACF also predicts that negotiated agreements are less
likely when high levels of policy core conflict exist across coalitions, and more likely when: (1) a collaborative
forum exists allowing for resolution of (p. 604) technical disputes over empirical issues between different coalition
experts, and (2) stakeholders give serious consideration to information received from opposing coalition members
(Sabatier, Leach et al., 2005).
Page 6 of 35
Page 7 of 35
Figure 31.3 The Process of Soft Systems Inquiry as an Application of the Learning Cycle (after Checkland,
1981, modified). From Wilson & Morren (1990). Reprinted with permission of Macmillan Publishers Ltd.
Policy dialogues originated in the mid-1970s as experiments in bringing together leaders from the business and
environmental communities (p. 606) for constructive discussion of the major issues dividing them (Bingham,
1986). According to Gray (1989), The purpose of policy dialogues is largely to open up discussion among the
parties, to identify and promote increased understanding of the issues that may be subject to debate, and to
assess the extent of the controversy that exists (p. 200). Policy dialogues are not typically designed with the goal
of reaching a consensus decision among participants. Bingham (1986) reported that of 33 policy dialogues in her
database, only 4 were focused on reaching a consensus decision, while the remaining 29 were conducted with the
objective of reaching agreement on a set of recommendations.
The policy dialogue process normally consists of the following three phases: entry, design/planning the
intervention, and intervention implementation (Ehrmann & Lesnick, 1988). During entry, an advisory committee
identifies issues for dialogue and selects participants (ranging from 12 to 50 or more) based on criteria such as
scientific credentials, political credibility, or representation of particular interest groups relevant to the policy
issues. Parties are usually asked to represent themselves, rather than their institutional affiliations, to encourage
open discussion and lessen constituency advocacy concerns. Dialogue process design includes decisions on
location, agenda and scheduling, process ground rules, and the role of third-party facilitators (Dukes, 1996).
Page 8 of 35
Page 9 of 35
Collaborative Learning
More recently, Daniels and Walker (2001) have proposed an innovative, integrated approach to public deliberation
in ecosystem management called collaborative learning (CL). They argued that new methods of public
participation are urgently needed to deal with the fundamental paradox of effective policy formation: finding
ways to increase the quality of technical expertise, while simultaneously increasing the inclusivity of decision
processes (p. 608) (Daniels & Walker, 1995, p. 31). This orientation to collaboration can be considered a hybrid
set of methods, combining ideas from three distinct areas of study: systems theory, learning theory, and conflict
management (Daniels & Walker, 2001).
According to Daniels and Walker (2001), CL is based on five assumptions. First, it assumes that conflict is
ubiquitous in modern life. Second, it asserts that conflict is unresolvable, but manageable (Daniels & Walker,
2001, p. 14). This is a core CL principle: the presumption that conflict is something to be resolved is replaced with
the more modest goal of managing conflict so that its destructive effects are mitigated. Third, it assumes that
wicked problems (Rittel & Webber, 1973) in formulating public policy regarding ecosystem management are
usually replete with systems complexity. Fourth, the CL orientation asserts that collaborative processes derive
much of their value from the learning opportunities provided to participants. Finally, CL assumes that the best way
to improve decisions in highly complex situations is to understand decision making as a learning process (Daniels
& Walker, 2001, p. 14).
A comprehensive CL project can be subdivided into five phases (Daniels & Walker, 2001). Figure 31.4 presents
Page 10 of 35
Figure 31.4 Collaborative Learning Project Phases and Process Stages. From Daniels & Walker (2001).
Reprinted with permission of ABC-CLIO Praeger.
The inner circle of Figure 31.4 shows the series of activities associated with the implementation phase, usually
involving meetings, workshops, or field trips (Daniels & Walker, 2001). Stage 1 begins by introducing the CL
process to participants, moving then to stages 2 and 3 (identifying the problem situation and describing it using
system models), and then proceeds directly to stage 4 (participants engage in direct dialogue about their interests
and concerns in problem situation). In stage 5, transformative system models are used to identify possible (p. 609)
improvements to the problem situation. This stage often requires the assistance of specialists in systems analysis
working with participants in small groups. Stage 6 continues the analytical process by having participants compare
alternative system models to the reality of the current situation. Stage 7 involves thoughtful deliberation and
collaborative debate among participants about which of the suggested improvements from stages 5 and 6
represent both desirable and feasible changes to the current situation. Finally, stage 8 concludes with
implementation of the suggested improvements that participants have committed to during stage 7. The entire CL
core process is iterative, provided that sufficient time, resources, and motivation are available to continue the
project beyond the initial phase of implementation (stage 9).8
In comparison with existing ECR collaborative processes, the CL approach parts company on several key issues.
For example, Daniels and Walker (2001) did not believe the term resolution should be the primary focus of the CL
effort. Instead, they emphasized the notion of situation improvement as the principal goal of the collaborative
learning process. Another difference concerns their skepticism about the abundance assumption that underlies the
mutual gains approach to negotiation, typical of many ECR consensus-based processes (e.g., mediation). Daniels
and Walker (2001) contended that this presumption of an enlarged pie is often unjustified in many natural
resource or environmental conflict settings. Finally, they suggested that process outcomes such as positive
relationship change among stakeholders are not assured by CL, nor may such changes be required for significant
situation improvements to occur. Thus, while CL incorporates many key principles from ADR and consensusbuilding theory, it is not identical to more established ECR collaborative processes. The clear emphasis on social
learning differentiates the CL orientation from previous collaborative methods.9
Page 11 of 35
Evaluation Criteria and Research on ECR Collaborative Processes and Stakeholder Partnerships
Innes (1999) provided an influential review of the primary issues and challenges in evaluating consensus-building
processes. A novel contribution was her conceptualization of consensus-building processes as self-organizing
systems (Innes & Booher, 1999). Using theoretical concepts from complexity science (Holland, 1995; Kauffman,
1995; Waldrop, 1992), Innes (1999) identified fundamental processes and outcomes that provide a new evaluation
framework for consensus-building processes. This systems view has gained momentum in recent years, and its
Page 12 of 35
Page 13 of 35
Page 14 of 35
Of particular interest is Orr et al.s (2008) specification of outcomes and impacts, judged from the dual perspectives
of independent accomplishments and relative merits (p. 288). Independent accomplishments refer to what
actually happens within the group after ECR processes are used (e.g., agreements reached, process satisfaction
of stakeholders, better working relationships). Relative merits refer (p. 612) to comparing these outcomes to
what might have occurred if other decision processes had been used (e.g., unilateral agency or court decisions).
Finally, Orr et al. (2008) identified three themes that capture ECR impacts: (1) the conflict landscape, (2)
environmental management, and (3) physical setting. The process and outcome-impact criteria in the Orr et al.
(2008) framework are consistent with those proposed by Innes (1999) and dEstree and Colby (2004). Thus, a
consensus among scholars and practitioners is emerging on the fundamental criteria to guide future ECR
evaluation research.
Page 15 of 35
Page 16 of 35
Page 17 of 35
Policy Dialogues
Bingham (1986) conducted the first systematic evaluation of policy dialogues, focusing on two primary criteria:
agreement rate and agreement implementation. She reported that the agreement rate in policy dialogue cases (N =
33) was 76%, a figure almost identical to the overall 78% rate for site-specific disputes, and reasonably close to
the 82% rate reported recently by Emerson et al. (2009). Bingham (1986) further divided the 33 policy dialogue
cases in terms of whether the parties had authority to either make decisions (N = 4) or issue recommendations (N
= 29). Agreement rate was 100% in the decision cases and 72% in the recommendations cases. Thus, the
likelihood of reaching agreement in policy dialogues is similar to that of more traditional third-party mediated ECR
cases, which increases further when the parties have formal authority to make decisions.
However, the performance of policy dialogues on implementation of agreements is another matter. Bingham (1986)
found that 41% achieved full implementation of agreements, 18% had partial implementation, and 41% did not
implement the agreements. When cases involving making decisions are omitted from the analysis, Bingham (1986)
reported that half of these agreements were fully implemented and half were not. Thus, Binghams (1986) data
suggest that the best estimate of implementation likelihood in a typical policy dialogue is basically a coin flip.
Are there techniques to increase the odds of successful implementation in policy dialogues? Brogden (2003)
described a new approach that involves incorporating implementation criteria into agreements concerning
monitoring and assessment activities. For example, she headed a facilitation team for the SCA National Policy
Dialogue, consisting of a series of eight workshops across the United States to discuss how state conservation
agreements (SCAs) could be used proactively to manage endangered species conservation efforts at the state
government level. Brogden (2003) summarized the outcomes from these stakeholder workshops in a checklist that
may be useful in the evaluation of upstream ECR cases. Workshop recommendations strongly advocated the use
of adaptive management principles (Holling, 1978; Lee, 1993) in evaluating SCA effects. Brogden (2003) argued
that systematic checklist use by third-party practitioners may increase the odds of invaluable data being collected
about on-the-ground environmental outcomes, criteria that have proven elusive in ECR program evaluation
studies to date (Emerson et al., 2009; Leach et al., 2002).
How are outcomes evaluated in more recent applications of policy dialogues? Wade (2004) reported that six of
seven convergent dialogues that she facilitated at the Aspen Institute reached agreement on recommendations
and/or guidelines. Qualitatively, Wade (2004) noted that participants were most satisfied with working productively
Page 18 of 35
Page 19 of 35
Page 20 of 35
Page 21 of 35
Conclusion
This review has provided a broad overview of current theory and research on collaborative processes in
ecosystem management. In this concluding section, we discuss several emerging trends in this literature. These
observations reflect four themes: (1) recent focus on evaluation of success in ECR programs and processes within
past decade; (2) absence of control groups or pre-ECR baseline data in most empirical studies; (3) lack of
theoretical integration across ECR research studies; and (4) ambivalent attitudes among public agency managers
and practitioners toward current ECR evaluation agenda.
First, the recent focus on evaluation criteria and assessment of ECR processes and outcomes within the past
decade is a significant development. Compared to the rather dismal state of empirical affairs chronicled in
OLearys (1995) early review, the ECR field has taken major forward strides toward maturity as an established area
for social science research. We noted above the influential contributions of Innes (1999), OLeary and Binghams
(2003) edited volume, dEstree and Colby (2004), Orr et al. (2008), and Emerson et al. (2009). Moreover, a number
of comparative large-sample studies on watershed and estuary partnerships by Sabatier, Leach, Lubell, and their
colleagues have advanced the sophistication of research on collaborative institutions on both theoretical and
methodological fronts. The prevailing lament (Emerson et al., 2003; Sabatier, Focht et al., 2005) about the onedimensional state of the existing ECR research database (i.e., qualitative case studies) is missing its mark in 2012.
Second, despite this positive assessment on the evaluation front, we noted the conspicuous absence of control
groups or pre-ECR baseline measures in the research designs of most empirical ECR studies reviewed here (see
also Bingham et al., 2003; Lubell et al., 2005). This fact was not a surprise given the dominance of qualitative case
study methodology in the early years of ECR research. However, this weakness in research design is more
problematic now because more is expected from the ECR field in terms of demonstrating its value to society. The
only studies we encountered that employed any form of control groups were the quasi-experimental designs of
Lubell (2004, 2005) that compared NEP partnerships and non-NEP estuaries. Statistical methods of control using
multivariate regression analyses were used effectively in the watershed partnership studies of Leach et al. (2002),
Leach and Sabatier (2003), and Leach and Sabatier (2005). We also observed the use of basic pre-test/post-test
quasi-experimental designs in two empirical studies evaluating CL program effectiveness (Blatner et al., 2001;
Samuelson, Matlock, et al., 2003). However, we failed to locate any evaluation studies of either policy dialogues or
A&D processes that collected baseline belief or attitude measures in addition to post-intervention participant
responses.
Page 22 of 35
Future Directions
Our review concludes with a set of research questions that need further investigation. We present them with brief
commentary on why these issues represent promising future research directions and how they might be addressed
methodologically. Some of these questions have been identified in earlier appraisals of the ECR literature (e.g.,
Bingham et al., 2003; Dukes, 2004; Lubell et al., 2005), while others represent new problems that emerged while
preparing this review.
Research Question 1. Which process factors in ECR collaborative interventions produce which
outcomes and impacts in Orr et al.s (2008) evaluation framework?
A major obstacle in tackling this question has been the heterogeneity in the specific collaborative processes used
Page 23 of 35
Research Question 3. What are the empirical implications of complexity science theories(e.g.,
self-organizing systems) for understanding the dynamics of ECR collaborative processes and
evaluating their outcomes?
Innes and Booher (1999) were the first to link evaluation criteria for consensus-building processes to the growing
interest in complexity science. Bingham et al. (2003) concurred that the consensus-building process is best viewed
as a self-organizing system. This perspective holds great promise for advancing understanding of ECR processes,
dynamics, and outcomes/impacts. In fact, Bingham et al. (2003) proposed that each ECR case could be treated as
a system itself. Innes and Booher (1999) emphasized that the conceptual lens of self-organizing system theory
highlights processes of change, adaptation, learning, feedback, and the emergence of innovative responses
occurring across longer time frames than typically studied in past ECR research.
We find this perspective fertile with research opportunities because several theories from complexity science have
already made significant impact on understanding social psychological phenomena during the 1990s (e.g., Arrow,
McGrath, & Berdahl, 2000; Liebrand & Messick, 1995; Nowak & Vallacher, 1998; Vallacher & Nowak, 1994).
Specifically, nonlinear dynamical systems theory has proven its value through pioneering use of computer
simulations and controlled experimentation for a diverse array of social psychological phenomena, including selfevaluation, social judgment, dynamics of public opinion change, and intractable intergroup conflict (Nowak,
Szamrej, & Latane, 1990; Vallacher, Coleman, Nowak, & Bui-Wrzosinska, 2010; Vallacher & Nowak, 2007;
Vallacher, Read, & Nowak, 2002). In fact, Nowak et al. (2010) recently described a workshop method for teaching
negotiation in multiparty conflict settings using dynamical systems theory and computer simulations to guide the
learning process.
To stimulate further thought using this complexity science view, we offer the following corollary research
questions:
Research Question 3a. How do individuals who participate in ECR collaborative processes change over time?
Change can occur at both individual and group levels simultaneously in ECR collaborative processes. For example,
most stakeholder partnership research to date has chosen either the individual level or the group level for its
primary unit of analysis (e.g., Leach et al., 2002; Lubell, 2005; Lubell & Leach, 2005). We believe that multilevel
Page 24 of 35
Research Question 3b. What are the impacts of ECR collaborative processes on future behavior of participants
in conflict situations?
The question here is whether internal changes in participants of ECR collaborative processes will be manifested in
how those individuals deal with other stakeholders in subsequent conflict situations. As Innes and Booher (1999)
noted, consensus-building processes often have fuzzy end points demarcating their conclusion. Multi-party
conflicts usually evolve over time, sometimes in positive directions and other times in downward spirals of
protracted conflict, hostility, and dysfunctional communication. Thus, another important research problem is to
understand whether these stakeholders acquire new knowledge and communication skills to create more
productive interactions with others who hold different values, beliefs, interests, and worldviews. Bingham et al.
(2003) suggested that agent-based modeling methods currently used in psychology, sociology, and political
science may provide a viable methodological approach to this question (e.g., Axelrod. 1984; Goldstone, Roberts, &
Gureckis, 2008; Guastello, Koopmans, & Pincus, 2009; Kameda, Tsukasaki, Hastie, & Berg, 2011; Macy & Willer,
2002, Smith & Conrey, 2007; Takahashi, 2000; Vallacher et al., 2010; van Overwalle & Heylighen, 2006). Social
capital theory could be used to guide which variables to include in simulations of multiparty social dynamics (e.g.,
trust).
Research Question 3c. What factors affect the survival of collaborative stakeholder partnerships over time?
Our current understanding of what conditions predict the success and future survival of stakeholder partnerships is
limited. The absence of longitudinal studies that track the development of these partnerships over time is largely
responsible for this knowledge gap. Both Lubell et al. (2005) and Bingham et al. (2003) have called for greater
attention to temporal dynamics that occur across the lifespan of stakeholder partnerships (or ECR cases).
Evaluation studies that collect data beyond the official end of ECR collaborative processes are badly needed.
Standard data collection procedures in ECR cases that are institutionalized should reduce costs and facilitate
completion of these longitudinal studies (Bingham et al., 2003; Emerson et al., 2009).
Research Question 4. What research activities will produce actionable knowledge to motivate
collaboration among agency managers, ECR practitioners, and academic researchers to
implement the current evaluation agenda?
Our final question has a touch of irony for the ECR field, yet warrants further contemplation.27 Both Dukes (2004)
and Birkhoff and Lowry (2003) have raised concerns about whether and precisely how current evaluation research
studies will help ECR practitioners do their jobs better. We suggest that further constructive dialogue between the
academic/research and practice camps may be worthwhile. For example, it would be useful to survey existing
agency personnel who manage dispute resolution programs and ECR practitioners who work directly with these
organizations to assess their beliefs and attitudes toward the current evaluation agenda, as well as future
continuing education needs. Public forums for dissemination and discussion of needs assessment results already
exist, such as the annual conferences of ECR professional associations (e.g., Association for Conflict Resolution)
and meetings hosted by the US Institute for Environmental Conflict Resolution. Visible ECR journals such as Conflict
Page 25 of 35
References
Arrow, H., McGrath, J. E., & Berdahl, J. L. (2000). Small groups as complex systems: Formation, coordination,
development, and adaptation. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
Axelrod, R. (1984). The evolution of cooperation. New York: Basic Books.
Bacow, L. S., & Wheeler, M. (1984). Environmental dispute resolution. New York: Plenum.
Baker, T. B., McFall, R. M., & Shoham, V. (2008). Current status and future prospects of clinical psychology: Toward
a scientifically principled approach to mental and behavioral health care. Psychological Science in the Public
Interest, 9(2), 67103.
Beierle, T. C. (1999). Using social goals to evaluate public participation in environmental decisions. Policy Studies
Review, 16, 75103.
Beierle, T. C., & Cayford, J. (2002). Democracy in practice: Public participation in environmental decisions.
Washington, DC: Resources for the Future.
Beierle, T. C., & Cayford, J. (2003). Dispute resolution as a method of public participation. In R. OLeary & L. B.
Bingham (Eds.), The promise and performance of environmental conflict resolution (pp. 5368). Washington, DC:
Resources for the Future.
Bingham, G. (1986). Resolving environmental disputes: A decade of experience. Washington, DC: Conservation
Foundation.
Bingham, L. B., Fairman, D., Fiorino, D. J., & OLeary, R. (2003). Fulfilling the promise of environmental conflict
resolution. In R. OLeary & L. B. Bingham (Eds.), The promise and performance of environmental conflict
resolution (pp. 329351). Washington, DC: Resources for the Future.
Birkhoff, J. E., & Lowry, K. (2003). Whose reality counts? In R. OLeary & L. B. Bingham (Eds.), The promise and
performance of environmental conflict resolution (pp. 2750). Washington, DC: Resources for the Future.
Blatner, K. A., Carroll, M. S., Daniels, S. E., & Walker, G. B. (2001). Evaluating the application of collaborative
learning to the Wenatchee fire recovery planning effort. Environmental Impact Assessment Review, 21, 241270.
Brewer, M. B. (1979). Ingroup bias in the minimal intergroup situation: A cognitive-motivational analysis.
Psychological Bulletin, 86, 307324.
Brogden, M. (2003). The assessment of environmental outcomes. In R. OLeary & L. B. Bingham (Eds.), The promise
and performance of environmental conflict resolution (pp. 277300). Washington, DC: Resources for the Future.
Carpenter, S., & Kennedy, W. J. D. (1988). Managing public disputes: A practical guide to handling conflict and
reaching agreements. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
Checkland, P. (1981). Systems thinking, systems practice. New York: Wiley.
Checkland, P., & Scoles, J. (1990). Soft systems in action. New York: Wiley.
Clark, B. T., Burkardt, N., & King, M. D. (2005). Watershed management and organizational dynamics: Nationwide
findings and regional variation. Environmental Management, 36(2), 297310.
Coglianese, C. (2003). Is satisfaction success? Evaluating public participation in regulatory policymaking. In R.
OLeary & L. B. Bingham (Eds.), The promise and performance of environmental conflict resolution (pp. 6986).
Page 26 of 35
Page 27 of 35
Page 28 of 35
Page 29 of 35
Page 30 of 35
Page 31 of 35
Notes:
(1.) For more comprehensive reviews of the pre-2000 literature on public participation and collaborative
conservation programs, see Renn, Webler, and Wiedemann (1995), Conley and Moote (2001), and Beierle and
Cayford (2002).
(2.) The management committee began with approximately 20 people but increased to 49 members at the projects
conclusion. Harry Seraydarian, a respected senior EPA administrator, chaired the committee using a consensusbuilding process.
(3.) For example, one finger represented I fully agree, five fingers indicated There is no way I will agree to this,
Page 32 of 35
Page 33 of 35
Clare L. Barratt
Clare L. Barratt Department of Psychology Texas A&M University College Station, TX
Page 34 of 35
Introduction
During the past 50 years or sodepending on where one finds oneself on the globe it could be longer or shorter
a whole range of instruments and mechanisms have evolved to address the loss of nature, environmental
degradation, or, in a more general and contemporary term, unsustainability. These instruments and mechanism
include socio-technological innovations (e.g., Spaargaren et al., 2006), legislation and law (see
www.hg.org/environ.html for an overview), policies (e.g., Caldwell, 1984; Young, 1997), fiscal policy (e.g., Gupta,
2002; Lpez and Toman, 2006) and economic incentives (e.g., Ekins, 2000; Mler and Vincent, 2005; van den
Bergh, 2002), and social marketing (e.g., McKenzie-Mohr, 2000). In addition, both in parallel and intricately
connected, environmental communication, education, and learning have always played a role in finding an
adequate response to what is nowadays seen as a global challenge. The significance of these learning-based
instruments has varied, though, from country to country but also within countries over time. Historically speaking,
one could say that there has been an evolution from nature conservation education to environmental education
(EE) to education for sustainable development (ESD).
In this chapter a brief history of the role of education in living more sustainably on this planet will be provided. Two
distinct vantage points that have major implications for the purposes, processes, and evaluation strategies deemed
appropriate will be used: (1) an instrumental utilitarian perspective (emphasizing the potential of education in (p.
629) changing human environmental behavior in predetermined and more or less agreed upon directions) and (2)
an emancipatory human development perspective (emphasizing the potential of education in strengthening
Page 1 of 21
Page 2 of 21
Environmental Education
Environmental education is obviously related to nature conservation education, but there is an important difference
in that it transcends issues of nature, biodiversity, and ecology to also and foremost include issues of
environmental degradation, environmental health, pollution, and so on that have a lot to do with the way we live,
produce, and consume. There are many roots of environmental education and several founding fathers (Gough,
1994, 1997) who can be credited with promoting concepts of environmental education both within Europe and
North America. Some refer to landmark publications such as Rachel Carsons (1962) Silent Spring or the Limits to
Growth report of the Club of Rome (Meadows et al., 1972) and environmental disasters such as the 1952 London
smog disaster and 1969 burning of the Cuyahoga River in Ohio, as key triggers of an educational response to a
looming environmental crisis. In North America, Bill Stapps coauthored article on the concept of environmental
education in the first volume of the Journal of Environmental Education is often referred to as the starting point of
environmental education (Stapp et al., 1969). Others might refer to key international conferences organized by
UNESCO and UNEP (e.g., UNESCO-UNEP, 1978, 1997) on the relationship between humans and their environment
and the role of education.
Many educational policies of a variety of governments across the globe call for the integration of EE in the formal
education system. They stress the role of education in developing a support base for environmental policy and
legislation, but also as a means to influence citizens environmental behaviors. At the same time business and
industry have also discovered EE and, indeed, environmental communication as a public relations tool. Some
sponsor the production of EE materials, some donate money to EE organizations, and some employ their own EE or
environmental communication officers or consultants. It is clear that the worldwide development of EE in formal and
nonformal education is ongoing. Perhaps it is useful here to make a distinction between EE and environmental
communication. Whereas EE tends to focus on active learning processes, usually but not exclusively using formal
education as a point of departure, that seek to engage citizens in environmental issues, environmental
communication tends to focus on informing citizens about environmental issues or, more profoundly, persuading
them to think or act in a certain environmental way. Environmental communication tends to take place outside of
the formal education contexts. In this chapter, EE and its younger cousin, education for sustainable development,
will be central. Both EE and environmental communication have their own scholarly journals and distinct but
overlapping histories and conceptualizations. The relatively young Journal of Applied Environmental Education
and Communication tries to bring the two fields together in one platform for both scholars and practitioners.
One could argue that with the emergence of EE about 40 years ago, nature conservation education gradually
became a part of EE, although in many countries nature education (e.g., Sobel, 1996, 2008), biodiversity education
(e.g., Gayford, 2000), and outdoor education (e.g., Redmond et al., 2009) continue to exist as educational
approaches with nature as a focal point and as a backdrop for learning. (p. 631) Outdoor education programs are
somewhat distinct from nature education programs, as they tend to emphasize personal development over
discovering, understanding, and connecting with nature. An analysis of the content of EE shows that there are at
least two strands that differ in the emphasis placed on the importance of peoples experiences with nature (Wals,
1994). One strand closely identifies with the purposes and contents of the original nature conservation education.
Page 3 of 21
Page 4 of 21
Figure 32.1 Different Interpretations of ESD and EE and Their Relationship from a Content Perspective.
Figure 32.1 illustrates how ESD and EE relate to each other from a content perspective. The figure shows that when
both EE and ESD are interpreted broadly to include the political, social, cultural, and economic (EE+ and ESD+),
they become almost synonymous. Interestingly enough, when interpreted narrowly (EE- and ESD-) to focus mainly
on the environmental and the ecological, they also become almost synonymous. EE in the Tbilisi spirit (UNESCOUNEP, 1978) is generally considered EE+, while ESD as described in UNESCO documents is generally considered
ESD+ especially when related to all the Millennium Development Goals (and not just to MDG number 7, which
focuses on environmental sustainability). In the middle of the figure, where ESD and EE appear most distinct, we
find that EE is seen as strongly emphasizing the environmental and ecological dimension content-wise (the lower
part of the circle), whereas ESD is seen as strongly emphasizing the political and socio-cultural, including the
economic dimension content-wise (the upper part of the circle). Indeed there are countries around the world, such
as the Netherlands, where there are separate EE and ESD policies that fall under the responsibility of different
ministries.
Another way of looking at ESD and EE and the way they relate would be to look at the kinds of learning processes
used and the type of aims pursued. A critical question that is continuously asked in EE and ESD but in other
educational fields as well is: What are or should we be changing or developing in learners? Or, alternatively, how
can we create optimal conditions and support mechanisms that allow citizens, young and old, to develop
themselves in the face of change? The first question has instrumental connotations, whereas the second one has
emancipatory ones. The difference between the questions may appear small but, as we will see, speak to a large
issue (see also Wals & van der Leij, 1997; Jickling & Wals, 2008). When education in a range of settings, formal,
informal, and nonformal, is employed to somehow affect citizens young and old, we need to (p. 633) ask
questions about the role of education in society. There is no consensus about this role. Two perspectives are
Page 5 of 21
An Instrumental Perspective
Around the world EE has first and foremost gained importance because of its potential to contribute to the
resolution of environmental issues and not because of its potential to contribute to democratic and emancipatory
human development (Wals et al., 1999). It can be argued that the environmental justification of EE has, at least until
now, outweighed the pedagogical justification. Similarly, this is the case in ESD, although some would argue that
the sustainability focus in ESD assumes that issues of democracy, equity, and participation automatically come
into play.
Much EE around the world aims at changing learner behavior that often is broadly defined to include attitudes,
beliefs, and values. Many EE researchers and practitioners are trying to instrumentally structure the content and
process of EE by using hierarchical levels of universal goals and measurable objectives or learning outcomes (see,
e.g., Hungerford & Volk, 1990). It is no surprise that within EE that seeks to change learner behavior, the
establishment of knowledge and awareness of nature and environment, and the application of what is learned, are
considered essential steps in the learning process. At the same time evaluation of the extent to which these goals
are reached is considered crucial for determining the success of EE and for justifying government spending on EE.
Early EE was informed by insights from behaviorist social psychology that assumed a more or less linear causality
between environmental awareness and environmental behavior (Fishbein & Azjen, 1980) suggesting that an
increase in environmental awareness would lead to more responsible environmental behavior. This assumed
linearity between knowledge-awareness-behavior has shown to be weak (Hannigan, 1995, p. 236), and attitudebehavior models have since then been revised to include a number of additional factors and feedback loops
(Ajzen & Fishbein, 1980; Ajzen, 2008; Ajzen et al., 2009; Ajzen & Manstead, 2007; Fishbein & Azjen, 2010). Just
providing information, raising awareness, and changing attitudes apparently is not enough to change peoples
behavior. Peoples environmental behaviors are far too complex and contextual to be captured by a simple causal
model.
This complexity is illustrated by Glasser (2007), who showed that even though people have a familiarity with a
problems related to what he calls eco-cultural unsustainability, they still choose to not respond or to respond
ineffectively. He pointed out that citizens can have different predispositions toward unsustainability, including (1)
having no idea that a potentially serious problem exists; (2) honestly believing that a problem is not a problem;
(3) denying the existence of a problem by simply wishing it away or by ignoring the information (this includes
educated incapacity, an acquired or learned inability to perceive a problem); (4) accepting the existence of a
problem, but perceiving it as easily surmountable; (5) accepting the existence of a problem, but perceiving other
problems or issues to take a higher priority; (6) failing to generate adequate support for action; and (7) taking
action, but the chosen action proves to be inadequate, mismatched to the problem, or unsuccessful (Glasser,
2007, p. 55). He called for research that can help determine what learning levers might work best in overcoming
these predispositions.
Two final observations about instrumental approaches to EE. First, the kind of research that takes place in this
context can be called evidence-based for the most part, as researchers, commissioned by policy makers and
funders of EE, tend to call for evidence that shows that EE is leading to more environmentally responsible behavior.
Many studies have been conducted over the past 40 years or so to see how environmental education activities
influence learner behavior (including knowledge, understanding, attitudes, awareness, values, actions, etc.); some
examples can be found in Ramsey (1993), Ramsey & Hungerford (1989), Rickinson (2001), Hines et al. (1986), and
Zelezny (1999). The number of longitudinal studies is rather limited, not in the least because of the methodological
challenges (p. 634) such studies encounter, but some are based on the analysis of significant life experiences
Page 6 of 21
An Emancipatory Perspective
Besides questions about the relationship between knowledge, awareness and understanding of environmental
issues, and citizens environmental behavior, leading to some doubts about an instrumental focus of EE or ESD, for
that matter, on these behavioral components, there are other concerns. These concerns come mostly from
educators and/or critical pedagogues who challenge a focus of EE and ESD on behavioral change. They argue
that education should above all be formative and focus on the kind of capacity-building and critical thinking that will
help citizens understand what is going on in society, ask critical questions, and determine for themselves what
needs to be done in light of inevitable uncertainty with respect to what is considered right (Mayer & Tschapka,
2008; Jickling & Wals, 2008). From this vantage point the idea of influencing peoples environmental behavior in a
predetermined way contradicts the very foundation of education and borders on indoctrination. Education is
considered more literally in its original Latin meaning of educare, which is guiding into, facilitating, helping develop,
and exploring the self and personal growth and competence development. As such, education is more about
equipping people to make sense of the world and to make their own judgments.
If a key function of education is fostering self-determination, agency, and autonomous thinking about, among other
things, environmental issues, then it would be contradictory to prescribe behavioral outcomes that a learning
activity or sequence of activities needs to trigger. Instead, proponents of an emancipatory perspective argue that
education, EE and ESD inclusive, has a role in developing so-called dynamic qualities (Posch, 1991): capacities or
competencies that allow people to critique, construct, and act with a high degree of autonomy and selfdetermination. At the same time, such qualities are considered necessary for citizens to be able to cope with
uncertainty, poorly defined situations, and conflicting or at least diverging norms, values, interests, and reality
constructions. Posch (1991) wrote in an OECD-ENSI publication, Professional, public and private life has become
increasingly complex, with divergent and even contradictory demands on the individual [who lives] within an
increasingly pluralistic value system. Above all, it is necessary to look beyond everyday normalities and to search
for ethically acceptable options for responsible action (p. 12). This is one of the things that sets education apart
from training and conditioning and makes the prescription of particular lifestyles or (codes of) behavior problematic
as it stifles creativity, homogenizes thinking, narrows choices, and limits autonomous thinking and degrees of selfdetermination.
So in short, an instrumental approach assumes that a desired behavioral outcome of an EE activity is known, is
more or less agreed upon, and can be influenced by carefully designed interventions. An emancipatory approach,
on the other hand, assumes that the dynamics in our current world are such that citizens need to become engaged
in an active dialogue to establish co-owned objectives, (p. 635) shared meanings, and a joint, self-determined
plan of action to make changes they themselves consider desirable and of which the government hopes they
Page 7 of 21
Figure 32.2 Different Interpretations of ESD and EE and Their Relationship from a Pedagogical Perspective
Just like within the instrumental orientation, monitoring and evaluation (M&E) of EE and ESD activities is equally
crucial within the emancipatory orientation. Typically M&E strategies that are appropriate for a more emancipatory
orientation focus less on what changes in learners and more on the quality of the learning process and on the
conditions under which the learning takes place (Wals et al., 2009). The question is not so much How does this EE
activity change the learners environmental behavior in all its expressions? but rather Are the conditions in which
the learning activity takes place such that a change in learner behavior is likely in the first place? M&E of this kind
tends to be more of a formative (improving the processes and conditions) nature than of a summative nature
(assessing the product of the learning). Emancipatory M&E strategies tend to be reflexive, with ample space for
emerging questions, participant voices, collaborative learning, and the blurring of theory and practice (van Mierlo
et al., 2010). A critique of the emancipatory orientation comes from policy makers who call for hard measurable
results that show environmental improvement, which is not what this type of M&E tends to be after.
Page 8 of 21
Post-Normal Science
These characteristics have consequences for education, teaching, and learning in general but perhaps for those
concerned with environmental and sustainability issues in particular. Funtowicz and Ravetz (1993) have
introduced the concept of post-normal science to indicate that we are entering an era in which uncertainty,
contestation, complexity, and indeterminacy are becoming the norm. Whereas in normal science the primary
goal was to reduce and control uncertainty and complexity and to unveil universal truths that could authoritatively
be disseminated without questions asked, this is no longer possible, if it ever was, and not even desirable. In postnormal science, uncertainty is not banished but is managed, and values are not presupposed but are made explicit
(Funtowicz & Ravetz, 1993). Funtowicz and Ravetz (1993) suggested that active involvement of citizens in postnormal science aimed at situation improvement is crucial:
The dynamic of resolution of policy issues in post-normal science involves the inclusion of an evergrowing set of legitimate participants in the process of quality assurance of the scientific inputs.In postnormal science, the manifold uncertainties in both products and processes require that the relative
importance of persons becomes enhanced. Hence the establishment of the legitimacy and competence of
participants will inevitably involve broader societal and cultural institutions and movements. (p. 753)
Agency and participation are key concepts from a post-normal science perspective.
Arguably agency and participation have been central concepts in strands of education as well. We can go back to
John Deweys work almost 100 years ago. Dewey spoke of the role of democracy in finding balance between
individualization and a sense of community and belonging. According to Dewey, democracy in education is crucial
in realizing a sense of self, a sense of other, and a sense of community. Democracy in education, he argued,
requires and creates space for self-determination, and greater degrees of autonomous thinking in a social context
(Dewey, 1916/1966). In EE, too, agency and participation have been central concepts on the more emancipatory
end of the continuum. Reid et al. (2008) edited an entire volume on participation and learning in the context of
education in relation to environment, health, and sustainability. The post-normal perspective, however, provides a
new perspective on participation and learning as the earlier-mentioned characteristics of environmental and
sustainability issues call for new forms of interactions between a whole range of stakeholders representing
numerous interests, values, and perspectives.
Page 9 of 21
Page 10 of 21
Page 11 of 21
Process is determined
interactively
Policy results
are
predetermined
Type 2: Mix
Residents are challenged to come
up with a plan to reduce litter in
the neighborhood by 50% within
one year.
Policy results
are
determined in
the course of
the process
Type 3: Mix
The municipality, without establishing ahead of
time which level of reduction is to be realized,
starts a campaign against litter in the
neighborhood, in the course of which (by means of
waste monitoring) it becomes clear which results
are feasible, in which respect variations from one
neighborhood to the other are
possible/acceptable/encouraged.
(p. 639) sustainability challenge. One can hardly call something a social learning process when both the results
(goal) and the process (means) have been determined beforehand by policy makers, experts, or management.
The other combinations offer more room for social learning, either aimed or not aimed at predetermined and
measurable goals.
Three of the four cells in Table 32.1 refer to environmental results (less litter). The fourth cell (bottom right) does
not specify a concrete environmental result. That cell refers mainly to the commitment on the part of people. It is
precisely this kind of result that may, in the long term, lead to social cohesion, cooperation, and a sense of
community, for example. Changes of this kind are perhaps a prerequisite if one is to come to solutions for
problems/challenges that are much more complex and that are oriented more toward sustainability than aimed only
at reducing litter. Depending on the way an intervention is organized, there will be less or more room for social
learning. The space available for social learning determines the extent to which spin-off results can be generated
in a more social sphere but also in terms of collaborative cocreated, self-determined action.
A number of differences between a mainly results-oriented evaluation process (results in terms of hard
sustainability indicators) and a mainly process-oriented monitoring process are set alongside one another in Table
32.2.
Within the field of EE, but certainly also in other fields, a range of participatory forms of research can be found,
such as action research (Reason & Bradbury, 2001), citizen science (Irwin, 1995), and trans-disciplinary research
(Hadorn et al., 2008). Furthermore, new forms of so-called reflexive monitoring and evaluation are sprouting across
the globe that can be labeled post-normal and transformative. Examples include reflexive monitoring and
evaluation, developed by Wageningen University and the Free University of Amsterdam (van Mierlo et al., 2010)
and so-called realist evaluation, developed by Pawson and Tiley (1997). These new forms of monitoring and
evaluation are also currently being introduced in the field of EE (e.g., Raven, 2006) and will need to be developed
further in the years to come.
Conclusion
Environmental education finds itself in a transition period. On the one had there is a reconceptualization of the
focus and content of EE inspired by emergent sustainability thinking; on the other, the current risk-society calls for
new forms of learning and governance that are better able to deal with risk, complexity, uncertainty, value
dilemmas, and conflicting interests. Given the continued disconnect between people and their physical
Page 12 of 21
Future Directions
In this chapter a kind of evolution has been sketched from nature conservation education to environmental
education to education in the context of sustainability. One commonality between them is the importance of
connecting with the world (nature, environment, planet). Earlier in the chapter place-based education was referred
to as a related form of education that specifically focuses on helping people ground, root, and connect with a
locality, a place, a space to which they belong and feel connected, for which they care, and so on. Such
contextual forms of education are receiving increased attention from educators and policy makers as a means to
help people, young and old, reconnect with the physical, material, and socio-ecological world they, oftentimes
unconsciously, inhabit. There is a whole body of scholarly work emerging, some of which this chapter referred to
(p. 640)
Page 13 of 21
Table 32.2 Juxtaposing Two Types of Monitoring & Evaluation (Source: Wals et al., 2009, p. 27)
Instrumental approach (focus on
determining results)
Main goals
Role
externals
- expert role
- external observation
- determining measuring system to be used
- determining indicators
- measuring, analyzing, and interpreting
data
- reporting
Role of
actors
within the
M&E
process
For whom?
Underlying
worldview
- empirical-analytical/understanding through
reduction, search for explanations (ifthen),
striving for objectivity and independence
Risks
Advantages
Page 14 of 21
Bibliography
References
Ajzen, I. (2008). Consumer attitudes and behavior. In C. P. Haugtvedt, P. M. Herr, & F. R. Cardes (Eds.), Handbook
of consumer psychology (pp. 525548). New York: Erlbaum.
Ajzen, I., Czasch, C., & Flood, M. G. (2009). From intentions to behavior: Implementation intention, commitment, and
conscientiousness. Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 39, 13561372.
Ajzen, I., & Fishbein. M. (1980). Understanding attitudes and predicting social behavior. Englewood Cliffs, NJ:
Prentice-Hall.
Ajzen, I., & Manstead, A. S. R. (2007). Changing health-related behaviors: An approach based on the theory of
planned behavior. In K. van den Bos, M. Hewstone, J. de Wit, H. Schut, & M. Stroebe (Eds.), The scope of social
psychology: Theory and applications (pp. 4363). New York: Psychology Press.
Allen, W. J., Bosch, O. J. H., Gibson, R. G., & Jopp, A. J. (1998). Co-learning our way to sustainability: An integrated
and community-based research approach to support natural resource management decision-making. In S. A. ElSwaify & D. S. Yakowitz (Eds.), Multiple objective decision making for land, water, and environmental
management (pp. 5159). Boston: Lewis Publishers. Retrieved from
http://learningforsustainability.net/pubs/colearn_pap.html.
Beck, Ulrich (1992). Risk society: Towards a new modernity. London: Sage.
Beck, Ulrich. (2008). World at risk. Cambridge, UK: Polity Press.
Berlyne, D.E. (1965). Curiosity and education. In J. D. Krumbolts (Ed.), Learning and the educational process.
Chicago, IL: Rand McNally & Co.
Blackwell, A. F., Wilson, L., Street, A., Boulton, C., & Knell, J. (2009). Radical innovation: Crossing knowledge
Page 15 of 21
Page 16 of 21
Page 17 of 21
Page 18 of 21
Page 19 of 21
Page 20 of 21
Page 21 of 21
Introduction
There is a rich history of psychological research on global climate change, reaching back to the early 1980s
(Chen, Boulding, & Schneider, 1983; Fischhoff & Furby, 1983). Yet there has been a recent surge in interest in the
topic by psychologists. This interest is reflected in activities in several psychological associations, such as the
American Psychological Association (Benson, 2008; Swim et al., 2009), the Australian Psychological Association
(2010), the Psychologists for Social Responsibility (2011), and the Society for Psychological Study of Social Issues
(Swim & Clayton, 2010), which have made efforts to inform and summarize relevant psychological research and
assert psychologists role in addressing global climate change. Consistent with these efforts, several psychologists
have recently illustrated the contributions of and need for psychologists to increase their involvement in studying
environmental sustainability and specifically to examine the psychological dimensions of climate change (Gifford,
2008; Kazdin, 2009; OHara, 2010; Uzzell, 2010). An examination of publication trends of articles tracked by
PsychInfo, the American Psychological Association database of nearly 2,500 journals, illustrates the increased
attention. A search for scholarly articles that included climate change or global warming in its keywords and
texts and that reported research, summaries of research, or theory development reveals a surge in publications
that mention climate change starting in about 2008 (see Figure 33.1). Of course, there is more psychological
research on this topic than this search alone reveals. Yet, the figure illustrates the growing attention given to
climate change topics, and this attention is reaching the psychological community.
Page 1 of 31
Figure 33.1 Search of Scholarly Articles from 1990 to 2010 Using Words Climate Change or Global
Warming in PsychInfo.
(p. 646) A wide range of research is relevant to climate change, including many chapters in this handbook.
Global climate change is having and will continue to have many natural impacts that affect and are affected by
humans. Many of these types of impacts, such as environmental degradation and disasters, have been of concern
for psychologists for several decades. Solutions to a wide range of environmental problems, ranging from individual
and household behavioral changes, to community engagement, to organizational and governmental policy
development and support, are relevant to responses to global climate change. Further, theoretical perspectives,
such as the commons dilemma (Gifford, 2008; Committee on the Human Dimensions of Global Change, National
Research Council, 2002; Van Vugt, 2009), used to understand human and psychological dimensions of
environmental and social problems are relevant for understanding issues of global climate change.
There are aspects of global climate change, however, that make it worthy of specific attention by psychologists.
The complex interlocking causes and impacts of global climate change, time course of climate change impacts,
and multiple solutions with unknown side effects contribute to uncertainty, ambiguity, feelings of threat, and
inaction. Climate change impacts are sometimes seemingly contradictory, ranging, for instance, from too much
water in some areas to too little in other areas, which can potentially cause confusion about what climate change is
and what is evidence of the impacts. Climate change impacts are extensive. The impacts are not limited to those in
ones immediate neighborhood or even ones own country but are occurring and will occur across the globe. Many
individuals might not knowingly personally experience the direct impacts given the temporal and geographic
patterns of climate change and given many peoples disconnection with nature. Further, some, particularly in
industrialized countries, will be able to use their wealth to buffer themselves from climate change impacts. Yet,
increasing globalization, which makes people much more interconnected and interdependent, means that many will
indirectly experience the impacts even if they are not directly affected in their own communities. The scope of the
impacts can be difficult to grasp, cope with, and know how to respond to. Responding to climate change may
require cultural shifts that challenge the status quo and therefore may meet with resistance. Thus, the scope of
climate change, including the types of impacts expected, the temporal and geographic patterns of change, and the
connection between individual actions and impacts on nature and other people, is critical to discerning individuals
understanding of and responses to climate change.
It is impossible for us to review all relevant psychological research on climate change in this chapter, particularly
because it overlaps with many other research domains. Instead, we highlight research that has specifically made
connections to global climate change. We consider three primary research areas: (1) beliefs about global climate
change; (2) impacts of global climate change; and (3) human contributions to global climate change. Within each
of these topics we also examine responses to global climate change through educational efforts, adaptation, and
mitigation, respectively. It is worth noting that much of the research we review has been done in the United States
and, secondarily, in Europe. We do this because it reflects the research base. The research base may reflect the
extent to which researchers are attempting to understand US residents beliefs about climate change and the
disproportionate need to change human behaviors in industrialized countries.
Page 2 of 31
Page 3 of 31
Scientific Consensus
Considerable polling has also been done exploring beliefs about whether there is scientific consensus over climate
change. As with the publics beliefs about the causes of climate change, there are significant discrepancies
between the actual amount of agreement among scientists (i.e., there is almost complete scientific consensus on
the basic fact of whether climate change is happening; see Anderegg, Prall, Harold, & Schneider, 2010; Doran &
Zimmerman, 2009, Oreskes, 200) and the publics (p. 649) beliefs about the amount of consensus (which are all
over the map). Moreover, the publics beliefs about scientific consensus over global climate change appear to be
Page 4 of 31
Meta-Cognitions
Meta-cognitions, reflections on primary perceptions or evaluations or attempts to control cognitions, represent a
potentially important set of climate change beliefs (Scannell & Grouzet, 2010). At least three meta-cognitions are
relevant to beliefs about climate change: certainty about climate change and its impacts, confidence in ones selfassessed knowledge about climate change, and importance of climate change. Meta-cognitions can be as
important or more important predictors of behaviors than lower-order beliefs. For instance, importance and
certainty of beliefs predict attempts to persuade others of those beliefs (Visser, Krosnick, & Simmons, 2003) and
confidence in ones knowledge is related to more risk-taking behaviors and less information-seeking (Scannell &
Grouzet, 2010). Importance assigned to climate change is related to donating more to environmental and climate
change activism (Visser et al., 2003). Further, confidence in ones knowledge of climate change is associated with
being less concerned about climate change (Kellstedt et al., 2008).
Certainty
Risk perceptions and concerns about climate change consequences can be considered assessments of the
certainty about the impacts of climate change (Scannell & Grouzet, 2010). Considerable research addresses
perceptions of the impacts of climate change and associated risks that global climate change poses to individuals,
their communities, humanity, and other species (cf. Bostrom et al., 1994; Bulkeley, 2000; Read et al., 1994;
Whitmarsh, 2009). Americans tend to perceive the impacts of global climate change as accruing almost
exclusively to other individuals and communities, especially those living in distant nations and far in the future
(Bord et al., 1998; Nisbet & Myers, 2007; Stamm, Clark, & Eblacas, 2000), although a subset of the population does
believe that global climate change will have significant negative effects on them in the near future (Leiserowitz et
al., 2010). For example, early research found that many individuals believed that climate change posed serious
direct health risks to people, primarily through increased incidence of skin cancer and respiratory problems
(Bostrom et al., 1994; Kempton et al., 1995; Stamm et al., 2000); however, more recent research has suggested
that direct and nameable health consequences of climate change have become less salient to Americans (cf.
Lorenzoni et al., 2006). In addition, many individuals hold widely shared beliefs about the physical consequences
of climate change on the natural world, for example, warmer temperatures, melting icebergs, dying polar bears,
sea level rise, changes in precipitation patterns, and weird weather (cf. Bostrom et al., 1994; Leiserowitz, 2006;
Read et al., 1994; Stamm et al., 2000).
Taken together, these findings suggest that most individuals in the United States believe (in line with experts) that
the worst consequences of climate change will be borne not by themselves but rather by distant others (spatially
and temporally), and it is likely the case that this basic lay understanding of climate change has had an important
dampening effect on perceived risk, concern, and urgency for action (Bord et al., 1998; Weber, 2006). Indeed, as
these beliefs about the perceived otherness of the victims of global climate change have become more widely
held, concern, worry, and risk perceptions regarding global climate change appear to have weakened among
Americans (e.g., Leiserowitz et al., 2010). It is important to note, however, that risk perceptions and concern over
global climate change are highly differentiated among the US public, as Leiserowitz et al. (2010) have shown with
their Six Americas research program (see also Dunlap & McCright, 2008, for differences in concern as a function
of political party identification).
Confidence in Knowledge
Research by Sundblad, Biel, and Grling (2008) indicates that confidence in ones knowledge about climate
change varies across individuals and topics. These researchers found that Swedish respondents were generally
certain of their knowledge about climate change, with experts being the most certain about their knowledge,
followed by journalists, then politicians, and then laypeople. These Swedes tended to be more confident in their
knowledge about the causes of climate change than about the state (e.g., global temperature patterns) or future
consequences of climate change. Moreover, knowledge of, or confidence in, ones knowledge about climate
change is likely to be low among the least knowledgeable. Consistent with research on the role (p. 650) of
preconceived beliefs about ones ability on poor self-assessments of performance (Dunning, 2005), Sundblad et al.
Page 5 of 31
Importance
Finally, research on importance placed upon addressing climate change partially explains discrepancies between
perceiving that climate change is real and degree of support for efforts to address climate change. Although many
in the United States believe that climate change exists, few volunteer it as the most important problem the public
faces (Yeager et al., 2011). Yet, when the question is framed in such a way to focus on problems for the world and
in the future, environmental problems and climate change are identified as much more important (Yeager et al.,
2011).
Page 6 of 31
Page 7 of 31
Educational Efforts
Since James Hansens awareness-raising 1988 congressional testimony, many environmental leaders, science
communicators, and others have attempted to raise not only public awareness but also understanding of global
climate change, largely in an attempt to shape peoples beliefs about the existence, causes, and importance of the
issue. The field of environmental education, particularly in the kindergarten through 12th-grade curricula, has
addressed many topic areas including sustainable development and biodiversity (Clayton & Myers, 2009).
Consistent with these educational efforts, over the past few years climate science has become much more
mainstream in many K12 curricula around the country and further efforts are under way to increase exposure to
scientific knowledge and training that will allow students and adults at all levels to better interpret global climate
change data for themselves. In addition, many zoos, aquariums, and museums have dedicated programs aimed at
increasing climate literacy, in part by attempting to link climate science with tangible effects on things people
care deeply about (e.g., welfare of other humans and animals). Within the United States, many of these efforts are
supported by the National Science Foundation, the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, and the US
Global Change Research Program; together, these organizations have produced educational materials, including
the document Climate Literacy: The Essential Principles of Climate Sciences (US Global Change Research
Program, 2009), meant to improve the general publics understanding of basic climate science principles and
constructs. Many other researchers are also working on developing novel techniques for improving climate
literacy, including apps and web based information accessible to the general public (Cook, 2012; McCaffrey &
Buhr, 2008; Niepold, Herring, & McConville, 2008; see Moser, 2010, for a review of global climate change
communication research and strategies).
Of course, given our understanding of the ways in which individuals engage with global climate change at a
psychological level, it is clear that such direct information provision efforts are likely to result in only marginal
success at best with respect to increasing knowledge, and ultimately concern in the general public, about global
climate change (cf. Bulkeley, 2000; Kellstedt et al., 2008; Moser, 2010). In an effort to promote effective
communication with the public about global climate change, various organizations and research groups have
published manuals, articles, and books (Center for Research on Environmental Decisions, 2009; Maibach, RoserRenouf, & Leiserowitz, 2008; Moser & Dilling, 2007) aimed at applying our understanding of the challenges that
global climate change poses to our cognitive- and experiential-based systems (see above) to the development of
education and communication strategies that increase objective knowledge about global climate change (cf.
Center for Research on Environmental Decisions, 2009). These efforts reflect the insights that psychological
research holds for explicating peoples understanding of the issue, as detailed above. For example, because the
dynamics of stock and flow systems are highly confusing for most individuals (Sterman & Booth Sweeny, 2002),
utilizing analogies from real (p. 653) life (e.g., bathtubs, bank accounts) to talk about climate dynamics may be
effective in some cases. In a related vein, the ability of films to portray vivid images has been found to influence
knowledge and concern about climate change (if not necessarily behavior that would address it; see Nolan, 2010),
pointing to another possible route for educating nonscientists about the issue.
Page 8 of 31
Impacts
Much attention has been given to the current and impending physical effects of global climate change, in addition
to increasing attention for the human dimensions of these impacts. Impacts on the earth itself include heat and
drought in some areas of the world, and melting icecaps, eroding beach lines, and increased rainfall in others.
These geophysical changes in turn impact animal populations and their habitat and migration, as well as leading to
possible increases in the maltreatment of animals and animal welfare (e.g., increased factory farming for food
production; Dawkins & Bonney, 2008). For humans, these climate changedriving ecological changes can have
considerable health implications. Physical impacts include decreased access to essential resources such as food
(Brown & Funk, 2008), clean air (Kinney, 2008), clean water, and energy resources; movement and migration
(Reuveny & Moore, 2009); economic and occupational changes (Pereira, 2009; Galvin, 2009); increased disease
and illness (Donohoe, 2010); personal loss (Randall, 2009); and decreased fertility and/or life expectancy (Lin,
2010; Tang, Petrie, & Rao, 2009).
The human impacts of global climate change extend into domains often studied by psychologists (Doherty &
Clayton, 2011; Swim & Clayton, 2011). These include impaired emotional well-being, stress, and anxiety. They also
include extended effects into personal relationships and intergroup relations due to, for instance, increased crime
and violence (e.g., due to heat-related crime, Rotton & Cohn, 2003; conflict over resources, Donahoe, 2010; or
domestic violence, Enarson, 1999). Individuals and communities who then attempt to cope with and prepare for
geophysical, social, and psychological impacts create subsequent effects. Below we first consider some of the
psychological impacts of climate change. We then consider adaptation to climate change and associated social
justice issues.
Psychological Impacts
While climate change impacts can result in short-term, isolated, or discrete stressors (e.g., hurricanes or floods),
long-term climate changes may be more widespread over geographic space and time (e.g., spreading of disease)
and can result in chronic stress. The former has been examined in a host of literature both within and outside
psychology addressing the human impacts of natural and large-scale disasters and adaptive coping techniques
(see Lindell, this volume). These include the development of phobias, social anxiety disorder, post-traumatic stress
disorder, and depression (Hussain, Weisaeth, & Heir, 2011). The latter, however, are less studied in direct relation
to climate change, as the impacts of long-term climate changes have only recently been discussed within the
psychological literature. Yet, chronic effects are likely to include anxiety, worry, grief and mourning, guilt, despair,
and apathy, to name a few (Doherty & Clayton, 2011).
A variety of intergroup consequences are also likely to develop. Competition over increasingly scarce resources
will likely increase intergroup tensions and conflict (Zhang et al., 2007), such as the conflicts and suffering that
have and will likely continue to ensue over access to water (i.e., water wars, (p. 654) e.g., see Shiva, 2002,
2006). Additionally, conflicts and increasing climate threats may lead to changes in identity or social categories,
such as environmentalists, climate change deniers, or contributors, which may in turn lead to the formation of new
stereotypes, prejudice, and discrimination. Impacts such as forced migration from rural areas may create indirect
Page 9 of 31
Adaptation
Although the term adaptation has been used in climate change discussions largely to refer to technological and
physical changes made in response to climate disasters, it is applicable to a psychological examination of climate
change impacts as a way of understanding how people respond to and cope with climate change impacts. Reser
and Swim (2011) have described psychological adaptation as anticipated and reactive responses to climate
change in human thinking and behavior, and as a coping response to physical and social environmental changes.
Some forms of adaptation focus on coping with immediate short-term consequences of climate change that emerge
from natural disasters. Basic behavioral adaptation to climate change can include assistance with essential human
needs, such as food, clothing, and shelter. This may also extend to financial assistance, creation of new jobs, and
migration. Short-term impacts, such as natural disasters, tend to make suffering more salient or easy to identify
with, which, according to the empathy-altruism hypothesis, increases helping behavior (Batson et al., 1981). In
addition, psychological effects such as the low-cost situation hypothesis (e.g., Diekmann & Preisendrfer, 1992;
Kempton et al., 1985) and social helping norms (Cialdini et al., 1981) may increase helping when one comes across
an easily identifiable charity or witnesses others helping.
These types of assisted adaptations may not be related to long-term climate change impacts. Such individual and
social assistance is not usually as readily available to help with adaptation to chronic impacts of climate change,
perhaps because it requires more dedicated monetary relief and behavior change rather than one-time donations
of time and money. Long-term impacts are also less likely to be covered by the media, and when they are, chronic
exposure may create compassion fatigue (Figley, 1995). Additionally, psychological processes such as the freerider tendency (e.g., Condie et al., 1976) and the bystander effect/diffusion of responsibility may hinder helping
with adaptation to climate change impacts because individuals may assume that there are many other individuals
who can take care of the problem (Frantz & Mayer, 2009; Latane et al., 1981).
Those who have already experienced chronic impacts of climate change may engage in a number of methods to
psychologically adapt or adjust to their current situation. These may include cognitive responses (e.g., appraisals
or reframing), affective responses (e.g., worry, hope, guilt, or shame), or social responses (e.g., volunteering,
social support, or social amplification or attenuation; Doherty & Clayton, 2011; Reser & Swim, 2011). A few scales
specifically intended to measure coping with global environmental problems have recently emerged, which assess
problem-solving, expressive coping, denial of guilt, relativization, wishful thinking, self-protection, pleasure, and
resignation(Homburg, Stolberg, & Wagner, 2007).
Another important type of psychological adaptation is proactive coping, in which individuals prepare for a stressful
event before it occurs, to thwart or minimize its effect (Aspinwall & Taylor, 1997). When related to climate change,
this may include preparing for anticipated threats and stressors, or preparing for future disasters after the
experience of a previous disaster. Once again, there is a relatively large body of literature addressing proactive
coping (p. 655) in relation to short-term stressors, such as disaster preparation. Some of these preparations
include community building and education about mental health impacts, emotion management training, cognitive
behavioral coping skills, and stress inoculation training, as well as changing threat perceptions and appraisals of
the event (Morrissey & Reser, 2007). Sims and Baumann (1972) illustrated that increased locus of control led to
Page 10 of 31
Page 11 of 31
Page 12 of 31
Page 13 of 31
Information
The publics lack of information about personal climate change mitigating behaviors is revealed by its
underestimation of the extent to which certain behaviors produce a relatively large amount of CO2 and, to a lesser
degree, the overestimation of the extent to which other behaviors produce a relatively small amount of CO2 (Attari,
DeKay, Davidson, & Bruine de Bruin, 2010). Knowledge about the extent to which different behaviors produce CO2
is useful for individuals who are motivated to reduce emissions as well as policy makers who want to know which
behaviors to target. However, individuals behavioral choices are not typically based upon energy savings
(Poortinga, Steg, Vlek, & Wiersma, 2003) and, while information may be necessary for some behaviors, it alone is
not likely to be sufficient to predict behaviors (see Schulz, this volume).
Page 14 of 31
Emotions
Emotions can be powerful predictors of behavior and are likely to be aroused when people think about climate
change. Appraisal theory of emotion suggests that those who perceive climate change to be a risk are likely to
experience fear or worry and those who perceive they or their country are responsible for climate change will
likely experience individual or collective guilt, respectively (Swim & Bloodhart, in preparation). These emotions can
then influence behaviors such as when collective guilt predicts support for climate change policies (Ferguson &
Branscombe, 2010). Other emotions (e.g., hope, empathy, pride, moral outrage, and boredom) are also likely to be
important for predicting willingness to engage in climate change mitigating behaviors (Swim & Bloodhart, in
preparation). For instance, volunteer behavior that benefits the environment helps people feel pride in their efforts
to address climate change (Nevin, 2010). Such positive consequences can encourage individuals to change and
sustain their own behaviors (Neuringer, 2010).
External Factors
External factors are predictors beyond the individual that influence behaviors (Stern, 2000). It can be practically
beneficial to explicitly identify external factors that are barriers, as is done within community-based social
marketing (McKenzie-Mohr & Smith, 1999), and to help individuals overcome the barriers. External factors,
including time, money, and responsibility to others, can hamper individuals and businesses in following through on
practices that could reduce emissions (e.g., Frey, 2010; Revell et al., 2010). External factors, however, can also
prompt climate change mitigation. For instance, government regulations and shareholder actions, which can be
considered external to those in management, can encourage or even mandate energy reduction in businesses
(Reid & Toffel, 2009).
Societal Factors
Societal factors provide a backdrop for individual behavior and reflect macrolevel external predictors (p. 660) of
Page 15 of 31
Decision-Making
Decision-making about climate change mitigating behaviors faces many uncertainties: when various impacts will
occur; whether there will be tipping points in impacts; the extent to which individual behavioral changes will aid
adaptation or mitigation; whether others will also change behaviors making ones own behavior more meaningful;
and whether undesirable or unintended effects of responses to climate change, such as threats to security, will
occur, to name a few. Research on decision-making under uncertainty has been applied to understanding
responses to environmental risks, and some have illustrated how it can be applied to understanding responses to
climate change (e.g., Rachlinski, 2000; Weber & Stern, 2011). As one example, a preference for the certainty of
the status quo over an unknown future can impede action (Rachlinski, 2000). One explanation for the status quo
bias is loss aversion, where individuals are reluctant to sacrifice current benefits even for other benefits
(Rachlinski, 2000). Greater concern about losses than gains suggests that individuals will be more concerned
about potential losses from mitigation, such as jobs in the coal industry, than potential benefits that might arise from
these mitigation efforts, such as jobs in the field of renewable energy. This example is related to asymmetric
discounting where individuals discount future rewards in exchange for current consumption, even when the
current consumption is worth less than the future rewards (Milch et al., 2009).
Another approach to understanding decision-making is to understand how groups and not just individuals make
decisions (Kempton & Neiman, 1987). Understanding group decisions can be important for understanding
household decision-making. Some of the early work on household energy use and audits attended to these types
of decision-making processes (Kempton & Neiman, 1987) and interest in this topic has returned in part as a result
of new technologies available to monitor household energy use and renewed interest by energy companies in
assisting household energy conservation (e.g., Armel et al., 2010; Herter, 2010; Karlin, 2010).
It may also be important to consider how decision-making in households is done. Gender roles, for instance, may
determine who has influence over different types of behaviors (Gronhoj & Olander, 2007). This also suggests that
an important predictor of household decision-making will be the composition of individuals living together because
most households are not composed of traditional family units of heterosexual parents with children living at home.
A range of other decision-making situations are also relevant to study. These include climate changerelevant
decisions made by boards of directors (Galbreath, 2010; Prado-Lorenzo & Garcia-Sanchez, 2010) and
governmental bodies that form policies make decisions that influence opportunities for residents (Stern, 2011).
Limitations
The models used to derive the predictors noted above have not always been tested with environmentally
significant behaviors, relying instead on health behaviors or community participation (e.g., voting), and when they
do test environmentally significant behaviors, the behaviors are not always those with the most impact on climate
change. Further, it is likely important to differentiate between different types of behaviors, such as energy
investments, lifestyle changes, and activism.
A second limitation is that these models do more to describe or explain behaviors than to assist in actual
behavioral change (Darnton, 2008). Models that describe predictors of behaviors can be useful for behavioral
change (see, e.g., Maio et al., 2007) but tend to be linear, depicting factors that precede behaviors. Instead,
models of change tend to include reciprocal relations, developmental changes, and mechanisms for deep
psychological or system-wide changes, which attend to more fundamental processes of change that can be
necessary for more comprehensive and long-term change.
Page 16 of 31
Changes in Habits
Changing habits fits into a larger area of research on changing lifestyles, including changing unhealthy eating,
smoking, and driving behaviors, as well as energy conservation (Maio et al., 2007). Efforts to change habits focus
on individuals efforts to change behaviors or focus on surroundings that cue and enable behaviors. Critical selfanalysis can help unfreeze behavior by identifying automatic behaviors and cues that activate the behavior
(Darnton, 2008). It is also possible to change environments to cue new behaviors, such as through financial
incentives and structural changes (see Schultz, this volume). Once change has started, a challenge is to avoid
reverting back to an old behavior or developing new habits (refreezing behaviors). This latter process can be
aided by anticipating situations that would lead to old behavioral habits and establishing plans to address these
situations should they emerge (e.g., Bloodhart, Swim, & Zawadzki, under review; Gollwitzer, 2006).
Page 17 of 31
Change as Learning
Learning models focus on the processes by which individuals learn new ideas and behaviors. Learning models can
involve learning what behaviors are most likely to reduce emissions as well as learning skills to accomplish
behavioral goals or overcome habits. The information-motivation-behavioral skill model is an example of a learning
model that has successfully been used to encourage the adoption of health behaviors (Fisher, Fisher, Bryan, &
Misovich, 2002). It has also been used to examine recycling (Seacat & Northrup, 2010), has the potential for
addressing climate change mitigating behaviors, and can be practically helpful for interventions.
Other learning models seek to understand deeper, transformational learning, which supports complex problemsolving and engages learners in the process of change (Darnton, 2008). The double-loop learning model is an
example of such transformational learning processes. In this model, learning is composed of one loop where
individuals engage in efforts to change a particular behavior, and a second loop where individuals reflect upon
feedback from their first-loop learning efforts. This reflection results in changes in mental models or beliefs systems
that can influence behavioral assumptions, goals, and strategies (Argyris & Schon, 1996). Hall, Taplin, and
Goldstein (2009) illustrated this process through an Australian communitys efforts to address climate change
policy.
Changes in Systems
Double-loop learning is related to a larger set of behavioral change models that are grounded in systems thinking,
which attends to how feedback processes and interrelations between parts of systems predict change within a
Page 18 of 31
Page 19 of 31
Bibliography
References
Argyris, C., & Schon, D. (1996). Organizational learning II. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.
Armel, C., Flora, J., Houde, S. Sudershan, A., & Todd, A. (2010). With consumer behaviors and appliance-specific
electricity feedback. Paper presented at the Behavior Energy and Climate Change Conference, Sacramento, CA.
Aspinwall, L. G., & Taylor, S. E. (1997). A stitch in time: Self-regulation and proactive coping. Psychological
Bulletin, 121, 417436.
Attari, S. Z., DeKay, M. L., Davidson, C. I., & Bruine de Bruin, W. (2010). Public perceptions of energy consumption
and savings. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, 107, 1605416059.
Anderegg, W. R. L., Prall, J. W., Harold, J., & Schneider, S. H. (2010). Expert credibility in climate change.
Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America, 107, 1210712110.
Australian Psychological Association. (2010). Psychology and climate change: A position statement prepared for
the Australian Psychological Society. Retrieved from www.psychology.org.au/Assets/Files/Positionstatement-climate-change-August2010.pdf.
AWID: Association for Womens Rights In Development. (2004). Intersectionality: A tool for gender and economic
justice. Womens Rights and Economic Change, 9, 18.
Batson, C. D., Duncan, B. D., Ackerman, P., Buckley, T., & Birch, K. (1981). Is empathic emotion a source of
altruistic motivation? Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 40, 90302.
Beard, J. R., Tomaska, N., Earnest, A., Summerhayes, R., & Morgan, G. (2009). Influence of socioeconomic and
cultural factors on rural health. Australian Journal of Rural Health, 17, 1015.
Benson, E. (2008). Global climate change. Societys Grand Challenges: Insights from Psychological Science.
American Psychological Association. Retrieved from www.apa.org/research/action/gc-climate-change.pdf.
Berkman, L. F., & Glass, T. (2000). Social integration, social networks, social support, and health. In L. F. Berkman &
I. Kawachi (Eds.), Social epidemiology (pp. 137173). New York: Oxford University Press.
Bin, S., & Dowlatabadi, H. (2005). Consumer lifestyle approach to US energy use and the related CO2 emissions.
Energy Policy, 33(2), 197208.
Bloodhart, B., Swim, J. K., & Zawadzki, M. J. (under review). Preparing for environmental behaviors: A proactive
coping intervention as a means to promote behavior change.
Bloodhart, B., Zawadzki, M. J., Swim, J. K., & Lenz-Watson, A. (under review). Spreading the eco message: An
applied social networking program to promote environmental behavior in university residence halls.
Bolderdijk, J. W., Knockaert, J., Steg, E. M., & Verhoef, E. T. (2011). Effects of pay-as-you-drive vehicle insurance
on young drivers speed choice: Results of a Dutch field experiment. Accident Analysis and Prevention, 43(3),
11811186.
Bord, R. J., Fisher, A., & OConnor, R. E. (1998). Public perceptions of global warming: United States and
international perspectives. Climate Research, 11, 7584.
Bostrom, A., Morgan, M. G., Fischhoff, B., & Read, D. (1994). What do people know about global climate change? I.
Mental models. Risk Analysis, 14(6), 959970.
Boykoff, M., & Boykoff, J. (2004). Balance as bias: Global warming and the U.S. prestige press. Global
Environmental Change, 14, 125136.
Page 20 of 31
Page 21 of 31
Page 22 of 31
Page 23 of 31
Page 24 of 31
Page 25 of 31
Page 26 of 31
Page 27 of 31
Retrieved from
http://library2.lawschool.cornell.edu/hein/Rachlinski%20Jeffrey%202000%20U.%20Ill.%20L.%20Rev.%20299%20%
Randall, R. (2009). Loss and climate change: The cost of parallel narratives. Ecopsychology, 1, 118129.
Read, D., Bostrom, A., Granger Morgan, M., Fischhoff, B., & Smuts, T. (1994). What do people know about global
climate change? 2. Survey studies of educated laypeople. Risk Analysis, 14(6), 971982.
Reid, E. M., & Toffel, M. W. (2009). Responding to public and private politics: Corporate disclosure of climate
change strategies. Strategic Management Journal, 30(11), 11571178.
Reser, J. P., & Swim, J. K. (2011). Adapting to and coping with the threat and impacts of climate change. American
Psychologist, 66, 277289.
Reuveny, R., & Moore, W. H. (2009). Does environmental degradation influence migration? Emigration to developed
countries in the late 1980s and 1990s. Social Science Quarterly, 90, 461479.
Revell, A., Stokes, D., & Chen, H. (2010). Small businesses and the environment: Turning over a new leaf?
Business Strategy and the Environment, 19(5), 273.
Risen, J. L., & Critcher, C. R. (2011). Visceral fit: While in a visceral state, associated states of the world seem more
likely. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 100, 777793.
Roberts, J. T., & Parks, B. C. (2007). A climate of injustice: Global inequality, north-south politics, and climate policy.
Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
Rogers, D. E. M. (2003). Diffusion of innovations (5th ed.). New York, NY: Simon & Schuster, Inc.
Rotton, J., & Cohn, E. G. (2003). Global warming and U.S. crime rates: An application of routine activity theory.
Environment and Behavior, 35, 802825.
Scannell, L., & Grouzet, F. M. E. (2010). The metacognitions of climate change. New Ideas in Psychology, 28(1),
94103.
Schlag, P. (2010). Nudge, choice architecture, and libertarian paternalism. Michigan Law Review, 108, 913924.
Schultz, P. W. (2001). The structure of environmental concern: Concern for self, other people, and the biosphere.
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 21(4), 327339.
Schultz, P. W., Gouveia, V. V., Cameron, L. D., Tankha, G., Schuck, P., & Franek, M. (2005). Values and their
relationship to environmental concern and conservation behavior. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology, 36(4),
457475.
Schultz, P. W., Nolan, J. M., Cialdini, R. B., Goldstein, N. J., & Griskevicius, V. (2007). The constructive, destructive,
and reconstructive power of social norms. Psychological Science, 18(5), 429434.
Schwarz, N. (2001). Asking questions about behavior: Cognition, communication, and questionnaire construction.
American Journal of Evaluation, 22(2), 127160.
Seacat, J. D., & Northrup, D. (2010). An information-motivation-behavioral skills assessment of curbside recycling
behavior. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 30(4), 393.
Seager, J. (2009). Death by degrees: Taking a feminist hard look at the 2 degrees climate policy. Women, Gender
& Research, 18, 1122.
Shaw, C. (2009). The dangerous limits of dangerous limits: Climate change and the precautionary principle.
Sociological Review, 57, 103123.
Shiva, V. (2002). Water wars: Privatization, pollution, and profit. Cambridge, MA: South End Press.
Shiva, V. (2006). When the rivers run dry: WaterThe defining crisis of the twenty-first century. Boston, MA:
Page 28 of 31
Page 29 of 31
Page 30 of 31
Notes:
(1.) These differences likely have to do with the item wording used by Gallup and Pew; Pew asks participants, Is
there solid evidence the earth is warming: Yes, because of human activities; Yes, because of natural patterns; Yes,
but dont know why; No; Dont know, while Gallup asks, From what you have heard or read, do you believe
increases in the earths temperature over the last century are due more to: the effects of pollution from human
activities or natural changes in the environment that are not due to human activities?
Janet K. Swim
Janet K. Swim Department of Psychology The Pennsylvania State University University Park, PA
Ezra M. Markowitz
Ezra M. Markowitz Environmental Studies Program Department of Psychology University of Oregon Eugene, OR
Brittany Bloodhart
Brittany Bloodhart Department of Psychology The Pennsylvania State University University Park, PA
Page 31 of 31
Introduction
Environmental psychology stands in an interesting place. On the one hand, the environmental challenges facing
society have led to greater recognition of the significance of environments in determining individual and societal
well-being. On the other hand, researchers around the globe express concern that the field has not established a
firmer foothold (e.g., Reser, 2008; Sautkina, 2008): there are few degree-granting programs in environmental
psychology, it is often unrepresented in undergraduate curricula, and many professional psychologists know little
about it as an area of study. As described in the introductory chapter, increased awareness of environmental
issues and their psychological components has stimulated research and led to the publication of a number of new
journals. Conservation psychology arose in response to this increased sense of urgency around maintaining a
healthy natural environment. How will the emergence of this new field affect the existing one? Will it increase the
visibility and effectiveness of environmental psychology, or will it lead to fragmentation and marginalization?
This handbook has reviewed an extensive array of research. In addition to describing current work in
environmental and conservation psychology, it was hoped that a working definition of conservation psychology
and the way in which it intersects with environmental psychology would emerge from a survey of the relevant
literature. With a wide range of topics and literature reviewed, the chapters present a wealth of information about
current research and theory. It is impossible to provide a comprehensive review, and much relevant work is
excluded; even so, the coverage provides an important picture of both the present and future state of these
related areas of study. This concluding chapter will describe some of the common foci and emerging themes and
questions. I close with a discussion of the future relationship between environmental and conservation psychology.
Page 1 of 13
Social Psychology
Many environmental and conservation psychologists come out of a social psychology background, which shares
with environmental psychology an emphasis on factors external to the individual. Thus, it is not surprising that a
great deal of social psychological theory is utilized in the research and discussed in this volume. In particular,
these chapters have made extensive reference to theories of attitude-behavior relationships, such as Stern et al.s
(1999) Value-Belief-Norm (VBN) theory. There is a rich history of research within social psychology on predictors of
attitude change and on the relationship between attitudes and behavior. Conservation psychologists draw on this
research to understand how people might be led to develop more pro-environmental attitudes and, more important,
how and when such attitudes might lead to more sustainable behavior. VBN theory integrates individual and social
factors, along with the cognitive element (beliefs) that has typically been the focus of public educational
interventions. Additional perspectives from social psychology emphasize other social constructs, such as
stereotypes and identity, as both causal agents and potential consequences of environmentally significant
behaviors.
Evolutionary Theory
Explanations based on an evolutionary perspective suggest ways in which different abilities and tendencies were
likely to have been selected for during an environment of early adaptation. This perspective, which is increasingly
influential on the field of psychology in general, has been particularly important in environmental and conservation
psychology since the development of E. O. Wilsons biophilia hypothesis (Kellert & Wilson, 1993). The suggestion
that humans have an innate, inherited tendency to have an emotional response to elements of nonhuman nature
both suggests testable research hypotheses and provides a broad justification for research focused on the natural
environment. The evolutionary perspective, if taken seriously, should stimulate research designed to investigate
the genetic links behind responses to natural environments. However, we must be cautious about committing the
naturalistic fallacy; even if the biophilia hypothesis were true, it does not by itself provide an argument for
protecting natural environments.
Page 2 of 13
Health
Questions of health and well-being, both individual and social, are central to psychology as a discipline. One of the
contributions of environmental psychology has been to draw attention to the impacts of physical environments on
well-being, as is exemplified in the chapter by Brown and Werner. In fact, as described by Fornara and Andrade,
some of the first studies in the field of environmental psychology concerned the influence of physical attributes and
design features of psychiatric hospitals on their inmates. The rise of conservation psychology reflects not only an
increasing concern for environmental health, but also an emphasis on its interdependence with human health. Not
all of the chapters highlight health to the same extent, but together they illustrate a range of ways of thinking about
health, and include both positive and negative environmental impacts. Awareness of these impacts, in turn,
provides an anthropocentric motivation for concern about the well-being of the natural environment.
Environmental Benefits
The evidence for positive psychological effects of nature is growing. The chapters by Staats, Russell, and Wells
and Rollings most explicitly describe the results of this research, which has demonstrated that exposure to
elements of nature can have positive impacts on cognitive performance, affective state, and social relations.
Discussion of this research can also be found in almost all of the chapters on specific environments: even within
workplaces, health care settings, or correctional institutions, elements of nature can benefit the occupants. In
addition, many of the other chapters feature the possibility of more diffuse or indirect environmental benefits: on
sense of self, for example (Clayton; Corral-Verdugo; Myers). The chapter by Vining and Merrick, though not
specifically about health, suggests the possibility that epiphanies might also be considered as contributing to
human well-being and that nature has some beneficial effects that are harder to quantify than enhanced health or
increased longevity. Suedfeld, too, describes the possibility of positive effects from even stressful natural events,
and Brown and Werner remind us that the physical environment can have aesthetic as well as functional value.
Environmental Disbenefits
The environmental movement was largely prompted by disbenefits: evidence for the harmful effects of a polluted
environment. While environmental toxins in the air, soil, and water remain a concern, Stansfeld, Clark, and
Crombies chapter focuses on the effects of an often-overlooked type of pollution: noise. Frequently all of these
environmental disbenefits result reciprocally from harms that human behavior has inflicted on the environment. The
chapter on climate change discusses what may be the most significant impact humans have had and are having
on the environment by increasing the emission of greenhouse gases, such as carbon dioxide, and details some
probable negative impacts on humans. Even well-functioning environments, however, can have negative effects
on human health, as suggested by Lindell in his chapter on response to environmental disaster and by Suedfelds
chapter on extreme environments. One of the defining characteristics of nature is that it lies outside of human
control. It is misleading and disingenuous to imply that there is a perfect relationship between human and
environmental health.
Justice
Consideration of environmental benefits and disbenefits leads to a recognition that these are not distributed
equally, and that there are social justice implications to their allocation (Swim et al.). Conflicts arise when people
perceive an unjust distribution. This injustice may arise from a lack of concern for the benefits or disbenefits
experienced by an out-groupa lack of concern that arises from disparities in social power and from the dynamics
of group identities. Opotows chapter is eloquent about the mechanisms behind this sort of social injustice, and
Clayton describes some of the political and psychological issues surrounding identities. However, injustice may
also result from a failure to consider different sources of environmental value, or from disagreement about what
Page 3 of 13
Education
In a narrow sense, education involves the transmission of knowledge and the development of competencies,
traditionally in a formal learning environment. This continues to be an area of interest for environmental and
conservation psychologists, who have given a great deal of attention to the environments that best facilitate
learning (Sanoff & Walden) and to the types of competencies that might be required for environmentally literate
citizens (Wals). In a broader sense, however, education may include attempts to modify attitudes and behavior, as
discussed by Gifford and Sussman and by Schultz and Kaiser. Education can occur outside the traditional
classroom, in informal learning environments and throughout the life span, which may be particularly likely to foster
affective and behavioral responses (Chawla & Derr). Place-based education can both incorporate and foster the
emotional ties of place attachment to encourage education that has emotional strength and significance.
Although education has more typically been considered an attempt to transform the individual and maximize his or
her potential, education has always also included an element of socialization into societal standards. It has a
strong prescriptive component, indicating the ways in which people should behave and the things they should
know. Thus, the growing governmental emphasis on environmental education is of interest not only because of its
potential impact on students but also because of what it shows about societies expectations for their citizens,
which are changing to reflect the new environmental conditions that societies face.
Common Themes
In addition to shared content, a number of shared themes can be seen to emerge from these chapters. These
themes suggest a common set of understandings about the ways we should be thinking about environmental and
conservation psychology, as well as indicating new ideas and hypotheses to direct future research.
Page 4 of 13
Person-in-Context
Studying behavior in an environmental context is challenging, because it pulls against the goal of attaining
experimental control. Although a great deal of psychological research has attempted to isolate the person from
social and physical factors in order to draw generalizable conclusions about human functioning, environmental
psychology questions the validity of this approach, arguing that people react to and interact with specific
environmental contexts. However, contexts incorporate not only physical components, which tend to be relatively
static, but also dynamically changing social components. Acknowledging the complexity, specificity, and
Page 6 of 13
Temporal Dimension
Time is important to consider as an aspect of values, outcomes, and behaviors. Steg and deGroot identify the
temporal dimension as particularly important in determining which of multiple valued outcomes will be prioritized.
Individuals who take action to promote environmental sustainability are by definition oriented toward the future to
some extent, placing greater value on future outcomes than on present comfort, while those who live an
unsustainable lifestyle are more focused on the present or the past. Similarly, Syme and Nancarrow note that
definitions of justice can vary depending on the time frame that is used to evaluate the distribution (p. 679) of
costs and benefits. Cultures differ in their temporal orientation (Milfont); what social and psychological factors
promote a future orientation? Does temporal discounting relate to social discounting? It is not just individual
perceptions that assign different values to the same outcome at different points in time. As Schultz and Kaiser point
out, even the determination of a behavioral outcome as good or bad varies over time. The importance of temporal
change is particularly highlighted in the chapter by Swim, Markowitz, and Bloodheart: not only does the
significance of an environmentally relevant behavior change over time, but behavior changes also are part of an
ongoing process rather than a one-time phenomenon. Longitudinal research that examines behavior change over
time would answer important questions about how changing one behavior leads to, or inhibits, other behavioral
changes.
Perceptions of change over time are also fundamental to how the public responds to climate change. What is the
role of the temporal dimension in environmental perception, aesthetics, or wayfinding? How do seasonal changes
affect environmental preferences? How does the flow of information as we move through an environment influence
our perceptions? Gibson (1950) described the phenomenon of optic flow, demonstrating that the change in visual
input over time has informational value; recent research on the auditory looming effect (e.g., Neuhoff, 2001)
reminds us that environments are perceived through multiple sensory channels. From a systems theory approach,
environments are defined by their history as well as by their attributes at a given point in time.
The issue of dose-response relationships, that is, quantifying the level of exposure to environmental attributes that
leads to a particular outcome, also concerns time, because duration is one determinant of the overall level of
exposure. People who spend a few hours seated next to a potted plant may be getting the same dose of nature as
people who spend a few minutes driving through a stand of trees. Questions about the experience of individuals
with different levels of mobility, raised by Moser, relate to time in that people who traverse the city more extensively
or more frequently are exposed to it for greater lengths of time. In the 1987 handbook, Proshansky encouraged
greater attention to change over time, and that suggestion is implicitly or explicitly echoed in the current handbook.
Page 7 of 13
Interdisciplinarity
Psychology has been called a hub discipline, straddling the border between natural and social science (e.g.,
Clay, 2011). This position makes it easier for psychologists to engage in productive dialogue with a variety of other
disciplines, looking outward beyond psychology to incorporate information from chemistry and biology, to
sociology and political science, and even the arts and humanities. All these perspectives are valuable in
attempting to understand something as complex as an environment and the ways in which people interact with it.
Interdisciplinarity implies not just combining the input of different disciplines, but also working (p. 680)
collaboratively with other disciplines to solve problems that cant be encompassed within the scope of a single
discipline. Environmental psychologists have traditionally interacted with architects and design professionals to
create environments that better suit human needs and capacities. They have worked with educators, addressing
both the context and the content of the educational process, while also providing expertise for many other applied
projects. With the development of conservation psychology, there is a new emphasis on communication with
biologists (to design effective conservation plans), sociologists (to understand social impacts of environmental
issues), and policy makers in order to better understand, and more effectively address, the ways in which people
and the environment affect each other. Interdisciplinarity is increasingly common in scientific research, and for
environmental and conservation psychologists, the ability to work with other disciplines is key.
Applications
One of the key tenets of environmental psychology is that relationships between people and their environments are
bidirectional. The fact that environments affect people means that research applications are important. The fact
that people affect environments means that research applications are possible. The applications of environmental
and conservation psychology are extensive. Some of the applications are designed to address specific problems,
such as providing healthy workplaces, successful schools, or functioning prisons. Others intend to address more
global social problems, such as sustainability and climate change. Several of the chapters remind us that many
problems can only be managed, rather than solved. Some sources of environmental conflicts reflect incompatible
goals and values (Samuelson & Barratt). Climate change cannot at this point be avoided; people will have to adapt.
These chapters also highlight a frequent gap between research and its application. Researchers working in these
fields need to give careful consideration to the best ways to communicate their results to practitioners, as the final
step in the research process.
Page 8 of 13
Changing Technologies
Brain Research
Advances in neuroimaging and our understanding of brain processing allow a new window on the ways in which
people perceive and respond to their environments. Changes in brain activity are no more real than other types
of changes, but data reflecting brain activity have several advantages. In some cases they can show more subtle
effects, because there are some neurological responses to stimuli that are never expressed as overt behavior and
because neurological responses are not for the most part affected by self-presentational concerns. Results from
fMRI studies, in combination with a growing understanding of neuroanatomy and how the brain is organized, can
also help us to understand what certain effects or differences mean. For example, there is a great deal of
research on gender differences in spatial abilities. Research using neuroimaging techniques can illuminate the
extent to which these differences might really represent different strategies, or attentional tendencies, rather than
abilities.
(p. 681) Virtual Environments
Virtual environments enable new research approaches but also raise new research questions. What is the
ecological validity of a virtual environment? That is, how effective is it in simulating a real environment, and how
does it differ? In what ways do they enable us to get a better understanding of how people respond to real
environments, and in what ways do they represent a new type of environment that should be examined in its own
right (cf. Kahn, 2011)? The use of virtual environments could allow a degree of experimental control that has been
difficult to attain, enabling laboratory-based research on reactions to natural environments, but researchers should
be cautious in assuming that responses to virtual environments perfectly reflect responses in the real world.
Computer-Based Measurement
Computers allow us to easily assess reaction time in order to elucidate underlying attitudes and beliefs that are
either inaccessible to conscious awareness or subject to self-censorship. Schultzs work with the Implicit
Association Test (e.g., Schultz & Tabanico, 2007) has measured the strength of the association between concepts
of self and concepts of nature. How do implicit environmental attitudes and beliefs differ from explicit ones, and
when is it methodologically preferable to use the former? What are new ways in which reaction time can be used to
assess relevant cognitive constructs while circumventing the influence of social desirability?
Other researchers are beginning to investigate ways to study people in real time and real environments using
cellular telephones or other portable electronic devices. Combined with geographic information systems software,
which enables a new specificity in identifying environments, researchers have the potential to study people-inenvironments in much more detailed ways than was previously the case (e.g., Lazer et al., 2009).
Changing Societies
It is unnecessary to point out that societies are changing. What may be less obvious is the way in which these
Page 9 of 13
Changing Environments
The environment itself is changing: getting warmer, more polluted, less biodiverse. A reflective environmental
psychology will study these changes and the ways in which people adapt to them. We need more research that
looks at the big picture: not just how people are affected by changes in ambient room temperature, by exposure to
natural disasters, by the presence of plants, but how people are affected by changes in global temperature,
increased frequency of disasters, desertification. An effective conservation psychology will anticipate the ways in
which natural environments can be protected in the future. In terms of pro-environmental action, for example,
behaviors like recycling or replacing incandescent lightbulbs with compact fluorescents may become obsolete in
the Western world as recycling programs become institutionalized and incandescents are retired. What behaviors
are likely to be significant 10 years from now?
(p. 682) What Lies Ahead: The Integration of Environmental and Conservation Psychology
At the broadest level, it is not possible to draw a firm line between environmental and conservation psychology.
This reflects a similar inability to fully distinguish between other conceptual pairings, often presented as opposites.
The distinction between built and natural environments, always questionable (where does a termite mound fit?), has
become increasingly hard to maintain. Zoos, parks, and other exemplars of managed nature demonstrate that
something that appears natural can be subject to varying degrees of human design, without losing some
important attributes of natural environments. Green spaces are important components of urban environments.
Green buildings and other technology designed to use fewer environmental resources are completely
manufactured, but pro-environmental attitudes shape their use. At its root, the attempt to compartmentalize built
versus natural environments, though it is a useful methodological shortcut, reflects a broader conceptual
distinction between humans and nature that is both difficult to maintain and dangerous in its implications.
Related distinctions, equally problematic, are often made between human and environmental health, or between
psychological and social impacts. Sustainability, the currently popular term for describing the kind of society we
want to see, has multiple meanings, but overall emphasizes the integration of individual, social, and environmental
well-being. The increasing popularity of the concept serves as a reminder of the many ways in which they are
interdependentas do many of the chapters in this handbook. Social and environmental impacts are intertwined.
People live in environments, and in the long term healthy individuals will not thrive in an unjust society or an
unhealthy environment. Taking action to protect the environment may have both direct and indirect benefits for
those involved.
A final distinction that this book calls into question is that between basic and applied research. Although it is
Page 10 of 13
References
Altman, I., & Rogoff, B. (1987). Worldviews in psychology: Trait, interactional, organismic, and transactional
perspectives. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.), Handbook of environmental psychology (Vol. 1, pp. 740). New York:
Page 11 of 13
Page 12 of 13
Susan D. Clayton
Susan D. Clayton is Whitmore-Williams Professor of Psychology at the College of Wooster in Ohio. With a PhD in social psychology
from Yale, she is a fellow of the American Psychological Association and a past president of the Society for Environmental,
Population, and Conservation Psychology. Her research addresses the social context surrounding peoples relationship with the
natural environment.
Page 13 of 13
Index
Index
A
accessibility
food environments, 472474
perception, 469
physical activity, 466467
accessible identity model, 108
accidents, 380
accountability, equity, 96
accreditation, wilderness experience programs (WEPs), 438439
action. See environmental action
action competence, 528
Active Living Research (ALR), 515
active self, wilderness experience program, 432, 433, 434435
activity reflection, wilderness experience program, 432, 433, 435436
activity theory, bettering environment, 422
acute mountain sickness (AMS), 353354
Adams, Scott, 250
adaptation, climate change, 654655
adaptive behaviors, city life, 207208
adaptive management, policy dialogues, 615
Adler, Albert, 165
adolescents
place attachments, 118, 153154
wilderness experience programs (WEPs), 437441
advocacy coalition framework (ACF), collaborative partnership, 602604
aesthetic epiphanies, 498499, 502503
aesthetics
Page 1 of 62
Index
childrens drawings, 120
environmental perception and, 2829, 37
natural landscapes, 333334
physical activity, 468469, 470
student experiences in outdoors, 494
walkability, 465
affective connection, humans to nature, 133, 139
affordances, 12
direct perception and environmental psychology, 2627
environment, 116
environmental, 221
evaluations and actions, 224
everyday life, 222
Gibsonian concept, 2527, 34
investigations and extensions of, 26
model for examining, 223, 225
tool for evaluation and design, 2728
water misuse, 586
Against All Odds: Holocaust Survivors and the Successful Lives They Made in America, 348
Age, environmental concern, 68
aggregation. See segregation and aggregation
air pollution, Harlem, 419420
Alabama Department of Environmental Management (ADEM), 423424
Alaska, Mt. McKinley, 354
allocation
environmental, 9394
resources, 422423
alternative dispute resolution (ADR), 604
altitude sickness, 353
altruistic values, 8486
Alzheimers disease (AD), 50, 51
American Camping Association, 439
American dream
potential health threats, 460
scenario, 459460
upstream approach, 475476
American Journal of Insanity, 430
American Psychological Association, 4, 645
American Psychologist, 2, 4
American Recovery and Reinvest Act of 2009, 564
Amnesty International, 88
amotivation, 67
Amsterdam, air disaster and noise annoyance, 383
analysis and deliberation (A&D)
collaborative processes, 606607
Page 2 of 62
Index
empirical studies, 616617
anchor-point theory of spatial cognition, 48
Anholt-GfK Roper City Brands Index (CBI), 241
Annan, Kofi, 416
annoyance, noise exposure and, 383384
anonymity, privacy, 318
Antarctic stations
extreme environment, 355357
psychological effects, 355357
anxiety
emotional burdens and worries, 132, 138
gender and wayfinding, 52
anxiety disorder not otherwise specified, 379
appropriation
home to neighborhood, 214
spatial extension of, 214215
aquariums, childrens development, 122
architecture
correctional environments, 324
health care design research, 305
health care environments, 298300
archival analysis, water conservation, 588
art, health care environment, 306
The Art and Science of Negotiation, Raiffa, 604
articulation index (AI), 254
Association of Experiential Education, 438, 439
asthma, Harlem, 419420
Atlanta, Georgia, social environment, 471
attachment theory. See also place attachment
children and nature, 120121
interplay between social and physical attachments, 153154
attention, work environment, 253254
attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), 380, 440, 513, 630, 636
attention restoration theory (ART), 120, 446447, 630, 674675
comparison to psychoevolutionary theory, 448449
human health and nature, 511513
integration, 449
natural landscapes, 336338, 343
attitude object, 65
attitudes
construct, 6566
human mitigation behavior, 658659
natural landscapes, natural resources and social dilemmas, 342343
urban green areas, 222
urban green areas and natural landscapes, 341342
Page 3 of 62
Index
See also environmental attitudes
auditory distraction
work environment, 253254
Australia
cross-cultural model, 105
environmental policy, 98
justice, 109
natural landscape preference, 339
neighborhood design, 476
place-making, 158 (p. 686)
pro-environmental behaviors, 157
school technology trends, 288
Australian Psychological Society, 4
auto maintenance, 380
autonomy, 166, 168, 185, 186
awakening epiphanies, 499, 503
awareness, water conservation, 588
B
baby boom, school buildings, 278
Bacon, Stephen, 430431
bananas, fair trade, 421422
Barker, Roger G., 11, 12, 14, 3435
behavior settings, 3133
behavior stream, 3031
eco-behavioral science, 2934
Beagle, voyage of, 1314
beef production, 473
behavior. See also disaster responses; human mitigation behavior; pro-environmental
behavior
correctional settings, 318324
domains, 557, 559
environmental identity, 174175, 175
myths about disaster victims, 391392
natural landscapes, 340341
noise effects, 376
prisons trying to change, with force, 317318
transactional and ecological models to healthy, 461463
types of consequences, 563
urban life, 207208
values and, 8789
water conservation, 586588
behavioral intentions, water conservation, 589
behavioral interventions, water conservation, 590591
behavioral plasticity, 574
behavior settings, 12, 3133
Page 4 of 62
Index
behavior stream, 3031
beliefs
global climate change, 646653
human mitigation behavior, 658659
water conservation, 589
belonging, environmental epiphany, 489
Berry, Wendell, 23
bias issues, cross-cultural research, 195196
bike paths, cycling, 466
biocentrism vs. anthropocentrism, natural landscapes, 340
biological processes, relational, 18
biophilia hypothesis
natural landscapes, 336
restoration theories, 448
biospheric approaches, pro-environmental behavior, 569571
biospheric values, 8486
Black American Earth Day, 414
Boal, Augusto, 419
BOSTI books
work environment, 248
workplace privacy, 251
bottle bills, 563564
Bowling Alone: The Collapse and Revival of American Community, Putnam, 602
brain
photobiology, 256258
research, 680
wayfinding, 4446
branding and reputation
city, 240242
neighborhood, 240
residential ecological system, 239240
residential place, 226
brandscape, 239
BREEAM, 267
Bronfenbrenner, Urie, 11, 13
ecological theory, 224, 296
hospital environment, 301, 302
Brundtland Report, 340
building-related symptoms (BRS), work environment, 261
bull pen, work environment, 250
Bush, George W., 647
C
Caerphilly Collaborative Heart Disease Study, 379
California
earthquakes, 393394
Page 5 of 62
Index
FlexYourPower campaign, 561
green schools, 286
outdoor science schools, 544
polluted neighborhoods, 417
San Francisco Estuary Project, 599600
toxic air and industry in L.A., 420
California Department of Fish and Game (CDFG), 616
Camp Ahmek, 430
Campbell paradigm, 570
Camp Chocorua, 429
Camp Wawokiye-1926, 430
Camp Wediko-1935, 430
Canada
innovative work arrangements, 265
International Childrens Environment Conference, 534
nature attachment, 157
One Tonne Challenge, 561
school technology trends, 288
wilderness programs, 432, 437439
carbon emissions, household actions, 558
caregivers, health care environment, 309310
Carnegie Corporations Council on Adolescent Development, 279
Carson, Rachel, 530, 630
cash-for-clunkers program, 564
cathode-ray tube (CRT), 255
CATWOE, human activity system, 604605
Center for Health Design, 300, 311
Center for the Built Environment, UC Berkeley, 252
Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), 460
Central African Republic, 367
centrality, city dwellers, 213
certainty, climate change, 649
Charcot, JeanBaptiste, 348
Chavis, Benjamin Jr., 414
Chesapeake Bay, nature programs, 544
Chicago
housing quality, 512
public housing, 514515
Chicago Zoological Society, 3
child-care, neighborhood, 234
children. See also children and nature
activities in nature, 118119
activity in outdoors, 117118
affective experience of nature, 119121
attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), 380
Page 6 of 62
Index
benefits of nature to, 124
emotional attachment to nature, 133, 139
evolution and development, 115
experiences in outdoors, 494
health care environments, 308309, 311312
human health and nature, 516517
involvement with nature, 155156
nature-deficit disorder, 115, 284, 428
nature-oriented education, 629
noise and mental health in, 380381
outdoor play spaces, 517
outdoor spaces, 235
place attachment, 118, 153154
play in nature for environmental action, 530531
reaction to loss of natural area, 535536
relationships to nature, 113114
term, 114
wilderness experience programs (WEPs), 437441
Children, Youth and Environments, 115
children and nature
activities, 118119
future directions, 124125
history and culture, 114116
play, 119
psychological methods and theoretical traditions of study, 116117
Children and Nature Network, 115
Chilean miners, cave-in, 348349, 352
China
culture, 183
environmental concern, 69
mass murder, 367
pollution, 192
social identity, 169
starvation under Mao, 361
church, restorative environment, 453
cities, 217n. 1. See also urban environment
adaptive behaviors, 207208
appropriation, 214215
attachment and place of identity, 214215
attitudes toward natural landscapes, 341342
behavioral adaptations, 207209
branding and reputation, 240242
characteristics, 204, 205
feeling of insecurity, 206207
from city dwellers to citizens, 215216
Page 7 of 62
Index
future directions, 216
inhabitants, 203204, 209212
living in, 207212
perception, evaluation, and satisfaction, 233
role of centrality, 213
role of proximity, 212213
segregation and aggregation, 238239
social behavior in, 208209
as specific environments, 204206
urban civilities, 208
urban environment, 204207
urbanites relationships, 210211
urban sociability, 211212
urban spatial investments, 212213
uses and activities, 235236 (p. 687)
vandalism, criminality, and insecurity, 206207
citizens
environmental stress factors, 206
from city dwellers to, 215216
civilities, urban life, 208
Civil War, slavery, 416
classroom curricula, environmental education, 539
Clean Water Act, 599
climate change, 645, 646. See also global climate change
global warming vs., 647
Climategate scandal, 648, 652
Climate Literacy: The Essential Principles of Climate Sciences, 652
Clinton, Bill, 416
coastal estuary partnerships, 609610
cognition
human health and nature, 511513
work environments, 265
cognitive development psychology, 116
cognitive dissonance theory, 72
cognitive emotion models, 130131
cognitive-experiential selftheory (CEST), 151, 154155
cognitive impairments, wayfinding, 5051
cognitive map
historical perspective, 4244
legibility of place, 4344
Lynchs contribution, 4344
wayfinding, 28
cognitive revolution, 35
Coleman, James, 602
collaboration
Page 8 of 62
Index
environmental inclusion, 422423
environmental injustice, 418422
forming effective partnerships, 420421
human health and nature, 520
work environment, 252253
Collaborative for High Performance Schools (CHPS), 286
collaborative learning (CL)
ecosystem management, 607609
processes and outcomes, 617619
project phases and process stages, 608
collaborative partnership
advocacy coalition framework (ACF), 602604
future directions, 620622
institutional analysis and development (IAD), 601602
social capital theory, 602
stakeholder, 609610
color
correctional environment, 323324
health care environment, 306
comfort
integrated models of, 259260
thermal, 258259
ventilation, 259
work environments, 258260
commitments, pro-environmental behavior, 565566
communication, work environment, 252253
communities, scope of justice, 415
Communities for a Better Environment, 420
communities of color
environmental racism, 417
pollution, 416
Communities Organized Against Asthma & Lead (COAAL), Texas, 419
compatibility, 447, 512
competence, water conservation, 588
comprehensive conservation and management plan (CCMP), 599600, 623n. 4
Comstock, Anna Botsford, 115
concentration camp syndrome, 365
concern, environmental attitudes, 6566
Concord Academy, Thoreau, 115
confidence
gender and wayfinding, 52
knowledge of climate change, 649650
conflict resolution
downstream, 598
emotions, 141142
Page 9 of 62
Index
upstream, 598
Conflict Resolution Quarterly, 622
connectedness epiphanies, 499, 503
Connectedness to Nature Scale (CNS), 172
Connectivity With Nature Scale, 171
The Conscious Use of Metaphor, Bacon, 430431
Consensus Building Handbook, Susskind, 604
consensus building theory, alternative dispute resolution (ADR) and, 604
conservation, 3. See also pro-environmental behavior; water conservation
biology, 3
emotion, 130
nature, education, 629630
Conservation Biology, 4
Conservation Letters, 4
conservation psychology, 34
expanding interest, 45
integration with environmental psychology, 56, 682, 683
water, 581, 582, 592593
Conservation Psychology, 4
conservatism, Schwartz, 8384, 185, 186
constrained action, 530
constructivism, children and nature, 122
consumerism, water misuse, 585
continental philosophy, 16
contingencies, pro-environmental behavior, 562565
control, work environment, 261263
Cooley, Charles Horton, 165
Copenhagen, 241
Cornell Medical Index, 379
Cornell University Lab of Ornithology, 123
correctional environments
architectural issues, 324
color, 323324
crowding, 319320, 326
environment-behavior issues in, 318324
future directions, 326327
history of forcing behavior change, 317318
isolation, 320321
lighting, 322323
nature views, 323
noise, 321322
personal space, 319
physical conditions, 316317, 321324
privacy, 318319, 326
proxemics, 318319
Page 10 of 62
Index
sleep, 326
social conditions, 319321
territoriality, 319
violence model, 325326
visual aspects of setting, 322324
windows, 323
correlated color temperature (CCT), 255256
Cost-effective Open-Plan Environments, 259
creative play, children, 124
crime safety
perception, 469470
physical activity, 465, 467
criminality, city life, 206
crisis of culture, 128
crisis of maladapted behavior, 128
crowding, correctional environment, 319320, 326
cube farm, 250
cultural differences. See also environmental engagement; human-environment interactions
culture as independent or moderating variable, 194
ecological fallacy, 194
emic vs. etic approaches, 194195
equivalence and bias issues, 195196
evaluating and designing cross-cultural studies, 194196
future directions, 196
history of human-environment interactions, 181182
human-environment interactions, 181182
natural landscape preference, 339340
cultural theory, 185187
culture, independent or moderating variable, 194
culture-level studies, environmental engagement, 190192
cycling, bike paths, 466
D
Dallas Salesmanship Club, 430
Darfur, 367
Dartmouth Medical School, 431
Darwin, Charles, 1314
daylight glare probability (DGP), 255
daylighting
green schools, 287
workplace, 255
decision making
human mitigation behavior, 660
long-term justice principles, 106
procedural justice, 9798
Deepwater Horizon oil spill, 636
Page 11 of 62
Index
demand-control model, work, 262
demand response, systems, 267
democide, 364
Democratic Republic of the Congo, 367
Democrats, climate change, 648, 650, 651
demographics
climate change, 650
hurricane evacuation, 400
density
classroom privacy, 283284
correctional environment, 319320
personal work space, 253
Department of Transportation, hurricane reentry, 401
Deukmejian, George, 599
developmental behaviors, wayfinding, 4950 (p. 688)
developmental psychology, social and physical attachments, 153154
developmental theories, wayfinding, 4749
Dewey, John, 14, 18, 21, 23, 26, 277, 278
digestion, relational properties, 18
Dilbert, Adams, 250
directed attention fatigue, 512
direct observations, water conservation, 588
direct perception, environment, 2627
direct supervision model, correctional setting, 324, 325326
disaster responses
antecedents of core perceptions, 404406
demographic characteristics, 406
earthquakes, 393394
future directions, 407409
hazard adjustment attributes, 403404
hazard adjustment behaviors, 407
hazard education, 404405
hazard proximity, 406
hurricanes, 397401
measuring antecedent variables, 408
measuring core perceptions, 407408
methodological directions, 408409
myths about victims, 391392
personal hazard experience, 405406
pre-impact preparedness actions, 402406
Protective Action Decision Model (PADM), 392, 393
risk perception, 402403
stakeholder characteristics, 403
theoretical directions, 407408
tornadoes, 394397
Page 12 of 62
Index
typologies of, 407
warnings and education programs, 406407
distraction, work environment, 253254
distress, 349
distributive justice, environment, 9899
dominant social paradigm (DSP), 340
dose-response relationships, human health and nature, 518519
Douglas, Mary, 185
dynamic experience, environment, 29
E
Earth Day, 416, 532
earthquakes, disaster response, 393394
Eastern State Penitentiary, 317
eating. See also healthy weight
food environments, 471474
plate sizes, 473, 475
team science research, 477
transactional and ecological approaches to healthy, 461463
upstream choices to health, 475
eco-behavioral science
Barker, 11, 12, 2934
behavior settings, 3133
behavior stream, 3031
ecological psychology and, 3435
ecocentrism-anthropocentrism distinctions, natural landscapes, 340341
ecological, 456n. 2
ecological approach
Bronfenbrenner, 224, 296, 302
environmental psychology, 3536
James radical empiricism, 1921
Lewins field theory, 2123
lifestyles, 461463
The Ecological Approach to Visual Perception, Gibson, 24
ecological environment, 128
ecological fallacy, cross-cultural studies, 194
ecological intelligence, 630
ecological optics, 27
ecological psychology
designation, 1112
eco-behavioral science, 3435
future directions, 3637
Gibson, 11, 12, 2429
ecological science
historical considerations, 1314
primary attributes, 1213
Page 13 of 62
Index
ecological theory, 674
ecology, 12, 318319
ecopsychology, 3. See also therapeutic uses of nature
relationship to nature, 428429
Ecopsychology, 4, 431
ecosystem management
analysis and deliberation (A&D), 606607
collaborative learning (CL), 607609
collaborative partnership formation and success, 600604
future directions, 620622
policy dialogue, 605606
San Francisco Estuary Project, 599600
ecosystems, 1213, 9496
educated incapacity, 633
education. See also environmental education; school environments
classroom-based curricula, 539
classroom design, 282284
climate science, 652653
environmental, and emotions, 139141
environmental concern, 7071
environmental psychology, 676
hazard programs, 404405
influencing environmental attitudes, 7172
information technology classroom, 284
nature centers and forest schools, 543544
nature conservation, 629630
open-space, 278279
place-based, 541542
pro-environmental behavior, 570571
school size, 279280
schools of future, 289290
school trends, 287289
sustainable development, 631632
wilderness experience programs (WEPs), 437
efficiency, 100101
egalitarianism
cultural theory dimension, 186, 187
Schwartz dimension, 185, 186
social solidarity, 188
egoistic approach, pro-environmental behavior, 562565
egoistic values, 85
elderly people
health care environments, 308309, 312
loss of economic resources, 362
wayfinding, 50
Page 14 of 62
Index
electronic media, children, 117118
emancipatory perspective, environmental education, 634635
Emerson, Ralph Waldo, 114
emic approach, cross-cultural research, 194195
emissions, human mitigation behavior, 657658
Emotional Affinity Toward Nature scale, 172
emotions
affective connection to nature, 133, 139
burdens and worries, 132, 138
classification of, 132133
cognitive emotion models, 130131
environmental conflicts, 141142
environmental education and, 139141
environmentally relevant, 130132, 138139, 142
from environmental protection to sustainable development, 134135
future directions, 142144
general action theories, 136137
human mitigation behavior, 659
measuring, 131132
models of pro-environmental behavior, 137
models of sustainable behavior, 135139
moral, 133, 139
moral outrage, 131
neuropsychology of, 143
rational choice models, 135136
role in environmental epiphanies, 487490, 497, 500
role in environmental psychology, 128129
self-interest vs. social responsibility, 129
socio-ecological dilemma, 134
understanding moral, in social trap, 133135
empirical studies, environmental epiphanies, 492495
energy consumption, workplace, 255
Energy Policy Act of 1992, 584
environment
bettering the, 422423
cities as specific, 204206
psychological consideration, 2324
environmental, 93
environmental action
agency and motivation for, 528530
development through significant experiences, 534536
extended mixed-method research program, 531532
factors, 529
goal, 527528
memory research, 536
Page 15 of 62
Index
play in nature as foundation for, 530531
significant life experiences, 531537
strengths and weakness of significant life experiences, 536537
surveys of significant experiences, 532533
environmental affordances, 221
environmental agencies, procedural justice, 97
environmental allocation
future, 105106
past, 106107
resources, 422423
Environmental and Behavior, 2
environmental attitudes
education, 7172
factors inhibiting behavior, 7374 (p. 689)
future directions, 74
importance of studying, 66
measuring, 6667
media and messages, 71
predicting behavior, 569
pro-environmental behavior, 7273
structure, 67
theories for, influencing behavior, 72
Environmental Attitudes Inventory, 67
Environmental Attitudes Scale (EAS), 172173
Environmental Communication, 4
environmental concern
age, 68
challenge-response model, 188
comparing values, ecological worldviews and, 89
direct experience with nature, 70
education, 7071
factors affecting, 6771
gender, 68
international differences, 6869
levels of concern, 6768
personality and values, 70
religion and politics, 6970
socioeconomic status, 68
urban-rural residence, 69
environmental conflict resolution (ECR), 598
alternative dispute resolution (ADR), 604
analysis and deliberation framework, 616617
assessment studies and dispute resolution programs, 614616
collaborative engagement processes, 605609
collaborative learning processes and outcomes, 617619
Page 16 of 62
Index
collaborative stakeholder partnerships, 609610
conceptual design of ECR evaluation, 612
consensus building theory, 604
evaluation criteria and research, 610619
future directions, 620622
multiagency ECR evaluation, 614615
National Estuary Program (NEP) coastal partnerships, 614
policy dialogues, 615616
process and outcome criteria, 611
soft systems methodology, 604605
theoretical foundations, 604605
watershed partnership project, 612614
environmental conflicts, emotions, 141142
environmental degradation
environmental racism, 417418
human activities, 415418
Environmental Design Research Association, 2
environmental disasters. See also disaster responses
behavioral responses, 391393
environmental education, 630631. See also education
classroom-based curricula, 539
emancipatory perspective, 634635
environmental service learning, 542543
forest schools, 543544
formal programs for learning, 537545
future directions, 549551, 639641
implications for education, planning and design, 548549
ingredients of effective programs, 544545
instrumental perspective, 633634
interpretations, 632635
Issue Investigation and Action Training (IIAT), 539541
learning in post-normal times, 636638
monitoring and evaluation, 635, 638639, 640
nature centers, 543544
place-based, 541542
post-normal, 635638
post-normal science, 636
pro-environmental behavior, 570571
research and practice, 548551
review of, research, 537538
risk society, 635636
Environmental Education Research, 637
environmental educators, epiphany research, 491
environmental engagement. See also cultural differences
cross-cultural studies, 189194
Page 17 of 62
Index
culture-level studies, 190192
future directions, 196
individual-level studies, 190
linking findings, 193194
multilevel studies, 192193
environmental epiphanies, 486, 497
applications, 490491
descriptive results, 498
discussion of findings, 501502
empirical studies, 492495
environmental meaning, 495497
epiphany types, 498499
future directions, 505507
implications of initial study, 504505
importance of emotion, 487490
initial data of, 498501
literature review, 491497
managing natural areas for, 505506
nature of, 505
need for and potential of, 490
participants, 487
phenomenon, 485486
place attachment, 495497
procedures, 487
psychological approaches, 491492
purposes and description, 486487
studying, 497505
thematic trends in descriptions, 499501
typology, 502503
environmental fit, residential, 222, 224226
environmental generational amnesia, 122
environmental identity
behavior, 8889
behavioral implications, 174175
creating, 169170
ethical implications, 173174
impact of, 173176
measures, 157, 170173
politics of identity, 175176
self-presentation, 175
values and behavior, 175
Environmental Identity (EID) scale, 170, 171
environmental injustice, 168
air pollution and asthma in Harlem, 419420
bananas and fair trade, 421422
Page 18 of 62
Index
bettering the environment, 422423
collaboration and environmental inclusion, 422423
collaborations to redress, 418422
community-based participatory research, 419421
environmental awareness and theater of oppressed, 419
forming partnerships, 420421
from moral exclusion to moral inclusion, 422423
future directions for research, 424425
inclusionary change over time, 423424
lead contamination in Oklahoma, 420
opposing polluting industries, 421
social movement groups, 418419
toxic air and industry in Los Angeles, 420
Environmentalism Scale, 67
environmental management
epiphany research, 490491
justice, 9394
environmental meaning, epiphanies, 495497
environmental noise, 375. See also noise
environmental perception
analytical tools, 54
applying wayfinding research, 5556
brain areas underlying wayfinding, 4446
cognitive impairments, 5051
cognitive map, 4244
developmental behaviors, 4950
developmental theories, 4749
evolutionary models, 152153
future direction, 57
gender differences, 5154
methods, 2829
spatial cognition, 42
verisimilitude in wayfinding tasks, 4647
visual impairments, 51
wayfinding, 42, 5657
Environmental Performance Index, 191, 192
Environmental Problems and Human Behavior, 4
environmental protection, change to sustainability, 129, 134135
environmental psychology, 13
affordances, direct perception and, 2627
attention restoration theory (ART), 674675
city, 216
common themes, 676680
consideration for future, 677678, 680681
design of health care, 297
Page 19 of 62
Index
ecological approach, 2729, 3536
ecological theory, 674
education, 676
environment-person relations, 1920
evolutionary theory, 674
experience as function of individual, 2021
health, 675
importance of scale, 676, 678
individual vs. collective, 679
integration with conservation psychology, 56, 682, 683
interdisciplinarity, 679680
justice, 675676
measuring emotions, 131132 (p. 690)
person-in-context, 678
pro-environmental behavior, 556, 575
restorative environments, 445
role of emotions, 128129
social psychology, 674
temporal dimension, 678679
Environmental Psychology: Man and His Physical Setting, 2
environmental racism, 414415, 417
environmental regulations, US-Canadian management of Great Lakes, 174
environmental research, natural landscapes, 334
environmental stressors, prisoners, 317
environmental values
affecting behavior, 8789
biospheric values, 8486
comparing values, ecological worldviews, and environmental concern, 89
definition, 82
future directions, 8990
hedonic values, 8687
pro-environmental actions, 81
Schwartzs value theory, 8384
social value orientations, 8283
value theories, 8287
Environment and Behavior, 2, 54, 164
environment and identity, 164165, 167170. See also environmental identity
future directions, 177
identity, 165167
measuring, 170173
Environment Identity Scale, 171
epiphanies, 485. See also environmental epiphanies
thematic trends, 499501
types, 498499
equality, 96
Page 20 of 62
Index
equity, environment, 9697
equivalence, cross-cultural research, 195196
ergonomists, comfort and discomfort, 260
Erikson, Erik, 165, 366
ethics, environmental identity, 173174
Ethiopia, 367
ethnicity, identity, 165166
etic approach, cross-cultural research, 194195
Euclidean information, gender and wayfinding, 5354
European Values Study, 192
eustress, 349
evacuation decisions
hurricanes, 397
information sources and message content, 398399
logistics, 400401
protectiveaction perceptions, 399
reentry, 401
threat perceptions, 399
evaluation. See perception, evaluation and satisfaction
everyday life, 221, 222
evidence-based design (EBD), health care, 300301, 304
evolution
child development, 115
connection to nature, 518
responses to natural landscapes, 335338
restoration theories, 448449
therapeutic camping movement, 429
evolutionary psychology, water misuse, 585
evolutionary theory, 674
executive order, Clinton, 416
exosystem
hospital environment, 302
residential environment, 224
experience
environmental concern, 70
function of individual, 2021
nature, 119121
experts, hazard adjustments, 403
external factors, human mitigation behavior, 659
extreme and unusual environments (EUEs)
Antarctic stations, 355357
future directions, 367368
general definition, 350352
genocides, 364367
literature and media depicting, 348350
Page 21 of 62
Index
mountains, 353355
natural and human-made, 351352
natural disasters, 361364
physical and psychological characteristics, 353367
sampling, 353
space stations, 357360
traumatic, 360361
extremeness, 350
eye-as-camera metaphor, visual perception, 29
F
fairness
cross-cultural model, 105
environmental collaboration, 422
justice outcome, 99100
labeling judgments, 104
water and justice, 94
fair trade, bananas, 421422
family involvement, treatment, 439
fascination, 447, 512
fatalism
cultural theory dimension, 186, 187
social solidarity, 188
favorite places, restorative environment, 453
Federal Facilities Council (FFC), 281
Federal Wilderness Act (1964), 548
feelings, 130, 140
fields of constrained action, 530
fields of free action, 530
fields of promoted action, 530
field theory, Lewin, 2123
Finland, inmate suicides, 321
fit, 221, 222
flaky environmentalists, 165
FlexYourPower, California, 561
Florida, hurricane reentry, 401
flow of information
environmental fit, 225
wayfinding, 28
fluency, restorative quality of nature, 454455
food environments
eating, 471474
macro-, 472473
micro-, 473474
food production, climate change, 656
forested environment, 495
Page 22 of 62
Index
forest schools, learning at, 543544
fractals, restorative quality of nature, 454455
free action, 530
Fresh Air Camp, 430
freshwater. See water conservation
Froebel, Friedrich, 114
functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI), 4445, 57
function of individual, experience, 2021
future orientation, water conservation, 589590
G
Gagarin, Yuri. 357
Gallup polling, 648, 650, 664n. 1
Gans, Herbert, 210
Gansers syndrome, 321
gasoline prices, 563
gender
anxiety and confidence, 52
children and nature, 120
climate change, 656
environmental concern, 68
identity, 165166
mental rotation, 5152
wayfinding, 5154
wayfinding measures, 5254
gene, 37n. 3
general action theories, sustainable behavior, 136137
General Health Questionnaire (GHQ), 378379, 384
General Health Survey, 381
generalized anxiety disorder, 379
genocides
psychological effects, 365367
traumatic environments, 364367
geographic information system (GIS), 54, 463, 465, 517
Geothermal Research, 409
Germany
cross-cultural model, 105
emotional affinity to nature, 532533
environmental concern, 6869
Hereros, 364
outdoor ecology program, 544
Gestalt psychology, 22
Gestalt psychotherapy, 432
Gibson, James J., 11, 12, 14, 34, 35
affordances, 2527
ecological approach to environmental psychology, 2729
Page 23 of 62
Index
ecological psychology, 2429
global climate change. See also human mitigation behavior
adaptation, 654655
beliefs about, 646653
causes and mechanisms, 648
certainty, 649
confidence in knowledge, 649650
demographic and psycho-social predictors, 650
educational efforts, 652653
future directions, 663
global warming vs. climate change, 647
impacts, 653656
importance, 650
meta-cognitions, 649650
psychological impacts, 653654 (p. 691)
scientific consensus, 648649
social justice implications, 655656
source of beliefs, 650652
vulnerability and resilience, 655656
global positioning system (GPS), 123
global warming, 645, 646, 647, 650. See also global climate change
vs. climate change, 647
goal-directed behavior, 569570
Golden Gate Bridge, 241
Goodall, Jane, 543
Great Lakes, US-Canadian management, 174
Great Smoky Mountains National Park, 543
green, 285
Green Globes, 267
greenhouse effect, 647
greenhouse gas emissions, 473
green psychology, 3
green schools, 286287, 542
groups, model of work environment effects, 249
Gunnery School, 429
H
habit, human mitigation behavior, 659, 661
habit discontinuity model, 572573
Haeckel, Ernst, 1314
Hahn, Kurt, 430
Hall, G. Stanley, 115
Handbook of Environmental Psychology, 14, 54, 249, 349
Handbook of Identity Theory and Research, 164
Handbook of Nature Study, Comstock, 115
Handbook of Self and Identity, 164
Page 24 of 62
Index
Hansen, James, 652
Happiness, environmental epiphany, 489
hard fascination, attention restoration theory (ART), 447
Harlem, air pollution and asthma, 419420
harmony, Schwartz dimension, 185, 186
hazard adjustment adoption
attributes, 403404
risk perception, 402403
stakeholder characteristics, 403
hazard education, disaster preparedness, 404405
hazard experience, 405406, 408
hazard mitigation, 392393
hazard proximity, hurricanes, 399400
head-mounted displays (HMD), 56
healing
restorative environment, 451
wilderness experience programs (WEPs), 437
health
activity levels, 37
comfort, 259
environmental psychology, 675
green schools, 286287
noise effects, 376, 385386
noise exposure and medication use, 378
upstream choices, 475476
work environment, 260261
Health and Care Infrastructure Research and Innovation Centre, 301, 311
health benefits
home, 233234
nature to children, 124
neighborhood, 234235
outdoor spaces, 237238
health care environments
ambient features, 306307
architectural features, 305
Bronfenbrenners systematic view, 301, 302
caregivers, 309310
children, 308309, 311312
dimensions of architectural humanization, 298300
elderly patients, 308309, 312
environmental humanization, 299
future directions, 312313
influence of design on users, 303304
inhuman image of hospitals, 297298
interior design features, 306
Page 25 of 62
Index
interplay between users and spatialphysical seating, 299
multi-place system, 301303, 313
multiple environmental features, 307308
nature of hospital spaces and roles, 302303
promoting evidence-based design, 300301
single environmental features, 305307
spatial-physical humanization of, 297300
studying generic patients, 305308
trends in design research, 304311
user-centered design, 296297
visitors, 310311
Health Council of the Netherlands (HCN), 382
Health of the Planet Survey, 184
healthy weight
food environments, 471474
macro-environmental supports, 463465
micro-environmental supports, 465469
multiple levels of support, 476477
Heathrow airport, childrens health, 380
heating, ventilation and airconditioning (HVAC), 266
hedonic values, 8384, 8687
Herzog, Maurice, 350, 354
hierarchy
cultural theory dimension, 186, 187
Schwartz dimension, 185, 186
social solidarity, 188
high-performance schools
design guides, 285286
green schools, 286287
school environments, 285287
Himalayas, 354
hippocampus, brain and wayfinding, 45
The Hippocampus as a Cognitive Map, OKeefe and Nadel, 45
historical event, transactionalism, 17
Hofstede, Geert, 183185, 189
Holocaust
Nazis, 364367
psychology, 366
survivors, 366367
home
natural landscapes, 334
perception, evaluation, and satisfaction, 227228
restorative environment, 452
segregation and aggregation, 236
uses and activities, 233234
Page 26 of 62
Index
Hood River project, 564
hospital, 295. See also health care environments
caregivers, 309310
children and elderly patients, 308309, 311312
inhuman image of, 297298
nature of, spaces and roles, 302303
noise and admission rates, 377378
restorative environment, 453
visitors, 310311
host neighborhoods, 417
household actions, carbon emissions, 558
house of worship, restorative environment, 453
housing, public, in Chicago, 512, 514515
Howard, John, 317
human activity, soft systems, 604605
Human Behavior and Environment, 149
Human Development Index, 191, 192, 193
Human Ecology Review, 3
human-environment interactions. See also environmental engagement
cultural theory, 185187
Hofstede, 183185
Inglehart, 187189
Kluckhohn, 182183
linking models, 189
Schwartz, 185, 186
social solidarity, 186187, 188
human exception paradigm (HEP), 340
human health
attention-deficit hyperactivity disorder (ADHD), 513
attention restoration theory (ART), 511513
cognitive functioning, 511513
dose-response relationships, 518519
explanatory mechanisms, 519520
future research directions, 518520
integration and collaboration, 520
large-scale epidemiological studies, 511
mediators, 519520
mental health and psychological well-being, 513514
moderators, 519
natural environment, 509510
physical activity and obesity, 515518
physical health and physiological stress, 510511
social connection, 514515
social interaction, 514515
humanization, 296
Page 27 of 62
Index
dimensions of architectural, 298300
environmental, 299
health care environment, 296301
spatial-physical, of health care places, 297300
human-made environments, 353
space stations, 357360
human mitigation behavior
analyzing, 657658
global climate change, 656663
predicting, 658660
promoting, 660663
human-nature relationships, epiphanies, 485486, 491492, 501
human territoriality, 295
hunting-gathering economy, 181
Hurricane Island Outward Bound, 431
Hurricane Katrina, 363 (p. 692)
hurricanes
antecedents of evacuation decisions, 398399
antecedents of situational perceptions, 399400
demographic characteristics, 400
disaster responses, 397401
evacuation decisions, 397
evacuation logistics, 400401
evacuation reentry, 401
hazard experience, 399
hazard proximity, 399400
information sources, 398399
message content, 398399
preparation time distributions, 398
protective-action perceptions, 399
response-time distributions, 397398
threat perceptions, 399
warning-time distributions, 398
hyperbolic discounting, 106
Hypertension and Exposure to Noise near Airports (HYENA) Study, 378
I
Identity. See also environment and identity; place attachment
attachment and place of, 214215
content, 166167
creating environmental, 169170
groupings, 166
human mitigation behavior, 659
personal and social, 166
politics of, 175176
process or function, 167
Page 28 of 62
Index
self focus, 165
social, 168169
ideology, politics of identity, 175176
illuminance, 269n. 1
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IES), 255
Image & Environment: Cognitive Mapping and Spatial Behavior, 43
The Image of the City, Lynch, 41, 43, 44
impact orientation, pro-environmental behavior, 557558
Implicit Association Test (IAT), 121
iNaturalist.org, 123
Inclusion of Nature in Self (INS) scale, 157, 171
India
knowledge of local nature, 122
Watershed Development (WSD) policy, 101102
indirect realism, 26
individualism
cultural theory dimension, 186, 187
social solidarity, 188
individualism vs. collectivism, Hofstede, 183, 184
individualistic values, Schwartz value theory, 8384
individual-level studies, environmental engagement, 190
individual resource use, workplace behavior, 266267
individuals, model of work environment effects, 249
Indonesia, 122
indoor plants, health care environment, 306
information, human mitigation behavior, 658
information and communications technologies (ICT)
environmental education, 641
work environments, 265266
information campaigns, pro-environmental, 560561
information-processing mechanism, preference, 334335
information technology
classroom, 284
schools of future, 289290
information variables, natural landscapes, 335
Inglehart, Ronald, 187189, 191, 192
inhabitants
cities, 203204, 209212
perception, conception and evaluation, 230
sociability, 211212
spontaneous evaluation, 230231
urbanites relationships, 210211
injustice perceptions, 98
innovative work arrangements, 265266
insecurity
Page 29 of 62
Index
city life, 206
feeling of, 206207
institutional analysis and development (IAD), collaborative partnership, 601602
institutional rational choice, 601
institutional violence, environmental model, 325326
instrumental perspective, environmental education, 633634
integration, human health and nature, 520
intellectual epiphanies, 499, 503
intensive care unit (ICU), 310
intention orientation, pro-environmental, 558559
interactionist approaches, environmental and conservation psychology, 36
interactionist meta-theory, 1416, 25
interdependence, ecosystems, 13
interdisciplinarity, psychology, 679680
interior design, health care environment, 306
International Association for Applied Psychology, 4
International Association for People-Environment Studies, 4
International Childrens Environment Conference, 534
International Commission on Illumination (CIE), 256, 257
international differences, environmental concern, 6869
International Social Survey Programme, 189, 191, 192, 193
International Space Station (ISS), 358360
intersection density, walking, 463464
interventions
environmentally relevant emotions, 140, 141
human mitigation behavior, 662663
natural environments, 476
practical programs, 142143
resource management, 568
water conservation, 590591
interviews
environmental action, 533534
water conservation, 587
intrinsically photoreceptive retinal ganglion cells (ipRGCs), 256258
Iowa, flood, 362
Irvine Minnesota Inventory (IMI), 466
isolated, confined environments (ICEs), 350351
isolation
correctional environment, 320321
Eastern State Penitentiary, 317
Issue Investigation and Action Training (IIAT), 71, 539541, 542, 545, 549
J
Jaegerpris Project, Denmark, 541
jail. See correctional environments
James, William, 14, 35, 165, 446
Page 30 of 62
Index
emotion, 487488
mystical experiences, 492, 501502
radical empiricism, 1921
Japan
environmental concern, 68, 69
military aircraft, 380
noise at air bases in Okinawa, 379
volcano eruption, 362
Jim Crow laws, 418
job satisfaction, control, 262263
Johnson, Philip, 297
joint fact-finding procedures, 623n. 7
Journal of Applied Environmental Education and Communication, 630
Journal of Environmental Education, 630, 632
Journal of Environmental Psychology, 2, 55, 164
Journal of Fostering Sustainable Behavior, 4
Journal of Volcanology, 409
Judeo-Christian religion. environmental concern, 6970
justice
allocation of resources, 422423
distributive justice, 9899
environmental management, 9394
environmental psychology, 675676
equity, 9697
fairness, 99100, 422
future directions, 108109
procedural justice, 9798
scale and dimensions of decisions, 100102
scope of, 415
social discounting, 108, 109
society and, 107108
space and, 103105
time and, 105107
understanding and evaluating, 96100
water and, 9496
water management, 9596
Watershed Development (WSD) policy, 101102
K
Kant, moral imperative, 98
Kaplan, Rachel, 446
Kaplan, Stephen, 446
Kaplans model, cognitive map, 43
Kershensteiner, Georg, 277
Khmer Rouge, 364, 367
Kluckhohn, Florence, 182183 (p. 693)
Page 31 of 62
Index
knowing
function of mind, 20
spectator theory of, 26
knowledge
children and nature, 121122
climate change, 649650
environmental concern, 7071
natural landscapes, 334
pro-environmental behavior, 129
water conservation, 588
knowledge-deficit model, pro-environmental, 560561
Kyoto protocol, 71
KZ syndrome, 365
L
land management, epiphany research, 491
Last Child in the Woods, Louv, 115, 428, 530, 630
Latin America, bananas and fair trade, 421422
lead contamination, Oklahoma, 420
Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED), 267, 268
learning environment
human mitigation behavior, 662
nature centers and forest schools, 543544
schools, 280282
service, 542543
legibility of place, wayfinding, 4344, 5556
Lewin, Kurt, 12, 16, 2123
Lexis-Nexis database, 93
licensure, wilderness experience programs (WEPs), 438439
lifestyle
environmental behavior, 560
transactional and ecological models to healthy, 462
lighting
correctional environment, 322323
green schools, 287
individual resource use, 266267
North American workplaces, 255
photobiology, 256258
workplace behavior, 266
liquid-crystal displays (LCD) monitors, 255
literature
extreme environment stories, 348350
response to tornadoes, 396
Lithuania, 533
living conditions, urban environment, 205206
local ecological knowledge (LEK), 121
Page 32 of 62
Index
logistical preparation, evacuation, 398
logistics, hurricane evacuation, 400401
long-term vs. short-term orientation, 184
Los Angeles, 420
Loughmiller, Campbell, 430
Louisiana, Hurricane Katrina, 363
Louv, Richard, 115, 117, 284, 428, 530, 630
Love and Care for Nature scale, 172
luminance, 269n. 1
Lynch, legibility of place, 4344
M
macro-justice
fairness, 99100
future, 105
macrophysical environments
food, 472473
physical activity and healthy weight, 463465
transactional and ecological models, 461
macrosystem
hospital environment, 302
residential environment, 224
Malaguzzi, Loris, 280
Maloney-Ward Ecology Inventory, 67
managed nature, restorer, 450452
maps, virtual environments, 47
Marine Life Protection Act, 616
Marine Protected Areas (MPAs), 616
marketing theme, neighborhood, 240
Mars voyage, 359
masculinity vs. femininity, 183, 184
Maslow, Abraham, 493, 501
Massachusetts Department of Youth Services, 431
mastery, Schwartz, 185, 186
Mead, George Herbert, 165
Mead, G. H., 18
meaning, 20, 495497
measurement
antecedent variables, 408
computer-based, 681
core perceptions, 407408
emotions, 131132
environmental attitudes, 6667
environmental identity, 170173
neighborhood cognitions, affects and activities, 229233
wayfinding, 5254
Page 33 of 62
Index
media
extreme environment stories, 348350
pro-environmental attitudes, 71
tornado warning, 395396
mediators
environmental attitudes, 73
human health and nature, 519520
medication
caregivers in health care, 309310
noise exposure and health, 378
memory research, life experiences, 536
mental health
noise and, in children, 380381
psychological well-being, 513514
mental hospital, noise exposure, 377378
mental illness, inmates, 321
mental rotation, wayfinding and gender, 5152
Mental Rotations Test (MRT), 42
mere-exposure hypothesis, place attachment, 151152
mesosystem
hospital environment, 302
residential environment, 224
messages, media and environmental attitudes, 71
meta-cognitions, climate change, 649650
meta-theories
assumptions, 12
interactionist, 1416
organismic, 16
trait, 14
transactional, 1617
metering, water consumption, 587588
Metropolitan Correctional Centers, 324
micro-justice, fairness, 99100
microphysical environments
accessibility features, 466467
crime safety features, 467
food, 473474
physical activity and healthy weight, 463, 465469
pleasurability features, 468469
social environmental indicators, 469
traffic safety features, 467468
transactional and ecological models, 461
microsystem
hospital environment, 302
residential environment, 224
Page 34 of 62
Index
milling, psychological preparation, 398
Millon Adolescent Clinical Inventory (MACI), 440
Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory (MMPI), 357
Mir space station, 358360
mitigation behavior. See human mitigation behavior
moderators
human health and nature, 519
pro-environmental attitudes, 73
monitoring and evaluation, environmental education, 635, 638639, 640
Montessori, Maria, 114, 277278
moral emotions, 132, 133135, 139
moral exclusion, 415, 422
moral inclusion, 415, 422, 423424
Motivation Toward the Environment Scale, 67
Motives, resource management, 568
mountains
extreme environment, 353355
psychological effects, 354355
Mount St. Helens, volcano threat, 403
Mt. Everest, extreme environment, 353354
Muir, John, 429
Multiagency ECR Evaluation Study (MAES), 614615
multilevel modeling (MLM), 615
multilevel studies, environmental engagement, 192193
multi-place system, health care environment, 301303, 313
multiple, nested levels of organization, ecosystems, 13
Munich Study, 381
museums, restorative environment, 453
music, health care environment, 307
mystical experiences, James, 492, 501502
N
Namibia, 169
National Association of Secondary School Principals, 278
National Association of Therapeutic Schools and Programs, 438
National Association of Therapeutic Wilderness Camps, 438
National Estuary Program (NEP), 599, 614
National Institute of Corrections Information Center, 324
National Institute of Environmental Health Sciences Environmental Justice Project, 419
National Kids Survey, 117
National Outdoor Leadership School (NOLS), 437, 545548
National Weather Service (NWS), 395396 (p. 694)
Native American culture, social identity, 168169
natural disasters, 353. See also disaster responses
extreme environments, 361364
psychological effects, 361364
Page 35 of 62
Index
survivors, 363364
natural environments
Antarctic stations, 355357
definition, 128
environmental epiphanies, 505506
evaluating interventions, 476
human health and well-being, 509510
mountains, 353355
physical characteristics of restorative, 449
wayfinding, 5657
natural landscapes
attention restoration theory (ART), 336338, 343
attitudes toward, natural resources and social dilemmas, 342343
attitudes toward urban green areas, 341342
biophilia hypothesis, 336
cross-cultural comparisons of preference, 339340
environmental research, 334
evolutionary models, 335338
future directions, 343344
history of movement to view, 429432
human landscape preferences, 338339
human relations with, 332333
people-environment transactions, 335
perceived environmental properties and preference, 333335
prospect and refuge model, 335336, 343
restoration environment, 450452
savanna hypothesis, 338
sociocultural models of preference, 338343
stress reduction theory (SRT), 336338, 343
worldviews, values and behaviors, 340341
natural materials, schoolyards, 285
natural resources
attitudes, 342343
management cycle, 102, 109
water and justice, 9496
nature. See also children and nature; therapeutic uses of nature
affective connection to, 133, 139
affective experience of, 119121
benefits to children, 124
children involvement, 155156
concepts of and knowledge about, 121122
connectivity to, 171, 518
correctional environment and views of, 323
environmental epiphanies, 505
green exercise, 513514
Page 36 of 62
Index
human ideological positions, 340341
implicit connections to, 171172
managed, 450452
play in, as foundation for environmental action, 530531
as restorer, 450452
technologically mediated, 122124
wild, 450
wilderness experience program, 432, 433434
nature centers, learning at, 543544
nature conservation, education, 629630, 639
nature deficit disorder, 115, 284, 428
Nature Game, 533
nature-related experience, concern, 70
nature vs. nurture question, 116
Nazis, Holocaust, 364367
neighborhood
branding and reputation, 240
childrens maps, 118119
measuring cognitions, affects, and activities, 229233
perception, evaluation, and satisfaction, 228233
residential attachment, 228, 231232
segregation and aggregation, 236237
uses and activities, 234235
Neighborhood Environment Walkability Scale (NEWS), 469
neighborhood walk, children and nature, 116
neonatal intensive care unit (NICU), 310
nested organization, ecosystems, 13
nesting of processes, transactionalism, 17
Netherlands
epidemiological study, 511
lighting scheme, 258
nature-oriented education, 629
network, ecosystems, 13
neuroimaging studies, noise, 385
neuropsychology, emotions, 143
neuroticism, noise sensitivity and, 384
New Ecological Paradigm Scale, 67
New Environmental Paradigm (NEP), 67, 87, 89, 172, 191, 340
new human interdependence paradigm (NHIP), 341
New Orleans, Hurricane Katrina, 363
New Zealand Scott Base, 355
niches, schoolyards, 285
Nigeria, 340
noise
annoyance, 383384
Page 37 of 62
Index
correctional environment, 321322
definition, 375376
exposure and symptoms, 376377
future directions, 386
health and behavior, 376, 385386
health care environment, 306307
mental health in children, 380381
mental hospital admission rates, 377378
physical environmental stressors, 376
potential mechanisms, 385
psychiatric morbidity, 378380
quality of life, 381, 386
road traffic study, 379380
sensitivity and vulnerability to psychiatric disorder, 384
work environment, 260261
noise and number index (NNI), 377
norm-activation model, sustainable behavior, 136137
Norway, 339
not in my backyard (NIMBY) syndrome, 607
nuclear facilities, Sweden, 97
O
Oakland, CA fires, 364
obesity
food environments, 471474
physical activity and, 515518
public health, 630
United States, 460
objects of interest, environmental epiphanies, 500
occupational environment, 353
Antarctic stations, 355357
space stations, 357360
OECD (Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development), 190
offices, work environments, 248, 250251
Oklahoma, lead contamination in, 420
Olsen, Larry Dean, 429
One Tonne Challenge campaign, Canada, 561
open-ended questionnaires, environmental action, 533534
openness to change, Schwartzs value theory, 8384
open-space education, school buildings, 278279
optic flow, perceptual information, 28
Oregon Dunes National Recreation Area (ODNRA), 618
organismic meta-theory, worldview, 16
organizations
ecosystems, 13
environmental psychologists, 267268
Page 38 of 62
Index
model of work environment effects, 249
Osmond, Humphrey, 295
Ottoman Turkey, Armenians, 364
Outdoor Challenge Program, 494
outdoors
childrens activities in, 117118
crime safety and physical activity, 467
natural landscapes, 334
school environments, 284285
outdoor spaces
segregation and aggregation, 237238
uses and activities, 235
Outward Bound, 429431, 437, 440, 545
P
path integration, wayfinding, 28
pathogenic, 349
patients, health care design research, 305308
peace, environmental epiphany, 489490
peak experiences, Maslow, 493, 501
Pebble Project, 300, 311
pediatric intensive care unit (PICU), 311
Peirce, C. S., 14
Pepper, Stephen, 14, 15, 37n. 2
perceived behavioral control (PBC), water conservation, 589
perceived hospital environment quality indicators (PHEQIs), 300
perceived residential environmental quality indicators (PREQIs), 228, 231232, 235
perception
antecedents of core, 404406
environmental, 2829
environments for physical activity, 469471
hazard education, 404405 (p. 695)
hurricanes, 399400
measures of core perceptions, 407408
personal hazard experience, 405406
risk, for earthquakes, 402403
water conservation, 589
perception, evaluation, and satisfaction
city, 233
home, 227228
neighborhood, 228233
residential place, 226
The Perception of the Visual World, Gibson, 27
perceptual system, 27
performance, green schools, 286287
persecution syndrome, 365
Page 39 of 62
Index
personal experience, hazards, 405406, 408
personal growth, wilderness experience programs (WEPs), 437
personality
environmental concern, 70
traits vs. attitudes, 65
water misuse, 583584
personal norms
predicting behavior, 569
water conservation, 589590
Personal Orientation Inventory, 357
personal space, 295
correctional environment, 319
density, 253
privacy, 251252
work environments, 250253
person-environment system
behavior, 222
environmental fit, 224226
environmental psychology, 678
Lewins transactionalism, 2223
natural landscapes, 335
transactional view of processes, 1719
transaction meta-theory, 1617
Pestalozzi, 114
Petersen, Peter, 277
PET scans, brain and wayfinding, 4445, 57
Pew polling, 648, 664n. 1
Photobiology, work environment, 256258
photographs
relationships to actual, 37n. 4
wayfinding, 46
physical activity. See also walking
environmental epiphanies, 500
environment and behavior, 463
green exercise, 513514
historical decreases in, 461
macro-environmental support, 463465
micro-environmental supports, 465469
multiple levels of support, 476477
obesity, 515518
problems of obesity and insufficient, 460
social environmental indicators, 469
supports encouraging healthy weight and, 461
team science research, 477
transactional and ecological approaches to healthy, 461463
Page 40 of 62
Index
upstream choices to health, 475476
PISA (Program for International Student Assessment), 280
place attachment
antecedent process, 151153
consequences, 156158
definition, 148150
development, 153156
disruptions in place relationships, 157158
dynamics of, 150158
ecological and conservation behavior, 156157
environmental epiphanies, 495497
environmental perception, 152153
future directions, 159
interplay between self-regulation and, 154156
interplay between social and physical attachments, 153154
literature, 502
mere-exposure hypothesis, 151152
neighborhood, 228
tripartite framework, 149150
Place-based Education Evaluation Collaborative (PEEC), 541542
place identity, environmental and, 170
place theory, health care environment, 302
planet, freshwater scarcity, 582583
Planetree, hospital model, 300, 311
play
children and nature, 119
creative, 124
pleasurability
perception, 470
physical activity, 468469
policy dialogues, dispute resolutions, 615616
political context, disaster response, 392
politics
climate change, 648
environmental concern, 6970
identity, 175176
pollution
air, and asthma in Harlem, 419420
communities of color, 416
education and emotions, 139
environmental concern, 188
worldwide, 128
polysomnography (PGS), sleep disturbance, 383
positive affect, work environments, 264265
positive behavior change, prisons, 317318
Page 41 of 62
Index
Positive Effects of Being in Space Questionnaire (PEBS), 360
positive psychology, 349
post-materialistic values, 8586, 192, 340
post-materialist values thesis, 187189
post-normal environmental education
learning in post-normal times, 636638
post-normal science, 636
risk society, 635636
post-occupancy evaluation (POE)
buildings, 281
health care environment, 299
neighborhood, 232
post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD), 361, 362, 366
power distance, 183, 184
pragmatists, 14
Predicted Mean VotePredicted Percent Dissatisfied (PMVPPD), thermal comfort, 258259
preference
design of health care environment, 296297
natural landscapes, 333335
sociocultural models for natural landscapes, 338343
preparation time, hurricane evacuation, 398
Present State Examination, 384
present-time perspective (PTP), water misuse, 584
The Principles of Psychology, James, 19, 20
prison. See correctional environments
privacy
classroom, in schools, 283284
correctional environment, 318319, 326
work environments, 251252
procedural justice, environment, 9798
pro-environmental attitudes, 6566
actions, 81
beliefs, norms, and choices, 85
constructs leading to behavior, 7273
pro-environmental behavior, 557559
behavioral spillover, 574575
behavioral wedge, 556557
biospheric approaches, 561562, 569571
considerations, 573575
context, 571573
domains, 559
egotistic approaches, 561, 562565
emotional affinity toward nature, 532
emotional valence, 138139
environmental education and emotions, 139141
Page 42 of 62
Index
household actions and carbon emissions, 558
impact-oriented approach, 557558
information campaigns, 560561
intention-orientation, 558559
knowledge about motivation, 129
limitations, 564565
means of travel, 132
models of, 137
opposite, 144n. 1
person, 560571
person or context, 559560
place attachment, 157
rebound effects, 574
self-interest, 562565
social-altruistic approaches, 561562, 565569
socio-ecological dilemma, 134
sustainable development, 129, 134135
targets, 573574
willingness to sacrifice, 423
progressive movement, school buildings, 278279
promoted action, 530
prompts, behavior, 562
proportionality, equity, 96
prospect and refuge model, natural landscapes, 335336, 343
protective-action perceptions, hurricane, 399
Protective Action Decision Model (PADM), 392, 393
proxemics, correctional environment, 318319
proximity
city dwellers, 212213
hazard, 406
human health and nature, 516
hurricane hazard, 399400
psychiatric disorder, noise sensitivity and vulnerability to, 384 (p. 696)
psychiatric morbidity, noise exposure and, 378380
PsychInfo, 189, 645
psycho-evolutionary theory
comparison to attention restoration theory, 448449
integration, 449
stress reduction, 447448
psychological approach, environmental epiphanies, 491492
psychological consequences, water conservation, 591592
psychological effects
Antarctic stations, 355357
climate change, 653654
genocides, 365367
Page 43 of 62
Index
mountains, 354355
natural disasters, 361364
space stations, 358360
psychological preparation, evacuation, 398
psychological resources, environment, 36
psychology
environment, 2324
importance of scale, 676, 678
integration of environmental and conservation, 682683
mental health and wellbeing, 513514
place attachment, 149
role and responsibility of, 682683
worldview in, 1419
Psychology and Environmental Change, 4
The Psychology of Environmental Problems, 4
psychology of sustainability, 3
Psychology of Sustainable Development, 4
The Psychology of Vandalism, Goldstein, 282
PsyEcology, 4
public commitments, pro-environment, 565566
public housing, Chicago, 512, 514515
Publicolor school design, Shuman, 281
public policy, fairness, 99100
Putnam, Robert, 602
Q
quality of life
environmental fit, 225
model for examining, 223, 225
noise, 381, 386
outdoor spaces, 238
quantum change, elements of, 493494
quasi-stable systems, ecosystems, 12
Quebec, 227, 542
questionnaires
environmental action, 533534
water conservation, 587
R
radical empiricism, James, 1921
RAER (realistically achievable emissions reductions), 557, 558
Ralston, Aron Lee, 348, 352
rational choice models, sustainable behavior, 135136
reality, people and environment, 225226
realization epiphanies, 499, 503
recreation, restorative environment, 452
recreational environment, 353355
Page 44 of 62
Index
recycling behavior, 136, 572
rehabilitation centers, 453
relationships, urban dwellers, 210211
relativistic field theories, 14
religion, environmental concern, 6970
representational realism, 26
Rep Trak, 241
Republicans, climate change, 648, 650, 651
reputation. See branding and reputation
Reputation Institute, 241
residence (urban-rural), environmental concern, 69
residential environments
branding and reputation, 239242
definition, 221
ecological theory, 224
ecological view and affordances, 222224
explaining environmental fit, 224226
future directions, 242
matrix of, by topic, 226
model for examining, 223, 225
perception, evaluation, and satisfaction, 227233
place-specific approach, 222224
quality of life, 223224
segregation and aggregation, 236239
theoretical framework, 221222
traditional research, 226227
uses and activities, 233236
residential ethnography, 230
residential quality (RQ)
evaluation and satisfaction, 232233
urban, 228229
residential satisfaction, neighborhood, 228
resilience, 368
climate change, 655656
Holocaust survivors, 366367
resource management, motives and interventions, 568
respiration, relational properties, 18
response-time, hurricane evacuation, 397398
responsibility, equity, 96
restoration, work environments, 263264
restorative environments
attention restoration theory (ART), 446447
favorite places, 453
fluency and fractals, 454455
future, 455
Page 45 of 62
Index
home, 452
hospitals, 453
managed nature, 450452
museums, 453
nature as restorer, 450452
perceived restorativeness, 454
psycho-evolutionary theory of stress reduction, 447448
rehabilitation centers, 453
similarities and differences between ART and stress reduction, 448449
social context of restoration, 455
specific concepts of interest, 453455
spiritual environments, 453
theories on restoration, 445446
wild nature, 450
workplace, 452453
restricted environmental stimulation therapy (REST), 321
risk characterization, analysis and deliberation, 606607
risk perception
hazard adjustment, 402403
measures of, 407
Road Traffic and Aircraft Noise Exposure and Childrens Cognition and Health (RANCH) study,
380
road traffic noise study, 379380
Robert Taylor Homes (RTH), public housing, 514
Robert Wood Johnson Foundation, 515
Roots and Shoots clubs, Tanzania, 543
Rousseau, Jean-Jacques, 114
Rwanda genocide, 364, 367
S
salutogenesis, 366
salutogenic, 349
Salyut program, 358
San Antonio, TX, urban watersheds, 618619
San Francisco, 241
San Francisco Estuary Project, 599600
satisfaction. See also perception, evaluation, and satisfaction
workplace, 251252
savanna hypothesis, natural landscapes, 338
Scenic Beauty Estimation (SBE), 333
school design
classroom design, 282284
future, 288290
guides for high-performance, 285286
open-space, 278279
Publicolor by Shuman, 281
Page 46 of 62
Index
school environments
classroom design, 282284
classroom privacy, 283284
classroom seating, 283
design guides, 285286
future directions, 290
green schools impact on health and performance, 286287
high-performance schools, 285287
historical evolution of American buildings, 276279
information technology classroom, 284
learning, 280282
natural materials, niches and paths, 285
outdoor environment, 284285
progressive movement, 278279
reform pedagogy (18901932), 277278
school condition, 281282
school size, 279280
schools of future, 289290
school trends, 287289
user evaluation of school buildings, 280281
visual appearance, 282
School of Lost Borders, 437
School of Natural Resources, 446
Schools Health & Environment Study, 380
Schwartz, Shalom, 185, 186, 189, 190191
Schwartzs value theory, 8384
ScienceDirect, 148
scientific consensus, climate change, 648649
scope of justice, 107
Scope of Justice Scale, 415, 422
Scopus, 189
Scott-Amundsen South Pole Station, 355
Seabourne, Malcolm, 283
segregation and aggregation
city, 238239
home, 236 (p. 697)
neighborhood, 236237
outdoor spaces, 237238
residential place, 226
self, identity, 165
Self and Identity, 164
self-centered, 297
self-concept, wilderness programs, 435
Self-Determination Theory, 166, 168
Self-enhancement, Schwartz, 8384, 87
Page 47 of 62
Index
self-esteem, 366
self-evaluation, privacy supporting, 318
self-interest
fairness, 99, 100
pro-environmental behavior, 562565
self-limiting, ecosystems, 13
self-organizing
consensusbuilding process, 610
ecosystems, 1213
self-presentation, environmental identity, 175
self-regulation, cognitive-experiential self-theory (CEST), 154155
self-reported behavior, 66
self-reports, water conservation, 587
self-transcendence, Schwartz, 8384, 85, 87
Senge, Peter, 623n. 5
Sense and Sustainability: Educating for a Low Carbon World, Webster and Johnson, 630
The Sense of Wonder, Carson, 530
The Senses Considered as Perceptual Systems, Gibson, 24
sensitivity, noise, 384
Service Experiences Survey, 543
service learning, environmental, 542543
Shepard, Paul, 428
Shuman, Ruth Lande, 281
Shuttle/Mir, 359
sick building syndrome (SBS), work environment, 261
Sierra Club, 532
signage, wayfinding, 50, 5556
significant life experiences. See also environmental action
environmental activism developing through, 534536
environmentally active citizens, 531537
extended mixed-method research program, 531532
memory research, 536
questionnaires and interviews, 533534
strengths and weaknesses of research, 536537
surveys, 532533
Silent Spring, Carson, 630
Silvadon, Paul, 295
simulations, nature, 123
site attachment, space and justice, 103105
situational context
disaster response, 392
hurricanes, 399400
water conservation, 590
skills, water conservation, 588
Skinner, B. F., 562
Page 48 of 62
Index
Skylab, space station program, 359
slavery, Civil War, 416
sleep
correctional environment, 323, 326
health care environment, 306307
noise exposure and, disturbance, 381383
sleeping pills, noise exposure and health, 378
slipping baseline syndrome, 122
SMART Boards, information technology, 284
sociability, urban inhabitants, 211212
sociable introversion, 357
social-altruistic approach, pro-environmental behavior, 565569
social behavior
noise, 385
urban life, 208209
social capital theory, collaborative partnership, 602
social conditions, correctional environment, 319321
social connections
environmental epiphanies, 500501
prison environment, 321
social context, restoration, 455
social density, work, 253
social deprivation, isolated inmates, 321
social design, health care environment, 296297
social dilemmas
attitudes, 342343
environmental conflict resolution (ECR), 620
pro-environmental behavior, 567569
social discounting, justice, 108, 109
social environment
indicators for physical activity, 469
perception, 470471
social group
children in nature, 119
wilderness experience program, 432, 433, 435
social identities, environment, 168169
social interaction, city, 217n. 1
social justice research
climate change, 655656
public, 425
society and justice, 107108
space and justice, 103105
time and justice, 105107
social justice theory, benefits approach, 95
social learning theory (SLT), wilderness experience, 435
Page 49 of 62
Index
social movements, environmental justice and, 418419
social networks, human mitigation behavior, 662
social norms
human mitigation behavior, 659
pro-environmental behavior, 566567
social psychology, 674
The Social Psychology of Procedural Justice, Lind and Tyler, 97
social relations, work environments, 250253
Social Science Quarterly, 188
social solidarity, human-environment interactions, 186187, 188
social trap, water misuse, 586
social values
orientations, 8283
Schwartz, 8384
societal factors, human mitigation behavior, 659660
society, socio-ecological dilemma, 134
Society for Environmental, Population, and Conservation Psychology, 4
Society for Psychological Study of Social Issues, 645
socio-ecological dilemma, emotions, 134
socioeconomic status
childrens access to nature, 118
climate change, 656
environmental concern, 68
environmental degradation, 415417
natural disasters, 362363
nature and human health, 511
sociofugal spatial settings, 295
sociopetal settings, 295
soft fascination
attention restoration theory (ART), 447
notion of, 434
soft systems methodology, environmental conflict resolution (ECR), 604605
soroche, 353354
South Africa, segregation, 238
Southern California Environmental Justice Collaborative, 420
Soviet Union, mass murder, 367
space. See also personal space
correctional environment, 318319
justice and, 103105
space stations
extreme environment, 357360
psychological effects, 358360
space stupids, 358
space syntax, 54
Spain, water management, 94
Page 50 of 62
Index
Spanish-American cultures, 182183
spatial cognition
definition, 42
Garlings model, 48
spatial density, work, 253
spatial orientation, gender differences, 53
special housing unit syndrome, 321
specificity, environmental behavior, 66
spectator theory, knowing, 26
speech intelligibility index (SII), 254
sphere of needs (SON), water, 94, 95
spillover, behavioral, 574575
spiritual places, restorative environment, 453
stakeholder characteristics, hazard adjustment, 403
state conservation agreements (SCAs), 615
Steiner, Rudolf, 114
strangers, city inhabitants, 210
stress
health care environment, 304305, 306
noise, 376
noise in prisons, 322
physical health and physiological, 510511
post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD), 362
prisoners, 317
work environment, 260261
stressors, urban environment, 205206
stress reduction theory (SRT)
natural landscapes, 336338, 343
psycho-evolutionary, 447448
structure, environmental attitudes, 67
Student Conservation Association (SCA), 545, 547548
student motivation to participate (SMP), 283
student/teacher participatory interaction (STPI), 283
subcultures, city inhabitants, 210 (p. 698)
subjective norm (SN), water conservation, 589
Superfund site, Oklahoma, 420
Supermax prisons, 320
Survey of Environmental Issue Attitudes, 67
surveys
environmental educators, 534
significant experiences, 532533
survivors
Holocaust, 366367
natural disasters, 363364
survivor syndrome, 365
Page 51 of 62
Index
sustainability, from environmental protection to, 129, 134135
sustainability competence, 641
sustainable, 285
sustainable behavior
general action theories, 136137
models of pro-environmental behavior, 137
rational choice models, 135136
sustainable development (SD)
cities, 203204
education for, 631632
emancipatory perspective, 634635
instrumental perspective, 633634
interpretations of education for, 632635
monitoring and evaluation, 638639
Sweden, nuclear facilities, 97
system justification, environmentalism and, 176
systems thinking research, 103
T
Tanzania, 543, 551
Taylor County No Coal Coalition, 421, 423
Tbilisi Declaration of UNESCO, 527, 528, 529, 537
Technological Nature, Kahn, 550
technologies
access to nature, 122124
school trends, 288289
telegarden, 123
territoriality
correctional environment, 319
work environment, 253
terror management theory, 173
Theater of the Oppressed, Boal, 419
theory of affordances, water misuse, 586
theory of moral exclusion, space and justice, 103104
theory of planned behavior (TPB), 72, 589
theory of reasoned action, 136
therapeutic uses of nature
ecopsychology, 428429
education, 437
family involvement in treatment, 439
framework for understanding, 432436
future directions, 442
healing, 437
history, 429432
licensure and accreditation, 438439
Outward Bound, 429431, 437, 440
Page 52 of 62
Index
personal growth, 437
program models, 438
programs, 436437
wilderness experience concurrent model, 432436
wilderness therapy client characteristics, 439440
wilderness therapy program controversy, 441
wilderness therapy program outcomes, 440
youth and adolescents, 437441
thermal comfort
green schools, 287
work environment, 258259
Thompson, Michael, 185
Thoreau, Henry David, 114115, 429, 509
threat perception, hurricane, 399
time
changing human mitigation behavior, 661662
children and nature, 117118
discounting, 109
environmental fit, 225
environmental psychology, 678679
evacuation preparation, 398
inclusionary change over, 423424
justice and past, 106107
justice in future, 105106
perceiving path, 28
psychological events, 23
warning distributions, 398
Todai Health Index, 379
tornadoes
behavioral response, 396
disaster response, 394397
National Weather Service (NWS), 395396
toxic waste, environmental racism, 416417
traffic, 380
traffic safety
perception, 470
physical activity, 467468
traffic stress, 380
tragedy of commons, water misuse, 586
trait meta-theory, worldview, 14
transactional approach
healthy behavior, 476477
lifestyles, 461463
transactionalism, 2223, 29
transactional meta-theory
Page 53 of 62
Index
person-environment processes, 1719
worldview, 1617
transportation
car driving, 140
environmental behavior, 560, 572
environmentally relevant behavior, 132
walking, 464465
trash collection, 560, 564
traumatic environment, 353, 360361
travel, environmental epiphanies, 500
treatment, family involvement, 439
Tribal Efforts Against Lead (TEAL), Oklahoma, 420
tripartite framework, place attachment, 149150
Trout Unlimited, 532
Trump, J. Lloyd, 278
Turner, Fredrick Jackson, 429
Twenty Statements Test, 170
U
Uganda, 543, 551
Ukrainians, starvation under Stalin, 361
Ulrich, Roger, 447448, 510
uncertainty avoidance, 183, 184
UN Convention on the Rights of the Child, 527
United Church of Christ, toxic waste and race, 417
United Kingdom
children and nature, 118
childrens exposure to nature, 122
home perception, 227
hospital bed space, 301
hospital design, 301, 311
knowledge of local nature, 122
older population, 238
United Nations, 340, 341
Decade of Education for Sustainable Development (DESD), 631
ecosystems and human well-being report, 416
genocides, 364
United Nations Conference on Environment and Development (UNCED), 631
United States
children and nature, 118
childrens activities outdoors, 117
Energy Policy Act of 1992, 584
environmental concern, 69
environmental degradation, 416
history of school buildings, 276279
home perception, 227
Page 54 of 62
Index
innovative work arrangements, 265
obesity and insufficient physical activity, 460
pleasurability features, 468
public health challenges, 474
social identity, 169
traffic safety, 467468
wilderness programs, 432, 437439
United States National Institute of Mental Health, 295
University of Idaho, Wilderness Research Center, 436
University of Michigan Fresh Air Camp-1944, 430
unusualness, 350
urban diversity
city, 238239
home, 236
neighborhood, 236237
outdoor spaces, 237238
segregation and aggregation, 236
urban environment
adaptive behaviors, 207208
characteristics, 204, 205
design and planning, 240
environmental stressors and living conditions, 205206
social behavior, 208209
urban civilities, 208
vandalism, criminality, and insecurity, 206207
See also 204207; cities
urban green areas, attitudes, 222, 341342
urban identity
attachment and place of identity, 214215
centrality, 213
proximity, 212213
spatial extension of appropriation, 214215
urban spatial investments, 212213
urban-rural residence, environmental concern, 69 (p. 699)
urban watersheds, San Antonio, 618619
US Bureau of Prisons (BOP), 324
US Department of Education, school size, 279
US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), 583, 657
user-centered design
environmental humanization, 299
health care environment, 296297
influence on health care users, 303304
user evaluation, school buildings, 280281
uses and activities
city, 235236
Page 55 of 62
Index
home, 233234
neighborhood, 234235
outdoor spaces, 235
residential place, 226
US McMurdo Station, 355
V
value-belief-norm theory (VBN), 72, 137
values
affecting behavior, 8789
environmental concern, 70
environmental identity, 175
human mitigation behavior, 658659
natural landscapes, 340341
predicting behavior, 569
water conservation, 589590
See also environmental values
value-sensitive design, children and nature, 123124
vandalism, 206, 282
Vandenberg and Kuse Mental Rotations Test (MRT), 42
Varieties of Religious Experiences, James, 492
ventilation, work environment, 259
vicarious nature, category, 122
videophilia, 117
video-viewing, wayfinding, 49
Vietnam War, 363
violence, environmental model, 325326
virtual environment (VE)
new research, 681
wayfinding, 47
virtual reality, wayfinding, 4647
visitor environment relationship, 496
visitors, health care environment, 310311
visual impairments, wayfinding, 51
visual perception
correctional environments, 322324
work environments, 254256
vulnerability
climate change, 655656
noise, 384
vulnerability hypothesis, noise annoyance, 383
W
waiting area, health care environment, 307
walkability
environmental behavior, 572
macro-environment, 463465
Page 56 of 62
Index
walking. See also physical activity
accessibility features, 466467
crime safety, 467
perceived environments, 469471
pleasurability features, 468469
social environmental indicators, 469
traffic safety, 467468
transportation vs. leisure, 464465
warning time, natural disasters, 398
waste disposal, environmental behavior, 560, 564
wastewater program, procedural justice, 97
water
conservation behavior, 586588
contextual factors, 584585
freshwater scarcity, 582583
justice, 9496
management cycle, 102, 109
managing systems, 102103
psychological determinants of, misuse, 583584
psychological explanatory theories of, misuse, 585586
sphere of needs (SON), 94, 95
water conservation, 586588
archival analysis, 588
awareness, knowledge, skills and competence, 588
behavioral intentions, 589
behavioral interventions, 590591
beliefs and perceptions, 589
consumption metering, 587588
direct observations, 588
future directions, 593594
methods for studying behaviors, 587588
model, 594
personal norms, values and future orientation, 589590
positive psychological consequences, 591592
practices, 587
self-reports, 587
situational factors, 590
water management, justice, 9596
water problems, psychology of, 582
watershed development (WSD)
evaluation, 101102
future, 108109
managing systems, 102103
storm-water, 104
watershed partnership, 609
Page 57 of 62
Index
National Estuary Program (NEP), 614
processes and outcomes, 612614
wayfinding, 49
applying research, 5556
brain areas underlying, 4446
cognitive impairments, 5051
definition, 42
head-mounted displays (HMD), 56
legibility of place, 4344, 5556
perceiving path, 28, 37
research in natural environments, 5657
signage, 50, 5556
verisimilitude in, 4647
visual impairments, 51
Wayfinding Strategy Scale, 52
Web of Science, 189
Weigel Environmental Concern Scale, 67
weight. See healthy weight
Wenatchee National Forest (WNF), 617618
Wenchuan earthquake, 363364
West Harlem Environmental Action (WE ACT), 419420
West London Schools Study, 380
West London survey, noise, 377
West London Survey of Psychiatric Morbidity, 379
Wildavsky, Aaron, 185
wilderness, restorer, 450
wilderness effect, 434
wilderness experience, 432, 495
wilderness experience concurrent model
active self, 432, 433, 434435
activity reflection, 432, 433, 435436
factors, 433
nature, 432, 433434
social group, 432, 433, 435
therapeutic use of nature, 432436
wilderness experience programs (WEPs)
education, 437
healing, 437
nature as therapeutic tool, 436437
personal growth, 437
stewardship outcomes from, 545548
See also therapeutic uses of nature
Wilderness Research Center, 436, 442n. 1
Wilderness Road, Loughmiller, 430
wilderness therapy programs
Page 58 of 62
Index
client characteristics, 439440
controversy, 441
family involvement in treatment, 439
licensure and accreditation, 438439
outcomes, 440
program models, 438
therapeutic use of nature, 437441, 441442
youth and adolescents, 437441
Wildlife Clubs, Uganda, 543
Wild Rockies Field Institute (WRFI), 546
Williams, Suni, 359
Wilson, Pete, 600
windows, correctional environment, 323
winter-over syndrome, 358
Wisconsin Trappers Association, 532
Wordsworth, 114, 509
work environments
attention and distraction, 253254
behavioral consequences, 250266
BOSTI books, 248
BOSTI study of productivity, 251
cognition, 265
comfort, 258260
communication and collaboration, 252253
conceptual model, 249
control, 261263
density, 253
future directions, 268269
innovative work arrangements, 265266
integrated models of comfort, 259260
noise, 260261
ocular light-initiated processes, 254258
office type, 248, 250251
personal space, 253
photobiology, 256258
positive affect, 264265
privacy, 251252
restoration, 263264
school conditions, 281282
sick building syndrome, 261
social relations and personal space, 250253
stress and health, 260261
territoriality, 253
thermal comfort, 258259
ventilation, 259
Page 59 of 62
Index
visual perception, 254256
(p. 700)
workplace
environmental consequences of, behavior, 266268
restorative environment, 452453
work space stress, 262
World Commission on Environment and Development, 105
World Health Organization (WHO), 260, 467
World Hypotheses, Pepper, 14, 37n. 2
world of strangers, city inhabitants, 210
worlds in miniature (WIM), wayfinding, 47
World Values Survey, 187, 189, 192
worldviews
comparing values and environmental concern to, 89
interactionist meta-theory, 1416
natural landscapes, 340341
organismic meta-theory, 16
psychology, 1419
trait meta-theory, 14
transactional meta-theory, 1617
World Wildlife Fund-UK, 5
wrist-actimetry, sleep disturbance, 383
Y
Yellowstone National Park, 629
youth, wilderness experience programs (WEPs), 437441
Youth Conservation Corps, 545
Youth-Outcome Questionnaire, 440
Yugoslavia, mass murder, 367
Z
Zimbabwe, 367
zone of proximal development, 422
zoos, 122, 169170
Notes:
(1.) The city, as a fundamental place for social interaction, must be recognised as the pivotal
human settlement which provides a focal point for growth and sustainable development, for the
well-being and social cohesion of the majority of the population, for its capacity to adapt and to
innovate technically, socially, culturally and politically, for the creation of our future and a
renewed vision of the progress of humanity and for the evolution of our civilisation.
(1.) These differences likely have to do with the item wording used by Gallup and Pew; Pew
asks participants, Is there solid evidence the earth is warming: Yes, because of human
activities; Yes, because of natural patterns; Yes, but dont know why; No; Dont know, while
Gallup asks, From what you have heard or read, do you believe increases in the earths
Page 60 of 62
Index
temperature over the last century are due more to: the effects of pollution from human
activities or natural changes in the environment that are not due to human activities?
(1.) The quantity of light falling on a surface is the illuminance of the surface. The SI unit for
illuminance is lumens/m2 , abbreviated lx. The quantity of light emitted from a surface or a light
source is its luminance. The SI unit for luminance is the candela/m2 , abbreviated cd/m2 .
(1.) In this text the opposite of pro-environmental behavior is not called contra-environmental
behavior, but this form of behavior is circumscribed (e.g., behavior that sets the protection of
nature at risk). These behavioral decisions do not intend to set ecological aims at risk, but
these risks are more or less consciously accepted as negative side effects of enjoyable or
profitable activities. This is the case for private behavior (e.g., car driving) but also for political
decision-making or industrial production.
(1.) The author of this publication was a research assistant, research associate, and the
associate director of the Wilderness Research Center from 1995 to 2003 and was involved in
much of the research and report writing on a major research agenda examining the use of
wilderness for personal growth, education, and therapy.
(2.) The original term used by Berlyne is not categorical but ecological. Because of the
different meaning of ecological in common use, we choose to use a different term that more
intuitively grasps the content of the concept.
(2.) Readers may be more familiar with Kuhns later notion of paradigms than with Peppers
world hypotheses. They are broadly similar, although Kuhn placed far more attention on the
practices of scientific communities in his analysis and how scientific paradigms sustain
particular approaches to a domain of inquiry.
(3.) The very concept of a gene is hotly contested in the developmental biology literature, and
many of these critiques operate in the spirit of the transactional worldview being examined
here (Moss, 2003; Oyama, 1985).
(4.) Additional provisions included: (1) new revenue sources would not be provided for
implementation; (2) clarification that CCMP neither requires nor recommends use of the
salinity index as a water quality standard; and (3) the Bay-Delta Oversight Council
(governor-appointed group consisting of stakeholder majority representing farming and urban
water interests in Southern California) would revisit SFEP proposals on flows and water
quality (Innes & Connick, 1999).
(4.) Meta-analyses showing a positive relationship between preference for photographs of
buildings and for actual buildings (cited in Stamps, 1994) amass such a diverse set of
studies that employ a wide variety of procedures and viewing conditions that, in my
assessment, it is impossible to state with any precision what relationships are operating or
judge the comparability of the studies.
(5.) Interested readers should consult original sources (Checkland, 1981; Checkland & Scoles,
1990; Wilson & Morren, 1990) for expanded coverage of SSM. Systems thinking principles
were introduced to the general business community by Peter Senges (1990) best-selling book,
Page 61 of 62
Index
The Fifth Discipline. The first formal application, however, of open systems theory to
organizational behavior can be traced to Katz and Kahns (1966) text, The Social Psychology
of Organizations.
(7.) McCreary, Gamman, and Brooks (2001) presented joint fact-finding procedures for
integrating scientific expertise in complex public policy disputes. This joint fact-finding process
represents further progress by ECR practitioners in integrating A&D processes within
established consensus-building methods.
Page 62 of 62